A9155 - V6.6 - User Manual

User Manual
A9155
V6.6
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA
About The A9155 User Manual
The A9155 User Manual is a guide and reference for users working with A9155. While many of the features in A9155 are
easy to use, self-explanatory and aided by easy navigation, this User Manual helps the user make effective and efficient
use of all the features that A9155 offers. This document is aimed at familiarising the user with the working environment of
A9155 and enabling him to operate and use all of A9155s features and functionalities.
The A9155 User Manual consists of the following sections:
Working environment: The working environment of A9155, including the icons and buttons available in various
toolbars, is described.
Starting a new project: The process of starting a new project, whether from a database or as a stand-alone doc-
ument, is explained.
Data: Managing geographic data and radio network data within A9155 is explained.
Calculation: Calculation features, propagation models and calculation tools are described.
Technology modules: Each technology module is explained separately, i.e., GSM GPRS EGPRS and AFP,
UMTS HSPA, cdmaOne IS-95 and CDMA2000, WiMAX, TD-SCDMA, and Microwave links.
Copyright 2007 by Alcatel-Lucent Romania.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without
written authorisation from Alcatel-Lucent.
Alcatel-Lucent Romania acknowledges all trademarks mentioned in this document.
Notice
The A9155 software and the program documentation are intended for use by experienced personnel in the fields of trans-
mission engineering and communication system design. Additional reference material, in particular the referenced CCIR,
ETSI, and 3GPP recommendations and reports may be required for a complete understanding of some aspects of the
program.
Restrictions to the License
The software and materials delivered with the A9155 system contain copyrighted material, trade secrets, and other pro-
prietary material and in order to protect them you may not decompile, reverse engineer, disassemble or otherwise reduce
the A9155 software to a human-perceivable form. You may not modify, network, rent, lease, loan, distribute or create de-
rivative works based upon the software and materials in whole or in part. You may not electronically transmit the A9155
software from one computer to another or over a network.
Limited Warranty
Use of the A9155 software acknowledges this statement of limited warranty. With respect to the physical disks and phys-
ical documentation, Alcatel-Lucent Romania warrants these to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a pe-
riod of ninety days from the date of delivery. Alcatel-Lucent Romania disclaims all other warranties, expressed or implied
including the fitness of the program for any purpose. Alcatel-Lucent Romania assumes no liability for damages, direct or
consequential, loss of profit or other similar claims.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 3

A9155 User Manual
4 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 5
A9155 User Manual
6 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 The Working Environment .................................................................................................... 25

1.1 The A9155 Work Area................................................................................................................ 25
1.1.1 Working with Document Windows .................................................................................................... 26
1.1.2 Docking or Floating an A9155 Window ............................................................................................ 26
1.2 The Explorer Window ................................................................................................................. 27
1.2.1 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs.......................................................................................... 27
1.2.2 Navigating in the Explorer Window .................................................................................................. 28
1.2.3 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer........................................................... 28
1.2.4 Working with Layers Using the Explorer .......................................................................................... 28
1.3 Working with Objects .................................................................................................................. 29
1.3.1 Using the Object Context Menu ....................................................................................................... 29
1.3.1.1 Renaming an Object ................................................................................................................... 29
1.3.1.2 Deleting an Object ...................................................................................................................... 29
1.3.1.3 Displaying the Properties of an Object ....................................................................................... 29
1.3.2 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map ..................................................................... 30
1.3.2.1 Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links ....................................................... 30
1.3.2.2 Moving a Site Using the Mouse .................................................................................................. 31
1.3.2.3 Moving a Site to a Higher Location............................................................................................. 31
1.3.2.4 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse ............................................................ 32
1.3.2.5 Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site .................................................... 32
1.3.3 Display Properties of Objects ........................................................................................................... 33
1.3.3.1 Defining the Display Properties of Objects ................................................................................. 33
1.3.3.2 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects ................................................................ 36
1.4 Working with Maps....................................................................................................................... 38
1.4.1 Changing the Map Scale .................................................................................................................. 38
1.4.1.1 Zooming In and Out .................................................................................................................... 38
1.4.1.2 Zooming In on a Specific Area.................................................................................................... 38
1.4.1.3 Choosing a Scale........................................................................................................................ 38
1.4.1.4 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels................................................................................. 38
1.4.2 Moving the Map in the Document Window....................................................................................... 39
1.4.3 Using the Panoramic Window .......................................................................................................... 39
1.4.4 Centring the Map Window on an Object........................................................................................... 39
1.4.5 Measuring Distances on the Map..................................................................................................... 39
1.4.6 Displaying Rulers Around the Map................................................................................................... 40
1.4.7 Displaying the Map Legend.............................................................................................................. 40
1.4.8 Using Zones in the Map Window...................................................................................................... 40
1.4.8.1 Using a Filtering Zone................................................................................................................. 41
1.4.8.2 Using a Computation Zone ......................................................................................................... 41
1.4.8.3 Using a Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones ..................................................................................... 42
1.4.8.4 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools.............................................................................................. 42
1.4.8.5 Using a Printing Zone ................................................................................................................. 44
1.4.8.6 Using a Coverage Export Zone .................................................................................................. 45
1.4.9 Exporting a Map ............................................................................................................................... 47
1.4.10 Copying a Map to Another Application ............................................................................................. 47
1.4.11 Map Window Pointers ...................................................................................................................... 47
1.5 Working with Data Tables ........................................................................................................ 48
1.5.1 Opening a Data Table ...................................................................................................................... 49
1.5.2 Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields .............................................................................. 49
1.5.2.1 Accessing the Table Tab of an Object Types Properties dialogue ............................................ 49
1.5.2.2 Adding a Field to an Object Types Data Table .......................................................................... 49
1.5.2.3 Deleting a Field from an Object Types Data Table .................................................................... 50
1.5.3 Editing the Content of a Table.......................................................................................................... 50
1.5.4 Opening an Objects Record Properties Dialogue from a Table ...................................................... 51
1.5.5 Defining the Table Format................................................................................................................ 51
1.5.6 Copying and Pasting in Tables......................................................................................................... 54
1.5.7 Exporting Tables to External Files.................................................................................................... 55
1.5.8 Importing Tables from External Files................................................................................................ 56
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 7

A9155 User Manual
1.6 Printing in A9155 ...........................................................................................................................57

1.6.1 Printing Data Tables and Reports .....................................................................................................58
1.6.2 Printing a Map ...................................................................................................................................58
1.6.2.1 Printing Recommendations .........................................................................................................58
1.6.2.2 Defining the Printing Zone...........................................................................................................59
1.6.2.3 Defining the Print Layout .............................................................................................................59
1.6.3 Previewing Your Printing...................................................................................................................60
1.6.4 Printing a Docking Window ...............................................................................................................60
1.6.5 Printing Antenna Patterns .................................................................................................................61
1.7 Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data..................................................................................61
1.7.1 Grouping Data Objects......................................................................................................................61
1.7.1.1 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property ..........................................................................62
1.7.1.2 Configuring the Group By Submenu ...........................................................................................62
1.7.1.3 Advanced Grouping.....................................................................................................................63
1.7.1.4 Examples of Grouping.................................................................................................................63
1.7.2 Sorting Data ......................................................................................................................................64
1.7.2.1 Sorting Data in Tables.................................................................................................................65
1.7.2.2 Advanced Sorting ........................................................................................................................65
1.7.3 Filtering Data.....................................................................................................................................66
1.7.3.1 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection...........................................................................................66
1.7.3.2 Advanced Data Filtering ..............................................................................................................67
1.7.3.3 Restoring All Records..................................................................................................................68
1.7.3.4 Advanced Filtering: Examples .....................................................................................................68
1.7.4 User Configurations ..........................................................................................................................70
1.7.4.1 Exporting a User Configuration ...................................................................................................71
1.7.4.2 Importing a User Configuration ...................................................................................................71
1.7.5 Folder Configurations........................................................................................................................71
1.7.5.1 Creating a Folder Configuration ..................................................................................................72
1.7.5.2 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration.......................................................................................72
1.7.5.3 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration ..............................................................................72
1.7.5.4 Exporting a Folder Configuration.................................................................................................72
1.7.5.5 Importing a Folder Configuration.................................................................................................73
1.7.5.6 Deleting a Folder Configuration...................................................................................................73
1.7.6 Creating and Comparing Subfolders.................................................................................................73
1.7.7 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone.................................................................................................74
1.8 Tips and Tricks ...............................................................................................................................74
1.8.1 Undoing and Redoing .......................................................................................................................74
1.8.2 Refreshing Maps and Folders ...........................................................................................................74
1.8.3 Searching for Objects on the Map.....................................................................................................74
1.8.3.1 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name ....................................................................................74
1.8.3.2 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property .................................................................75
1.8.3.3 Searching for a Point on the Map................................................................................................75
1.8.4 Using the Status Bar to Get Information ...........................................................................................76
1.8.5 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer ...........................................................................76
1.8.6 Using Icons from the Toolbar ............................................................................................................76
1.8.7 Using Shortcuts in A9155..................................................................................................................78
2 Starting an A9155 Project ......................................................................................................81

2.1 Before Starting a Radio-Planning Project .........................................................................81
2.2 Creating an A9155 Document.................................................................................................81
2.2.1 Creating a New A9155 Document From a Template ........................................................................81
2.2.1.1 Templates Available ....................................................................................................................81
2.2.1.2 Creating a New A9155 Document From a Template ..................................................................82
2.2.1.3 Defining a New A9155 Document ...............................................................................................83
2.2.2 Working in a Multi-User Environment................................................................................................85
2.2.2.1 The A9155 Multi-User Environment ............................................................................................86
2.2.2.2 Creating a New A9155 Document From a Database ..................................................................87
2.2.2.3 Working With a Document on a Database ..................................................................................88
2.2.2.4 Refreshing an A9155 Document From the Database .................................................................89
2.2.2.5 Archiving the Modifications of an A9155 Document in the Database..........................................90
2.3 Making a Backup of Your Document ...................................................................................92
2.3.1 Configuring Autosave........................................................................................................................92
2.3.2 Recovering a Backup ........................................................................................................................93
8 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Table of Contents
3 Managing Geographic Data ................................................................................................ 97

3.1 Geographic Data Types ............................................................................................................ 97
3.2 Supported Geographic Data Formats ................................................................................ 98
3.3 Importing Geo Data Files .......................................................................................................... 99
3.3.1 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File ......................................................................................... 99
3.3.2 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File ....................................................................................... 100
3.3.3 Importing MSI Planet Geo Data................................................................................................... 101
3.3.3.1 Importing One MSI Planet Geo Data Type ............................................................................ 101
3.3.3.2 Importing a MSI Planet Geo Database .................................................................................. 102
3.3.4 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders............................................................................................... 103
3.3.5 Embedding Geographic Data ......................................................................................................... 103
3.3.6 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File................................................................................... 103
3.4 Digital Terrain Models .............................................................................................................. 104
3.5 Clutter Classes............................................................................................................................. 104
3.5.1 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes .............................................................................................. 105
3.5.2 Defining Clutter Class Properties ................................................................................................... 105
3.5.3 Adding a Clutter Class.................................................................................................................... 106
3.5.4 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes ............................................................................................ 106
3.5.5 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class ............................................................................ 107
3.6 Clutter Heights ............................................................................................................................. 107
3.7 Contours, Lines, and Points .................................................................................................. 107
3.7.1 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer ........................................................................................ 107
3.7.2 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer ................................................................................. 108
3.7.3 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab.......................................................................................... 108
3.8 Scanned Images ......................................................................................................................... 109
3.8.1 Importing Several Scanned Images ............................................................................................... 109
3.8.2 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images ...................................................................... 109
3.9 Population Maps ......................................................................................................................... 110
3.9.1 Managing the Display of Population Data ...................................................................................... 110
3.9.2 Displaying Population Statistics ..................................................................................................... 110
3.10 Rain Maps ...................................................................................................................................... 110
3.10.1 Managing Rain Map Properties ...................................................................................................... 111
3.10.2 Displaying Rain Statistics ............................................................................................................... 111
3.11 Custom Geo Data Maps.......................................................................................................... 111
3.11.1 Creating a Custom Geo Data Map ................................................................................................. 112
3.11.2 Adding a File to a Custom Geo Data Map...................................................................................... 113
3.11.3 Managing the Properties of a Custom Geo Data Map ................................................................... 113
3.11.4 Displaying Statistics on Custom Geo Data..................................................................................... 114
3.11.5 Integrable Versus Non Integrable Data .......................................................................................... 114
3.12 Setting the Priority of Geo Data........................................................................................... 114
3.12.1 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data......................................................................................... 114
3.12.2 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations ............................................................................. 115
3.13 Displaying Information About Geo Data .......................................................................... 116
3.14 Geographic Data Sets .............................................................................................................. 116
3.14.1 Exporting a Geo Data Set .............................................................................................................. 116
3.14.2 Importing a Geo Data Set............................................................................................................... 117
3.15 Editing Geographic Data ......................................................................................................... 117
3.15.1 Editing Clutter Class Maps ............................................................................................................. 117
3.15.1.1 Creating a Clutter Polygon........................................................................................................ 117
3.15.1.2 Editing Clutter Polygons ........................................................................................................... 118
3.15.1.3 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons ....................................................................... 118
3.15.1.4 Deleting Clutter Polygons ......................................................................................................... 118
3.15.2 Editing Contours, Lines, and Points ............................................................................................... 118
3.15.2.1 Creating a Vector Layer for Contours, Lines, and Points ......................................................... 119
3.15.2.2 Creating Contours, Lines, and Points ....................................................................................... 119
3.15.2.3 Editing Contours, Lines, and Points.......................................................................................... 119
3.15.3 Editing Population, Rain, or Custom Data Maps ............................................................................ 121
3.15.3.1 Creating a Vector Layer and Vector Objects ............................................................................ 121
3.15.3.2 Editing Contours on the Vector Layer....................................................................................... 122
3.16 Saving Geographic Data ......................................................................................................... 124
3.16.1 Saving Modifications to an External File ........................................................................................ 124
3.16.1.1 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File ............................................... 124
3.16.1.2 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File .......................................................... 125
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 9

A9155 User Manual
3.16.2 Updating the Source File.................................................................................................................126

3.16.3 Combining Several Files into One File............................................................................................126
3.16.4 Exporting an Embedded File...........................................................................................................126
3.16.5 Creating a New File From a Larger File ..........................................................................................127
4 Managing Calculations in A9155 ...................................................................................131

4.1 Working with Propagation Models ......................................................................................131
4.1.1 Propagation Model Characteristics: Overview ................................................................................131
4.1.2 The Standard Propagation Model ...................................................................................................131
4.1.2.1 Recommendations for Working with the Standard Propagation Model .....................................132
4.1.2.2 Calculating Diffraction With the SPM ........................................................................................133
4.1.2.3 Sample Values for SPM Formulas ............................................................................................133
4.1.2.4 Calculating f(clutter) with the Standard Propagation Model ......................................................134
4.1.2.5 Modelling Fixed Receivers ........................................................................................................134
4.1.2.6 Defining the Parameters of the Standard Propagation Model ...................................................134
4.1.3 The Okumura-Hata Propagation Model ..........................................................................................137
4.1.3.1 Defining General Settings (Okumura-Hata) ..............................................................................137
4.1.3.2 Selecting an Environment Formula (Okumura-Hata) ................................................................137
4.1.3.3 Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Okumura-Hata) ................................................138
4.1.4 The Cost-Hata Propagation Model..................................................................................................138
4.1.4.1 Defining General Settings (Cost-Hata) ......................................................................................138
4.1.4.2 Selecting an Environment Formula (Cost-Hata)........................................................................138
4.1.4.3 Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Cost-Hata) .......................................................139
4.1.5 The ITU 529-3 Propagation Model..................................................................................................139
4.1.5.1 Defining General Settings (ITU 529-3) ......................................................................................139
4.1.5.2 Selecting an Environment Formula (ITU 529-3) ........................................................................139
4.1.5.3 Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (ITU 529-3)........................................................140
4.1.7 The Erceg-Greenstein Propagation Model......................................................................................141
4.1.7.1 Defining General Settings (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI)) ................................................................141
4.1.7.2 Selecting an Environment Formula (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI)) ..................................................141
4.1.7.3 Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI)) ..................................141
4.1.9 The WLL Propagation Model ..........................................................................................................142
4.1.10 The Longley-Rice Propagation Model.............................................................................................143
4.1.11 Working with the WinProp-ProMan Model ......................................................................................143
4.1.11.1 Physical Background on Urban Propagation Models ................................................................143
4.1.11.2 Required Databases..................................................................................................................143
4.1.11.3 COST 231 Walfisch-Ikegami .....................................................................................................144
4.1.11.4 Intelligent Ray Tracing...............................................................................................................144
4.1.11.5 Specular Reflection ...................................................................................................................144
4.1.11.6 Diffraction ..................................................................................................................................144
4.1.11.7 Multiple Diffraction.....................................................................................................................145
4.1.11.8 Scattering ..................................................................................................................................145
4.1.11.9 Penetration ................................................................................................................................145
4.1.11.10 Ray Tracing ...............................................................................................................................145
4.1.11.11 Working with the WinProp-ProMan Model: Quick Start.............................................................145
4.1.11.12 Working with the WinProp-ProMan Model: Important Hints ......................................................148
4.1.12 Managing Propagation Models .......................................................................................................149
4.2 Defining Calculation Parameters .........................................................................................149
4.2.1 Defining Calculation Parameters for One Transmitter ....................................................................150
4.2.2 Defining the Same Calculation Parameters for a Group of Transmitters ........................................150
4.2.3 Defining the Same Calculation Parameters for All Transmitters .....................................................151
4.2.4 Defining a Default Propagation Model ............................................................................................151
4.2.5 Defining a Default Resolution..........................................................................................................151
4.3 Managing Path Loss Matrices...............................................................................................152
4.3.1 Calculating Path Loss Matrices.......................................................................................................152
4.3.2 Stopping Path Loss Matrix Calculation ...........................................................................................152
4.3.3 Setting the Storage Location of Path Loss Matrices .......................................................................152
4.3.4 Using Centralised Path Loss Matrices ............................................................................................153
4.3.5 Checking the Validity of Path Loss Matrices ...................................................................................153
4.3.6 Exporting Path Loss Matrices .........................................................................................................154
4.4 Predictions Available in A9155 .............................................................................................154
4.4.1 Making Point Predictions.................................................................................................................155
4.4.1.1 Starting a Point Analysis ...........................................................................................................155
4.4.1.2 The Tabs of the Point Analysis Tool Window ............................................................................155
10 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Table of Contents
4.4.1.3 Moving the Receiver on the Map .............................................................................................. 156

4.4.1.4 Taking Indoor Losses into Account........................................................................................... 156
4.4.1.5 Taking Shadowing into Account in Point Analyses................................................................... 156
4.4.2 Making Coverage Predictions ........................................................................................................ 157
4.4.2.1 Creating Coverage Predictions................................................................................................. 157
4.4.2.2 Calculating Coverage Predictions............................................................................................. 158
4.4.2.3 Saving Defined Coverage Predictions ...................................................................................... 160
4.4.2.4 Calculating Indoor Coverage .................................................................................................... 161
4.4.2.5 Taking Shadowing into Account ............................................................................................... 161
5 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks .......................................................................................... 165

5.1 Designing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network ....................................................................... 165
5.2 Planning and Optimising GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base Stations ................................ 166
5.2.1 Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base Station .................................................................................. 166
5.2.1.1 Definition of a Base Station ...................................................................................................... 167
5.2.1.2 Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element ......................................................................... 174
5.2.1.3 Placing a New Station Using a Station Template ..................................................................... 176
5.2.1.4 Managing Station Templates .................................................................................................... 177
5.2.2 Creating a Group of Base Stations................................................................................................. 180
5.2.3 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map ................................................................... 180
5.2.4 Display Hints for Base Stations ...................................................................................................... 180
5.2.5 Modelling Packet-switched Transmitters........................................................................................ 181
5.2.6 Creating a Repeater ....................................................................................................................... 181
5.2.6.1 Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment........................................................................... 181
5.2.6.2 Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse .................................................................... 182
5.2.6.3 Creating Several Repeaters ..................................................................................................... 182
5.2.6.4 Defining the Properties of a Repeater ...................................................................................... 182
5.2.6.5 Hints for Updating Repeater Parameters.................................................................................. 183
5.2.7 Creating a Remote Antenna........................................................................................................... 184
5.2.7.1 Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse ........................................................ 184
5.2.7.2 Creating Several Remote Antennas ......................................................................................... 184
5.2.7.3 Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna .......................................................................... 184
5.2.7.4 Hints for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters ..................................................................... 185
5.2.8 Setting the Working Area of an A9155 Document.......................................................................... 185
5.2.9 Studying a Single Base Station ...................................................................................................... 186
5.2.9.1 Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile ............................................................................ 186
5.2.9.2 Studying Signal Level Coverage............................................................................................... 187
5.2.10 Studying Base Stations .................................................................................................................. 189
5.2.10.1 Path Loss Matrices ................................................................................................................... 190
5.2.10.2 Assigning a Propagation Model ................................................................................................ 192
5.2.10.3 The Calculation Process........................................................................................................... 194
5.2.10.4 Creating a Computation Zone................................................................................................... 194
5.2.10.5 Setting Transmitters as Active .................................................................................................. 195
5.2.10.6 Signal Level Coverage Predictions........................................................................................... 195
5.2.10.7 Analysing a Coverage Prediction.............................................................................................. 201
5.2.10.8 Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results................................................................ 208
5.2.11 Planning Neighbours ...................................................................................................................... 210
5.2.11.1 Importing Neighbours ............................................................................................................... 211
5.2.11.2 Defining Exceptional Pairs........................................................................................................ 211
5.2.11.3 Allocating Neighbours Automatically ........................................................................................ 211
5.2.11.4 Checking Automatic Allocation Results .................................................................................... 214
5.2.11.5 Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Transmitter ................................................................ 215
5.2.11.6 Calculating the Importance of Existing Neighbours .................................................................. 217
5.2.11.7 Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan.................................................... 218
5.2.11.8 Exporting Neighbours ............................................................................................................... 219
5.3 Studying Network Capacity ................................................................................................... 220
5.3.1 Defining Multi-service Traffic Data ................................................................................................. 220
5.3.2 Creating a Traffic Map.................................................................................................................... 220
5.3.2.1 Live Traffic Data From the OMC............................................................................................... 220
5.3.2.2 Marketing-based Traffic Data ................................................................................................... 221
5.3.2.3 Population-based Traffic Data .................................................................................................. 226
5.3.2.4 Converting 2G Network Traffic ................................................................................................. 226
5.3.2.5 Exporting Cumulated Traffic ..................................................................................................... 226
5.3.3 Calculating and Displaying a Traffic Capture ................................................................................. 227
5.3.3.1 Prerequisites for a Traffic Capture............................................................................................ 227
5.3.3.2 Creating a Traffic Capture ........................................................................................................ 227
5.3.3.3 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture Results ............................................................................. 228
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 11

A9155 User Manual
5.3.3.4 Estimating a Traffic Increase .....................................................................................................229

5.3.3.5 Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture........................................................................229
5.3.4 Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network..................................................................................230
5.3.4.1 Defining a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Dimensioning Model .................................................................230
5.3.4.2 Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network ............................................................................231
5.4 Allocating Frequencies and BSICs .....................................................................................234
5.4.1 Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Manually ..................................................................................234
5.4.1.1 Assigning BSIC Domains to Transmitters .................................................................................234
5.4.1.2 Assigning BSICs to Transmitters Manually ...............................................................................235
5.4.1.3 Defining Frequency Domains for Transmitters ..........................................................................235
5.4.1.4 Assigning Frequencies to Subcells ...........................................................................................236
5.4.2 Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Using an AFP Module..............................................................237
5.4.2.1 Prerequisites for an Automatic Frequency Allocation................................................................238
5.4.2.2 Interference Matrices.................................................................................................................238
5.4.2.3 Defining Required Channel Separations ...................................................................................242
5.4.2.4 Automatic Frequency Allocation................................................................................................244
5.5 Analysing Network Quality ......................................................................................................253
5.5.1 Interference Coverage Predictions..................................................................................................253
5.5.1.1 Making Quality Studies Based on CI or C(I+N)........................................................................253
5.5.1.2 Studying Interference Areas ......................................................................................................255
5.5.1.3 Analysing Interference Areas Using a Point Analysis ...............................................................257
5.5.1.4 Example of Analysing Interference Using a Point Analysis .......................................................258
5.5.2 Packet-Specific Coverage Predictions ............................................................................................259
5.5.2.1 Making a Coverage Prediction by GPRS/EGPRS Coding Schemes ........................................260
5.5.2.2 Making a Coverage Prediction by Packet Throughput per Timeslot .........................................261
5.5.2.3 Making a BLER Coverage Prediction........................................................................................264
5.5.3 Making a Circuit Quality Indicator (BER, FER, or MOS) Coverage Prediction ...............................266
5.5.4 Studying Interference Between Transmitters ..................................................................................268
5.5.5 Auditing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Frequency Plan ..............................................................................269
5.5.6 Checking Consistency Between Transmitters and Subcells ...........................................................271
5.5.7 Displaying the Frequency Allocation ...............................................................................................272
5.5.7.1 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse ....................................................................272
5.5.7.2 Displaying the Frequency Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings .................................273
5.5.7.3 Grouping Transmitters by Frequencies .....................................................................................274
5.5.7.4 Displaying the Channel Allocation Histogram ...........................................................................274
5.5.8 Calculating Key Performance Indicators of a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network ....................................274
5.6 Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity ...................................................................277
5.6.1 Importing a Test Mobile Data Path..................................................................................................277
5.6.2 Displaying Test Mobile Data ...........................................................................................................279
5.6.3 Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path.............................................................................279
5.6.4 Network Verification ........................................................................................................................280
5.6.4.1 Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths.....................................................280
5.6.4.2 Comparing Measurements with Predictions ..............................................................................281
5.6.4.3 Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter ...................................................283
5.6.4.4 Analysing Data Variations Along the Path.................................................................................283
5.6.5 Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window.....................................................................285
5.7 Advanced Configuration...........................................................................................................285
5.7.1 Defining Resource Ranges .............................................................................................................286
5.7.1.1 Frequencies...............................................................................................................................286
5.7.1.2 BSICs ........................................................................................................................................287
5.7.1.3 Defining HSN Domains and Groups..........................................................................................288
5.7.2 Setting HCS Layers.........................................................................................................................289
5.7.3 Cell Types .......................................................................................................................................290
5.7.3.1 TRX Types ................................................................................................................................290
5.7.3.2 Creating a Cell Type..................................................................................................................290
5.7.3.3 Examples of Cell Types.............................................................................................................291
5.7.4 TRX Equipment...............................................................................................................................293
5.7.4.1 Creating or Importing TRX Equipment ......................................................................................293
5.7.5 Codec Equipment............................................................................................................................293
5.7.5.1 Creating or Modifying Codec Equipment...................................................................................294
5.7.5.2 Setting Codec Mode Adaptation Thresholds.............................................................................294
5.7.5.3 Setting Codec Mode Quality Thresholds...................................................................................295
5.7.5.4 Using Codec Equipment in Transmitters and Terminals ...........................................................295
5.7.6 GPRS/EDGE Equipment.................................................................................................................296
5.7.6.1 Creating or Modifying GPRS/EDGE Equipment........................................................................296
5.7.6.2 Using GPRS/EDGE Equipment in Transmitters and Terminals ................................................297
5.7.6.3 Adapting Coding Scheme Thresholds for a Maximum BLER....................................................297
12 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Table of Contents
5.7.6.4 Displaying Coding Scheme Throughput Graphs ...................................................................... 297

5.7.7 Timeslot Configurations.................................................................................................................. 298
5.7.7.1 Creating or Modifying a Timeslot Configuration........................................................................ 298
5.7.8 Advanced Transmitter Configuration Options ................................................................................ 299
5.7.8.1 Defining Extended Cells ........................................................................................................... 299
5.7.8.2 Advanced Modelling of Multi-Band Transmitters ...................................................................... 299
5.7.9 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Multi-Service Traffic Data ............................................................................... 301
5.7.9.1 Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services .................................................................................... 302
5.7.9.2 Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types........................................................................... 302
5.7.9.3 Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals .................................................................................. 303
5.7.10 Defining the Interferer Reception Threshold .................................................................................. 304
5.7.11 Modelling Shadowing ..................................................................................................................... 304
5.7.11.1 Displaying the Shadowing Margins per Clutter Class............................................................... 305
6 UMTS HSPA Networks ......................................................................................................... 309

6.1 Designing a UMTS Network .................................................................................................. 309
6.2 Planning and Optimising UMTS Base Stations ........................................................... 310
6.2.1 Creating a UMTS Base Station ...................................................................................................... 311
6.2.1.1 Definition of a Base Station ...................................................................................................... 311
6.2.1.2 Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element ......................................................................... 316
6.2.1.3 Placing a New Station Using a Station Template ..................................................................... 317
6.2.1.4 Managing Station Templates .................................................................................................... 318
6.2.2 Creating a Group of Base Stations................................................................................................. 322
6.2.3 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map ................................................................... 323
6.2.3.1 Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site .................................................. 323
6.2.4 Display Hints for Base Stations ...................................................................................................... 323
6.2.5 Creating a Dual-Band UMTS Network ........................................................................................... 324
6.2.6 Creating a Repeater ....................................................................................................................... 324
6.2.10.5 Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active..................................................................................... 337
6.2.10.8 UMTS-Specific Studies............................................................................................................. 349
6.2.10.9 HSDPA Coverage Prediction.................................................................................................... 361
6.2.10.10 HSUPA Coverage Prediction.................................................................................................... 363
6.2.11.5 Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell ............................................................................ 371
6.2.12 Planning Scrambling Codes ........................................................................................................... 374
6.2.12.1 Defining the Scrambling Code Format...................................................................................... 374
6.2.12.2 Creating Scrambling Code Domains and Groups..................................................................... 375
6.2.12.3 Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation ..................................................... 375
6.2.12.4 Allocating Scrambling Codes.................................................................................................... 376
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 13

A9155 User Manual
6.2.12.5 Checking the Consistency of the Scrambling Code Plan ..........................................................378

6.2.12.6 Displaying the Allocation of Scrambling Codes .........................................................................378
6.3 Studying Network Capacity ....................................................................................................381
6.3.1 Defining Multi-service Traffic Data ..................................................................................................382
6.3.2 Creating a Traffic Map.....................................................................................................................382
6.3.2.1 Live Traffic Data From the OMC ...............................................................................................382
6.3.2.2 Marketing-based Traffic Data ....................................................................................................383
6.3.2.3 Population-based Traffic Data...................................................................................................388
6.3.2.4 Converting 2G Network Traffic ..................................................................................................388
6.3.2.5 Exporting Cumulated Traffic ......................................................................................................389
6.3.3 Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations ...............................................................................389
6.3.3.1 The Power Control Simulation Algorithm ..................................................................................389
6.3.3.2 Creating Simulations .................................................................................................................392
6.3.3.3 Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map...........................................................................394
6.3.3.4 Displaying the User Active Set on the Map ...............................................................................396
6.3.3.5 Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation ...........................................................................396
6.3.3.6 Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations .......................................................401
6.3.3.7 Updating Cell Values With Simulation Results ..........................................................................403
6.3.3.8 Adding New Simulations to an A9155 Document......................................................................404
6.3.4 Analysing the Results of a Simulation.............................................................................................405
6.3.4.1 Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results...........................................................................406
6.3.4.2 Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results ..........................................................406
6.4 Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity ...................................................................407
6.4.1 Importing a Test Mobile Data Path..................................................................................................407
6.4.2 Displaying Test Mobile Data ...........................................................................................................410
6.4.3 Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path.............................................................................410
6.4.4 Network Verification ........................................................................................................................411
6.4.4.1 Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths.....................................................411
6.4.4.2 Comparing Measurements with Predictions ..............................................................................412
6.4.4.3 Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter ...................................................413
6.5.1 Defining Inter-Carrier Interference ..................................................................................................416
6.5.2 Defining Frequency Bands..............................................................................................................416
6.5.3 The Global Transmitter Parameters................................................................................................417
6.5.3.1 The Options on the Global Parameters Tab..............................................................................417
6.5.3.2 Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters .................................................................................417
6.5.4 Radio Bearers .................................................................................................................................418
6.5.4.1 Defining R99 Radio Bearers......................................................................................................418
6.5.4.2 Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers ................................................................................................419
6.5.4.3 Defining HSUPA Radio Bearers ................................................................................................419
6.5.5 Site Equipment................................................................................................................................420
6.5.5.1 Creating Site Equipment ...........................................................................................................420
6.5.5.2 Defining Channel Element Consumption per UMTS Site Equipment and R99 Radio Bearer ...420
6.5.6 Receiver Equipment........................................................................................................................421
6.5.6.1 Setting Receiver Height.............................................................................................................421
6.5.6.2 Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment .............................................................................421
6.5.6.3 HSDPA UE Categories..............................................................................................................422
6.5.6.4 HSUPA UE Categories..............................................................................................................422
6.5.7 Conditions for Entering the Active Set ............................................................................................422
6.5.8 Modelling Shadowing ......................................................................................................................423
6.5.8.1 Displaying the Shadowing Margins and Macro-diversity Gain per Clutter Class ......................423
7 cdmaOne/CDMA2000 Networks ....................................................................................427

7.1 Planning and Optimising CDMA Base Stations ...........................................................427
7.1.1 Creating a CDMA Base Station.......................................................................................................428
7.1.1.1 Definition of a Base Station .......................................................................................................428
7.1.1.2 Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element..........................................................................433
7.1.1.3 Placing a New Station Using a Station Template......................................................................434
7.1.1.4 Managing Station Templates.....................................................................................................435
7.1.2 Creating a Group of Base Stations .................................................................................................439
7.1.3 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map....................................................................440
7.1.4 Display Hints for Base Stations.......................................................................................................440
7.1.5 Creating a Repeater........................................................................................................................440
14 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Table of Contents

7.1.9.5 Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active..................................................................................... 455
7.1.9.8 CDMA-Specific Coverage Predictions ...................................................................................... 466
7.1.10.5 Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell ............................................................................ 489
7.1.11 Planning PN Offsets ....................................................................................................................... 492
7.1.11.1 Creating PN Offset Domains and Groups................................................................................. 492
7.1.11.2 Defining Exceptional Pairs for PN Offset Allocation ................................................................. 493
7.1.11.3 Allocating PN Offsets................................................................................................................ 493
7.1.11.4 Checking the Consistency of the PN Offset Plan ..................................................................... 495
7.1.11.5 Displaying the Allocation of PN Offsets .................................................................................... 495
7.2.2.2 Marketing-based Traffic Data ................................................................................................... 500
7.2.2.3 Population-based Traffic Data .................................................................................................. 504
7.2.3 Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations .............................................................................. 505
7.2.3.1 The Power Control Simulation Algorithm.................................................................................. 505
7.2.3.2 Creating Simulations................................................................................................................. 508
7.2.3.3 Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map .......................................................................... 510
7.2.3.4 Displaying the User Active Set on the Map .............................................................................. 512
7.2.3.5 Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation .......................................................................... 512
7.2.3.6 Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations ...................................................... 516
7.2.3.7 Updating Cell Values With Simulation Results ......................................................................... 518
7.2.3.8 Adding New Simulations to an A9155 Document ..................................................................... 518
7.2.3.9 Estimating a Traffic Increase .................................................................................................... 520
7.2.4 Analysing the Results of a Simulation ............................................................................................ 520
7.2.4.1 Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results .......................................................................... 520
7.2.4.2 Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results.......................................................... 521
7.3 Verifying and Optimising Network Quality ...................................................................... 522
7.3.1 Importing a Test Mobile Data Path................................................................................................. 522
7.3.2 Displaying Test Mobile Data........................................................................................................... 524
7.3.3 Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path ............................................................................ 524
7.3.4 Network Verification ....................................................................................................................... 525
7.3.4.1 Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths .................................................... 525
7.3.4.2 Refreshing Geo Data for Test Mobile Data............................................................................... 527
7.3.4.3 Comparing Measurements with Predictions ............................................................................. 527
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 15

A9155 User Manual
7.3.4.4 Extracting Data From a Test Mobile Path for a Selected Transmitter .......................................528
7.4.1 Defining Inter-Carrier Interference ..................................................................................................530
7.4.3 Data Rates Available for Services in CDMA ...................................................................................532
7.4.4 Defining the 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearers .................................................................................533
7.4.5 Site Equipment................................................................................................................................533
7.4.5.1 Creating Site Equipment ...........................................................................................................533
7.4.5.2 Defining Channel Element Consumption per CDMA Site Equipment and Radio Configuration534
7.4.6 Receiver Equipment........................................................................................................................534
7.4.6.1 Setting Receiver Height.............................................................................................................534
7.4.7 Conditions for Entering the Active Set ............................................................................................534
7.4.8.1 Displaying the Shadowing Margins and Macro-diversity Gain per Clutter Class ......................535
8 TD-SCDMA Networks .............................................................................................................539

8.1 Planning and Optimising TD-SCDMA Base Stations ................................................539
8.1.1 Creating a TD-SCDMA Base Station ..............................................................................................539
8.1.1.3 Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template.............................................................546
8.1.5 Creating a Dual-Band TD-SCDMA Network ...................................................................................552
8.1.6 Creating a Repeater........................................................................................................................552
8.1.6.1 Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment ...........................................................................552
8.1.6.2 Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse.....................................................................552
8.1.6.3 Creating Several Repeaters ......................................................................................................553
8.1.6.4 Defining the Properties of a Repeater .......................................................................................553
8.1.6.5 Hints for Updating Repeater Parameters ..................................................................................554
8.1.7 Creating a Remote Antenna............................................................................................................555
8.1.7.1 Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse.........................................................555
8.1.7.2 Creating Several Remote Antennas..........................................................................................555
8.1.7.3 Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna...........................................................................555
8.1.7.4 Hints for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters ......................................................................556
8.1.8 Setting the Working Area of an A9155 Document ..........................................................................556
8.1.9 Studying a Single Base Station.......................................................................................................557
8.1.9.1 Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile.............................................................................557
8.1.9.2 Studying Signal Level Coverage ...............................................................................................560
8.1.10 Studying Base Stations ...................................................................................................................562
8.1.10.1 Path Loss Matrices ....................................................................................................................562
8.1.10.2 The Calculation Process ...........................................................................................................564
8.1.10.3 Creating a Computation Zone ...................................................................................................564
8.1.10.4 Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active .....................................................................................565
8.1.10.5 Signal Level Coverage Predictions ...........................................................................................565
8.1.10.6 Analysing a Coverage Prediction ..............................................................................................572
8.1.10.7 Signal Quality Coverage Predictions .........................................................................................579
8.1.10.8 HSDPA Coverage Prediction ....................................................................................................595
8.1.10.9 Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results ................................................................596
8.1.11 Planning Frequencies .....................................................................................................................598
8.1.11.1 Setting Up N-Frequency Mode..................................................................................................599
8.1.11.2 Allocating Frequencies Automatically........................................................................................599
8.1.11.3 Checking Automatic Allocation Results .....................................................................................599
8.1.11.4 Allocating Carrier Types per Transmitter...................................................................................600
8.1.11.5 Checking the Consistency of the Frequency Allocation Plan ....................................................600
8.1.12 Planning Neighbours.......................................................................................................................600
8.1.12.1 Defining Exceptional Pairs ........................................................................................................601
8.1.12.2 Allocating Neighbours Automatically .........................................................................................601
8.1.12.3 Checking Automatic Allocation Results .....................................................................................604
8.1.12.4 Importing Neighbours ................................................................................................................606
8.1.12.5 Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell .............................................................................606
16 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Table of Contents

8.1.13 Planning Scrambling Codes ........................................................................................................... 609
8.1.13.1 Defining the Scrambling Code Format...................................................................................... 609
8.1.13.2 Creating Scrambling Code Domains and Groups..................................................................... 610
8.1.13.3 Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation ..................................................... 610
8.1.13.4 Allocating Scrambling Codes.................................................................................................... 610
8.1.13.5 Checking the Consistency of the Scrambling Code Plan ......................................................... 613
8.1.13.6 Displaying the Allocation of Scrambling Codes ........................................................................ 613
8.2.1 TD-SCDMA Network Capacity ....................................................................................................... 617
8.2.1.1 Calculating Available Network Capacity ................................................................................... 617
8.2.1.2 Calculating Required Network Capacity ................................................................................... 618
8.2.3.2 Marketing-Based Traffic Data ................................................................................................... 623
8.2.3.3 Population-Based Traffic Data.................................................................................................. 627
8.2.4 Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations .............................................................................. 628
8.2.4.1 The Monte Carlo Simulation Algorithm ..................................................................................... 628
8.2.4.2 Creating Simulations................................................................................................................. 630
8.2.4.3 Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map .......................................................................... 631
8.2.4.4 Displaying the User Best Server on the Map............................................................................ 633
8.2.4.5 Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation .......................................................................... 633
8.2.4.6 Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations ...................................................... 636
8.2.4.7 Updating Cell and Timeslot Values With Simulation Results.................................................... 637
8.2.4.8 Adding New Simulations to an A9155 Document ..................................................................... 638
8.2.4.9 Estimating a Traffic Increase .................................................................................................... 640
8.2.5 Analysing the Results of a Simulation ............................................................................................ 640
8.2.5.1 Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results.......................................................... 640
8.3 Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity .................................................................. 641
8.3.1 Importing a Test Mobile Data Path................................................................................................. 641
8.3.2 Displaying Test Mobile Data........................................................................................................... 643
8.3.3 Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path ............................................................................ 643
8.3.4 Network Verification ....................................................................................................................... 644
8.3.4.1 Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths .................................................... 644
8.3.4.2 Comparing Measurements with Predictions ............................................................................. 646
8.3.4.3 Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter .................................................. 647
8.3.4.4 Analysing Data Variations Along the Path ................................................................................ 647
8.3.5 Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window .................................................................... 649
8.4 Advanced Configuration .......................................................................................................... 649
8.4.1 Defining Inter-Carrier Interference.................................................................................................. 649
8.4.2 Defining Frequency Bands ............................................................................................................. 650
8.4.3 The Global Transmitter Parameters ............................................................................................... 650
8.4.3.1 The Options on the Global Parameters Tab ............................................................................. 650
8.4.3.2 Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters ................................................................................ 651
8.4.4 Smart Antenna Modelling ............................................................................................................... 652
8.4.4.1 Types of Smart Antenna Modelling........................................................................................... 652
8.4.4.2 Smart Antenna Equipment........................................................................................................ 654
8.4.5 Radio Bearers ................................................................................................................................ 656
8.4.5.1 Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers ............................................................................................... 656
8.4.6 Site Equipment ............................................................................................................................... 656
8.4.6.1 Creating Site Equipment........................................................................................................... 656
8.4.7 Reception Equipment ..................................................................................................................... 656
8.4.7.1 Setting Receiver Height ............................................................................................................ 656
8.4.7.2 Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment ............................................................................ 657
8.4.7.3 HSDPA User Equipment Categories ........................................................................................ 657
8.4.8 Modelling Shadowing ..................................................................................................................... 658
8.4.8.1 Displaying the Shadowing Margins........................................................................................... 658
8.4.9 Maximum System Range ............................................................................................................... 659
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 17

A9155 User Manual
9 WiMAX BWA Networks..........................................................................................................663

9.1 Planning and Optimising WiMAX Base Stations .........................................................663
9.1.1 Creating a WiMAX Base Station .....................................................................................................664
9.1.1.3 Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template.............................................................669
9.1.5 Creating a Multi-Band WiMAX Network ..........................................................................................674
9.1.6 Setting the Working Area of an A9155 Document ..........................................................................674
9.1.7 Studying a Single Base Station.......................................................................................................675
9.1.7.1 Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile.............................................................................675
9.1.7.2 Studying Signal Level Coverage ...............................................................................................678
9.1.8 Studying Base Stations ...................................................................................................................680
9.1.8.1 Path Loss Matrices ....................................................................................................................681
9.1.8.2 The Calculation Process ...........................................................................................................682
9.1.8.3 Creating a Computation Zone ...................................................................................................682
9.1.8.4 Setting Transmitters as Active...................................................................................................683
9.1.8.5 Signal Level Coverage Predictions ...........................................................................................683
9.1.8.6 Analysing a Coverage Prediction ..............................................................................................688
9.1.8.7 WiMAX-Specific Coverage Predictions .....................................................................................695
9.1.8.8 Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results ................................................................704
9.1.9 Planning Neighbours.......................................................................................................................706
9.1.9.1 Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell .............................................................................706
9.1.9.2 Importing Neighbours ................................................................................................................708
9.1.9.3 Checking Neighbour Allocation .................................................................................................708
9.1.9.4 Exporting Neighbours................................................................................................................709
9.2 Studying Network Capacity ....................................................................................................710
9.2.1 Defining Multi-service Traffic Data ..................................................................................................710
9.2.2 Creating a Traffic Map.....................................................................................................................710
9.2.2.1 Live Traffic Data From the OMC ...............................................................................................711
9.2.2.2 Marketing-Based Traffic Data....................................................................................................712
9.2.2.3 Population-Based Traffic Data ..................................................................................................716
9.2.2.4 Converting 2G Network Traffic ..................................................................................................717
9.2.2.5 Exporting Cumulated Traffic ......................................................................................................717
9.2.3 Exporting a Traffic Map ...................................................................................................................717
9.2.4 Subscriber Database.......................................................................................................................718
9.2.4.1 Creating a Subscriber List .........................................................................................................718
9.2.4.2 Performing Calculations on Subscriber lists..............................................................................721
9.2.5 Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations ...............................................................................722
9.2.5.1 WiMAX Traffic Simulation Algorithm .........................................................................................722
9.2.5.2 Creating Simulations .................................................................................................................723
9.2.5.3 Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map...........................................................................724
9.2.5.4 Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation ...........................................................................728
9.2.5.5 Updating Cell Load Values With Simulation Results .................................................................730
9.3.1 Defining Frequency Bands..............................................................................................................731
9.3.3 Defining Frame Configurations .......................................................................................................733
9.3.4 Defining WiMAX Radio Bearers ......................................................................................................734
9.3.5 Defining WiMAX Quality Indicators .................................................................................................735
9.3.6 Defining WiMAX Reception Equipment...........................................................................................735
9.3.7 Defining Smart Antenna Equipment................................................................................................737
9.3.8 Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems...........................................................................................738
9.3.8.1 Defining MIMO Configurations ..................................................................................................739
9.3.9.1 Displaying the Shadowing Margins per Clutter Class ...............................................................741
9.4 Tips and Tricks .............................................................................................................................741
9.5 Glossary of WiMAX Terms .....................................................................................................748
18 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Table of Contents
10 Co-planning Features ............................................................................................................. 753

10.1 Starting a Co-planning Project ............................................................................................. 753
10.2 GSM-UMTS Co-planning Process ..................................................................................... 753
10.2.1 Displaying Both Networks in the Same A9155 Document ............................................................. 754
10.2.2 Creating a UMTS Sector From a GSM Sector ............................................................................... 754
10.2.2.1 Synchronising Shared Common Physical Parameters ............................................................. 755
10.2.3 Comparing GSM-UMTS Coverage Predictions .............................................................................. 756
10.2.4 Performing Inter-Technology Neighbour Allocation........................................................................ 757
10.2.4.1 Setting Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs.............................................................................. 758
10.2.4.2 Displaying Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs on the Map ..................................................... 758
10.2.4.3 Allocating Inter-Technology Neighbours Manually ................................................................... 760
10.2.4.4 Allocating Inter-Technology Neighbours Automatically ............................................................ 760
10.2.4.5 Displaying Inter-Technology Neighbours on the Map............................................................... 761
10.3 Tips and Tricks............................................................................................................................. 763
10.3.1 Minimising Memory Consumption .................................................................................................. 763
11 Importing and Exporting ALCATEL-Specific Data .......................................... 767

11.1 Importing and Exporting ALCATEL-Specific Data: Overview ............................... 767
11.2 Measurement Files .................................................................................................................... 767
11.2.1 Importing Analogue Measurement Files......................................................................................... 767
11.2.2 Importing Digital Measurement Files.............................................................................................. 767
11.3 Antenna Data ................................................................................................................................ 768
11.3.1 Importing New Alcatel Antennas into an Existing Network............................................................. 768
11.4 CAE Data ........................................................................................................................................ 768
11.4.1 Importing CAE Data in an Existing Project ..................................................................................... 769
11.4.2 Exporting CAE Data from the Current Project ................................................................................ 769
12 Microwave Link Project Management ....................................................................... 773

12.1 Microwave Link Project Management: Overview ........................................................ 773
12.2 Microwave Links Projects Protocol .................................................................................... 773
12.3 Global Microwave Link Parameters ................................................................................... 774
12.3.1 Managing Microwave Links Frequency Bands............................................................................... 774
12.3.2 Managing Microwave Links Frequency Sub-Bands ....................................................................... 775
12.4 Microwave Links Classes and Performance Objectives ......................................... 775
12.4.1 Managing Microwave Links Classes .............................................................................................. 775
12.4.2 Microwave Links Performance Objectives ..................................................................................... 775
12.4.2.1 Microwave Links Quality Objectives ......................................................................................... 776
12.4.2.2 Microwave Links Availability Objectives ................................................................................... 777
12.5 Managing Microwave Link Equipment ............................................................................. 777
12.5.1 Microwave Manufacturers Table .................................................................................................... 777
12.5.2 Microwave Antennas ...................................................................................................................... 777
12.5.2.1 Creating Microwave Antennas.................................................................................................. 778
12.5.2.2 Importing Microwave Antennas ................................................................................................ 779
12.5.2.3 Managing Microwave Antenna Properties ................................................................................ 779
12.5.2.4 Copying Microwave Antenna Patterns to the Clipboard ........................................................... 781
12.5.2.5 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns....................................................................................... 781
12.5.2.6 Smoothing Microwave Antenna Vertical Patterns..................................................................... 781
12.5.3 Microwave Equipment .................................................................................................................... 782
12.5.3.1 Managing Microwave Transceiver Equipment.......................................................................... 782
12.5.3.2 Managing Microwave Waveguides and Cables........................................................................ 786
12.5.3.3 Assigning Radio Equipment to Microwave Links ...................................................................... 787
12.5.4 Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility ................................................................................ 788
12.5.4.1 Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibilities Table.............................................................. 788
12.5.4.2 Assistant for Compatibility Definition ........................................................................................ 788
12.6 Managing Microwave Links ................................................................................................... 789
12.6.1 Microwave Links............................................................................................................................. 789
12.6.1.1 Analysing Microwave Sites ....................................................................................................... 790
12.6.1.2 Microwave Link Properties........................................................................................................ 792
12.6.1.3 Microwave Links Templates ..................................................................................................... 796
12.6.2 Microwave Passive Repeaters ....................................................................................................... 798
12.6.2.1 Creating a Microwave Passive Repeater.................................................................................. 798
12.6.2.2 Managing Microwave Passive Repeater Properties ................................................................. 799
12.6.2.3 Inserting Microwave Passive Repeaters in Microwave Links ................................................... 799
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 19

A9155 User Manual
12.6.3 Multi-hop Links ................................................................................................................................800

12.6.3.1 Creating a Multi-hop Link ..........................................................................................................800
12.6.3.2 Managing Multi-hop Link Properties..........................................................................................801
12.6.3.3 Managing Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Mapping Globally ..........................................802
12.6.3.4 Graphically Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link .........................................................802
12.6.3.5 Deleting a Multi-hop Link ...........................................................................................................803
12.6.4 Point-to-Multipoint Links..................................................................................................................803
12.6.4.1 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link ............................................................................................803
12.6.4.2 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties ............................................................................................804
12.6.4.3 Mapping of Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally............................................805
12.6.4.4 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link ..............................................................805
12.6.4.5 Graphically Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link ...........................................806
12.6.4.6 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link........................................................806
12.6.4.7 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link.............................................................................................806
12.6.4.8 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub................................................................806
12.6.4.9 Graphically Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub.............................................807
12.7 Managing Microwave Links Specific Geo Data ............................................................807
12.7.1 Working with Rain Maps .................................................................................................................807
12.7.2 Importing a Rain Map......................................................................................................................807
12.7.3 Managing Rain Map Properties.......................................................................................................808
12.7.4 Displaying Rain Statistics................................................................................................................808
12.7.5 ITU Maps.........................................................................................................................................809
12.7.5.1 ITU Vapour Density on Earth ....................................................................................................809
12.7.5.2 ITU Atmospheric Refraction: February......................................................................................809
12.7.5.3 ITU Atmospheric Refraction: May .............................................................................................810
12.7.5.4 ITU Atmospheric Refraction: August .........................................................................................810
12.7.5.5 ITU Atmospheric Refraction: November....................................................................................811
12.7.5.6 ITU Rain Zones: America ..........................................................................................................812
12.7.5.7 ITU Rain Zones: Europe and Africa ..........................................................................................813
12.7.5.8 ITU Rain Zones: Asia ................................................................................................................814
12.8 Microwave Link Analysis .........................................................................................................814
12.8.1 Propagation Model and Global Calculation Parameters .................................................................814
12.8.1.1 Propagation Model ....................................................................................................................814
12.8.1.2 Global Calculation Parameters..................................................................................................816
12.8.2 Restricting the Number of Sites and Microwave Links Studied.......................................................817
12.8.2.1 Setting a Computation Zone......................................................................................................817
12.8.2.2 Setting a Focus Zone ................................................................................................................818
12.8.3 Microwave Link Profile Analysis......................................................................................................818
12.8.3.1 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile..............................................................................................819
12.8.3.2 Studying Microwave Link Clearance .........................................................................................819
12.8.3.3 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options ...................................................................820
12.8.3.4 Zooming In on the Profile ..........................................................................................................820
12.8.3.5 Printing a Microwave Link Profile ..............................................................................................820
12.8.3.6 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile ...............................................820
12.8.3.7 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values ..................................................................................822
12.8.3.8 Optimising Microwave Link Antenna Heights ............................................................................822
12.8.3.9 Studying Reflections Along Microwave Link Profile ..................................................................823
12.8.3.10 Studying Space Diversity Effects on Microwave Links ..............................................................824
12.8.4 Microwave Link Reliability Analysis.................................................................................................825
12.8.4.1 Analysing Microwave Link Performance Objectives..................................................................825
12.8.4.2 End-to-End Reliability Level ......................................................................................................828
12.8.5 Interference Analysis and Frequency Planning...............................................................................829
12.8.5.1 Interference Analysis .................................................................................................................829
12.8.5.2 Frequency Planning ..................................................................................................................833
13 Multi-user Features ...................................................................................................................839

13.1 Multi-user Projects: Overview ...............................................................................................839
13.2 Creating/Starting Database Projects .................................................................................839
13.2.1 Operating Principles........................................................................................................................839
13.2.2 Creating a New Database from a Document ..................................................................................840
13.2.3 Creating a New Document from a Database ..................................................................................840
13.2.4 Starting A9155 from the Command Line.........................................................................................841
13.2.5 Exporting User Configuration to an External File ............................................................................841
13.2.6 Importing a User Configuration from an External File .....................................................................842
13.3 Supported Databases ...............................................................................................................843
13.3.1 Exporting a Project in a MS Access Database................................................................................843
20 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Table of Contents
13.3.2 Exporting a Project in a MS SQL Server Database........................................................................ 844

13.3.3 Exporting a Project in an Oracle Database .................................................................................... 844
13.3.4 Exporting a Project in a Sybase Database..................................................................................... 845
13.4 Data Exchange ............................................................................................................................ 847
13.4.1 Checking Database Connection Properties ................................................................................... 847
13.4.2 Loading Data from a Database ...................................................................................................... 847
13.4.3 Archiving Data in a Database......................................................................................................... 847
13.5 Database Conflicts and Consistency ................................................................................ 848
13.5.1 Solving a Conflict on a Modified Record ........................................................................................ 848
13.5.2 Solving a Conflict on a Deleted Record.......................................................................................... 850
13.5.3 Running an Audit on a Database ................................................................................................... 851
13.6 Managing Shared Path Loss Matrices ............................................................................. 851
13.6.1 Sharing Path Loss Matrices Between Users .................................................................................. 851
13.6.2 Computing Path Loss Matrices Only .............................................................................................. 852
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 21

A9155 User Manual
22 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

CHAPTER 1
THE WORKING ENVIRONMENT
Chapter 1: The Working Environment
1 The Working Environment

The A9155 working environment provides a comprehensive and integrated set of tools and features that allow you to
create and define your radio-planning project in a single application. You can save the entire project as a single file, or you
can link your project to external files.
A9155 uses standard Windows interface elements, with the ability to have several document windows open at the same
time, support for drag-and-drop functionality, context menus, and support for standard Windows shortcuts, for example,
for cutting and pasting. A9155 also gives you the ability to undo recent changes to your document. A9155 offers the stand-
ard Windows Print functionality, with added functionality allowing you to print either the entire map window, parts of it, or
only certain objects. A9155 also provides other tools, such as a search tool to locate either a site, a point on the map, or
a vector.
The Explorer window plays a central role in A9155. The Explorer window contains most of the objects in a document
arranged in folders.
Using the Explorer window, you can manage all objects in the A9155 document: sites, transmitters, calculations, etc., as
well as geographic data such as the Digital Terrain Model (DTM), clutter classes, and traffic maps. You can, for example,
define various studies or configure the parameters or display of data objects.
The content of the folders in the Explorer window can be displayed in tables, allowing you to manage large amounts of
data. You can sort and filter the data in a table, or change how the data is displayed. You can also use the table feature
to enter large amounts of information by cutting and pasting the information from any Windows spreadsheet into the table.
The map is the working area for your document and A9155 provides many features for working with the map. You can
change the view by moving or zooming in or out and you can choose which objects are displayed and how they are
displayed. You can also export the current display definition, or configuration, to use it in other documents.
This chapter explains the following topics:
"The A9155 Work Area" on page 25
"The Explorer Window" on page 27
"Working with Objects" on page 29
"Printing in A9155" on page 57
"Working with Maps" on page 38
"Working with Data Tables" on page 48
"Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data" on page 61
"Tips and Tricks" on page 74.
1.1 The A9155 Work Area

The A9155 work area, shown in Figure 1.1 on page 26, consists of the main window where the map window and data
tables and reports are displayed and the Explorer window. The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a docu-
ment, arranged in folders. It is presented in detail in "The Explorer Window" on page 27.
A9155 offers a variety of tools to help you plan a network. The tools open in separate windows, some of which can be
docked into the work area or floated over the work area (see Figure 1.1 on page 26).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 25

A9155 User Manual
Toolbar
Document window (map)
Workspace
Explorer window
(docked)
Panoramic window
(floating)
Point Analysis window

(docked)
Figure 1.1: A9155 user interface
1.1.1 Working with Document Windows

When you have one A9155 document open, you can have several document windows open at the same time. You can
resize, maximise, and minimise document windows as you can in any Windows-based application.
As well, you can tile document windows, in order to display all of them at the same time, or cascade them, in order to
display the title bar of each document window.
To tile document windows:
Select Window > Tile.
To cascade document windows:
Select Window > Cascade.
1.1.2 Docking or Floating an A9155 Window

Only document windows are part of an individual A9155 document. Other windows and tools, such as the Explorer
window, display the content of the active document. They are not part of the individual A9155 document, but part of the
working environment and, when you switch to a different document, they will display the content of the active document.
You can change how and these windows and tools will be displayed. You can also choose to remove them from its position
and float them over the A9155 working environment.
To display a window:
On the View menu, select the name of the window.
To close a window:
Click the Hide button ( ) in the corner of the window. Depending on the position of the docking window, this
button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner.
You can change how much room a window takes if it shares a docking area with other windows by maximising or minimis-
ing the window.
To maximise a window in its docking area:
Click the Maximise button ( ) near the corner of the window. Depending on the position of the window, this
button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner.
To minimise a window in its docking area:
Click the Minimise button ( ) near the corner of the window. Depending on the position of the window, this button
can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner.
You can leave a window in its docking area, or you can have it float over the working environment, allowing you to maxim-
ise the amount of area for document windows or other windows.
26 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To float a window:
Double-click the docking window title bar. The docking window leaves the docking area and floats over the working
environment.
Note: You can move the docking window by clicking the title bar and dragging it. To prevent the
window from docking as you move it, press CTRL as you drag the docking window.
To dock a window:
To return the window to its previous docked location, double-click the docking window title bar.
Or
Click the title bar of the docking window and drag the window to a different docking area.
Note: The window positions for docking windows are not associated with the current document;
they remain the same no matter which document you open.
1.2 The Explorer Window

The Explorer window is a window that plays a central role in A9155. The Explorer window contains the data and objects
of a document, arranged in folders. Each object and folder has a context-specific menu that you can access by right-click-
ing. Items can be modified at the folder level, with changes affecting all items in the folder, or items can be accessed and
edited individually. As well, most folder contents can also be accessed in a table, allowing you to easily manage large
amounts of information. For information on working with tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48.
In this section, the following are described:
"Working with the Explorer Window Tabs" on page 27
"Navigating in the Explorer Window" on page 28
"Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28
"Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 28.
1.2.1 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs

The Explorer window has three tabs:
The Data tab: The Data tab allows you to manage radio data and calculations. Depending on the modules
installed with A9155, the Data tab has the following folders:
- Sites
- Antennas
- Transmitters
- Predictions
- UMTS Parameters, cdmaOne/CDMA2000 Parameters, or GSM/GPRS Parameters
- UMTS Simulations or cdmaOne/CDMA2000 Simulations
- Traffic analysis (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects only)
- Hexagonal design
- Microwave links
- CW Measurements and Test mobile data
The Geo tab: The Geo tab allows you to manage geographic data. The number of folders depends on the
number and types of geographical data types (vector data, scanned images, etc.) you import or create:
- Clutter classes
- Clutter heights
- Digital Terrain Model
- Population data
- Any generic geo data map
- Traffic (GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA, UMTS HSPA, cdmaOne/CDMA2000)
The Modules tab: The Modules tab allows you to manage the propagation models and additional modules. It
contains:
- A Propagation Models folder with the following propagation models:
- Longley-Rice
- Okumura-Hata
- Costa-Hata
- Standard Propagation Model
- ITU 526-5
- ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93)
- WLL
- Microwave Propagation Model
- WinProp-ProMan Model
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 27

A9155 User Manual
- The AFP models available in your A9155 installation.

- Any additional module created using the API.
1.2.2 Navigating in the Explorer Window

The Explorer window has three tabs; each tab has objects and folders containing objects.
To move from one tab to another:
Click the tab at the top of the Explorer window.
A folder on a tab can be opened to allow you to view its contents. Each folder containing at least one object has an Expand
( ) or Contract button ( ) to the left of its name.
To expand a folder to display its contents:
Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of its name.
1.2.3 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer

You can use the Explorer to display or hide objects on the map. This allows you to hide one type of object so that another
type of object is more plainly visible. For example, you could hide all predictions but one, so that the results of one predic-
tion are more clearly displayed.
Note: Hiding an object affects only its visibility in the map window; it will still be taken into consid-
eration during calculations.
To hide an object on the map:

1. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object.
2. Clear the check box ( ) immediately to the left of the object name. The check box appears cleared ( ) and the
object is no longer visible on the map.
Note: You can hide the contents of an entire folder by clearing the check box to the left of the
folder name. When the check box of a folder appears greyed ( ), it indicates that the
folder contains both visible and hidden objects.
1.2.4 Working with Layers Using the Explorer

In A9155, the map is made of objects arranged in layers. The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs)
are the most visible on the screen and in print. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above and
visible (see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28) and on the transparency of these
layers (see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 35).
To move a layer up or down:
1. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object.
2. Click and drag the object to its new position. As you drag the object, a horizontal black line indicates where the
object will remain when you release the mouse button (see Figure 1.2).
Figure 1.2: Moving a layer
28 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: Before you print a map, you should pay attention to the arrangement of the layers. For more
information, see "Printing Recommendations" on page 58.
1.3 Working with Objects

In A9155, the items found in the Explorer window and displayed on the map are referred to as objects. Most objects in
A9155 belong to an object type. For example, a transmitter is an object of the type transmitter.
A9155 enables you to carry out many operations on objects by clicking the object directly or by right-clicking the object
and selecting the operation from the context menu.
In this section, the following are explained:
"Using the Object Context Menu" on page 29
"Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map" on page 30
"Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
1.3.1 Using the Object Context Menu

In A9155, an objects context menu gives you access to commands specific to that object as well as to commands that
are common to most objects. In this section, the following context menu commands common to all objects types are
explained:
Rename: "Renaming an Object" on page 29.
Delete: "Deleting an Object" on page 29.
Properties: "Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 29.
1.3.1.1 Renaming an Object

You can change the name of an object in A9155.
To rename an object:
1. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. The context menu appears.
2. Select Rename from the context menu.
3. Enter the new name and press ENTER to change the name.
Note: In A9155, objects such as sites or transmitters are named with default prefixes. Individual
objects are distinguished from each other by the number added automatically to the default
prefix. You can change the default prefix for sites, transmitters, and cells by editing the
atoll.ini file. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
1.3.1.2 Deleting an Object

You can delete objects from either the Explorer window or from the map.
To delete an object:
2. Select Delete from the context menu. The selected object is deleted.
1.3.1.3 Displaying the Properties of an Object

You can modify the properties of an object in the Properties dialogue.
To open the Properties dialogue of a data object:
Tips: When you are selecting data objects on the map, it can be difficult to ensure that the cor-
rect object has been selected. When a site is selected, the site (and its name) is sur-
rounded by a black frame ( ). When a transmitter is selected, both ends of its icon
have a green point ( ). When there is more than one transmitter with the same azi-
muth, clicking the transmitters in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to
select the transmitter you want (see xref).
2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears.
Switching Between Property Dialogues
You can switch between the Properties dialogues of items (transmitters, antennas, sites, services, user profiles, etc.) in
the same folder or subfolder in the Explorer window by using the browse buttons ( ) in the lower-left
corner of each Properties dialogue:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 29

A9155 User Manual
: jump to the first item in the list
: jump to the previous item in the list
: jump to the next item in the list
: jump to the last item in the list

If you have made any changes to the properties of an item, A9155 prompts you to confirm these changes before switching
to the next Properties dialogue.
You can use this feature, for example, to access the properties of co-site transmitters without closing and reopening the
Properties dialogue. Switching is performed within the lowest subfolder in the hierarchy. For example:
If transmitters are grouped by site, you can switch only within one site (co-site transmitters).
If transmitters are grouped by a flag, you can switch only within this group.
If transmitters are grouped by activity and by a flag, you can switch only within transmitters having the same activity
and the same flag.
The browse buttons are not available:
When creating a new item.
When opening the an items Properties dialogue by double-clicking its record in a table.
For repeater properties.
For propagation model properties.
The Display tab of the Properties dialogue is explained in the following section.
1.3.2 Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map

In a complex radio-planning project, it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab, although it might be visible in
the map window. A9155 lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and transmitters directly from the map. You can
also change the position of the station by dragging it, or by letting A9155 find a higher location for it.
"Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links" on page 30
"Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31
"Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 31
"Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 32
"Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site" on page 32.
1.3.2.1 Selecting One of Several Transmitters or Microwave Links

If there is more than one transmitter or microwave link with the same azimuth, A9155 enables you to select a specific trans-
mitter.
30 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To select one of several transmitters or microwave links with the same azimuth:
1. In the map window, click the transmitters or links. A context menu appears with a list of the transmitters or links
with the same azimuth (see Figure 1.3 and Figure 1.4).
Figure 1.3: Selecting one transmitter
Figure 1.4: Selecting one microwave link
2. Select the transmitter or link from the context menu.

- When you select a transmitter, it appears with a green point at both ends of the icon ( ).
- When you select a microwave link, both ends appear white and the link itself appears outlined ( ).
1.3.2.2 Moving a Site Using the Mouse

You can move a site by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue, or by using the mouse.
To move a site using the mouse:
1. Click and drag the site to the desired position. As you drag the site, the exact coordinates of the pointers current
location are visible in the Status bar.
2. Release the site where you would like to place it. By default, A9155 locks the position of a site. When the position
of a site is locked, A9155 asks you to confirm that you wanted to move the site.
3. Click Yes to confirm.
Tip: While this method allows you to place a site quickly, you can adjust the location more pre-
cisely by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue. For
information on the Site Properties dialogue, see "Site Description" on page 167.
1.3.2.3 Moving a Site to a Higher Location

If you want to improve the location of a site, in terms of reception and transmission, A9155 can find a higher location within
a specified radius from the current location of the site.
To have A9155 move a site to a higher location:
1. Right-click the site in the map window. The context menu appears.
2. Select Move to a Higher Location.
3. In the Move to a Higher Location dialogue, enter the radius of the area in which A9155 should search and click
OK. A9155 moves the site to the highest point within the specified radius.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 31

A9155 User Manual
1.3.2.4 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse

In A9155, you can set the azimuth of a transmitters antenna by modifying it on the Transmitter tab of the Transmitter
Properties dialogue, or you can modify it on the map, using the mouse. The azimuth is defined in degrees, with 0 indi-
cating north.
The precision of the change to the azimuth depends on the distance of the pointer from the transmitter symbol. Moving
the pointer changes the azimuth by:
1 degree when the pointer is within a distance of 10 times the size of the transmitter symbol.
0.1 degree when the pointer is moved outside this region.
To modify the azimuth of the antenna using the mouse:
1. On the map, click the antenna whose azimuth you want to modify.
2. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green circle ( ). An arc
with an arrow appears under the pointer.
3. Click the green circle and drag it to change the antennas azimuth.
The current azimuth of the antenna is displayed in the far left of the status
bar.
4. Release the mouse when you have set the azimuth to the desired angle.
The antennas azimuth is modified on the Transmitter tab of the Transmit-
ter Properties dialogue.
You can also modify the azimuth on the map for all the antennas on a base station using the mouse.
To modify the azimuth of all the antennas on a base station using the mouse:
1. On the map, click one of the antennas whose azimuth you want to modify.
2. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green circle ( ). An arc
with an arrow appears under the pointer.
3. Hold CTRL and, on the map, click the green circle and drag it to change
the antennas azimuth.
The current azimuth of the antenna is displayed in the far left of the status
bar.
4. Release the mouse when you have set the azimuth of the selected antenna
to the desired angle.
The azimuth of the selected antenna is modified on the Transmitter tab of
the Transmitter Properties dialogue. The azimuth of the other antennas
on the base station is offset by the same amount as the azimuth of the
selected antenna.
Note: If you make a mistake when changing the azimuth, you can undo your changes by using
Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo or by pressing CTRL+Z) to undo the changes made.
1.3.2.5 Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site

By default, transmitters are placed on the site. However, transmitters are occasionally not located directly on the site, but
a short distance away. In A9155, you can change the position of the transmitter relative to the site by adjusting the Dx and
Dy parameters on the General Tab of the Transmitter Property dialogue. Dx and Dy are the distance in metres of the
transmitter from the site position. You can also modify the position of the transmitter on the map, using the mouse.
To move a transmitter using the mouse:
1. On the map, click the transmitter you want to move.

2. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). A
cross appears under the pointer.
3. Click the green rectangle and drag it to change the transmitters position
relative to the site.
The current position (Dx and Dy) of the transmitter is displayed in the far
right of the status bar.
4. Release the mouse when you have moved the selected transmitter to the
desired position.
The position of the selected transmitter is modified on the General tab of
the Transmitter Properties dialogue.
Note: If you make a mistake when changing the position of the transmitter, you can undo your
changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo or by pressing CTRL+Z) to undo the
changes made.
32 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

1.3.3 Display Properties of Objects

In A9155, most objects, such as sites or transmitters, belong to an object type. How an individual object appears on the
map depends on the settings on the Display tab of the object types Properties dialogue. The Display tab is similar for all
object types whose appearance can be configured. Options that are inapplicable for a particular object type are unavaila-
ble on the Display tab of its Properties dialogue (see Figure 1.5).
In this section, the display options are explained, followed by a few examples of how you can use them while working on
your A9155 document (see "Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects" on page 36).
1.3.3.1 Defining the Display Properties of Objects
Figure 1.5: The Display tab for Sites
When you access the Properties dialogue of an individual object, the Display tab will only show the options applicable to
an individual object (see Figure 1.6).
Figure 1.6: The Display tab for an individual site

To define the display properties of an object type:
1. Right-click the object type folder in the Explorer window. The context menu appears.
3. Select the Display tab. Depending on the object type, the following options are available:
- "Defining the Display Type" on page 34
- "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 35
- "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 35
- "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35
- "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 35
- "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 36
4. Set the display parameters.
5. Click OK.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 33

A9155 User Manual
Defining the Display Type
Depending on the object selected, you can choose from the following display types: unique, discrete values, value inter-
vals, or automatic.
To change the display type:
1. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
2. Select the display type from the Display Type list:
- Unique: defines the same symbol for all objects of this type. By defining a unique symbol for an object type,
objects of different types, for example, sites or transmitters, are immediately identifiable.
i. To modify the appearance of the symbol, click the symbol in the table below. The Symbol Style dialogue
appears.
ii. Modify the symbol as desired.
iii. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue.
- Discrete values: defines the display of each object according to the value of a selected field. This display type
can be used to distinguish objects of the same type by one characteristic. For example, you could use this
display type to distinguish transmitter by antenna type, or to distinguish inactive from active sites.
i. Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects.
ii. You can click to access the Actions menu. For information on the commands available, see
"Using the Actions Button" on page 34.
iii. To modify the appearance of a symbol, click the symbol in the table below. The Symbol Style dialogue
appears.
iv. Modify the symbol as desired.
v. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue.
- Value intervals: defines the display of each object according to set ranges of the value of a selected field.
This display type can be used, for example, to distinguish population density, signal strength, or the altitude
of sites.
i. Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects.
ii. Define the ranges directly in the table below. For an example, see Figure 1.8 on page 36.
iii. You can click to access the Actions menu. For information on the commands available, see
"Using the Actions Button" on page 34.
iv. To modify the appearance of a symbol, click the symbol in the table. The Symbol Style dialogue appears.
v. Modify the symbol as desired.
vi. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue.
- Automatic: only available for transmitters; A9155 automatically assigns a colour to each transmitter, ensuring
that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding it.
i. Click the symbol in the table below. The Symbol Style dialogue appears.
ii. Modify the symbol as desired.
iii. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue.
Note: When you create a new map object, for example, a new site or a new transmitter, you must
click the Refresh button ( ) for A9155 to assign a colour to newly created object accord-
ing to the set display type.
Using the Actions Button
The Actions button on the Display tab of the Properties dialogue allows you to modify the display type as defined in
"Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
To access the Actions menu:
2. Click the Actions button. The Actions menu gives you access to the following commands:
- Select all: A9155 selects all the values in the table.
- Delete: A9155 removes selected value from the table.
- Insert before: When the selected display type is value intervals, A9155 inserts a new threshold in the table
before the threshold selected in the table.
- Insert after: When the selected display type is value intervals, A9155 inserts a new threshold in the table after
the threshold selected in the table.
- Properties: A9155 opens the Display dialogue where you may change the colour and style.
- Shading: A9155 opens the Shading dialogue. When "Value Intervals" is the selected display type, you select
Shading to define the number of value intervals and configure their colour. Enter the upper and lower limits
of the value in the First Break and Last Break boxes respectively, and enter a value in the Interval box.
34 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Define the colour shading by choosing a Start Colour and an End Colour. The value intervals will be deter-
mined by the set values and coloured by a shade going from the set start colour to the set end colour.
When "Discrete Values" is the selected display type, you select Shading to choose a Start Colour and an
End Colour.
Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types
You can change the transparency of some objects, such as predictions, and some object types, such as clutter classes,
to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map.
To change the transparency:
2. Move the Transparency slider to the right to make the object or object type more transparent or to the left to make
it less transparent.
Defining the Visibility Scale
You can define a visibility range for object types. An object is visible only if the scale, as displayed on the zoom toolbar, is
within this range. This can be used to, for example, prevent the map from being cluttered with symbols when you are at a
certain scale.
Visibility ranges are taken into account for screen display, and for printing and previewing printing. They do not affect which
objects are considered during calculations.
To define an object visibility range:
2. Enter a Visibility Scale minimum in the between 1: text box.
3. Enter a Visibility Scale maximum in the and 1: text box.
Defining the Object Type Label
For most object types, such as sites and transmitters, you can display information about each object in the form of a label
that is displayed with the object. You can display information from every field in that object types data table, including from
fields that you add.
To define a label for an object type:
2. Click the Label box. A list appears.
3. Select the check box next to name of each field whose value you want to appear in the label (see Figure 1.7).
Figure 1.7: Defining a label
Note: For most object types, you can also display object information in the form of a tool tip that is
only visible when you move the pointer over the object. This option has the advantage of
not filling the map window with text. For more information on tool tips, see "Defining the
Object Type Tip Text" on page 35.
Defining the Object Type Tip Text
For most object types, such as sites and transmitters, you can display information about each object in the form of a tool
tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. You can display information from every field in that object
types data table, including from fields that you add.
To define tip text for an object type:
2. Click the Tip Text box. A list appears.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 35

A9155 User Manual
3. Select the check box next to name of each field whose value you want to appear in the label.
Note: For most object types, you can also display object information in the form of a label that is
displayed with the object. This option has the advantage of keep object-related information
permanently visible. For more information on tool tips, see "Defining the Object Type Label"
on page 35.
Once you have defined the tool tips, you must activate the tool tip function before they appear.
To activate the tool tip function:
Click the Display Tips button ( ) on the toolbar. Tool tips will now appear when the pointer is over the object.
Adding an Object Type to the Legend
You can display the information defined by the display type (see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34) in your A9155
documents legend. Only visible objects appear in the Legend window. For information on displaying or hiding objects,
see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
In Figure 1.8, on the Display tab of a signal level prediction, the intervals defined are:
Signal level >= -65red
-65 > Signal level >= -105shading from red to blue (9 intervals)
Signal level < -105not shown in the coverage.
The entries in the Legend column will appear in the Legend window.
Figure 1.8: Defined thresholds as they will appear in the Legend

With value intervals, you can enter information in the Legend column to be displayed on the legend. If there is no infor-
mation entered in this column, the maximum and minimum values are displayed instead.
2. Check the Add to legend box. The defined display will appear on the legend.
To display the Legend window:
Select View > Legend. The Legend window appears.
1.3.3.2 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects

Automatic Display Type - Server Coverage Studies
When doing a best server study, A9155 calculates, for each bin on the map, which server is best received. If the selected
display type for transmitters is "Automatic," A9155 colours each bin on the map according to the colour of the transmitter
that is best received on that bin. In this way, you can identify immediately which transmitter is best received by each bin.
The following two figures show the results of the same best server area and handover margin study.
In Figure 1.9, the transmitter display type is "Discrete Values," with the site name as the chosen value. The difference in
colour is insufficient to make clear which transmitter is best received on each bin. In Figure 1.10, the transmitter display
type is "Automatic." Because A9155 ensures that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding
it, the study results are also immediately visible.
36 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 1.9: Value interval display type Figure 1.10: Automatic display type
To display the results of a server coverage study with the transmitters set to the Automatic display type:
1. Right-click the Transmitters folder in the Explorer window. The context menu appears.
3. Select the Display tab.
4. Select "Automatic" as the Display Type.
5. Click OK.
6. Click the Refresh button ( ) to update the display of the study results.
Shading - Signal Level Study
A9155 displays the results of a signal level study as value intervals. On the map, these value intervals appear as differ-
ences of shading. You can use the Shading command to define the appearance of these value intervals to make the
results easier to read or more relevant to your needs. For example, you can change the range of data displayed, the inter-
val between each break, or you can change the colours to make the intervals more visible.
In this example, Figure 1.11 shows the results of the best signal level plot from -60 dBm to -105 dBm. However, if you are
more interested in reception from -80 dBm to -105 dBm, you can change the shading to display only those values. The
result is visible in Figure 1.12.
Figure 1.11: Shading from -60 dBm to -105 dBm Figure 1.12: Shading from -80 dBm to -105 dBm
To change how the results of a signal level study are displayed:

1. Expand the Predictions folder in the Explorer window and right-click the signal level study. The context menu
appears.
4. Click Actions to display the menu and select Shading. The Shading dialogue appears.
5. Change the value of the First Break to "-80". Leave the value of the Last Break at "-105."
6. Click OK to close the Shading dialogue.
7. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue and apply your changes.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 37

A9155 User Manual
1.4 Working with Maps

A9155 has the following functions to help you work with maps:
"Changing the Map Scale" on page 38
"Moving the Map in the Document Window" on page 39
"Using the Panoramic Window" on page 39
"Centring the Map Window on an Object" on page 39
"Measuring Distances on the Map" on page 39
"Displaying Rulers Around the Map" on page 40
"Displaying the Map Legend" on page 40
"Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 40
"Exporting a Map" on page 47
"Copying a Map to Another Application" on page 47.
"Map Window Pointers" on page 47.
1.4.1 Changing the Map Scale

You can change the scale of the map by zooming in or out, by zooming in on a specific area of the map, or by choosing a
scale.
A9155 also allows you to define a zoom range outside of which certain objects are not displayed (see "Defining the Visi-
bility Scale" on page 35).
1.4.1.1 Zooming In and Out

A9155 offers several tools for zooming in and out on the map. When you zoom in or out on the map, you do so based on
the position of the cursor on the map.
To zoom in on the map:
1. Click the Zoom icon ( ) on the Zoom toolbar (or press CTRL+Q).
2. Click the map where you want to zoom in.
Note: You can also zoom in by pressing CTRL+A, by selecting Zoom In from the View menu, or
by holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button forward.
To zoom out on the map:
1. Click the Zoom icon ( ) on the Zoom toolbar (or press CTRL+Q).
2. Right-click the map where you want to zoom out.
Note: You can also zoom out by pressing CTRL+R, by selecting Zoom Out from the View menu,
or holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button backward.
1.4.1.2 Zooming In on a Specific Area

To zoom in on a specific area of the map:
1. Click the Zoom Area icon ( ) on the Zoom toolbar (or press CTRL+W).
2. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select.
3. Drag to the opposite corner. When you release the mouse button, A9155 zooms in on the selected area.
1.4.1.3 Choosing a Scale

To choose a scale:
1. Click the arrow next to the scale box ( ) on the Zoom toolbar.
2. Select the scale from the list.
If the scale value you want is not in the list:
1. Click in the scale box ( ) on the Zoom toolbar.

2. Enter the desired scale.
3. Press ENTER. A9155 zooms the map to the entered scale.
1.4.1.4 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels

A9155 saves the last five zoom levels, allowing you to move quickly between previous zoom levels and zoomed areas.
38 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To move between zoom levels:
Click the Previous Zoom button ( ) to return to a zoom level you have already used.
Once you have returned to a previous zoom level, click the Next Zoom button ( ) to return to the latest zoom
level.
1.4.2 Moving the Map in the Document Window

You can move the map in the document window using the mouse.
To move the map in the document window:
1. Click the Move Map Window button ( ) on the Zoom toolbar.

2. Move the pointer over the map and drag the map in the desired direction.
1.4.3 Using the Panoramic Window

The Panoramic window displays the entire map with all of the imported geographic data. A dark rectangle indicates what
part of the geographic data is presently displayed in a document window, helping you situate the displayed area in relation
to the entire map.
You can use the Panoramic window to:
Zoom in on a specific area of the map
Resize the displayed map area
Move around the map.
To zoom in on a specific area of the map:
1. Click in the Panoramic window on one of the four corners of the area you want to zoom in on.
To resize the displayed map area:
1. Click in the Panoramic window on a corner or border of the zoom area (i.e., the dark rectangle).
2. Drag the border to its new position.
To move around the map:
1. Click in the Panoramic window in the zoom area (i.e., the dark rectangle).
2. Drag the rectangle to its new position.
1.4.4 Centring the Map Window on an Object

You can centre the map on any selected object, for example, a transmitter, a site, or on any zone in the Zones folder on
the Geo tab of the Explorer window. When centring the map window on an object the current scale is kept.
You can select the object in the map window or in the Explorer window.
To the map window on a selected object:
1. Right-click the object in the map window or in the Explorer window.
2. Select Centre in the Map Window from the context menu.
Tip: If you want to quickly find an object, such as a site, on the map, you can select it in the
Explorer window and then select the Centre in the Map Window command.
1.4.5 Measuring Distances on the Map

You can measure distances on the map by using the Distance Measurement tool. The Distance Measurement tool also
gives you the azimuth of a straight line between two points. You can also use the Distance Measurement tool to measure
distance along a line with several points. A9155 will then give you the distance between each point (as you measure), the
azimuth of each segment between two points, and the total distance.
To measure a distance on the map between two points:
1. Click the Distance Measurement button ( ) on the toolbar.

2. Click the first point on the map once.
As you move the pointer away from the first point, A9155 marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer
with a line.
3. Place the pointer over the second point on the map. The status bar displays the following (see Figure 1.13):
- The distance between the two points
- The azimuth between the two points.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 39

A9155 User Manual
To measure the total distance on the map on a line over a series of points:
1. Click the Distance Measurement button ( ) on the toolbar.

2. Click the first point on the map once.
As you move the pointer away from the first point, A9155 marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer
with a line.
3. Click once on the map at each point on the line between the first point and the final point, where you will have to
change direction on the line.
4. When you reach the last point on the line, the status bar displays the following (see Figure 1.13):
- The total distance between the first point and the last point
- The distance between the second-last point and the last point
- The azimuth between the last two points.
Total distance between Azimuth between second-

first and last point last and last point
Distance between second-
last and last point
Figure 1.13: Measurement data in the status bar
1.4.6 Displaying Rulers Around the Map

You can display rulers around the map in the document window.
To display rulers:
1. Select Tools > Options.
2. In the Options dialogue, click the Coordinates tab.
3. Under Display rulers, select where you want the rulers to be displayed in the map window.
4. Click OK.
1.4.7 Displaying the Map Legend

You can display a map legend. The legend will contain the information on the object types that you have added to it. For
information on adding object types to the legend, see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 36.
To display the legend:
Select View > Legend.
1.4.8 Using Zones in the Map Window

On the Geo tab of the Explorer window, A9155 provides you with a set of tools known as zones which can be used to
define areas of the map for the following purposes:
Filtering Zone: The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the
Data tab of the Explorer window to the objects inside the filtering zone. It also restricts which objects are used in
calculations such as coverage predictions, etc.
Computation Zone: The computation zone is used to define which base stations are to be taken into considera-
tion in calculations and the area where A9155 calculates path loss matrices, coverage studies, etc.
Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones: The focus zone and hot spot zones allow you to select the areas of coverage
predictions or other calculations on which you want to generate reports and results.
Printing Zone: The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed.
Coverage Export Zone: The coverage export zone is used to define part of the coverage prediction to be
exported as a bitmap.
"Using a Filtering Zone" on page 41
"Using a Computation Zone" on page 41
"Using a Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones" on page 42
"Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 42
"Using a Printing Zone" on page 44
"Using a Coverage Export Zone" on page 45.
40 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

1.4.8.1 Using a Filtering Zone

The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the Data tab of the Explorer
window to the objects inside the filtering zone. It also restricts which objects are used in calculations such as coverage
predictions, etc. By limiting the number of sites, you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation
of data objects on the map clearer.
1.4.8.1.1 Creating a Filtering Zone

To create a filtering zone:
1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder.
3. Right-click the Filtering Zone folder.
4. From the context menu, select Draw. The pointer changes to the polygon drawing pointer ( ).
5. Click on the map to start drawing the filter polygon. Click each time you change the angle on the border defining
the outside of the polygon.
6. Close the polygon by clicking twice. The data objects outside of the selected zone are filtered out.
You can also create a filtering zone as follows:
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a filtering zone by right-clicking it and
selecting Use as Filtering Polygon from the context menu.
Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon, for example, a polygon describing an adminis-
trative area, you can import it and use it as a filtering zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Filtering Zone
folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu.
Fit to Map Window: You can create a filtering zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window
from the context menu.
Once you have created a filtering zone, you can use A9155s polygon editing tools to edit it. For more information on the
polygon editing tools, see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 42.
Note: You can export the filtering zone as a polygon, so that you can use it in a different A9155
document, by right-clicking the Filtering Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer win-
dow and selecting Export from the context menu.
1.4.8.2 Using a Computation Zone

The computation zone is used to define the area where A9155 carries out calculations. When you create a computation
zone, A9155 carries out the calculation for all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current
filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. Therefore, it takes
into consideration base stations inside and base stations outside the computation zone if they have an influence on the
computation zone. In addition, the computation zone defines the area within which the coverage prediction results will be
displayed.
When working with a large network, the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you
are currently working on. By allowing you to reduce the number of base stations studied, A9155 reduces both the time and
computer resources necessary for calculations. As well, by taking into consideration base stations within the computation
zone and base stations outside the computation zone but which have an influence on the computation zone, A9155 gives
you realistic results for base stations that are close to the border of the computation zone.
If there is no computation zone defined, A9155 makes its calculations on all base stations that are active and filtered and
for the entire extent of the geographical data available.
1.4.8.2.1 Creating a Computation Zone

To create a computation zone:
1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder.
3. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select Draw from the context menu.
5. Draw the computation zone:
a. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone.
b. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction.
c. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone.
The computation zone is delimited by a red line.
You can also create a computation zone as follows:

Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and
selecting Use as Computation Zone from the context menu.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 41

A9155 User Manual
trative area, you can import it and use it as a computation zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Computa-
tion Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu.
Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map
Window from the context menu.
Once you have created a computation zone, you can use A9155s polygon editing tools to edit it. For more information on
the polygon editing tools, see"Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 42.
Note: You can save the computation zone, so that you can use it in a different A9155 document,
in the following ways:
- By saving the computation zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting
the computation zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on
page 71.
- By right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window
and selecting Export from the context menu.
1.4.8.3 Using a Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones

The focus and hot spot zones define an area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made. While you
can only have one focus zone, you can define several hot spot zones in addition to the focus zone.
It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. The computation zone defines the
area where A9155 computes path loss matrices, coverage studies, etc., while the focus and hot spot zones are the areas
taken into consideration when generating reports and results.
A9155 bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, A9155 will use the compu-
tation zone. However, by using a focus zone for the report, you can display the statistics for a specific number of sites,
instead of displaying statistics for every site that has been calculated.
1.4.8.3.1 Drawing a Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones

To define a focus zone or hot spot zone:
3. Right-click the Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder, depending on whether you want to create a focus zone or
a hot spot. The context menu appears.
5. Draw the focus or hot spot zone:
A focus zone is delimited by a green line; a hot spot zone is delimited by a heavy black line.
You can also create a focus or hot spot zone in one of the following ways:
Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selecting
Use as Focus Zone from the context menu.
Note: You can only create a focus zone, and not a hot spot zone, from an existing polygon.
trative area, you can import it and use it as a focus or hot spot zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus
Zone or Hot Spot Zones folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu.
Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus or hot spot zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map
Note: You can save the focus zone, so that you can use it in a different A9155 document, in the
following ways:
- By saving the focus zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting the fo-
cus zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 71.
- By right-clicking the Focus Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and
selecting Export from the context menu.
1.4.8.4 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools

A9155 provides you with several different ways of editing computation zones, focus and hot spot zones, and filtering
zones. You can edit these zones by editing the points that define them, by combining several polygons, or by deleting parts
of the polygons that make up these zones. When you no longer need the zone, you can delete it from the map.
42 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

The computation, focus and hot spot zone polygons can contain holes. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated
from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal
areas are in clockwise order, whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clock-
wise order.
"Editing Polygon Zones" on page 43
"Removing a Polygon Zone" on page 44.
1.4.8.4.1 Editing Polygon Zones

You can edit polygon zones in several ways. Before you can edit a polygon zone, you must first put it in editing mode.
To put the polygon zone in editing mode:
3. Right-click the folder containing the polygon zone you want to edit.
4. Select Edit from the context menu. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated.
Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the polygon zone to edit from the Vector
Edition toolbar list.
You can now edit the polygon zone as explained in the following sections:
"Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone" on page 43
"Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar" on page 43
"Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu" on page 44.
Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone
To edit a point of a polygon zone:

1. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 43.
2. Select the polygon zone. You can now edit it by:
- Moving a point:
i. Position the pointer over the point you want to move. The pointer changes ( ).
ii. Drag the point to its new position.
- Adding a point to the polygon zone:
i. Position the pointer over the polygon zone border where you want to add a point. The pointer changes
( ).
ii. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. A point is added to the polygon zone border at
the position of the pointer.
- Deleting a point from a polygon zone:
i. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. The pointer changes ( ).
ii. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. The point is deleted.
Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar
In A9155, you can create complex polygon zones by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. The filtering, compu-
tation, and focus zone polygons can contain holes. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying
polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clock-
wise order, whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order.
To edit a polygon zone using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar:
1. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 43.
2. Click the contour to edit. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons:
- : To combine several polygon zones:
i. In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Combine button ( ).

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new polygon zone.
iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon zone.
iv. Double-click to close the polygon zone.
v. Draw more polygon zones if desired. A9155 creates a group of polygons of the selected and new con-
tours. If polygon zones overlap, A9155 merges them.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 43

A9155 User Manual
- : To delete part of the selected polygon zone:
i. In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Delete button ( ).

ii. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected polygon zone by clicking once on the map where you
want to begin drawing the area to delete.
iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area.
iv. Double-click to close the area. A9155 deletes the area from the selected contour.
- : To create a polygon out of the overlapping area of two polygons:
i. In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Intersection button ( ).

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will overlap the selected one.
iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon.
iv. Double-click to close the polygon. A9155 creates a new polygon of the overlapping area of the two poly-
gons and deletes the parts of the polygons that do not overlap.
- : To split the selected polygon into several polygons:
i. In the Vector Edition toolbar, click the Split button ( ).

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will split the selected one.
iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon.
iv. Double-click to close the polygon. A9155 separates the area covered by the polygon from the selected
polygon and creates a new polygon.
Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu
When you are editing polygon zones, you can access certain commands using the context menu.
To edit a polygon zone using the context menu:
1. Click the polygon zone you want to edit.
2. Right-click the polygon zone to display the context menu and select one of the following:
- Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected polygon zone. The Properties
dialogue gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the polygon zone.
- Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer.
- Move:
i. Select Move from the context menu to move the contour, line, or point on the map.
ii. Move the contour, line, or point.
iii. Click to place the contour, line, or point.
- Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode.
- Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour, line, or point from the map.
1.4.8.4.2 Removing a Polygon Zone

When you no longer need a polygon zone, you can remove the zone and redisplay all data objects.
To remove a polygon zone:
3. Right-click the folder containing the zone you want to remove.
4. From the context menu, select Delete Zone. The polygon zone is removed and all document data are now dis-
played.
Tip: You can also delete it by right-clicking on its border on the map and selecting Delete from
the context menu.
1.4.8.5 Using a Printing Zone

The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed.
1.4.8.5.1 Drawing a Printing Zone

You can define an area to be printed.
44 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To create a printing zone:

3. Right-click the Printing Zone folder. The context menu appears.
5. Draw the printing zone:
a. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone.
b. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone. When you release the mouse,
the printing zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners.
The printing zone is displayed as a rectangle with a light green border (see Figure 1.28).
Figure 1.14: Printing zone
You can also create a printing zone with one of the following methods available from the context menu of the Zones folder:
Fit to Map Window: You can create a printing zone the current size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map
Importing a polygon: You can import a polygon to be used as the printing zone by selecting Import from the
context menu.
1.4.8.6 Using a Coverage Export Zone

If you want to export part of the coverage prediction as a bitmap, you can define a coverage export zone. After you have
defined a coverage export zone, A9155 offers you the option of exporting only the area covered by the zone if you export
the coverage prediction as a raster image.
1.4.8.6.1 Defining a Coverage Export Zone

To define a coverage export zone:
3. Right-click the Coverage Export Zone folder. The context menu appears.
5. Draw the coverage export zone:
a. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the coverage export zone.
b. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the coverage export zone. When you release the
mouse, the coverage export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners.
The coverage export zone is displayed as a rectangle with a light purple border.
Important: The coverage export zone can only export in raster format. You can not export in raster for-
mat if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example, coverage predictions
with the display type set by transmitter, by a transmitter attribute, by signal level, by path
loss, or by total losses). Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in
raster format.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 45

A9155 User Manual
1.4.8.6.2 Exporting Coverage Prediction Results

In A9155, you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in raster or vector formats. In raster formats, you
can export in BMP, TIFF, ArcView grid, or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) formats. When exporting in GRD or GRC
formats, A9155 allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb. In vector formats, you can export in ArcView, MapInfo, or
AGD formats.
Exporting coverage predictions allows the user to generate a file that can be imported as a vector or raster object in A9155
or in another application. For each exported prediction (total or for a single transmitter), the exported zone is delimited by
the rectangle encompassing the coverage. All coverage types can be exported, however, you can not export in raster
format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example, coverage predictions with the display type set by
transmitter, by a transmitter attribute, by signal level, by path loss, or by total losses). In this case, only the coverage area
of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format.
To export a coverage prediction:
1. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window.
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Predictions folder.
Note: The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported.
For information on displaying objects in the map window, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects
on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
3. You can export the entire coverage prediction, the coverage export zone, or part of the coverage prediction.
To export the entire coverage prediction:
- Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export.

To export the coverage export zone:
a. Define the coverage export zone as explained in "Defining a Coverage Export Zone" on page 45.
b. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export.
To export part of the coverage prediction:
a. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the coverage prediction.

b. Right-click the part of the coverage prediction you want to export.
4. Select Export the Coverage from the context menu.
5. Enter the file name and select the type and the path of the file to be exported.
6. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results.
- If you have chosen to export the prediction coverage in raster format, a dialogue appears where you can
select:
- The Coverage Area of the Prediction Study to export a rectangle containing only the area covered by
the study,
- The Computation Zone to export a rectangle containing the entire computation zone, or
- The Coverage Export Zone to export the rectangle defined by the coverage export zone.
- If you have chosen to export the prediction coverage in a vector format other than in AGD format:
i. If desired, change the export resolution. The default resolution is the resolution of the coverage prediction
results (as set in the coverage prediction Properties dialogue).
ii. If desired, change the reference coordinate system for the file being exported.
iii. Click Export to finish exporting the coverage prediction results.
Notes
When selecting a coordinate system different than the one initially defined in A9155, the file is
converted using the selected coordinate system.
You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for
example, coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter, by a transmitter attribute,
by signal level, by path loss, or by total losses). Only the coverage area of a single transmitter
can be exported in raster format.
46 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

1.4.9 Exporting a Map

You can export a map as a graphic image.
To export a map as a graphic image:
1. Click the Select an area button ( ) in the zoom toolbar.

2. Define the area to be exported:
a. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select.
b. Drag to the opposite corner.
3. Select File > Export Image. The Save As dialogue appears.
4. In the Save as dialogue, select a destination folder, enter a File name, and select a file type from the Save as
type list.
The following file formats are supported: TIF, BIL, BMP, and ArcView Grid (TXT). If you wish to use the exported
file as a digital terrain model, you should select the TIF, BIL, or TXT format. When exporting in BIL format, A9155
allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb.
5. Click Save. The Exported Image Size dialogue appears.

6. You can define the size of the exported image in one of two ways:
- Scale: If you wish to define the size by scale, select Scale, enter a scale in the text box and a Resolution. If
you wish to export the image with rulers, select Include Rulers.
- Pixel Size: If you wish to define the size by pixel size, select Pixel Size, and enter a pixel size in the text box.
Important: If you wish to use the exported file as a digital terrain model, you must define the size of the
exported image by pixel size. A9155 then creates a geo-reference file for the exported
image.
7. Click OK.
1.4.10 Copying a Map to Another Application

You can copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application.
To copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application:
1. Click the Select an area button ( ) in the zoom toolbar.

2. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select.
3. Drag to the opposite corner.
4. Select Edit > Copy Image. The Copy Image dialogue appears.
5. Define the resolution of the image in one of the following ways:
- Select Use Screen Resolution
- Select Use Custom Resolution and enter a resolution in metres.
6. Click OK.
7. Open the application into which you want to paste the image.
8. In the new application, select Edit > Paste Special.
9. In the Paste special dialogue, select Bitmap from the list box.
10. Click OK. The area of the map is pasted as an image into the new document.
1.4.11 Map Window Pointers

In A9155, the pointer appears in different forms according to its function. Each pointer is described below:
Appearance Description Meaning

The zone selection pointer indicates that, on the map, you can define a zone to
Selection arrow print or copy and, in the Panoramic window, you can define the zone to be
displayed on the map. To define a zone, click and drag diagonally.
The polygon drawing pointer indicates you can draw a zone to filter either sites
or transmitters, to draw computation/focus/hot spot/filtering zones, or to draw
Polygon
vector or raster polygons on the map. To draw a polygon, click once to start,
drawing pointer and each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the
polygon. Close the polygon by clicking twice.
Hand The hand pointer indicates you can move the visible part of the displayed map.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 47

A9155 User Manual
Appearance Description Meaning

The zoom pointer indicates you can click to zoom in and right-click to zoom out
Zoom tool
at the location of the mouse pointer
The zoom area pointer indicates you can zoom in on an area of the by clicking
Zoom area
and dragging to define the area.
The transmitter pointer indicates you can place a transmitter on the map where
New transmitter you click. You can place more than one station by pressing CTRL as you click
on the map.
The point analysis pointer indicates that you have selected the Point Analysis
Point analysis
tool and have not yet chosen the first point.
The point placed pointer indicates the position of the receiver on the map that
Point placed
is used for the point-to-point analysis. The results are displayed in the
(Receiver) Measurements or Point Analysis window.
The pencil pointer indicates you can create a polygonal clutter zone, by clicking
Pencil once to start the polygon, once to create each corner, and by double-clicking to
close the polygon.
The deletion pointer indicates that you can delete a newly created polygonal
Deletion
clutter zone by clicking its border.
The position indicator pointer indicates you can select the border of a polygon.
Position
Right-clicking the polygon border opens a context menu allowing you to add a
indicator point, delete the polygon, or centre the map on the polygon.
The select/create points pointer indicates you can modify the polygon in the
map window. You can add a new point and modify the polygon contour by
Select/create
clicking on one of the edges and dragging. You can move an existing point by
points clicking and dragging an existing point. You can right-click to open a context
menu to delete a point, delete the polygon, or centre the map on the polygon.
Placing a CW
The first CW measurement point pointer indicates you can click a point on the
measurement
map to create the first point of a CW measurement path.
point
Placing points
The next CW measurement point pointer indicates the first CW measurement
in a CW
point has been set and you can now click other points on the map. Double-click
measurement to end the CW measurement path.
path
Microwave link The microwave link pointer indicates you can click a point on the map to create
start the first point of a microwave link. Once you have created the first point, the
End microwave link pointer changes and the next click ends the link.
Multi-hop or The multihop and multipoint pointer indicates you can click once to create the
first point of a multi-hop link or the hub of a point-to-multipoint link. In the case
point-to-
of a multihop link, each subsequent click creates another point in the link. In
multipoint the case of a point-to-multipoint, each subsequent link creates anew point,
microwave link connected to the hub by a link.
Rotate hub
antenna of The rotate hub antenna pointer indicates you can click the hub antenna and
point-to- drag it to a new position to change the azimuth of the hub antenna.
multipoint link
The measurement pointer indicates you can click on the map to set the start
Measurements
point of your measurement. As you move the pointer, the distance between the
on the map first point and the pointer is displayed in the status bar.
The terrain section pointer indicates that you can create a terrain section by
clicking once on the map to create the first point and once more to create the
Terrain section
second point. The terrain profile between the two points is displayed in the
Point Analysis window and stored under Terrain Sections in the Geo tab.
1.5 Working with Data Tables

A9155 stores object data (sites, transmitters, repeaters, antennas, UMTS, or cdmaOne/CDMA2000 Cells, UMTS or
cdmaOne/CDMA2000 parameters, microwave links, etc.) in the form of tables, containing all their parameters and char-
acteristics. The data contained in prediction reports are also stored in the form of tables.
You can add columns to the data table and you can delete certain columns. When you create a new column, you can
create a default value for a field you create. You can also create a list of options (for text fields) from which the user can
choose when filling in the field.
You can filter, sort, and group the data contained in these tables, export the data or import data into the A9155 data tables.
"Opening a Data Table" on page 49
48 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

"Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 49

"Editing the Content of a Table" on page 50
"Opening an Objects Record Properties Dialogue from a Table" on page 51
"Defining the Table Format" on page 51
"Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 54
"Exporting Tables to External Files" on page 55
"Importing Tables from External Files" on page 56.
1.5.1 Opening a Data Table

To open a data table:
1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.
2. Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table.
3. Select Open Table from the context menu.
1.5.2 Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields

The data for each object type is stored in the form of a data table. Every data table in A9155 is created with a default set
of columns, each corresponding to a field. In this section, the following functions are explained:
"Accessing the Table Tab of an Object Types Properties dialogue" on page 49
"Adding a Field to an Object Types Data Table" on page 49
"Deleting a Field from an Object Types Data Table" on page 50
1.5.2.1 Accessing the Table Tab of an Object Types Properties dialogue

An object types data table is defined on the Table tab of its Properties dialogue.
To access the table tab of an object types Properties dialogue:
1. In the Explorer window, select the tab containing the object type.
2. Right-click the object type folder. A context menu appears
3. Select Properties. The Properties dialogue appears.
4. Click the Table tab. The Table tab displays for each type of data (see Figure 1.15):
- The Name of the field in the database (Name).
- The Name of the field in the ATL file (Legend).
- The Type of the field.
- The maximum Size of the field.
- The Default value of the field.
- The Group to which the field belongs. When opening an A9155 document from a database, you can select a
group of custom fields to be loaded from the database, instead of loading all custom fields.
Figure 1.15: The Table tab
1.5.2.2 Adding a Field to an Object Types Data Table

You can add a custom field to any object types data table.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 49

A9155 User Manual
To add a custom field to an object types data table:

1. Access the Table tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Accessing the Table Tab of an Object Types
Properties dialogue" on page 49.
2. Click Add. The Field Definition dialogue appears (see Figure 1.16).
3. The Field Definition dialogue has the following text boxes:
- Name: Enter the Name for the field that will appear in the database
- Group: If desired, you can define a Group that this custom field will belong to. When you open an A9155 doc-
ument from a database, you can then select a specific group of custom fields to be loaded from the database,
instead of loading all custom fields.
- Legend: Enter the name for the field that will appear in the A9155 document.
- Type: Select a type for the field (text, short integer, long integer, single, double, true/false, date/time, or cur-
rency)
- Size: The Size field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. Enter a size in characters.
- Default Value: If you want, enter a default value that will appear each time you create a new record of this
object type.
- Choice List: The Choice List field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. You can create
a choice list by entering the list items in the Choice List text box, separating each list item with a hard return.
4. Click OK to return to the Properties dialogue.
Figure 1.16: The Field Definition dialogue
1.5.2.3 Deleting a Field from an Object Types Data Table

You can delete custom fields from an object types data table. Custom fields are the fields that the user adds to an object
types data table, as explained in "Adding a Field to an Object Types Data Table" on page 49.
To delete a custom field from an object types data table:
Caution: All data stored in the field will be lost when you delete the field itself. Make sure that you
are not deleting important information.
1. Access the Table tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Accessing the Table Tab of an Object Types
Properties dialogue" on page 49.
2. Select the custom field that you want to delete.
Tip: Some fields can not be deleted. If you select a field on the Table tab and the Delete button
remains unavailable, the selected field is not a custom field and can not be deleted.
3. Click Delete. The field is deleted from the object types data table.
1.5.3 Editing the Content of a Table

To edit the contents of a table:
2. Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table.
4. Edit the content of the table by entering the value directly in the field (see Figure 1.17).
50 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

5. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished to update the table. Your changes are automatically saved.
Tip: If a list of options has been defined for a field, you can select a value from the list (see
Figure 1.18) or enter a new value.
Figure 1.17: Editing data in the transmitters data tables
Figure 1.18: Choosing data in the transmitters data tables
1.5.4 Opening an Objects Record Properties Dialogue from a

Table
You can open the Record Properties dialogue of an object, for example, a site, antenna, transmitter, or cell, from its data
table:
To open the Record Properties dialogue of an object:
1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 49.
2. Right-click the record whose properties you want to see.
3. Select Record Properties from the context menu.
Note: You can also open the Record Properties dialogue by double-clicking the record. To avoid
editing the record when you double-click, double-click the left margin of the record instead
of the record itself.
1.5.5 Defining the Table Format

A9155 lets you format the data tables so that the data presented is more legible or better presented. You can change the
format of the data table by:
"Formatting the Column Headers" on page 52
"Formatting Table Columns" on page 52
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 51

A9155 User Manual
"Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 52

"Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 53
"Freezing or Unfreezing a Column" on page 53
"Moving Columns" on page 53
Formatting the Column Headers
2. Select Format > Header Format. The Format dialogue appears.
3. The Format dialogue has the following tabs:
- Font: You can select the Font, Outline (the font style), font Size, Effects, and Text Colour.
- Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers, by selecting a Foreground
colour, a Background colour, and a pattern from the list box. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header.
- Borders: You can select the Border, the Type, and the Colour for each column header.
- Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text.
4. Click OK.
Formatting Table Columns
2. Select Format > Column Format. The Format dialogue appears.
3. The Format dialogue has the following tabs:
- Font: You can select the Font, Outline (the font style), font Size, Effects, and Text Colour.
- Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers, by selecting a Foreground
colour, a Background colour, and a pattern from the list box. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header.
- Borders: You can select the Border, the Type, and the Colour for each column header.
- Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text.
4. Click OK.
Changing Column Width or Row Height
You can change the column width and row height in a data table. When you change the column width, you change the
width only for the selected column. When you change the row height, however, you change the row height for every row
in the table.
To change the column width:
2. Click the border separating two column headers and drag to change the column width (see Figure 1.19).
To change the row height:
2. Click the border separating two rows and drag to change the row height (see Figure 1.20).
Figure 1.19: Changing column width
Figure 1.20: Changing row height
52 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Displaying or Hiding a Column
You can choose which columns in data tables to display or hide.

To display or hide a column:
2. Select Format > Display Columns. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears (see Figure 1.21).
3. To display a column, select its check box.
4. To hide a column, clear its check box.
Tip: You can also hide a column by right-clicking on its header and selecting Hide Columns
from the context menu. You can hide more than one column by pressing CTRL while
selecting the columns and then selecting Hide Columns from the context menu.
5. Click Close.
Figure 1.21: The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue
Note: You can also right-click the data table and select the Display Columns or Hide Columns
command from the context menu.
Freezing or Unfreezing a Column
In A9155, you can freeze one or more columns of a data table so that they always remain visible as you scroll horizontally
through the table. For example, while scrolling through the Sites table, you might want to have the Name column always
visible. You can keep this column, or any other column visible, by freezing it.
To freeze a column:
2. Select the header of the column you want to freeze. Click and drag over several headers to select more than one
column to freeze.
Note: You can only freeze adjacent columns.
3. Right-click the selected header or headers and select Freeze columns from the context men.
Note: You can not freeze a column in a report table.
To unfreeze columns:
Select Format > Unfreeze columns.
Moving Columns
In A9155, you can change the column order so that you can group similar columns or present data in a determined order.
To move a column:
2. Select the header of the column you want to move. Click and drag over several headers to select more than one
column to move.
Note: You can only move several columns at the same time when they are adjacent.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 53

A9155 User Manual
3. Click again on the selected column and drag to the desired area. As you drag the column, the position the column
will occupy is indicated by a red line (see Figure 1.22)
Figure 1.22: Moving columns
Note: It may be necessary to click Refresh for your changes to appear.
1.5.6 Copying and Pasting in Tables

In A9155, you can copy and paste data in tables using the Copy (CTRL+C), Cut (CTRL+X), and Paste (CTRL+V)
commands on the Edit menu. You can also paste the same data into several cells, using Fill Up or Fill Down.
To paste the same data into several cells:
2. Click on the cell with the data you wish to copy and drag to select the cells into which you wish to copy the data
(see Figure 1.23).
Figure 1.23: Selecting the cells
3. Copy into the selected cells:

- To copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells, select Edit > Fill > Down (see
Figure 1.24).
54 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 1.24: Copying the contents of the top cell

- To copy the contents of the bottom cell of the selection into the other cells, select Edit > Fill > Up (see
Figure 1.25).
Figure 1.25: Copying the contents of the bottom cell
1.5.7 Exporting Tables to External Files

You can export entire A9155 data tables, or selected columns to ASCII text files (in text, TXT, and Comma Separated
Value, CSV, formats).
To export a table:
2. Right-click the table. The context menu appears.
3. Select Export from the context menu. The Export dialogue appears. You can see how the exported table will
appear in the Preview window (see Figure 1.26).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 55

A9155 User Manual
Figure 1.26: Exporting a data table
4. Select the Header check box if you want to export the names of the columns with the data.
5. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list.
6. Select a Field Separator from the list.
7. Define which fields (displayed as columns in the table) you want to export:
a. To select a field to be exported, select the field in the Available Fields box and click to move it
to the Exported Fields list. All fields in the Exported Fields list will be exported.
b. To remove a field from the list of Exported Fields, select the field in the Exported Fields list and click
to remove it.
c. To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The fields
at the top of the Exported Fields appear at the left of the exported table.
Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Export dialogue as a configuration file by
clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the
Save As dialogue that appears. The next time you export a data table, you can click Load
in the Export dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this
time.
8. Click Export. The Save As dialogue appears.

For information on importing data into a data table, see "Importing Tables from External Files" on page 56.
1.5.8 Importing Tables from External Files

You can import data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into A9155 data tables.
To import a table:
2. Right-click the table. The context menu appears.
3. Select Import from the context menu. The Open dialogue appears.
4. Select the ASCII text file you want to open and click Open. The Import dialogue appears (see Figure 1.27).
5. Enter the number of the first line of data in the 1st Data Line box.
6. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list.
7. Select a Field Separator from the list.
8. Select the Update Records check box if you want to replace the data of records already existing in the table.
56 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: A9155 compares the values in the left-most column of the data to be imported with the val-
ues in the same column of the data table to see if records already exist. The values of these
records are replaced when the Update Records check box is selected. If the Update
Records check box is not selected, these records are not imported.
9. Under Field Mapping, there are two header rows:

- Source: The column headers from the text file you are importing.
- Destination: The column headers from the A9155 data table.
Align the content of the source file with the content of the destination file by clicking the column header in the Desti-
nation row and selecting the corresponding column from the A9155 data file (see Figure 1.27). Select <Ignore>
for source file columns that you do not want to import.
Tip: You can change the width of the columns to make the contents easier to work with. See
"Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 52.
Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Import dialogue as a configuration file by
clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the
Save As dialogue that appears. The next time you export a data table, you can click Load
in the Import dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this
time.
10. Click Import. The contents are imported in the current A9155 data table.
Figure 1.27: Importing information into a data table
For information on exporting the information in a data table into a text file, see "Exporting Tables to External Files" on
page 55.
1.6 Printing in A9155

In A9155, you can print any part of your document, including maps, data tables, document reports, and antenna patterns.
This section explains the following:
"Printing Data Tables and Reports" on page 58
"Printing a Map" on page 58
"Printing a Docking Window" on page 60
"Printing Antenna Patterns" on page 61.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 57

A9155 User Manual
1.6.1 Printing Data Tables and Reports

Data tables and reports are both presented in tabular format in A9155 and can, therefore, both be printed in the same way.
If you wish to see how the table will appear once printed, see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 60.
To print a table:
1. Open the table.
2. If you want to print an area of the table, select it by clicking in one corner of the area and dragging diagonally to
the opposite corner.
3. Select File > Print.
4. If you want to print only a selected area, choose Selected in the Print dialogue.
5. Click OK to print.
1.6.2 Printing a Map

You can print a map in A9155 and create a paper copy of studies, predictions, etc. A9155 offers several options allowing
you to customise and optimise the printed map. A9155 supports printing to a variety of paper sizes, including A4 and A0.
Before you print a map, you have the following options:
You can print the entire map, or you can define an area of the map to be printed in one of the following ways:
- Selecting the print area (see "Defining the Printing Zone" on page 59).
- Creating a focus zone (see "Drawing a Focus Zone or Hot Spot Zones" on page 42).
You can accept the default layout or you can modify the print layout (see "Defining the Print Layout" on page 59).
You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 60).
Important: Printing graphics is a memory-intensive operation and can make heavy demands on your
printer. Before printing for the first time, you should review the "Printing Recommendations"
on page 58 to avoid any memory-related problems.
To print a map:
1. Select the document window containing the map.
2. You now have the following options before printing the map:
- You can select a print area ("Defining the Printing Zone" on page 59) or create a focus zone ("Drawing a Focus
Zone or Hot Spot Zones" on page 42).
- You can modify the print layout ("Defining the Print Layout" on page 59).
- You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 60).
4. Click OK.
1.6.2.1 Printing Recommendations

The appearance of the map is determined by the arrangement and properties of the objects the map contains. Objects in
A9155 are arranged in layers. The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) are the most visible on the
screen and in print. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above it and on the transparency of these
layers (for information on transparency, see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 35).
Before printing a map, it is recommended to organise the layers from top to bottom as follows, when a document contains
surface layers (raster maps or polygonal vector maps), lines (vectors such as roads, or airport), and points (measure-
ments, etc.):
Points (vectors)
Roads and Lines (vectors)
Surface polygons (vectors)
Multi-format maps - population, rain, generic, and traffic maps (vector or raster)
Clutter class maps (transparent raster maps)
Images, DTM, or clutter height maps (Non transparent maps)
Sites and Transmitters must be above all the other layers. For this reason, visible objects on the Data tab, for example,
sites, transmitters, and predictions, are displayed above objects on the Geo tab. For performance reasons, however, it is
strongly recommended to put vector layers, such as roads, over predictions. This will ensure that these vector layers are
visible when you print the map.
To put vector layers from the Geo tab over predictions:
1. In the Explorer window, click the Geo tab.
2. Right-click the vector layer you wish to move to the Data tab. The context menu appears.
3. Select Transfer to Data from the context menu.
4. Click the Data tab.
5. Drag the vector layer to a position above Predictions but below Sites, Antennas, and Transmitters.
58 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

1.6.2.2 Defining the Printing Zone


context menu.
1.6.2.3 Defining the Print Layout

You can use the Print Setup dialogue to define how your map will appear when you print it. On the Print Setup dialogue,
you can:
Set the scale of the map.
Choose to print the rulers with the map.
Choose to print the area outside the focus zone.
Choose to print the legend.
Add a title, comment, or a logo.
Select paper size and source, as well as the page orientation and the margins.
To define the appearance of your map:
1. Select File > Print Setup. The Print Setup dialogue appears.
2. Under Print, you can select the following to be printed:
- Rulers: Select the Rulers check box if you want to print the map with rulers.
- Area Inside the Focus Zone Only: Select the Area Inside the Focus Zone Only check box if you want to
print the area defined by the focus zone.
- Legend: From the Legend list, select where on the printed map the legend will appear. If you do not want to
the legend to appear, select "(None)."
3. Under Logo, you can define a graphic that appears on the printed map. The graphic can be a company logo or
other information, such copyright information, in the form of a BMP graphic.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 59

A9155 User Manual
Note: Only BMP graphics can be used as logos. If your logo is in a different format, you must first
convert it using a graphics programme to the BMP format.
a. Select the Header check box to add a logo to the top or select the Footer check box to add a logo to the bottom
of the printed map. You can define a logo for both the header and the footer of the page.
b. For the selected check box, click the Properties button. The Logo dialogue appears.
c. Click File. The Open dialogue appears.
d. Select the your graphic in BMP format and click Open.
e. Select the correct Width and Height (in pixels).
f. Click OK.
4. To add a comment:
a. Click Comment. The Comment dialogue appears.
b. Enter the comment and click Font if you wish to change the appearance of the comment.
c. Click OK. The comment will appear centred underneath the map.
5. To add a title:
a. Click Title. The Title dialogue appears.
b. Enter the title and click Font if you wish to change the appearance of the title.
c. Click OK. The title will appear centred above the map.
6. Under Scaling, you can set the scale of the map:
- Select Fit to Page. The selected area of the map will be scaled to fit the page. When you select Fit to Page
it is not possible to know the exact scale that the map will be printed in.
Note: Visibility scales defined for objects are taken into account when printing. Objects will appear
only if the printing scale is within their respective visibility range. For more information on
visibility scales, see "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 35.
- Select Scale and entering a value in the text box. The selected area of the map will be printed in the selected
scale.
7. Under Paper, select:
- Size: Select size of the paper from the list.
- Source: Select the source of the paper.
- Orientation: Select whether the map should be printed in portrait or landscape mode.
8. Under Margins, set the left, right, top, and bottom margins.
9. Click OK.
1.6.3 Previewing Your Printing

If you are printing maps or data tables or reports, you can preview your printing.
To preview your printing:
1. Select the map or table you want to print.
2. Select File > Print Preview. The Print Preview dialogue appears.
3. In the Print Preview dialogue, you can:
- Choose Print to open the Print dialogue.
- Choose Zoom In or Zoom Out.
- Choose Next Page to display the following page or Prove Page to display the previous page.
- Choose Two Page to display two pages side by side, or One Page.
1.6.4 Printing a Docking Window

You can print the content of many docking windows using the context menu; the Print command on the File menu can be
used only to print the contents of a document window, as explained in "Printing a Map" on page 58. The docking windows
whose contents you can print are:
Legend Window (for more information on this tool, see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 36)
Point Analysis Tool
CW Measurement Analysis Tool (for more information on this tool, see the Measurements and Model Calibration
Guide.
Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool (for more information on this tool, see "Using the Test Mobile Data Window" on
page 525)
Microwave Link Analysis (for more information on this tool, see "Microwave Link Analysis" on page 814)
60 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To print the content of a docking window:

1. Open the docking window you want to print.
- If you want to print a Point Analysis window, click the tab of the study you wish to print.
2. Right-click the window you wish to print.
3. Select Print from the context menu. The Print dialogue appears.
1.6.5 Printing Antenna Patterns

You can print the horizontal or vertical pattern of an antenna.
To print an antenna pattern:
1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.
2. Open the Antennas table:
- To open the RF Antennas table:
i. Right-click the Antennas folder.
ii. Select Open Table from the context menu.
- To open the microwave Antennas table:
i. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder.
ii. Right-click the Links folder and select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu.
3. Right-click the antenna whose pattern you want to print.
4. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears.
5. Select the Horizontal Pattern tab or the Vertical Pattern tab.
6. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Linear or Logarithmic from the context menu.
7. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Print from the context menu.
1.7 Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data

In A9155 you can organise data in several different ways, allowing you to select only certain data and then, for example,
modify only selected data, or run calculations on the selected data. A9155 allows you to group, sort, or filter data quickly
by one criterion, or by several.
After you have defined how you will group, sort, or filter data, you can save this information as a folder configuration.
In this section the following will be explained:
"Grouping Data Objects" on page 61
"Sorting Data" on page 64
"Filtering Data" on page 66
"Folder Configurations" on page 71
"Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 73
1.7.1 Grouping Data Objects

You can group objects according to a selected property on the Data tab of the Explorer window. The objects to be grouped
can be in a data folder or in a subfolder (see "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 73). You can also define the
properties by which you can group objects. Grouping objects in the Explorer window is similar to sorting data in the data
table because it puts all records with the selected property together.
Once you have grouped data objects, you can access their Properties dialogue from the context menu to edit properties
on all grouped objects. You can save the grouping parameters as a folder configuration. For information, see "Folder
Configurations" on page 71.
This section explains:
"Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property" on page 62
"Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 62
"Advanced Grouping" on page 63.
For examples of grouping data objects, see "Examples of Grouping" on page 63.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 61

A9155 User Manual
1.7.1.1 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property

You can group data objects by a selected property using the Group by command on the context menu.
To group data objects by a selected property:
2. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you want to group.
3. Select from the Group by submenu of the context menu the property by which you want to group the objects. The
objects in the folder are grouped by that property.
Note: If the range of properties available in the Group by submenu has been configured as
explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 62, you can select additional
properties by selecting More Fields from the Group by submenu. For information on using
the dialogue that appears, see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 62.
To undo the grouping:

2. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped.
3. From the context menu, select from the Group by > None.
See "Examples of Grouping" on page 63.
1.7.1.2 Configuring the Group By Submenu

Some data objects, such as transmitters, have a large number of properties that will appear by default in the Group by
submenu. You can make it easier to group data objects by configuring the Group By submenu to display only the prop-
erties that are relevant for grouping.
To configure the Group By submenu:
2. Right-click the folder whose Group By submenu you want to configure. The context menu appears.
3. Select Properties from the context menu.
4. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue.
5. Click the Configure button next to the Group By field that shows how the data objects are presently grouped. The
Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.30).
Figure 1.29: The Configuration dialogue
6. Select the fields you want to appear in the Group By submenu:

a. To select a field to appear in the Group By submenu, select the field in the Available Fields list and click
to move it to the Grouping Fields list.

b. To remove a field from the list of Grouping Fields, select the field in the Grouping Fields list and click
to remove it.
c. To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The objects
will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Grouping Fields list, from top to bottom.
7. Click OK to close the Configuration dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. The Group By sub-
menu will now contain only the fields you selected.
62 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

1.7.1.3 Advanced Grouping

You can group data objects by one or more properties, using the Group by button on the Properties dialogue.
To group data objects by one or more properties:
5. Click the Group By button. The Group dialogue appears (see Figure 1.30).
Figure 1.30: The Group dialogue
6. Select the fields by which you want to group the objects:

a. To select a field to be used to group the objects, select the field in the Available Fields list and click
to move it to the Group these fields in this order list.

b. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order, select the field in the Group these fields
in this order list and click to remove it.
c. To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The objects
will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Group these fields in this order list, from top to bottom.
7. Click OK to close the Group dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue and group the objects.
To undo the grouping:
3. From the context menu, select from the Group by > None.
1.7.1.4 Examples of Grouping

In this example, there is an A9155 document with a large number of sites and, therefore, transmitters. While it is easy to
see on the map which transmitters are part of which site, in the Explorer window, you can only see a very long list of trans-
mitters under the Transmitter folder.
By right-clicking the Transmitter folder and selecting Group by > Site (Figure 1.31), you can group the transmitters by the
site they are located on.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 63

A9155 User Manual
Figure 1.31: Grouping transmitters by site
The result of grouping can be seen in Figure 1.32.
Figure 1.32: Transmitters grouped by site
1.7.2 Sorting Data

In A9155, you can sort the document data either in the data tables or using the Sort function of Properties dialogue. You
can sort the data in ascending (A to Z, 1 to 10) or descending (Z to A, 10 to 1) order.
You can sort the data by either one or by several columns. When you sort data by several columns, A9155 sorts the
records by the first column and then, within each group of identical values in the first column, A9155 then sorts the records
by the second column, and so on.
Once you have sorted data objects, you can save the settings as a folder configuration. For information, see "Folder
Configurations" on page 71.
"Sorting Data in Tables" on page 65
"Advanced Sorting" on page 65
64 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

1.7.2.1 Sorting Data in Tables

When sorting data in tables, you can sort by one column or by several columns.
Sorting by One Column
To sort data in a table by one column:

1. Select the header of the table column that will be your sort reference. The entire column is selected.
2. Right-click the column header. The context menu appears.
3. From the context menu, select how you wish to sort:
- Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the reference column to the highest
value.
- Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the reference column to the lowest
value.
Sorting by Several Columns
You can only sort in a table by adjacent columns. If you want to sort by columns that are not adjacent, you can move the
columns first as explained in "Moving Columns" on page 53.
Tip: If you want to sort data by several columns without moving the columns, you can use the
Sort function on the Properties dialogue. For information, see "Advanced Sorting" on
page 65.
To sort data in a table by several columns:

2. Click the header of the first column and drag over the adjacent columns that will be your sort references. The entire
column is selected.
3. Right-click the column headers. The context menu appears.
4. From the context menu, select how you wish to sort:
- Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the first reference column to the highest
value.
- Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the first reference column to the lowest
value.
1.7.2.2 Advanced Sorting

You can sort data by several criteria using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue.
To sort data using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue:
2. Right-click the folder whose data you want to sort. The context menu appears
4. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue.
5. Click . The Sort dialogue appears (see Figure 1.33).

6. For the first column you want to sort on:
a. Select the column name from the Sort by list.
b. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order.
7. For each other column you want to sort on:
a. Select the column name from the And by list.
b. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order.
8. Click OK.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 65

A9155 User Manual
Figure 1.33: The Sort dialogue
1.7.3 Filtering Data

In A9155, you can filter data according to one or several criteria. You can filter data to be able to work with a subset of
data, or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of records displayed.
The filtered data objects are the data objects that remain after you have applied your filter criteria.
You can save the filtering parameters as a folder configuration. For information, see "Folder Configurations" on page 71.
"Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 66
"Advanced Data Filtering" on page 67
"Restoring All Records" on page 68
"Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 68.
1.7.3.1 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection

You can filter a data table by selecting one or more values. Once you have selected one or more values, you can choose
to view only records that have the same value or only records that do not have that value.
To filter a data table on one or more fields:
2. Select the value to filter on. To select more than one value, press CTRL as you click the other values.
3. Select one of the following from the Records menu:
- Filter by Selection: All records with the selected value or values are displayed. You can now modify these
records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see Figure 1.34 on
page 66).
- Filter Excluding Selection: All records without the selected value or values are displayed. You can now
modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see
Figure 1.35 on page 67).
Figure 1.34: Filtering by selection (Antenna AO9209)
66 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 1.35: Filtering excluding selection (Antenna AO9209)
1.7.3.2 Advanced Data Filtering

You can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters.
To create an advanced filter:
2. Select Records > Advanced Filter. The Filter dialogue appears.
Tip: You can also access the Filter dialogue by clicking the Filter button of the Properties dia-
logue.
3. Click the Filter tab:

a. Select a Field from the list.
b. Under Values to Include, you will find all the values represented in the selected field. Select the check boxes
next to the values you want to include in the filter. Click Clear All to clear all check boxes.
Note: Making selections on the Filter tab of the Filter dialogue is the equivalent of filtering by
selection as explained in "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 66.
4. Click the Advanced tab:

a. In the Column row, select the name of the column to be filtered on from the list. Select as many columns as
you want (see Figure 1.36).
Figure 1.36: The Filter dialogue - Advanced tab
b. Underneath each column name, enter the criteria on which the column will be filtered as explained in the fol-
lowing table:
Formula Data are kept in the table only if

=X value equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
<> X value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters)
<X numerical value is less than X
>X numerical value is greater than X
<=X numerical value is less than or equal to X
>=X numerical value is greater than or equal to X
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 67

A9155 User Manual

*X* text objects which contain X
*X text objects end with X
X* text objects which start with X
5. Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined.
Combinations of filters are first made horizontally, then vertically.
See "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 68.
1.7.3.3 Restoring All Records

After you have applied filter criteria to records, you may want to cancel the filter criteria and display all the records again.
To restore all records:
Select Records > Show All Records.
1.7.3.4 Advanced Filtering: Examples

In this section, you will find a few examples of advanced filtering.
1.7.3.4.1 Advanced Filtering: Example 1

In this example, there is an A9155 document with antennas from two manufacturers and with different characteristics.
Figure 1.37: Initial table

The objective of this example is to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between
50 and 100. To do this, the following filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on
the Advanced tab, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 67):
The first criterion, as shown in Figure 1.38, is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a
"K" ("=K*"). While you could write in the entire name ("=Kathrein"), it is not necessary because there is only one
manufacturer with a "K."
The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100.
The third criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth over 50.
The combination of these criteria is all antennas from manufacturers with a name beginning with "K" and with a beamwidth
under 100 but over 50.
The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1.38.
68 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 1.38: Advanced filtering

In this example, the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 68. The objective of this example
is the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100.
The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab, see "Advanced
Data Filtering" on page 67), in this case, however, the entered filter syntax contains errors:
As shown in Figure 1.39, the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a
"K" ("=K*").
The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100 and over 50.
Figure 1.39: Errors in filtering

As previously stated, the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with
a beamwidth between 50 and 100. However, because the second criterion (beamwidth under 100 and over 50) is
malformed, with "> 50" placed under "< 100", it functioned as an OR condition and not as an AND condition. The resulting
filter searched for all antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth under 100, or all antennas over 50; all anten-
nas are displayed.

In this example, the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 68. The objective of this example
is the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100.
The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab, see "Advanced
Data Filtering" on page 67), in this case, however, the entered filter syntax contains errors:
As shown in Figure 1.40, the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a
"K" ("=K*").
The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100 and over 50.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 69

A9155 User Manual
Figure 1.40: Errors in filtering
As previously stated, the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with
a beamwidth between 50 and 100. However, because the second criterion is malformed, the filter only generates an error
message and no antennas are filtered out.
1.7.4 User Configurations

In A9155, you can export many types of settings you have made in a user configuration and then import the settings in
another document. If you are working in a multiple-user environment with a central database, the information stored in a
user configuration, such as, geographic data or automatic neighbour allocation parameters, is not stored in the database.
You can create a user configuration file, however, to ensure that all users in a large radio-planning project use the same
settings.
The file extension of the user configuration file is CFG. If only the geographic data set or computation and focus zones are
being exported in the user configuration file, A9155 gives the file the extension "GEO." Because the file is in XML (eXten-
sible Markup Language), you can open and edit it with any XML-capable text editor.
When you create a user configuration file, you can export the following information:
Geographic data set: The complete path of imported geographic maps, map display settings (such as, the visi-
bility scale, transparency, tips text, etc.), clutter description (code, name, height, standard deviations, indoor loss,
orthogonality factor, the percentage of pilot finger of each clutter class, default standard deviations, and indoor
loss) and raster or user profile traffic map description. Vector maps must have the same coordinate system as the
raster maps.
Important: If you export the geographic data set in a user configuration file, the coordinate system of
any vector geographic data must be the same as that of the raster geographic data.
Computation and Focus Zones: The computation and focus zone in the current document.
Folder configurations: Sorting, grouping and filtering settings (those saved by the user and the current settings,
even if not saved), the filtering zone, and the display settings of radio data folders (including measurement display
settings).
Automatic Neighbour Allocation Parameters: The input parameters of the automatic neighbour allocation.
Automatic Scrambling Code Allocation Parameters: The parameters of the automatic scrambling code alloca-
tion (this option applies to UMTS documents only).
Prediction List: The general information (name, comments, group, and sorting and filtering settings), prediction
coverage conditions, and display settings of coverage predictions that have been created.
AFP Configuration: Calculation options selected when starting an AFP session as well as calculation parameters
used for interference histograms (this option applies to GSM documents only).
Automatic PN Offset Allocation Parameters: The parameters of the automatic PN offset allocation. (this option
applies to cdmaOne/CDMA2000 documents only).
Microwave Link Parameters: The settings of microwave links.
Macros: The complete path of any macros. Because a macro is linked to an A9155 session, and not to a specific
A9155 document, you can export the macros in a user configuration even if you do not have an A9155 document
open.
"Exporting a User Configuration" on page 71
"Importing a User Configuration" on page 71.
70 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

1.7.4.1 Exporting a User Configuration

You create a user configuration by exporting the selected settings to an external file.
To export a user configuration:
1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.41).
Figure 1.41: Exporting a user configuration
2. Select the check boxes of the information you want to export as part of the user configuration.
3. Click OK. The Save As dialogue appears.
4. Enter a File name for the user configuration file and click Save. The folder configuration has been saved.
1.7.4.2 Importing a User Configuration

You can import a user configuration that you or another user has created, as explained in "Exporting a User Configuration"
on page 71, it into your current A9155 document.
To import a user configuration:
1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. The Open dialogue appears.
2. Select the user configuration file with the data you want to import.
3. Click Open. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.42).
Figure 1.42: Importing a user configuration

4. Select the check boxes of the information you want to import.
5. Click OK. The user configuration is imported.
1.7.5 Folder Configurations

In A9155, the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped, sorted, or filtered are referred to as a folder
configuration. You can define folder configurations and save them, allowing you to consistently apply the same grouping,
filtering, or sorting criteria.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 71

A9155 User Manual

"Creating a Folder Configuration" on page 72
"Applying a Saved Folder Configuration" on page 72
"Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration" on page 72
"Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 72
"Importing a Folder Configuration" on page 73
"Deleting a Folder Configuration" on page 73.
Note: For transmitters, there is a default folder configuration called Same as Sites Folder. You
can apply this configuration to arrange the transmitters in the Transmitters folder with the
same parameters as those defined for sites.
1.7.5.1 Creating a Folder Configuration

In A9155, you can save the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped, filtered, or sorted as a folder
configuration.
To create a configuration:
2. Right-click the folder whose settings you want to save.
5. If you have not yet done so, set the following parameters as desired:
- Group by (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 61)
- Sort (see "Sorting Data" on page 64)
- Filter (see "Filtering Data" on page 66).
6. Under Configuration, click Save.
7. Enter the name of the configuration in the Save Configuration dialogue.
8. Click OK to save the configuration and click OK to close the Properties dialogue.
The saved folder configuration is only available for the current folder and can be reapplied to the folder by selecting it from
the Configurations submenu on the folders context menu.
1.7.5.2 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration

You can apply a configuration that has been created and saved for the present folder.
To apply a saved folder configuration:
2. Right-click the folder to which you want to apply a configuration. The context menu appears.
3. On the Configurations submenu, select the name of the configuration you want to apply. The folder configuration
is applied to the current folder.
1.7.5.3 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration

If you have grouped, filtered, or sorted a data folder, you have created and applied a folder configuration. If you then add
or modify data, the properties of these may not match the folder configuration you previously made on the data folder. In
this case, you can reapply the same filter or sort settings to the new or modified data.
To reapply the folder configuration:
2. Right-click the folder whose folder configuration you want to reapply.
3. Select Apply Current Configuration from the context menu. The previously configured folder configuration is
reapplied to the data.
1.7.5.4 Exporting a Folder Configuration

When you create a folder configuration, you save it to the current ATL document. However, you can export it as part of a
user configuration to an external file, so that it can be used in other documents.
To export a folder configuration:
1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.41 on
page 71).
2. Select the Folder Configuration check box.
If you want to export other configurations at the same time, select those check boxes as well.
72 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

4. Enter a File name for the CFG file and click Save. The folder configuration has been saved.
1.7.5.5 Importing a Folder Configuration

Once you have exported a folder configuration as explained in "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 72, you can
import it into your current document.
To import a folder configuration:
2. Select the CFG file with the folder configuration you want to import.
3. Click Open. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.42 on page 71).
4. Select the Folder Configuration check box.
If you want to import other configurations at the same time, select those check boxes as well.
5. Click OK. The folder configuration is imported.
1.7.5.6 Deleting a Folder Configuration

You can delete a folder configuration from the A9155 document when you no longer need it.
To delete a folder configuration:
2. Right-click the folder with the folder configuration you want to delete.
5. Under Configuration, select the name of the configuration from the list.
6. Click Delete. The folder configuration is deleted.
Caution: When you delete a folder configuration, A9155 will not ask for confirmation; it is deleted
immediately.
1.7.6 Creating and Comparing Subfolders

You can compare the effects of different grouping, sorting, or filtering settings by creating subfolders of object folders in
the Data tab and applying different settings to each subfolder. Each subfolder contains a copy of the data in the object
folder in which it was created.
To create a subfolder of a folder:
1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window, right-click the folder you want to create a subfolder of.
2. Select Create a Subfolder from the context menu. A subfolder is created containing a copy of the original folder
content.
You can now perform the following actions on the subfolder:
Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 61)
Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 64)
Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 66).
Tip: If you have created several subfolders, you can rename each one to give it a more descrip-
tive name. For information on renaming an object, see "Renaming an Object" on page 29.
Once you have performed the actions on each subfolder, you can compare the differences, by displaying in turn each
subfolder, with its grouping, sorting, or filtering settings, on the map. For more information on display properties, see
"Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
To compare subfolders:
1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window, clear the check boxes to the left of each subfolder. The data objects are
not displayed on the map.
2. Select the check box of one of the subfolders, leaving the check boxes of the other subfolders cleared. The data
objects of the selected subfolder, with its associated grouping, sorting, or filtering settings, are displayed on the
map.
3. Clear this check box and select the check box of a different subfolder. How the objects are displayed on the map
will change, depending on the different grouping, sorting, or filtering settings of the selected subfolder.
You can remove subfolders by deleting them. When you delete a subfolder, the data contained are not deleted. When you
delete the last subfolder, the data reappear under the initial folder.
To delete a subfolder:
Right-click the subfolder to be deleted and select Delete from the context menu.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 73

A9155 User Manual
Tip: If, after deleting the last subfolder, the data do not reappear under the initial folder, you can
refresh the display by right-clicking the folder and selecting Group by > None from the
context menu.
1.7.7 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone

In A9155, you can simplify your calculations by using a polygon on the map to limit the amount of data considered in calcu-
lations. By limiting the number of sites, you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation of data
objects on the map clearer. You can select a pre-existing computation or focus zone as a filter zoneor you can draw a new
filtering zone.
The data objects filtered by the polygon are reflected on the map and in the data tables. When you have applied a polygon
filter, you can perform the following actions on the filtered data:
Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 61)
Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 64)
Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 66).
For more information on creating and editing a filtering zone, see "Using a Filtering Zone" on page 41.
1.8 Tips and Tricks

In this section, you will learn a few shortcuts and tricks to help you work more efficiently with A9155.
1.8.1 Undoing and Redoing

You can undo or redo most actions in A9155, up to a maximum of 10 actions. If you perform an action that can not be
undone, for example, a simulation, the Undo and Redo histories are erased.
For example, you can undo or redo:
Most modifications in the workspace: such as creating, deleting, and moving a site, a station or a group of sta-
tions, modifying the antenna azimuth, moving a transmitter, or deleting a transmitter,
Tasks performed in the Explorer: such as creating and deleting objects (sites, transmitters, repeaters or remote
antennas, antennas, links, groups of hexagons, measurement paths, prediction studies, maps, propagation
models, etc.).
Tasks performed in tables: such as adding or deleting records, pasting in tables.
To undo an action:
Select Edit > Undo.
To redo an action that you have undone:
Select Edit > Redo.
1.8.2 Refreshing Maps and Folders

Under certain circumstances, for example, when you add data that is inconsistent with an applied filter, the data displayed
on the map or in the Explorer window, may not be actual. You can refresh the display to get A9155 to reload the data and
reapply the current configurations to folders.
To refresh the display of the Explorer window and the map:
Click the Refresh button ( ) on the toolbar or press F5.
1.8.3 Searching for Objects on the Map

A9155 provides several tools for finding data objects on the map. You can search for some objects (sites, transmitters,
repeaters, or links) by their name, using the Find toolbar. By using the Location Finder, you can search for a site, a trans-
mitter, a repeater, a microwave link, or a vector by any text field. You can also use the Location Finder to search for a
point on the map by its x and y coordinates.
This section explains:
"Searching for a Map Object by Its Name" on page 74
"Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 75
"Searching for a Point on the Map" on page 75.
1.8.3.1 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name

You can use the Find toolbar to search for the following map objects by name:
sites
transmitters
repeaters
74 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

links.
To search for a map object by name using the Find toolbar:
1. Select View > Find Toolbar to display the Find toolbar.
Note: You can change the Find toolbar to a floating window by double-clicking it.
2. From the Find list, choose the map object you are searching for:
- Site
- Transmitter
- Repeater
- Link
3. Enter the name of the object in the Named box. You can use an asterisk as a wild card in the following ways:
- *X* names which contain X
- X* names which start with X
- *X names which end with X
4. Press ENTER. A9155 selects the object and centres it in the map window.
Note: You can also search for a map object by its name by using the Location Finder. For infor-
mation, see "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 75.
1.8.3.2 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property

You can use the Location Finder to search for the following map object using any text (i.e., non-numeric) property:
sites
transmitters
repeaters
links
vectors.
To search for a map object by a text property using the Location Finder:
1. Click the Location Finder button ( ) on the toolbar. The Location Finder dialogue appears.
2. From the Find list, choose the map object you are searching for:
- Site
- Transmitter
- Repeater
- Link
- Vector
3. If you wish to search all the sites in the search, including sites that are presently filtered out, select the Include all
the sites in the search (filtered or not) check box.
4. Under Criteria, select a Field to be searched and enter the value of the field. You can use an asterisk as a wild
card in the following ways:
- *X* text objects which contain X
- X* text objects which start with X
5. Click OK. A9155 selects the site and centres it in the map window.
1.8.3.3 Searching for a Point on the Map

You can search for a point by entering its x and y coordinates in the Location Finder.
To search on the map for a point using the Location Finder:
1. Click the Location Finder button ( ) on the toolbar. The Location Finder dialogue appears.
2. From the Find list, choose Point.
3. Enter the x and y coordinates of the point, using the same units as defined under Display on the Coordinates tab
of the Options dialogue (see "Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 84).
4. Click OK. A9155 marks the point ( ) and centres it in the map window.
Note: To remove the point icon ( ), select it and then select Delete from the context menu.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 75

A9155 User Manual
1.8.4 Using the Status Bar to Get Information

A9155 displays the following information, if available, about the current position of the mouse pointer in right side of the
status bar (see Figure 1.43):
the current X-Y coordinates (according to the defined display coordinate system)
the altitude (as defined in the DTM)
the clutter class (as defined in the clutter classes properties)
the clutter height (as defined in the clutter height file, or in the clutter classes).
X-Y coordinates Altitude Clutter class

(from DTM)
Figure 1.43: Information displayed in the status bar
1.8.5 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer

A9155 displays information about the current document in the Event Viewer. The information displayed includes warnings
and the progress of calculations. You can save the information displayed in the Event Viewer in a log file.
To save events in the Event Viewer in a log file:
1. If the Event Viewer is not displayed, select View > Event Viewer to display it.
2. Click the event in the Event Viewer to select it. Click and drag to select several events.
3. Right-click the select event(s). The context menu appears.
4. Select Save As. The Save As dialogue appears.
5. In the Save As dialogue, select a destination folder, enter a File name, and select a file type from the Save as
type list.
6. Click OK. The selected events are saved in the text file.
1.8.6 Using Icons from the Toolbar

You can access many commands in A9155 by clicking its icon on the toolbar. Some of them are also linked to shortcut
keys (see "Using Shortcuts in A9155" on page 78).
The different icons located in the toolbar are listed below:
In the Standard toolbar
Open the Project Templates dialogue (CTRL+N)
Open the Open dialogue (CTRL+O)
Save the current document (CTRL+S)
Cut the selected data (CTRL+X)
Copy the selected data (CTRL+C)
Paste the content of the clipboard (CTRL+V)
Print the current window (table or map) (CTRL+P)
Open the About A9155 dialogue

In the Radio toolbar
Create a new station based on the currently selected model
Create a new group of hexagons based on the currently selected station template ( indicates that no hexa-
gon radius is defined)
Station model currently selected
Create a new repeater or remote antenna for the currently selected transmitter
76 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Graphically manage neighbours for the selected transmitter
Open the Point Analysis window
Calculate only invalid matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations (F7)
Force the calculation of all matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations (CTRL+F7)
Stop the calculation of all matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations
In the Map toolbar
Select area
Refresh display of map and folders (F5)
Disable zooming and panning tools.
Move the map window (CTRL+D)
Map scale currently used
Previous/Next view (zoom and location)
Zoom in on the map and centre on the cursor location (CTRL+A) and zoom out on the map and centre on the
cursor location (CTRL+R)
Define a zoom area on the map (CTRL+W)
Turn on tool tips
Measure distances on the map
Location finder
Display a point-to-point profile
In the Microwave link toolbar
Create a new microwave link.
Create a new multi-hop microwave link.
Create a new point-to-multipoint microwave link.
Currently selected microwave link model
Activate the microwave link profile analysis window
Show or hide victim and interferer links
Show or hide site parities
Stop the calculations in progress

In the Search toolbar
Centre site in the map window.
In the Vector Edition toolbar
Create a new vector layer (in either the Geo or the Data tab)
Select the vector layer to edit
Draw a new polygon
Draw a new line
Draw points
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 77

A9155 User Manual
Merge several vector polygons
Cut out areas in polygons
Create new polygon from overlapping areas
Split one polygon along the drawn lines.
Note: When you place the cursor over an icon, a tool tip appears, giving a short description.
1.8.7 Using Shortcuts in A9155

A9155 provides many shortcuts that enable you to access commonly used tools and commands more quickly.
The shortcuts available are listed below (some of the same commands can be accessed using a toolbar icon; see "Using
Icons from the Toolbar" on page 76):
Using the CTRL key:
- CTRL+A:
- In tables: Select all records
- In the map window: Zoom in on the map (toolbar: select and click)
- CTRL+C: Copy the selected data (toolbar: select )

- CTRL+D:
- In tables: Copy the first cell of a selection down into all selected cells
- In the map window: Move the map window (toolbar: select )
- CTRL+F: Open the Find dialogue in a table
- CTRL+N: Open the Project Templates dialogue (toolbar: select )
- CTRL+O: Open the Open dialogue (toolbar: select )
- CTRL+P: Print the current window (toolbar: select )
- CTRL+Q: Select Zoom In/Out tool (toolbar: select )
- CTRL+R: Zoom out on the map (toolbar: select and Right-click the map)
- CTRL+S: Save the current active document (toolbar: select )

- CTRL+U: Copy the last cell of a selection up into all selected cells
- CTRL+V: Paste the content of the clipboard (toolbar: select )
- CTRL+W: Define a zoom area on the map (toolbar: select )
- CTRL+X: Cut the selected data (toolbar: select )

- CTRL+Y: Redo the previous undone modification
- CTRL+Z: Undo the last modification
Using the Function Keys
- F3: Select the Find Site tool.
- F5: Refresh display of map and folders (toolbar: select )
- F7: Calculate only invalid matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations (toolbar: select )
- CTRL+F7: Force the calculation of all matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations (toolbar: select
)
Tip: Menus and commands can be also accessed by pressing the ALT key and typing the under-
lined letter in the menu or command name.
78 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

CHAPTER 2
STARTING AN A9155 PROJECT
A9155 User Manual
80 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Chapter 2: Starting an A9155 Project
2 Starting an A9155 Project

When you want to start a new project, you base it on a template that has the data and folder structure necessary for the
technology you are using. Once you have started your new A9155 project, you can modify the network parameters to meet
your particular needs. Several templates are supplied with A9155: GPS GPRS EGPRS, CDMA200 1xRTT 1xEV-DO,
IS-95 cdmaOne, microwave radio links, UMTS HSPA, and WiMAX. The actual templates supplied depend on the modules
included with your A9155 installation. You can also create your own templates by opening an existing template and saving
it as a new template, once you have made the changes necessary to meet your own needs.
When you open an existing project, you can select it from the File menu, if it is one of the last projects you have worked
on, or you can open it from the Open dialogue. Because A9155 can work with linked geographic data files, it may happen
that one of the linked files was moved or renamed since the last time you worked on that project. A9155 enables you to
find the file and repair the link.
In this chapter, the following are explained:
"Before Starting a Radio-Planning Project" on page 81
"Creating an A9155 Document" on page 81.
2.1 Before Starting a Radio-Planning Project

For every radio-planning project you must assemble the information necessary:
Radio equipment: sites, transmitters, antennas, repeaters, and other equipment. For more information on radio
equipment, see the technology-specific chapters.
Radio data: frequency bands, technology-specific parameters, coordinate systems, etc. For more information on
radio data, see the technology-specific chapters.
Geographic data: clutter classes, clutter heights, DTM, population maps, etc. For more information on geographic
data, see Chapter 2: Starting an A9155 Project.
Once the necessary data have been assembled, you can create the A9155 document.
2.2 Creating an A9155 Document

Whatever the radio technology you will be modelling, you create an A9155 documents in one of two days:
From a template: You can create a new A9155 document from a template. A9155 is delivered with a template
for each technology you will be planning for. For information on creating a document from a template, see "Cre-
ating a New A9155 Document From a Template" on page 81.
You can also create your own template by basing it on an existing document that you have already customised
with, for example, certain geo data or antennas.
From a database: When you create a new A9155 document from a database, the database you connect to has
been created with the technology and data you need. Working with a database allows several users to share the
same data while at the same time managing data consistency. The exact procedure for creating a new A9155
document from a database differs, depending on the database containing the data. A9155 can work with several
common databases. For information on starting a document from a database, see "Creating a New A9155 Docu-
ment From a Database" on page 87.
2.2.1 Creating a New A9155 Document From a Template

You can create a new A9155 document from a template. A9155 has a template for each technology you will be planning
for. Each template provides data and a data structure suitable for the technology. For example, the tabs in the transmitter
Properties dialogue as well as the radio parameters available differ according to the project. As well, the objects that are
available are appropriate for the technology. For example, UMTS cells are only available in UMTS documents and TRX
are only available GSM-TDMA documents.
Once you have selected the appropriate template for your radio planning project, you configure the basic parameters of
the A9155 document (see "Defining a New A9155 Document" on page 83).
"Templates Available" on page 81
"Creating a New A9155 Document From a Template" on page 82
"Defining a New A9155 Document" on page 83
2.2.1.1 Templates Available

Depending on your configuration of A9155, the following templates are available:
GSM/GPRS/EGPRS: This template can be used to model second generation (2G) mobile telecommunications
using TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access) technology. This template can be used to model the following tech-
nologies:
- GSM (Global System for Mobile Communication): GSM is a 2G technology based on TDMA.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 81

A9155 User Manual
- GPRS (General Packet Radio Service): GPRS is a packet-switched technology that enables data applica-
tions on GSM networks. It is considered a 2.5G technology.
- EDGE (Enhanced Data for Global Evolution): EDGE is an advancement for GSM/GPRS networks that tri-
ples data rates. Because it is based on existing GSM technology, it allows for a smooth upgrade for GSM oper-
ators, giving them capabilities approaching those of a 3G network, while remaining with the existing 2G
system.
- EGPRS (GPRS operating over EDGE): EGPRS is GPRS, but operating over EDGE for enhanced data rates.
CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO: This template can be used to model third generation (3G) mobile telecommunica-
tions based on CDMA2000 technology. CDMA2000 is an evolution of CDMA, or code division multiple access.
This template can be used to model the following technologies:
- 1xRTT (1 Radio Transmission Technology): 1xRTT is sometimes considered not as 3G but as 2.5G in
terms of mobile telecommunications. It offers increased voice capacity as compared to 2G technologies, but
not as much as pure 3G solutions.
- 1xEV-DO (1x Evolution - Data Only): 1xEV-DO is an evolution of CDMA2000 that provides data transfer
rates of over 10 times those of 1xRTT. It is considered a 3G solution and addresses, as its name suggests,
data only.
IS-95 cdmaOne: This template can be used to model second generation (2G) mobile telecommunications based
on code division multiple access technology. IS-95 is an industry standard while cdmaOne is a proprietary imple-
mentation of this standard.
Microwave Radio Links: A9155 allows you to model microwave radio links, as part of a complete mobile tele-
communications network, from any technology template. However, this template is provided to enable you to
create a project of only microwave radio links.
UMTS HSPA: UMTS (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System) and HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet
Access) and HSUPA (High Speed Uplink Packet Access), collectively referred to as HSPA, are third generation
(3G) mobile telecommunication systems based on WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) tech-
nology. Although WCDMA is similar in implementation to CDMA, the two technologies are incompatible. UMTS
and HSPA are usually implemented in place and over GSM networks.
TD-SCDMA: TD-SCDMA (Time Division Synchronous CDMA ) is a 3G mobile telecommunication system based
on Time Division Duplex (TDD) mode. TD-SCDMA transmits uplink and downlink traffic in the same frame in dif-
ferent time slots.
WiMAX: A9155 WiMAX is a state-of-the-art WiMAX and Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) network planning tool
developed in cooperation with WiMAX equipment suppliers. A9155 WiMAX currently supports the IEEE 802.16d
standard, and has been designed to support the evolving IEEE 802.16e standard in a future release
2.2.1.2 Creating a New A9155 Document From a Template

To create a new document from a template:
1. Select File > New. The Project Templates dialogue appears.
2. Select the template on which you want to base your document and click OK. A9155 creates a new document
based on the template selected.
Figure 2.1 shows a new A9155 document based on the UMTS HSPA template. The Data tab of the Explorer window now
has a folder structure suitable for a UMTS radio-planning project, with, among other UMTS-specific elements, folders for
UMTS parameters and UMTS simulations. The Antennas folder is expanded to show the UMTS-compatible antennas
suggested by A9155. These can be modified or replaced. Figure 2.2 and Figure 2.3 show the contents of the Geo and
Modules tabs of the new document, respectively.
82 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 2.1: New A9155 document based on a template
Figure 2.2: New A9155 document Geo tab Figure 2.3: New A9155 document Modules tab
When you create an A9155 document from a template, the document is not connected to a database.
To verify whether the document is connected to a database:
Select File > Database > Connection Properties. The dialogue in displayed in Figure 2.4Figure 2.4 appears.
Figure 2.4: An A9155 document based on a template is not connected to a database
2.2.1.3 Defining a New A9155 Document

Once you have created a new A9155 document as explained in "Creating a New A9155 Document From a Template" on
page 82, you configure the basic parameters of the A9155 document. You can accept the default values for some param-
eters, such as basic measurement units, but you must set projection and display coordinate systems.
"Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 84
"Setting a Coordinate System" on page 84
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 83

A9155 User Manual
"Setting Measurement Units" on page 85
2.2.1.3.1 Projection and Display Coordinate Systems

In A9155, you define the two coordinate systems for each A9155 document: the projection coordinate system and the
display coordinate system. By default, the same coordinate system is used for both.
A projection is a method for producing all or part of a round body on a flat sheet. This projection cannot be done without
distortion, thus the cartographer must choose the characteristic (distance, direction, scale, area or shape) which is to be
shown appropriately at the expense of the other characteristics, or he must compromise on several characteristics1. The
projected zones are referenced using cartographic coordinates (meter, yard, etc.).
Two projection systems are widely used:
The Lambert Conformal-Conic projection: a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cone concep-
tually secant at one or two standard parallels. This projection type is useful for representing countries or regions
that lay primarily east to west.
The Universal Transverse Mercator projection (UTM): a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a
cylinder tangent to a meridian (which is transverse or crosswise to the equator). This projection type is useful for
mapping large areas that are oriented north-south.
A geographic system is not a projection, but a representation of a location on the earth's surface from geographic coordi-
nates (degree-minute-second or grade) giving the latitude and longitude in relation to the origin meridian (Paris for NTF
system and Greenwich for ED50 system). The locations in the geographic system can be converted into other projections.
A9155 has databases including more than 980 international coordinate system references, a database based on the Euro-
pean Petroleum Survey Group and another one regrouping only France's coordinate systems. A9155 distinguishes the
cartographic coordinate systems for projection and either cartographic or geographic coordinate systems for display.
The maps displayed in the workspace are referenced with the same projection system as the imported geographic data
files; thus, the projection system depends on the imported geographic file. By choosing a specific display system, you can
see (using the rulers or status bars) the location of sites on the map in a coordinate system different from the projection
coordinate system. You can also position on the map sites referenced in the display system: the coordinates are automat-
ically converted from the projection system to the display system and the site is displayed on the map.
In Figure 2.5, the French Riviera geographic data file has been imported. The map shows the French Riviera projected
using the cartographic NTF (Paris)/France II tendue system (coordinates in metres). On the other hand, site coordinates
are stated in the geographic WGS 72 system (coordinates in degrees-minutes-seconds).
Figure 2.5: NTF (Paris)/France II tendue system used with WGS 72 system
Notes: All imported raster geographic files must be use the same cartographic system. If not, you
must convert them to a single cartographic system.
2.2.1.3.2 Setting a Coordinate System

Because you are working with maps, you must set a coordinate system for your A9155 document. By default, projection
and display coordinate systems are the same, but you can choose a different display coordinate system if you wish.
To define the coordinate system:
1. Select Tools > Options. The Options dialogue appears.
2. On the Coordinates tab, click the Browse button ( ) to the right of the Projection field. The Coordinate Sys-
tems dialogue appears.
1. Snyder, John. P., Map Projections Used by the US Geological Survey, 2nd Edition, United States Government
Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 313 pages, 1982.
84 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

3. In the Coordinate Systems dialogue, select a catalogue from the Find in list. For the projection system, only car-
tographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available.
4. Select a coordinate system from the list.
Tip: If you frequently use a particular coordinate system you can add it to a catalogue of favou-
rites by clicking Add to Favourites.
5. Click OK. The selected coordinate system appears in the Projection field and, by default, in the Display field as
well.
6. If you wish to set a different coordinate system for the display, click the Browse button ( ) to the right of the
Display field and repeat step 3. to step 5. For the display system, both cartographic systems (identified by the
symbol) and geographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available.
2.2.1.3.3 Selecting the Degree Display Format

A9155 can display longitude and latitude in four different formats. For example:
265629.9N
26d56m29.9sN
26.93914N
+26.93914
To change the degree display format:
2. On the Coordinates tab, select the format from the Degree Format list.
3. Click OK.
Note: The degree format options apply only to the geographic coordinate systems.
2.2.1.3.4 Setting Measurement Units

When you create a new A9155 document, A9155 sets certain measurement units for reception, transmission, distance,
height, and offset to internal defaults. You can accept these default measurement units, or you can change them using the
Options dialogue.
To set the measurement units:
2. On the Units tab, select the desired unit for the following measurements:
- Reception
- Transmission
- Distance
- Height and offset
3. Click OK.
2.2.2 Working in a Multi-User Environment

A multi-user environment is one where a number of users, or groups of users, work simultaneously on given parts of a
single, large (may be nation-wide) network. Different user groups may be working on regional or smaller sections of the
network. This section describes the different components of multi-user environments and outlines their purpose.
When you create a new A9155 document from a database, A9155 loads the data to which you have rights from database
into your new document and then disconnects it from the database. The connection to the reference database is reacti-
vated only when necessary, thus ensuring access to the database by other users.
When you work on a document created from a database, you are working on data that you are sharing with other users.
Consequently, there are issues related to sharing data that do not arise when you are working on a stand-alone document.
For example, when you archive your changes to the database, the changes you have made may occasionally interfere
with changes other users have made and you will need to resolve this conflict.
"The A9155 Multi-User Environment" on page 86
"Creating a New A9155 Document From a Database" on page 87
"Working With a Document on a Database" on page 88
"Refreshing an A9155 Document From the Database" on page 89
"Archiving the Modifications of an A9155 Document in the Database" on page 90.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 85

A9155 User Manual
2.2.2.1 The A9155 Multi-User Environment

An A9155 multi-user environment consists of the following elements, connected over a network:
A central A9155 project: The central A9155 project can only be accessed, modified, and updated by the A9155
administrator. Through this central A9155 project, the A9155 administrator can manage all the data shared by all
the individual A9155 users or groups of users.
Shared data: Shared data are initially set up by the administrator using the central A9155 project and are then
accessed, modified, worked on, and updated by the A9155 users and the administrator. The shared data are
mainly of the following three types:
- The central database: The central database stores all the radio data of all the A9155 user documents. It is
initiated through the central A9155 project by the administrator, and is then subdivided into sections on which
users or groups of users can work simultaneously. Once the database is in place, users can modify their
projects, refresh their projects from the data stored in the database, and archive their modifications in the data-
base. The use of a database means that potential data conflicts due to modifications from other users, modi-
fied or deleted records, for example, can be detected and resolved.
- Shared geographic data: Shared geographic data files are usually stored on a common file server with a fast
access connection. Since geographic data files are usually large, they are usually linked to an A9155 file, i.e.,
they are stored externally, so as to minimise the size of the A9155 file. Users who modify geographic data
locally, for example, editing edit clutter or traffic in their respective projects, usually store these modifications
locally, since these modifications rarely have an impact on other users.
- Path loss matrices: The path loss matrices are computed through the central A9155 project by the adminis-
trator and can be updated only by the administrator. Each user can read these path loss data but cannot
modify them. If users modify their A9155 documents in such a way that the path loss data becomes invalid for
their document, any path loss matrices computed by these users are stored locally, either embedded in the
ATL file or link to an external file. The shared path loss data are not modified.
Shared path loss matrices are updated when the calculation administrator performs an update, taking into ac-
count the modifications made by other users which have been stored and updated in the central database.
Shared path loss matrices enable a number of users to work with a centralised path loss matrices folder, con-
taining path loss matrices corresponding to the central A9155 project.
User Documents: Individual user documents are initialised by the administrator but are later worked upon and
managed by each user. User documents are A9155 files which are connected to the central database, load only
the required part of the geographic data (as defined by the CFG file, for example), and have access to the shared
path loss matrices folder.
Figure 2.6: Components of Multi-user Environments
Note: For information on creating and maintaining the database, see the Administrator Manual.
86 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

2.2.2.2 Creating a New A9155 Document From a Database

When you create a new document from a database, you must connect to the database. Once connected, A9155 loads the
database into a new A9155 document. Then the connected is interrupted. A new connection with the database will be
created only when necessary, in order to allow other users access to the database.
The exact procedure of connecting with the database differs from one database to another. A9155 can work with the
following databases:
Microsoft Access
Microsoft SQL Server
Oracle
Sybase
Microsoft Data Link files
The following sections give examples of connecting to two different databases and loading data:
"Connecting to an MS Access Database" on page 87
"Connecting to an Oracle Database" on page 87.
"Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 87.
An example of a new A9155 document created from a database is shown in:
"Working With a Document on a Database" on page 88
2.2.2.2.1 Connecting to an MS Access Database

To create a new document from an MS Access database:
1. Select File > Open from a Database. The Open from a Database dialogue appears.
Note: If you already have a document open in A9155, you must select File > Database > Open
from a Database.
2. In the Files of type list, select "Microsoft Access" as the type of database:
3. Select the name of the database and click OK. The Data to Load dialogue appears, allowing you to select the
data to load into A9155 as a new document (see "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 87).
2.2.2.2.2 Connecting to an Oracle Database

To create a new document from an Oracle database:
1. Select File > Open from a Database. The Open from a Database dialogue appears.
Note: If you already have a document open in A9155, you must select File > Database > Open
from a Database.
2. In the Files of type list, select "Oracle" as the type of database:

3. In the dialogue that appears, enter your User Name, Password, and Server (as defined in the tnsnames.ora file).
Figure 2.7: Connecting to an Oracle database
Note: Additional dialogues may open asking you to choose which project in the database to load
or which site list to load.
4. Click OK. The Data to Load dialogue appears, allowing you to select the data to load into A9155 as a new docu-
ment (see "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 87).
2.2.2.2.3 Selecting the Data to Load From the Database

When you create a new document from a database, you can select the data to be loaded from the database to create the
document in the Data to load dialogue. You can select which Project, Site List, Custom Fields Groups, and neighbour
lists to load.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 87

A9155 User Manual
Figure 2.8: Selecting the data to load
2.2.2.3 Working With a Document on a Database

Figure 2.9 shows a new A9155 document based created from a database. The Data tab of the Explorer window now has
a folder structure suitable for a UMTS radio-planning project. The Sites folder is expanded to show that a document
created from a database can have additional data, such as sites, unlike a document created from a template. These can
be modified or replaced. Figure 2.10 and Figure 2.11 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new docu-
ment, respectively.
Figure 2.9: New A9155 document opened from a database
Note: The new document may open with no site displayed in the map window. This is because
the north-west point of the project is by default the axis origin. You can recentre the docu-
ment on the data displayed in the Data tab by expanding the Sites folder, right-clicking on
any site, and selecting Centre in the map window from the context menu.
88 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 2.10: New A9155 document Geo tab Figure 2.11: New A9155 document Modules tab
When you create an A9155 document from a database, you can view the characteristics of the database connection.
To view the characteristics of the database connection:
1. Select File > Database > Connection Properties. The Database Connection dialogue appears (see
Figure 2.4).
2. You can now:
- Disconnect your document from the database.
Caution: If you disconnect your document from the database, it will be become a stand-alone docu-
ment and you will not be able to reconnect it to the database.
- Modify your connection to the database.
Figure 2.12: The Database Connection dialogue
2.2.2.4 Refreshing an A9155 Document From the Database

As you are working on your document, other users who have access to the database may have modified some of the data.
You can ensure that you have the most recent data in your document by refreshing the information from the database.
How frequently you refresh the document depends on how frequently the database is updated. If the database is updated
frequently, you should refresh your document frequently as well, in order to continue working with the most up-to-date data.
To refresh an A9155 document from the database:
1. Select File > Database > Refresh.
2. In the dialogue that appears, you can choose one of the following:
- Archive your changes in the database: This option allows you to archive your changes to the server instead
of refreshing your document from the server.
- Refresh only data which have not been modified: This option allows you to refresh from the database only
those items that have not modified; all others will remain as they are.
- Cancel your changes and reload database: This option allows you to cancel any changes you have made
and start over from the point of the last archive to the database.
3. Click OK.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 89

A9155 User Manual
Notes:
If you chose Refresh only data which have not been modified or Cancel your changes and
reload database, A9155 proceeds without asking for confirmation.
If you chose Archive your changes in the database, the Archive dialogue appears. For infor-
mation on using the Archive dialogue, see "Archiving the Modifications of an A9155 Document
in the Database" on page 90.
2.2.2.5 Archiving the Modifications of an A9155 Document in the Database

When you are working on an A9155 document that is attached to a database, you should from time to time archive the
modifications you have made to the data on the database. How frequently you should archive your document depends on
several factors: the amount and size of changes you make, the number of other users using the database who may benefit
from your modifications, etc. What you can archive depends on the user rights the database administrator has given to
you. For example, you may have read access to the antennas table, allowing you to create a new A9155 document with
the given antennas. However, because only the administrator can modify the properties of the antennas, you will not be
able to archive any changes you make to the antennas without write access to the table.
The A9155 archiving process is flexible. You can choose to archive all your modifications or only the site-related modifi-
cations. As well, when you are archiving, A9155 shows you all modifications that will be archived and, if you wish, you can
choose to archive only some of them or even to undo modifications you have made locally. Occasionally, other users many
have modified some of the same data and, when you archive your changes, A9155 will inform you of the possible conflicts
and help you resolve them.
"Archiving All Modifications in the Database" on page 90
"Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database" on page 90
"Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 91.
2.2.2.5.1 Archiving All Modifications in the Database

To archive all your modifications in the database:
1. Select File > Database > Archive. The Archive dialogue appears (see Figure 2.13).
2. In the Archive dialogue, you can do the following:
- Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database.
- Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database
- Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item
and the item on the database.
- Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from
the database.
Figure 2.13: The Archive dialogue
3. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed, A9155 stops the archiving process
and asks you to resolve the conflict. For information on managing conflicts, see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on
page 91.
4. When you are finished archiving, click Close.
2.2.2.5.2 Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database

A9155 allows you to archive only site-related data if you wish. Which data is archived depends on the radio technology
you are working with. For example, in a UMTS HSPA radio planning project, the site-related data are: sites, transmitters,
cells, and neighbours.
90 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To archive only the site-related data in the database:

1. Select File > Database > Archive. The Archive dialogue appears.
2. In the Archive dialogue, you can do the following:
- Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database.
- Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database
- Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item
and the item on the database.
- Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from
the database.
3. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed, A9155 stops the archiving process
and asks you to resolve the conflict. For information on managing conflicts, see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on
page 91.
4. When you are finished archiving, click Close.
2.2.2.5.3 Resolving Data Conflicts

A9155 enables several users to use the same database by allowing user to load the data and then freeing the database
for other users. However, this also creates the possibility of two users modifying the same data. When the second user
attempts to archive his changes, A9155 warns him that the data has been changed since he last refreshed the data and
that there is a conflict.
A9155 allows you to resolve data conflicts. When A9155 finds a conflict, it displays the warning shown in Figure 2.14.
Figure 2.14: Conflict warning
You have three options:

Abort: If you click Abort, the archiving process stops and you can attempt to resolve the conflict before restarting
the archiving process.
Ignore: If you click Ignore, the item causing the conflict will not be archived; all other modifications will be archived
and you can resolve the conflict after the archiving process has ended. However, if other conflicts are found,
A9155 will warn you with the Database Transfer Error dialogue again.
Ignore All: If you click Ignore All, the item causing the conflict will not be archived and A9155 will not inform you
if there are other conflicts; all other modifications will be archived and you can resolve any conflicts after the
archiving process has ended.
Whether you abort the archive process to resolve the conflict immediately. or wait until the end of the archive process, the
procedure to resolve the conflict is the same.
To resolve a conflict:
1. In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue, select the conflict you want to resolve and click Resolve.
There are two different types of data conflicts:
- On a modified record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and another
user has modified the same data since you last archived or refreshed your data. A conflict is caused only by
differences in the same field of the same record between the database and the current A9155 document.
The Conflict in Changes dialogue appears, with the fields in conflict highlighted (see Figure 2.15). In the
Conflict in Changes dialogue, you can see the value of the field in the database in the Database values col-
umn, as well as the value of the same field in your document in the Current values column.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 91

A9155 User Manual
Figure 2.15: The Conflict in Changes dialogue
- If you want to overwrite the database value with the value of the same field in your document, select the
check box next to the highlighted change and click Archive. Your modification will be written to the data-
base, overwriting the value there.
- If you want to accept the value of the field in the database, clear the check box next to the highlighted
change and click Archive. Your modification will be lost and the value in the database will remain un-
changed.
- On a deleted record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and another
user has deleted a record since you last archived or refreshed your data. For information, see "Resolving Data
Conflicts" on page 91.
A9155 displays a message explaining that the record you are trying to update has been deleted from the da-
tabase (see Figure 2.16). Select one of the following:
Figure 2.16: Conflict on a deleted record
- Yes: Select Yes to store your modifications on the database, thereby recreated the deleted record.
- No: Select No to abandon your modifications to this record and delete this record from your document.
- Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel.
2. Click Close to close the Archive dialogue.
2.3 Making a Backup of Your Document

A9155 can create and automatically update a backup of any documents you are working on. Once you have saved the
document, A9155 creates a backup of the original document and updates it at a defined interval. For example, for a docu-
ment named "filename.atl," A9155 will create a backup file called "filename.atl.bak" in the same folder as the original docu-
ment. You can define the update interval each time you start A9155.
You can also configure A9155 to create automatic backups of external path loss matrices (LOS files) by setting an option
in the atoll.ini file. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
When you have activated Autosave, A9155 automatically creates a backup for every document open. Consequently, if
you have a lot of documents open, this operation can take a long time. However, you can optimise the process by opening
large documents in separate A9155 sessions, instead of in the same A9155 session. This also improves memory manage-
ment because each instance of A9155 has its own 2 GB (under 32-bit operating systems; 4 GB under 64-bit operating
systems) memory allocation. If you open two large documents in the same A9155 session, these documents will use the
same 2 GB memory pool. If you open them in two different A9155 sessions, each document will have its own 2 GB allo-
cated memory.
"Configuring Autosave" on page 92
"Recovering a Backup" on page 93.
2.3.1 Configuring Autosave

You can set up autosave for each A9155 session.
92 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To configure autosave:
1. Select File > Configure Autosave. The Autosave Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 2.17.)
Figure 2.17: Autosave configuration dialogue

2. Select the Activate Autosave check box.
3. Select the Prompt before starting Autosave check box if you want A9155 to ask you whether to back up your
file every time starts (see Figure 2.18.)
4. Enter a time interval, in minutes, between consecutive autosaves in the Automatically save documents every
text box.
Note: It can take a long time to back up large documents. Therefore, you should set a corre-
spondingly larger interval between autosaves when working with large documents in order
to optimise the process.
5. Click OK.
If you selected the Prompt before starting Autosave check box, A9155 prompts you each time before backing up the
document. If you click OK, A9155 proceeds to back up all open documents. If you click Cancel, A9155 skips the autosave
once.
Figure 2.18: Autosave prompt
The autosave timer is stopped while the autosave prompt is displayed. A9155 displays a message in the Event Viewer
every time a backup file is updated. If you are performing calculations, i.e., coverage predictions or simulations, the
autosave timer is delayed until the calculations have ended. The timer starts again once the calculations are over. If you
save the original document manually, the autosave timer is reset to 0.
2.3.2 Recovering a Backup

You can easily recover your backup document and open it in A9155 just like any other A9155 document.
To recover your backup document:
1. Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the folder containing your original A9155 document and its backup.
2. If the original document was named "filename.atl," the backup document will be in the same folder and will be
called "filename.atl.bak". Rename the document and remove the ATL extension. For example, you could change
the name to "filename-backup.atl."
Important: If you just remove the BAK extension, your backup file will have the same file name as the
original file and Windows will not allow you to rename the file. Therefore, it is safer to give a
new name to the backup file and keep the original file until you are sure which version is
most recent.
3. Open the renamed backup document in A9155. You will be able to recover all the work up to the last time the
backup was saved.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 93

A9155 User Manual
94 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

CHAPTER 3
MANAGING GEOGRAPHIC DATA
A9155 User Manual
96 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data
3 Managing Geographic Data

Several different geographic data types are used in an A9155 document. For example: the Digital Terrain Model (DTM),
clutter classes, clutter heights, scanned images, population maps, and traffic data maps are types of the geographic data
that you can import or create. Some data types, such as clutter classes, can be used to give more realistic calculations.
Other types such as scanned images, are used to create a more realistic display of the region under study.
You can import a wide variety of both vector and raster-format geo data files. When you import a geo data file into A9155,
you can decide in which folder it goes. The Geo tab of the A9155 Explorer window has folders for the commonly used
data types. Therefore, choosing a folder is choosing what the file will be used for. You can also create your own data type
by importing a file and defining what data is to be used.
Once you have imported a file into the A9155 document, you can edit the data, define how the data will be displayed, and
how geo data is displayed. A9155 also allows you to manage multiple files for a single data type, deciding the priority of
data files with different information or different resolutions. You can also display geo data over items on the Data tab, either
by transferring them to the Data tab, or by importing them directly to the Data tab.
You can also create and edit geographic data. You can add a vector layer to certain data types to which you can add
contours, lines, or points, create new geographic data, or modify existing data. You can also create raster-based
geographic data such as traffic maps or clutter classes.
You can export most geo data objects (for example, DTM, clutter classes, clutter heights, raster polygons, or vector layers)
for use in other A9155 documents or in other applications. A9155 also allows you to save changes you make to geo data
objects back to the original files. This way you can update the original files and, through the process of saving them, recom-
pact the file.
This chapter explains the following topics:
"Geographic Data Types" on page 97
"Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 98
"Importing Geo Data Files" on page 99
"Clutter Classes" on page 104
"Clutter Heights" on page 107
"Digital Terrain Models" on page 104
"Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 107
"Scanned Images" on page 109
"Population Maps" on page 110
"Rain Maps" on page 110
"Custom Geo Data Maps" on page 111
"Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on page 114
"Editing Geographic Data" on page 117
"Saving Geographic Data" on page 124.
3.1 Geographic Data Types

An A9155 document can contain several different geographic data types. A9155 supports a wide range of file formats for
geographic data files. The different geographic data types play different roles in the A9155 document:
Geographic data used in propagation calculation:
- Digital terrain model
- Clutter classes
- Clutter heights
Geographic data used in dimensioning:
- Traffic maps
Geographic data used in statistics:
- Population maps
- Custom maps
Geographic data used for display purposes:
- Scanned maps
- Contours, lines, and points representing, for example, roads, railways, or regions.
In this section, the following data types are described:
"Digital Terrain Model" on page 98
"Clutter Classes" on page 98
"Clutter Heights" on page 98
"Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 98
"Scanned Images" on page 98
"Population Maps" on page 98
"Rain Maps" on page 98
"Traffic Data Maps" on page 98
"Custom Data Maps" on page 98.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 97

A9155 User Manual
Digital Terrain Model
The DTM describes the elevation of the ground over sea level. You can display the DTM in different ways: by single value,
discrete values, or by value intervals (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33).
The DTM is automatically taken into account by the propagation model during computations.
Clutter Classes
The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use. Clutter classes are taken into account by the propagation
model during computations.
Each pixel in a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutter
class, or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. The height per class can be defined as part of the clutter
class, however, the height will be defined as an average height for each clutter class. For information on defining the height
per clutter class, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 105. Clutter heights can also be defined by a separate
clutter heights file (see "Clutter Heights" on page 98). A clutter height map can represent height much more accurately
because it allows a different height to be assigned for each pixel of the map.
Clutter Heights
Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM with one altitude defined per pixel. Clutter height maps
can offer more precise information than defining an altitude per clutter class because, in a clutter height file, it is possible
to have different heights within a single clutter class.
When clutter altitude is defined both in clutter classes and in a clutter height map, clutter altitude is taken from the clutter
height map.
You can display the clutter height map in different ways: by single value, discrete values, or by value intervals (see "Display
Properties of Objects" on page 33).
Note: The only propagation models that can take clutter heights into account in calculations are
the Standard Propagation Model, WinProp-ProMan, and WLL model.
Contours, Lines, and Points
A9155 supports contours, lines, and points to represent polygons such as regions, or lines such as roads or coastlines, or
points. They are used for display only and have no effect on computations. Contours can also be used to create filtering
polygons or computation or focus zones.
Scanned Images
Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings, for example, road maps or
satellite images. They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps and are used
only for display; they have no effect on calculations.
Population Maps
Population maps contain information on population density or on the total number of inhabitants. Population maps can be
used in prediction reports in order to display, for example, the absolute and relative numbers of the population covered.
Population maps have no effect on prediction and simulation results.
Rain Maps
Rain maps are vector files containing information on rain intensity (i.e., the total amount per defined period). Rain maps
are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation.
Traffic Data Maps
Traffic data maps contain information on capacity and service use per geographic area. Traffic data maps are used for
network capacity analyses.
Custom Data Maps
You can import many different types of files for, for example, revenue, rainfall, or socio-demographic data. You could use
the imported data in prediction reports. For example, you could display the predicted revenue for defined coverage.
These imported data have no effect on prediction and simulation results.
3.2 Supported Geographic Data Formats

A9155 supports the following geographic data formats:
DTM files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit), BIL (8 or 16-bit), IST (8 or 16-bit), Planet, BMP (8-bit), GRD/
GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit), and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit)
98 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Clutter height files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit), BIL (8 or 16-bit), IST (8 or 16-bit), Planet, BMP (8-bit),,
GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit), and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit)
Clutter class and traffic files in the following formats: TIF (8-bit), BIL (8-bit), IST (8-bit), BMP (8-bit), Planet, GRC
Vertical Mapper (8-bit), and Erdas Imagine (8-bit)
Vector data files in the following formats: AGD, DFX, Planet, SHP, MIF, and TAB.
Vector traffic files in the following formats: AGD, DFX, Planet, SHP, MIF, and TAB.
Scanned image files in the following formats: TIF (1 to 24-bit), BIL (1 to 24-bit), IST (1 to 24-bit), BMP (1 to 24-bit),
Planet, Erdas Imagine (1 to 24-bit), GRC Vertical Mapper (1 to 24-bit), and ECW (8 or 24-bit)
Population files in the following formats: TIF (16-bit), BIL (16-bit), IST (16-bit), Planet, BMP (16-bit), Erdas Imagine
(16-bit), GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (16-bit), AGD, DXF, SHP, MIF, and TAB.
Rain files in the following formats: AGD, DXF, SHP, MIF, and TAB.
Other data in the following formats: TIF (16-bit), BIL (16-bit), IST (16-bit), Planet, BMP (16-bit), Erdas Imagine
(16-bit), GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (16-bit), AGD, DXF, SHP, MIF, and TAB.
Caution: All raster maps imported must have the same projection coordinate system.
3.3 Importing Geo Data Files

You can import the geographic data you need into the current A9155 document. As explained in "Supported Geographic
Data Formats" on page 98, A9155 supports a variety of both raster and vector file formats. When you import a new geo
data file, A9155 recognises the file format and suggests the appropriate folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window.
You can embed geo data files in the A9155 document while you are importing them or afterwards (see "Embedding
Geographic Data" on page 103).
You can share the paths of imported maps and display settings with other users by using A9155s user configuration files.
For information on exporting the paths of your documents files or to import the path from another document using user
configuration files, see "Geographic Data Sets" on page 116.
Note: The instructions in this section do not apply to custom geo data maps. For information on
importing or creating an custom geo data map, see "Custom Geo Data Maps" on page 111.

"Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 99
"Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 100
"Importing MSI Planet Geo Data" on page 101
"Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders" on page 103
"Embedding Geographic Data" on page 103.
Tip: You can use the drag-and-drop feature to import geo data files into a document. The format
is automatically recognized and A9155 presents you with the appropriate dialogue.
3.3.1 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File

All raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinate system as the A9155 document itself.
To import a geographic data file in a raster format:
1. Select File > Import. The Open dialogue appears.
2. Select the geo data file and click Open. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.19).
Note: If the Vector Import dialogue appears, go to "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on
page 100.
Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing, choose one of the following options:
- DTM: Select Altitudes (DTM) from the Data Type list.

- Clutter Classes: Select Clutter Classes from the Data Type list.
- Clutter Heights: Select Clutter Heights from the Data Type list.
- Scanned Images: Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list.
- Population:
i. Select Population from the Data Type list. The Use as list becomes available.
ii. Select from the Use as list whether the imported data are to be interpreted as a Density or a Value.
- Custom Geo Data: See "Custom Geo Data Maps" on page 111.
- Traffic Data Maps: Select Traffic Density from the Data Type list.
3. By default, the imported file is linked to the A9155 document. To embed the data file in the A9155 document, select
the Embed in Document check box. For information on embedding files, see "Embedding Geographic Data" on
page 103.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 99

A9155 User Manual
4. Click Import. The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window.
Figure 3.19: Importing a clutter class file
3.3.2 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File

When you import geo data files in vector format, their geographic system can be converted to the system used by the
A9155 document.
To import a vector-format geographic data file:
2. Select the geo data file and click Open. The Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.22).
Note: If the File Import dialogue appears, go to "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on
page 99.
Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing, choose one of the following options:
- Vector Data:
- Select Geo from the Import to list.
- Population:
i. Select Population from the Import to list.
ii. Under Fields to be imported, select from the first list which field is to be imported and from the second
list whether the imported field is a Density or a Value (see Figure 3.20 and Figure 3.21).
Figure 3.20: Population density (number of inhabitants/km)
Figure 3.21: Population values (number of inhabitants per item polygon/road, etc.)
- Rain:
i. Select Rain from the Import to list.
ii. Under Fields to be imported, select from the first list which field is to be imported and select Value from
the second list.
- Custom Geo Data:
- See "Custom Geo Data Maps" on page 111.
100 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Traffic Data Maps: Select Traffic from the Import to list.

3. By default, the imported file is linked to the A9155 document. To embed the data file in the A9155 document, select
the Embed in Document check box. For information on embedding files, see "Embedding Geographic Data" on
page 103.
4. Click Import. The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window.
Figure 3.22: Vector Import dialogue
Notes:
You can import ellipses and arcs from MapInfo files (MIF and TAB). Rectangles are interpreted
as polygons.
You can define mappings between the coordinate system used for the MapInfo/ESRI vector files,
defined in the corresponding .mif/.prj files, and A9155. In this way, when you import a vector file,
A9155 can detect the correct coordinate system automatically. For more information about
defining the mapping between coordinate systems, please refer to the Administrator Manual.
3.3.3 Importing MSI Planet Geo Data

MSI Planet geo data are contained in a series of files described in index files. The index file is in ASCII text format and
contains the information necessary to identify and properly interpret each geo data file. When you import MSI Planet geo
data, you can import each type of geo data separately, by importing the corresponding index file, or you can import several
MSI Planet geo data files at the same time, by importing several index files.
"Importing One MSI Planet Geo Data Type" on page 101
"Importing a MSI Planet Geo Database" on page 102.
3.3.3.1 Importing One MSI Planet Geo Data Type

When you want to import a certain type of MSI Planet geo data, such as a DTM or clutter heights, you import the index
file containing the information necessary to import the set of files containing the geo data.
To import one type of MSI Planet geo data:
2. Select the index file you want to import and click Open. The Data Type dialogue appears (see Figure 3.23).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 101

A9155 User Manual
Figure 3.23: Importing an MSI Planet index file
3. Select the type of geo data you are importing and select the Embed check box if you want to embed the data in
the current A9155 document.
4. Click OK to import the geo data into the current A9155 document.
3.3.3.2 Importing a MSI Planet Geo Database

You can import all available MSI Planet geo data at the same time by importing all index files.
To import the MSI Planet geo database:
2. Select "Planet database" from the Files of Type list. The Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue appears (see
Figure 3.23).
Figure 3.24: Importing an MSI Planet database
3. For each type of data that you want to import:

a. Select the corresponding check box
b. If you want to embed the data, select the Embed check box.
c. To locate the MSI Planet index file, click . The Open dialogue appears.
d. Select the MSI Planet index file and click Open. The path and name of the file appears in the corresponding
field of the Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue.
4. When you have selected all the types of data you want to import, click OK. The data is imported into the current
A9155 document.
102 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

3.3.4 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders

By default, when you import scanned images and contours, lines, and points, they appear directly on the Geo tab. Other
data files, such as clutter classes, are listed together in a single Clutter Classes folder. You can, however, group scanned
images and contours, lines, and points into folders as well.
Once grouped, these geo data files can be displayed or hidden and moved more easily. They retain, however, their own
individual display settings; the display settings cannot be managed at the folder level.
You create the folder when you import the first geo data file that will be imported into it. When you import the next geo data
file, either raster or vector, you can import it directly into the new folder.
To create a new geo data folder when importing:
2. Select the geo data file and click Open. If the file to be imported is a raster file, the File Import dialogue appears
(see Figure 3.19). If the file to be imported is a vector file, the Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.22).
3. From the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue) or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue), select
New folder in Geo. The New Folder dialogue appears.
Note: If you want to import your file to the Data tab, you can select New folder in Data.
4. Enter a name for the folder in Folder Name box and click OK.
5. Click Import. Your file is imported into the newly created folder.
You can now import other geo data files into this folder by selecting it from the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue)
or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue) when you import.
Note: You can transfer geo data that has been imported from the Geo tab to the Data tab, or vice
versa. Right-click the data in the Explorer window and select Transfer to Data or Transfer
to Geo.
3.3.5 Embedding Geographic Data

By default, when you import a geo data file, A9155 creates a link to the file. You can, however, choose to embed the geo
data file in your A9155 document, either when you import it or later. When A9155 is linked to a geo data file, the geo data
file remains separate and modifying or saving the A9155 document has no effect on the geo data file. When the geo data
file is embedded in the A9155 document, it is saved as part of the document.
Both linking and embedding present advantages and disadvantages. For more information, see the Administation Manual.
Important: If you are using distributed calculations, you must link your geo data files. Distributed calcu-
lations can not work with embedded geo data files. For information, see the Administrator
Guide.
To embed a geo data file in the current A9155 document while you are importing:
Select the Embed in Document check box on the File Import or Vector Import dialogue box.
To embed a geo data file that is already linked to the current A9155 document:
2. Right-click the file you want to embed in the current document.
4. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue.
5. Click Embed.
6. Click OK. The geo data file is now embedded in the current A9155 document.
3.3.6 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File

By default, when you import a geo data file, A9155 creates a link to the file; the geo data file remains separate and modi-
fying or saving the A9155 document has no effect on the geo data file. If, however, the geo data file is moved, the link will
be broken. The next time you open an A9155 document with the linked geo data file, A9155 cannot find the file and
displays the error message shown in Figure 3.25.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 103

A9155 User Manual
Figure 3.25: Missing shortcut
To find the file yourself:

When the Missing Shortcut dialogue (see Figure 3.25) appears, click the Browse button to locate the geo data
file.
A9155 automatically searches for the missing file as well. It searches for the nearest match , based on size, date, and
type. When it finds a possible match, it informs you with a message (see Figure 3.26).
If the file corresponds to the source file:
Click Yes. The link will be corrected to point to the indicated file.
Figure 3.26: Problem with shortcut
You can also repair the link to the geo data file from within the A9155 document.
To repair a broken link from within the A9155 document:
- If the geo data file is in a folder, such as the Clutter Classes, Traffic, or DTM folder, click to expand the
folder.
2. Right-click on the geo data file you want to relink. The context menu appears.
4. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue, click the Find button.
5. Browse to the geo data file, select it and click OK.
3.4 Digital Terrain Models

The Digital Terrain Model (DTM) is a geographic data file representing the elevation of the ground over sea level.
To manage the properties of the DTM:
2. Right-click the Digital Terrain Model folder.
4. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for the DTM.
- For information on Display tab settings, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
5. Move the Relief slider towards Flat, if you want to display very few little relief or towards x6 if you want to empha-
sise the differences in altitude.
6. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue.
3.5 Clutter Classes

The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use.
Each pixel of a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutter
class, or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. The height per class can be defined as part of the clutter
class, however this height is only an average per class. A clutter height map can represent height much more accurately
because it allows a different height to be assigned for each bin of the map. For information on clutter height maps, see
"Clutter Heights" on page 107.
104 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


"Assigning Names to Clutter Classes" on page 105
"Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 105
"Adding a Clutter Class" on page 106
"Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes" on page 106
"Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class" on page 107.
3.5.1 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes

The clutter class file identifies each clutter class with a code. To make it easier to work with clutter classes, you can assign
a descriptive name to each clutter class name. When a clutter class has a descriptive name, it is the name that appears
in tool tips and reports.
When you import a clutter class file in BIL, TIF, or IMP format, A9155 can automatically assign names to clutter classes if
the clutter class file has a corresponding MNU file. The MNU file contains a list with the clutter class codes and their corre-
sponding names. For more information on the MNU file format and on creating an MNU file, see the Technical Reference
Guide.
To assign names to clutter classes:
2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder.
4. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue.
5. In the Name column, enter descriptive text for each class identified in the Code column.
3.5.2 Defining Clutter Class Properties

The parameters are applied in relation to the location of the receiver being studied and the clutter class of the receiver
location. These parameters can be set on the Properties dialogue:
To define clutter class properties:
4. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue.
5. Enter a Name and average Height (m) for each code.
Important: If the Height field is left blank, propagation models which use the height information of clut-
ter classes will assume a clutter height of "0" if there is no clutter height map.
6. If desired, you can enter a value for each of the following fields applicable to the current document:
- For all A9155 documents:
- Model Standard Deviation (dB): to compute shadowing losses on the path loss, as related to a user-
defined cell edge coverage probability.
- Indoor Loss (dB): to be applied to the path loss and used in coverage predictions, point analysis or in
UMTS HSPA or cdmaOne/CDMA2000 simulations.
- For GSM/GPRS/EGPRS documents:
- C/I Standard Deviation (dB): to compute shadowing losses on the C/I values, as related to a user-defined
cell edge coverage probability.
- For UMTS HSPA, IS-95 cdmaOne, CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO, and TD-SCDMA documents:
- Ec/Io Standard Deviation (dB): to compute shadowing losses on the Ec/Io values, as related to a user-
- Eb/Nt Standard Deviation DL (dB): to compute shadowing losses on the Eb/Nt values, as related to a
user-defined cell edge coverage probability.
- Eb/Nt Standard Deviation UL (dB): to compute shadowing losses on the Eb/Nt values, as related to a
user-defined cell edge coverage probability.
- % Pilot Finger: to be used in the Ec/Io calculations. This factor represents the percentage of energy
received by the mobile pilot finger. Mobile user equipment has one searcher finger for pilot. The searcher
finger selects one path and only energy from this path is considered as signal; energy from other multip-
aths is considered as interference. For example, if 70% of the total energy is in one path and 30% of the
energy is in other multipaths, then the signal energy is reduced to 70% of total energy).
- Orthogonality Factor: (all except TD-SCDMA) to be used to evaluate DL Eb/Nt. This parameter indicates
the remaining orthogonality at the receiver; it can be modelled by a value between 0, indicating no remain-
ing orthogonality because of multi-path, and 1 indicating perfect orthogonality.
- DL Orthogonality Factor: (TD-SCDMA) to be used to evaluate DL Eb/Nt. This parameter indicates the
remaining orthogonality at the receiver; it can be modelled by a value between 0, indicating no remaining
orthogonality because of multi-path, and 1 indicating perfect orthogonality.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 105

A9155 User Manual
- UL Orthogonality Factor: (TD-SCDMA) to be used to evaluate UL Eb/Nt. This parameter indicates the
remaining orthogonality at the receiver; it can be modelled by a value between 0, indicating no remaining
orthogonality because of multi-path, and 1 indicating perfect orthogonality.
Important: If the Orthogonality Factor field is left blank, the default orthogonality factor from the Glo-
bal Transmitters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue is used.
- Spreading Angle (): (TD-SCDMA) to be used in determining the cumulative distribution of C/I gains for
statistical smart antenna modelling.
- For WiMAX 802.16d and WiMAX 802.16e documents:
- C/I Standard Deviation (dB): to compute shadowing losses on the C/(I+N) values, as related to a user-
- SM Gain Factor: to apply to the spatial multiplexing gain read from the Max MIMO Gain graphs in the
MIMO Configurations table.
- STTD Gain (DL) (dB): to add to the users downlink C/(I+N), if the user and its reference cell support
STTD.
- STTD Gain (UL) (dB): to add to the users uplink C/(I+N), if the user and its reference cell support STTD.
7. Click the Default Values tab. Enter default values for each field. For information about each field, see the descrip-
tions in the previous step.
The values entered on the Default Values tab are used if no clutter map is available. Even if there is a clutter
classes map, you can select the Use default values only check box on the Default Values tab to make A9155
use the values specified in this tab instead of the values defined per clutter class.
8. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter classes. In addition to the Display tab options
described in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33, each clutter class display type has a visibility check box.
By selecting or clearing the visibility check box, you can display or hide clutter class display types individually.
Note: Selecting white as the colour for a clutter class value or value interval will cause that clutter
class value or value interval to be displayed as transparent.
9. Click OK.
Tip: You can copy the description table into a new A9155 document after importing the clutter
classes file. To copy the description table, select the entire table by clicking the cell in the
upper-left corner of the table and press CTRL+C. On the Description tab of the clutter
classes Properties dialogue in the new A9155 document, press CTRL+V to paste the val-
ues in the table.
3.5.3 Adding a Clutter Class

You can add a new clutter class to your document.
To add a new clutter class to the your document:
4. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue.
5. In the blank row marked with at the bottom of the table, enter an unused number from 1 to 255 in the Code
column.
6. Fill in the remainder of the fields as described in step 5. and step 6. of "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on
page 105.
7. Click OK.
You can now use the new clutter class when modifying the clutter class map. For information on modifying the clutter class
map, see "Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 117.
3.5.4 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes

Under certain circumstances, it can happen that the list of clutter classes on the Description tab of the clutter classes Prop-
erties dialogue contains unused clutter classes. For example, if you have imported two clutter class files and then deleted
one of them, the list of clutter classes will still contain the clutter classes of the deleted file, even if they are not used in the
remaining file. Whenever you want to ensure that the list of clutter classes is accurate and current, you can refresh the list.
To refresh the list of the clutter classes:
106 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


4. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue.
5. Click Refresh. A9155 removes the unused clutter classes from the list.
6. Click OK.
3.5.5 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class

You can display the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the document. A9155 displays the surface area
covered by each clutter class in the focus zone if there is one, in the computation zone if there is no focus zone and, if
there is no focus or computation zone, A9155 displays the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the entire
document. This information is also available in prediction reports.
To display the surface area covered by each clutter class:
3. Select Statistics from the context menu.
The Statistics dialogue appears, displaying the surface area (Si in km) of each clutter class (i) and its percentage
(% of i) in the computation zone or focus zone, if one exists.
Si
% of I = -------------- 100
Sk
k
3.6 Clutter Heights

Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM. Clutter height files allow for a higher degree of accuracy
because they allow more than one height per clutter class. In a clutter height file, a height is given for each point on the
map. If you define clutter height as a property of clutter classes, the height is given as an average per clutter class.
When a clutter height file is available, A9155 uses its clutter height information for calculations using certain propagation
models (the Standard Propagation Model, WinProp-ProMan, and WLL model), for display (in tool tips and in the status
line), and for CW measurements and test mobile data paths. If no clutter height file exists, A9155 uses the average clutter
height per clutter class as defined in the clutter classes properties (see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 105).
To manage the properties of clutter heights:
2. Right-click the Clutter Heights folder.
4. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter heights.
- For information on Display tab settings, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
The clutter height of the current pointer position as given in the clutter height file or in the clutter classes is displayed in the
status bar.
3.7 Contours, Lines, and Points

In A9155, you can import or create vector objects such as contours, lines, and points. The imported or created vectors are
used primarily for display purposes, but polygons can be used as filters, or computation or focus zones. Vector files can
also be used for cdmaOne/CDMA2000 or UMTS HSPA traffic maps, or for population maps. They can also be used as
part of an custom geo data map (see "Custom Geo Data Maps" on page 111).
In an A9155 document, vector objects such as contours, lines, and points are arranged in vector layers. When you import
a vector file, with, for example, roads, A9155 adds the file as a new vector layer containing all the vector objects in the file.
The vector object data can be managed in the vector layer table. For information on working with data tables, see "Working
with Data Tables" on page 48.
"Managing the Display of a Vector Layer" on page 107
"Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer" on page 108
"Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 108.
3.7.1 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer

Imported geographic vector files can have different attributes depending on their file formats. A9155 can use additional
information related to vectors as display parameters. In addition, A9155 can read three-dimensional vector data.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 107

A9155 User Manual
To manage the display of a vector layer:

1. Click the Data or Geo tab in the Explorer window on which the vector layer is located.
2. Right-click the vector layer. The context menu appears.
4. Select the Display tab of the Properties dialogue. For information on using the display tab, see "Display Properties
of Objects" on page 33.
Note: You can manage the display of an individual vector object by right-clicking the vector object
in the vector layer folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
3.7.2 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer

The properties of the objects on the vector layer can be managed in two ways: either from a table containing all vectors
and their attributes or from the Properties dialogue.
Vector Layer Table
All the vector objects of a vector layer and their attributes are listed in the vector table.
To open the vector layer table:
1. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer, right-click the vector layer folder. The context menu
appears.
2. Select Open Table from the context menu. The vector table appears.
You can edit the contents of this table using the commands from the context menu or from the Edit, Format, and Records
menus. For more information on editing tables in A9155, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48.
Vector Layer Properties Dialogue
The vector layer Properties dialogue has three tabs: a General tab, a Table tab, and a Display tab.
To open the Properties dialogue of a vector layer:
appears.
3. Click the General tab. The following options are available:
- Name: The name of the vector layer. You can rename the vector layer using this field.
- Source File: The complete path of the vector layer file if the file is linked to the A9155 document; otherwise
the file is described as embedded.
- Find: Click the Find button to redefine the path when the files location has changed.
- Embed: Click the Embed button to embed a linked vector layer file in the A9155 document.
- Coordinate System: When a vector layer is linked, the coordinate system used is the files, as specified when
the file was imported. When the a vector layer is embedded, the coordinate system used is documents, as
specified when the file was embedded.
- Change: Click the Change button to change the coordinate system of the vector layer.
- Sort: Click the Sort button to sort the data contained in the vector layer. For information on sorting, see
"Advanced Sorting" on page 65.
- Filter: Click the Filter button to filter the data contained in the vector layer. For information on filtering, see
"Advanced Data Filtering" on page 67.
4. Click the Table tab. You can use the Table tab to manage the vector layer table content. For information on the
Table tab, see "Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 49.
5. Click the Display tab. You can use the Display tab to manage the vector layer display. For information on the Table
tab, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
3.7.3 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab

In A9155, all objects on the Data tab, such as transmitters, antennas, and predictions, are displayed over all objects on
the Geo tab. You may wish, however, to ensure that certain geo data, for example, major geographical features, roads,
etc., remain visible in the map window. You can do this by transferring the geo data from the Geo tab to the Data tab and
placing it above data such as predictions.
To transfer a vector layer to the Data tab of the Explorer window:
2. Right-click the vector layer you want to transfer. The context menu appears.
3. Select Transfer to Data tab from the context menu. The vector layer is transferred to the Data tab.
108 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

You can transfer the vector layer back to the Geo tab by right-clicking it in the Data tab and selecting Transfer to the Geo
tab from the context menu. For more information about display priority in A9155, see "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on
page 114.
3.8 Scanned Images

Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings, for example, road maps or
satellite images. They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps.They have no
effect on calculations.
"Importing Several Scanned Images" on page 109
"Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images" on page 109.
3.8.1 Importing Several Scanned Images

You can import scanned images into the current A9155 document one at a time, as explained in "Importing Geo Data Files"
on page 99, or you can import a group of images by importing an index file listing the individual image files. The index file
is a text file with the information for each image file on a separate line.
Each line contains the following information, with the information separated by a space:
File name: The name of the file, with its path relative to the current location of the index file.
XMIN: The beginning X coordinate of the file.
XMAX: The end X coordinate, calculated as XMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width).
YMIN: The beginning Y coordinate of the file.
YMAX: The end Y coordinate, calculated as YMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width).
0: The zero character ends the sequence.
nice1.tif 984660 995380 1860900 1872280 0

nice2.tif 996240 1004900 1860980 1870700 0
File name XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX 0
To import an index
1. Select File > Import.
2. Select the index file and click Open. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.19).
3. Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list.
4. Click Import. The image files imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window.
3.8.2 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images

Because imported images cannot be modified, they have fewer display parameters than other object types.
To define the display properties of a scanned image:
1. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window
2. Right-click the scanned image. The context menu appears.
3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 3.27).
4. Select the Display tab and set the following options:
- Colour: Select either Automatic, Shades of gray, or Watermark from the list.
- Transparent Colour: Select White from the list if you wish parts of the scanned image that are coloured white
to be transparent, allowing objects in lower layers to be visible.
- Lightness: Move the slider to lighten or darken the scanned image.
- Contrast: Move the slider to adjust the contrast.
- Visibility Scale: Enter a visibility scale minimum in the between 1: text box and maximum in the and 1: text
box. When the displayed or printed scale is outside this range, the scanned image is not displayed.
5. Click OK.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 109

A9155 User Manual
Figure 3.27: Scanned image Properties dialogue
3.9 Population Maps

Population maps contain information on population density or on the total number of inhabitants.
Population maps can be used in prediction reports in order to display, for example, the absolute and relative numbers of
the population covered.
"Managing the Display of Population Data" on page 110
"Displaying Population Statistics" on page 110.
3.9.1 Managing the Display of Population Data

You can manage the display of population data.
To manage the display of population data:
2. Right-click the Population folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select the Display tab of the Properties dialogue. For information on using the display tab, see "Display Properties
3.9.2 Displaying Population Statistics

You can display the relative and absolute distribution of population, according to the defined value intervals in the display
properties (for information on defining value intervals, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34), as well as the total
population. A9155 displays the statistics for the focus zone if there is one, for the computation zone if there is no focus
zone and, if there is no focus or computation zone, A9155 displays the statistics for the entire document.
To display the population distribution statistics:
2. Right-click the Population folder.
3. Select Statistics from the context menu. The Statistics window appears with the distributions of each value
interval defined in the display properties.
Note: Statistics are displayed only for visible data. See "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map
Using the Explorer" on page 28.
3.10 Rain Maps

Rain maps contain information on rain intensity, i.e., the total amount of rain per defined period. Rain maps are used in
microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation.
"Managing Rain Map Properties" on page 111
"Displaying Rain Statistics" on page 111.
110 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

3.10.1 Managing Rain Map Properties

To manage the properties of a rain map:
1. Right-click the Rain folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window.
3. The following tabs are available:
- Data Mapping: The Data Mapping tab enables you to select which value from each imported vector file is part
of the rain map. The imported vector files are listed in the Name column, with the relevant data selected in the
Field column. You can change this value by selecting another value from the Field list.
Important: Rain maps indicate rain intensity (the amount of rain falling per hour), i.e., a value, and not
a density. Therefore, the Density check box on the Data Mapping tab must remain cleared.
- Display: The Display tab enables you to define how the rain map appears in the map window. Value interval
is the only available display type.
For information on using the display tab, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
4. Click to expand the Rain folder.

5. Right-click any rain data in the Rain folder.
7. The Table tab is available. The Table tab enables you to manage the contents of the class table presented on the
Description tab. For information on working with the Table tab, see "Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table
Fields" on page 49.
3.10.2 Displaying Rain Statistics

You can display the relative and absolute distribution of each value interval according to the defined value intervals in the
display properties (for information on defining value intervals, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34) of a rain map.
A9155 displays the statistics for the focus zone if there is one, for the computation zone if there is no focus zone and, if
there is no focus or computation zone, A9155 displays the statistics for the entire document.
To display the statistics of an custom geo data map:
2. Right-click the Rain folder.
interval.
3.11 Custom Geo Data Maps

You can import maps other than the default maps that A9155 uses. For example, you can import files for the revenue,
rainfall, or socio-demographic data. Depending on the type of information displayed, you could use it in prediction reports.
For example, you could display the predicted revenue for defined coverage.
These maps can be raster files of 8, 16, or 32 bits per pixel or vector-format files that you have either imported or created
using the vector edition tool "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 118.
You create an custom data map by:
1. Importing an custom geo data file and creating the custom data map folder.
2. Importing other custom geo data files into the newly created custom data map folder, if more than one file will be
used for this custom geo data map.
These imported data can be used in reports.
"Creating a Custom Geo Data Map" on page 112
"Adding a File to a Custom Geo Data Map" on page 113
"Managing the Properties of a Custom Geo Data Map" on page 113
"Displaying Statistics on Custom Geo Data" on page 114
"Integrable Versus Non Integrable Data" on page 114.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 111

A9155 User Manual
3.11.1 Creating a Custom Geo Data Map

The first step in creating a custom geo data map is importing the first file and creating the custom data map folder.
To create an custom geo data map:
2. Select the first geo data file that will be a part of the custom data map and click Open.
- If the selected file is a raster file, the File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.19).
- If the selected file is a vector file, the Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.22).
3. Click the Advanced button. The New Type dialogue appears (see Figure 3.22).
4. Enter a Name for the custom geo data map. A9155 creates a folder with this name on the Geo tab and all other
files of the new custom geo data map will go in here.
5. Under Supported Input Formats, select the check boxes corresponding to the formats of both the present file
and all other files that will constitute the new custom geo data map:
- 8-bit Raster
- 16-bit Raster
- 32-bit Raster
- Vector.
Important: If you do not select all the formats you need now, you will not be able to add a format later.
6. Under Supported Input Formats, select the check box corresponding to the type of value of the present file and
all other files that will constitute the new custom geo data map:
- Classes (8 bits): to create a map of value classes (such as clutter classes) with classes from 0 to 255.
- Short Integer (16 bits): to create a map with whole values.
- Long Integer (32 bits): to create a map with whole values.
- Float (32 bits): to create a map with decimal values.
- Double (64 bits): to create a map with decimal values.
7. Select the Integrable check box if you want to be able to use imported data as a surface density value and show
cumulative custom geo data in prediction reports.
Important:
To use imported data as a surface density value, you must select the Integrable check box.
You can not change the integrable setting once you have created your custom geo data map.
8. Click OK.
9. If the imported file is a raster file, the File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.19 on page 100); if the imported
file is a vector file, the Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.22 on page 101):
- File Import dialogue: From the Use as list, select whether the new data is to be used a Density or as a Value.
- Vector Import dialogue: Under Fields to be imported, select from the first list which field is to be imported
and from the second list whether the imported field is a Density or a Value (see Figure 3.20 on page 100 and
Important: If the file you first import when you create your custom geo data map is an 8-bit raster map,
the Use as and Fields to be imported boxes will not be available for any file that is
imported into your new custom geo data map. The values in 8-bit maps are codes and not
values such as densities.
10. .Click Import. A new folder is created on the Geo tab of the Explorer window containing the geo data file you
imported.
112 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 3.28: The New Type dialogue
3.11.2 Adding a File to a Custom Geo Data Map

Once you have created the custom geo data map by importing the first file, you can add more files that will be part of the
custom map.
To add a file to an custom geo data map:
2. Select the geo data file that you want to add to the custom data map and click Open.
- If the selected file is a raster file, the File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.19).
i. From the File Type list, select the name of the custom geo data map.
ii. From the Use as list, select whether the new data is to be used a Density or as a Value.
- If the selected file is a vector file, the Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3.22).
i. From the Import To list, select the name of the custom geo data map.
ii. Under Fields to be imported, select from the first list which field is to be imported and from the second
list whether the imported field is a Density or a Value (see Figure 3.20 on page 100 and Figure 3.21 on
page 100).
Important:
If the file you first imported when you created your custom geo data map was an 8-bit raster map,
the Use as and Fields to be imported boxes will not be available for any file that is imported into
your new custom geo data map.
To use imported data as a surface density value, you must select the Integrable check box.
3. Click Import. The file is added to the custom geo data file on the Geo tab of the Explorer window containing the
geo data file you imported.
3.11.3 Managing the Properties of a Custom Geo Data Map

To manage the properties of an custom geo data map:
1. Right-click the custom geo data map on the Geo tab of the Explorer window.
2. Select Properties from the context menu:
3. Depending on the imported file types, the following tabs are available:
- Description: The Description table lists the classes of all 8-bit raster files contained in the custom geo data
map. You must enter a different value for each class.
- Table: The Table tab enables you to manage the contents of the class table presented on the Description tab.
For information on working with the Table tab, see "Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields" on
page 49.
- Data Mapping: The Data Mapping tab enables you to select which value from each imported vector file is part
of the custom geo data map. The imported vector files are listed in the Name column, with the relevant data
selected in the Field column. You can change this value by selecting another value from the Field list. If the
custom geo data map is marked as integrable (see "Integrable Versus Non Integrable Data" on page 114),
there is also a Density check box. If the value in the Field column is to be considered as a density, select the
Density check box.
- Display: The Display tab enables you to define how the custom geo data map appears in the map window.
Discrete value and value interval are the available display types.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 113

A9155 User Manual
In the Field list, display by value is not permitted if the custom geo data map has:
- different raster maps with different resolutions

- both line and polygon vectors
- both raster and vector maps.
In the Field list, display by density is not permitted if the custom geo data map consists of vector points or lines.
For information on using the display tab, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
3.11.4 Displaying Statistics on Custom Geo Data

You can display the relative and absolute distribution of each value interval (for information on defining value intervals, see
"Defining the Display Type" on page 34) of an custom geo data map. A9155 displays the statistics for the focus zone if
there is one, for the computation zone if there is no focus zone and, if there is no focus or computation zone, A9155
displays the statistics for the entire document.
To display the statistics of an custom geo data map:
2. Right-click the custom geo data map.
interval.
3.11.5 Integrable Versus Non Integrable Data

Integrable data can be summed over the coverage area defined by the item in a prediction report (for example, by trans-
mitter or threshold). The data can be value data (revenue, number of customers, etc.) or density data (revenue/km,
number of customer/km, etc.). For example, if the integrable data comes from a revenue map, a prediction report would
indicate:
The percentage of coverage for each revenue class for the entire focus zone, and for each single coverage area
(transmitter, threshold, etc.),
The revenue of the focus zone and of each single coverage area,
The percentage of the revenue map covered for the entire focus zone and for each single coverage area.
Data is considered as non-integrable if the data given is per pixel or polygon and cannot be summed over areas, for exam-
ple, socio-demographic classes, rain zones, etc.
In the example of a rain zone map, a prediction report would indicate:
The coverage of each rain zone class for the entire focus zone and for each single coverage area (transmitter,
threshold, etc.)
3.12 Setting the Priority of Geo Data

A9155 lists the imported DTM, clutter class or traffic objects in their respective folders and creates a separate folder for
each imported vector data file and scanned image. Each object is placed on a separate layer. Thus, there are as many
layers as imported objects. The layers are arranged from top to bottom in the map window as they appear on the Geo tab
of the Explorer window.
It is important to remember that all objects on the Data tab, such as transmitters, antennas, and predictions, are displayed
over all objects on the Geo tab.
3.12.1 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data

There are several factors that influence the visibility of geo data:
The display check box: The check box immediately to the left of the object name in the Geo tab controls whether
or not the object is displayed on the map. If the check box is selected ( ), the object is displayed; if the check
box is cleared ( ), the object is not displayed. If the check box, is selected but shaded ( ), not all objects in the
folder are displayed. For more information, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on
page 28.
The order of the layers: The layer at the top of the Geo tab is on top of all other layers in the map window. Data
on layers below is only visible where there is no data on the top layer or if you adjust the transparency of the objects
on the top layer. You can use drag and drop to change the order of layers by dragging a layer on the Geo tab of
the Explorer window towards the top or the bottom of the tab.
114 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: All objects on the Data tab, such as transmitters, antennas, and predictions, are displayed
over all objects on the Geo tab. Vector geo data, however, can be transferred to the Data
tab, where they can be placed over data such as predictions. In this way, you can ensure
that certain vector geo data, for example, major geographical features, roads, etc., remain
visible in the map window For more information, see "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data
Tab" on page 108.
The transparency of objects: You can change the transparency of some objects, such as predictions, and some
object types, such as clutter classes, to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map. For more informa-
tion, see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 35.
The visibility range of objects: You can define a visibility range for object types. An object is visible only in the
map window if the scale, as displayed on the zoom toolbar, is within this range. For more information, see "Defining
the Visibility Scale" on page 35.
In Figure 3.29, vector data (including the linear vectors HIGHWAYS, COASTLINE, RIVERLAKE, MAJORROADS,
MAJORSTREETS, RAILWAYS and AIRPORT), clutter classes, DTM and scanned image have been imported and a
UMTS environment traffic map has been edited inside the computation zone. In the map window, the linear objects
(ROADS, RIVERLAKE, etc.) are visible both inside and outside the computation zone. The clutter class layer is visible in
the area where there is no traffic data (outside the computation zone). On the other hand, the DTM layer which is beneath
the clutter class layer and the scanned map which is beneath the DTM layer, are not visible.
Figure 3.29: Displaying Geo data layers
3.12.2 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations

The priority of geo data in calculations is determined in much the same way as it is for display.
When you do calculations in A9155, the data taken into account in each folder (Clutter Classes, DTM, etc.) is the data
from the top down. In other words, A9155 takes the object on top and objects below only where there is no data in higher
levels; what is used is what is seen.
Note: The visibility in the context of calculations must not be confused with the display check box
( ). Even if the display check box of an object is cleared ( ), so that the object is not dis-
played on the map, it will still be taken into consideration for calculations. The only cases
where clearing the display check box means that the data will not be used are for popula-
tion data in reports, and for custom geo data maps.
Object folders, for example, the DTM, clutter classes, clutter heights, and traffic density folders, can contain more than one
data object. These objects can represent different areas of the map or the same parts of the map with the same or different
resolutions. Therefore for each folder, you should place the objects with the best data at the top. These are normally the
objects which cover the least area but have the highest resolution. For example, when calculating coverage in an urban
area, you might have two clutter class files: one with a higher resolution for the downtown core, where the density of users
is higher, and one with a lower resolution but covering the entire area. In this case, by placing the clutter class file for the
downtown core over the file with the lower resolution, A9155 can base its calculations for the downtown core on the clutter
class file with the higher resolution, using the second file for all other calculations.
Population maps and custom geo data maps, both of which can be used in prediction reports follow the same rules of
calculation priority.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 115

A9155 User Manual
3.13 Displaying Information About Geo Data

You can display information about a geo data map by using tooltips. For information on how to display information in tool-
tips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 35.
To display information about the geo data in a tool tip:
Hold the pointer over the geo data until the tool tip appears. The surface area is only given for closed polygons.
Note: Tool tips only appear when the Display Tips button ( ) on the toolbar has been selected.
3.14 Geographic Data Sets

In A9155, once you have imported geographic data and defined their parameters, you can save much of this information
in a user configuration file. Then, another user, working on a similar A9155 document, can import the configuration file
containing the paths to the imported geographic data and many of the defined parameters.
When you export the geographic data set, you export:
the paths of imported geographic maps
map display settings (visibility scale, transparency, tips text, etc.)
clutter description (code, name, height, standard deviations, indoor loss, orthogonality factor, percentage pilot
finger of each clutter class, default standard deviations, and indoor loss)
raster or user profile traffic map description.
"Exporting a Geo Data Set" on page 116
"Importing a Geo Data Set" on page 117.
Note: You can export and import other types of information with user configuration files as well.
For information, see the Administrator Manual.
3.14.1 Exporting a Geo Data Set

When you export a geo data set in a user configuration file, the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on page 116
is saved into an external file.
Important: Vectors must be in the same coordinate system as the raster maps.
To export a geo data set in a user configuration file:

1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 3.30).
2. In the User Configuration dialogue, select the Geographic Data Set check box.
Figure 3.30: The User Configuration dialogue

3. Click OK, The Save As dialogue appears.
4. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the file and enter a File name.
5. Click OK.
116 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

3.14.2 Importing a Geo Data Set

When you import a user configuration file containing a geo data set, the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on
page 116 is imported into your current A9155 document.
To import a user configuration file containing a geo data set:
2. Browse to the user configuration file, select it and click Open.
3. The User Configuration dialogue appears.
When you import a user configuration file including a geographic data set, A9155 checks if there are already
geographic data in the current A9155 document. If so, the option Reset existing geo data appears with other
options in the User Configuration dialogue.
4. In the User Configuration dialogue, select the check boxes of the items you want to import.
5. If you already have geographic data in your current A9155 document and would like to replace it with any imported
data, select the Reset existing geo data check box.
If you do not want to replace existing geo data with imported data, clear the Reset existing geo data check box.
6. Click OK.
Note: You can automatically start A9155 with a user configuration file by naming the file "atoll.cfg"
and placing it in the same folder as the A9155 executable. You can also edit the Windows
shortcut to A9155 and add "-cfg <.cfg_file>" where is the complete path to the user configu-
ration file.
3.15 Editing Geographic Data

In A9155, you can edit geo data that you have imported or you can create geo data by, for example, adding a vector layer
to the Population folder and then adding polygons.
The following types of geographic data can be edited:
Clutter classes
Contours, lines, and points
Population maps (if they are in vector format, i.e., Erdas Imagine (16-bit), AGD, DXF, SHP, MIF, or TAB format)
Rain maps
Traffic data maps
Custom data maps.
3.15.1 Editing Clutter Class Maps

Clutter class maps and certain traffic maps are raster maps. You can edit these maps by creating or modifying polygons.
"Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 117
"Editing Clutter Polygons" on page 118
"Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons" on page 118.
"Deleting Clutter Polygons" on page 118
3.15.1.1 Creating a Clutter Polygon

In A9155, you can modify imported clutter class maps or create your own maps by adding data in the form of polygons.
You can later edit and export the polygons you have created. All modifications you make to clutter class maps are taken
into account by propagation model calculations.
To create a polygon:
2. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. The context menu appears.
3. Select Edit from the context menu. The Editor toolbar appears with a clutter or traffic list, a polygon drawing tool
, a polygon deletion tool , and a Close button (see Figure 3.31).
Figure 3.31: Editor toolbar
4. From the list, select the clutter class for the polygon you want to create.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 117

A9155 User Manual
Note: Clutter classes are defined on the Descriptions tab of the clutter classes Properties dia-
logue.
5. Click the polygon drawing button ( ). The pointer changes to a pencil ( ).

6. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon.
7. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon.
8. Double-click to close the polygon.
Note: You can copy the exact coordinates of a closed polygon by right-clicking it on the map and
selecting Properties from the context menu.
3.15.1.2 Editing Clutter Polygons

You can edit clutter polygons by moving existing points of the polygon or by adding or deleting points.
To edit clutter polygons:
3. Select Edit from the context menu. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3.31).
4. Select the polygon. You can now edit the clutter polygon by:
- Moving a point:
- Adding a point:
i. Position the pointer over the polygon border where you want to add a point. The pointer changes ( ).
ii. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. A point is added to the border at the position
of the pointer.
- Deleting a point:
3.15.1.3 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons

To display the coordinates of the points defining the polygon area:
4. Right-click the polygon and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears with the
coordinates of the points defining the polygon and the total area.
Note: You can select and copy the coordinates displayed in the Properties dialogue of the
polygon.
3.15.1.4 Deleting Clutter Polygons

You can delete clutter polygons.
To delete a clutter polygon:
4. Click the polygon deletion tool ( ). The pointer changes ( ).

5. Click the polygon you want to delete. The polygon is deleted.
3.15.2 Editing Contours, Lines, and Points

Contours, lines, and points are made up of individual vector objects. You can modify and create these geo data maps by
adding a vector layer and then adding vector objects to this layer.
118 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


"Creating a Vector Layer for Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 119
"Creating Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 119
"Editing Contours, Lines, and Points" on page 119
"Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer" on page 108.
3.15.2.1 Creating a Vector Layer for Contours, Lines, and Points

You can add a new vector layer to the Geo tab. A vector layer can contain contours, lines, and points.
To create a vector layer on the Geo tab:
2. If the Vector Edition toolbar is not visible, select View > Vector Edition Toolbar.
3. Click the New Vector Layer button ( ) on the Vector Edition toolbar. A9155 creates a folder called Vectors
on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. The new Vectors folder can be seen in the list of vector layers:
.
3.15.2.2 Creating Contours, Lines, and Points

By adding contours, lines, and points to a vector layer, created as described in "Creating a Vector Layer for Contours,
Lines, and Points" on page 119, you can add information to a geographic data type.
To create a vector object:
appears.
Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector
Edition toolbar list. Because A9155 names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default, it
might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. By renaming each vectors
folder, you can ensure that you select the correct folder. For information on renaming
objects, see "Renaming an Object" on page 29.
If the Vector Edition toolbar is not visible, select View > Vector Edition Toolbar.
3. Click one of the following buttons on the Vector Edition toolbar:
- New Polygon:
i. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour.
ii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour.
iii. Double-click to close the contour.
- New Line:
i. Click once on the map where you want to begin the line.
ii. Click each time you change angles on the line.
iii. Double-click to end the line.
- New Point: Click once on the map where you want to place the point.
4. Press ESC to deselect the currently selected button on the Vector Edition toolbar.
3.15.2.3 Editing Contours, Lines, and Points

You can edit contours, lines, and points in several ways. Before you can edit a contour, line, or point, you must first put
the vector layer in editing mode.
To put the vector layer in editing mode:
appears.
You can now edit a object in the vector layer as explained in the following sections:
"Editing the Points of Contours and Lines" on page 120
"Editing Contours Using the Toolbar" on page 120
"Editing Contours, Lines, and Points Using the Context Menu" on page 121.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 119

A9155 User Manual
Editing the Points of Contours and Lines
To edit a point of a contour, line, or point:

1. Put the vector layer containing the contour, line, or point in editing mode as explained in "Editing Contours, Lines,
and Points" on page 119.
2. Select the contour, line, or point. You can now edit by:
- Moving a point:
- Adding a point to a contour or a line:
i. Position the pointer over the contour border or line where you want to add a point. The pointer changes
( ).
ii. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. A point is added to the contour border or line
at the position of the pointer.
- Deleting a point from a contour or a line:
Editing a Point
To edit a point:
1. Put the vector layer containing the point in editing mode as explained in "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points" on
page 119.
2. Select the point. You can now edit by:
- Moving:
i. Click the point you want to move. The pointer changes ( ).

- Deleting a point:
i. Click the point you want to delete. The pointer changes ( ).

ii. Right-click and select Delete from the context menu. The point is deleted.
Editing Contours Using the Toolbar
In A9155, you can create complex contours by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar.
To edit a vector object using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar:
1. Put the vector layer containing the contour in editing mode as explained in "Editing Contours, Lines, and Points"
on page 119.
- : To combine several contours:

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new contour.
iii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour.
iv. Double-click to close the contour.
v. Draw more contours if desired. A9155 creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. If
contours overlap, A9155 merges them.
- : To delete part of the selected contour:

ii. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected contour by clicking once on the map where you want
to begin drawing the area to delete.
- : To create a contour out of the overlapping area of two contours:

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will overlap the selected one.
120 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

iv. Double-click to close the contour. A9155 creates a new contour of the overlapping area of the two con-
tours and deletes the parts of the contours that do not overlap.
- : To split the selected contour into several contours:

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will split the selected one.
iv. Double-click to close the contour. A9155 separates the area covered by the contour from the selected con-
tour and creates a new contour.
Editing Contours, Lines, and Points Using the Context Menu
When you are editing contours, lines, and points, you can access certain commands using the context menu.
To edit a vector object using the context menu:
1. Click the vector object you want to edit.
2. Right-click the vector object to display the context menu and select one of the following:
- Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour, line, or point from the map.
- Convert to Line: Select Convert to Line to convert the selected contour to a line.
- Convert to Polygon: Select Convert to Polygon to convert the selected line to a contour.
- Open Line: Select Open Line to remove the segment between the last and the first point.
- Close Line: Select Close Line to add a segment between the last and the first point of the line.
- Move:
- Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected contour, line, or point. The
Properties dialogue has two tabs:
- General: The General tab gives the name of the vector Layer, the Surface of the object, and any Prop-
erties of the contour, line, or point.
- Geometry: This tab gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the contour,
line, or point.
Note: Only the commands relevant to the selected contour, line, or point are displayed in the con-
text menu.
3.15.3 Editing Population, Rain, or Custom Data Maps

Some geographic data maps, for example, population maps, custom data, and rain maps. are made up of individual vector
objects. You can modify and create these geo data maps by adding a vector layer and then adding vector objects
(contours, lines, and points) to this layer.
"Creating a Vector Layer and Vector Objects" on page 121
"Editing Contours on the Vector Layer" on page 122.
3.15.3.1 Creating a Vector Layer and Vector Objects

To create a vector layer and vector objects:
2. Right-click the geo data object, the Population, the Rain, or the Custom Data folder, to which you want to add a
vector layer.
3. Select Add Vector Layer from the context menu. A new data object called "Vectors" is created in the selected
geo data object folder.
4. Right-click the new vector layer. The context menu appears.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 121

A9155 User Manual
Edition toolbar list. Because A9155 names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default, it
might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. By renaming each vectors
folder, you can ensure that you select the correct folder. For information on renaming
objects, see "Renaming an Object" on page 29.
6. Click the New Polygon button ( ) on the Vector Edition toolbar:

a. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour.
b. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour.
c. Double-click to close the contour.
d. Right-click on the new polygon and select Properties from the context menu.
e. Enter a value:
- Population: Enter a value in the Population field to indicate the number of inhabitants or the population
density.
- Rain: Enter a value in the Rain field to indicate the intensity of rainfall for the polygon.
- Custom Data Map: The value you enter will depend on the type of custom data map you created.
7. Press ESC to deselect the New Polygon button ( ) on the Vector Edition toolbar.
8. For A9155 to consider the new vector layer as part of the data map, you must map the vector layer. Right-click the
Population, the Rain, or the Custom Data folder. The context menu appears.
10. Click the Data Mapping tab. For each of the following types of geo data:
- Population Map:
i. In the Field column, "Population" is selected by default.
ii. If the vector layer contains a population density, select the check box in the Density column. If the vector
layer indicates the number of inhabitants, and not the population density, clear the check box in the
Density column.
- Rain Map:
i. In the Field column, "Rain" is selected by default.
ii. Clear the check box in the Density column. The value in rain maps indicates the intensity of rain; the value
is not a density.
- Custom Data Map: The data you map will depend on the type of custom data map you created.
3.15.3.2 Editing Contours on the Vector Layer

You can edit contours in several ways. Before you can edit a contour, you must put the vector layer in editing mode.
To put the vector layer into editing mode:
appears.
You can now edit a object in the vector layer as explained in the following sections:
"Editing the Points of Contours" on page 122
"Editing Contours Using the Toolbar" on page 120
"Editing Contours Using the Context Menu" on page 123.
Editing the Points of Contours
To edit a point of a contour:

1. Put the vector layer containing the contour in editing mode as explained in "Editing Contours on the Vector Layer"
on page 122.
2. Select the contour. You can now edit by:
- Moving a point:
- Adding a point to a contour:
i. Position the pointer over the contour border where you want to add a point. The pointer changes ( ).
122 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

ii. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. A point is added to the contour border at the
position of the pointer.
- Deleting a point from a contour:
Editing Contours Using the Toolbar
In A9155, you can create complex contours by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar.
To edit a vector object using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar:
1. Put the vector layer containing the contour in editing mode as explained in "Editing Contours on the Vector Layer"
on page 122.
- : To combine several contours:

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new contour.
iv. Double-click to close the contour.
v. Draw more contours if desired. A9155 creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. If
contours overlap, A9155 merges them.
- : To delete part of the selected contour:

ii. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected contour by clicking once on the map where you want
to begin drawing the area to delete.
- : To create a contour out of the overlapping area of two contours:

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will overlap the selected one.
iv. Double-click to close the contour. A9155 creates a new contour of the overlapping area of the two con-
tours and deletes the parts of the contours that do not overlap.
- : To split the selected contour into several contours:

ii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will split the selected one.
iv. Double-click to close the contour. A9155 separates the area covered by the contour from the selected con-
tour and creates a new contour.
Editing Contours Using the Context Menu
When you are editing contours, you can access certain commands using the context menu.
To edit a vector object using the context menu:
1. Click the vector object you want to edit.
2. Right-click the vector object to display the context menu and select one of the following:
- Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour from the map.
- Move:
- Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected contour. The Properties dia-
logue has two tabs:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 123

A9155 User Manual
- General: The General tab gives the name of the vector Layer, the Surface of the object, and any Prop-
erties of the contour.
- Geometry: This tab gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the contour.
3.16 Saving Geographic Data

A9155 allows you to save your geographic data files separately from saving the A9155 document. A9155 supports a vari-
ety of both raster and vector file formats (for more information, see "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 98).
Saving a geographic file separately from saving the A9155 document enables you to:
Save modifications you have made to an external file: If you have made modifications to geo data, you can
export them to a new external file.
Update the source file with modifications you have made: If you have made modifications to a geo data type
in A9155, you can save these changes to the source file.
Combine several files into one file: If you have several smaller files in one folder of the Geo tab, you can save
them as one file.
Export an embedded file to be used in another A9155 document or in another application: You can save a
file to an external file, in the same format or in another one.
Create a new file from part of a larger one: You can select part of certain geo data types and then save the
selected part as a new file.
"Saving Modifications to an External File" on page 124
"Updating the Source File" on page 126
"Combining Several Files into One File" on page 126
"Exporting an Embedded File" on page 126
"Creating a New File From a Larger File" on page 127
3.16.1 Saving Modifications to an External File

In A9155, you can save your modifications to an external file.
"Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File" on page 124
"Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 125.
3.16.1.1 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File

You can export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file, either in the same format as used in the current A9155
document, or in a different raster format. You can also choose to export the entire clutter class geo data, the part containing
the computation zone, or just your modifications to the geo data.
When you have made modifications to a raster-format geo data file, exporting either the entire geo data or just your modi-
fications allows you to save those modifications to an external file.
To export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file:
3. Select Save As from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears.
4. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the file, enter a name for the file, and select
the file format from the Save as type list. You can select from one of the following file formats:
- BMP: When you select bitmap format, A9155 automatically creates the corresponding BPW file containing the
georeference information.
- TXT: The ArcView text format is intended only for export; no corresponding geo-reference file is created.
- TIF: When you select tagged image file format, A9155 automatically creates the corresponding TFW file con-
taining the georeference information.
- BIL: When you select the BIL format, A9155 automatically creates the corresponding HDR file containing the
georeference information. When exporting in BIL format, A9155 allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb.
- GRC or GRD: Files with the extension GRC or GRD are Vertical Mapper files. When exporting in GRD or GRC
formats, A9155 allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb.
5. Click Save. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.32).
124 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 3.32: Export dialogue
6. Under Region, select one of the following:

- The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire clutter class geo data file, including any
modifications you have made to the geo data. The exported geo data file will replace the geo data file in the
current A9155 document.
- Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you have
made to the clutter classes. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the Clutter Classes
geo data folder.
- The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the clutter class geo data contained by a rectangle
encompassing the computation zone. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the selected
geo data folder.
7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. The
suggested resolution value is defined by the following criteria:
- If one object has been modified, the suggested resolution is the resolution of the modified object.
- If several objects have been modified, the suggested resolution is the highest resolution of the modified
objects.
- If there is no initial clutter class object, the resolution will equal the highest resolution of the DTM maps.
- If the A9155 document in which you created the clutter class file has no DTM, no other clutter class geo data
file, or traffic objects, the suggested resolution is 100 m.
8. Click OK. The selected data is saved in an external file.
3.16.1.2 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File

You can export an edited vector layer as a vector format file. A vector layer can contain contours, lines, and points. Along
with vector layers you have added to the Geo tab, the following maps can be exported as vector format files:
Vector-format population maps
Vector-format rain maps
Vector-format custom maps.
Once you save a vector layer, the exported file replaces the vector layer as a linked file. You can embed the file afterwards
(see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 103).
To export a vector layer:
appears.
3. In the Save As dialogue, browse to the folder where you want to save the file, enter a name for the file, and select
the file format from the Save as type list. You can select from one of the following file formats:
- AGD: The A9155 Geographic Data format is an A9155-specific format. As a format created for A9155, A9155
can read AGD files faster than the other supported vector formats.
- SHP: The ArcView vector format should be used for vector layers containing only polygons; it cannot save
vectors made of lines or points. If you have a vector layer with vector lines or points, use either the AGD, the
MIF or the TAB format.
- MIF and TAB: MapInfo formats.
4. Click Save in the Save As dialogue. The Vector Export dialogue appears, displaying the current coordinate
system and allowing you to change the coordinate system by clicking Change.
5. Click Export. The vector layer is saved in the format and with the name you specified and the exported file
replaces the vector layer in the current document as a linked file.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 125

A9155 User Manual
3.16.2 Updating the Source File

While working on an A9155 document, you may make changes to geo data. If the geo data file is embedded in the A9155
document, A9155 saves the changes automatically when you save the document. If the geo data file is linked, A9155
prompts you to save the changes when you close the document.
To update the source file of a linked geo data file:
2. Right-click the folder containing geo data file whose source file you want to update. The context menu appears.
3. Select Save from the context menu. The linked file is updated.
Caution: You will not be warned that you are replacing the current file. Therefore, ensure that you
want to replace the current file before proceding to the following step. If you do not want to
replace the current file, you can save your changes to an external file ("Exporting an Edited
Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 125).
3.16.3 Combining Several Files into One File

In certain circumstances, for example, after importing an MSI Planet index file, you may have several geo data files of
the same type. You can combine these separate files to create one single file. The files will be combined according to their
order from the top down in the folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. If the files overlap on the map, the combined
file will show the file on the top.
You can create a one file from a section of the following geo data types:
Digital terrain model
Clutter classes
Clutter heights
Scanned maps
To combine individual files into a new file:
2. Right-click the folder of the geo data files you want to combine into one file. The context menu appears.
4. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list.
5. Click OK. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.33).
6. Under Region, select The Entire Project Area. This option allows you to save the entire area covered by the geo
data files, including any modifications you have made to the geo data.
7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. The
suggested resolution value is the highest resolution of all objects.
8. Click OK. The selected data is saved as a new file.
3.16.4 Exporting an Embedded File

You can export an embedded geo data file to be used in a different A9155 document, or in a different application. When
you export an embedded file, A9155 replaces the embedded file in the current A9155 document with the newly exported
file.
To export an embedded geo data file:
2. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. The context menu appears.
5. Click OK.
If the geo data file is a vector file, the Vector Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.33).
126 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 3.33: The Vector Export dialogue
a. The Vector Export dialogue displays the coordinate system of the file. To change the coordinate system used
for the exported file, click Change. The Coordinate Systems dialogue appears. For information on the Co-
ordinate Systems dialogue, see "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 84.
b. Click Export. The geo data file is exported with the selected coordinate system.
If the geo data file is a raster file, the Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.33).
Figure 3.34: Export dialogue
a. Under Region, select one of the following:

- The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire raster-format geo data file, including
any modifications you have made to the geo data. The exported file will replace the embedded file in the
Geo data tab.
- Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you
have made to the geo data. The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder.
- The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rectangle encom-
passing the computation zone. The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder.
b. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1.
c. Click OK. The selected data is saved in an external file.
3.16.5 Creating a New File From a Larger File

You can create a new file from a section of a larger file. You can use this new file in the same A9155 document, or in a
new A9155 document. To create a new file, you must first define the area by creating a computation zone.
You can create a new file from a section of the following geo data types:
Digital terrain model
Clutter classes
Clutter heights
Scanned maps
Population
Rain
To create a new file from a section of a larger file:
2. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. The context menu appears.
5. Click OK. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3.33).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 127

A9155 User Manual
6. Under Region, select The Computation Zone. This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rec-
tangle encompassing the computation zone. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the
selected geo data folder.
7. Define a Resolution in Metres. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1.
8. Click OK. The selected data is saved as a new file.
128 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

CHAPTER 4
MANAGING CALCULATIONS IN A9155
A9155 User Manual
130 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Chapter 4: Managing Calculations in A9155
4 Managing Calculations in A9155

Once you have created a network, you can make predictions. There are two types of predictions:
Point predictions using the Point Analysis tool: The Point Analysis tool allows you to predict, at any point on
the map, the profile between a reference transmitter and a receiver, the value of the signal levels of the sur-
rounding transmitters, an active set analysis for UMTS, cdmaOne/CDMA2000, and TD-SCDMA projects and an
interference analysis for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects.
Coverage predictions: You can calculate standard coverage predictions, coverage by transmitter, coverage by
signal level and overlapping zones, and specific coverage studies such as interference studies for GSM/GPRS/
EDGE projects or handover, service availability, etc. for UMTS and cdmaOne/CDMA2000 and TD-SCDMA
projects. Many customisation features on coverage studies are available in order to make their analysis easier.
A9155 facilitates the calculation of coverage predictions with support for multithreading and distributed calculating. The
progress of the calculations can be displayed either in the Event Viewer window or in a log file.
A9155 also allows you to use polygonal zones to limit the amount of resources and time used for calculations. The polyg-
onal zones, such as the filtering zone and the computation zone, help you to restrict calculations to a defined set of trans-
mitters, and to limit calculations and coverage predictions.
Depending on the type of project you are working on, you can choose between the propagation models available in A9155.
4.1 Working with Propagation Models

4.1.1 Propagation Model Characteristics: Overview
Each propagation model available in A9155 is suited for certain conditions, frequencies and radio technologies. The
following table summarises the frequency band, necessary geo data, recommended use of each propagation model.
Frequency
Model Geo Data Taken into Account Recommended Use
Band
Longley-Rice - Flat areas
~ 40 MHz - Terrain profile
(theoretical) - Very low frequencies
- Long distances (d>10km)
ITU 370-7 Vienna 93 100 - 400 MHz - Terrain profile
- Low frequencies
ITU 526-5 (theoretical) 30 - 10000 MHz - Terrain profile Fixed receivers
Fixed receivers
- Terrain profile
WLL 30 - 10000 MHz > Microwave links
- Deterministic clutter
> WiMAX
1 < d < 20 km
- Terrain profile
Okumura-Hata 150 - 1000 MHz > GSM 900
- Statistical clutter (at the receiver)
> cdmaOne/CDMA2000
1 < d < 20 km
- Terrain profile
Cost-Hata 1500 - 2000 MHz > GSM 1800
> UMTS
1 < d < 100 km
- Terrain profile
ITU 529-3 300 - 1500 MHz > GSM 900
> cdmaOne/CDMA2000
1 < d < 20 km
> GSM 900
> GSM 1800
Standard Propagation - Terrain profile
150 3500 MHz > UMTS
Model - Statistical clutter
> cdmaOne/CDMA2000
> WiMAX
(Automatic calibration available)
Erceg-Greenstein 1900 6000 MHz - Terrain profile 100 m < d < 8 km
(SUI) Model - Statistical clutter (at the receiver) > WiMAX
- Building database 0.02 < d < 35 km
- Terrain profile > GSM 900
WinProp-ProMan 150 - 3500 MHz - Clutter > GSM 1800
- Diffraction > UMTS
- Reflection > WiMax
4.1.2 The Standard Propagation Model

The Standard Propagation Model is a propagation model based on the Hata formulas and is suited for predictions in the
150 to 3500 MHz band over long distances (from one to 20 km). It is best suited to GSM 900/1800, UMTS, and cdmaOne
and CDMA2000 radio technologies.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 131

A9155 User Manual
The Standard Propagation Model is based on the following formula:

PR =P Tx
( )
K 1 + K 2 log(d ) + K 3 log HTxeff + K 4 Diffractio n +

( )
K 5 log(d ) log HTxeff + K 6 H Rxeff + K clutter f (clutter ) + K hill ,LOS

where:
PR received power (dBm)

PTx transmitted power (EIRP) (dBm)
K1 constant offset (dB)
K2 multiplying factor for log(d)
d distance between the receiver and the transmitter (m)
K3 multiplying factor for log(HTxeff)
HTxeff effective height of the transmitter antenna (m)

K4 multiplying factor for diffraction calculation. K4 has to be a positive number
Diffraction losses due to diffraction over an obstructed path (dB)
K5 multiplying factor for log(HTxeff)log(d)
K6 multiplying factor for HRxeff
H Rxeff mobile antenna height (m)

Kclutter multiplying factor for f(clutter)
f(clutter) average of weighted losses due to clutter
Khill, LOS corrective factor for hilly regions (=0 in case of NLOS)
These parameters can be defined on the tabs (Parameters, and Clutter) of the Standard Propagation Model Properties
dialogue. You can also calibrate the Standard Propagation Model using a wizard. For information on the Automatic Cali-
bration Wizard, see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide.
"Recommendations for Working with the Standard Propagation Model" on page 132
"Calculating Diffraction With the SPM" on page 133
"Sample Values for SPM Formulas" on page 133
"Calculating f(clutter) with the Standard Propagation Model" on page 134
"Modelling Fixed Receivers" on page 134
"Defining the Parameters of the Standard Propagation Model" on page 134.
4.1.2.1 Recommendations for Working with the Standard Propagation Model

It is important to remember that clutter information can be taken into consideration in both diffraction loss and f(clutter). To
avoid taking clutter information into account twice, you should choose one of the following approaches:
Approach #1: If you specify losses per clutter class, do not consider clutter altitudes in diffraction loss over the
transmitter-receiver profile. This approach is recommended if the clutter height information is statistical (i.e., where
the clutter is roughly defined and without a defined altitude).
Note: Because the Standard Propagation Model is a statistical propagation model, using this
approach is recommended.
Approach #2: If you consider clutter altitudes, do not define any loss per clutter class. In this case, f(clutter) will
be "0;" losses due to clutter will only be taken into account in the calculated diffraction. This approach is recom-
mended if the clutter altitude information is semi-deterministic (i.e., where the clutter is roughly defined with an
average altitude per clutter class) or deterministic (i.e., where the clutter is sharply defined with an average altitude
per clutter class or where there is a clutter height file).
If the clutter height information is an average height defined for each clutter class, you must specify a receiver
clearance per clutter class. Both ground and clutter altitude are considered along the whole transmitter-receiver
profile except over a specific distance around the receiver (clearance), in which A9155 bases its calculations only
on the DTM. The clearance information is used to model streets because it is assumed that the receiver is in the
street.
It is not necessary to define receiver clearance if the height information is from a clutter height file. In this case,
the clutter height information is accurate enough to be used without additional information such as clearance;
A9155 calculates the path loss if the receiver is in the street (if the receiver height is higher than the clutter height).
If the receiver height is lower than the clutter height, the receiver is assumed to be inside a building. In this case,
A9155 does not consider any diffraction for the building (or any clearance) but takes into account the clutter class
indoor loss as an additional penetration loss. Nevertheless, A9155 does consider diffraction caused by surround-
ing buildings. In Figure 4.35 on page 133 this diffraction is displayed with a green line.
Important: In order to consider indoor losses inside a building when only using a deterministic clutter
map (i.e., a clutter height map), you must clear the Indoor Coverage check box when cre-
ating a prediction or indoor losses will be added twice (once for the entire reception clutter
class and once as indoor losses).
132 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 4.35: Diffraction caused by surrounding buildings when the receiver is indoors
4.1.2.2 Calculating Diffraction With the SPM

You can set the parameters used to calculate diffraction losses on the Parameters and Clutter tabs of the Standard Prop-
agation Model Properties dialogue.
On the Parameters tab, you can define the calculation method used for diffraction and the K4 factor. The methods available
are:
Deygout
Epstein-Peterson
Deygout with correction
Millington
For detailed information on each method, see the Technical Reference Guide. The methods for calculating diffraction are
based on the general method for one or more obstacles described in the ITU 526-5 recommendations. The calculations
take the curvature of the earth into account. Along the transmitter-receiver profile, you can choose to take either the ground
altitude only or both the ground altitude and the clutter height into account. If you choose to take clutter height into account,
A9155 uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file. Otherwise, it uses average clutter height specified for
each clutter class in the clutter classes. When the clutter height information is statistical, A9155 also uses clearance values
per clutter class to model streets.
To take heights into account when calculating diffraction:
1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window.
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Propagation Models folder.
3. Right-click Standard Propagation Model. The context menu appears.
5. Click the Clutter tab.
6. Under Heights, select one of the following for Consider heights in diffraction:
- 1 - Yes: Select "1 - Yes" if you want heights from the clutter heights to be taken into account on top of the DTM
when calculating diffraction.
- 0 - No: Select "0 - No" if you want diffraction to be calculated using only the DTM.
7. Click OK.
4.1.2.3 Sample Values for SPM Formulas

The following table gives some possible values for the constants used in the Standard Propagation Model formulas.
Min. Typical Max.

K1 Variable Variable Variable
K2 20 44.9 70
K3 -20 5.83 20
K4 0 0.5 0.8
K5 -10 -6.55 0
K6 -1 0 0
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 133

A9155 User Manual
K1 is a constant; its value depends on the radio frequency and on the radio technology. The following table gives some
possible values for K1.
Project Type Frequency (MHz) K1

GSM 900 935 12.5
GSM 1800 1805 22
GSM 1900 1930 23
UMTS 2110 23.8
1xRTT 1900 23
Its value is heavily influenced by the values given to losses per clutter class.
4.1.2.4 Calculating f(clutter) with the Standard Propagation Model

The average of weighted losses due to clutter, f(clutter), is defined as follows:
n
f (clutter ) = Li w i
i =1
where
L: loss due to clutter.
w: weight.
n: number of points taken into account over the profile.
The losses due to clutter are calculated for the maximum distance from the receiver, defined as Maximum Distance on
the Clutter tab of the Standard Propagation Model Properties dialogue. When the Maximum Distance is defined as
"0", A9155 only considers the losses on the pixel where the receiver is located. On the Clutter tab, each clutter class is
assigned losses and a weighting function, enabling A9155 to give a weight to each point. For more information, see the
Technical Reference Guide.
Note: The losses per clutter class can be calculated using the Automatic Calibration Wizard.
For information on the Automatic Calibration Wizard, see the Measurements and Model
Calibration Guide.
The following table gives typical values for losses (in dB) per clutter class:
Clutter Class Losses (dB)

Dense urban from 4 to 5
Woodland from 2 to 3
Urban 0
Suburban from -5 to -3
Industrial from -5 to -3
Open in urban from -6 to -4
Open from -12 to -10
Water from -14 to -12
Note: The Standard Propagation Model is based on Hata formulas, which are valid for an urban
environment. The values above are consistent with an urban environment because losses
of 0 dB are indicated for an urban clutter class, with positive values for more dense clutter
classes and negative values for less dense clutter classes.
4.1.2.5 Modelling Fixed Receivers

The following are suggestions for defining the height of fixed receivers:
You can model the receiver as always being above the clutter, by selecting "1 - Yes" for the Receiver on Top of
Clutter option on the Clutter tab of the Standard Propagation Model Properties dialogue. The receiver height
will then be sum of the clutter height and the receiver height. This option can be used to model receivers on top
of buildings, for example.
You can define a specific receiver height for each clutter class in the Rx Height column on the Clutter tab of the
Standard Propagation Model Properties dialogue. Or, you can select "(default)" for the receiver height. When
creating a coverage prediction, A9155 will then read the receiver height on the Receiver tab of the Properties
dialogue for the Predictions folder.
4.1.2.6 Defining the Parameters of the Standard Propagation Model

You can define the parameters of the Standard Propagation Model using the Standard Propagation Model Properties
dialogue.
134 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: Default values have been assigned to the multiplying factors. The default values corre-
spond to the rural (quasi-open) Okumura-Hata formula valid for a frequency of 935 MHz.
The values for K values can be calculated using an automatic or assisted calibration
method. For more information, see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide.
To define the calculations parameters of the Standard Propagation Model Properties dialogue:
3. Right-click Standard Propagation Model. The context menu appears.
5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 4.36).
Figure 4.36: Standard Propagation Model - Parameters tab
Under Near Transmitter, you can set the following parameters:

- Maximum Distance: Set the maximum distance for a receiver to be considered near the transmitter. If the
distance between the receiver and the transmitter is greater than the set distance, the receiver is considered
far from the transmitter.
- K1 - los and K2 - los: Enter the K1 and K2 values that will be used for calculations when the receiver is in the
transmitter line of sight.
- K1 - nlos and K2 - nlos: Enter the K1 and K2 values that will be used for calculations when the receiver is not
in the transmitter line of sight.
Under Far from Transmitter, the values you set will be used for all receivers whose distance from the transmitter
is greater than the distance specified in Maximum Distance under Near Transmitter. You can set the following
parameters:
- K1 - los and K2 - los: Enter the K1 and K2 values that will be used for calculations when the receiver is in the
transmitter line of sight.
- K1 - nlos and K2 - nlos: Enter the K1 and K2 values that will be used for calculations when the receiver is not
in the transmitter line of sight.
Under Effective Antenna Height, you can set the following parameters:
- Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate HTxeff, the effective antenna height.
Notes: You can use the Automatic Calibration Wizard to select the best method for calculating
the effective Tx antenna height. For information on the Automatic Calibration Wizard, see
the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide.
- Distance min. and Distance max.: The Distance min. and Distance max. are set to 3,000 m and 15,000 m
(according to ITU recommendations) for frequencies under 500 MHz and to 0 m and 15,000 m (according to
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 135

A9155 User Manual
ITU recommendations) for high frequency mobile communications. These values are only used for the "Abs
Spot Ht" and the "Enhanced Slope at Receiver" methods. For more information on how these values are used,
see the Technical Reference Guide.
- K3: Enter the K3 value.
Under Diffraction, you can set the following parameters:
- Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate diffraction.

Under Other Parameters, you can set the following parameters:

- Kclutter: Enter the Kclutter value.
- Hilly Terrain Correction Factor: Select "1 - Yes" to take the Hilly Terrain Correction Factor into account.
Otherwise, select "0 - No". The Hilly Terrain Correction Factor corrects path loss for hilly regions when
transmitter and receiver are in LOS. For more information on the Hilly Terrain Correction Factor, see the
Technical Reference Guide.
- Limitation to Free Space Loss: When using a Hata-based propagation model, it is possible to calculate a
theoretical path loss that ends up being lower than the free space loss. In A9155, you can define any Hata-
based propagation model to never calculate a path loss that is lower than the calculated free space loss per
pixel. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to limit the path loss calculated per pixel to the cal-
culated free space loss.
- Profiles: Select the method to be used to extract the profile. If you select "1 - Radial," A9155 establishes a
profile between each transmitter and each point located on its calculation perimeter (as defined by the calcu-
lation radius) and then uses the nearest profile to make a prediction on a point inside the calculation perimeter.
This process is called radial optimisation. If you select "2 - Systematic," A9155 systematically determines a
profile between each transmitter and each point in its calculation area. This method requires a significantly
longer calculation time, therefore, you should choose "1 - Radial" if you want a shorter calculation time.
- Grid Calculation: Select "0 - Centred" if you want A9155 to perform the calculations at the centre of each
pixel or select "1 - Bottom left" if you want A9155 to perform the calculations at the lower left of each pixel.
6. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 4.37).
Figure 4.37: Standard Propagation Model - Clutter tab
Under Clutter Taken into Account, you can set the following parameters under Heights:
- Use Clutter Heights in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" if you want the clutter heights to be taken into account
when calculating diffraction.
- Receiver on Top of Clutter: Select "1 - Yes" if you want the receiver to be considered to be located on top
of clutter. This option can be used where fixed receivers are located on top of buildings.
Under Clutter Taken into Account, you can set the following parameters under Range:
- Max. Distance: Set the maximum distance from a transmitter for a receiver to be considered near the trans-
mitter.
- Weighting Function: Select a weighting function to be used to calculate a weight for each pixel: For more
information on weighting functions, see the Technical Reference Guide.
Under Parameters Per Clutter Class, you can set the following parameters for each clutter class:
136 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Losses: Enter, if desired, losses for each clutter class.

- Clearance: Enter, if desired, a clearance around each receiver for each clutter class. The clearance informa-
tion is used to model streets because it is assumed that the receiver is in the street. The clearance is used
when calculating diffraction when statistical clutter is taken into account.
- Rx Height: Enter, if desired, a specific receiver height for each clutter class. Or, you can select "(default)" for
the receiver height. When creating a coverage prediction, A9155 will then read the receiver height on the
Receiver tab of the Properties dialogue for the Predictions folder.
7. Click OK.
4.1.3 The Okumura-Hata Propagation Model

The Okumura-Hata model is suited for predictions in the 150 to 1000 MHz band over long distances (from one to 20 km).
It is best suited to GSM 900, IS-95 cdmaOne, and CDMA 1xRTT radio technologies.
Hata models in general are well adapted to the urban environment. You can define several corrective formulas and asso-
ciate a formula with each clutter class to adapt the Hata model to a wide variety of environments. You can also define a
default formula to be used when no land use data is available. Additionally, you can consider diffraction losses based on
the DTM.
"Defining General Settings (Okumura-Hata)" on page 137
"Selecting an Environment Formula (Okumura-Hata)" on page 137
"Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Okumura-Hata)" on page 138.
4.1.3.1 Defining General Settings (Okumura-Hata)

To set general parameters on the Okumura-Hata propagation model:
3. Right-click Okumura-Hata. The context menu appears.
5. Click the Parameters tab. You can modify the following settings:
- Add diffraction loss: The Okumura-Hata propagation model can take into account losses due to diffraction,
using a 1-knife-edge Deygout method, and using the ground altitude given in the DTM. For detailed informa-
tion on the Deygout method, see the Technical Reference Guide. The calculations take the curvature of the
earth into account. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to add losses due to diffraction.
- Limitation to free space loss: When using a Hata-based propagation model, it is possible to calculate a the-
oretical path loss that ends up being lower than the free space loss. In A9155, you can define any Hata-based
propagation model to never calculate a path loss that is lower than the calculated free space loss per pixel.
Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to limit the path loss calculated per pixel to the calculated
free space loss.
6. Click OK.
4.1.3.2 Selecting an Environment Formula (Okumura-Hata)

The Okumura-Hata propagation model can use an environment formula appropriate to each clutter class when calculating.
You can assign a default formula that A9155 can use for all clutter classes for which you have not assigned an environment
formula or if you do not have clutter classes in your A9155 document.
To select environment formulas:
5. Click the Configuration tab.
6. Under Formulas related to clutter classes, select a Default formula.
A9155 uses the default environment formula for calculations on any clutter class to which you have not assigned
an environment formula or if you do not have clutter classes in your A9155 document.
7. For each clutter class under Formulas related to clutter classes, select a formula from the list.
For information on modifying the selected formula, see "Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Okumura-
Hata)" on page 138.
8. Click OK.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 137

A9155 User Manual
4.1.3.3 Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Okumura-Hata)

Several environment formulas are available with the Okumura-Hata propagation model to model different environments.
You can modify existing environment formulas used by the Okumura-Hata propagation model or create new environmental
formulas.
To create or modify an environment formula:
6. Click the Formulas button. The Formulas dialogue appears. You can do the following:
- Add: To create a new formula, click the Add button and modify the parameters of the formula.
- Delete: To delete a formula, select the formula and click the Delete button.
- Modify: To modify an existing formula, select the formula and modify the parameters.
7. Click OK to save your changes and close the Formulas dialogue.
8. Click OK.
4.1.4 The Cost-Hata Propagation Model

The Cost-Hata model is suited for coverage predictions in the 1500 to 2000 MHz band over long distances (from one to
20 km). It is best suited to DCS 1800 and UMTS radio technologies.
default formula to be used when no land use data is available.
"Defining General Settings (Cost-Hata)" on page 138
"Selecting an Environment Formula (Cost-Hata)" on page 138
"Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Cost-Hata)" on page 139.
4.1.4.1 Defining General Settings (Cost-Hata)

To set general parameters on the Cost-Hata propagation model:
3. Right-click Cost-Hata. The context menu appears.
- Add diffraction loss: The Cost-Hata propagation model can take into account losses due to diffraction, using
a 1-knife-edge Deygout method, and using the ground altitude given in the DTM. For detailed information on
the Deygout method, see the Technical Reference Guide. The calculations take the curvature of the earth into
account. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to add losses due to diffraction.
free space loss.
6. Click OK.
4.1.4.2 Selecting an Environment Formula (Cost-Hata)

The Cost-Hata propagation model can use an environment formula appropriate to each clutter class when calculating. You
can assign a default formula that A9155 can use for all clutter classes for which you have not assigned an environment
138 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

For information on modifying the selected formula, see "Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Cost-Hata)"
on page 139.
8. Click OK.
4.1.4.3 Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Cost-Hata)

Several environment formulas are available with the Cost-Hata propagation model to model different environments. You
can modify existing environment formulas used by the Cost-Hata propagation model or create new environmental formu-
las.
8. Click OK.
4.1.5 The ITU 529-3 Propagation Model

The ITU 529-3 model is suited for predictions in the 300 to 1500 MHz band over long distances (from one to 100 km). It is
best suited to GSM 900 and IS95/cdmaOne radio technologies.
default formula to be used when no land use data is available. In addition, for long distances 20km<d<100 km), the model
uses automatically a corrective formula as defined in the recommendation.
"Defining General Settings (ITU 529-3)" on page 139
"Selecting an Environment Formula (ITU 529-3)" on page 139
"Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (ITU 529-3)" on page 140.
4.1.5.1 Defining General Settings (ITU 529-3)

To set general parameters on the ITU 529-3 propagation model:
3. Right-click ITU529. The context menu appears.
- Add diffraction loss: The ITU 529-3 propagation model can take into account losses due to diffraction, using
a 1-knife-edge Deygout method, and using the ground altitude given in the DTM. For detailed information on
the Deygout method, see the Technical Reference Guide. The calculations take the curvature of the earth into
account. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to add losses due to diffraction.
free space loss.
6. Click OK.
4.1.5.2 Selecting an Environment Formula (ITU 529-3)

The ITU 529-3 propagation model can use an environment formula appropriate to each clutter class when calculating. You
can assign a default formula that A9155 can use for all clutter classes for which you have not assigned an environment
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 139

A9155 User Manual

For information on modifying the selected formula, see "Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (ITU 529-3)"
on page 140.
8. Click OK.
4.1.5.3 Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (ITU 529-3)

Several environment formulas are available with the ITU 529-3 propagation model to model different environments. You
can modify existing environment formulas used by the ITU 529-3 propagation model or create new environmental formu-
las.
8. Click OK.

The ITU 370-7 model is based on the recommendations of the Vienna 1993 international conference on telecommunica-
tions network coordination. This model is suited for predictions in the 100 to 400 MHz band over long distances (over
10 km), such as in broadcast studies. It uses the terrain profile to calculate propagation.
The only parameter you can define with the ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93) model is the percentage of time during which the real
field is higher than the signal level calculated by the model (1%, 10%, or 50% of the time). The value 50% is usually used
for coverage predictions, whereas 1% is usually used for interference studies.
To set the percentage of time during which the real field is higher than the signal level:
5. Click the Parameters tab.
6. Under Calculate exceeded signal during, select one of the following:
- 50% of the time
- 10% of the time
- 1% of the time
7. Click OK.
Note: When using the ITU 370-7 model, do not define the cell edge coverage probability in the
coverage prediction properties with a value other than 50%, or cell edge coverage probabil-
ity will be considered twice.
140 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

4.1.7 The Erceg-Greenstein Propagation Model

The Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model is suited for predictions in the 1900 and 6000 MHz range over distances
between 100 m and 8 km. The Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model is suited for WiMAX (IEEE 802.16d and
802.16e).
The Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model is well adapted for suburban environment. You can define several correc-
tive formulas and associate a formula with each clutter class to adapt the model to a wide range of environments. You can
also define a default formula to be used when no land use data is available. You can also set a default formula which is
used when no clutter data is available.
"Defining General Settings (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI))" on page 141
"Selecting an Environment Formula (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI))" on page 141
"Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI))" on page 141.
4.1.7.1 Defining General Settings (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI))

To set general parameters on the Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model:
3. Right-click Erceg-Greenstein (SUI). The context menu appears.
- Add diffraction loss: The Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model can take into account losses due to
diffraction, using a 1-knife-edge Deygout method, and using the ground altitude given in the DTM. For detailed
information on the Deygout method, see the Technical Reference Guide. The calculations take the curvature
of the earth into account. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to add losses due to diffraction.
- Limitation to free space loss: When using the Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model, it is possible to
calculate a theoretical path loss that ends up being lower than the free space loss. In A9155, you can define
the Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model to never calculate a path loss that is lower than the calculated
free space loss per pixel. Select "1 - Yes" if you want the propagation model to limit the path loss calculated
per pixel to the calculated free space loss.
7. Click OK.
4.1.7.2 Selecting an Environment Formula (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI))

The Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model can use an environment formula appropriate to each clutter class when
calculating. You can assign a default formula that A9155 can use for all clutter classes for which you have not assigned
For information on modifying the selected formula, see "Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Erceg-
Greenstein (SUI))" on page 141.
8. Click OK.
4.1.7.3 Creating or Modifying Environment Formulas (Erceg-Greenstein (SUI))

Several environment formulas are available with the Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model to model different envi-
ronments. You can modify existing environment formulas used by the Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model or create
new environmental formulas.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 141

A9155 User Manual

8. Click OK.

The ITU 526-5 model is suitable for predictions in the 30 to 10,000 MHz band with fixed receivers.
According to the ITU 526-5 recommendations:
If there are no obstacles, propagation takes place in free space
If there is an obstacle, attenuation due to diffraction will be taken into account. The model uses the terrain profile
and a diffraction mechanism (3-knife-edge Deygout method), optionally with correction, to calculate path loss.
To set the parameters on the ITU 526-5 propagation model:
6. If desired, select the Apply to empirical correction check box and enter a formula that will be used as a correc-
tion with the Deygout method. Otherwise, the Deygout method will be used without correction.
7. Click OK.
4.1.9 The WLL Propagation Model

The WLL propagation model is designed for radio local loop applications in the 30-10,000 MHz band. The model is derived
from the ITU 526-5 model.
Along the Tx-Rx profile, both ground altitude and clutter height are considered to calculate diffraction losses. A9155 takes
clutter height information in clutter heights file if available in the ATL document. Otherwise, it considers average clutter
height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes file description. If the ATL document does not contain any clutter
height file and no average height per clutter class is specified, A9155 will consider ground altitude only.
To set the parameters on the WLL propagation model:
3. Right-click WLL. The context menu appears.
5. Click the Parameters tab. You can set the following parameters:
- Free space loss: You can modify the parameters of the formula used to calculate path loss in free space.
- Line of sight only: If the Line of sight only option is selected, A9155 checks for each pixel if the receiver is
in the transmitter line of sight. The receiver is considered to be in the transmitter line of sight if 100% of the
Fresnel half-ellipsoid is clear, in other words, if no obstacle is on the transmitter-receiver profile. If the receiver
is not in the transmitter line of sight, no results at all will be displayed. If the Line of sight only option is not
selected, A9155 calculates the path loss for each pixel, using the formula defined in the dialogue.
Important: If you select the Line of sight only option and the receiver is not in the transmitter line of
sight, no results at all will be displayed because A9155 will only show results for the line of
sight.
- Transmitter clearance: You can set the clearance around the transmitter. This clearance can be used, for
example, to model streets in areas where the clutter class file does not show enough detail. It will be taken
into consideration when calculating diffraction. The default value is 20 m.
- Receiver default clearance: You can set the default clearance around the receiver. This default clearance
will be used for each clutter class where the receiver clearance is not specified. This clearance will be taken
into consideration when calculating diffraction. The default value is 20 m.
- Receiver height per clutter class: You can set a height for the receiver for each clutter class. Because the
WLL propagation model is designed for networks with immobile receivers, the receivers are often on top of
buildings. This option allows you to specify a height which will be added to the clutter class.
142 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Receiver clearance per clutter class: You can set a clearance around the receiver for each clutter class.
This clearance will be taken into consideration when calculating diffraction.
6. Click OK.
4.1.10 The Longley-Rice Propagation Model

Longley-Rice is a theoretical model suited for predictions in the 40-MHz band in flat areas. The Longley-Rice propagation
model uses the terrain profile to calculate propagation. However, the parameters of the Longley-Rice propagation model
can be set using distance and an additional loss value.
To set the parameters on the Longley-Rice propagation model:
3. Right-click Longley-Rice. The context menu appears.
6. Under Add to propagation loss, enter the formula that will be used to calculate additional losses (in flat terrain,
a value of "0" means a signal decreasing in a linear fashion as a function of distance). "dkm" in the formula is the
distance in kilometres from the transmitter.
7. Click OK.
4.1.11 Working with the WinProp-ProMan Model

WinProp-ProMan is an urban propagation model developed by AWE. The plug-in module is fully integrated into A9155,
performing predictions based mainly on building databases generated by the building database management tool
WinProp-WallMan. The urban propagation model can be used for the following applications:
Microcellular coverage in urban environments with antenna heights below the rooftops and cell ranges of typically
a few hundreds of meters.
Minicellular coverage in urban environments with antenna heights above medium roof top level (where sur-
rounding buildings are both higher and lower) and with cell ranges of up to 2-3 kilometres.
Macrocellular coverage in urban environments with antennas mounted on top of buildings higher than surrounding
buildings and on masts with cell ranges of tens of kilometres.
In macro- and minicells the base station antenna is generally installed above the medium roof level of the surrounding
buildings. Therefore, the path loss is determined mainly by diffraction at the roof level, i.e., the main rays propagate above
the buildings. On the other hand, the base station antennas for micro cells are mounted below the roof level of the
surrounding buildings. In this case, wave propagation is determined by diffraction around and reflection off buildings, which
leads to wave guiding effects in street canyons.
4.1.11.1 Physical Background on Urban Propagation Models

Radio transmission in urban environments is subject to strong multipath propagation. The dominant characteristics in
these environments are reflection, diffraction, shadowing by discrete obstacles and wave guiding in street canyons. To
consider these effects in a propagation model, it is necessary to gain knowledge of all dominant propagation paths. The
dominant propagation paths depend primarily on the base station antenna height with respect to the height of surrounding
buildings.
To simplify propagation modelling, several two-dimensional empirical models have been developed based on the assump-
tion that over roof top propagation is the main propagation mechanism. The model according to Walfisch-Ikegami with
extensions from the European research cooperation COST 231 is such an analytical approach with empirically based
equations and correction factors.
The second group of micro-cellular prediction models are deterministic and use ray optical methods. They allow a very
site-specific, three-dimensional path loss and signal spread prediction including impulse response for base station heights
below as well as above roof top level. Therefore, a three-dimensional description of the propagation environment including
building shape and building height has to be incorporated. Of course, due to the three-dimensional ray optical methods
these models require a higher calculation effort than the simplified approaches already mentioned. However, a method to
accelerate this ray optical approach by an intelligent pre-processing of the building database has been developed which
leads to calculation times in the range of empirical models.
The described models are generally valid only for flat urban areas, which means that the standard deviation of the terrain
heights is small in comparison to the standard deviation of the building heights in the considered area. If this is not the
case, the influence of the terrain should be taken into account with adequate extensions to the previously discussed meth-
ods.
4.1.11.2 Required Databases

The basis for any propagation model is a building database, which describes the propagation environment. Urban propa-
gation modelling possess the best reliance on high resolution geographical information. High resolution databases of build-
ing structures in urban areas derived from aerial photography measurements and with an accuracy in the range of 1 to
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 143

A9155 User Manual
2 m are now normally being used. For urban propagation, it is essential to at least have accurate information about the
average height of individual buildings, especially when base stations are operating close to roof top height.
As micro-cells are planned to increase the network capacity in urban areas, it is obvious to use building-oriented data-
bases. In order to get a more accurate description of wave propagation, the building data are stored in a vector format.
Each building is modelled as a vertical object with a polygonal ground plane and a uniform height above street level. With
this approach only vertical walls and horizontal flat roofs are considered. Additionally, the material properties (i.e., thick-
ness, permeability, and conductivity) of the building surfaces can be taken into account, which is important for calculating
the reflection and diffraction coefficients and also for calculating the penetration into buildings.
Considering the influence of database information on prediction accuracy, it is noted that prediction errors in micro-cells
of up to 15 dB were attributed to database inaccuracies arising from the poor resolution of building data. Recalling that the
field estimation may be quite sensitive to the surface the terrain profile should also be taken into consideration when
modelling propagation if the considered area is not flat. Therefore, terrain databases in pixel format are required with reso-
lutions of about 20 to 30 m.
The building management tool WinProp-WallMan can be used to create, modify, simplify, and pre-process building data-
bases.
4.1.11.3 COST 231 Walfisch-Ikegami

Empirical models (e.g., models according to Walfisch/Ikegami) consider only propagation in a vertical plane which contains
both the transmitter and the receiver. In order to predict field strength, significant parameters have to be extracted from
this vertical section (e.g., average building height).
Finally equations containing these parameters have to be optimised and fitted to numerous measurements in order to
create a prediction model which is applicable in different propagation environments. The main advantage of empirical
models is their short calculation time. However, their prediction accuracy is limited due to the fact that only a small number
of parameters are taken into account and the influence of the distance from the transmitter is over-emphasized. As well,
wave-guiding effects caused by streets cannot be considered with an empirical approach.
The empirical model implemented in ProMan was developed during the course of the European COST 231 project from a
combination of the Walfisch and Ikegami models. However, this model is considered to be statistical and not deterministic
because only characteristic values are taken into account for the prediction.
Because PropMan was calibrated using measurements from European cities, no parameters have to be adjusted when
using this model. However using this empirical approach, it is not possible to predict wideband properties such as the delay
spread or impulse response of a mobile radio channel.
4.1.11.4 Intelligent Ray Tracing

Mobile radio channels in urban environments are characterized by strong multi-path propagation. Dominant propagation
mechanisms in these scenarios are reflection, diffraction, shadowing by discrete obstacles, and wave-guiding in street
canyons. With a ray optical approach, these effects can be taken into consideration in a propagation model.
As smaller wavelengths, i.e., higher frequencies, are considered , the wave propagation becomes similar to the propaga-
tion of light. A radio ray is assumed to propagate along a straight line influenced only by refraction, reflection, diffraction,
or scattering. These are the concepts of geometrical optics (GO). The criterion taken into account for this modelling
approach is that the wavelength should be much shorter in comparison to the extension of the considered obstacles, i.e.,
the buildings for urban environments. At the frequencies used for mobile communication networks this criterion is suffi-
ciently fulfilled.
4.1.11.5 Specular Reflection

Specular reflection is the mechanism by which a ray is reflected at an angle equal to the angle of incidence. The reflected
wave fields are related to the incident wave fields through a reflection coefficient, which is a matrix when the full polarimet-
ric description of the wave field is taken into account. The most common expression for the reflection is the Fresnel reflec-
tion coefficient, which is valid for an infinite boundary between two mediums, for example, air and concrete. The Fresnel
reflection coefficient depends on the incident wave field and upon the permeability and conductivity of each medium. The
application of the Fresnel reflection coefficient formulas is very popular and these equations are also applied in ProMan.
In order to calibrate the prediction model with measurements some ray optical software tools consider an empirical reflec-
tion coefficient varying with the angle of incidence to simplify the calculations. This type of empirical approach is also avail-
able in ProMan.
4.1.11.6 Diffraction
Diffraction, in ray theory, is the propagation phenomenon which explains the transition from the lit region to the shadow
regions behind the corner or over the rooftops. Diffraction by a single wedge can be solved in various ways: empirical
formulas, a perfectly absorbent wedge, the Geometrical Theory of Diffraction (GTD), or the Uniform Theory of Diffraction
(UTD). The advantages and disadvantages of using either one formulation is difficult to address, since it may not be inde-
pendent on the environments under investigation. Indeed, reasonable results are possible with each formulation. The vari-
ous expressions differ mainly from the approximations being made on the surface boundaries of the wedge considered.
One major difficulty is to express and use the proper boundaries in the derivation of the diffraction formulas. Another prob-
lem is the existence of wedges in real environments: the complexity of a real building corner or of the building's roof illus-
trates the modelling difficulties.
144 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Despite these difficulties, however, diffraction around a corner or over roof top are commonly modelled using the heuristic
UTD formulas since they are well behaved in the lit/shadow transition region, and account for the polarization as well as
for the wedge material. Therefore these formulas are also used in ProMan to calculate the diffraction coefficient.
4.1.11.7 Multiple Diffraction

For the case of multiple diffraction the complexity increases dramatically. In the case of propagation over rooftops the
result of Walfisch and Ikegami has been used to produce the COST-Walfisch-Ikegami model. One method frequently
applied to multiple diffraction problems is the UTD. The main problem with straightforward applications of the UTD is that
in many cases one edge is in the transition zones of the previous edges. Strictly speaking this forbids the application of
ray techniques, but in the spirit of the UTD the principle of local illumination of an edge should be valid. At least within some
approximate degrees, a solution can be obtained which is quite accurate in most cases of practical interest.
The key point in the theory is to include slope diffraction, which is usually neglected as a higher order term in an asymptotic
expansion, but in the transition zone the diffraction term is of the same order as the ordinary amplitude diffraction terms.
ProMan utilizes the UTD including slope diffraction for over roof top propagation for the calculation of multiple diffraction
processes. Additionally there is an empirical diffraction model available, which can easily be calibrated with measure-
ments.
4.1.11.8 Scattering
Rough surfaces and finite surfaces (i.e. surfaces with small extension in comparison to the wavelength) scatter the incident
energy in all directions with a radiation diagram, which depends on the roughness and size of the surface or volume. The
dispersion of energy through scattering means a decrease of the energy reflected in specular direction.
This simple view leads to account for the scattering process only by decreasing the reflection coefficient and thus, only by
multiplying the reflection coefficient with a factor smaller than one which depends exponentially on the standard deviation
of the surface roughness according to the Rayleigh theory. This description does not take into account the true dispersion
of radio energy in various directions, but accounts for the reduction of energy in the specular direction due to the diffuse
components scattered in all other directions.
4.1.11.9 Penetration
In order to predict indoor coverage, penetration losses due to building walls have been considered by material parameters
for different building types.
4.1.11.10 Ray Tracing

Ray optical propagation models are very often used for the prediction of the field strength in urban scenarios. They are
very accurate, because they consider wave-guiding effects in street canyons and they include diffraction at wedges. There
are two different approaches to determine the ray optical propagation paths between transmitter and receiver: Ray tracing
and ray launching.
Ray tracing calculates all rays for each receiver point individually and guarantees the consideration of each ray wall as
well as a constant resolution. In the ray launching approach, the rays are launched from the transmitter with a constant
angular increment. Thus the ray launching might neglect a wall because it is very small and located between two rays.
Different approaches to a better resolution with the ray launching were presented in the last years, but the ray- launching
has still kept the disadvantage of a variable resolution depending on the distance to the transmitter. The only advantage
of ray launching is the shorter calculation time compared to standard ray tracing algorithms. However, the ray tracing algo-
rithm within ProMan, which is called IRT (Intelligent Ray Tracing), is much faster than ray launching. IRT includes several
accelerations concerning calculation effort without considerable loss of accuracy.
4.1.11.11 Working with the WinProp-ProMan Model: Quick Start

Getting a WinProp License
To run WinProp, you need a separate, computer-dependent license file.

To install the license file:
1. Run the program "LicenseCustomer.exe" on computer on which you want to install WinProp. A file named
"License.DAT.<hostname>" is generated.
2. Send a license request including the DAT file to the A9155 Support Team.
3. After receiving the license file named "License.AWE.<hostname>" rename it to "License.AWE" and store it on the
target computer, for example, in the A9155 program directory.
4. Set the system and/or user variable WINPROP_LICENSE_FILE in System Properties Environment tab to the path
of the directory where the license file is located.
The WinProp DLL was automatically registered during installation of A9155.
To register the WinProp DLL file during a manual installation:
1. Click Start > Run. The Run dialogue appears.
2. In the Open text box of the Run dialogue, enter regsvr32 and the complete path of the WinProp DLL to register
the WinProp DLL. For example:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 145

A9155 User Manual
regsvr32 "C:\Program Files\Alcatel\A9155\winprop.dll"

3. Click OK.
Loading the Building Database
Load the vector-format building database via MIF- or DXF-Import in the Geo tab (for display purposes only).
Setting Propagation Parameters
To manage the WinProp-ProMan model:

3. Right-click WinProp-ProMan. The context menu appears.
5. Define the model parameters (see descriptions below).
6. Click OK to close the dialogue and save your changes.
Output Tab
Received power results are calculated by default. An offset can be set manually.
Channel impulse response results and propagation paths can be also calculated and redirected to an external file, defined
under Output file name. Graphical output for these results is planned for one of the next releases.
Database Tab
The name of the pre-processed building database has to be specified. An IRT- (Intelligent Ray Tracing) or a COST-data-
base has to be chosen.
Several offsets for material properties of buildings can be set in addition to the default values which are already set during
pre-processing of building database in WallMan.
Caution: The database type must match the selected prediction type on the Prediction tab.
146 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Prediction Tab
The prediction model used within the building database area has to be selected.
"Empirical Model COST231: Extended Walfisch-Ikegami-Model" can be chosen if a corresponding pre-processed building
database is available.
"IRT (Intelligent Ray Tracing)" can only be used if pre-processing was performed either for full 3D, real 2x2D or empirical
2x2D calculation.
For IRT, some parameters can be influenced: the maximum number of paths considered and the calculation type of the
contribution of the rays can be chosen. Also some parameters of the breakpoint can be modified.
Post-processing Tab
After the IRT or COST prediction, several post-processing steps can be triggered:
Indoor pixels covered by outdoor transmitters can be calculated in addition to the outdoor prediction.
A COST prediction for all pixels, which were not predicted with the IRT model can be performed.
The transition between IRT and COST for all pixels predicted with IRT can be influenced by several control param-
eters.
If a pre-processed IRT area is smaller than the entire building database area, a linear transition can be used for a
smooth transition between the IRT and the COST area.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 147

A9155 User Manual
In order to produce presentation plots, a filter function is available to smooth results.
Hybrid Model Tab
The Standard Propagation Model is used for predictions outside the building database area. A linear transition can be used
for a smooth transition at the building database border.
4.1.11.12 Working with the WinProp-ProMan Model: Important Hints

The urban propagation module WinProp consists of the ProMan prediction model integrated in A9155 and the WallMan
building database management tool. WallMan is used for the creation, modification, simplification, and pre-processing of
building databases before prediction.
The pre-processed prediction type must match the selected prediction type in A9155.
Several prediction types are available:
COST 231 Walfisch-Ikegami: An empirical model for preliminary estimations.
Empirical 2x2D: 2D ray tracing on the horizontal plane and COST prediction on the vertical plane (it represents
the best compromise between accuracy and calculation speed).
Real 2x2D: 2D ray tracing on both the horizontal and vertical plane.
Full 3D: 3D ray tracing for detailed analysis, delay spread, and propagation path investigations.
Hybrid: IRT and/or COST within the building database area and the Standard Propagation Model outside the
building database area.
148 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

The pre-processed mobile station height must match the selected height on the Receiver tab of the Prediction Properties
dialogue.
The calculation resolution need not necessarily be the same as the pre-processing resolution. In that case the result is
over-sampled automatically. The recommended resolution for urban predictions is 10 meters.
The computation zone or the calculation radius can be larger than the pre-processed area. In that case the hybrid model
is called which uses the Standard Propagation Model for the regions outside the building database area.
Warnings while calculating are not displayed on screen but written into a log file called logfile.log.
For further information about the WinProp package, please refer to:
A9155 V6 WinProp ProMan User Manual V 5.81 3DF 01955 6082 PCZZA
A9155 V6 WinProp WallMan User Manual V 5.81 3DF 01955 6083 PCZZA
A9155 V6.4 WinProp ProMan Reference Manual 3DF 01955 6083 RKZZA
4.1.12 Managing Propagation Models

The propagation models available for the current A9155 document can be found in the Propagation Models folder on the
Modules tab of the Explorer window. You can manage the propagation models with the commands available on the
context menu.
To manage the propagation models of the current A9155 document:
3. Right-click the propagation model you want to manage. The context menu appears.
4. Select one of the following commands from the context menu:
- Properties: The Properties dialogue appears. You can view the general information about the propagation
model on the General tab:
- Name: The name of the propagation model, as displayed in the Propagation Models folder
- Signature: The signature is assigned to the propagation model by A9155. Each time you modify the
parameters of the selected propagation model, A9155 changes the signature. The signature of the prop-
agation model used to calculate a set of path loss matrices is stored with the matrices. This enables A9155
to verify the validity of the path loss matrices.
- When path loss matrices are not embedded in the A9155 document but are stored externally, the signa-
ture is found in the MODEL_SIG field of the Pathloss.dbf file. The name of the propagation model used is
found in the MODEL_NAME field of the Pathloss.dbf file.
- Description: You can enter a description or comments in this field.
- Duplicate: The selected propagation model is duplicated. It appears in the Propagation Models folder with
the same name, preceded by "Copy of."
- Copy: The selected propagation model is copied. You can paste it, with its current settings into a new A9155
document by opening the document, clicking the Modules tab of the Explorer window and pressing CTRL+V.
Note: If there is already a propagation model in the A9155 document with the same name as the
one you are trying to paste, A9155 will display a warning and will not allow you to overwrite
the existing propagation model.
- Delete: The selected propagation model is deleted.

- Rename: You can enter a new name for the selected propagation model.
4.2 Defining Calculation Parameters

A9155 uses the propagation model defined for each transmitter to calculate losses along the transmitter-receiver path.
Depending on the type of prediction you make, A9155 either calculates the path loss at any point of the map in real time,
or it calculates a path loss matrix for each transmitter that will be considered in predictions. The path loss matrix contains
a set of path loss values calculated on each pixel over a specific area. It is calculated based on a set of three parameters
defined for the transmitter:
The propagation model
The calculation radius
The resolution.
By using a calculation radius, A9155 limits the scope of calculations to a defined area.
A9155 enables you to calculate two path loss matrices: a main and an extended one. By using two sets of calculation
parameters, A9155 allows you to calculate high resolution path loss matrices closer to the transmitter with one propagation
model, while reducing calculation time and storage size by using an extended matrix with a lower resolution and another
propagation model. A9155 will calculate the extended matrix only if you define all three parameters: propagation model,
calculation radius, and resolution.
If you do not define a calculation radius for the main propagation model and if you do not assign an extended propagation
model, A9155 uses the prediction minimum threshold to define the calculation radius for each transmitter. However, this
can lead to lengthy calculation times.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 149

A9155 User Manual
Note: When creating coverage predictions, you can define a coverage resolution that is different
from the resolution defined for the path loss matrices.

"Defining Calculation Parameters for One Transmitter" on page 150
"Defining the Same Calculation Parameters for a Group of Transmitters" on page 150
"Defining the Same Calculation Parameters for All Transmitters" on page 151
"Defining a Default Propagation Model" on page 151
"Defining a Default Resolution" on page 151.
4.2.1 Defining Calculation Parameters for One Transmitter

In A9155, you can define calculation parameters, in other words, the propagation model, resolution, and calculation radius,
for each transmitter.
To define main and extended calculation parameters for one transmitter:
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder.
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign main and extended calculation parameters. The context
menu appears.
5. Click the Propagation tab.
6. Under Main Matrix:
- Select a Propagation Model
- Enter a Radius and Resolution.
7. If desired, under Extended Matrix:
8. Click OK. The selected calculation parameters will be used for the selected transmitter.
4.2.2 Defining the Same Calculation Parameters for a Group of

Transmitters
Transmitters that share the same parameters and environment will usually use the same propagation model and settings.
In A9155, you can defining the same calculation parameters for several transmitters by first grouping them by their
common parameters and then defining the calculation parameters.
To define main and extended calculation parameters for a defined group of transmitters:
2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears.
3. Select from the Group by submenu of the context menu the property by which you want to group the transmitters.
The objects in the folder are grouped by that property.
Note: You can group transmitters by several properties by using the Group By button on the
Properties dialogue. For more information, see "Advanced Grouping" on page 63.

5. Right-click the group of transmitters for which you want to define main and extended calculation parameters. The
context menu appears.
6. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Transmitters table appears with the transmitters from the
selected group.
For each transmitter, you can set the calculation parameters in the following columns:
- Main Propagation Model

- Main Calculation Radius
- Main Resolution
- Extended Propagation Model
- Extended Calculation Radius
- Extended Resolution
7. To enter the same values in one column for all transmitters in the table:
a. Enter the value in the first row in the column.
b. Select the entire column.
150 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

c. Select Edit > Fill > Down to copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells.
Note: If you want to copy the contents of the last cell in the selection into all other cells, you can
select Edit > Fill > Up. For more information on working with tables in A9155, see "Working
4.2.3 Defining the Same Calculation Parameters for All

Transmitters
In A9155, you can choose one set of calculation parameters and assign them to all transmitters.
To define the same calculation parameters for all transmitters:
7. Click OK. The selected calculation parameters will be used for all transmitters.
Note: Setting a different main or extended matrix on an individual transmitter as explained in

"Defining Calculation Parameters for One Transmitter" on page 150 will override this entry.
4.2.4 Defining a Default Propagation Model

When you assign a propagation model to a transmitter, you can choose "(Default Model)" from the list of the propagation
models available. A9155 will then calculate path loss using the default propagation model set for the project.
To define the default propagation model for the A9155 document:
2. Right-click the Predictions folder. The context menu appears.
4. Click the Predictions tab.
5. Select a Default Propagation Model from the list.
6. Click OK. The selected propagation model will be used for predictions for all transmitters whose main propagation
model is "(Default model)."
4.2.5 Defining a Default Resolution

When the resolution of the path loss matrix is not defined in the transmitter properties, A9155 uses the default resolution
set for the A9155 document. Additionally, this resolution is used as the default coverage resolution when you create a new
coverage prediction.
To define the default resolution of the A9155 document:
5. Enter a Default Resolution.
Tip: By setting an option in the atoll.ini file, you can set A9155 to use the currently defined
default resolution if you clear the value entered in the Resolution text box when you create
a coverage prediction. That way, if you have many coverage predictions, you can change
their resolution by changing the default resolution and recalculating the coverage predic-
tions. A9155 will then calculate them using the updated resolution. For information on
changing entries in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 151

A9155 User Manual
6. Click OK.
4.3 Managing Path Loss Matrices

4.3.1 Calculating Path Loss Matrices
When you calculate a coverage prediction, A9155 automatically calculates non-existent and invalid path loss matrices
before calculating the prediction. This can take a lot of time if there are many path loss matrices that must be calculated.
Consequently, you can calculate path loss matrices separately, when you have more time and computer resources avail-
able. In multi-user environments, the administrator is responsible for shared path loss matrices and can calculate them
separately. Users can then base calculations on the updated shared path loss matrices.
When you calculate a coverage prediction, A9155 calculates only the non-existent and invalid path loss matrices that inter-
sect the rectangle containing the computation zone. When you manually calculate the path loss matrices as described in
this section, A9155 does not take the computation zone into consideration; it calculates all non-existent and invalid path
loss matrices of active and filtered transmitters.
To calculate path loss matrices:
3. Select Calculations > Calculate Path Loss Matrices from the context menu. A9155 calculates all non-existent
and invalid path loss matrices of active and filtered transmitters.
You can calculate the non-existent and invalid path loss matrices for all transmitters, for a single transmitter, or for a
defined group of transmitters, by expanding the Transmitters folder right-clicking either the single transmitter or the
defined group of transmitters and selecting Calculations > Calculate Path Loss Matrices from the context menu.
Note: You can prevent A9155 from calculating one or more path loss matrices by locking them.
You can lock path loss matrices using the Propagation tab of the Transmitters dialogue.
You can lock a single path loss matrix by selecting the check box in the Locked column, or
more than one by selecting several path loss matrices and then selecting Lock from the
context menu.
4.3.2 Stopping Path Loss Matrix Calculation

Depending on the size of the path loss matrices, it can take a long time and a lot of computer resources to calculate them.
If necessary, you can stop calculation at any point.
To stop calculations:
Click the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar. A9155 immediately stops all ongoing calculations. The
results of calculations that have already been completed, however, will be saved.
4.3.3 Setting the Storage Location of Path Loss Matrices

Path loss matrices can be stored internally, in the A9155 document, or they can be stored externally. Storing path loss
matrices in the A9155 document results in a more portable but significantly larger document. In the case of large radio-
planning projects, embedding the matrices can lead to large documents which use a great deal of memory. Therefore, in
the case of large radio-planning projects, saving your path loss matrices externally will help reduce the size of the file and
the use of computer resources.
When you save the path loss matrices to an external directory, A9155 creates:
One file per transmitter with the extension LOS for its main path loss matrix
A DBF file with validity information for all the main matrices.
A folder called "LowRes" with LOS files and a DBF file for the extended path loss matrices.
To set the storage location of the path loss matrices:
4. On the Predictions tab, under Path Loss Matrix Storage, you can set the location for your private path loss
matrices:
- Private Directory: The Private Directory is where you store path loss matrices you generate or, if you are
loading path loss matrices from a shared location, where you store your changes to shared path loss matrices.
Click the button beside the Private Directory ( ) and select Embedded to save the path loss matrices in
the A9155 document, or Browse to select a directory where A9155 can save the path loss matrices externally.
152 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Caution: When you save the path loss files externally, the external files are updated as soon as cal-
culations are performed and not only when you save the A9155 document. In order to keep
consistency between the A9155 document and the stored calculations, you should save the
A9155 document before closing it, if you have updated the path loss matrices.
- Shared Directory: When you are working in a multi-user A9155 environment, the project data is stored in a
database and the common path loss matrices are stored in a directory that is accessible to all users. Any
changes you make will not be saved to this directory; they will be saved in the location indicated in Private
Directory. The path loss matrices in the shared directory are updated by a user with administrator rights based
on the updated information in the database. For more information on shared directories, see The Administrator
Manual.
5. Click OK.
4.3.4 Using Centralised Path Loss Matrices

Using centralised path loss matrices is recommended in a multi-user environment when several users are working on the
same radio-planning document. In this case, the radio data is stored in a database. An administrator responsible for calcu-
lations calculates the path loss matrices of the entire project and saves them in an external folder accessible to all users.
This folder is shared by all users and read only. When the user changes his radio data and recalculates the path loss matri-
ces, the changes to the path loss matrices are stored locally; the common path loss matrices are not modified. In other
words, the user can read the information from the shared path loss matrices but any changes he makes will be stored
locally, either in the ATL file or in a private external folder. Centralised path loss matrices will be recalculated by the admin-
istrator and will take into consideration the changes made by all users to the radio data.
For information on calculating path loss matrices, see "Calculating Path Loss Matrices" on page 152.
For information on setting the storage location for local path loss matrices, see "Setting the Storage Location of
Path Loss Matrices" on page 152.
For information on working in a multi-user environment, see the Administrator Manual.
To use pre-calculated path loss matrices:
4. On the Predictions tab, under Path Loss Matrix Storage, you can set the location for the shared path loss
matrices:
Manual.
5. Click OK.
4.3.5 Checking the Validity of Path Loss Matrices

A9155 automatically checks the validity of the path loss matrices when calculating any coverage prediction. If you want,
you can check whether the path loss matrices are valid before calculating a coverage prediction.
To check whether the path loss matrices are valid:
4. Click the Propagation tab. The path loss matrix information is listed in the Available Results table.
5. Select one of the following display options:
- Display all the matrices: All path loss matrices are displayed.
- Display only invalid matrices: Only invalid path loss matrices are displayed.
The Available Results table lists the following information for each displayed path loss matrix:
- Transmitter: The name of the transmitter.

- Locked: If the check box is selected, the path loss matrix will not be updated even if the path loss matrices
are recalculated.
- Valid: This is a boolean field indicating whether or not the path loss matrix is valid.
- Origin of Invalidity: If the path loss matrix is indicated as being invalid, the reason is given here.
- Size: The size of the path loss matrix for the transmitter.
- File: If the path loss matrix is not embedded, the location of the file is listed.
6. Click the Statistics button to display the number of path loss matrices to be recalculated. The Statistics dialogue
appears (see Figure 4.38) with the total number of invalid path loss matrices and the reasons for invalidity, as well
as a summary of the reasons for invalidity.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 153

A9155 User Manual
Figure 4.38: Path loss matrix statistics
4.3.6 Exporting Path Loss Matrices

You can export path loss matrices if you want to use the data in another application.
To export an A9155 documents path loss matrices:
5. Right-click the Available Results table and select Select All from the context menu.
6. Right-click the Available Results table and select Export from the context menu. The Calculation Results
Export dialogue appears (see Figure 4.39).
7. Set the following export parameters:
- Directory: Enter the directory you want to store the exported path loss matrices in or click the Browse button
( ) to navigate to it. The directory must already exist.
- Exported Values: Select the values that are to be exported: Path Loss (dB), Signal Level (dBm), Signal Level
(dBV), or Signal Level (dBV/m).
- Format: Select the format of the exported data: Binary format (*.bil), Text (separating character: tab) (*.txt),
or CSV (separating character: semicolon) (*.csv).
Figure 4.39: Exporting path loss matrices
8. Click OK to export the path loss matrices.
4.4 Predictions Available in A9155

There are two types of predictions available in A9155:
Point predictions using the Point Analysis tool: It allows you to predict, at any point on the map, the profile
between a reference transmitter and a receiver, the value of the signal levels of the surrounding transmitters, an
active set analysis for UMTS, cdmaOne/CDMA2000, and TD-SCDMA projects and an interference analysis for
GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects.
Coverage predictions: You can calculate standard coverage predictions, coverage by transmitter, coverage by
signal level and overlapping zones, and specific coverage studies such as interference studies for GSM/GPRS/
EDGE projects or handover, service availability, etc. for UMTS and cdmaOne/CDMA2000 and TD-SCDMA
projects. Many customisation features on coverage studies are available in order to make their analysis easier.
"Making Point Predictions" on page 155
"Making Coverage Predictions" on page 157.
154 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

4.4.1 Making Point Predictions

"Starting a Point Analysis" on page 155
"The Tabs of the Point Analysis Tool Window" on page 155
"Moving the Receiver on the Map" on page 156
"Taking Indoor Losses into Account" on page 156
"Taking Shadowing into Account in Point Analyses" on page 156.
4.4.1.1 Starting a Point Analysis

When you start a point analysis, A9155 automatically opens the Point Analysis Tool window.
To make a point analysis:
1. Click the Point Analysis Tool ( ) in the Radio toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool window appears and the
pointer changes ( ) to represent the receiver.
2. A line appears on the map connecting the selected transmitter and the current position.
Note: You can open the Point Analysis Tool window without starting a point analysis by select-
ing View > Point Analysis Tool.
3. Select the tab of the Point Analysis Tool window corresponding to the type of point prediction you want to make.
For information on the tabs available in the Point Analysis Tool window, see "The Tabs of the Point Analysis Tool
Window" on page 155.
4.4.1.2 The Tabs of the Point Analysis Tool Window

The Point Analysis Tool window has several tabs, enabling you to make several different point predictions. The tabs
available depend on the radio technology of the current document:
The Profile tab:
The Profile tab of the Point Analysis Tool window displays the profile between a reference transmitter and the
receiver. As well, A9155 displays the strength of the received signal from the selected transmitter. This is calcu-
lated in real time.
The Profile tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA, UMTS,
TD-SCDMA, and WiMAX projects.
The Reception tab:

The Reception tab of the Point Analysis Tool window displays the predicted signal level from different transmit-
ters in the form of a bar chart, from the highest predicted signal level on the top to the lowest one on the bottom.
The calculations are based on the path loss matrices. Each bar is displayed in the colour of the transmitter it repre-
sents.
The Reception tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA, UMTS, and
TD-SCDMA projects.
The AS Analysis tab:
The AS Analysis tab displays information on the pilot quality (EcI0), which is the main parameter used to define
the mobile active set, the connection status, and the active set of the probe mobile.
The AS Analysis tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for CDMA and UMTS projects.
The Interference tab:

The Interference tab displays, in the form of a bar graph, the signal level of the selected transmitter, a black bar
indicating the total interference experienced by the receiver, and bars representing the interference received from
each interferer.
The Interference tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects.
The PN Offset Interference tab:

The PN Offset Interference tab of the Point Analysis window gives you information on the reception for any point
on the map where there is PN Offset interference.
The PN Offset Interference tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for CDMA projects.
The SC Interference tab:

The SC Interference tab of the Point Analysis window gives you information on reception for any point on the
map where there is scrambling code interference.
The SC Interference tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for UMTS projects.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 155

A9155 User Manual
The Results tab:

The Results tab displays the current position and height of the receiver, the clutter class it is situated on, and, in
GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, the received signal and interference of each transmitter in decreasing order.
The Results tab is available in the Point Analysis Tool window for GSM/GPRS/EDGE, CDMA, UMTS, WiMAX
and TD-SCDMA projects.
4.4.1.3 Moving the Receiver on the Map

When you make a point analysis, the pointer ( ) represents the receiver in the map window. You can change the posi-
tion of the receiver in several ways:
You can move the receiver manually
You can enter the coordinates of the new position
You can place the receiver on a selected site.
To change the position of the receiver manually:
Move the receiver to change the current position.
Click to place the receiver at the current position. You can move the receiver again by clicking it a second time.
To enter the coordinates of a position:
1. Right-click the receiver ( ) in the map window. The context menu appears.
2. Select Coordinates from the context menu. The Receiver Position dialogue appears.
3. Enter or paste the X and Y coordinates of the position and click OK. The receiver moves to the specificed position.
To place the receiver on a selected site:
1. Right-click the receiver ( ) in the map window. The context menu appears.
2. Select Target Site from the context menu. The Target Site dialogue appears.
3. Select the site on which you want to place the receiver from the Name list and click OK. The receiver moves to
the specificed position.
4.4.1.4 Taking Indoor Losses into Account

In A9155 you can calculate indoor predictions by taking indoor losses into consideration. You can define default indoor
losses for all clutter classes, or you can define different indoor losses for each clutter class so that the characteristics of
each clutter class are taken into consideration during calculations.
To take indoor losses into account when making a point analysis:
1. Right-click the tab you are using in the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The
Properties dialogue appears.
2. Select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses to the total path loss.
4.4.1.5 Taking Shadowing into Account in Point Analyses

Shadowing, or slow fading, is signal loss along a path caused by obstructions not taken into consideration by the propa-
gation model. Even when a receiver remains in the same location or in the same clutter class, there are variations in recep-
tion due to the surrounding environment.
Normally, the signal received at any given point is spread on a gaussian curve around an average value and a specific
standard deviation. If the propagation model is correctly calibrated, the average of the results it gives should be correct.
In other words, in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be greater and in 50% of the measured cases, the result will
be worse.
A9155 uses a model standard deviation with the defined cell edge coverage probability to model the effect of shadowing
and thereby provide predictions that are reliable more than fifty percent of the time. The additional losses or gains caused
by shadowing are known as the shadowing margin. The shadowing margin is added to the path losses calculated by the
propagation model.
For example, a properly calibrated propagation model calculates a loss leading to a signal level of -70 dBm. You have set
a cell edge coverage probability of 85%. If the calculated shadowing margin is 7 dB for a specific point, the target signal
will be equal to or greater than -77 dBm 85% of the time.
For information on setting the model standard deviation and the CI standard deviations for each clutter class or for all
clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 105.
You can take shadowing into account when you are making a point analysis.
To take shadowing into account when making a point analysis:
1. Right-click the tab you are using in the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The
2. Select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. A9155 cal-
culates the shadowing using the standard deviation defined per clutter class.
156 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

3. From the Shadowing Margin list, you can select the standard deviation to see the value used by A9155 to calcu-
late the shadowing. The standard deviation used by A9155 depends on the Point Analysis tab chosen.
For GSM/GPRS/EDGE and WiMAX projects:
- From Model: A9155 uses the model standard deviation to calculate the results for the Profile or Reception
tabs.
- CI: A9155 uses the CI standard deviation to calculate the results for the Interference tab (GSM/GPRS/
EDGE only).
For UMTS, CDMA and TD-SCDMA projects:
- From Model: A9155 uses the model standard deviation to calculate the results for the Profile or Reception
tabs. A9155 also uses the model standard deviation, along with the other defined standard deviations, to cal-
culate the results for the AS Analysis tab (UMTS and CDMA only). A9155 also uses the model standard devi-
ation, along with the EcI0 defined standard deviations, to calculate the results for the PN Offset Interference
tab (CDMA) and SC Interference tab (UMTS)
- P-CCPCH Eb/Nt: A9155 uses the P-CCPCH EbNt standard deviation to calculate the results for the Profile
or Reception tabs (TD-SCDMA only).
- EcI0: A9155 uses the EcI0 standard deviation, along with the model defined standard deviations, to calcu-
late the results for the PN Offset Interference tab (CDMA) and SC Interference tab (UMTS).
- EbNt UL: A9155 uses the EbNt UL standard deviation, along with the other defined standard deviations, to
calculate the results for the AS Analysis tab (UMTS and CDMA only).
- EbNt DL: A9155 uses the EbNt DL standard deviation, along with the other defined standard deviations, to
calculate the results for the AS Analysis tab (UMTS and CDMA only).
Note: The standard deviation chosen from the Shadowing Margin list is for information only; it is
used only to display the value used by A9155 and does not change the standard deviation
used to calculate the displayed results.
4.4.2 Making Coverage Predictions

A coverage prediction displays the results of defined coverage conditions. It is calculated using the path loss matrices and
is based on coverage conditions and coverage resolutions. After calculation, A9155 displays the results as a graphical
representation of the pixels for which the defined coverage conditions are satisfied.
A9155 offers the following general coverage predictions, available for all technologies:
Coverage by transmitter
Coverage by signal level
Coverage by overlapping zones.
A9155 also offers technology-specific coverage predictions, described in the technology-specific chapters, for example:
Interference studies in GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects
Coding scheme and throughput studies for GPRS/EDGE
UMTS or cdmaOne/CDMA2000 coverage predictions.
A9155 gives you a large flexibility over how the results of your coverage prediction are displayed. You can select which
attributes should be displayed on the map and how they are displayed. As well, you can define information to be displayed
in the legend, in the label, or in tooltips. Furthermore, A9155 also allows you to filter, sort, or group results before displaying
them.
A9155 offers different commands and options enabling you to create and work with coverage predictions. In this section,
the following are explained:
"Creating Coverage Predictions" on page 157
"Calculating Coverage Predictions" on page 158
"Saving Defined Coverage Predictions" on page 160.
4.4.2.1 Creating Coverage Predictions

In A9155, you can create a coverage prediction using several different methods. Each method has its own advantages.
For example, you can create a new coverage prediction and set all of the parameters. Or you can base a new coverage
prediction on an existing one.
In this section, the following ways of creating a coverage prediction are explained:
"Creating a Coverage Prediction Using the New Command" on page 157
"Creating a Coverage Prediction Using the Duplicate Command" on page 158
"Creating a Coverage Prediction Using the Clone Command" on page 158.
4.4.2.1.1 Creating a Coverage Prediction Using the New Command

When you create a new coverage prediction, you can select the type of coverage prediction and set all the parameters
that define it. The newly created coverage prediction is not automatically calculated.
To create a coverage prediction:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 157

A9155 User Manual
3. Select New from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears.
4. Select a coverage prediction from the Study Types dialogue and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties
dialogue appears.
The Properties dialogue for a coverage prediction common to all technologies has three tabs:
- General tab: You can rename the study, define the coverage resolution, and add comments. You can also
and define group, sort and filter criteria; these criteria will apply to the coverage display, not the results.
- Condition tab: You can define the parameters of the coverage prediction.
- Display tab: You can define how coverage prediction results will be displayed.
5. Click OK to save your settings. The newly created coverage prediction appears in the Predictions folder. If you
wish, you can create another coverage prediction and calculate all coverage predictions at the same time.
For information on calculating coverage predictions, see "Calculating Coverage Predictions" on page 158.
4.4.2.1.2 Creating a Coverage Prediction Using the Duplicate Command

You can create a new coverage prediction by duplicating an existing coverage prediction. When you duplicate an existing
coverage prediction, the coverage prediction you create will have the same coverage and display settings as the original
one. Duplicating a coverage prediction is a way to quickly create a new coverage prediction with the same settings as an
original one. The newly created coverage prediction is not automatically calculated.
To duplicate an existing coverage prediction:
3. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to duplicate. The context menu appears.
4. Select Duplicate from the context menu. A new coverage prediction appears in the Predictions folder with the
same name as the original coverage prediction, preceded by "Copy of." The duplicated coverage prediction has
the same coverage and display settings as the original one.
For information on calculating coverage predictions, see "Calculating Coverage Predictions" on page 158.
4.4.2.1.3 Creating a Coverage Prediction Using the Clone Command

You can create a new coverage prediction by cloning an existing coverage prediction. When you clone an existing cover-
age prediction, A9155 creates a copy of the coverage prediction with the calculated coverage. You can then change the
display, providing that the selected parameter does not invalidate the calculated coverage prediction. Cloning is useful if
the existing coverage prediction has a display by discrete values (e.g., coverage by transmitter with a display by transmit-
ter) and if you want a new coverage prediction with another display by discrete values (e.g., display by RNC or BSC). In
this case, A9155 maps the results to the selected field and you do not need to recalculate the coverage prediction. On the
other hand, cloning is not relevant if you change the display from a discrete field to value intervals, in which case, you must
recalculate the study.
To clone an existing coverage prediction:
3. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to clone. The context menu appears.
4. Select Clone from the context menu. A new coverage prediction appears in the Predictions folder with the same
name as the original coverage prediction, preceded by "Clone of." The cloned coverage prediction not only has
the same coverage and display settings as the original one, but keeps the same results as well.
5. Right-click the cloned coverage prediction. The context menu appears.
8. On the Display tab, keep the Display Type "Discrete Values" selected.
9. Select another value from the Field list to change the value displayed.
10. Click OK to apply the new display parameter.
4.4.2.2 Calculating Coverage Predictions

After you have defined a coverage prediction, you can calculate it. A9155 allows you to define and calculate coverage
predictions in two separate steps. This enables you to create one or several coverage predictions at one time, and then
calculate them later, when you do not need the computer resources.
Before calculating one or more coverage predictions, you can create a computation zone. The computation zone is used
to define the area where A9155 carries out calculations. When you create a computation zone, A9155 carries out the
calculation for all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose
propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. Therefore, it takes into consideration base
stations inside and base stations outside the computation zone if they have an influence on the computation zone. In addi-
tion, the computation zone defines the area within which the coverage prediction results will be displayed.
When working with a large network, the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you
are currently working on. By allowing you to reduce the number of base stations studied, A9155 reduces both the time and
158 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

computer resources necessary for calculations. As well, by taking into consideration base stations within the computation
zone and base stations outside the computation zone but which have an influence on the computation zone, A9155 gives
you realistic results for base stations that are close to the border of the computation zone.
If there is no computation zone defined, A9155 makes its calculations on all base stations that are active and filtered and
for the entire extent of the geographical data available.
For information on creating a computation zone, see "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 41.
"Calculating Several Coverage Predictions" on page 159
"Calculating a Single Coverage Prediction" on page 159
"Forcing Calculations" on page 159
"Stopping Calculations" on page 159
"Locking Coverage Predictions" on page 160.
4.4.2.2.1 Calculating Several Coverage Predictions

When you have several defined coverage predictions, you can start calculation when you want and A9155 will calculate
them one after the other.
When you calculate coverage predictions, only unlocked coverage predictions are calculated. Unlocked coverage predic-
tions are displayed in the Predictions folder with the unlocked icon ( ). For information on locking and unlocking cover-
age predictions, see "Locking Coverage Predictions" on page 160.
To calculate created coverage predictions:
Click the Calculate button ( ) in the toolbar. When you click the Calculate button, A9155 first calculates non-
existent and invalid path loss matrices and then, unlocked coverage predictions in the Predictions folder.
The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window.
After calculation, the results are displayed in the map window, if the coverage predictions visibility check box has
been selected.
4.4.2.2.2 Calculating a Single Coverage Prediction

To calculate a single coverage prediction:
3. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to calculate. The context menu appears.
4. Select Calculate from the context menu.
A9155 first calculates non-existent and invalid path loss matrices and then, the coverage prediction even if this
one has been previously locked.
been selected.
4.4.2.2.3 Forcing Calculations

When you have several defined coverage predictions, you can start calculation when you want and A9155 will calculate
them one after the other. Normally, A9155 only recalculates non-existent and invalid path loss matrices before calculating
coverage predictions. If you want, you can make A9155 recalculate all path loss matrices, including valid ones.
When you calculate coverage predictions, only unlocked coverage predictions are calculated. Unlocked coverage predic-
tions are displayed in the Predictions folder with the unlocked icon ( ). For information on locking and unlocking cover-
age predictions, see "Locking Coverage Predictions" on page 160.
To force A9155 to recalculate all path loss matrices before calculating coverage predictions:
Click the Force Calculate button ( ) in the toolbar. When you click the Force Calculate button, A9155 first
removes existing path loss matrices, recalculates them and then calculates unlocked coverages predictions.
been selected.
4.4.2.2.4 Stopping Calculations

When A9155 has begun to calculate coverage predictions, you can stop the calculation at any given point. This can be
useful if, for example, you want to change one of the coverage predictions or if you dont want to calculate the coverage
predictions at that time.
To stop calculations:
Click the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar. A9155 immediately stops all ongoing calculations. The
results of calculations that have already been completed, however, will be saved.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 159

A9155 User Manual
4.4.2.2.5 Locking Coverage Predictions

Coverage predictions are locked by default as soon as they have been calculated. Then, when you calculate new coverage
predictions, only unlocked coverage predictions are calculated. Locking a coverage prediction retains the information as
calculated under given conditions (e.g., before a new base station is created or before optimising the network). It also
saves time by limiting unnecessary recalculation.
Note: To prevent A9155 from automatically locking coverage predictions after calculating them,
you can set an option in the atoll.ini file. For information on setting options in the atoll.ini file,
see the Administrator Manual.
To lock a coverage prediction:

3. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to lock. The context menu appears.
Unlocked coverage predictions are displayed in the Predictions folder with the unlocked icon ( ).
4. Select Study Locked from the context menu.
The icon changes to the locked icon ( ) and the Study Locked item in the context menu now appears checked.
The coverage prediction is now locked and will not be calculated when the Calculate button in the toolbar is
clicked. However, if you select Calculate from the coverage predictions context menu, A9155 will first unlock the
coverage prediction and then calculate it.
You can lock all unlocked coverage predictions using the Predictions folders context menu.
4.4.2.2.6 Unlocking Coverage Predictions

Coverage predictions are locked by default as soon as they have been calculated. You can unlock a single coverage
prediction.
To unlock a coverage prediction:
3. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to unlock. The context menu appears.
Locked coverage predictions are displayed in the Predictions folder with the locked icon ( ).
4. Select Study Locked from the context menu.
The icon changes to the unlocked icon ( ) and the Study Locked item in the context menu is no longer selected.
You can unlock all locked coverage predictions using the Predictions folders context menu.
4.4.2.3 Saving Defined Coverage Predictions

Once you have defined a coverage prediction, you can use it again in other A9155 documents, either by using the cover-
age prediction to create a template or by exporting its coverage and display parameters in a user configuration.
4.4.2.3.1 Saving a Coverage Prediction as a Template

Once you have defined a coverage prediction, you can use it as the basis for a template. This template will be available
to you in the Study Types dialogue the next time you want to create a new coverage prediction. The initial parameters of
the template will be the same as the coverage prediction it is based on but, when you select it in the Study Types dialogue,
A9155 allows you to modify them.
To save a coverage prediction as a template:
3. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to save as a template. The context menu appears.
4. Select Save as a Template from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears.
In the Save As dialogue, A9155 proposes a name and location for the XML file that will contain the template. You
can accept the default values or you can change the name and save the XML file in any folder you have write
access to.
5. Click Save. A9155 saves the template in the selected XML file.
The next time you create a new coverage prediction, the template will be available at the bottom of the list, under the full
path and file name of the XML file (see Figure 4.40). If you have other XML template files, you can click the Browse button
and select it in the Open dialogue.
160 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 4.40: Study Types dialogue
In a multi-user environment, the administrator can make templates available for all the users by saving the XML file in the
A9155 installation directory. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
4.4.2.3.2 Exporting a Defined List of Predictions in a User Configuration File

You can export the defined coverage predictions in the Predictions folder in a user configuration file. You can then import
this user configuration file into another A9155 document. All the coverage predictions in the user configuration will then be
available in the Predictions folder of the new A9155 document and can be calculated.
To export a user configuration with the coverage predictions in the Predictions folder:
1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. The User Configuration dialogue appears.
2. Select the Prediction List check box, as well as the check box of any other information you want to export as part
of the user configuration.
4. Enter a File name for the user configuration file and click Save. The folder configuration is saved.
For information on importing the user configuration into another A9155 document, see "Importing a User Configuration"
on page 71.
4.4.2.4 Calculating Indoor Coverage

In A9155 you can calculate indoor coverage by taking the indoor losses into consideration. Indoor losses are defined per
clutter class. You can define a default indoor losses value for all clutter classes. Or, you can define a different indoor losses
value for each clutter classes, to take the characteristics of each clutter class into consideration.
To calculate indoor coverage when making a coverage prediction:
When creating the coverage prediction, select the Indoor Coverage check box on the Condition tab of the cov-
erage predictions Properties dialogue. The indoor losses defined for the clutter classes will be added to the total
path loss for each pixel.
4.4.2.5 Taking Shadowing into Account

Shadowing, or slow fading, is signal loss along a path that is caused by obstructions not taken into consideration by the
propagation model. Even when a receiver remains in the same location or in the same clutter class, there are variations
in reception due to the surrounding environment.
be worse.
and thereby create coverage predictions that are reliable more than fifty percent of the time. The additional losses or gains
caused by shadowing are known as the shadowing margin. The shadowing margin is added to the path losses calculated
by the propagation model.
For information on setting the model standard deviation and the CI standard deviations for each clutter class or for all
- When creating the coverage prediction, select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box. Then, you can
define the Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 161

A9155 User Manual
162 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

CHAPTER 5
GSM/GPRS/EDGE NETWORKS
Chapter 5: GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
5 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks
A9155 enables you to create and modify all aspects of a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network. Once you have created the network,
A9155 offers many tools to let you verify the network. Based on the results of your tests, you can modify any of the param-
eters defining the network.
The process of planning and creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network is outlined in "Designing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE
Network" on page 165. Creating the network of base stations is explained in "Planning and Optimising GSM/GPRS/EDGE
Base Stations" on page 166. Allocating neighbours is also explained. In this section, you will also find information on how
you can display information on base stations on the map and how you can use the tools in A9155 study base stations.
In "Studying Network Capacity" on page 220, using traffic maps to study network capacity is explained. Creating traffic
captures using the traffic map information and dimensioning the network using these results is also explained.
Using test mobile data paths to verify the network is explained in "Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity" on
page 277. How to filter imported test mobile data paths, and how to use the data in coverage predictions is also explained.
5.1 Designing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network

Figure 5.1 depicts the process of planning and creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network.
1
Open an Existing Project
or Create a New One
2
Network Configuration
- Add Network Elements
- Change Parameters
3
Basic Predictions
(Best Server, Signal Level)
4
Neighbour Allocation
5a 5b 5c
Traffic Maps Dimensioning User-defined values
Required number 5
of TRXs
6a 6b
Automatic Frequency Allocation (AFP) Manual Frequency Allocation
List of 6
Frequencies
7 7a
GSM/GPRS/EDGE Predictions Prediction Study Reports
8
Frequency Plan Analysis
Figure 5.1: Planning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network - workflow
The steps involved in planning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network are described below. The numbers refer to Figure 5.1.
1. Open an existing radio-planning document or create a new one ( 1 ).

- You can open an existing A9155 document by selecting File > Open.
- Creating a new a new A9155 document is explained in "Chapter 2: Starting an A9155 Project".
2. Configure the network by adding network elements and changing parameters ( 2 ).

You can add and modify the following elements of base stations:
- "Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 174

- "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 174
- "Applying a New Cell Type" on page 175.
You can also add base stations using a base station template (see "Placing a New Station Using a Station
Template" on page 176).
3. Carry out basic coverage predictions ( 3 )

- "Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 186
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 165

A9155 User Manual
- "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 187 and "Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 195
4. Allocate neighbours, automatically or manually ( 4 ).

- "Planning Neighbours" on page 210.
5. Estimate the required number of TRXs ( 5 ) in one of the following ways:
- You can import or create traffic maps ( 5a ) and use them as a basis for dimensioning 5b ) (see "Studying
Network Capacity" on page 220).
- You can define them manually either on the TRXs tab of each transmitters Properties dialogue or in the Sub-
cells table (see "Modifying a Subcell" on page 175) ( 5c ).
6. Once you have the required number of TRXs, create a frequency plan, manually or automatically ( 6 ).
- "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Manually" on page 234
- "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Using an AFP Module" on page 237.
7. With the frequency plan, make GSM/GPRS/EDGE-specific coverage predictions ( 7 ).

- "Analysing Network Quality" on page 253.
8. Analysis the frequency plan ( 8 ).

- "Auditing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Frequency Plan" on page 269
- "Checking Consistency Between Transmitters and Subcells" on page 271
- "Displaying the Frequency Allocation" on page 272.
5.2 Planning and Optimising GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base

Stations
As described in "Chapter 2: Starting an A9155 Project", you can start an A9155 document from a template, with no sites,
or from a database with a set of sites. As you work on your A9155 document, you will still need to create sites and modify
existing ones.
In A9155, a site is defined as a geographical point where one or more transmitters are located. Once you have created a
site, you can add transmitters. In A9155, a transmitter is defined as the antenna and any other additional equipment, such
as the TMA, feeder cables, etc. In a GSM/GPRS/EDGE project, you must also add subcells to each transmitter. A subcell
refers to the characteristics of a group of TRXs on a transmitter.
A9155 lets you create one site or transmitter at a time, or create several at once by using a station template. Using a station
template, you can create one or more base stations at the same time. In A9155, a base station refers to a site with its
transmitters, antennas, equipment, subcells, and TRXs.
A9155 allows you to make a variety of coverage predictions, such as signal level or transmitter coverage predictions. The
results of calculated coverage predictions can be displayed on the map, compared, or studied.
A9155 enables you to model network traffic by allowing you to create services, users, user profiles, environments, and
terminals. This data can be then used to make quality studies, such as interference studies, or circuit or packet-dedicated
studies.
"Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base Station" on page 166
"Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 180
"Display Hints for Base Stations" on page 180
"Creating a Repeater" on page 181
"Creating a Remote Antenna" on page 184
"Setting the Working Area of an A9155 Document" on page 185
"Studying a Single Base Station" on page 186
"Studying Base Stations" on page 189
"Planning Neighbours" on page 210.
5.2.1 Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base Station

When you create a GSM/GPRS/EDGE site, you create only the geographical point; you must add the transmitters after-
wards. The site, with the transmitters, antennas, equipment, and cell type, is called a base station.
In this section, each element of a base station is described. If you want to add a new base station, see "Placing a New
Station Using a Station Template" on page 176. If you want to create or modify one of the elements of a base station, see
"Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 174. If you need to create a large number of base stations, A9155
allows you to import them from another A9155 document or from an external source. For information, see "Creating a
Group of Base Stations" on page 180.
This section explains the various parts of the base station process:
"Definition of a Base Station" on page 167
"Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 174
166 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

"Placing a New Station Using a Station Template" on page 176

"Managing Station Templates" on page 177.
5.2.1.1 Definition of a Base Station

A base station consists of the site, one or more transmitters, various pieces of equipment, and radio settings such as, for
example, subcells. You will usually create a new base station using a station template, as described in "Placing a New
Station Using a Station Template" on page 176. This section describes the following elements of a base station and their
parameters:
"Site Description" on page 167
"Transmitter Description" on page 167
"Subcell Definition" on page 170
"TRX Definition" on page 173.
5.2.1.1.1 Site Description

The parameters of a site can be found in the sites Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has one tab:
The General tab (see Figure 5.2):
Figure 5.2: New Site dialogue
- Name: A9155 automatically enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the default name here.
If you want to change the default name that A9155 gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual.
- Position: By default, A9155 places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the location
of the site here.
Tip: While this method allows you to place a site with precision, you can also place sites using
the mouse and then position them precisely with this dialogue afterwards. For information
on placing sites using the mouse, see "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 31.
- Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. You can
specify the actual altitude under Real, if you wish. If an altitude is specified here, A9155 will use this value for
calculations.
- Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you wish.
5.2.1.1.2 Transmitter Description

The parameters of a transmitter can be found in the transmitters Properties dialogue. When you create a transmitter, the
Properties dialogue has four tabs: the General tab, the Transmitter tab, the TRXs tab, the AFP tab (see "Allocating
Frequencies and BSICs Using an AFP Module" on page 237), and the Equipment tab. Once you have created a transmit-
ter, its Properties dialogue has four additional tabs: the Intra-Technology Neighbours tab (see "Allocating or Deleting
Neighbours Using the Intra-Technology Neighbours Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue" on page 215), the Inter-
Technology Neighbours tab), the Propagation tab (see "Chapter 4: Managing Calculations in A9155"), and the Display tab
(see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33).
The General tab:
- Name: By default, A9155 names the transmitter after the site it is on, adding an underscore and a number.
You can enter a name for the transmitter, but for the sake of consistency, it is better to let A9155 assign a
name. If you want to change the way A9155 names transmitters, see the Administrators Manual.
- Site: You can select the Site on which the transmitter will be located. Once you have selected the site, you
can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the site on which the transmitter will be located.
For information on the site Properties dialogue, see "Site Description" on page 167. You can click the New
button to create a new site on which the transmitter will be located.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 167

A9155 User Manual
- HCS Layer: You can select the HCS Layer (Hierarchical Cell Structure layer) for the transmitter. Once you
have selected the HCS layer, you can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the HCS
laser. For information on the HCS layer Properties dialogue, see "Setting HCS Layers" on page 289.
- Position relative to the site: You can modify the Position relative to the site, if you wish.
The Transmitter tab (see Figure 5.3):
Figure 5.3: Transmitter dialogue - Transmitter tab
- Active: If this transmitter is to be active, you must select the Active check box. Active transmitters are dis-
played in red in the Transmitters folder of the Data tab.
Note: Only active transmitters are taken into consideration during calculations.
- Transmission: Under Transmission, you can select to enter either Power and Total Losses or EIRP (Effec-
tive Isotropically Radiated Power). If you select EIRP, you can enter the value yourself, without defining power
and losses for the transmitter.
If you select Power and Total Losses, A9155 calculates losses and noise according to the characteristics of
the equipment assigned to the transmitter. Equipment can be assigned using the Equipment Specifications
dialogue which appears when you click the Equipment button. A9155 will calculate the EIRP with the follow-
ing formula:
EIRP = Power + Gain - Losses
- On the Equipment Specifications dialogue (see Figure 5.4), the equipment you select and the gains and
losses you define are used to initialise total transmitter DL losses. UL losses are not modelled in GSM/GPRS/
EDGE projects.
- TMA: You can select a tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) from the list. You can click the Browse button
( ) to access the properties of the TMA. For information on creating a TMA, see "Defining TMA Equip-
ment" on page 131.
- Feeder: You can select a feeder cable from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the
properties of the feeder. For information on creating a feeder cable, see "Defining Feeder Cables" on
page 131.
- BTS: You can select a base transceiver station (BTS) equipment from the BTS list. In GSM, only the
downlink losses are modelled. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the BTS.
For information on creating a BTS, see "Defining BTS Equipment" on page 131.
- Feeder Length: You can enter the feeder length at transmission.
- Miscellaneous Losses: You can enter miscellaneous losses at transmission.
- Receiver Antenna Diversity Gain: This field is not used for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects.
- Loss Related to Repeater Noise Rise: This field is not used for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects.
168 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 5.4: The Equipment Specifications dialogue
Note: You can modify the Total Losses at transmission if you wish. Any value you enter must be
positive.
- Antennas:
- Height/Ground: The Height/Ground box gives the height of the antenna above the ground. This is added
to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM. If the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered
must include the height of building.
- Main Antenna: Under Main Antenna, the type of antenna is visible in the Model list. You can click the
Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. The other fields, Azimuth, Mechanical
Downtilt, and Additional Electrical Downtilt, display additional antenna parameters.
- Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column
and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power, which is
the percentage of power reserved for this particular antenna. For example, for a transmitter with one
secondary antenna, if you reserve 40% of the total power for the secondary antenna, 60% is available for
the main antenna.
For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 169

A9155 User Manual
The Equipment tab (see Figure 5.4):
Figure 5.5: Transmitter dialogue - Equipment tab
- Under GPRS/EGPRS Properties, you must select the GPRS/EGPRS Transmitter check box if the trans-
mitter is going to be a packet-switched capable transmitter. You can select GPRS/EGPRS Equipment from
the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the equipment. For information on
creating GPRS/EGPRS equipment, see "GPRS/EDGE Equipment" on page 296.
- Under GSM Properties, you can select Codec Equipment from the list. You can click the Browse button
( ) to access the properties of the codec equipment assigned to the GSM transmitter. For information on
creating GPRS/EGPRS equipment, see "Codec Equipment" on page 293.
5.2.1.1.3 Subcell Definition

In A9155, a subcell refers to the characteristics of a group of TRXs on a transmitter sharing the same radio characteristics,
the same quality (C/I) requirements, and other settings.
The initial settings of a subcell of a transmitter depend on the cell type selected for the transmitter. Assigning a different
cell type to a transmitter changes the characteristics of the subcells (for information on the cell type, see "Cell Types" on
page 290). Once the cell type has been selected, the initial values of the subcell, taken from the cell type, can be modified,
with the exception of the TRX type. If you modify the cell type afterwards, for all transmitters based on that cell type, A9155
offers you the choice of keeping current parameters or resetting them to the new cell type parameters.
The properties related to subcells are found on the TRXs tab of the Properties dialogue of the transmitter to which it is
assigned.
The TRXs tab has the following subcell-related options:
Under Cell Type:
- Name: You can select the name of the Cell Type on which the transmitters subcells will be based from the
list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the equipment.
- Relevant Frequency Band: The Relevant Frequency Band displays the frequency band that will be used to
calculate the path loss matrix for the transmitter. The frequency band is the band used by the BCCH TRX type
under Subcell (TRX groups) Settings on the same tab.
- Max. No. of TRXs: The maximum number of TRXs that the transmitter can have. The value entered here will
be taken instead of the global value defined during dimensioning.
Under Extended Cells, you can enter the minimum and maximum range of an extended subcell. Normally, cov-
erage of a GSM cell is limited to a 35 km radius. Extended GSM cells enable the operator to overcome this limit
by taking this delay into consideration when defining the timing advance for users in the extended cells. Extended
cells can cover distances from 70 to 140 km from the base station. For more information on extended cells, see
"Defining Extended Cells" on page 299.
- Min. Range: You can enter the distance from the transmitter at which coverage begins.
- Max. Range: You can enter the maximum range from the transmitter of its coverage.
170 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: Although coverage is restricted from the set minimum range to the maximum range, inter-
ference is calculated from the base station location to the maximum range.
Under Identification:
- BSIC Domain: You can select the BSIC (Base Station Identity Code) domain from the list. You can click the
Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the selected BSIC domain. For information on BSIC
domains, see "Defining BSIC Domains and Groups" on page 288.
- BSIC: The BSIC (Base Station Identity Code) colour code is associated with a defined BCCH so that a mobile
can identify the base station to which both a particular BCCH and BSIC are assigned. The BSIC is derived
from the NCC (Network Colour Code) and the BCC (BTS Colour Code).
To assign a BSIC number to the current transmitter, you can assign a number from the BSIC Domain by se-
lecting it from the list. You can also enter the BSIC number in the format NCC-BCC. When you click Apply,
A9155 converts the entered NCC-BCC number into the single-number BSIC format. For information on the
BSIC, see "Defining the BSIC Format" on page 287.
- BCCH: The BCCH text box displays the frequency of the BCCH (TS0 of the BCCH TRX) of the current trans-
mitter. If the BCCH subcell, under Subcell (TRX Groups) Settings on the TRXs tab, is in synthesized fre-
quency hopping (SFH) mode, you can enter the MAL channel which will be TS0.
- NCC-BCC: The NCC (Network Colour Code), identifying the operator, and the BCC (BTS Colour Code), iden-
tifying the base station are displayed in the NCC-BCC text box. The NCC and BCC are integers from 0 to 7.
Under Subcell (TRX Groups) Settings, the table lists each TRX group defined in the cell type selected under Cell
Type on the TRXs tab. The initial settings are from the selected cell type; you can modify them, with the exception
of the TRX Type:
- TRX Type: The TRX Type can be one of the default TRX types available in the GSM/GPRS/EGPRS project
template:
- BCCH: The broadcast control channel (BCCH) carrier
- TCH: The default traffic (TCH) carrier
- TCH_INNER: The inner traffic (TCH_INNER) carrier.
You can not modify the value in the TRX Type column.
- Frequency Domain: The frequency domain assigned to the TRX group. Only channels belonging to this fre-
quency domain will be allocated to TRXs of this group during automatic or manual frequency planning.
Note: The frequency domains assigned to the BCCH subcell and to the TCH subcell must refer-
ence the same frequency band, unless you are modelling dual-band transmitters. For infor-
mation on dual-band transmitters, see "Advanced Modelling of Multi-Band Transmitters" on
page 299.
- Excluded Channels: The defined frequency domain may have, as part of its definition, a list of excluded chan-
nels. Addition excluded channels for this subcell can be added in the Excluded Channels column.
- Required TRXs: The number of TRXs required for the subcell. For subcells with the BCCH TRX Type, the
number of requested TRXs must be "1," the default value. For subcells with the TCH or TCH_INNER TRX
Type, the value in the Required TRXs column is a result of network dimensioning, which depends on the traffic
demand and the required quality.
- Traffic Load: The Traffic Load indicates the usage rate of TRXs; its value must be from 0 to 1. The value in
the Traffic Load column can be either user-defined or the result of network dimensioning, in which case it will
be the same value for all subcells covering the same area.
The traffic load is used to calculate interference and in automatic frequency planning.
- DL Power Offset: The reduction of power relative to the transmitter power. The DL Power Offset is used to
model the power reduction of TCH TRXs and of TCH_INNER TRXs. TCH_INNER TRXs are concentric sub-
cells, in other words, subcells that transmit a power lower than that used by the BCCH TRX and by TCH TRXs.
Note: DL power offset can also be used to model in a simple way the coverage reduction of a
1800 subcell compared to the BCCH 900 subcell, assuming that all subcells are transmit-
ting at the same power. A9155 also enables advanced multi-band transmitter modelling.
For more information, see "Advanced Modelling of Multi-Band Transmitters" on page 299
and the Administrator Manual.
- Reception Threshold (dBm): The reception threshold defines the minimum reception level for the subcell. I
can be used as the minimum subcell reception sensitivity if the link budget is correctly defined.
- C/I Threshold (dB): The minimum signal quality for the TRX Type. The C/I Threshold can be used in inter-
ference studies and in the AFP.
- DTX Supported: The DTX Supported check box is selected if the subcell supports DTX (Discontinuous
Transmission) technology. Subcells supporting DTX can reduce the interference they produce by the defined
voice activity factor.
- Timeslot Configuration: The timeslot configuration defines the distribution of circuit, packet and shared
timeslots for the subcell. For information on timeslot configurations, see "Timeslot Configurations" on
page 298.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 171

A9155 User Manual
- Required No. of Shared Timeslots: The total number of shared timeslots required for all TRXs of the subcell.
This value is a result of dimensioning and the timeslot configuration.
- Required No. of Circuit Timeslots: The total number of circuit timeslots required for all TRXs of the subcell.
- Required No. of Packet Timeslots: The total number of packet timeslots required for all TRXs of the subcell.
- Half-Rate Traffic Ratio (%): The percentage of half-rate voice traffic in the subcell. This value is used to cal-
culate the number of timeslots required to respond to the voice traffic demand.
- Target Rate of Traffic Overflow (%): The target rate of traffic overflow is used during traffic analysis to dis-
tribute the traffic between subcells and layers. The value is the percentage of candidate traffic overflowing to
a subcell with a lower priority. It has an impact on the traffic capture between inner and outer subcells, and
between micro and macro layers. In other words, The target rate of traffic overflow can be considered to an
estimation of the percentage of traffic rejected from subcells or layers of higher priority to subcells or layers of
lower subcells.
If the traffic overflow target is set to a value lower than the grade of service, it means that the traffic rejected
(according to the queuing model selected in the dimensioning model: Erlang B or Erlang C) will be lost and
will not overflow to other subcells.
Figure 5.6: Overflow between concentric cells
Figure 5.7: Overflow between HCS layers
Important: The target rate of traffic overflow and the half-rate traffic ratio must be the same for BCCH
and TCH subcells. If the values are different for BCCH and TCH subcells, A9155 will use
the values for the target rate of traffic overflow and the half-rate traffic ratio from the BCCH
subcell.
- Hopping Mode: The frequency hopping mode supported by the selected TRX type. The hopping mode can
be either "Base Band Hopping mode (BBH)" or "Synthesized Hopping mode (SFH)." If frequency hopping is
not supported, select "Non Hopping."
- Allocation Strategy: The allocation strategy used during manual or automatic frequency planning. There are
two available allocation strategies:
- Free: Any of the channels belonging to the frequency domain can be assigned to TRXs.
- Group Constrained: Only channels belonging to a same frequency group in the frequency domain can
be assigned.
- Max. MAL Length: The maximum length of the mobile allocation list (MAL), in other words, the maximum
number of channels allocated to the TRXs of the subcell during automatic frequency planning if the Hopping
Mode is either SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base Band Hopping) and if the Allocation
Strategy is Free.
- HSN Domain: Only hopping sequence numbers (HSN) belonging to the selected HSN domain will be allo-
cated to subcells during automatic or manual frequency planning. The HSNs are allocated if the Hopping
Mode is either SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base Band Hopping).
- HSN: The hopping sequence number (HSN) of the subcell. All TRXs of the subcell have the same HSN. The
HSN can be entered manually or automatically allocated. This parameter is used if the Hopping Mode is
either SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base Band Hopping).
- Freeze HSN: When the Freeze HSN check box is selected, the subcells currently assigned HSN is kept when
a new AFP session is started.
- Synchronisation: The value entered in the Synchronisation column is used during frequency hopping; fre-
quency hopping is synthesized among all TRXs of subcells with the same string of characters in the Synchro-
nisation column. By default, the name of the site is used as the value in the Synchronisation column,
synchronising frequency hopping for all TRXs on the same site. However, you can, for example, enter different
values for each subcell to define synchronisation at the subcell level, or different values for each group of sites
to define synchronisation by sites group.
- AFP Weight: The AFP weight is used to increase or decrease the importance of a subcell during automatic
frequency planning. The value must be a real number. The higher the AFP weight is, the higher the constraint
on the subcell.
172 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- % Max. Interference: The maximum level of interference allowable during automatic frequency planning. The
interference is defined as a percentage of area or traffic, as defined during the calculation of the interference
matrices.
- Effective Rate of Traffic Overflow (%): The percentage of traffic overflowing from a subcell. The effective
rate of traffic overview is a result of the calculation of key performance indicators.
- Default TRX Equipment: The default TRX equipment selected in this column is applied to all TRXs belonging
to the subcell. By selecting the default TRX equipment, the maximum number of coding schemes in GPRS
(CS) and in EDGE (MCS) is set at the TRX type level. You can also define the TRX equipment for each TRX.
- 8PSK Power Backoff (dB): The average power reduction for E/GPRS transmitters due to 8PSK modulation
in EDGE. This has an impact on the EDGE service zone which can be seen in traffic analysis and EDGE pre-
dictions.
- Number of Antennas (Transmission Diversity): The number of antennas the subcell can use for transmis-
sion. In most cases, a transmitter will transmit with only one antenna, however, some transmitters are capable
of transmission diversity. By transmitting on more than one antenna, the signal experiences a gain of 3 dB. An
additional transmission diversity gain can be defined per clutter class in order to correctly model gain due to
the environment.
5.2.1.1.4 TRX Definition

In A9155, the TRX refers to the transmission/reception card. In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, frequencies and channels are
defined using TRXs. In non-hopping or base-band hopping mode, a single frequency or channel can be assigned to each
TRX. In synthesised frequency hopping mode, more than one frequency can be assigned to each TRX.
The number of time slots supported by a TRX defines the multiplexing factor of the frequency using that TRX.
In A9155, TRXs are modelled using defined TRX types. Three TRX types are available in the GSM/GPRS/EGPRS project
template:
BCCH: The broadcast control channel (BCCH) carrier
TCH: The default traffic (TCH) carrier
TCH_INNER: The inner traffic (TCH_INNER) carrier.
The TRXs and their properties are found on TRXs tab of the Properties dialogue of the transmitter to which they are
assigned.
Note: The TRXs of the entire GSM/GPRS/EDGE document are found in the TRX Table. You can
access the TRX Table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the
Explorer window and then selecting Network Settings > TRXs from the context menu.
The TRXs tab has the following TRX-related options:

Under TRXs, the table lists each TRX allocated to the transmitter. The initial settings are from the selected cell
type and can be modified:
- Index: This is the identification number of the TRX. The number must be an integer and can be user-defined
or assigned automatically by A9155 when you close the dialogue.
- TRX Type: The TRX Type can be one of the default TRX types available in the GSM GPRS EGPRS project
template:
- BCCH: The broadcast control channel (BCCH) carrier
- TCH: The default traffic (TCH) carrier
- TCH_INNER: The inner traffic (TCH_INNER) carrier.
- Channels: The channels allocated to the TRX. You must specify 1 channel per TRX if the hopping mode for
the TRX type is "Non Hopping" or "Base Band Hopping," and more than one channel per TRX if the hopping
mode for the TRX type is "Synthesized Hopping." You can enter channels directly (separating them with a
comma, a semi-colon, or a space) or you can enter a range of channels separating the first and last channel
with a hyphen (for example, entering "1-5" corresponds to "1 2 3 4 5"). You can also select a channel from the
list which offers you channels from the frequency domain assigned to the TRX type that this TRX is based on.
- MAIO: The MAIO (Mobile Allocation Index Offset) is used in frequency hopping (BBH or SFH) to avoid intra-
site collisions caused by two sites using the same or adjacent channels. This value is an integer ranging from
0 and N-1 (where "N" is the number of channels used in the hopping sequence). You can enter the MAIO or
it can be allocated automatically by the AFP.
- Freeze Channels and MAIO: When the Freeze Channels and MAIO check box is selected, the TRXs cur-
rently assigned channels and MAIO are kept when a new AFP session is started.
- TRX Equipment: The TRX Equipment selected defines the highest coding scheme index number possible
in GPRS (CS) and in EDGE (MCS). For the TRX equipment to be used fully, the terminal must be capable of
using a coding index number that is as high as that of the TRX equipment. Otherwise, capacity will be limited
by the highest index number supported by the terminal.
- 8PSK Power Backoff (dB): The average power reduction for E/GPRS transmitters due to 8PSK modulation
in EDGE. This has an impact on the EDGE service zone which can be seen in traffic analysis and EDGE pre-
dictions.
- AFP Rank: The AFP Rank is determined by the AFP. It indicates the quality of that TRX. The higher the AFP
rank, the higher the cost, in terms of the risk of interference. In other words, when you are trying to improve
the solution proposed by the AFP tool, you must concentrate on the TRXs with the highest AFP rank first.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 173

A9155 User Manual
5.2.1.2 Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element

example, cells and TRXs. This section describes how to create or modify the following elements of a base station:
"Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 174
"Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 174
"Applying a New Cell Type" on page 175
"Modifying a Subcell" on page 175
"Creating or Modifying a TRX" on page 175.
5.2.1.2.1 Creating or Modifying a Site

You can modify an existing site or you can create a new site. You can access the properties of a site, described in "Site
Description" on page 167, through the sites Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on
whether you are creating a new site or modifying an existing site.
To create or modify a site:
1. If you are creating a new site:
a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.
b. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears.
c. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 5.2 on
page 167).
2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site:
b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Sites folder.
c. Right-click the site you want to modify. The context menu appears.
d. Select Properties from the context menu. The sites Properties dialogue appears.
3. Modify the parameters described in "Site Description" on page 167.
4. Click OK.
Tip: If you are creating several sites at the same time, or modifying several existing sites, you
can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Sites table. You can open the
Sites table by right-clicking the Sites folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and
selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data,
see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 54.
5.2.1.2.2 Creating or Modifying a Transmitter

You can modify an existing transmitter or you can create a new transmitter. You can access the properties of a transmitter,
described in "Transmitter Description" on page 167, through the transmitters Properties dialogue. How you access the
Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new transmitter or modifying an existing transmitter.
To create or modify a transmitter:
1. If you are creating a new transmitter:
b. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears.
c. Select New from the context menu. The Transmitters New Element Properties dialogue appears (see
Figure 5.3).
2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing transmitter:
b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder.
c. Right-click the transmitter you want to modify. The context menu appears.
d. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitters Properties dialogue appears.
3. Modify the parameters described in "Transmitter Description" on page 167.
4. Click OK. If you are creating a new transmitter, A9155 automatically assigns a cell type. For information on mod-
ifying the properties inherited from a cell type, see "Applying a New Cell Type" on page 175.
174 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Tips:
If you are creating several transmitters at the same time, or modifying several existing transmit-
ters, you can do it more quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Transmitters table.
You can open the Transmitters table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab
of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on
copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 54.
If you want to add a transmitter to an existing site on the map, you can add the transmitter by
right-clicking the site and selecting New Transmitter from the context menu.
5.2.1.2.3 Applying a New Cell Type

In GSM/GPRS/EDGE, the subcells are defined by the cell type. By selecting a different cell type, you can change the exist-
ing subcells to the subcells defined by the new cell type. A9155 will then create the subcells that exist in the new cell type
and remove the subcells that do not exist in the new cell type. If the same subcells exist in the new cell type, A9155 offers
you the choice of keeping current parameters or resetting them to those found in the new cell type.
To apply a new cell type:
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to apply a new cell type. The context menu appears.
4. Select Properties from the context menu. The transmitters Properties dialogue appears.
5. Select the TRXs tab.
6. Under Cell Type, select the Name of the cell type on which the transmitters subcells will be based from the list.
You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the cell type.
7. Modify the parameters described in "Subcell Definition" on page 170 of the cell type and its subcells.
8. Click OK.
Tip: If you are applying a new cell type to several transmitters at the same time, or modifying
several existing transmitters, you can do it more quickly by editing or pasting the data
directly in the Transmitters table. You can open the Transmitters table by right-clicking
the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table
from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and
Pasting in Tables" on page 54.
5.2.1.2.4 Modifying a Subcell

You can modify the parameters of an existing subcell. You can access the properties of a subcell, described in "Subcell
Definition" on page 170, through the Properties dialogue of the transmitter where the subcell is located.
To create or modify a subcell:
3. Right-click the transmitter on which you want to create a subcell or whose subcell you want to modify. The context
menu appears.
6. Modify the parameters described in "Subcell Definition" on page 170.
7. Click OK.
Tip: If you are creating several subcells at the same time, or modifying several existing sub-
cells, you can do it more quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Subcells
table. You can open the Subcells table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the
Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Subcells > Open Table from the context
menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables"
on page 54.
5.2.1.2.5 Creating or Modifying a TRX

When a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network is first created, TRXs are assigned as part of the dimensioning process. Once the
network exists, you can add TRXs manually to either existing or new transmitters. You can also modify existing TRXs. You
can access the properties of a TRX, described in "TRX Definition" on page 173, through the Properties dialogue of the
transmitter the TRX is assigned to.
To create or modify a TRX:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 175

A9155 User Manual
3. Right-click the transmitter on which you want to create a TRX or whose TRX you want to modify. The context menu
appears.
6. Under TRXs:
- If you are creating a new TRX, enter the parameters described in "TRX Definition" on page 173 in the row
marked with the New Row icon ( ).
- If you are modifying an existing TRX, modify the parameters described in "TRX Definition" on page 173.
7. Click OK.
Tip: If you are creating several TRXs at the same time, or modifying several existing TRXs, you
can do it more quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the TRXs table. You can
open the TRXs table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the
Explorer window and selecting Subcells > TRXs from the context menu. For information
on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 54.
5.2.1.3 Placing a New Station Using a Station Template

In A9155, a station is defined as a site with one or more transmitters sharing the same properties. With A9155, you can
create a network by placing stations based on station templates. This allows you to build your network quickly with consist-
ent parameters, instead of building the network by first creating the site, then the transmitters, and finally by adding
subcells and TRXs.
To place a new station using a station template:
1. In the Radio toolbar, select a template from the list.
2. Click the New Station button ( ) in the Radio toolbar.

3. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new station. The exact
coordinates of the pointers current location are visible in the Status bar.
4. Click to place the station.
Tips:
To place the station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you click the New Sta-
tion button. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on
page 38.
If you let the pointer rest over the station you have placed, A9155 displays its tip text with its
exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
You can also place a series of stations using a A9155 template. You do this by defining an area on the map where you
want to place the stations. A9155 calculates the placement of each station according to the defined hexagonal subcell
radius in the station template. For information on defining the subcell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station
Template" on page 177.
To place a series of stations within a defined area:
2. Click the Hexagonal Design button ( ), to the left of the template list. A hexagonal design is a group of stations
created from the same station template.
Note: If the Hexagonal Design button is not available ( ), the hexagonal subcell radius for this
template is not defined. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modify-
ing a Station Template" on page 177.
3. Draw a zone delimiting the area where you want to place the series of stations:
b. Click once on the map to define each point where the border of the zone changes direction.
A9155 fills the delimited zone with new stations and their hexagonal shapes. Station objects such as sites and
transmitters are also created and placed into their respective folders.
You can work with the sites and transmitters in these stations as you work with any station object, adding, for example,
another antenna to a transmitter.
Placing a Station on an Existing Site
When you place a new station using a station template as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template"
on page 176, the site is created at the same time as the station. However, you can also place a new station on an existing
site.
176 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To place a station on an existing site:

1. On the Data tab, clear the display check box beside the Hexagonal Design folder.

4. Move the pointer to the site on the map. When the frame appears around the site, indicating it is selected, click to
place the station.
5.2.1.4 Managing Station Templates

A9155 comes with GSM/GPRS/EDGE station templates, but you can also create and modify station templates. The tools
for working with station templates can be found on the Radio toolbar (see Figure 5.8).
Figure 5.8: The Radio toolbar
5.2.1.4.1 Creating or Modifying a Station Template

When you create a station template, A9155 bases it on the station template selected in the Station Template Properties
dialogue. The new station template has the same parameters as the one it is based on. Therefore, by selecting the existing
station template that most closely resembles the station template you want to create, you can create a new template by
only modifying the parameters that differ.
As well, you can modify the properties of any station template.
To create or modify a station template:
1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list.
2. Select Manage Templates from the list. The Station Template Properties dialogue appears.
3. You can now create a new station template or modify an existing one:
- To create a new station template: Under Station Templates, select the station template that most closely
resembles the station template you want to create and click Add. The Properties dialogue appears.
- To modify an existing station template: Under Station Templates, select the station template whose prop-
erties you want to modify and click Properties. The Properties dialogue appears.
4. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. In this tab (see Figure 5.9), you can modify the following: the
Name of the station template, the number of Sectors, each with a transmitter, the Hexagon Radius, i.e., the the-
oretical radius of the hexagonal area covered by each sector, the HCS Layer, the Cell Type, the Max. TRXs/
Sector, the Min. Range, the Max. Range, and the BSIC Domain.
Figure 5.9: Station Template Properties dialogue General tab
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 177

A9155 User Manual
- Under Main Antenna, you can modify the following: the antenna Model, 1st Sector Azimuth, from which the
azimuth of the other sectors are offset to offer complete coverage of the area, the Height of the antenna from
the ground (i.e., the height over the DTM; if the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must
include the height of building), the Mechanical Downtilt, and the Additional Electrical Downtilt.
- Under Propagation, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for both
the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. For information on propagation models, see "Chapter 4: Managing
Calculations in A9155".
5. Click the Transmitter tab. In this tab (see Figure 5.10), you can modify the following:
- Under Transmission, you can select to enter either Power and Total Losses or EIRP (Effective Isotropically
Radiated Power). If you select EIRP, you can enter the value yourself, without defining power and losses for
the transmitter.
If you select Power and Total Losses, A9155 calculates losses and noise according to the characteristics of
the equipment assigned to the transmitter. Equipment can be assigned using the Equipment Specifications
dialogue which appears when you click the Equipment button. A9155 will calculate the EIRP with the follow-
ing formula:
For information on the Equipment Specifications dialogue, see "Transmitter Description" on page 167.
Figure 5.10: Station Template Properties dialogue Transmitter tab

If you want transmitters created with this station template to be active by default, select the Active check box.
6. Click the Equipment tab. In this tab (see Figure 5.11), you select the equipment used for GSM and GPRS/EGPRS
stations.
- Under GPRS/EGPRS Properties, you must select the GPRS/EGPRS Transmitter check box if the transmit-
ters are going to be packet-switched capable transmitters, select GPRS/EGPRS Equipment from the list. For
information on creating GPRS/EGPRS equipment, see "GPRS/EDGE Equipment" on page 296.
- For all transmitters, you can select Codec Equipment from the list. For information on creating GPRS/EGPRS
equipment, see "Codec Equipment" on page 293.
Figure 5.11: Station Template Properties dialogue Equipment tab
7. Click the Neighbours tab. In this tab (see Figure 5.12), you can modify the Max Number of Intra-Technology
Neighbours and the Max Number of Inter-Technology Neighbours. For information on defining neighbours,
see "Planning Neighbours" on page 210.
178 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 5.12: Station Template Properties dialogue Neighbours tab
8. Click the Other Properties tab. The Other Properties tab will only appear if you have defined additional fields in the
Sites table, or if you have defined an additional field in the Station Template Properties dialogue.
9. When you have finished setting the parameters for the station template, click OK to close the dialogue and save
your changes.
5.2.1.4.2 Modifying a Field in a Station Template

To modify a field in a station template:
3. Select the template in the Available Templates list.
4. Click the Fields button.
5. In the dialogue that appears, you have the following options:
- Add: If you want to add a user-defined field to the station templates, you must have already added it to the
Sites table (for information on adding a user-defined field to a table, see "Adding a Field to an Object Types
Data Table" on page 49) for it to appear as an option in the station template properties. To add a new field:
i. Click the Add button. The Field Definition dialogue appears.
ii. Enter a Name for the new field. This is the name that will be used in database.
iii. If desired, you can define a Group that this custom field will belong to. When you open an A9155 docu-
ment from a database, you can then select a specific group of custom fields to be loaded from the data-
base, instead of loading all custom fields.
iv. In Legend, enter the name for the field that will appear in the A9155 document.
v. For Type, you can select from Text, Short integer, Long integer, Single, Double, True/False, Date/
Time, and Currency. If you choose text, you can also set the field Size (in characters), and create a
Choice list, by entering the possible selections directly in the Choice list window and pressing ENTER
after each one.
vi. Enter, if desired, a Default Value for the new field.
vii. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes.
- Delete: To delete a user-defined field:
i. Select the user-defined field you want to delete.
ii. Click the Delete button. The user-defined field appears in strikethrough. It will be definitively deleted when
you close the dialogue.
- Properties: To modify the properties of a user-defined field:
i. Select the user-defined field you want to modify.
ii. Click the Properties button. The Field Definition dialogue appears.
iii. Modify any of the properties as desired.
iv. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes.
6. Click OK.
5.2.1.4.3 Deleting a Station Template

To delete a station template:
3. Under Station Templates, select the station template you want to delete and click Delete. The template is
deleted.
4. Click OK.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 179

A9155 User Manual
5.2.2 Creating a Group of Base Stations

You can create base stations individually as explained in "Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base Station" on page 166, or
you can create one or several base stations by using station templates as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a
Station Template" on page 176. However, if you have a large data-planning project and you already have existing data,
you can import this data into your current A9155 document and create a group of base stations.
Note: When you import data into your current A9155 document, the coordinate system of the
imported data must be the same as the display coordinate system used in the document. If
you cannot change the coordinate system of your source data, you can temporarily
change the display coordinate system of the A9155 document to match the source data.
For information on changing the coordinate system, see "Setting a Coordinate System" on
page 84.
You can import base station data in the following ways:

Copying and pasting data: If you have data in table form, either in another A9155 document or in a spreadsheet,
you can copy this data and paste it into the tables in your current A9155 document. When you create a group of
base stations by copying and pasting data, you must copy and paste site data in the Sites table, transmitter data
in the Transmitters table, and cell data in the Cells table, in that order.
Important: The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are past-
ing data into.
For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 54.
Importing data: If you have data in text or comma-separated value (CSV) format, you can import it into the tables
in the current document. If the data is in another A9155 document, you can first export it in text or CSV format and
then import it into the tables of your current A9155 document. When you are importing, A9155 allows you to select
what values you import into which columns of the table.
When you create a group of base stations by importing data, you must import site data in the Sites table, trans-
mitter data in the Transmitters table, and cell data in the Cells table, in that order.
For information on exporting table data, see "Exporting Tables to External Files" on page 55. For information on
importing table data, see "Importing Tables from External Files" on page 56.
Note: You can quickly create a series of base stations for study purposes using the Hexagonal
Design tool on the Radio toolbar. For information, see "Placing a New Station Using a Sta-
tion Template" on page 176.

In A9155, you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or transmitter using the context menu on the Data tab of the
Explorer window. However, in a complex radio-planning project, it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab,
although it might be visible in the map window. A9155 lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and transmitters
directly from the map. If there is more than one transmitter with the same azimuth, clicking the transmitters in the map
window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter. You can also change the position of the station by
dragging it, or by letting A9155 find a higher location for it.
Modifying sites and transmitters directly on the map is explained in detail in "Chapter 1: The Working Environment":
5.2.4 Display Hints for Base Stations

A9155 allows to you to display information about base stations in a number of different ways. This enables you not only
to display selected information, but also to distinguish base stations at a glance.
The following tools can be used to display information about base stations:
Label: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a label that
is displayed with the object. You can display information from every field in that object types data table, including
from fields that you add. The label is always displayed, so you should choose information that you would want to
always be visible; too much information will lead to a cluttered display. For information on defining the label, see
"Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35.
Tooltips: You can display information about each object, such as each site or transmitter, in the form of a tooltip
that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. You can choose to display more information than
in the label, because the information is only displayed when you move the pointer over the object. You can display
180 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

information from every field in that object types data table, including from fields that you add. For information on
defining the tooltips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 35.
Transmitter colour: You can set the transmitter colour to display information about the transmitter. For example,
you can select "Discrete Values" to distinguish transmitters by antenna type, or to distinguish inactive from active
sites. You can also define the display type for transmitters as "Automatic." A9155 then automatically assigns a
colour to each transmitter, ensuring that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding
it. For information on defining the transmitter colour, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
Transmitter symbol: You can select one of several symbols to represent transmitters. For example, you can
select a symbol that graphically represents the transmitters bandwidth ( ). If you have two transmitters on the
same site with the same azimuth, you can differentiate them by selecting different symbols for each ( and
). For information on defining the transmitter symbol, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
5.2.5 Modelling Packet-switched Transmitters

By default, transmitters are not packet-capable in A9155 GSM/GPRS/EDGE documents. Therefore, when modelling a
GPRS/EDGE-capable network, it is important to correctly configure it:
1. Correctly define the GPRS/EDGE equipment (see "GPRS/EDGE Equipment" on page 296).
2. For each packet-capable transmitter, select the GPRS/EGPRS Transmitter check box to identify the transmitter
as GPRS/EDGE-capable (see "Transmitter Description" on page 167).
3. Choose equipment from the GPRS/EGPRS Equipment list that is consistent with the transmitters configuration,
and that is also consistent with other parameters, such as, HCS layers, frequency bands, and cell types. For
example, if the cell type assigned to the transmitter is "Concentric Cell 1800," it would be illogical to choose "GPRS
900" as the equipment (see "Transmitter Description" on page 167).
5.2.6 Creating a Repeater

A repeater receives, amplifies, and re-transmits the radiated or conducted RF carrier both in downlink and uplink. It has a
donor side and a server side. The donor side receives the signal from a donor transmitter. This signal may be carried by
different types of links such as radio link or microwave link. The server side re-transmits the received signal.
A9155 models RF repeaters and microwave repeaters. The modelling focuses on:
The additional coverage these systems provide to transmitters in the downlink.
The UL total gain value in service areas studies (effective service area and UL Eb/Nt service area) and the noise
rise generated at the donor transmitter by the repeater.
"Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment" on page 181
"Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 182
"Creating Several Repeaters" on page 182
"Defining the Properties of a Repeater" on page 182
"Hints for Updating Repeater Parameters" on page 183.
Note: Broad-band repeaters are not modelled. A9155 assumes that all carriers from the 3G donor
transmitter are amplified.
5.2.6.1 Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment

You can define repeater equipment to be assigned to each repeater in the network.
To create or modify repeater equipment:
3. Select Repeaters > Equipment from the context menu. The Repeater Equipment table appears.
4. To create repeater equipment, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ):
a. Enter a Name and Manufacturer for the new equipment.
b. Enter minimum and maximum repeater amplification gains in the Min. Gain and Max Gain columns. These
parameters enable A9155 to ensure that the user-defined amplifier gain is consistent with the limits of the
equipment if there are any.
c. Enter a Gain Increment. A9155 uses the increment value when you increase or decrease the repeater am-
plifier gain using the buttons to the right of the Amplification box ( ) on the General tab of the repeater
Properties dialogue.
d. Enter a Max. Downlink Power. This parameter is used to ensure that the downlink power is not exceeded
after amplification by the repeater.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 181

A9155 User Manual
Note: Uplink losses and noise figures are not modelled in GSM/GPRS/EGPRS so any value
entered into the Max. Uplink Power column will not be used. The column is included to
ensure consistency with other technologies.
e. If desired, enter an Internal Delay and Comments. These fields are for information only and are not used in
calculations.
5. To modify repeater equipment, change the parameters in the row containing the repeater equipment you wish to
modify.
5.2.6.2 Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse

In A9155, you can create a repeater and place it using the mouse. When you create a repeater, you can add it to an exist-
ing site, or have A9155 automatically create a new site.
To create a repeater and place it using the mouse:
1. Select the donor transmitter. You can select it from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer windows Data tab, or
directly on the map.
2. Click the arrow next to New Repeater or Remote Antenna button ( ) on the Radio toolbar.
3. Select Repeater from the menu.
4. Click the map to place the repeater. The repeater is placed on the map, represented by a symbol ( ) in the
same colour as the donor transmitter. By default, the repeater has the same azimuth as the donor transmitter. Its
tooltip and label display the same information as displayed for the donor transmitter. As well, its tooltip and label
identify the repeater and the donor transmitter.
For information on defining the properties of the new repeater, see "Defining the Properties of a Repeater" on
page 182.
Note: You can see to which base station the repeater is connected by clicking it; A9155 displays a
link to the donor transmitter.
5.2.6.3 Creating Several Repeaters

In A9155, the characteristics of each repeater are stored in the Repeaters table. You can create several repeaters at the
same time by pasting the information into the Repeaters table:
If you have data in table form, either in another A9155 document or in a spreadsheet, you can copy this data and
paste it into the Repeaters table in your current A9155 document.
Important: The table you copy data from must have the same column layout as the table you are
pasting data into.
5.2.6.4 Defining the Properties of a Repeater

To define the properties of a repeater:
1. Right-click the repeater either directly on the map, or from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer windows Data
tab. The context menu appears.
3. Click the General tab. You can modify the following parameters:
- You can change the Name of the repeater. By default, repeaters are named "RepeaterN" where "N" is a
number assigned as the repeater is created.
- You can change the Donor transmitter by selecting it from the Donor list. Clicking the Browse button ( )
opens the Properties dialogue of the donor transmitter.
- You can change the Site on which the repeater is located. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Prop-
erties dialogue of the site.
- You can enter a Position relative to site location, if the repeater is not located on the site itself.
- You can select equipment from the Equipment list. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties
dialogue of the equipment.
- You can change the Amplification gain. The amplification gain is used in the link budget to evaluate the
repeater total gain.
4. Click the Donor Side tab. You can modify the following parameters:
- Under Donor-Repeater Link, select a Link Type.
- If you select Microwave Link, enter the Link Losses and continue with step 5.
- If you select Air Link, enter the Propagation Losses or click Calculate to determine the actual propaga-
tion losses between the donor and the repeater.
182 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

When you create an off-air repeater, it is assumed that the link between the donor transmitter and the re-
peater has the same frequency as the network. The propagation losses between donor transmitter and
repeater are calculated using the ITU 526-5 propagation model.
Important: If you want to create a remote antenna, you must select Optical Fibre Link.
- If you selected Air Link under Donor-Repeater Link, enter the following information under Antenna:
i. Select a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the
antenna.
ii. Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height/Ground box. This will be added to the altitude
of the transmitter as given by the DTM.
iii. Enter the Azimuth and the Mechanical Downtilt.
Note: You can click the Calculate button to update azimuth and downtilt values after changing
the repeater donor side antenna height or the repeater location. If you choose another site
or change site coordinates in the General tab, click Apply before clicking the Calculate but-
ton.
- If you selected Air Link under Donor-Repeater Link, enter the following information under Feeders:
i. Select a Type of feeder from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of
the feeder.
ii. Enter the Length of the feeder cable at Transmission and at Reception.
5. Click the Coverage Side tab. You can modify the following parameters:
- Select the Active check box. Only active repeaters (displayed in red in the Transmitters folder in the Data
tab of the Explorer window) are calculated.
- Under Transmission, enter the a value for EIRP (Effective Isotropically Radiated Power) or click Calculate
to determine the actual gains. A9155 calculates the EIRP with the following formula:
- Under Antennas, you can modify the following parameters:
i. Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the Height/Ground box. This will be added to the altitude
of the site as given by the DTM.
ii. Under Main Antenna, select a Model from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the
properties of the antenna. Then, enter the Azimuth, the Mechanical Downtilt, and, if applicable, the Ad-
ditional Electrical Downtilt. By default, the characteristics (antenna, azimuth, height, etc.) of the repeater
coverage side correspond to the characteristics of the donor transmitter.
iii. Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column
and enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power. For infor-
mation on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48.
- Under Feeders, you can modify the following information:
the feeder.
6. Click the Propagation tab. Since repeaters are taken into account during calculations, you must set the propaga-
tion parameters. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Res-
olution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. By default, the propagation characteristics of the
repeater (model, calculation radius, and grid resolution) are the same as those of the donor transmitter. For infor-
mation on propagation models, see "Chapter 4: Managing Calculations in A9155".
5.2.6.5 Hints for Updating Repeater Parameters

A9155 provides you with a few shortcuts that you can use to change certain repeater parameters:
You can update the calculated azimuth and downtilt of the donor-side antennas of all repeaters by selecting
Repeaters > Calculate Donor Side Azimuths and Tilts from the Transmitters context menu.
You can update the propagation losses of all off-air repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate Donor Side
Propagation Losses from the Transmitters context menu.
You can update the EIRP (Effective Isotropically Radiated Power) of all repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Cal-
culate EIRP from the Transmitters context menu.
You can select a repeater on the map and change its azimuth (see "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using
the Mouse" on page 32) or its position relative to the site (see "Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative
to the Site" on page 32).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 183

A9155 User Manual
5.2.7 Creating a Remote Antenna

A9155 allows you to create remote antennas to position antennas at locations that would normally require long runs of
feeder cable. A remote antenna is connected to the base station with an optic fibre. Remote antennas allow you to ensure
radio coverage in an area without a new base station.
In A9155, the remote antenna should be connected to a base station that does not have any antennas. It is assumed that
a remote antenna, as opposed to a repeater, does not have any equipment and generates no amplification gain nor noise.
In certain cases, you may want to model a remote antenna with equipment or a remote antenna connected to a base
station that has antennas. This can be done by modelling a repeater. For information on creating a repeater, see "Creating
a Repeater" on page 181.
"Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 184
"Creating Several Remote Antennas" on page 184
"Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna" on page 184
"Hints for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters" on page 185.
5.2.7.1 Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse

In A9155, you can create a remote antenna and place it using the mouse. When you create a remote antenna, you can
add it to an existing base station without antennas, or have A9155 automatically create a new site.
To create a remote antenna and place it using the mouse:
Note: Ensure that the remote antennas donor transmitter does not have any antennas.
3. Select Remote Antenna from the menu.
4. Click the map to place the remote antenna. The remote antenna is placed on the map, represented by a symbol
( ) in the same colour as the donor transmitter. By default, the remote antenna has the same azimuth as the
donor transmitter. Its tooltip and label display the same information as displayed for the donor transmitter. As well,
its tooltip and label identify the remote antenna and the donor transmitter.
For information on defining the properties of the new remote antenna, see "Defining the Properties of a Remote
Antenna" on page 184.
Note: You can see to which base station the remote antenna is connected by clicking it; A9155
displays a link to the donor transmitter.
5.2.7.2 Creating Several Remote Antennas

In A9155, the characteristics of each remote antenna are stored in the Remote Antennas table. You can create several
remote antennas at the same time by pasting the information into the Remote Antennas table.
paste it into the Remote Antennas table in your current A9155 document.
ing data into.
5.2.7.3 Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna

To define the properties of a remote antenna:
1. Right-click the remote antenna either directly on the map, or from the Transmitters folder of the Explorer
windows Data tab. The context menu appears.
- You can change the Name of the remote antenna. By default, remote antennas are named "RemoteAn-
tennaN" where "N" is a number assigned as the remote antenna is created.
- You can change the Site on which the remote antenna is located. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens
the Properties dialogue of the site.
184 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- You can enter a Position relative to site location, if the remote antenna is not located on the site itself.
Note: A remote antenna does not have equipment.
- Under Donor-Repeater Link, select Optical Fibre Link and enter the Fibre Losses.
- Select the Active check box. Only active remote antennas (displayed in red in the Transmitters folder in the
Data tab of the Explorer window) are calculated.
- Under Transmission, enter the a value for EIRP (Effective Isotropically Radiated Power) or click Calculate
to determine the actual gains. A9155 calculates the EIRP with the following formula:
the feeder.
6. Click the Propagation tab. Since remote antennas are taken into account during calculations, you must set prop-
agation parameters, as with transmitters. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the following: the Propagation
Model, Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. By default, the propagation
characteristics of the remote antenna (model, calculation radius, and grid resolution) are the same as those of the
donor transmitter. For information on propagation models, see "Chapter 4: Managing Calculations in A9155".
5.2.7.4 Hints for Updating Remote Antenna Parameters

A9155 provides you with a few shortcuts that you can use to change certain remote antenna parameters:
You can update the calculated azimuth and downtilt of the donor-side antennas of all remote antennas by selecting
Remote Antennas > Calculate Donor Side Azimuths and Tilts from the Transmitters context menu.
You can update the propagation losses of all off-air remote antennas by selecting Remote Antennas > Calculate
Donor Side Propagation Losses from the Transmitters context menu.
You can update the EIRP (Effective Isotropically Radiated Power) of all remote antennas by selecting Remote
Antennas > Calculate EIRP from the Transmitters context menu.
You can select a remote antenna on the map and change its azimuth (see "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna
Using the Mouse" on page 32) or its position relative to the site (see "Changing the Position of the Transmitter
Relative to the Site" on page 32).
5.2.8 Setting the Working Area of an A9155 Document

When you load project data from a database, you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are respon-
sible. For example, a complex radio-planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. You, however,
might be responsible for the radio planning for only one city. In such a situation, doing a coverage prediction that calculates
the entire network would not only take a lot of time, it is not necessary. Consequently, you can restrict a coverage prediction
to the sites that you are interested in and generate only the results you need.
In A9155, there are two ways of restricting the number of sites covered by a coverage prediction, each with its own advan-
tages:
Filtering the desired sites
You can simplify the selection of sites to be studied by using a filter. You can filter sites according to one or more
fields, or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. You can create a graphic
filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon. For information on graphic filters,
see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 74. This enables you to keep only the base stations with the
characteristics you want to study.
For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 66.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 185

A9155 User Manual
Setting a computation zone

Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites to be studied limits the number of sites to be calculated, which
in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations. In a smaller project, the time savings may not be significant.
In a larger project, especially when you are making repeated studies in order to see the effects of small changes
in site configuration, the savings in time is considerable. Limiting the number of sites by drawing a computation
zone also limits the resulting calculated coverage.
It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus zone or hot spot zone. The computation zone
defines the area where A9155 computes path loss matrices, coverage predictions, Monte Carlo, interference
matrices, etc., while the focus zone or hot spot zone is the area taken into consideration when generating reports
and results.
For information on the computation zone, see "Creating a Computation Zone" on page 194.
You can combine a computation zone and a filter, in order to create a very precise selection of the base stations to be
studied.
5.2.9 Studying a Single Base Station

As you create a site, you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. Coverage predictions on groups of
sites can take a large amount of time and consume a lot of computer resources. Restricting your coverage prediction to
the site you are currently working on allows you get the results quickly. You can expand your coverage prediction to a
number of sites once you have optimised the settings for each individual site.
Before studying a site, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data
into account and computes losses along the transmitter-receiver path. This allows you to predict the received signal level
at any given point. A9155 enables you to assign both a main propagation model, with a shorter radius and a higher reso-
lution, and an extended propagation model, with a longer radius and a lower resolution. By using a calculation radius,
A9155 limits the scope of calculations to a defined area. By using two matrices, A9155 allows you to calculate high reso-
lution path loss matrices closer to the transmitter, while reducing calculation time by using an extended matrix with a lower
resolution.
You can assign a propagation model to all transmitters at once, to a group of transmitters, or to a single transmitter. Assign-
ing a propagation model is explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 192.
"Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 186
"Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 187.
5.2.9.1 Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile

In A9155, you can make a point analysis to study reception along a profile between a reference transmitter and a GSM/
GPRS/EDGE user. Before studying a site, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio
and geographic data into account and computes losses along the transmitter-receiver path. The profile is calculated in real
time, using the propagation model, allowing you to study the profile and get a prediction on each selected point.
For information on assigning a propagation model, see "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 192.
1. In the map window, select the transmitter from which you want to make a point analysis.
3. A line appears on the map connecting the selected transmitter and the current position. You can now do the fol-
lowing:
- Move the receiver to change the current position.
- Click to place the receiver at the current position. You can move the receiver again by clicking it a second time.
- Right-click the receiver to choose one of the following commands from the context menu:
- Coordinates: Select Coordinates to change the receiver position by entering new XY coordinates.
- Target Site: Select a site from the list to place the receiver directly on a site.
4. Click the Profile tab.
5. The profile analysis appears in the Profile tab of the Point Analysis Tool window. The altitude (in metres) is
reported on the vertical axis and the receiver-transmitter distance on the horizontal axis. A blue ellipsoid indicates
the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver, with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS).
A9155 displays the angle of the LOS read from the vertical antenna pattern. Along the profile, if the signal meets
an obstacle, this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a red vertical line (if the propagation model used
takes diffraction mechanisms into account). The main peak is the one that intersects the most with the Fresnel
ellipsoid. With some propagation models using a 3 knife-edge Deygout diffraction method, the results may display
two additional attenuations peaks. The total attenuation is displayed above the main peak.
The results of the analysis are displayed at the top of the Profile tab:
- The received signal strength of the selected transmitter

- The propagation model used
- The shadowing margin
186 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- The distance between the transmitter and the receiver.

You can change the following options at the top of the Profile tab:
- Transmitter: Select the transmitter from the list.

- Carriers: Select the carrier to be analysed.
Note: If you want to see a profile analysis with clutter height displayed, you can use the Height
Profile tool ( ). For information on the Height Profile tool, see "Displaying the Terrain
Profile Between Candidate Microwave Sites" on page 791.
6. Right-click the Profile tab to choose one of the following commands from the context menu:
- Properties: Select Properties to display the Analysis Properties dialogue. This dialogue is available from
the context menu on all tabs of the Point Analysis Tool window. You can change the following:
- Change the X and Y coordinates to change the present position of the receiver.
- Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and
select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list.
- Select Signal Level, Path loss, and Total losses from the Result Type list.
- You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter
class.
- Link Budget: Select Link Budget to display a dialogue with the link budget.
- Model Details: Select Model Details to display a text document with details on the displayed profile analysis.
Model details are only available for the standard propagation model.
Displays data, including received signal, shadowing margin,

You can select a different transmitter, and propagation model used, and transmitter-receiver distance.
select which TRX type to display.
Fresnel ellipsoid Line of sight Attenuation with diffraction.
Figure 5.13: Point Analysis Tool - Profile tab
5.2.9.2 Studying Signal Level Coverage

As you are building your radio-planning project, you may want to check the coverage of a new base station without having
to calculate the entire project. You can do this by selecting the site with its transmitters and then creating a new coverage
prediction.
This section explains how to calculate the signal level coverage of a single site. A signal level coverage prediction displays
the signal of the best server for each pixel of the area studied.
Note: You can use the same procedure to study the signal level coverage of several sites by
grouping the transmitters. For information on grouping transmitters, see "Grouping Data
Objects by a Selected Property" on page 62.
To study the signal level coverage of a single base station:

2. Right-click transmitter folder and select the
3. Group by > Sites from the context menu. The transmitters are now displayed in the Transmitters folder by the site
on which they are situated.
Tip: If you wish to study only sites by their status, at this step you could group them by status.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 187

A9155 User Manual
4. Select the propagation parameters to be used in the coverage prediction:

a. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder.
b. Right-click the group of transmitters you want to study. The context menu appears.
c. Select Open Table from the context menu. A table appears with the properties of the selected group of trans-
mitters.
d. In the table, you can configure two propagation models: one for the main matrix, with a shorter radius and a
higher resolution, and another for the extended matrix, with a longer radius and a lower resolution. By calcu-
lating two matrices you can reduce the time of calculation by using a lower resolution for the extended matrix
and you can obtain more accurate results by using propagation models best suited for each distance for the
main and extended matrices.
e. In the Main Matrix column:
f. If desired, in the Extended Matrix column:
g. Close the table.
6. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the group of transmitters you want to study and select Calculations >
Create a New Study from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears.
The Study Types dialogue lists the studies available. They are divided into Standard Studies, supplied with
A9155, and Customized Studies. Unless you have already created some customized studies, the Customized
Studies list will be empty.
7. Select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
8. You can configure the following parameters in the Properties dialogue:
- General tab: You can change the assigned Name of the coverage prediction, the Resolution, and you can
add a Comment. The resolution you set is the display resolution, not the calculation resolution.
To improve memory consumption and optimise the calculation times, you should set the display resolutions of
coverage predictions according to the precision required. The following table lists the levels of precision that
are usually sufficient:
Size of the Coverage

Display Resolution
Prediction
City Centre 5m
City 20 m
County 50 m
State 100 m
Country According to the size of the country
Note: If you create a new coverage prediction from the context menu of either the Transmitters
or Predictions folder, you can select the sites using the Group By, Sort, and Filter buttons
under Configuration. Because you already selected the target sites, however, only the Fil-
ter button is available.
- Condition tab: The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to define the signals that
will be considered for each pixel (see Figure 5.14).
- At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. You can click the
arrow button ( ) and select Subcell Reception Threshold if you want to use the reception threshold
specified for each subcell (including the defined power offset) as the lower end of the signal level range
or Specified Reception Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for all subcells as the lower
end of the signal level range.
- In Figure 5.14, a Specified Reception Threshold less than or equal to -120 dBm will be considered.
- Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers.
- If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage
Probability.
class.
- You can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the Reception from TRXs list.
188 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 5.14: Condition settings for a signal level coverage prediction
- Display tab: You can modify how the results of the coverage prediction will be displayed.
- Under Display Type, select "Value Intervals."
- Under Field, select "Best signal level." Selecting "All" or "Best signal level" on the Conditions tab will give
you the same results because A9155 displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best
signal level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation.
- You can change the value intervals and their displayed colour. For information on changing display prop-
erties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
- You can create a tooltip with information about the coverage prediction by clicking the Tip Text box and
selecting the check boxes next to the fields you want to display in the tooltip.
- You can select the Add to Legend check box to add the displayed value intervals to the legend.
Note: If you change the display properties of a coverage prediction after you have calculated it,
you may make the coverage prediction invalid. You will then have to recalculate the cover-
age prediction to obtain valid results.
9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the signal level coverage prediction. The
progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.
Once A9155 has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. The signal
level coverage prediction can be found in the Predictions folder on the Data tab. A9155 automatically locks the results of
a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( ) beside the coverage prediction in the
Predictions folder. When you click the Calculate button ( ), A9155 only calculates unlocked coverage predictions
( ).
5.2.10 Studying Base Stations

When you make a coverage prediction on a group of base stations, A9155 calculates all base stations that are active,
filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle contain-
ing the computation zone. The computation zone is the area covered by the rectangle defined by the calculation radius.
When you set the propagation model, you can define the calculation radius. For information on setting the propagation
model and defining the calculation radius, see "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 192.
Figure 5.15 gives an example of a computation zone. In Figure 5.15, the computation zone is displayed in red, as it is in
the A9155 map window. The propagation zone of each active site is indicated by a blue square. Each propagation zone
that intersects the rectangle (indicated by the green dashed line) containing the computation zone will be taken into consid-
eration when A9155 calculates the coverage prediction. Sites 78 and 95, for example, are not in the computation zone.
However, their propagation zones intersect the rectangle containing the computation zone and, therefore, they will be
taken into consideration in the coverage prediction. On the other hand, the coverage zones of three other sites do not inter-
sect the green rectangle. Therefore, they will not be taken into account in the coverage prediction.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 189

A9155 User Manual
Figure 5.15: An example of a computation zone

Before calculating a coverage prediction, A9155 must have valid path loss matrices. A9155 calculates the path loss matri-
ces using the assigned propagation model. A9155 can use two different propagation models for each transmitter: a main
propagation model with a shorter radius (displayed with a blue square in Figure 5.15) and a higher resolution and an
extended propagation model with a longer radius and a lower resolution. A9155 will use the main propagation model to
calculate higher resolution path loss matrices close to the transmitter and the extended propagation model to calculate
lower resolution path loss matrices outside the area covered by the main propagation model.
"Path Loss Matrices" on page 190
"Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 192
"The Calculation Process" on page 194
"Creating a Computation Zone" on page 194
"Setting Transmitters as Active" on page 195
"Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 195
"Analysing a Coverage Prediction" on page 201
"Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results" on page 208.
5.2.10.1 Path Loss Matrices

Path loss is caused by diffraction, scattering and reflection in the transmitter-receiver path and is calculated using the prop-
agation model. In A9155, the path loss matrices are needed for all base stations that are active, filtered, and whose prop-
agation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone (for an explanation of the computation zone, see
"Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 187). The path loss matrices must be calculated before predictions and simu-
lations can be made.
Storing Path Loss Matrices
matrices in the A9155 document results in a more portable but significantly larger document. in the case of large radio-
The path loss matrices are also stored externally in a multi-user environment, when several users are working on the same
radio-planning document and share the path loss matrices. In this case, the radio data is stored in a database and the path
loss matrices are read-only and are stored in a location accessible to all users. When the user changes his radio data and
recalculates the path loss matrices, the calculated changes to the path loss matrices are stored locally; the common path
loss matrices are not modified. These will be recalculated by the administrator taking into consideration the changes to
radio data made by all users. For more information on working in a multi-user environment, see the Administrator Manual.
190 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

matrices and the location for the shared path loss matrices:
Note: Path loss matrices you calculate locally are not stored in the same directory as shared path
loss matrices. Shared path loss matrices are stored in a read-only directory. In other words,
you can read the information from the shared path loss matrices but any changes you make
will be stored locally, either embedded in the ATL file or in a private external folder, depend-
ing on what you have selected in Private Directory.
A9155 document before closing it if you have updated the path loss matrices.
on the updated information in the database. For more information on shared directories, see the Administrator
Manual.
5. Click OK.
Checking the Validity of Path Loss Matrices
A9155 automatically checks the validity of the path loss matrices before calculating any coverage prediction. If you want,
you can check whether the path loss matrices are valid without creating a coverage prediction.
To check if the path loss matrices are valid:
4. Click the Propagation tab. The Available Results table lists the following information for the path loss matrix for
each transmitter:

are recalculated.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 191

A9155 User Manual
5.2.10.2 Assigning a Propagation Model

In A9155, you can assign a propagation model globally to all transmitters, to a defined group of transmitters, or a single
transmitter. As well, you can assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions. This propagation model is used
as for all transmitters where the main propagation model selected is "(Default model)."
Because you can assign a propagation model in several different ways, it is important to understand which propagation
model A9155 will use:
1. If you have assigned a propagation model to a single transmitter, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model
to One Transmitter" on page 193, or to a group of transmitters, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation Model to
a Group of Transmitters" on page 193, this is the propagation model that will be used.
The propagation model assigned to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters will always have prece-
dence over any other assigned propagation model.
2. If you have assigned a propagation model globally to all transmitters, as explained in "Assigning a Propagation
Model to All Transmitters" on page 192, this is the propagation model that will be used for all transmitters, except
for those to which you will assign a propagation model either individually or as part of a group.
Important: If, after assigning a propagation model to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmit-
ters, you assign a propagation model globally, you will override the propagation models
that you had previously assigned to individual transmitters or to a group of transmitters.
3. If you have assigned a default propagation model for coverage predictions, as described in "Assigning a Default
Propagation Model for Coverage Predictions" on page 194, this is the propagation model that will be used for all
transmitters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)." If a transmitter has any other propagation model
chosen as the main propagation model, that is the propagation model that will be used.
In this section, the following methods of assigning a propagation model are explained:
"Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters" on page 192
"Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters" on page 193
"Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 193
"Assigning a Default Propagation Model for Coverage Predictions" on page 194.
Note: If you are modelling multi-band transmitters, you can assign a different propagation model
to each frequency band. For more information, see "Advanced Modelling of Multi-Band
Transmitters" on page 299.
Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters
In A9155, you can choose a propagation model per transmitter or globally.

To define a main and extended propagation model for all transmitters:
192 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

7. Click OK. The selected propagation models will be used for all transmitters.
Note: If you set a different main or extended matrix on an individual transmitter as explained in
"Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 193 after having assigned a
propagation model to all transmitters, you will override this entry.
Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters
In A9155, you can assign the same propagation model to several transmitters by first grouping them by their common
parameters and then assigning the propagation model.
To define a main and extended propagation model for a defined group of transmitters:

5. Right-click the group of transmitters to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The
selected group.
For each transmitter, you can set the propagation model parameters in the following columns:

- Main Resolution
Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter
If you have added a single transmitter, you can assign it a propagation model. You can also assign a propagation model
to a single transmitter after you have assigned a main and extended propagation model globally or to a group of transmit-
ters.
When you assign a main and extended propagation model to a single transmitter, it overrides any changes you have previ-
ously made globally. The propagation model settings apply to all the subcells on the same transmitter. For example, if the
BCCH is a 900 MHz subcell, the same propagation model is also assigned to a TCH_INNER 1800 MHz subcell. By defin-
ing a multi-band transmitter, you can assign propagation model-related settings that are optimised to the frequency band
of each subcell when more than one frequency band is used on a transmitter. For more information on multi-band trans-
mitters, see "Advanced Modelling of Multi-Band Transmitters" on page 299.
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a main and extended propagation model. The context menu
appears.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 193

A9155 User Manual

8. Click OK. The selected propagation models will be used for the selected transmitter.
Assigning a Default Propagation Model for Coverage Predictions
You can assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions. This propagation model is used as for all transmit-
ters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)."
To assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions:
6. Enter a Default Resolution. When you create a new coverage prediction, the resolution by default is the value
you have entered here.
Tip: By making the necessary entry in the atoll.ini file, if you clear the value entered in the Res-
olution box when you create a coverage prediction, A9155 will calculate the coverage pre-
diction using the currently defined default resolution. That way, if you have many coverage
predictions, you can change their resolution by changing the default resolution and recalcu-
lating the coverage predictions. A9155 will then calculate them using the updated resolu-
tion. For information on changing entries in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
7. Click OK. The selected propagation model will be used for coverage predictions for all transmitters whose main
propagation model is "(Default model)."
5.2.10.3 The Calculation Process

When you create a coverage prediction and click the Calculate button ( ), A9155 follows the following process:
1. A9155 first checks to see whether the path loss matrices exist and, if so, whether they are valid. There must be
valid path loss matrices for each active and filtered transmitter whose propagation radius intersects the rectangle
containing the computation zone.
For information on what can affect the validity of calculated path loss matrices, see the Technical Reference
Guide.
2. If the path loss matrices do not exist or are not valid, A9155 calculates them. There has to be at least one unlocked
coverage prediction in the Predictions folder. If not A9155 will not calculate the path loss matrices when you click
the Calculate button ( ).
3. A9155 calculates all unlocked coverage predictions in the Predictions folder. A9155 automatically locks the
results of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( ) beside the coverage pre-
diction in the Predictions folder.
Notes:
You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the
toolbar.
When you click the Force Calculation button ( ) instead of the Calculate button, A9155 cal-
culates all path loss matrices, unlocked coverages, and pending simulations.
5.2.10.4 Creating a Computation Zone

194 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

You can also create a computation zone using one of the following methods:
Once you have created a computation zone, you can use A9155s polygon editing tools to edit it. For more information on
the polygon editing tools, see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 42.
Note: You can save the computation zone, so that you can use it in a different A9155 document,
in the following ways:
- By saving the computation zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting
page 71.
- By right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window
and selecting Export from the context menu.
5.2.10.5 Setting Transmitters as Active

When you make a coverage prediction, A9155 calculates all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected
by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone.
Before you define a coverage prediction, you must ensure that all the transmitters on the sites you wish to study have been
activated. In the Explorer window, active transmitters are indicated with a red icon ( ) in the Transmitters folder and
inactive transmitters are indicated with a white icon ( ).
You can set an individual transmitter as active from its context menu or you can set several transmitters as active by acti-
vating them from the Transmitters context menu or by activating the transmitters from the Transmitters table.
To set an individual transmitter as active:
3. Right-click the transmitter you want to activate. The context menu appears.
4. Select Active Transmitter from the context menu. The transmitter is now active.
To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters context menu:
2. Select the transmitters you want to set as active:
- To set all transmitters as active, right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears.
- To set a group of transmitters as active, click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder and
right-click the group of transmitters you want to set as active. The context menu appears.
Note: For information on grouping data objects, see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 61.
3. Select Activate Transmitters from the context menu. The selected transmitters are set as active.
To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters table:
3. Select Open Table. The Transmitters table appears with each transmitters parameters in a second row.
4. For each transmitter that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Active column.
Once you have ensured that all transmitters are active, you can set the propagation model parameters. For information on
choosing and configuring a propagation model, see "Chapter 4: Managing Calculations in A9155".
Calculating path loss matrices can be extremely time and resource intensive when you are working on larger projects.
Consequently, A9155 offers you the possibility of distributing path loss calculations on several computers. You can install
the A9155 computing server application on other workstations or on servers. Once the computing server application is
installed on a workstation or server, the computer is available for distributed path loss calculation to other computers on
the network. For information on distributed calculations, see the Administrator Manual.
5.2.10.6 Signal Level Coverage Predictions

A9155 offers a series of standard coverage predictions that are common to all radio technologies. Coverage predictions
specific to GSM/GPRS/EDGE are covered in "Interference Coverage Predictions" on page 253 and "Packet-Specific
Coverage Predictions" on page 259.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 195

A9155 User Manual
Once you have created and calculated a coverage prediction, you can use the coverage predictions context menu to make
the coverage prediction into a template which will appear in the Study Types dialogue. You can also select Duplicate
from the coverage predictions context menu to create a copy. By duplicating an existing prediction that has the parameters
you wish to study, you can create a new coverage prediction more quickly. If you clone a coverage prediction, by selecting
Clone from the context menu, you can create a copy of the coverage prediction with the calculated coverage. You can
then change the display, providing that the selected parameter does not invalidate the calculated coverage prediction.
You can also save the list of all defined coverage predictions in a user configuration, allowing you or other users to import
it into a new A9155 document. When you save the list in a user configuration, the parameters of all existing coverage
predictions are saved; not just the parameters of calculated or displayed ones. For information on exporting user configu-
rations, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 71.
The following standard coverage predictions are explained in this section:
"Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level" on page 196
"Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 197
"Making a Coverage Prediction on Overlapping Zones" on page 200.
5.2.10.6.1 Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal Level

A coverage prediction by signal level allows you to predict the best signal strength at each pixel. You can base the cover-
age on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range.
To make a coverage prediction by signal level:
4. Select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the coverage
prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to dis-
play in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 66.
6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 5.17). On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered
for each pixel.
- At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. You can click the arrow
button ( ) and select one of the following thresholds:
- Subcell Reception Threshold: Select Subcell Reception Threshold if you want to use the reception
threshold specified for each subcell (including the defined power offset) as the lower end of the signal level
range.
- Specified Reception Threshold: Select Specified Reception Threshold if you want to enter a threshold
to be used for all subcells as the lower end of the signal level range.
- If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Prob-
ability.
class.
Figure 5.17: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by signal level
7. Click the Display tab.
196 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

If you choose to display the results by best signal level, the coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresh-
olds. If you choose to display the results by signal level, the coverage prediction results will be arranged according
to transmitter. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33. Selecting
"All" or "Best signal level" on the Conditions tab will give you the same results because A9155 displays the results
of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best signal level" necessitates, however, the longest time for calcula-
tion.
8. Click OK to save your settings.
Once A9155 has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see
Figure 5.18).
Figure 5.18: Coverage prediction by signal level
5.2.10.6.2 Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter

A coverage prediction by transmitter allows you to predict which server is the best at each pixel. You can base the cover-
The type of server you base the coverage prediction on determine the type of coverage prediction by transmitter you make.
In this section, the following scenarios are explained:
"Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter Based on the Best Signal Level" on page 197
"Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter Based on the Best Signal Level by HCS Layer" on page 198
"Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter Based on the Best Signal Level of the Highest Priority HCS Layer"
on page 199.
Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter Based on the Best Signal Level
When you base a coverage prediction by transmitter on the best signal level, A9155 will consider the best signal level on
each pixel. A coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best signal level is more suitable for a network that does not
have HCS layers. If the network has HCS layers, a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best signal level can
give misleading results as the best signal on any pixel will usually be on a macro layer, although not all users will neces-
sarily connect to it.
To make a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best signal level:
4. Select Coverage by Transmitter and click OK.
for each pixel.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 197

A9155 User Manual
range.
- Under Server, select "Best Signal Level" to consider the best signal level from all servers.
ability.
class.
Figure 5.19: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by transmitter

For a coverage prediction by transmitter, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter" is
selected by default. Each coverage zone will then be displayed with the same colour as that defined for each trans-
mitter. For information on defining transmitter colours, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the transmitter coverage prediction. The
Once A9155 has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
Note: You can also predict which server is the second best server on each pixel by selecting
"Second Best Signal Level" on the Conditions tab and setting "Discrete Values" as the Dis-
play Type and "Transmitter" as the Field on the Display tab.
Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter Based on the Best Signal Level by HCS Layer
When you base a coverage prediction by transmitter on the best signal level by HCS layer, A9155 will consider the best
signal level by HCS layer on each pixel. Grouping the results by HCS layer will allow you to quickly select which HCS layer
is displayed.
To make a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best signal level per HCS layer:
prediction, and add some Comments.
- Under Configuration on the General tab, click the Click the Group By button. The Group dialogue appears.
- Select "HCS Layers" in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Group these fields
in this order list.
- Click OK to close the Group dialogue.
198 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

for each pixel.
range.
- Under Server, select "Best Signal Level per HCS Layer" to consider the best signal level from all servers.
ability.
class.
Once A9155 has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. You can select
which HCS layer to display by clicking the Expand button ( ) to expand the coverage prediction in the Predictions folder
and the selecting only the visibility check box of the HCS layer you want to display
Note: You can also predict which server is the second best server per HCS layer on each pixel by
selecting "Second Best Signal Level per HCS Layer" on the Conditions tab and setting "Dis-
crete Values" as the Display Type and "Transmitter" as the Field on the Display tab.
Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter Based on the Best Signal Level of the Highest Priority
HCS Layer
When you base a coverage prediction by transmitter on the best signal level of the highest priority HCS layer, A9155 will
consider the best signal level of the highest priority on each pixel.
To make a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best signal level of the highest priority HCS layer:
for each pixel.
range.
- Under Server, select "Best Signal Level of the Highest Priority HCS Layer" to consider the best signal level
from all servers.
ability.
class.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 199

A9155 User Manual
5.2.10.6.3 Making a Coverage Prediction on Overlapping Zones

Overlapping zones are composed of pixels that are, for a defined condition, covered by the signal of at least two transmit-
ters. You can base a coverage prediction of overlapping zones on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined
range.
To make a coverage prediction on overlapping zones:
4. Select Overlapping Zones and click OK.
for each pixel.
range.
- Under Server, select "Best Signal Level per HCS Layer".
ability.
class.
Figure 5.20: Condition settings for a coverage prediction on overlapping zones

For a coverage prediction on overlapping zones, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Number
of servers" is selected by default. Each overlapping zone will then be displayed in a colour corresponding to the
number of servers received per pixel. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of
Objects" on page 33.
200 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the coverage prediction. The progress of the
calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.
Note: By changing the parameters selected on the Condition tab and by selecting different results
to be displayed on the Display tab, you can calculate and display information other than that
which has been explained in the preceding sections.
5.2.10.7 Analysing a Coverage Prediction

Once you have completed a study, you can analyse the results with the tools that A9155 provides.
The results are displayed graphically in the map window according to the settings you made on the Display tab when you
created the coverage prediction (step 8. of "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 187). If several coverage predic-
tions are visible on the map, it may be difficult to clearly see the results of the coverage prediction you wish to analyse.
You can select which studies to display or to hide by selecting or clearing the display check box. For information on manag-
ing the display, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
In this section, the following tools are explained:
"Displaying the Legend Window" on page 201
"Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips" on page 201
"Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab" on page 201
"Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 202
"Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics" on page 204
"Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples" on page 205.
5.2.10.7.1 Displaying the Legend Window

When you create a coverage prediction, you can add the displayed values of the coverage prediction to a legend by select-
ing the Add to Legend check box on the Display tab.
Select View > Legend Window. The Legend window is displayed, with the values for each displayed coverage
prediction identified by the name of the coverage prediction.
5.2.10.7.2 Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips

You can get information by placing the pointer over an area of the coverage prediction to read the information displayed
in the tooltips. The information displayed is defined by the settings you made on the Display tab when you created the
coverage prediction (step 8. of "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 187).
To get coverage prediction results in the form of tooltips:
In the map window, place the pointer over the area of the coverage prediction that you want more information on.
After a brief pause, the tooltip appears with the information defined in the Display tab of the coverage prediction
properties (see Figure 5.21).
Figure 5.21: Displaying coverage prediction results using tooltips
5.2.10.7.3 Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab

Once you have calculated the coverage prediction, you can use the Point Analysis tool.
2. At the bottom of the Point Analysis Tool window, click the Reception tab (see Figure 5.22).
The predicted signal level from different transmitters is reported in the Reception tab in the form of a bar chart,
from the highest predicted signal level on the top to the lowest one on the bottom. Each bar is displayed in the
colour of the transmitter it represents.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 201

A9155 User Manual
At the top of the Reception tab, you can select the TRXs and the HCS Layer to be analysed. If you select nothing
from the HCS Layer list, the signals from all HCS layers will be studied.
Figure 5.22: Point Analysis Window - Reception tab

3. Right-click the Reception tab and select Properties from the context menu. The Analysis Properties dialogue
appears.
- Select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
5.2.10.7.4 Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report
area where A9155 computes path loss matrices, coverage studies, Monte Carlo, power control simulations, etc., while the
focus and hot spot zones are the areas taken into consideration when generating reports and results. When you create a
coverage prediction report, it gives the results for the focus zone and for each of the defined hot spot zones.
You can also create a focus or hot spot zone as follows:

Once you have created a focus or hot spot zone, you can use A9155s polygon editing tools to edit it. For more information
on the polygon editing tools, see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 42.
202 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: You can save a focus or hot spot zone, so that you can use it in a different A9155 docu-
ment, in the following ways:
- By saving the focus or hot spot zone in the user configuration. For information on export-
ing the focus or hot spot zone in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configu-
ration" on page 71.
- By right-clicking the Focus or Hot Spot Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer
window and selecting Export from the context menu.
You can include population statistics in the focus or hot spot zone by importing a population
map. For information on importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on
page 99.
5.2.10.7.5 Displaying a Coverage Prediction Report

A9155 can generate a report for any coverage prediction whose display check box is selected ( ). The report displays
the covered surface and percentage for each threshold value defined in the Display tab of the coverage predictions Prop-
erties dialogue.
The coverage prediction report is displayed in a table. By default, the report table only displays the name and coverage
area columns. You can edit the table to select which columns to display or to hide. For information on displaying and hiding
columns, see "Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 53.
A9155 bases the report on the area covered by the focus zone and hot spot zones; if no focus zone is defined, A9155 will
use the computation zone. Using a focus zone enables you to create a report without the border effect. In other words, the
results of a coverage prediction are delimited by the computation zone; results close to the border are influenced by fact
that no calculations have been made outside the computation zone. Basing a report on a focus zone that is smaller than
the computation zone eliminates the border effect. By using a focus zone for the report, you can create a report for a
specific number of sites, instead of creating a report for every site that has been calculated.
The focus zone or hot spot zone must be defined before you display a report; it is not necessary to define it before comput-
ing coverage. For information on defining a focus zone or hot spot zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a
Coverage Prediction Report" on page 202.
A9155 can generate a report for a single prediction, or for all displayed predictions.
To display a report on a single coverage prediction:
3. Right-click the coverage prediction for which you want to generate a report. The context menu appears.
4. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report is
based on the hot spot zones and on the focus zone if available or on the hot spot zones and computation zone if
there is no focus zone.
To display a report on all coverage predictions:
3. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report shows
all displayed coverage predictions in the same order as in the Predictions folder. The report is based on the focus
zone if available or on the calculation zone if there is no focus zone.
You can include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone by importing a population map. For information on
importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 99. Normally, A9155 takes all geo data into
consideration, whether it is displayed or not. However, for the population statistics to be used in a report, the population
map has to be displayed.
To include population statistics in the focus zone or hot spot zone:
1. Ensure that the population geo data is visible. For information on displaying geo data, see "Displaying or Hiding
Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
2. Display the report as explained above.
3. Select Format > Display Columns. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears.
4. Select the following columns, where "Population" is the name of the folder on the Geo tab containing the popula-
tion map:
- "Population" (Population): The number of inhabitants covered.
- "Population" (% Population): The percentage of inhabitants covered.
- "Population" (Population [total]): The total number of inhabitants inside the zone.
Note: Depending on display settings, you can create a report showing population thresholds, as
well.
A9155 saves the names of the columns you select and will automatically select them the next time you create a
coverage prediction report.
5. Click OK.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 203

A9155 User Manual
If you have created a custom data map with integrable data, the data can be used in prediction reports. The data will be
summed over the coverage area for each item in the report (for example, by transmitter or threshold). The data can be
value data (revenue, number of customers, etc.) or density data (revenue/km, number of customer/km, etc.). Data is
considered as non-integrable if the data given is per pixel or polygon and cannot be summed over areas, for example,
socio-demographic classes, rain zones, etc. For information on integrable data in custom data maps, see "Integrable
Versus Non Integrable Data" on page 114.
5.2.10.7.6 Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics

A9155 can display statistics for any coverage prediction whose display check box is selected ( ). By default, A9155
displays a histogram using the coverage study colours, interval steps, and shading as defined in the Display tab of the
coverage predictions Properties dialogue. You can also display a cumulative distribution function (CDF) or an inverse
CDF (1 - CDF). For a CDF or an inverse CDF, the resulting values are combined and shown along a curve. You can also
display the histogram or the CDFs as percentages of the covered area.
instead of displaying statistics for every site that has been calculated. Hot spot zones are not taken into consideration when
displaying statistics.
The focus zone must be defined before you display statistics; it is not necessary to define it before computing coverage.
For information on defining a focus zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on
page 202.
To display the statistics on a coverage prediction:
3. Right-click the coverage prediction whose statistics you want to display. The context menu appears.
4. Select Histogram from the context menu. The Statistics dialogue appears with a histogram of the area defined
by the focus zone (see Figure 5.26).
- Under Histogram Based on Covered Areas, you can select to view a histogram, CDF, or inverse CDF based
on area or percentage.
- The Detailed Results section displays the covered area values, or the percentage of the covered area, along
the y-axis against the coverage criterion along the x-axis.
- You can copy the graph by clicking the Copy button.
- You can print the graph by clicking the Print button.
- Under Statistics Based on Study Conditions, you can view the mean and standard deviation of the cov-
erage criterion calculated during the coverage calculations, if available.
Figure 5.23: Histogram of a coverage prediction by signal level
204 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

5.2.10.7.7 Comparing Coverage Predictions: Examples

A9155 allows you to compare two similar predictions to see the differences between them. This enables you to quickly
see how changes you make affect the network.
In this section, there are two examples to explain how you can compare two similar predictions. You can display the results
of the comparison study coverage in one of the following ways:
Intersection: This display shows the area where both prediction coverages overlap (for example, pixels covered
by both studies are displayed in red).
Union: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one colour and pixels covered by
only one coverage prediction in a different colour (for example, pixels covered by both predictions are red and
pixels covered by only one prediction are blue).
Difference: This display shows all pixels covered by both coverage predictions in one colour, pixels covered by
only one of the two predictions with another colour and pixels covered only by the second prediction with a third
colour (for example, pixels covered by both studies are red, pixels covered only by the first prediction are green,
and pixels covered only by the second prediction are blue).
To compare two similar coverage predictions:
1. Create and calculate a coverage prediction of the existing network.
2. Examine the coverage prediction to see where coverage can be improved.
3. Make the changes to the network to improve coverage.
4. Duplicate the original coverage prediction (in order to leave the first coverage prediction unchanged).
5. Calculate the duplicated coverage prediction.
6. Compare the original coverage prediction with the new coverage prediction. A9155 displays differences in cov-
erage between them.
In this section, the following examples are explained:
"Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station" on page 205
"Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt" on page 207.
Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station
If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for increasing
coverage. In this example, we will look at how you can verify if a newly added base station improves coverage.
A signal level coverage prediction of the current network is made as described in "Making a Coverage Prediction by Signal
Level" on page 196. The results are displayed in Figure 5.24. An area with poor coverage is visible on the right side of the
figure.
Figure 5.24: Signal level coverage prediction of existing network
A new base station is added, either by creating the site and adding the transmitters, as explained in "Creating a GSM/
GPRS/EDGE Base Station" on page 166, or by placing a station template, as explained in "Placing a New Station Using
a Station Template" on page 176. Once the new site base station been added, the original coverage prediction can be
recalculated, but then it will be impossible to compare the two predictions. Instead, the original signal level coverage
prediction can be copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated to show the effect of
the new site (see Figure 5.25).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 205

A9155 User Manual
Figure 5.25: Signal level coverage prediction of network with new base station
Now you can compare the two predictions.

To compare two predictions:
1. Right-click one of the two predictions. The context menu appears.
2. From the context menu, select Compare with and, from the menu that opens, select the coverage prediction you
want to compare with the first. The Comparison Properties dialogue appears.
3. Click the General tab. You can change the Name of the comparison and add Comments.
The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their name and
resolution.
4. Click the Display tab. On the display tab, you can choose how you want the results of the comparison to be dis-
played. You can choose among:
- Intersection
- Union
- Difference
In order to see what changes adding a new base station made, you should choose Difference.
5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 5.26, shows clearly the area covered only by the
new base station.
206 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 5.26: Comparison of both signal level coverage predictions
Example 2: Studying the Effect of a Change in Transmitter Tilt
coverage. In this example, we will look at how modifying transmitter tilt can improve coverage.
A coverage prediction by transmitter of the current network is made as described in "Making a Coverage Prediction by
Transmitter" on page 197. The results are displayed in Figure 5.27. The coverage prediction shows that one transmitter is
covering its area poorly. The area is indicated with a red oval in the figure.
Figure 5.27: Coverage prediction by transmitter of existing network

You can try modifying the tilt on the transmitter to improve the coverage. The properties of the transmitter can be accessed
by right-clicking the transmitter in the map window and selecting Properties from the context menu. The mechanical and
electrical tilt of the antenna are defined on the Transmitter tab of the Properties dialogue.
Once the tilt of the antenna has been modified, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then it will be
impossible to compare the two predictions. Instead, the original coverage prediction by can be copied by selecting Dupli-
cate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated to show how modifying the antenna tilt has affected coverage (see
Figure 5.28).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 207

A9155 User Manual
Figure 5.28: Coverage prediction by transmitter of network after modifications
As you can see, modifying the antenna tilt increased the coverage of the transmitter. However, to see exactly the change
in propagation, you can compare the two predictions.
resolution.
- Intersection
- Union
- Difference
In order to see what changes modifying the antenna tilt made, you can choose Union. This will display all pixels
covered by both predictions in one colour and all pixels covered by only one predictions in another colour. The
increase in coverage, seen in only the second coverage prediction, will be immediately clear.
5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 5.29, shows clearly the increase in coverage due to
the change in antenna tilt.
Figure 5.29: Comparison of both transmitter coverage predictions
5.2.10.8 Printing and Exporting Coverage Prediction Results

Once you have made a coverage prediction, you may want to save the results displayed on the map in an external format,
either by printing the coverage prediction results, or by saving the results in an external format. You can also export a
selected area of the coverage as a bitmap.
"Printing Coverage Prediction Results" on page 209
208 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

"Defining a Coverage Export Zone" on page 209

"Exporting Coverage Prediction Results" on page 209.
5.2.10.8.1 Printing Coverage Prediction Results

A9155 offers several options allowing you to customise and optimise the printed coverage prediction results. A9155
supports printing to a variety of paper sizes, including A4 and A0.
Before you print coverage prediction results, you have the following options:
- Creating a focus zone (see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on
page 202).
To print coverage prediction results:

1. Select the document window containing the coverage prediction results.
2. You now have the following options before printing:
- You can select a print area ("Defining the Printing Zone" on page 59) or create a focus zone ("Creating a Focus
or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 202).
4. Click OK.

defined a coverage export zone, when you export a coverage prediction as a raster image, A9155 offers you the option of
exporting only the area covered by the zone.
Important: When you export a coverage prediction, you can not export in raster format if the coverage
prediction was made by transmitter (for example, coverage predictions with the display
type set by transmitter, by a transmitter attribute, by signal level, by path loss, or by total
losses). A coverage prediction made by transmitter can only be exported in a vector format.
Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format.

AGD formats.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 209

A9155 User Manual
To export a prediction coverage:


- If you have chosen to export the prediction coverage in raster format, select one of the following:
the study,
Note: When selecting a coordinate system different than the one initially defined in A9155, the file
is converted using the selected coordinate system.
5.2.11 Planning Neighbours

You can set neighbours for each transmitter manually, or you can let A9155 automatically allocate neighbours, based on
the parameters that you set. When allocating neighbours, the transmitter to which you are allocating neighbours is referred
to as the reference transmitter. The transmitters that fulfil the requirements to be neighbours are referred to as possible
neighbours. When allocating neighbours automatically to all active and filtered transmitters, A9155 allocates neighbours
only to the transmitters within the computation zone and considers as possible neighbours all the active and filtered cells
whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle containing the computation zone. If there is no focus zone, A9155 allocates
neighbours only to the transmitters within the computation zone.
Usually, you will allocate neighbours globally during the beginning of a radio planning project. Afterwards, you will allocate
neighbours to base stations or transmitters as you add them. You can automatically allocate neighbours to all the trans-
mitters in the document, or you can define a group of transmitters either by using a focus zone or by grouping transmitters
in the Explorer window and automatically allocate neighbours to the defined group. For information on creating a focus
zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 202. For information on grouping
transmitters in the Explorer window, see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 61.
A9155 supports the following neighbour types in a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network:
Intra-technology neighbours: Intra-technology neighbours are transmitters defined as neighbours that also use
GSM/GPRS/EDGE.
Inter-technology neighbours: Inter-technology neighbours are transmitters defined as neighbours that use a
technology other than GSM/GPRS/EDGE.
"Importing Neighbours" on page 211
"Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 211
"Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 211
"Checking Automatic Allocation Results" on page 214
"Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Transmitter" on page 215
210 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

"Calculating the Importance of Existing Neighbours" on page 217

"Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan" on page 218
"Exporting Neighbours" on page 219.
5.2.11.1 Importing Neighbours

You can import neighbour data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the current A9155 document
using the Neighbours table.
To import neighbours using the Neighbours table:
1. Open the Neighbours table:
a. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window.
c. Select Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table appears.
2. Import the ASCII text file as explained in "Importing Tables from External Files" on page 56.
5.2.11.2 Defining Exceptional Pairs

In A9155, you can define neighbour constraints that can be taken into consideration during the automatic allocation of
neighbours. Exceptional pairs are not taken into consideration when you manually allocate neighbours.
To define exceptional pairs of neighbours:
3. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Transmitters table appears.
4. Right-click the transmitter for which you want to define neighbour constraints. The context menu appears.
5. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The transmitters Properties dialogue appears.
6. Click the Intra-technology Neighbours tab.
7. Under Exceptional Pairs, create a new exceptional pair in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ):
a. Select the transmitter from the list in the Neighbours column.
b. In the Status column, select one of the following:
- Forced: The selected cell will always be a neighbour of the reference cell.
- Forbidden: The selected cell will never be a neighbour of the reference cell.
8. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished creating the new exceptional pair.
9. Click OK.
Notes: You can also create exceptional pairs using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology
Neighbours table. You can open this table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and
selecting Neighbours > Intra-Technology Exceptional Pairs.
5.2.11.3 Allocating Neighbours Automatically

A9155 can automatically allocate intra-technology neighbours in a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network. A9155 allocates neigh-
bours based on the parameters you set in the Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue.
To automatically allocate intra-carrier GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbours:
3. Select Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dia-
logue appears.
4. On the Neighbours tab, you can set the following parameters:
- Max. Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference transmitter and a possible neigh-
bour.
- Max. Number of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours that can be allocated to
a transmitter. This value can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the
Transmitters table, in which case the value in the Transmitters table is used.
- Coverage Conditions: The coverage conditions must be respected for a cell to be considered as a neighbour.
Click Define to change the coverage conditions. In the Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the
following parameters:
- Min. BCCH Signal Level: Enter the minimum signal level which must be provided by reference cell A and
possible neighbour cell B.
- Handover Start: Enter the signal level which indicates the beginning of the handover margin. The hando-
ver start must be outside of the best server area of the reference transmitter (see Figure 5.30).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 211

A9155 User Manual
- Handover End: Enter the signal level which indicates the end of the handover margin. The handover end
must exceed the value entered for the Handover Start. The higher the value entered for the Handover
End, the longer the list of candidate neighbours (see Figure 5.30). The area between the Handover Start
and the Handover End constitutes the area in which A9155 will search for neighbours.
- Shadowing Taken into Account: If desired, select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box and
enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability.
Minimum signal level
Handover end
Handover start
candidateB
Best server area
of candidateB
referenceA
Best server area of
referenceA
SA SB
Figure 5.30: The handover area between the reference transmitter and the potential candidate
- Take into account: You can define whether A9155 selects potential candidates by whose handover zone
shared with the reference transmitter has the greatest surface area or greatest circuit traffic. The importance
of this parameter can be defined in step 6. Select one of the following options:
- Covered Area: If you select Covered Area, A9155 will select the potential candidates whose handover
zone shared with the reference transmitter has the greatest surface area.
- Covered Traffic: If you select Covered Traffic, A9155 will select the potential candidates whose hando-
ver zone shared with the reference transmitter covers the most circuit traffic (Erlangs). A9155 considers
the traffic maps used for the default traffic analysis to calculate the covered traffic.
- % Min. Covered Area: Enter, in percentage, the amount of covered area or traffic of the reference trans-
mitters coverage that another transmitter must cover to be considered as a potential candidate. The % Min.
Covered Area is the percentage of the area described by S A S B in Figure 5.30.
5. Select the desired calculation parameters:

- Force co-site transmitters as neighbours: Select the Force co-site transmitters as neighbours check
box if you want transmitters located on the same site as the reference cell to be automatically considered as
neighbours. The importance of this parameter can be defined in step 6.
- Force adjacent transmitters as neighbours: Select the Force adjacent transmitters as neighbours check
box if you want transmitters that are adjacent to the reference transmitter to be automatically considered as
neighbours. A transmitter is considered adjacent if there is at least one pixel in the reference transmitters cov-
erage area where the possible neighbour transmitters is the best server, or where the possible neighbour
transmitter is the second best server (respecting the handover margin). The importance of this parameter can
be defined in step 6.
- Force neighbour symmetry: Select the Force neighbour symmetry check box if you want neighbour rela-
tions to be reciprocal. In other words, a reference transmitter will be a possible neighbour to all of the trans-
mitters that are its neighbours. If the neighbour list of any transmitter is full, the reference transmitter will not
be added as a neighbour and that transmitter will be removed from the list of neighbours of the reference trans-
mitter.
- Force exceptional pairs: Select the Force exceptional pairs check box if you want to be able to force or
forbid neighbour relations defined in the Exceptional Pairs table. For information on exceptional pairs, see
"Defining Exceptional Pairs" on page 211.
- Reset neighbours: Select the Reset neighbours check box if you want A9155 to delete all current neigh-
bours when allocating neighbours. If you do not select the Reset neighbours check box, A9155 will not delete
any existing neighbours when automatically allocating neighbours; it will only add new neighbours to the list.
6. Click the Importance Weighting button to set the relative importance of possible neighbours (for information on
how A9155 calculates importance, see the Technical Reference Guide):
- Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of a neighbour being admitted for coverage
reasons.
- Adjacency Factor: If you have selected the Force adjacent transmitters as neighbours check box in
step 5., set the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour transmitter being adjacent to the
reference transmitter.
- Co-site Factor: If you have selected the Force co-site transmitters as neighbours check box in step 5., set
the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour transmitter being located on the same site as
212 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

7. Click Run. A9155 begins the process of allocating intra-technology neighbours. A9155 first checks to see whether
the path loss matrices are valid before allocating neighbours. If the path loss matrices are not valid, A9155 recal-
culates them.
Once A9155 has finished calculating neighbours, the new neighbours are visible under Results. A9155 only
displays new neighbours. If no new neighbours have been found and if the Reset neighbours check box is
cleared, the Results table will be empty.
The Results table contains the following information.
- Transmitter: The name of the reference transmitter.

- Number: The total number of neighbours allocated to the reference transmitter.
- Maximum Number: The maximum number of neighbours that the reference transmitter can have.
- Neighbour: The transmitter that will be allocated as a neighbour to the reference transmitter.
- Importance (%): The importance as calculated with the options selected in step 6. Neighbours are ranked
from the most to the least important.
- Cause: The reason A9155 has allocated the possible neighbour transmitter, as identified in the Neighbour
column, to the reference transmitter, as identified in the Transmitter column.
- Co-site
- Adjacency
- Symmetry
- Coverage
- Existing
- Coverage: The amount of reference transmitters coverage area that the neighbour overlaps, in percentage
and in square kilometres.
- Adjacency: The area of the reference transmitter, in percentage and in square kilometres, where the neigh-
bour transmitter is best server or second best server.
8. Select the Commit check box for each neighbour you want to assign to a transmitter. You can use many of
A9155s table shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting. For information on working with data tables, see "Working
9. Click Commit. All the neighbours whose Commit check box is selected are assigned to the reference transmitters.
Neighbours are listed in the Intra-technology Neighbours tab of each transmitters Properties dialogue.
Notes
A forbidden neighbour will not be listed as a neighbour unless the neighbour relation already
exists and the Reset neighbours check box is cleared when you start the new allocation. In this
case, A9155 displays a warning in the Event Viewer indicating that the constraint on the for-
bidden neighbour will be ignored by the algorithm because the neighbour already exists.
When the options Force exceptional pairs and Force symmetry are selected, A9155 con-
siders the constraints between exceptional pairs in both directions in order to respect symmetry.
On the other hand, if the neighbour relation is forced in one direction and forbidden in the other
one, symmetry cannot be respected. In this case, A9155 displays a warning in the Event Viewer.
Area percentages are calculated with the resolution specified in the Predictions folder Proper-
ties dialogue.
You can save automatic neighbour allocation parameters in a user configuration. For information
on saving automatic neighbour allocation parameters in a user configuration, see "Exporting a
User Configuration" on page 71.
5.2.11.3.1 Allocating Neighbours to a New Base Station

When you create a new base station, you can let A9155 allocate neighbours to it automatically. A9155 considers the trans-
mitters of the new base station and other transmitters whose coverage area intersects with the coverage area of the trans-
mitters of the new base station.
To allocate neighbours to a new base station:
1. On the Data tab of the Explorer window, group the transmitters by site, as explained in "Grouping Data Objects"
on page 61.
2. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the new base station. The context menu appears.
3. Select Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dia-
logue appears.
4. Define the automatic neighbour allocation parameters as described in "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on
page 211.
5.2.11.3.2 Allocating Neighbours to a New Transmitter

When you add a new transmitter, you can let A9155 allocate neighbours to it automatically. A9155 considers the trans-
mitter and other transmitters whose coverage area intersects with the coverage area of the new transmitter.
To allocate neighbours to a new transmitter:
2. In the Transmitters folder, right-click the new transmitter. The context menu appears.
3. Select Allocate Neighbours from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue appears.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 213

A9155 User Manual
page 211.
5.2.11.4 Checking Automatic Allocation Results

You can verify the results of automatic neighbour allocation in the following ways:
"Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map" on page 214
"Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Transmitter" on page 214.
5.2.11.4.1 Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map

You can view neighbour relations directly on the map. A9155 can display them and indicate the direction of the neighbour
relation (in other words, A9155 indicates which is the reference transmitter and which is the neighbour) and whether the
neighbour relation is symmetric.
To display the neighbour relations of a transmitter on the map:
1. Click the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( ) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
2. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Visual Management dialogue appears.
3. Select which neighbour links to display:
- Outwards Non-Symmetric: Select the Outwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations
where the selected transmitter is the reference cell and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric.
- Inwards Non-Symmetric: Select the Inwards Non-Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations
where the selected transmitter is neighbour and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric.
- Symmetric: Select the Symmetric check box to display neighbour relations that are symmetric between the
selected transmitter and the neighbour.
4. Carrier: Because neighbour relations are between transmitters, you must select the carrier of the transmitters.
6. Select Neighbours from the menu. The neighbours of a transmitter will be displayed when you select a trans-
mitter.
7. Click a transmitter on the map to display the neighbour relations. A9155 displays the following information (see
Figure 5.31) on the selected carrier:
- The symmetric neighbour relations of the selected (reference) transmitter are indicated by a heavy black
line.
- The outward neighbour relations are indicated with a light black line with an arrow the colour of the selected
(reference) transmitter.
- The inward neighbour relations are indicated with a light black line with an arrow the colour of the transmitter
which has the selected (reference) transmitter as a neighbour.
Figure 5.31: Neighbours of Site 22
Note: You can use the same procedure to display either forced neighbours or forbidden neigh-
bours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( ) in the
Radio toolbar and selecting either Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
5.2.11.4.2 Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Transmitter

By combining the display characteristics of a coverage prediction with neighbour display options, A9155 can display the
coverage areas of a transmitters neighbours and colour them according to any neighbour characteristic available in the
Neighbours table.
214 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To display the coverage of each neighbour of a transmitter:

1. Create, calculate, and display a "Coverage by transmitter" prediction, with the Display Type set to "Discrete
Values" and the Field set to Transmitter (for information on creating a coverage by transmitter prediction, see
"Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 197).
4. Click the Browse button ( ) beside the Display Links list.

5. The Intra-technology Visual Management dialogue appears.
6. From the Display Type list, choose one of the following:
- Unique: Select "Unique" as the Display Type if you want A9155 to colour the coverage areas of a cells neigh-
bours with a unique colour.
- Discrete Values: Select "Discrete Values" as the Display Type, and then a value from the Field list, if you
want A9155 to colour the coverage areas of a cells neighbours according to a value from the Intra-tech-
nology Neighbours table.
- Value Intervals: Select "Value Intervals" to colour the coverage areas of a cells neighbours according the
value interval of the value selected from the Field list. For example, you can choose to display a cells neigh-
bours according to their rank, in terms of automatic allocation, or according to the importance, as determined
by the weighting factors.
7. From the Tip Text list, choose the neighbour characteristics to be displayed in the tooltip. This information will be
displayed on each coverage area.
8. Click the left side of the Neighbour graphic management icon ( ). The coverage display of neighbours is
now active.
9. Click a transmitter to display its neighbours with the parameters set in step 6.
10. In order to restore colours and cancel the neighbour display, click the left side of the Visual Management icon
( ) again.
Note: Only intra-technology neighbour coverage areas are displayed.
5.2.11.5 Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Transmitter

Although you can let A9155 allocate neighbours automatically, you can adjust the overall allocation of neighbours by allo-
cating or deleting neighbours per cell. You can allocate or delete neighbours directly on the map or using the Intra-Tech-
nology Neighbours tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue.
"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Intra-Technology Neighbours Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dia-
logue" on page 215
"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table" on page 216
"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours on the Map" on page 216.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Intra-Technology Neighbours Tab of the Transmitter
Properties Dialogue
To allocate or delete GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbours using the Intra-Technology Neighbours tab of the transmitters Prop-
erties dialogue:
1. On the map, right-click the transmitter whose neighbours you want to change. The context menu appears.
3. Click the Intra-Technology Neighbours tab.
4. If desired, you can enter the maximum number of neighbours in the Max Number of Neighbours text box.
5. To allocate a new neighbour:
a. Under List, select the transmitter from the list in the Neighbour column in the row marked with the New Row
icon ( ).
b. If you want the neighbour relation to be symmetric, select the check box in the Symmetric column.
c. Click elsewhere in the table to complete creating the new neighbour.
When the new neighbour is created, A9155 automatically calculates the distance between the reference cell
and the neighbour and displays it in the Distance column, sets the Type to "manual," and sets the Importance
to "1."
6. To delete a neighbour:
a. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the neighbour to select the entire row.
b. Press DEL to delete the neighbour.
7. Click OK.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 215

A9155 User Manual
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table
To allocate or delete GSM/GPRS/EDGE neighbours using the Neighbours table:

1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window.
2. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appear.
3. Select Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table appears.
Note: For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48.
4. To allocate a neighbour:
a. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), select a reference transmitter in the Transmitter column.
b. Select the neighbour in the Neighbour column.
c. Select the check box in the Symmetry column if you want the neighbour relation to be symmetric.
d. Click elsewhere in the table to create the new neighbour and add a new blank row to the table.
to "1."
5. To create a symmetric neighbour relation:

a. Right-click the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears.
b. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the transmitter
in the Neighbour column and the transmitter in the Transmitter column.
6. To make all neighbour relation symmetric, right-click the Neighbours table and select Symmetrise All Neigh-
bour Relations.
7. To delete a symmetric neighbour relation:
b. Select Delete Link and Symmetric Relation from the context menu. The symmetric neighbour relation be-
tween the transmitter in the Neighbour column and the transmitter in the Transmitter column is deleted.
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours on the Map
You can allocate or delete intra-technology neighbours directly on the map using the mouse.
To add or remove intra-technology neighbours using the mouse, you must activate the display of intra-technology neigh-
bours on the map as explained in "Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map" on page 214.
To add a symmetric neighbour relation:
1. Click the reference transmitter on the map. A9155 displays its neighbour relations.
2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. A9155 adds both transmit-
ters to the intra-technology neighbours list.
To remove a symmetric neighbour relation:
2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. A9155 removes both trans-
mitters from the intra-technology neighbours.
To add an outward neighbour relation:
2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. A9155 adds the reference
transmitter to the intra-technology neighbour list of the reference transmitter.
To remove an outward neighbour relation:
2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. A9155 removes the reference
transmitter from the intra-technology neighbours list of the reference transmitter.
To add an inward neighbour relation:
Click the reference transmitter on the map. A9155 displays its neighbour relations.
- If the two transmitters already have a symmetric neighbour relation, press CTRL and click the other trans-
mitter. A9155 converts the symmetric relation to an inward non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation.
216 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- If there is no existing neighbour relation between the two transmitters, first create a symmetric neighbour rela-
tion between the two transmitters, and then press CTRL and click the other transmitter. A9155 converts the
symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour relation.
To remove an inwards neighbour relation:
2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. A9155 removes the trans-
mitter from the intra-technology neighbours list of the reference transmitter.
Note: You can use the same procedure to add or delete either forced neighbours or forbidden
neighbours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Visual Management button ( ) in
the Radio toolbar and selecting either Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
5.2.11.6 Calculating the Importance of Existing Neighbours

After you have imported neighbours into the current A9155 document or manually defined neighbours, A9155 can calcu-
late the importance of each neighbour, i.e., the weight of each neighbour. This value is used to define a rank for different
neighbours in the AFP process.
A9155 calculates the importance for neighbours of active and filtered transmitters within the focus zone and in the selected
folder.
To calculate the importance of existing neighbours:
3. Select Neighbours > Calculate the Importance from the context menu. The Neighbour Importance Evaluation
dialogue appears.
4. On the Neighbours tab, you can set the following parameters:
- Importance: The importance is calculated based on three factors: the adjacency factor; the co-site factor; and
the coverage factor.
Select the factors to be considered:
- Take into account the adjacency factor: Select the Take into account the adjacency factor check box
to verify that neighbours are adjacent to their reference transmitters when calculating importance.
- Take into account the co-site factor: Select the Take into account the co-site factor check box to ver-
ify that neighbours are located on the same site as their reference cell when calculating importance.
- Click Weighting to set the relative importance of possible neighbours:
- Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of a neighbour satisfying the coverage
conditions.
- Adjacency Factor: If you have selected the Take into account the adjacency factor check box, set the
minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour transmitter being adjacent to the reference
transmitter.
- Co-site Factor: If you have selected the Take into account the co-site factor check box, set the mini-
mum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour transmitter being located on the same site as
- Coverage Conditions: Under Coverage Conditions, you can set the coverage conditions between neigh-
bours and their reference cells. Clicking Define opens the Coverage Conditions dialogue. In the Coverage
Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters:
- Min. BCCH Signal Level: Enter the minimum signal level which must be provided by the reference trans-
mitter and the neighbour.
- Handover Start: Enter the signal level which indicates the beginning of the handover margin. The hando-
ver start must be outside of the best server area of the reference transmitter (see Figure 5.30).
- Handover End: Enter the signal level which indicates the end of the handover margin. The handover end
must exceed the value entered for the Handover Start (see Figure 5.30). The higher the value entered
for the Handover End, the longer the list of candidate neighbours (see Figure 5.30). The area between
the Handover Start and the Handover End constitutes the area in which A9155 will search for neigh-
bours.
- Take into account: You can select whether A9155 defines the importance of neighbours by the size of the
handover zone shared with the reference transmitter or by the amount of circuit traffic. Select one of the fol-
lowing options:
- Covered Area: If you select Covered Area, A9155 defines importance according to the size of the hand-
over zone shared with the reference transmitter
- Covered Traffic: If you select Covered Traffic, A9155 defines importance according to the amount of
circuit traffic (in Erlangs).
A9155 indicates the number of neighbours to be calculated and displays the neighbours with their initial attributes
(importance and reason) in a table.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 217

A9155 User Manual
Notes: You can use many of A9155s table shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting. For information
on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48. In addition, by
clicking Filter, you can define advanced filtering conditions to restrict the neighbours to be
calculated.
5. Click Run. A9155 begins the process of calculating the importance of the neighbours displayed in the table. A9155
first checks to see whether the path loss matrices are valid before calculating the importance. If the path loss
matrices are not valid, A9155 recalculates them.
Once A9155 has finished calculating importance, the results are displayed in the table.
The table contains the following information.

- Transmitter: The name of the reference transmitter.
- Neighbour: The neighbour of the reference transmitter.
- Importance (%): The importance as calculated with the options selected in step 4.
- Cause: The reason A9155 has allocated value in the Importance column.
- Co-site
- Adjacency
- Symmetry
- Coverage
- Coverage: The amount of reference transmitters coverage area that the neighbour overlaps, in percentage
and in square kilometres.
- Adjacency: The area of the reference transmitter, in percentage and in square kilometres, where the neigh-
bour transmitter is best server or second best server.
The importance values and the reasons for allocation are automatically committed in the Neighbours table when
5.2.11.7 Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan

You can perform an audit of the current neighbour allocation plan. When you perform an audit of the current neighbour
allocation plan, A9155 lists the results in a text file. You can define what information A9155 provides in the audit.
To perform an audit of the neighbour allocation plan:
3. Select Neighbours > Audit from the context menu. The Neighbour Audit dialogue appears.
4. Define the parameters of the audit:
- Average No. of Neighbours: Select whether you want the audit to include the average number of neighbours
per transmitter.
- Empty Lists: Select whether you want the audit to include which transmitters have no neighbours (in other
words, which transmitters have an empty neighbour list).
- Full Lists: Select whether you want the audit to include which transmitters having the maximum number of
neighbours allowed (in other words, which transmitters have a full neighbour list). You can enter a Default
Max Number.
- Lists > Max Number: Select whether you want the audit to include which transmitters having more than the
defined maximum number of neighbours allowed. You can enter a Default Max Number.
- Missing Co-sites: Select whether you want the audit to include which transmitters have no co-site neigh-
bours.
- Missing Symmetrics: Select whether you want the audit to include which transmitters have non-symmetric
neighbour relations.
- Exceptional Pairs: Select whether you want the audit to include which transmitters have forced neighbours
or forbidden neighbours.
5. Click OK to perform the audit. A9155 displays the results of the audit in a new text file:
- Average Number of Neighbours: X; where, X is the average number of neighbours (integer) per transmitter
for the plan audited.
- Empty Lists: x/X; x number of transmitters out of a total of X having no neighbours (or empty neighbours list)
Syntax: |TRANSMITTER|
- Full Lists (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of transmitters out of a total of X having Y number of
neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists.
Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER|
- Lists > Max Number (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of transmitters out of a total of X having more
than Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists.
Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER|
Note: If the field Maximum number of neighbours in the Transmitters table is empty, the Full
Lists check and the Lists > Max Number check use the Default Max. Number value
defined in the audit dialogue.
218 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Missing Co-Sites: X; total number of missing co-site neighbours in the audited neighbour plan.
Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NEIGHBOUR|
- Non Symmetric Links: X; total number of non-symmetric neighbour links in the audited neighbour plan.
Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE| |REASON|
- Missing Forced: X; total number of forced neighbours missing in the audited neighbour plan.
Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NEIGHBOUR|
- Existing Forbidden: X; total number of forbidden neighbours existing in the audited neighbour plan.
Syntax: |TRANSMITTER| |NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE| |REASON|
5.2.11.8 Exporting Neighbours

The neighbour data of an A9155 document is stored in a series of tables. You can export the neighbour data to use it in
another application or in another A9155 document.
To export neighbour data:
3. Select Neighbours and then select the neighbour table containing the data you want to export from the context
menu:
- Intra-Technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology neighbours in the current
A9155 document.
- Inter-Technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the inter-technology neighbours in the current
A9155 document.
- Intra-technology Exceptional Pairs: This table contains the data for the intra-technology exceptional pairs
(forced and forbidden) in the current A9155 document.
- Inter-technology Exceptional Pairs: This table contains the data for the inter-technology exceptional pairs
4. When the selected neighbours table opens, you can export the content as described in "Exporting Tables to
External Files" on page 55.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 219

A9155 User Manual
5.3 Studying Network Capacity

In A9155, you can study the network capacity of a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network by creating a traffic capture. A traffic
capture is based on a macroscopic description of traffic as defined by one or more traffic maps. In the traffic capture, the
total traffic is broken down per transmitter, respecting the compatibility between the traffic and the transmitter, for example,
if two transmitters cover the same traffic:
the traffic can be treated as a traffic demand for each, or
the traffic can be treated as a traffic demand for only one of the two, taking into consideration the maximum speed
defined per layer (traffic with a mobility type with a high speed will not be allocated to a micro layer), frequency
bands, etc.
The results of the traffic capture is the demand per transmitter, broken down by subcell, service, terminal, and mobility, in
terms of kbps for packet-switched traffic and Erlangs for circuit switched traffic. This breakdown is made on the service
zones defined for each subcell, as defined by the parameters set on the Condition tab for the traffic capture.
"Defining Multi-service Traffic Data" on page 220
"Creating a Traffic Map" on page 220
"Calculating and Displaying a Traffic Capture" on page 227
"Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 230.
5.3.1 Defining Multi-service Traffic Data

The first step in studying network capacity is defining how the network is used. In A9155, this is accomplished by creating
all of the parameters of network use, in terms of services, users, and equipment used.
The following services and users are modelled in A9155 in order to create simulations:
Services: Services are the various services, such as voice, mobile internet access, etc., available to subscribers.
These services can be either circuit-switched or packet-switched. For each service, quality targets, such as quality
of service in Erlangs for circuit-switched services, are defined for network dimensioning. For information on mod-
elling end-user services, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services" on page 302.
Mobility types: In GSM/GPRS/EDGE, information about receiver mobility is important to efficiently manage con-
nections: a mobile used by a driver moving quickly or a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same
HCS layer. For information on creating a mobility type, see "Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility
Type" on page 303.
Terminals: In GSM/GPRS/EDGE, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a
mobile phone, a PDA, or a cars on-board navigation device. It is defined to ensure compliancy between trans-
mitter equipment and supported frequency bands and GPRS/EDGE parameters. For information on creating a ter-
minal, see "Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminal" on page 303.
5.3.2 Creating a Traffic Map

The following sections describe the different types of traffic maps available in A9155 and how to create, import, and use
them. The different types of traffic data sources are:
The OMC (Operation and Maintenance Centre)
Marketing statistics
Population statistics
2G network traffic statistics
A9155 provides four types of traffic maps for GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects. These maps can be used for the different types
of traffic data sources as follows:
Live traffic data from the OMC: Traffic maps per transmitter and per service, where traffic is spread over the best
server coverage area of each transmitter and each coverage area is assigned either in Erlangs for circuit-switched
services and kBps for packet-switched services. For more information, see "Live Traffic Data From the OMC" on
page 220 and "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Live Data" on page 221.
Marketing-based traffic data: Traffic vector maps based on user profiles, where each vector (polygon or line)
carries densities of user profiles and mobility types, and traffic raster maps based on environments, where each
pixel has an environment class assigned. For more information, see "Marketing-based Traffic Data" on page 221,
"Importing a User Profile Based Traffic Map" on page 223, and "Importing an Environment Class Based Traffic
Map" on page 224.
Population-based traffic data: Traffic raster maps based on user densities, where each pixel has an actual user
density assigned. For more information, see "Population-based Traffic Data" on page 226 and "Importing a Traffic
Density Map" on page 226.
2G network statistics: Cumulated traffic maps. For more information, see "Converting 2G Network Traffic" on
page 226 and "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 226.
5.3.2.1 Live Traffic Data From the OMC

The OMC (Operations and Maintenance Centre) collects data from all the subcells in a network. This includes, for exam-
ple, throughput and Erlangs in each subcell and the traffic characteristics related to different services. You can use this
data to create traffic maps containing the number of active users in each subcell or the data transfer characteristics of all
the services in each subcell.
220 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

The section "Creating a Traffic Map Based on Live Data" on page 221 explains how to use traffic data from the OMC in
A9155 to model traffic.
5.3.2.1.1 Creating a Traffic Map Based on Live Data

You can input the total throughput demand or the total number of users for each sector in this type of traffic map. A cover-
age prediction by transmitter is required to create this traffic map. If you do not already have a coverage prediction by trans-
mitter in your document, you must create and calculate it. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by
Transmitter" on page 197.
To create a traffic map based on live data:
2. Right-click the Traffic folder. The context menu appears.
3. Select New Map from the context menu. The New Traffic Map dialogue appears.
4. Select Map based on Transmitters and Services.
5. Click the Create Map button. The Traffic per Transmitter dialogue appears with a table for the amount of traffic
(in Erlangs) for each circuit-switched service and throughputs for each packet-switched service by transmitter.
Note: You can also import a traffic map from a file by clicking the Import a File button. You can
import AGD (A9155 Geographic Data) format files that you have exported from an other
A9155 document.
6. Select a coverage prediction by transmitter from the list of available coverage predictions by transmitter.
7. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), select the name of the transmitter from the TX_ID list.
8. For the transmitter in the TX_ID column, enter the throughput for each service in the appropriate column:
- For packet services, enter the throughput in kbps.
- For circuit services (voice), enter value in Erlangs.
Note: You can also import a text file containing the data by clicking the Actions button and select-
ing Import Table from the menu. For more information on importing table data, see "Import-
ing Tables from External Files" on page 56.
9. Click OK. The Traffic Map per Transmitter Properties dialogue appears.
10. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentages must
equal 100.
11. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentages must
equal 100.
12. Under Clutter Distribution, for each clutter class, enter a weight to spread the traffic over the clutter classes.
13. Click OK. A9155 creates the traffic map in the Traffic folder.
You can update the information, throughput demands and the number of users, on the map afterwards. You can update
live traffic per sector maps if you add or remove a base station or if you modify the clutter classes or their distribution. You
must first recalculate the coverage prediction by transmitter. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by
Transmitter" on page 197. Once you have recalculated the coverage prediction, you can update the traffic map.
To update the traffic map:
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Traffic folder.
3. Right-click the traffic map based on live data that you want to update. The context menu appears.
4. Select Update from the context menu. The Traffic per Transmitter dialogue appears.
Select the updated coverage prediction by transmitter and define traffic values for the new transmitter(s) listed at
the bottom of the table. Deleted or deactivated transmitters are automatically removed from the table.
5. Click OK. The Traffic Map per Transmitter Properties dialogue appears.
6. Click OK. The traffic map is updated on the basis of the selected coverage prediction by transmitter.
5.3.2.2 Marketing-based Traffic Data

The marketing department can provide information which can be used to create traffic maps. This information describes
the behaviour of different types of users. In other words, it describes which type of user accesses which services and for
how long. There may also be information about the type of terminal devices they use to access different services.
In A9155, this type of data can be used to create traffic maps based on user profiles and environments.
A user profile models the behaviour of different subscriber categories. Each user profile is defined by a list of services
which are in turn defined by the terminal used, the calls per hour, and duration (for circuit-switched calls) or downlink
volume (for packet-switched calls).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 221

A9155 User Manual
Environment classes are used to describe the distribution of subscribers on a map. An environment class describes its
environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (i.e., the number of
subscribers with the same profile per km).
The sections "Importing a User Profile Based Traffic Map" on page 223 and "Importing an Environment Class Based Traf-
fic Map" on page 224 describe how to use traffic data from the marketing department in A9155 to model traffic.
"Modelling User Profiles" on page 222
"Modelling Environments" on page 222.
Modelling User Profiles
You can model variations in user behaviour by creating different profiles for different times of the day or for different circum-
stances. For example, a user may be considered a business user during the day, with video conferencing and voice, but
no web browsing. In the evening the same user might not use video conferencing, but might use multi-media services and
web browsing.
To create a user profile:
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the User Profiles folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select New from the context menu. The User Profiles New Element Properties dialogue appears.
Note: You can modify the properties of an existing user profile by right-clicking the user profile in
the User Profiles folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can modify the following parameters:

- Service: Select a service from the list. For information on services, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Serv-
ices" on page 302.
- Terminal: Select a terminal from the list. For information on terminals, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Ter-
minals" on page 303.
- Calls/Hour: For circuit-switched services, enter the average number of calls per hour for the service. The calls
per hour is used to calculate the activity probability. For circuit-switched services, one call lasting 1000 sec-
onds presents the same activity probability as two calls lasting 500 seconds each.
For packet-switched services, the Calls/Hour value is defined as the number of sessions per hour. A session
is like a call in that it is defined as the period of time between when a user starts using a service and when he
stops using a service. In packet-switched services, however, he may not use the service continually. For ex-
ample, with a web-browsing service, a session starts when the user opens his browsing application and ends
when he quits the browsing application. Between these two events, the user may be downloading web pages
and other times he may not be using the application, or he may be browsing local files, but the session is still
considered as open. A session, therefore, is defined by the volume transferred in the uplink and downlink and
not by the time.
Note: In order for all the services defined for a user profile to be taken into account during traffic
scenario elaboration, the sum of activity probabilities must be lower than 1.
- Duration: For circuit-switched services, enter the average duration of a call in seconds. For packet-switched
services, this field is left blank.
- DL Volume: For packet-switched services, enter the average downlink volume per session in kilobytes.
Modelling Environments
An environment class describes its environment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a
given density (i.e., the number of subscribers with the same profile per km). To get an appropriate user distribution, you
can assign a weight to each clutter class for each environment class.
To create or modify a GSM/GPRS/EGPRS environment:
3. Right-click the Environments folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select New from the context menu. The Environments New Element Properties dialogue appears.
Note: You can modify the properties of an existing environment by right-clicking the environment
in the Environments folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the General tab.

6. Enter a Name for the new GSM/GPRS/EGPRS environment.
222 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

7. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), set the following parameters for each user profile/mobility com-
bination that this GSM/GPRS/EDGE environment will describe:
- User: Select a user profile.
- Mobility: Select a mobility type.
- Density (Subscribers/km2): Enter a density in terms of subscribers per square kilometre for the combination
of user profile and mobility type.
8. Click the Clutter Weighting tab.
9. For each clutter class, enter a weight that will be used to calculate a user distribution.
The user distribution is calculated using the following equation:
Wk Sk
N k = N Area --------------------------

Wi Si
i
where:
Nk = Number of users in the clutter k

N Area = Number of users in the zone Area
Wk = Weight of clutter k
Sk = Surface area of clutter k (in square km)
For example: An area of 10 km with a subscriber density of 100/km. Therefore, in this area, there are 1000
subscribers. The area is covered by two clutter classes: Open and Building. The clutter weighting for Open is "1"
and for Building is "4." Given the respective weights of each clutter class, 200 subscribers are in the Open clutter
class and 800 in the Building clutter class.
5.3.2.2.1 Importing a User Profile Based Traffic Map

User profile based traffic maps are composed of vectors (lines with a number of userskm or polygons with a number of
userskm) with a user profile, mobility type, and traffic density assigned to each vector.
To create a user profile based traffic map:
4. Select Map based on User Profiles.
5. Click the Import a File button. The Open dialogue appears.
Note: You can also create a traffic map manually in A9155 by clicking the Create Map button in
the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating an Environment Class Based
Traffic Map" on page 225.
6. Select the file to import.

7. Click Open. The File Import dialogue appears.
8. Select Traffic from the Data Type list.
9. Click Import. A9155 imports the traffic map. The traffic maps Properties dialogue appears.
10. Select the Traffic tab (see Figure 5.32). Under Traffic Fields, you can specify the user profiles to be considered,
their mobility type (kmh), and their density. If the file you are importing has this data, you can define the traffic
characteristics by identifying the corresponding fields in the file. If the file you are importing does not have data
describing the user profile, mobility, or density, you can assign values. When you assign values, they apply to the
entire map.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 223

A9155 User Manual
Figure 5.32: Traffic map Properties dialogue - Traffic tab
Define each of the following:
- User Profile: If you want to import user profile information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and
select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a user profile from the GSM/GPRS/
EGPRS Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the user profile in the
Choice column.
- Mobility: If you want to import mobility information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select
the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a mobility type from the GSM/GPRS/EGPRS
Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the mobility type in the Choice
column.
- Density: If you want to import density information from the file, under Defined, select "By field" and select the
source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a density, under Defined, select "By value" and
enter a density in the Choice column in terms of subscribers per square kilometre for the combination of user
profile and mobility type.
Important: When you import user profile or mobility information from the file, the values in the file must
be exactly the same as the corresponding names in the GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Parameters
folder of the Data tab. If the imported user profile or mobility does not match, A9155 will dis-
play a warning.
11. Under Clutter Distribution, enter a weight for each class that will be used to calculate a user distribution.
Wk Sk
N k = N Area --------------------------

Wi Si
i
where:

12. Click OK to finish importing the traffic map.
5.3.2.2.2 Importing an Environment Class Based Traffic Map

Environment classes describe the distribution of user profiles.
To import a traffic map based on environment classes:
4. Select Map based on Environments.
224 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


7. Click Open. A9155 imports the traffic map. The traffic maps Properties dialogue appears.
8. Select the Description tab.
In the imported map, each type of region is defined by a number. A9155 reads these numbers and lists them in
the Code column.
9. For each Code, select the environment it corresponds to from the Name column.
The environments available are those available in the Environments folder, under GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Param-
eters on the Data tab of the Explorer window. For more information, see "Modelling Environments" on page 222.
10. Select the Display tab. For information on changing the display parameters, see "Display Properties of Objects"
on page 33.
5.3.2.2.3 Creating an Environment Class Based Traffic Map

A9155 enables you to create an environment class based traffic map by drawing it in the map window.
To draw a traffic map:
4. Select Map based on environments (raster) as the type of map you want to create.
5. Click Create Map. The Environment Map Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 5.33).
Draw Map Delete Map
Figure 5.33: Environment Map Editor toolbar

6. Select the environment class from the list of available environment classes.
7. Click the Draw Polygon button ( ) to draw the polygon on the map for the selected environment class.
8. Click the Delete Polygon button ( ) and click the polygon to delete the environment class polygon on the map.
9. Click the Close button to close the Environment Map Editor toolbar and end editing.
5.3.2.2.4 Displaying Statistics on an Environment Class Based Traffic Map

You can display the statistics of an environment class-based traffic map. A9155 provides absolute (surface area) and rela-
tive (percentage of the surface) statistics on the focus zone for each environment class. If you do not have a focus zone
defined, statistics are determined for the computation zone.
To display traffic statistics of an environment class based traffic map:
3. Right-click the environment class based traffic map whose statistics you want to display. The context menu
appears.
4. Select Statistics from the context menu. The Statistics window appears.
The Statistics window lists the surface (Si in km) and the percentage of surface (% of i) for each environment
Si
class "i" within the focus zone. The percentage of surface is given by: % of i = -------------- 100
Sk
k
You can print the statistics by clicking the Print button.
5. Click Close.
If a clutter classes map is available in the document, traffic statistics provided for each environment class are listed per
clutter class.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 225

A9155 User Manual
5.3.2.3 Population-based Traffic Data

Population-based traffic data can be based on population statistics and user densities can be calculated from the density
of inhabitants. In the traffic maps based on population statistics, you can enter the number of active or potential users per
unit surface, i.e., the density of users.
5.3.2.3.1 Importing a Traffic Density Map

The traffic density map defines the density of users per pixel. For a traffic density of X users per km, A9155 will distribute
x users per pixel during the simulations, where x depends on the size of the pixels. These x users will have a terminal, a
mobility type, and a service.
You can create a number of traffic density maps for different combinations of terminals, mobility types, and services. You
can add vector layers to the map and draw regions with different traffic densities.
To create a traffic density map:
4. Select Map Based on Densities.

7. Click Open.
8. Click Import. A9155 imports the traffic map. The traffic maps Properties dialogue appears.
9. Select the Traffic tab.
equal 100.
equal 100.
12. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. The total percentages must equal
100.
5.3.2.4 Converting 2G Network Traffic

A9155 can cumulate the traffic of the traffic maps that you select and export it to a file. The information exported is the
number of active users per km for a particular service of a particular type, i.e., data or voice. This allows you to export
your 2G network packet and circuit service traffic, and then import these maps as traffic density maps into your GSM/
GPRS/EGPRS document. These maps can then be used in traffic captures like any other type of map.
For more information on how to export cumulated traffic, see "Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 226, and for informa-
tion on importing traffic density maps, see "Importing a Traffic Density Map" on page 226.
To import a 2G traffic map into a GSM/GPRS/EGPRS document:
1. Create a live data traffic map in your 2G document for each type of service, i.e., one map for packet-switched and
one for circuit-switched services. For more information on creating live data traffic maps, see "Creating a Traffic
Map Based on Live Data" on page 221.
2. Export the cumulated traffic of the maps created in step 1. For information on exporting cumulated traffic, see
"Exporting Cumulated Traffic" on page 226.
3. Import the traffic exported in step 2 to your GSM/GPRS/EGPRS document as a traffic density map. For more infor-
mation on importing traffic density maps, see "Importing a Traffic Density Map" on page 226.
5.3.2.5 Exporting Cumulated Traffic

A9155 allows you to export the cumulated traffic of selected traffic maps in the form of traffic density maps. During export,
A9155 converts any map based on throughput to traffic density. The cumulated traffic is exported in 32-bit BIL, ArcView
Grid, or Vertical Mapper format. The exported traffic map can then be imported as a traffic density map and used for traffic
analysis. For more information on traffic analysis, see "Calculating and Displaying a Traffic Capture" on page 227.
To export the cumulated traffic:
3. Select Export Cumulated Traffic from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears.
226 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

4. Enter a file name and select the file format.

5. Click Save. The Export dialogue appears.
6. Under Region, select the area to export:
- The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the cumulated traffic over the entire project.
- The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the cumulated traffic contained by a rectangle
encompassing the computation zone.
7. Under Traffic, define the data to be exported in the cumulated traffic:
- Terminal: Select the type of terminal traffic that will be exported or select "All" to export traffic using any ter-
minal.
- Service: Select the service traffic that will be exported.
- Mobility: Select the mobility type that will be exported or select "All" to export all mobility types.
8. In the Select Traffic Maps to Be Used list, select the check box of each traffic map you want to include in the
cumulated traffic.
Important: You must enter a resolution before exporting. If you do not enter a resolution, it remains at
"0" and no data will be exported.
10. Click OK. The defined data is extracted from the selected traffic maps and cumulated in the exported file.
5.3.3 Calculating and Displaying a Traffic Capture

In A9155, you can create a traffic capture from an existing traffic map to analyse traffic at the transmitter level. When you
calculate a traffic capture, the traffic from the selected maps is distributed to all transmitters according to the criteria defined
for each transmitter, as well as the GSM/GPRS/EGPRS parameters: services, mobility types, terminals, and user profiles.
For example, an EGPRS-enabled transmitter will be allocated the data user traffic whereas a transmitter not capable of
EGPRS will only carry GSM voice traffic.
Similarly, a user using a GSM900-band mobile phone will not be allocated to a transmitter that only functions on the
DCS1800 band.
By creating different traffic captures using different criteria to represent different conditions, you can analyse network traffic
under the various situations.
Traffic captures are used to dimension a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network and to calculate KPI. One of the traffic captures is
the default traffic capture and is used to calculate interference matrices and to allocate neighbours according to overlap-
ping traffic.
"Prerequisites for a Traffic Capture" on page 227
"Creating a Traffic Capture" on page 227
"GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture Results" on page 228
"Estimating a Traffic Increase" on page 229
"Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture" on page 229.
5.3.3.1 Prerequisites for a Traffic Capture

To successfully create a traffic capture, you must ensure that you have the following information:
A valid traffic map (see "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 220)
Correct GPRS-related parameters (see "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 174), including:
- GPRS/EGPRS capacity selected
- GPRS/EGPRS-capable equipment selected
- Correct packet traffic-related parameters
Target rate for traffic overflow defined for subcells (see "Subcell Definition" on page 170)
Correctly defined service zones (see "Creating a Traffic Capture" on page 227)
Correctly defined HCS layers (see "Setting HCS Layers" on page 289).
5.3.3.2 Creating a Traffic Capture

To create a traffic capture:
2. Right-click the Traffic Analysis folder. The context menu appears.
3. Select New from the context menu. A traffic capture Properties dialogue appears.
4. Click the General tab. You can change the following:
- Name: By default, A9155 names traffic captures sequentially. You can change the assigned name.
- Filter: You can select the transmitters to be considered in the traffic capture by clicking the Filter button. For
information on using the Filter dialogue, see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 67.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 227

A9155 User Manual
5. Click the Source Traffic tab. You can enter the following:
- Global Scaling Factor: If desired, enter a scaling factor to increase user density.
The global scaling factor enables you to increase user density without changing traffic parameters or traffic
maps. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscrib-
ers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector). For in-
formation on using the global scaling factor, see "Estimating a Traffic Increase" on page 229.
- Select Traffic Maps to Be Used: Select the traffic maps you want to use for the traffic capture. You must
select at least one traffic map.
You can select traffic maps of any type. However, if you have several different types of traffic maps and want
to make a traffic capture on a specific type of traffic map, you must ensure that you select only traffic maps of
the same type. For information on the types of traffic maps, see "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 220.
6. Click the Condition tab. The parameters on the Condition tab define how the service zone for each transmitter and
the number of time slots for circuit and packet services will be calculated.
7. Under Coverage Conditions, set the following parameters to define how the service area of each transmitter will
be calculated:
- Under Server, the option "Best Signal Level per HCS Layer" is selected.
- Enter a margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "5 dB."
ability. Shadowing margins (depending on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the model standard
deviation per clutter class) are applied to the values for C.
class.
Note: If shadowing is taken into account, the CI standard deviation per clutter class is used to
estimate the shadowing losses on the calculated CI values.
8. Under GPRS/EGPRS, you can set the parameters to define how the number of time slots for circuit and packet
services will be calculated. Select one of the following to define how the calculations in the traffic capture are going
to be made:
- Select Calculations Based on C if you want to base the traffic capture on CN. Continue to step 15.
- Select Calculations Based on CI and continue with the following step.
9. Select the DTX taken into account check box and enter the percentage of time during which a user is talking in
the Voice Activity Factor text box, if you want discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it taken
into account.
10. Select the Co-Channel check box if you want co-channel interference to be taken into consideration.
11. Select the Adjacent Channels check box if you want interference caused by adjacent channels to be taken into
consideration. The adjacent channel effect on the concerned victim channel, i.e., the interference, is decreased
by the adjacent channel protection level.
12. Select the Traffic Load that will be used to calculate interference:
- Max.: The maximum traffic load.
- Average: The subcell traffic load as defined or as calculated during dimensioning.
13. Select the Ideal Link Adaptation check box if you want the coding scheme that offers the highest throughput for
a given C or CI to be selected. Otherwise, A9155 will choose the coding scheme by considering only the coding
scheme admission threshold in terms of C and/or CI.
14. Select the Thermal Noise Taken into Account check box if you want A9155 to consider thermal noise.
15. Click Calculate.
After the traffic capture has been completed, two new tabs appear on the traffic capture Properties dialogue with
the results. For a detailed explanation of the results, see "GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture Results" on
page 228.
5.3.3.3 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture Results

After you have calculated a GSM/GPRS/EDGE traffic capture, as described in "Creating a Traffic Capture" on page 227,
two new tabs, Results per Transmitter and Results per Subcell, appear on the traffic capture Properties dialogue:
Results per Transmitter: The results on the Results per Transmitter tab give the traffic allocated to each trans-
mitter:
- Circuit Traffic Demand (Erlangs): The total circuit-switched traffic demand in Erlangs for that transmitter.
This is calculated by summing the circuit-switched traffic in Erlangs per pixel in the transmitter coverage area.
- Average Demand in Circuit Timeslots: The average demand on circuit timeslots takes into consideration
the effect of half-rate circuit-switched traffic carried by the transmitter, i.e., it takes into consideration the fact
that 2 half-rate users are equivalent to 1 full-rate user in terms of Erlangs of traffic.
- Packet Traffic Demand (kbps): The total traffic demand in kilobits per second generated by the packet-
switched users within the coverage area of the transmitter.
- Average Demand in Packet Timeslots: The number of timeslots needed to meet the packet traffic demand
depends on the maximum throughput that a packet timeslot can support.
228 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Average Packet Timeslot Capacity (kbps): The average packet timeslot capacity is calculated according to
the propagation conditions on each pixel of the transmitter coverage area. When calculating the traffic capture,
you can choose to base this on carrier power or on interference (C or CI).
Results per Subcell: The results on the Results per Subcell tab give the traffic per subcell. For each subcell
(except for the BCCH, which captures the same traffic as the corresponding TCH), A9155 indicates the types of
traffic assigned by service, mobility, and terminal and displays:
- Packet Traffic Demand (kbps): The total traffic demand in kilobits per second generated by the packet-
switched users within the coverage area of the transmitter.
- Circuit Traffic Demand (Erlangs): The total circuit-switched traffic demand in Erlangs. In case of circuit
switched services, it depends whether the subcell supports half-rate traffic.
If the percentage of half-rate traffic of the subcell is 0, the average demand in circuit timeslots will be the same
as the traffic demand in Erlangs and the number of used timeslots will be the same as the traffic demand. If
there is a certain percentage of half-rate traffic, the number of used timeslots will depend on the percentage
of traffic using half-rate connections.
- Traffic Average Demand in Timeslots: The average number of timeslots needed to match the demand in
circuit-switched and packet-switched traffic.
The demand in packet timeslots depends on the maximum throughput that a timeslot can support. Therefore,
it depends on the average timeslot capacity within the transmitter coverage area, which in turn depends on
the propagation conditions.
For more information on how the results are calculated and on the formulas used, see the Technical Reference Guide.
5.3.3.4 Estimating a Traffic Increase

When you create a traffic capture, you are basing it on a set of traffic conditions that represent the situation you are creating
the network for. However, traffic can, and in fact most likely will, increase. You can test the performance of the network
against an increased traffic load without changing traffic parameters or maps by using the global scaling factor. For exam-
ple, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment and
user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
To change the global scaling factor:
1. Create a traffic capture by:
- Creating a new traffic capture as explained in "Creating a Traffic Capture" on page 227.
- Modify an existing traffic capture by right-clicking a traffic capture in the Traffic Analysis folder of the Data
tab of the Explorer window and selecting Properties from the context menu.
2. Click the Source Traffic tab of the Properties dialogue.
3. Enter a Global Scaling Factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the
initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps
per sector).
5.3.3.5 Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture

A9155 offers several options to modify a traffic capture once you have created it as explained in "Creating a Traffic
Capture" on page 227. As well, you can use a traffic capture for one of several calculations. You can access these options
using the traffic captures context menu:
To access the options for a traffic capture:
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Traffic Analysis folder.
3. Right-click the traffic capture. The context menu appears.
4. Select one of the following from the context menu:
- Properties: Select Properties to open the traffic captures Properties dialogue. You can review the results
of the traffic capture, or change the parameters and recalculate the traffic capture. For a description of the
results, see "GSM/GPRS/EDGE Traffic Capture Results" on page 228. For information on the parameters
available, see "Creating a Traffic Capture" on page 227.
- Default: Select Default to set the current traffic capture as the default traffic capture. The default traffic cap-
ture ( ) is the one used to calculate coverage prediction reports and to allocate neighbours.
- Calculate: Select Calculate to calculate a new traffic capture (i.e., one that you created but closed without
calculating) or to recalculate an existing traffic capture to which you have made changes.
- Dimensioning: Select Dimensioning to dimension the current GSM/GPRS/EDGE network. For more infor-
mation on dimensioning, see "Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 230.
- KPI Calculation: Select KPI Calculation to calculate the key performance indicators for the current GSM/
GPRS/EDGE network. For more information on KPI calculation, see "Calculating Key Performance Indicators
of a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 274.
- Delete: Select Delete to delete the current traffic capture.
Caution: The traffic capture is deleted immediately; there is no opportunity to confirm or cancel the
action.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 229

A9155 User Manual
- Rename: Select Rename to rename the current traffic capture.
5.3.4 Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network

The dimensioning process allows you to calculate the number of TRXs required to meet the traffic needs of a GSM/GPRS/
EDGE network. Dimensioning is carried out on a traffic capture based on one or more traffic maps and using the param-
eters defined in the selected dimensioning model.
During dimensioning, A9155 evaluates a number of TRXs so as to have enough circuit timeslots (shared and dedicated)
to match the circuit traffic demand with the quality requirements defined in circuit-switched services (Erlang B or C). Then,
A9155 calculates how many TRXs must be added to meet packet traffic demand, using the quality charts defined in the
dimensioning model.
"Defining a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Dimensioning Model" on page 230
"Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 231.
5.3.4.1 Defining a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Dimensioning Model

The dimensioning model is the definition of the parameters that will be used during the dimensioning process. You can
modify an existing dimensioning model or you can create a new dimensioning model.
To create or modify a dimensioning model:
1. If you are creating a new dimensioning model:
b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Parameters folder.
c. Right-click the Dimensioning Models folder. The context menu appears.
d. Select New from the context menu. The Dimensioning Models New Element Properties dialogue appears
(see Figure 5.2 on page 167).
2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing dimensioning model:
b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EGPRS Parameters folder.
c. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Dimensioning Models folder.
d. Right-click the dimensioning model you want to modify. The context menu appears.
e. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears.
3. Click the General tab. You can set the following parameters:
- Name: A9155 assigns a Name to the dimensioning model. You can change the default name, if desired.
- Max. Number of TRXs per Transmitter: Enter the maximum number of TRXs that a transmitter can have.
During dimensioning, this value is used for transmitters for which this value is not defined on the TRXs tab of
the Properties dialogue (see "Subcell Definition" on page 170).
Under Circuit:
- Queuing Model: Enter the queuing model for GSM voice calls (Erlang B or Erlang C).
Under Packet:
- Min. Number of Packet-Dedicated Timeslots per Transmitter: Enter the minimum number of dedicated
packet-switched timeslots that must be reserved for each transmitter.
- Max. Number of TRXs to Add for Packet Services: Enter the maximum number of TRXs that can be added
for the subcell to satisfy the demand for packet-switched services after A9155 has dimensioned the circuit-
switched services.
- KPIs to Take into Account: Select the key performance indicators you want taken into account during dimen-
sioning. The values of the key performance indicators are defined by the quality graphs on the Quality Graphs
tab of the dimensioning model Properties dialogue.
- Min. Throughput: Select the Min. Throughput check box if you want to take minimum required through-
put into account when performing dimensioning.
From the point of view of a GPRS/EDGE user, throughput is the average maximum throughput experi-
enced by the mobile terminal during a data call. If there is more than one user multiplexed on the same
timeslot, which occurs when the system accommodates many users, each multiplexed user will experi-
ence a reduction in throughput. This reduction in throughput is described by the reduction factor defined
in the reduction factor graph. A reduction factor of 1, or almost 1, means that each user has the maximum
throughput that a timeslot can offer in a given environment (the maximum throughput per timeslot, in turn,
depends on the carrier power and/or CI ratio at a given location). As the system load increases, the re-
duction factor starts decreasing, corresponding to the decrease in throughput per user.
- Max. Blocking Rate: Select the Max. Blocking Rate check box if you want to take blocking probability
into account when performing dimensioning.
The blocking probability and the delay in the EGPRS system are closely related. A user starts to experi-
ence more delay in service when the system is near saturation and the incoming packets are placed in a
230 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

waiting queue as there are no resources available for immediate transfer. This buffering of packets is re-
lated to the load of the system. The blocking probability is the probability that an incoming packet be
placed in a queue. The delay is the average delay the packet will undergo due to blocking as it waits its
turn to be transmitted when resources are available.
Note: In GPRS and EDGE, the term "system load" refers to the ratio of the number of used packet
timeslots to the number of packet switching (shared and dedicated) timeslots available in
the system. It has roughly the same meaning as "traffic load" in GSM.
- Max. Delay: Select the Max. Delay check box if you want to take delay into account when performing
dimensioning.
The delay is the average delay the packet will undergo due to blocking as it waits its turn to be transmitted
when resources are available.
The delay can be restricted to an allowed maximum in the properties of the service.
Note: If the dimensioning model takes into account all three KPIs, the following conditions are sat-
isfied when the number of TRXs to add for packet service is calculated:
- The throughput must be greater than the minimum throughput even if a reduction factor
is applied to the throughput.
- The delay and the blocking rate must be lower than the maximum delay and maximum
blocking rate, respectively.
4. Click the Quality Charts tab. The Quality Charts tab displays the throughput reduction factor, delay, and blocking
probability graphs used for dimensioning packet switched traffic. The graphs are calculated as a function of the
system load, which is defined as the ratio of the number of used packet timeslots to the number of packet switching
(shared and dedicated) timeslots available in the system.
You can modify or replace the quality graphs with graphs generating using a third-party simulator.
Caution: If the quality graphs are modified incorrectly, the dimensioning and quality analysis results
that are based on the quality graphs will also be incorrect.
Notes
For the moment, A9155 does not provide a default delay graph; if desired, you can enter your
own values.
The blocking rate graph is based on a user multiplexing factor of 8. The user multiplexing factor
corresponds to the number of timeslots on a GSM/GPRS/EDGE frame.
5. Click OK.
5.3.4.2 Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network

You can dimension a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network once you have the necessary information:
A traffic capture (for information on creating a traffic capture, see "Calculating and Displaying a Traffic Capture"
on page 227)
Note: If you have modified the traffic map, traffic parameters, or transmitter properties (e.g., calcu-
lation area, GPRS/EDGE equipment, etc.), since creating the traffic capture, you must
recalculate the traffic capture before dimensioning.
A dimensioning model (for information on creating a or modifying a dimensioning model, see "Defining a GSM/
GPRS/EDGE Dimensioning Model" on page 230).
To dimension a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network:
3. Right-click the Traffic Capture on which you want to base the dimensioning. The context menu appears.
4. Select Dimensioning from the context menu. The Dimensioning dialogue appears (see Figure 5.34).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 231

A9155 User Manual
Figure 5.34: The Dimensioning dialogue
5. Under Dimensioning Parameters, select the dimensioning model from the Model list.
6. Click Calculate to dimension the network.
The output of the dimensioning appears in the Dimensioning dialogue, under Results. Some columns are hidden
by default. You can select which columns to display by clicking the Displayed Columns button and selecting or
clearing the check box of the columns. The following results are given for each transmitter in the Transmitter
column:
- TRX Type: For each transmitter, the results are given by TRX type (e.g., BCCH, TCH, and TCH_INNER).
Together, the Transmitter and TRX Type columns identify the subcell.
- Required Number of TRXs: The number of TRXs required to satisfy both the subcell's circuit-switched and
packet-switched traffic, while taking into account the quality of service criterion assigned for each.
The required number of TRXs is the most important result of the dimensioning process. If the number of re-
quired TRXs exceeds the maximum number of TRXs per transmitter, A9155 displays the results for the subcell
in red.
- Required Number of Shared/Circuit/Packet Timeslots: The distribution of shared, circuit, and packet times-
lots for each subcell. Shared timeslots can be used by both circuit and packet traffic, while circuit and packet
timeslots are dedicated to the defined type of traffic.
The timeslots are distributed according to the timeslot configuration defined for each TRX type.
- Load (%): The average demand in timeslots (packet and circuit), divided by the total number of timeslots avail-
able. It represents the average occupancy of the TRXs. This parameter is one of the principal results of dimen-
sioning along with the number of TRXs.
- Multiplexing Factor: The user or Temporary Block Flow (TBF) multiplexing factor. The multiplexing factor is
an input of the dimensioning process. It corresponds to the number of packet switched service users that can
be multiplexed onto the same timeslot in GPRS and EDGE.
- Maximum Number of TRXs per Transmitter: The maximum number of TRXs that a transmitter can support
is an input of the dimensioning process. This parameter is provided by the equipment manufacturer. The value
can be set for each transmitter or taken from the dimensioning model for transmitters where this value is not
set.
- Target Rate of Traffic Overflow (%): This input parameter defines the percentage of traffic that is allowed to
overflow from one subcell to another in case the traffic assigned to this subcell is greater than the maximum
traffic that it can accommodate. It can be considered an anticipation of the percentage of traffic that will be
rejected from higher priority subcells or layers to lower ones. The value is specified for each subcell.
- Half-rate Traffic Ratio (%): This input parameter is defined per subcell and indicates the percentage of sub-
cell traffic that uses half-rate access.
If the values are different for BCCH and TCH subcells, A9155 will use the values for the target rate of traffic
overflow and the half-rate traffic ratio from the BCCH subcell.
- Packet Traffic Demand (kbps): The Packet Traffic Demand is the total traffic demand in kilobits per second
generated by packet switched service users within the coverage area of the transmitter. This parameter comes
from the traffic capture.
- Average Demand in Packet Timeslots: The number of timeslots needed to satisfy the packet traffic demand
- Average Number of Timeslots per Connection (Packet): This input parameter defines the average number
of timeslots used by packet-switched-traffic users while accessing services. Packet-switched services allow
232 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

up to eight timeslots per connection. The average number of timeslots per connection corresponds to the
average number of downlink timeslots over which a single mobile terminal can communicate at one time.
- Circuit Traffic Demand (Erlangs): The Circuit Traffic Demand is the total traffic demand in Erlangs gener-
ated by circuit-switched-service users within the coverage area of the transmitter. This parameter comes from
the traffic capture.
Note: For concentric cell types, the traffic demand on TCH subcells is different from the one cal-
culated during the traffic capture. For concentric cell types, the traffic demand on TCH sub-
cells is calculated from the traffic demand of the capture and the effective rate of traffic
overflow.
- Average Demand in Circuit Timeslots: The Average Demand in Circuit Timeslots is calculated taking into
account the effect of half-rate circuit-switched traffic: two half-rate users are equivalent to one full-rate user.
- Average Number of Timeslots per Connection (Circuit): The Average Number of Timeslots per Con-
nection (Circuit) is an input parameter. The number of timeslots per connection is "1" for full-rate traffic, oth-
erwise it depends on the half-rate traffic ratio.
At present, A9155 only models circuit calls using 1 timeslot per connection; this parameter is for forward com-
patibility.
- Served Circuit Traffic (Erlangs): The Served Circuit Traffic is the circuit-switched traffic in Erlangs that the
subcell can potentially serve, if the dimensioning results are applied. The served circuit-switched traffic is cir-
cuit traffic demand less the effective overflowed circuit traffic.
- Served Packet Traffic (kbps): The Served Packet Traffic is the packet-switched traffic in kilobits per second
that the subcell can potentially serve, if the dimensioning results are applied. The served packet-switched
traffic is packet traffic demand less the effective overflowed packet traffic.
- Effective Rate of Traffic Overflow (%): The Effective Rate of Traffic Overflow is the actual rate of traffic
that is rejected by the subcell and overflows because of a lack of packet timeslots. In a GSM network, the value
is the same as the blocking probability. In a more complex network, this value includes the traffic overflow from
all services.
In case of Erlang B, the effective rate of traffic overflow corresponds to the effective blocking rate. This value
is calculated from the required number of circuit timeslots (both shared and circuit timeslots) and the circuit
traffic demand in Erlang B tables.
In case of Erlang C, the effective rate of traffic overflow is zero except if the maximum number of TRXs is ex-
ceeded. The effective blocking rate is inferred from the required number of circuit timeslots (both shared and
circuit timeslots) and the circuit traffic demand in Erlang C tables.
- Circuit Blocking Rate (/Delay) (%): The Circuit Blocking Rate is the grade of service (GoS) indicator for
circuit-switched traffic. It can be either the rate at which calls are blocked (Erlang B) or delayed (Erlang C),
depending on which queuing model the dimensioning model uses.
- Minimum Throughput Reduction Factor (%): The Minimum Throughput Reduction Factor is the lowest
throughput reduction factor that can still guarantee service availability. The Minimum Throughput Reduction
Factor is one of the criteria for packet-switched traffic dimensioning. It is calculated using the parameters
defined for the services: the minimum service throughput; the maximum number of timeslots per connection;
the required availability; and the per pixel timeslot capacity of the subcell coverage area. This parameter is
calculated when making the traffic capture on which the dimensioning is based.
- Throughput Reduction Factor (%): The Throughput Reduction Factor is calculated from the quality charts
using the packet load and available connections for each subcell. This reduction factor must be greater than
the minimum throughput reduction factor for packet-switched services for these services to be satisfactorily
available in the subcell.
- Maximum Delay (s): The Maximum Delay is the defined delay in seconds that must not be exceeded for the
service quality to be considered satisfactory.
- Delay (s): The Delay is a key performance indicator (KPI) calculated using the quality graphs, the load, and
the number of connections available . This dimensioning output must not exceed the maximum delay defined
for the service for service availability to be considered satisfactory.
- Maximum Packet Blocking Rate (/Delay) (%): The Maximum Packet Blocking Rate is defined for each
packet service and is the highest probability that the service will be blocked that is acceptable in terms of
service availability.
- Packet Blocking Rate (Delay) (%): The Packet Blocking Rate is a dimensioning output and must not
exceed the Maximum Packet Blocking Rate defined for the service for service availability to be considered
satisfactory.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 233

A9155 User Manual
5.4 Allocating Frequencies and BSICs

In A9155s GSM/GPRS/EGPRS module, frequencies and BSICs are organised into domains and groups. Organising
frequencies and BSICs into defined ranges enables you to assign the allowed spectrum for any BSIC or frequency alloca-
tion.
The frequency band is the reference frequency that frequency groups and domains refer to. The frequency band is defined
by the frequencies allocated to GSM/GPRS/EDGE in the area covered by the project. It can therefore be considered as a
fixed item. Frequency groups and domains, on the other hand, can be defined and modified:
A frequency domain consists of one or more groups. A frequency domain is a subset of the frequency band.
A group is a defined set of channels.
In A9155, the Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) is assigned to a transmitter. The combination of the BSIC and BCCH
precisely identifies the transmitter. BSICs are made available according to country and area. The BSIC is composed of a
Network Colour Code (NCC) and a BTS Colour Code (BCC). BSICs are modelled using domains and groups which can
be defined and modified:
A BSIC domain consists of one or more groups.
A group is a defined set of BSICs.
You can allocate frequencies and BSICs manually or automatically in A9155. Normally, when you allocate frequencies
and BSICs for an entire project, you will allocate them automatically. You will only allocate frequencies and BSICs manu-
ally for a few base stations, either when you add new base stations or when you modify frequencies or BSICs that have
already been allocated.
In this section, allocating frequencies and BSICs manually and automatically is explained:
"Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Manually" on page 234
"Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Using an AFP Module" on page 237.
5.4.1 Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Manually

Normally, when you allocate frequencies and BSICs for an entire project, you will allocate them automatically. However,
A9155 enables you to allocate frequencies and BSICs manually, for example, when you add new base stations or when
you modify frequencies or BSICs that have already been allocated.
When you allocate frequencies or BSICs, you first define a range of frequencies or BSICs for the transmitter. You will then
assign frequencies or BSICs that respect the defined range. In A9155, ranges of frequencies and BSICs are modelled
using domains and groups.
For information on creating or modifying frequency or BSIC domains and groups, see "Defining Resource Ranges" on
page 286.
In this section, setting a range of frequencies or BSICs is explained, as well as manually assigning frequencies or BSICs
from the defined range:
"Assigning BSIC Domains to Transmitters" on page 234
"Assigning BSICs to Transmitters Manually" on page 235
"Defining Frequency Domains for Transmitters" on page 235
"Assigning Frequencies to Subcells" on page 236.
5.4.1.1 Assigning BSIC Domains to Transmitters

Before you assign a BSIC to a transmitter, you define the range of possible BSICs for that transmitter by assigning a BSIC
domain. For information on creating or modifying BSIC domains and groups, see "Defining BSIC Domains and Groups"
on page 288.
To assign a BSIC domain to a transmitter:
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a BSIC domain. The context menu appears.
Note: You can also access a transmitters Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter in
the map window and selecting Properties from the context menu.
6. Under Identification, select the BSIC Domain from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the
properties of the selected BSIC domain.
7. Click OK.
234 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

5.4.1.2 Assigning BSICs to Transmitters Manually

Normally, you will allocate Base Station Identity Codes (BSICs) automatically for an entire project. However, you can allo-
cate BSICs manually, for example, when you add new base stations or when you modify BSICs that have already been
allocated.
The BSIC is composed of the Network Colour Code (NCC) and the BTS Colour Code (BCC). Both the NCC and BCC must
be whole numbers from 0 to 7.
The combination of the BSIC and BCCH (in other words, the frequency of the BCCH) permit to precisely identify a trans-
mitter. Over greater distances, a BSIC-BCCH pair may be repeated.
To allocate a BSIC to a transmitter manually:
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a BSIC. The context menu appears.

6. Under Identification, select the BSIC from the list. The BSICs available in the list will be those available in the
defined BSIC domain.
Note: You can enter a value in the BSIC field, however, it must be a BSIC that is part of the
selected BSIC Domain and in the correct BSIC format (for information on the BSIC format,
see "Defining the BSIC Format" on page 287). As well, you can enter a BSIC in the format
of a NCC-BCC. When you click OK or Apply, A9155 will convert it into the single-digit BSIC
format.
Once you have selected the BSIC, the NCC-BCC is displayed.
7. Click OK.
5.4.1.3 Defining Frequency Domains for Transmitters

Before you assign a frequency to a transmitter, you define the range of possible frequencies for that transmitter by assign-
ing a frequency domain to the transmitters subcells.
In A9155, you define the range of frequencies that can be assigned to a transmitter by assigning frequency domains to
the transmitters subcells. By default, a transmitters subcells, based on the selected cell type (for information, see "Apply-
ing a New Cell Type" on page 175), already have an assigned frequency domain. However, you can change a subcells
frequency domain. If you select a different cell type after having modified any of the parameters of a subcell, A9155 offers
you the choice of keeping current parameters or resetting them to those found in the cell type.
For information on creating or modifying frequency domains and groups, see "Defining Frequency Domains and Groups"
on page 286.
To change the frequency domain assigned to a transmitter:
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign a frequency domain. The context menu appears.
5. Select the TRXs tab. Under Subcell (TRX Groups) Settings, the table lists each TRX group defined in the cell
type selected under Cell Type on the TRXs tab.
6. Select a Frequency Domain from the list. Only channels belonging to this frequency domain will be allocated to
TRXs of this group during automatic or manual frequency planning.
Note: The frequency domains assigned to the BCCH subcell and to the TCH subcell must refer-
ence the same frequency band. If the transmitter has more than one subcell with the TRX
type TCH, only one must reference the same frequency band as the BCCH subcell.
7. If desired, add Excluded Channels. The defined frequency domain may have, as part of its definition, a list of
excluded channels. Addition excluded channels for this subcell can be added in the Excluded Channels column.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 235

A9155 User Manual
8. Click OK.
Note: If you are defining frequency domains for several transmitters, you can group them by fre-
quency band (for information on grouping transmitters, see "Grouping Data Objects" on
page 61) and then open the Transmitters table for the selected transmitters and assign the
frequency domain to all transmitters at the same time. For information on working with data
tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48.
5.4.1.4 Assigning Frequencies to Subcells

In a GSM/GPRS/EDGE project, frequencies are modelled using channels. The channels are assigned to the TRXs of each
subcell. If your A9155 document represents an existing network, frequencies may already have been assigned to many
of the transmitters. You can then import the existing frequency list into your current A9155 document. You can also export
the frequency list from the current A9155 document.
"Importing a Frequency List" on page 236
"Adding New TRXs to a Document" on page 236
"Displaying the Frequency Plan" on page 237
"Exporting the Frequency List" on page 237.
5.4.1.4.1 Importing a Frequency List

If your A9155 document represents an existing GSM/GPRS/EGPRS network, frequencies may already have been
assigned to many of the transmitters. You can import the existing frequency list into your current A9155 document. You
can then complete the data for new TRXs either manually or using the AFP.
The frequency list you import must be a TXT or CSV file and the data must be arranged in a manner compatible with
A9155. The imported file must contain the transmitter name and the TRX type to identify the TRX to which the frequencies
will be assigned. When you import a frequency list for a network with non-hopping or base-band hopping only, you only
need to import the channels and the TRX types. If the network has synthesized frequency hopping, even if not all subcells
use synthesized frequency hopping, you will also have to import the MAIO, the HSN, and the synchronisation. For infor-
mation on importing a frequency list for a network with synthesized frequency hopping, see "Importing a Frequency List"
on page 236.
When A9155 imports the data, it will add TRXs that do not yet exist in the A9155 document to existing transmitters. If some
sites and transmitters do not yet exist in the A9155 document, you must create them before you import the frequency list.
For information on creating sites and transmitters, see "Creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Base Station" on page 166.
To import an existing frequency list:
3. Select Subcells > TRXs from the context menu. The TRXs table appears.
4. Import the file as explained in "Importing Tables from External Files" on page 56.
The file imported must contain, at a minimum, the transmitter name and TRX type to identify the TRX to which the
frequencies will be assigned, and the channels, identifying the frequencies. In the case of SFH, the channels will
constitute the MAL. Additionally, if the hopping mode is SFH, the file imported must also contain the MAIO.
If the hopping mode is BBH or SFH, continue with step 5.

6. Select Subcells > Open Table from the context menu. The Subcells table appears.
The file imported must contain, at a minimum, the transmitter name and TRX type to identify the TRX. When the
hopping mode is BBH or SFH, file must also contain the synchronisation and the HSN.
Note: If you want to import the BSIC at the same time, you can also import the frequency list into
the Transmitters table, which you can open by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and
selecting Open Table from the context menu.
If you are modifying the frequency list of a single transmitter, it is easier to modify the infor-
mation directly on the TRXs tab of the transmitters Properties dialogue. For information,
see "Subcell Definition" on page 170.
5.4.1.4.2 Adding New TRXs to a Document

You can add TRXs to existing transmitters either by using the TRXs tab of the transmitter Properties dialogue, or by using
the TRX table.
If you are adding TRXs to a single transmitter, it is easier to use the transmitter Properties dialogue.
236 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To add TRXs using the TRXs tab of the transmitter Properties dialogue:
1. In the map window, select the transmitter to which you want to add a TRX.
Note: You can also select the transmitter in the Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the
Explorer window.
2. Right-click the transmitter. The context menu appears.

4. Click the TRXs tab.
5. Under TRXs, in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the parameters described in "TRX Definition"
on page 173.
6. Click OK.
If you are adding TRXs to several transmitters, it is easier to use the TRX table.
To add TRXs using the TRX table:
4. Scroll down to the row marked with the New Row icon ( ).
5. In the Transmitter column, select the transmitter to which the TRXs will be added.
6. Enter the parameters described in "TRX Definition" on page 173.
5.4.1.4.3 Displaying the Frequency Plan

You can display or modify the network frequency plan, that is the channels allocated to each TRX, by opening the TRXs
table.
To open the TRXs table:
If you wish, you can export the frequency plan. For information on exporting the frequency plan, see "Exporting the
Frequency List" on page 237.
5.4.1.4.4 Exporting the Frequency List

You can export the network frequency list, that is the channels allocated to each TRX, using the TRXs table. The exported
file must contain the transmitter name and the TRX type to identify the TRX to which the frequencies are assigned.
To export an existing frequency list:
4. Export the file as explained in "Exporting Tables to External Files" on page 55.
If the hopping mode is BBH or SFH, continue with step 5.

6. Select Subcells > Open Table from the context menu. The Subcells table appears.
7. Export the file as explained in "Exporting Tables to External Files" on page 55.
The file exported must contain, at a minimum, the transmitter name and TRX type to identify the TRX to which the
frequencies are assigned, the HSN and the synchronisation.
5.4.2 Allocating Frequencies and BSICs Using an AFP Module

In A9155, you can use an Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP) module to allocate frequencies and BSICs, as well, as the
MAL, MAIO, and HSN.
The Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP) module assigns frequencies according to traffic demand (as indicated by the
number of required TRXs) and respecting quality requirements with the aim of reducing interference. A9155 allows the
use of third-party AFP tools, as well as the use of an optional A9155 AFP module.
The AFP attempts to create an optimal resource allocation, i.e., an allocation that minimises interference and complies
with a set of user-defined constraints. The two main types of constraints are separation constraints and interference. The
AFP assigns a cost to each constraint and then uses a cost-based algorithm to evaluate possible frequency plans and find
the frequency plan with the lowest costs. Although it is possible to run the AFP without an interference matrix, allocation
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 237

A9155 User Manual
will be calculated without taking interference into consideration, i.e., without considering one of the two important
constraints.
"Prerequisites for an Automatic Frequency Allocation" on page 238
"Interference Matrices" on page 238
"Defining Required Channel Separations" on page 242
"Automatic Frequency Allocation" on page 244.
5.4.2.1 Prerequisites for an Automatic Frequency Allocation

To successfully make an automatic frequency allocation, you must ensure that you have the following information:
The number of required TRXs must be defined for each transmitter, either automatically in A9155 by dimensioning
the network (see "Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 230), or manually using information gen-
erated by an external tool ("Creating or Modifying a TRX" on page 175).
Dimensioning is based on a traffic capture (see "Creating a Traffic Capture" on page 227) which, in turn, is based
on a traffic map ("Creating a Traffic Map" on page 220).
The frequency, BSIC, and HSN domains must be defined:

- "Frequencies" on page 286
- "BSICs" on page 287
- "Defining HSN Domains and Groups" on page 288.
All hopping mode-related parameters must have been defined for each subcell (see "Subcell Definition" on
page 170):
- Hopping mode
- Allocation strategy
- HSN domain
- The freeze HSN option, if desired
- The synchronisation value
- AFP weights
- Percentage of maximum interference by quality requirement (minimum CI per subcell).
A valid interference matrix should also be generated (see "Interference Matrices" on page 238). Although it is pos-
sible to run the AFP without an interference matrix, allocation will be calculated without taking interference into
consideration, i.e., without considering one of the two important constraints.
5.4.2.2 Interference Matrices

In A9155, the probability of interference between pairs of subcells is stored in an interference matrix. An interference matrix
can be thought of as the probability that a user in the interfered cell will receive a CI value higher than the maximum value
for CI defined in that subcell. The probability of interference is stated either in terms of a percentage of the interfered area
or in terms of a percentage of the interfered traffic.
You can calculate and use more than one set of interference matrices in a single A9155 document. Interference matrices
are used by the automatic frequency planner (AFP).
When A9155 calculates interference matrices, it calculates the value of CI for each pixel of the interfered service area
between two subcells (the interfered subcell and the interferer subcell). If the received signal is lower than the minimum
reception threshold defined for the interfered subcell, the pixel is considered to be interfered. Only subcells using the same
channel are considered as possible interferers.
Once all possible pairs of interfered-interferer subcells have been calculated, A9155 combines the CI values calculated
over the service area of the interfered subcell and calculates an interference matrix.
Example of an Interference Matrix
In this example, Tx1 (BCCH) and Tx2 (BCCH) are the victim and interferer subcells, respectively. The service areas have
been defined with a best server of 0 dB margin and the interference probability is stated as a percentage of the interfered
area.
In Figure 5.35, you can see that the probability of CI (BCCH of Tx2 on the BCCH of Tx1 ) being greater than 0 is 100%
(which is normal because Tx1 is best server ). The probability of having a value of CI of at least equal to 31 is 31.1%. If
the required CI level on the BCCH of Tx1 is 12, the percentage of areas in the service area of the BCCH of Tx1 interfered
by the BCCH of TX2 is 6.5%, because the probability that the CI is at least equal to 12 is 93.5%.
238 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 5.35: The probability of having at least the given C/I level for a pair of subcells
5.4.2.2.1 Calculating an Interference Matrix

Before you can use the A9155 AFP module to allocate frequencies and BSICs, you must have created and calculated an
interference matrix.
A9155 needs a traffic capture to calculate an interference matrix; the subcell traffic load is read from the output of the
default traffic capture. If no traffic capture is available, A9155 sets the traffic load for each subcell at 1. The resolution used
during calculation is the default resolution defined in the Properties dialogue of the Predictions folder (see "Assigning a
Default Propagation Model for Coverage Predictions" on page 194).
To calculate an interference matrix:
2. Right-click the Interference Matrices folder. The context menu appears.
3. Select Calculate from the context menu. The Interference Calculation dialogue appears.
Note: When you calculate an interference matrix, A9155 calculates it on all transmitters in the
Computation Zone. For information on creating a computation zone, see "Creating a Com-
putation Zone" on page 194. If you wish, you can calculate an interference matrix on all
transmitters or on a group of transmitters by right-clicking the Transmitters folder or the
subfolder in the Transmitters folder and selecting Interference Matrices > Calculate from
the context menu.
4. On the Interference Calculation dialogue, set the following options under Service Zone:
- Server: Select "Best Signal Level per HCS Layer" to consider all potential servers.
- With a Margin: Enter a handover margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "5 dB."
ability.
5. Under Traffic Spreading, you can select whether you want to calculate interference on the percentage of inter-
fered traffic or on the percentage of interfered area:
- Based on the maps used in the default traffic capture: if you choose this option, A9155 will calculate inter-
ference on the interfered traffic for each pair of subcells (interfered-interferer). This method takes into account
both traffic maps and the traffic load, either user-defined or as calculated by the dimensioning process.
- Uniform (probability expressed in % of interfered area): if you choose this option, A9155 will calculate
interference on the interfered areas for each pair of subcells (interfered-interferer). This method cannot accu-
rately take areas of heavy traffic into consideration, but is faster than calculating interference based on maps.
6. Click OK to start the calculation.
The results of the calculation can be found in a new item in the Interferences Matrices folder on the Data tab of
the Explorer window. By default, the new interference matrix is active.
Caution: Changing certain transmitter or subcell properties, such as power offset, reception thresh-
old, and transmitter power or EIRP will make interference matrices invalid. If you change
transmitter or subcell properties, you will have to recalculate the interference matrices.
Calculating Interference Matrices for Large Networks
Calculating interference matrices is very resource intensive. If you have an extremely large network, calculating an inter-
ference matrix that covers the entire network can require more computer resources than are available.
If you have to calculate an interference matrix for a large network, you can reduce the load it places on computer resources
by calculating individual interference matrices for parts of the network. Under most circumstances, including 1,000 to 2,000
transmitters in each individual interference matrix is the most efficient. After you have calculated an interference matrix for
each part of the network, A9155 will combine them when you run the AFP.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 239

A9155 User Manual
To calculate interference matrices for a large network:

1. Create a computation zone that covers part of the network. For information on creating a computation zone, see
"Creating a Computation Zone" on page 194. In Figure 5.36, the computation zone is indicated by the red outline.
Figure 5.36: The first computation zone

2. Calculate an interference matrix for the area covered by the computation zone as explained earlier.
3. Create a new computation zone that partly overlaps the area covered by the first computation zone. In Figure 5.37,
the area covered by the first computation zone is indicated by the black outline.
Figure 5.37: The second computation zone
4. Calculate an interference matrix for the area covered by the computation zone.
5. Repeat step 1. to step 4. until have created interference matrices for the entire network, as shown in the following
figures.
Note: As indicated in the figures, each calculation zones must partially overlap the preceding cal-
culation zone, in order to assure that the calculated interference matrices also overlap and
thereby give results for the entire network. How the interference matrices are combined
depends on the AFP used.
5.4.2.2.2 Importing and Exporting Interference Matrices

You can import interference matrices from and export them to the following formats:
IM0: One matrix per line
IM1: One CI threshold and probability pair per line for each interfered/interfering subcell pair.
IM2: Only co-channel and adjacent channel interference values.
CLC: One value per line. The accompanying dictionary (DCT) file gives the correspondence between the trans-
mitter identifiers and the transmitter names.
For more information on the interference matrix file formats, see the Technical Reference Guide.
240 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


"Importing Interference Matrices" on page 241
"Storing Interference Matrices Externally" on page 241
"Exporting Interference Matrices" on page 241.
Importing Interference Matrices
A9155 supports IM0, IM1, IM2, and CLC interference matrix files. A9155 also supports a simplified format that gives the
interfered subcell, the interfering subcell, the co-channel interference probability, and the adjacent channel probability. For
more information on the simplified format, see the Technical Reference Guide.
When you import several interference matrices that describe the same interfered-interferer pairs, A9155 only takes the
first description of the pair. When descriptions of the same interfered-interferer pair are found in subsequent files, the
description is ignored.
A9155 does not perform a validity check on the imported interference file; you must therefore ensure that the imported
information is consistent with the current configuration. Furthermore, A9155 only imports interference matrices for active
transmitters.
To import interference matrices:
4. Select the file type from the Files of Type list.
If you are importing a CLC file, A9155 looks for the associated DCT file in the same directory. When this file is
unavailable, A9155 assumes that the transmitter identifiers in the CLC file are the same as the transmitter names.
6. Click Open. A message appears asking whether A9155 should merge the imported interference matrix into the
GSM/GPRS/EDGE document:
- Click Yes to save the imported interference matrix in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document.
When you save an imported interference matrix in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document, you can still choose to
save it to an external file linked to the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document. For information, see "Storing Interference
Matrices Externally" on page 241.
- Click No to store the interference matrix externally, but linked to the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document.
7. The interference matrices are imported into the current A9155 document and appear as new items in the Inter-
ference Matrices folder.
Storing Interference Matrices Externally
You can save interference matrices to external files that are linked to the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document. Linking interfer-
ence matrices to the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document can reduce file size when the A9155 document is extremely large.
To store an interference matrix externally:
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Interference Matrices folder.
3. Right-click the interference matrix you want to store externally. The context menu appears.
5. Under Interference Matrices Storage, on the General tab, click the Externalise button. A confirmation message
appears.
6. Click Yes to confirm, No to cancel. The Save As dialogue appears.
7. Select the file type from the Save as Type list.
8. Enter the File name and click Save. The interference matrix is stored externally but remains linked to the GSM/
GPRS/EDGE document.
Exporting Interference Matrices
A9155 supports IM0, IM1, IM2, and CLC interference matrix files.
To export interference matrices:
3. Right-click the interference matrix you want to export. The context menu appears.
4. Select Export from the context menu. The Save As dialogue appears.
5. Select the file type from the Save as Type list.
6. Enter the File name and click Save. The interference matrix is exported.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 241

A9155 User Manual
5.4.2.2.3 Generating Reports on Interference Matrices

You can generate reports on one or all of the interference matrices in the Interference Matrices folder.
"Generating a Report on a Single Interference Matrix" on page 242
"Generating a Report on All Interference Matrices" on page 242.
Generating a Report on a Single Interference Matrix
To generate a report on a single interference matrix:

3. Right-click the interference matrix on which you want to generate a report. The context menu appears.
4. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Interference Matrix Scope dialogue appears with the report
details:
- A table with the number of times the listed transmitter has been interfered
- The total number of entries in the selected interference matrix
- The number of transmitters covered by the interference matrix
- The average number of interferers per interfered subcell in the interference matrix.
Generating a Report on All Interference Matrices
In order to generate a report on all the interference matrices in the Interference Matrices folder:
3. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The Interference Matrix Scope dialogue appears with the report
details:
- A table with the number of times the listed transmitter has been interfered
- The total number of entries in the selected interference matrices
- The number of transmitters covered by the interference matrices
- The average number of interferers per interfered subcell in the interference matrices.
5.4.2.2.4 Selecting Interference Matrices for the Automatic Frequency Allocation Process
When you allocate frequencies automatically in GSM/GPRS/EDGE, the automatic allocation process uses interference
matrices. You can select which interference matrices the automatic frequency allocation process will be based on. When
you use more than one interference matrix, the AFP combines the data.
To activate an interference matrix to be used for an automatic frequency allocation:
3. Right-click the interference matrix you want to use in an automatic frequency allocation. The context menu
appears.
4. Select Activate from the context menu. The selected interference matrix is now active and will be used the next
time you use an AFP.
You can deactivate the interference matrix by right-clicking it and selecting Deactivate from the context menu.
5.4.2.3 Defining Required Channel Separations

Channel separations define how many channels should separate different TRXs under set circumstances. Channel sepa-
rations are necessary if you are using automatic frequency planning. Carefully defining channel separations will help you
increase the efficient use of channels in your network.
Defining channel separations is a two-step process in A9155. First, you set general separation rules that define the chan-
nel separation that should exist between TRXs on the same transmitter, same site, or between neighbours. Next, you
define separation rules for the TRXs on specific pairs of transmitters. During automatic frequency planning, the separation
rules are first considered, but they can be overridden by specific entries in the Exceptional Separation Constraints table.
In this section, creating separation rules and exceptional separation constraints is explained. As well, displaying and modi-
fying exceptional separation constraints on the map is explained:
"Defining Separation Rules" on page 242
"Importing Separation Rules" on page 243
"Defining Exceptional Frequency Separations" on page 243
"Displaying Exceptional Frequency Separations on the Map" on page 243
"Adding or Removing Exceptional Frequency Separations Using the Mouse" on page 244.
5.4.2.3.1 Defining Separation Rules

You can define separation rules that set the channel separation that should exist between pairs of TRXs on the same trans-
mitter, same site, or between neighbours after a frequency allocation.
242 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To define separation rules:

3. Select Frequency Plan > Separation Rules from the context menu. The Separation Rules table appears.
4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), select the following parameters for each separation rule you want
to define:
- Type of Relation: Select the type of relation, co-transmitter, co-site, or neighbour, between the two TRXs.
- TRX Type: Select the first TRX type.
- TRX Type 2: Select the second TRX type.
- Default Min. Separation: Enter the minimum difference in channels that must exist between the two TRX
types. Entering "0" means that they can use the same channel.
5.4.2.3.2 Importing Separation Rules

If you have an existing set of separation rules, you can import them into your GSM/GPRS/EGPRS document.
To import separation rules:
3. Select Frequency Plan > Separation Rules from the context menu. The Separation Rules table appears.
5.4.2.3.3 Defining Exceptional Frequency Separations

The separation rules apply to the entire network. However, in a few cases, the separation rules might not apply to specific
pairs of TRXs. In this case, you can set exceptional frequency separations to define channel separations that apply to
specific pairs of TRXs. During automatic frequency planning, the separation rules are first considered, but they can be
overridden by specific entries in the Exceptional Separation Constraints table.
To define exceptional frequency separations:
3. Select Frequency Plan > Exceptional Pairs from the context menu. The Exceptional Separation Constraints
table appears.
4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), select the following parameters for each separation rule you want
to define:
- Transmitter: Select the transmitter on which the TRX in TRX Type is located.
- TRX Type: Select the first TRX type.
- Transmitter 2: Select the transmitter on which the TRX in TRX Type 2 is located.
- TRX Type 2: Select the second TRX type.
- Separation: Enter the minimum difference in channels that must exist between the two TRX types. Entering
"0" means that they can use the same channel.
5.4.2.3.4 Displaying Exceptional Frequency Separations on the Map

You can display the exceptional frequency separations defined in the Exceptional Separation Constraints table on the
map.
To display the exceptional frequency separations:
3. Select Frequency Plan > Display Options from the context menu. The Separation Constraint Display dialogue
appears.
4. Select the Transmitter 1 TRX Type and the Transmitter 2 TRX Type to display.
Note: When you select "All" as either Transmitter 1 TRX Type or Transmitter 2 TRX Type,
A9155 does not display all TRX types. Rather it displays only exceptional frequency sepa-
rations for which the TRX type constraint is defined as "All."
6. Select Exceptional Pairs (AFP) from the context menu.
7. Click the left side of the Visual Management button ( ) in the Radio toolbar.
8. Click a transmitter on the map to display the exceptional frequency separations. If the selected transmitter has
defined exceptional frequency separations that fit the display options, A9155 displays the following information
(see Figure 5.38):
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 243

A9155 User Manual
- The exceptional frequency separations of the selected transmitter are indicated by a heavy line in the same
colour as the other transmitter in the defined pair.
- The defined minimum channel separation is indicated beside the line linking the two transmitters.
Figure 5.38: Displaying exceptional frequency separations
( ) again.
Tip: You can define exceptional pairs directly on the map. For information, see "Adding or
Removing Exceptional Frequency Separations Using the Mouse" on page 244.
5.4.2.3.5 Adding or Removing Exceptional Frequency Separations Using the Mouse

You can add and remove define exceptional frequency separations directly on the map.
To define an exceptional frequency separation on the map:
3. Select Frequency Plan > Display Options from the context menu. The Separation Constraint Display dialogue
appears.
4. In Transmitter 1 TRX Type list and Transmitter 2 TRX Type list, select the TRX type for which you want to define
separation constraints.
6. Select Exceptional Pairs (AFP) from the context menu.
7. Click the left side of the Visual Management icon ( ).

8. Click the reference transmitter on the map. A9155 displays the existing exceptional frequency separations for this
transmitter.
You can do the following:
- To add an exceptional frequency separation: Press CTRL and click on the second transmitter. A dialogue
appears where you enter the minimum separation between the transmitters. When you click OK, the excep-
tional frequency separation is created and indicated by a heavy line in the same colour as the second trans-
mitter. The minimum separation is indicated next to the link. The exceptional separation constraint is
automatically added to the Exceptional Separation Constraints table.
- To remove an exceptional frequency separation: Press CTRL and click on the second transmitter of an
existing exceptional frequency separation. The exceptional frequency separation is removed from the map
and from the Exceptional Separation Constraints table.
( ) again.
Tip: You can display the coverage areas of exceptional pairs in much the same way as you
would display the coverage of a transmitters neighbours, with the exception that you select
Exceptional Pairs (AFP) when you click the menu button ( ) of Visual Management but-
ton ( ) in the Radio toolbar. For more information, see "Displaying the Coverage of
Each Neighbour of a Transmitter" on page 214.
5.4.2.4 Automatic Frequency Allocation

An Automatic Frequency Planning (AFP) tool assigns frequencies to TRXs in a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network according to
traffic demand (as indicated by the number of required TRXs) and respecting quality requirements with the aim of limiting
interference. A9155 allows the use of third-party AFP tools, as well as the use of an optional A9155 AFP module.
244 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

The AFP attempts to create an optimal resource allocation, i.e., an allocation that minimises interference and complies
with a set of user-defined constraints. The two main types of constraints are separation constraints and interference. The
AFP assigns a cost to each constraint and then uses a cost-based algorithm to evaluate possible frequency plans and find
the frequency plan with the lowest costs.
The AFP uses, as input, information from the GSM/GPRS/EDGE network, for example, transmitter properties and sepa-
ration constraints, settings in the AFP interface, as well as AFP module-specific parameters.
The optional A9155 AFP module enables automatic frequency plan generation and allocation for GSM/GPRS/EDGE
networks. The following resources can be allocated:
Frequencies
Mobile Allocation Lists (MAL)
HSN, MAIO
BSIC
TRX Ranks
"Adjusting AFP-Relevant Parameters in the Network" on page 245
"Running an Automatic Frequency Allocation" on page 246
"Automatic Frequency Allocation Results" on page 249.
5.4.2.4.1 Adjusting AFP-Relevant Parameters in the Network

Many of the parameters used by the AFP are read directly from subcell settings made in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE network.
You can modify these parameters globally or for individual transmitters before running the AFP. Other parameters are
calculated when you dimension the GSM/GPRS/EDGE network.
Before you can use the AFP tool, you need to know the number of required TRXs. You can dimension the network to let
A9155 automatically calculate and update the required number of TRXs needed per subcell for each transmitter of the
network, or you can enter the information manually. For information on letting A9155 automatically calculate and update
the required number of TRXs needed per subcell, see "Dimensioning a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 230. For
information on adding TRXs manually, see "Creating or Modifying a TRX" on page 175.
When you dimension the network, A9155 also calculates the required number of shared, circuit, and packet timeslots
required for all TRXs of the subcell.
The other AFP-relevant parameters in the network concern the subcells and related TRXs. In A9155, a subcell refers to
the characteristics of a group of TRXs on a transmitter sharing the same radio characteristics, the same quality (C/I)
requirements, and other settings.
The following subcell settings can be modified globally by modifying the cell type or for a specific transmitter by modifying
the parameters under Subcell (TRX Groups) Settings on the TRXs tab of the transmitters Properties dialogue. For infor-
mation on modifying cell types, see "Cell Types" on page 290. For information on modifying transmitter properties, see
"Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 174.
The following are the most important AFP-relevant parameters under Subcell (TRX Groups) Settings on the TRXs tab
of the transmitters Properties dialogue:
C/I Threshold (dB): The minimum signal quality for the TRX Type, under which the subcell interface is taken into
consideration.
Reception Threshold (dBm): The minimum received signal for the TRX Type.
Frequency Domain: (including excluded channels), from which the AFP tool can choose frequencies. The Rele-
vant Frequency Band used by the model when assigning cell types to transmitters is also visible on the TRXs
tab, but is a parameter of the cell type and can not be changed here. For information on frequencies, see "Fre-
quencies" on page 286.
The other AFP-relevant parameters under Subcell (TRX Groups) Settings on the TRXs tab of the transmitters Proper-
ties dialogue are:
Allocation Strategy: The allocation strategy used during manual or automatic frequency planning. There are two
available allocation strategies:
- Group Constrained: Only channels belonging to a same group in the frequency domain can be assigned.
Max. MAL Length: The maximum length of the mobile allocation list (MAL), in other words, the maximum number
of channels allocated to the TRXs of the subcell during automatic frequency planning if the Hopping Mode is
either SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base Band Hopping) and if the Allocation Strategy is
Free.
Hopping Mode: The frequency hopping mode supported by the selected TRX type. The hopping mode can be
either "Base Band Hopping mode (BBH)" or "Synthesized Hopping mode (SFH)." If frequency hopping is not sup-
ported, select "Non Hopping."
Synchronisation: The Synchronisation is used during frequency hopping; frequency hopping is synchronised
among all TRXs of subcells with the same string of characters in the Synchronisation column. By default, the
name of the site is used as the value in the Synchronisation column, synchronising frequency hopping for all
TRXs on the same site.
DTX Supported: The DTX Supported check box is selected if the subcell supports DTX (Discontinuous Trans-
mission) mode. Subcells supporting DTX can reduce interference they produce according to the defined voice
activity factor. DTX does not apply to the BCCH since it is assumed that the BCCH is always on air.
Although you can manually set the values of the following required timeslot numbers, these values are calculated during
the dimensioning process:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 245

A9155 User Manual
Required No. of Shared Timeslots: The total number of shared timeslots required for all TRXs of the subcell.
Required No. of Circuit Timeslots: The total number of circuit timeslots required for all TRXs of the subcell.
Required No. of Packet Timeslots: The total number of packet timeslots required for all TRXs of the subcell.
On the AFP tab of a transmitters Properties dialogue, you can set the weight to be used for the selected transmitter during
the AFP:
Weight: You can set a weight on the cost used for convergence on this transmitter. For example, if you set the
weight of the selected transmitter to 2, and the weight for the other transmitters is 1; twice as many constraints are
imposed on that transmitter as compared to the other transmitters. Convergence will thus be achieved when the
cost for this transmitter is half the cost of each of the other transmitters.
If certain resources have already been allocated, on the AFP tab of a transmitters Properties dialogue you can choose
to freeze the resources that have already been allocated to the selected transmitter. During automatic frequency planning,
these resources, which can be allocated as part of the process, will not be changed.
Freeze Channels and MAIO: When the Freeze Channels and MAIO check box is selected, the transmitters cur-
rently assigned channels and MAIO are kept when a new AFP session is started. On the TRXs tab, under TRXs,
you can freeze the channels and MAIO for individual TRXs assigned to the transmitter.
Freeze HSN: When the Freeze HSN check box is selected, the transmitters currently assigned HSN is kept when
a new AFP session is started. On the TRXs tab, under Subcell (TRX Groups) Settings, you can freeze the HSN
for individual subcells assigned to the transmitter.
Freeze BSIC: When the Freeze BSIC check box is selected, the transmitters currently assigned BSIC is kept
when a new AFP session is started.
Under Exceptional separation constraints with other transmitters, on the AFP tab of a transmitters Properties
dialogue, you can enter exceptional separation constraints with other transmitters. Exceptional separation constraints you
enter here also appear in the Exceptional Separation Constraints table. For information on creating exceptional sepa-
ration constraints, see "Defining Exceptional Frequency Separations" on page 243.
5.4.2.4.2 Running an Automatic Frequency Allocation

A9155 provides an AFP interface that can be used with a third-party AFP module.
You can perform automatic frequency planning on all transmitters or only on a group of transmitters. All the transmitters
involved, including potential interferers and transmitters involved in separation constraints, are taken into account but allo-
cation is performed only on the non-locked items (subcells or TRXs) of the selected transmitters.
The AFP process consists of the following steps:
1. The AFP interface opens, allowing you to enter the information that will be used as input to the automatic
frequency allocation process
The first dialogue allows you to:
- Select an AFP module and modify its parameters, if necessary

- Define the resources to allocate
- Choose the subcells to be included in the cost of interfering transmitters.
The second dialogue allows you to define separation requirements.
The third and last dialogue of the AFP interface allows you to:
- Freeze TRXs or subcells by their TRX type

- Define the source of the traffic load information
- Take DTX into consideration.
2. A9155 loads and verifies the network.
3. A9155 calculates the theoretical level of interference that the AFP module will have to minimise . If you choose
not to calculate it, the mathematical model will use only the separation constraints. At this point you can also set
a target time for calculating the frequency allocation.
4. A9155 provides detailed results of the AFP.
To run an AFP session:
2. Right-click the Transmitters folder or click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Transmitters folder and right-
click a group of transmitters. The context menu appears.
3. Select Frequency plan > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The AFP dialogue appears with the AFP
Selection tab.
4. The AFP dialogue appears in the form of a wizard. You can move between the different screens using the Next >
and < Back buttons at the bottom of the dialogue.
On the AFP Selection tab:
a. Select an AFP Module from the list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the
selected AFP module.
b. Under Resources to Allocate, select the check boxes of the resources you want to allocate. The selections
you make will depend on the hopping mode of your network:
- MAL: The MAL is used by subcells that have either the BBH or the SFH hopping mode. You must also
allocate MAIO, HSN, and channels in this case.
246 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- MAIO: The MAIO is used by subcells that have either the BBH or the SFH hopping mode. You must also
allocate MAL, HSN, and channels in this case.
- Channels: All subcells must be allocated channels, independently of their hopping mode.
- HSN: The HSN is used by subcells that have either the BBH or the SFH hopping mode. You must also
allocate MAL, MAIO, and channels in this case.
- BSIC: The BSIC is used by all subcells, independently of the hopping mode.
Note: A9155 will not create TRXs without channels. Therefore, if you do not allocate MAL and
MAIO, all the SFH subcells are considered "locked" and no TRXs will be created for them.
By the same token, if you allocate only MAL and MAIO, all NH and BBH subcells will be
considered "locked" and no TRXs will be created.
c. Select the Load all the subcells potentially involved in separation constraints check box if you want all
subcells potentially involved to be loaded.
d. Select the Load all the potential interferers check box if you want all potential interferers to be loaded. If this
check box is not selected, the cost function will consist only of the separation violation cost.
5. Click the Next > button at the bottom of the dialogue. The Separations tab appears.
On the Separations tab:
a. Click the Exceptional Pairs button to open the Exceptional Separation Constraints dialogue and define
exceptional frequency separations to define channel separations that apply to specific pairs of TRXs. During
automatic frequency planning, the separation rules are first considered, but they can be overridden by specific
entries in the Exceptional Separation Constraints table. For information on defining exceptional separation
constraints, see "Defining Exceptional Frequency Separations" on page 243.
b. When you have finished entering exceptional separation constraints, click Close to close the Exceptional
Separation Constraints dialogue.
c. In the table on the Separations tab, enter or modify the separation rules. The separation rules set the channel
separation that should exist between pairs of TRXs on the same transmitter, same site, or between neigh-
bours. For information on defining separation rules, see "Defining Separation Rules" on page 242.
6. Click the Next > button at the bottom of the dialogue. The Global Parameters tab appears.
On the Global Parameters tab, you can select the subcells and TRXs to which frequencies will be allocated and
you can define certain input parameters:
a. Under Freezing Subcells Globally by TRX Type, select the check boxes of the TRX types to which you do
not want to allocate HSN and channels. If all check boxes are cleared, resources will be allocated for all subcell
types.
b. Under Freezing Existing TRXs Globally by TRX Type, select the check boxes of the existing allocated TRX
types you do not want to change. If one of the check boxes is selected, existing TRXs of the selected type are
frozen, but missing TRXs of the same type can still be allocated.
c. Under Traffic Loads, indicate where the AFP should take traffic loads from:
- From the Subcell Table
- Based on the Default Traffic Capture Results
d. If you want the AFP to consider discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it in calculating the
interference, check the DTX check box and enter the Voice Activity Factor.
7. Click Validate to load the network. A9155 loads and verifies the following (see Figure 5.39):
- The transmitters to be allocated (TBA transmitters): The TBA transmitters are the active and filtered trans-
mitters belonging to the transmitters folder from which the AFP was started and that are located within the
focus zone. If no focus zone exists, A9155 uses the computation zone. Only TBA transmitters are allocated
resources, however, all loaded transmitters are taken into account when calculating cost.
- The potential interferers: The potential interferers are loaded and verified if the option "Load all the potential
interferers" was selected. Potential interferers are transmitters whose calculation radius intersects the calcu-
lation radius of any TBA transmitter.
- Transmitters involved in the separation conditions with TBA transmitters: These are neighbours, co-site
transmitters, transmitters, or subcells of exceptional pairs and, in case of BSIC allocation, neighbours of neigh-
bours.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 247

A9155 User Manual
Figure 5.39: After entering all AFP settings
Once loaded, A9155 verifies network consistency and reports any problems, such as inconsistencies in the exist-
ing allocation. Inconsistent values, for example, a traffic load of 100, will be replaced by A9155 in order to avoid
blocking the AFP process. However, in some cases, such as an empty HSN domain when HSN allocation is
requested, the AFP process stops and informs the user of the steps to take to correct the situation.
Caution: You must read the information in the event viewer carefully before proceeding.
8. Enter the Target Computation Time in minutes. The AFP will use the target computation time to select the
method best suited to finding a suitable allocation solution. This means that you should not consider the results to
be optimised before the end of the target time. The AFP might stop before the end of the target computation time
but if the AFP has not found a solution by the end of the target computation time, it will continue improving the
frequency plan.
9. If desired, change the value set for Generator Initialisation.
The generator initialisation number lets you choose between random and deterministic sequences for the AFP
process. When the generator initialisation number is set to 0, calculations will be random. For any other generator
initialisation, the computations will be deterministic. Therefore, whenever the AFP is launched for the same
network with the same non-zero value set for the generator initialisation, the same results will be obtained.
Note: It should be noted that all AFP calculations are deterministic at the start, even if the genera-
tor initialisation number is set to 0. The effect of the random seed can only be observed
after a certain time (5 to 15% of the target computation time). If you want to the automatic
allocation process to show the effect of random allocation, you must let the AFP calculate
until the target time has elapsed.
10. Click Run to start the AFP process. The AFP Progress dialogue appears (see Figure 5.40).
248 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 5.40: The AFP Progress dialogue
The AFP Progress dialogue has the following sections:

- Progress: The Progress section gives you the elapsed time in comparison with the target computation time
and the number of solutions evaluated so far.
- General Information and Interference Matrix Report: This section displays either the current status of the
AFP process or the interference matrix report. You can switch the display between general information and
the interference matrix report by clicking the button in the top-right corner of this section ( ).
- Event Viewer: The Event Viewer displays a description of each event along with the time it occurred.
- Best Frequency Plan Costs: The Best Frequency Plan Costs section displays the costs and components
of each solution. You can select what information is displayed in the table by clicking the Display Options
button. The following options are available:
- Modifiable Costs
- Total Costs
- Frozen Costs
- Summed Components
- Main Components
- Additional Taxes
- Plan Comparison: The Plan Comparison section allows you to display histograms of the frequency cost and
usage distribution for both the initial plan and best plan. The histogram represents the channels as a function
of the frequency of their use. Moving the pointer over the histogram displays the cost or frequency of use of
each channel. The results are highlighted simultaneously in the Detailed Results list.
11. If you want to pause the AFP process or stop it, click the Pause/Stop button. The Results dialogue appears. For
information on the Results dialogue, see "Automatic Frequency Allocation Results" on page 249.
You can continue the AFP process, if you wish, by clicking the Resume button.
5.4.2.4.3 Automatic Frequency Allocation Results

When the AFP process has completed, or when you have stopped the process, the frequency plan proposed by the AFP
is displayed in the Results dialogue (see Figure 5.41). The Results dialogue opens in a separate window which means
you can return to your A9155 document while it is displayed. This allows you to verify your network data while you resolve
separation constraint violations and before you commit the automatic frequency allocation.
The results are listed in a table by transmitter, TRX type, and TRX and are coded by colour:
Light blue: The resource is frozen.
Red: The resource has been modified but there is a separation constraint violation.
Green: The resource has been modified respecting separation constraints.
Black: The resource has been not modified.
Blue: The resource has been assigned respecting separation constraints.
Purple: The resource has been assigned but there is a separation constraint violation.
Brown: The resource has not been modified but there is a separation constraint violation.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 249

A9155 User Manual
Figure 5.41: Frequency tab showing the assigned resources
When you move the pointer over a resource in the table, a tooltip displays gives the reason for the status indicated by the
colour (see Figure 5.42)
Figure 5.42: Details on the modified resource are given in a tooltip
Under Display, for each transmitter (Transmitter column)/subcell (TRX Type column)/TRX (Index column) combination,
A9155 displays the following columns, depending on the resources you selected to allocate (see "Running an Automatic
Frequency Allocation" on page 246):
BSIC
HSN
Channels
Any separation constraint violations are listed in the Separation Violations column. You can display details about sepa-
ration constraint violations in the following ways:
By right-clicking the separation constraint violation and selecting Separation Constraint Violations from the con-
text menu. A message box appears displaying details about the separation constraint violation (see Figure 5.43).
By clicking the Display Options button and selecting Show constraint violation details. The following additional
columns are displayed:
- With the TRX: The TRX with which this separation constraint violation occurs is indicated in the With the TRX
column in the form of a button. Clicking the button brings you to that TRX in the table.
- Co-channel: The probability of collision with the same channel on the TRX indicated in the With the TRX
column.
- Adjacent: The probability of collision with an adjacent channel on the TRX indicated in the With the TRX
column.
250 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 5.43: Separation violations

The AFP Rank column indicates the quality of the TRX in that subcell. The higher the AFP rank, the higher the cost, in
terms of the risk of interference. In other words, when you are trying to improve the solution proposed by the AFP tool, you
must concentrate on the TRXs with the highest AFP rank first. You can hide the AFP Rank column by clicking the Display
Options button and selecting Display the AFP Indicators.
The bottom of the Results window displays the messages related to the last solution (which may not be the best solution)
as well as potential related allocation problems.
Resolving Separation Constraint Violations
In the Results dialogue, you can resolve the displayed separation constraint violations using the Channel Assignment
column. The Channel Assignment column displays whether the value assigned is a new value or the initial value. The
Channel Assignment column enables you resolve separation constraint violations by re-assigning the values from the
original frequency plan, returning to the AFP-assigned value, or deleting the TRX.
To resolve separation constraint violations:
Click the entry in the Channel Assignment column corresponding to the TRX where the separation constraint
violation occurs and select one of the following:
- New Value: The value assigned by the AFP process. By default, only new values are displayed in the results
window. This option is not available if the value was not changed during the AFP process.
- Initial Value: The value before running the AFP or after changing the assigned value.
- Delete the TRX: The TRX will be deleted when you click the Commit button.
When you select one of options in the Channel Assignment column, A9155 updates not only the TRX affected, but also
the separation constraint violations of all other TRXs affected by the change.
As you modify the current frequency allocation plan, you can display the AFP plan as it appeared before modifications or
the initial frequency plan, if there was one.
To change the displayed plan:
Click the Display Options button and select one of the following:
- Display the current plan: When you select this option, A9155 displays the frequency plan as it now stands,
in other words, A9155 displays the AFP plan with your modifications. You can only modify the entries in the
Channel Assignment column in the current plan.
- Display the AFP plan: When you select this option, A9155 displays the AFP plan as it stood before you began
making modifications.
- Display the initial plan: When you select this option, A9155 displays the frequency plan as it was after the
AFP stopped, in other words, A9155 displays the AFP plan without your modifications.
You can cancel all the modifications you have made to the current AFP plan.
To cancel all the modifications you have to the current AFP plan:
Clicking the Actions button and select Reset channel allocations.
You can automatically resolve separation constraint violations by clicking the Actions button and selecting Constraint
Violations Resolution. For more information, see "Resolving Separation Constraint Violations Automatically" on
page 251.
Resolving Separation Constraint Violations Automatically
You can also resolve the separation constraint violations automatically. When you resolve separation constraint violations
automatically, A9155 deletes the TRXs that respond to set criteria and that are involved in the violations.
To resolve separation constraint violations automatically:
1. Click the Actions button and select Constraint Violations Resolution. The Constraint Violations Resolution
dialogue appears (see Figure 5.44).
2. Under TRXs to take into account, select one of the following:
- All the TRXs: A9155 will delete all TRXs that do not respect the separation constraints.
- Only the TRXs modified by the AFP: A9155 will delete only TRXs that were modified by that AFP that do
not respect the separation constraints.
3. Under Violation types to consider, select the check boxes corresponding to the separation constraint violations
that you want A9155 to take into consideration:
- Co-Transmitters: TRXs on the same transmitter.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 251

A9155 User Manual
- Co-Sites: TRXs on the same site.

- Neighbours: TRXs on neighbouring transmitters.
- Exceptional Pairs: TRXs on transmitters that are part of an exceptional pair.
4. Under Collision Probabilities, select the collision probability you want A9155 to take into consideration:
- If you want A9155 to take into consideration all co-channel and adjacent channel collision probabilities, select
All.
- If you want A9155 to take into consideration co-channel collision probabilities greater than or equal to a
defined value, select If the co-channel probability is >= and enter a value.
- If you want A9155 to take into consideration co-channel and adjacent collision probabilities greater than or
equal to a defined value, select If the co- or adjacent channel probability is >= and enter a value.
5. Under TRX Types, select the check boxes of the TRX types you want A9155 to take into consideration:
- Apply to Control Channel TRXs: If you select this check box, control channel TRXs (i.e., BCCH TRXs) will
be deleted.
- Apply to other TRXs: If you select this check box, TRXs on non-control channel TRX types (i.e., TCH or
TCH_INNER) will be deleted.
6. Click OK. A9155 deletes the TRXs that are involved in the separation constraint violations and that respond to set
criteria.
Figure 5.44: Constraint Violation Resolution
Committing and Saving the Frequency Plan
Once you have made the necessary modifications to the frequency plan, you can commit the frequency plan.
To commit the currently displayed frequency plan:
1. Ensure that the currently displayed frequency plan is the one you want to commit by clicking the Display Options
button and selecting the desired frequency plan
2. Click Commit.
You can also export the currently displayed frequency plan.
To export the currently displayed frequency plan:
1. Ensure that the currently displayed frequency plan is the one you want to export by clicking the Display Options
button and selecting the desired frequency plan:
252 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

2. Click the Actions button and select Export Results. The Export dialogue appears.
3. Export the frequency plan as explained in "Exporting Tables to External Files" on page 55.
Note: If you are not satisfied with the current frequency plan, you can click the Resume button to
restart the AFP process from the last proposed solution in order to try to improve it.
5.5 Analysing Network Quality

When you are working on a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network, you can analyse the quality of the network using the coverage
predictions provided in A9155.
For GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks, A9155 provides both circuit and packet-specific coverage predictions as well as quality
indicator studies for both GSM and GPRS/EDGE.
"Interference Coverage Predictions" on page 253
"Packet-Specific Coverage Predictions" on page 259
"Making a Circuit Quality Indicator (BER, FER, or MOS) Coverage Prediction" on page 266
"Auditing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Frequency Plan" on page 269
"Checking Consistency Between Transmitters and Subcells" on page 271
"Displaying the Frequency Allocation" on page 272
"Calculating Key Performance Indicators of a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Network" on page 274
5.5.1 Interference Coverage Predictions

The interference coverage predictions described in this section depend on the existence of a frequency plan. If you have
not yet allocated frequencies, you must do so before carrying out any of the coverage predictions described in this section.
For information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 234.
Each of the interference coverage predictions described in this section can be carried out based on a fixed noise value or
based on the settings for a particular terminal. For information on defining a terminal, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE
Terminals" on page 303.
The following GSM-specific coverage predictions are explained in this section:
"Making Quality Studies Based on CI or C(I+N)" on page 253
"Studying Interference Areas" on page 255.
You can also study interference areas by using the Point Analysis window:
"Analysing Interference Areas Using a Point Analysis" on page 257
"Example of Analysing Interference Using a Point Analysis" on page 258.
5.5.1.1 Making Quality Studies Based on CI or C(I+N)

In A9155, you can make quality studies based on CI or C(I+N) levels once channels have been allocated. If you have
not yet allocated frequencies, you must do so before carrying out the coverage prediction described in this section. For
information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 234.
The coverage by CI level study enables you to determine CI levels for transmitters sharing either an identical channel
or an adjacent channel with other transmitters as a function of the carrier-to-interference ratio. You can calculate the cover-
age by CI or by CI + N. "N" is the receiver total noise and is defined as the thermal noise (set to -121 dBm) + noise figure.
When you calculate the coverage by CI + N, you can select whether the noise figure used is a fixed value or the noise
value set for a selected terminal.
If Detailed Results is selected on the Condition tab, the following results are displayed per pixel, depending on the
hopping mode set for the subcells covered by the study:
Non-hopping mode: A TRX channel of the selected TRX type (BCCH, TCH, or TCH_INNER).
Base-band hopping: The MAL of the subcell (BCCH, TCH, or TCH_INNER).
Synthesised-frequency hopping: The MAL-MAIO of the subcell (BCCH, TCH, or TCH_INNER).
To make a coverage prediction by CI levels:
4. Select Coverage by C/I Levels and click OK.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 253

A9155 User Manual
for each pixel.
Figure 5.45: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by C/I levels

7. Under Signal Conditions, set the following parameters:
- Click the arrow button ( ) and select one of the following thresholds:
range.
- Under Server, select "Best Signal Level per HCS Layer" to consider all servers. When you select "Best Signal
Level per HCS Layer" or "All," there may be areas where several transmitters experience interference. On
these pixels, several CI values are calculated. Therefore, on the Display tab, you select to display either the
lowest CI level or the highest CI level.
- Enter a margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "5 dB."
deviation per clutter class) are applied only to the values for C.
class.
8. Under Interference Condition, set the following parameters:
- You can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the Interfered TRXs list.
- Subcell C/I Threshold: Select Subcell C/I Threshold if you want to use the CI threshold specified for
each subcell (including the defined power offset) as the lower end of the CI range.
- Specified C/I Threshold: Select Specified C/I Threshold if you want to enter a threshold to be used for
all subcells as the lower end of the CI range.
- Select either CI or C(I+N).
each subcell (including the defined power offset) as the upper end of the CI range.
all subcells as the upper end of the CI range.
254 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Notes: The defined CI values define the range of CI values to be displayed. Values outside of
this range are not displayed.
You can not select Subcell C/I Threshold as both the lower and the upper end of the CI
range to be considered.
- Select whether you want the defined CI or CI+N condition to be Satisfied By:
- At least one TRX: When you select the option At least one TRX, the defined interference condition must
be satisfied by at least one TRX on a given pixel for the results to be displayed on that pixel.
- The worst TRX: When you select the option The worst TRX, A9155 selects the worst results for each
pixel. If the worst results do not satisfy the defined interference condition, the results will not be displayed
on that pixel.
Note: These options are available only if a lower C/I Threshold is set.
- If you have selected "C/(I+N)", you can define the value to be added to the interference. The defined noise
figure is added to the thermal noise value (defined by default at -121 dBm) to calculate the value of N. Select
one of the following:
- Based on Terminal: Select Based on Terminal if you want to use the noise figure defined for a terminal
and select the terminal from the list.
- Fixed Value: Select Fixed Value if you want to enter a value and then enter the noise figure in the text
box.
9. If you want discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it taken into account during the calculation
of interference, select the DTX taken into account check box and enter the percentage of time during which a
user is talking in the Voice Activity Factor text box.
13. Select the Detailed Results check box if you want to display detailed results per transmitter. The results displayed
depend on the subcell frequency hopping mode:
- Non-Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for one channel of each TRX in non-hopping mode.
- Base Band Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL of each subcell in base band hopping
mode.
- Synthesised Frequency Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL-MAIO of each subcell in syn-
thesised frequency hopping mode.
For a coverage prediction by CI levels, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "CI level (dB)" is
selected by default.
If you selected "Best Signal Level per HCS Layer" or "All" from the Server list on the Condition tab, there may be
areas where several transmitters experience interference. On these pixels, several CI values are calculated.
Therefore, you can base the results displayed on either the Field "Min. CI level (dB)" or "Max. CI level (dB)" as
well as the "CI level (dB)" Field.
For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
5.5.1.2 Studying Interference Areas

In A9155, you can study interference zones once channels have been allocated. If you have not yet allocated frequencies,
you must do so before carrying out the interfered zones study. For information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating
Frequencies and BSICs" on page 234.
You can create an interfered zones study to predict areas where transmitters suffer interference caused by other transmit-
ters using the same channel or an adjacent channel. A9155 calculates the CI level on each pixel where reception condi-
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 255

A9155 User Manual
tions are satisfied. Of these, A9155 calculates the coverage for pixels where the calculated CI is lower than the defined
upper limit. The pixel is coloured according to the selected attribute of the interfered transmitter attribute.
If Detailed Results is selected on the Condition tab, the following results are displayed per pixel, depending on the
hopping mode set for the subcells covered by the study:
Non-hopping mode: A TRX channel of the selected TRX type (BCCH, TCH, or TCH_INNER).
Base-band hopping: The MAL of the subcell (BCCH, TCH, or TCH_INNER).
Synthesised-frequency hopping: The MAL-MAIO of the subcell (BCCH, TCH, or TCH_INNER).
To make a coverage prediction by interfered zones:
4. Select Interfered Zones and click OK.
for each pixel.
Figure 5.46: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by interfered zones
7. Under Signal Conditions, set the following parameters:
range.
ability. Shadowing margins (depending on the entered cell edge coverage probability and the CI standard
deviation per clutter class) are applied only to the values for C. Shadowing margins are not taken into account
in determining the values for interference.
class.
8. Under Interference Condition, set the following parameters:
- You can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the Interfered TRXs list.
256 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Select either CI or C(I+N).
- If you have selected "C/(I+N)", you can define the value to be added to the interference. The defined noise
figure is added to the thermal noise value (defined at -121 dBm) to calculate the value of N. Select one of the
following:
box.
9. If you want discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it taken into account during the calculation
of interference, select the DTX taken into account check box and enter the percentage of time during which a
user is talking in the Voice Activity Factor text box.
13. Select the Detailed Results check box if you want to display detailed results per transmitter. The results displayed
depend on the subcell frequency hopping mode:
mode.
- Synthesised Frequency Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL-MAIO of each subcell in syn-
thesised frequency hopping mode.
For a coverage prediction by interfered zones, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmit-
ter" is selected by default.
5.5.1.3 Analysing Interference Areas Using a Point Analysis

In A9155, you can study the interferers of a transmitter using the Point Analysis. If you have not yet allocated frequencies,
you must do so before using the Point Analysis to study interferers. For information on creating a frequency plan, see
"Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 234.
To make a point analysis to study interference areas:
lowing:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 257

A9155 User Manual
4. Click the Interference tab.
At the top of the Interference tab is the name of the most interfered channel on the selected TRXs of the selected
transmitter.
The Interference tab displays, in the form of a bar graph, the signal level of the selected transmitter, a black bar
indicating the total interference experienced by the receiver, and bars representing the interference received from
each interferer. The information displayed in the bar graph depends on the hopping mode of the subcell identified
in the left margin of the graph:
- Non-Hopping Mode: The most interfered channel of the selected transmitter subcell (BCCH, TCH, or
TCH_INNER) or the most interfered of all the transmitter subcells (All).
- Base Band Hopping Mode: The most interfered MAL of the selected transmitter subcell (BCCH, TCH, or
TCH_INNER) or the most interfered MAL of all the transmitter subcells (All).
- Synthesised Frequency Hopping Mode: The most interfered MAL-MAIO pair of the selected transmitter
subcell (BCCH, TCH, or TCH_INNER) or the most interfered MAL-MAIO of all the transmitter subcells (All).
Figure 5.47 on page 259 gives an example of the Interference tab. The signal level of the transmitter, Site78_G4,
is -81.44 dB and is indicated by a blue bar. The black bar indicates the total interference experienced by the
receiver (-96.56 dB). The four interferers are responsible for -100.00 dB (brown), -102.50 dB (green), -103.75 dB
(red), and -106.50 dB (magenta). The bar indicating the interference caused by Site98_G4 is only partially filled.
The entire bar indicates the interference that could potentially be caused by the transmitter whereas the filled part
of the bar indicates the actual interference caused. A transmitters actual interference can be lower than its poten-
tial interference:
- If it uses synthesised frequency hopping mode (reduction due to fractional load)

- If it uses adjacent channels (reduction due to adjacent channel protection)
- If the subcell it is modelling is a TRX_INNER subcell (reduction due to lower offset).
5. You can change the following options at the top of the Interference tab:
- TRXs: Select the TRXs to be analysed.
- I: Select whether the interference should be calculated from adjacent channels, co-channels, or from all chan-
nels.
- Interference Method: Select whether the interference is calculated by CI or by C(I+N).
6. Right-click the Interference tab and select Properties to display the Analysis Properties dialogue. This dialogue
is available from the context menu on all tabs of the Point Analysis Tool window. You can change the following:
class.
7. Click the Results tab.
The Results tab displays the current position of the receiver, the clutter class it is situated on, and the received
signal and interference of each transmitter in decreasing order.
8. You can change the following options at the top of the Results tab:
- TRXs: Select the TRXs to be analysed.
- HCS Layer: Select the HCS layer to be analysed.
- Interference Method: Select whether the interference is calculated by CI or by C(I+N). Thermal noise is
taken into account by both calculation methods.
5.5.1.4 Example of Analysing Interference Using a Point Analysis

When you use the Point Analysis to study the interferers of a transmitter, the Interference tab displays, in the form of a
bar graph, the signal level of the selected transmitter, a black bar indicating the total interference experienced by the
receiver, and bars representing the signal levels from each interferer contributing to total interference. The bars represent-
ing the signal level of the transmitter or of the interferers consist of two parts: a solid part which indicates the received
signal or interference, and an outlined part which indicates the amount of signal or interference reduction. The signal level
of the transmitter can be reduced due to subcell power offset. For each interferer, interference can be reduced:
If it uses synthesised frequency hopping mode (reduction due to fractional load)
If it uses adjacent channels (reduction due to adjacent channel protection)
If the subcell it is modelling is a TRX_INNER subcell (reduction due to lower offset).
In this example, the studied transmitter is Site78_G4. Potential interference from all interferers (both co-channel and adja-
cent channel) received on all its TRXs is studied; in other words, the worst case is studied. The requested cell edge cover-
age probability is 82%. As with interfered zones coverage predictions and coverage predictions by CI levels, A9155
analyses the most interfered channel of the studied transmitter if it is using non-hopping model.
258 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 5.47: Point Analysis Tool - Interference tab
The transmitters in this example are the following:

Site78_G4 has two subcells: one of TRX type BCCH and one of TRX type TCH. Neither has a power offset
defined. Channel 512 is assigned to the BCCH TRX.
Non-hopping mode is assigned to the BCCH TRXs of all transmitters. Base-band hopping mode is assigned to the
TCH TRXs.
The Point Analysis gives the following results:
The signal level of the transmitter Site78_G4 is -81.44 dBm and is indicated by a blue bar. It would have been
-71.38 dB, but was decreased by 10.04 dB due to the shadowing margin. Only the signal level (C) is reduced by
the shadowing margin (as calculated by the cell edge coverage probability and the CI standard deviation defined
per clutter class). The interference level (I) is not affected by the shadowing margin.
The black bar indicates the total interference experienced by the receiver (-96.56 dB). A9155 calculates the inter-
ference level by considering 100% of the voice activity factor and traffic load. Neither DTX, nor the traffic load of
TRXs are taken into account in evaluating the interference levels.
The four interferers are responsible for -100.00 dBm (brown), -102.50 dBm (green), -103.75 dBm (red), and
-106.50 dBm (magenta). The bar indicating the interference caused by Site98_G4 is only partially filled. The entire
bar indicates the interference that could potentially be caused by the transmitter whereas the filled part of the bar
indicates the actual interference caused. A transmitters actual interference can be lower than its potential inter-
ference:
At the top of the Interference tab, the name of the most interfered channel of Site78_G4 is channel 512 and the C/I received
is 15.12 dB. An analysis of the interferers gives the following information:
The bars representing Site95_G4, Site94_G6, and Site79_G6 are full. On all three transmitters, channel 512 is
assigned to the BCCH TRX of the transmitter. It is, therefore, a co-channel interferer. No power offset is defined,
therefore the interference is not reduced.
The bar representing Site98_G4 is partly full. The bar is only partly full because the interference is reduced: on
this transmitter, channel 512 is not assigned; channel 513 is assigned to the BCCH TRX. It is, therefore, an adja-
cent channel interferer. The interference is therefore reduced by the adjacent channel protection level of 18 dB.
No power offset is defined for this subcell. If a power offset had been defined for this subcell, the interference would
have been reduced by an additional 3 dB. A fractional load might be another reason for reduced interference.
5.5.2 Packet-Specific Coverage Predictions

The packet-specific coverage predictions described in this section can use an existing frequency plan. If you have not yet
allocated frequencies, you can do so before carrying out any of the coverage predictions described in this section. For
information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 234.
The coverage predictions described in this section can only be made on transmitters that are packet-capable, in other
words, GPRS or EDGE-capable transmitters. For information on defining packet capabilities on a transmitter, see "Creat-
ing or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 174.
Each of the packet-specific coverage predictions described in this section can be carried out based on a fixed noise value
or based on the settings for a particular terminal as well as the settings for a particular mobility. For information on defining
a terminal, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals" on page 303. For information on defining a mobility, see "Model-
ling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types" on page 302.
The following packet-specific coverage predictions are explained in this section:
"Making a Coverage Prediction by GPRS/EGPRS Coding Schemes" on page 260
"Making a Coverage Prediction by Packet Throughput per Timeslot" on page 261
"Making a BLER Coverage Prediction" on page 264
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 259

A9155 User Manual
5.5.2.1 Making a Coverage Prediction by GPRS/EGPRS Coding Schemes

In A9155, you can make a coverage prediction of the GPRS/EGPRS coding schemes, whether channels have been allo-
cated or not. If you have not yet allocated frequencies, you can do so before carrying out the coverage prediction described
in this section. For information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 234.
You can make a coverage prediction of the coding schemes for either GPRS, for EGPRS, or for both. The choice of coding
scheme is based on the radio conditions (C, C/I, C and C/I, or C/N, C/(I+N), C/N and C/(I+N)). Therefore, the better the
values for C and CI are, the higher the coding scheme will be.
As well, you can restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal or mobility or to a combination of terminal and mobil-
ity. When you restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal, A9155 bases the coverage prediction on the C and
CI graphs for the selected terminal, as well as on its noise figure. As well, A9155 respects the terminals defined coding
scheme limit. When you select a mobility, A9155 considers which transmitters have the GPRS/EGPRS equipment that
can support the selected mobility and the coding scheme threshold for that mobility. For information on defining a terminal,
see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals" on page 303.
A coverage prediction by coding schemes enables you to determine the coding scheme assigned to transmitters sharing
either an identical channel or an adjacent channel with other transmitters. Coding schemes are assigned according to the
radio condition (i.e., C, C/I, C and C/I, with or without thermal noise).
To make a coverage prediction by GPRS/EGPRS coding schemes:
4. Select GPRS/EGPRS Coding Schemes and click OK.
for each pixel.
Figure 5.48: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by GPRS/EGPRS coding schemes
7. Under Coverage Conditions, set the following parameters:
class.
8. Under Interference Condition, you can define how A9155 will calculate interference for the GPRS/EGPRS
coding scheme coverage prediction.
260 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: If, under GPRS/EGPRS, you select C and not CI for the coverage prediction, the only
option you need to select under Interference Condition is the TRX type to consider from
the TRXs list.
You can select the following parameters:
- You can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the TRXs list.
- If you want discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it taken into account, select the DTX
taken into account check box and enter the percentage of time during which a user is talking in the Voice
Activity Factor text box.
- Select the Traffic Load that will be used to calculate interference:
- Select the Co-Channel check box if you want co-channel interference to be taken into consideration.
- Select the Adjacent Channels check box if you want interference caused by adjacent channels to be taken
into consideration.
- Select the Detailed Results check box if you want to display detailed results per transmitter. The results dis-
played depend on the subcell frequency hopping mode:
mode.
- Synthesised Frequency Hopping Mode: The results are displayed for the MAL-MAIO of each subcell in
synthesised frequency hopping mode.
9. Under GPRS/EGPRS, set the following parameters:
- From the Calculations list, select the technology on which the coding scheme calculation will be based:
- GPRS/EDGE: If you select GPRS/EDGE, both coding schemes (CS) and modulated and coding schemes
(MCS) will be used.
- GPRS: If you select GPRS, only coding schemes (CS) will be used.
- EDGE: If you select EDGE, only modulated and coding schemes (MCS) will be used.
- Select whether you want to base the coverage prediction on C or CI. If you select C, the only option you need
to select under Interference Condition is the TRX type to consider from the TRXs list.
- If desired, select which Terminal you want to base the coding scheme coverage prediction on. When you
restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal, A9155 bases the coverage prediction on the C and CI
graphs for the selected terminal, as well as on its noise figure. As well, A9155 respects the terminals defined
coding scheme limit.
- If desired, select which Mobility you want to base the coding scheme coverage prediction on. When you select
a mobility, A9155 considers which transmitters have the GPRS/EGPRS equipment that can support the
selected mobility and relative threshold.
- Enter a Noise Figure. By default, a noise figure of 8 dB is used if no terminal is selected.
- Select the Thermal Noise Taken into Account check box if you want A9155 to consider thermal noise.
- Select the Ideal Link Adaptation check box if you want the coding scheme that offers the highest throughput
to be selected. Otherwise, A9155 will choose the coding scheme according to signal level and quality.
For a coverage prediction by coding schemes, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Coding
Schemes" is selected by default. If desired, you can base the display on the Field "Best Coding Schemes," in
which case, A9155 displays the best coding scheme for each pixel.
5.5.2.2 Making a Coverage Prediction by Packet Throughput per Timeslot

In A9155, you can make a coverage prediction of the packet throughput per timeslot, whether channels have been allo-
cated or not. If you have not yet allocated frequencies, you can do so before carrying out the coverage prediction described
in this section. For information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 234.
You can make a coverage prediction based on the RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot or based on the application through-
put per timeslot for a selected service. The coverage prediction displays areas where the throughput on one packet per
timeslot exceeds user-defined thresholds. The throughput is calculated using the Throughput/Timeslot graphs defined
for each coding scheme.
You can make a coverage prediction of the packet throughput per timeslot for either GPRS, for EGPRS, or for both. As
well, you can restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal or mobility or to a combination of terminal and mobility.
When you restrict the coverage prediction to a selected terminal, A9155 bases the coverage prediction on the C and CI
graphs for the selected terminal. As well, A9155 respects the terminals defined coding scheme limit. When you select a
mobility, A9155 considers which transmitters have the GPRS/EGPRS equipment that can support the selected mobility.
A9155 can use the noise figure defined for the selected terminal or a user-defined noise figure if no terminal is selected
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 261

A9155 User Manual
or if the calculations are based on an interpolation of the values for CI and C(I+N). For information on defining a terminal,
see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals" on page 303.
To make a coverage prediction by packet throughput per timeslot:
4. Select one of the following and click OK:
- RLC/MAC Throughput/Timeslot: Select RLC/MAC Throughput/Timeslot if you want to base the coverage
prediction on the RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot. The option RLC/MAC Throughput/Timeslot, under
Throughput/Timeslot on the Condition tab, is chosen automatically.
- Application Throughput/Timeslot: Select Application Throughput/Timeslot if you want to base the cov-
erage prediction on the application throughput per timeslot. The option Application Throughput/Timeslot
Based on Service, under Throughput/Timeslot on the Condition tab, is chosen automatically. You can then
choose the packet-based service on which to base the coverage prediction.
for each pixel.
Figure 5.49: Condition settings for a RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot coverage prediction

class.
8. Under Interference Condition, you can define how A9155 will calculate interference for the throughput per
timeslot coverage prediction.
Note: If, under GPRS/EGPRS, you select Based on C for the coverage prediction, the only option
you need to select under Interference Condition is the TRX type to consider from the
TRXs list.
262 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

into consideration. The adjacent channel effect on the concerned victim channel, i.e., the interference, is
decreased by the adjacent channel protection level.
mode.
- From the Calculations list, select the technology for which the packet throughput per timeslot calculation will
be calculated:
- GPRS/EDGE: If you select GPRS/EDGE both coding schemes (CS) and modulation and coding schemes
(MCS) will be used.
- GPRS: If you select GPRS only coding schemes (CS) will be used.
- EDGE: If you select EDGE only modulation and coding schemes (MCS) will be used.
- Select Based on C if you want to base the coverage prediction on C. If you select Based on C, the only option
you need to select under Interference Condition is the TRX type to consider from the TRXs list. Otherwise,
select Based on CI.
- If desired, select which Terminal you want to base the coverage prediction on. When you restrict the coverage
prediction to a selected terminal, A9155 bases the coverage prediction on the C and CI graphs for the
selected terminal. As well, A9155 respects the terminals defined coding scheme limit and noise figure.
selected mobility.
- Enter a Noise Figure. By default, the noise figure is 8 dB.
for a given C or CI to be selected. Otherwise, A9155 will choose the coding scheme by considering only the
coding scheme admission threshold in terms of C and/or CI.
10. If desired, under Throughput/Timeslot, you can change the type of packet throughput per timeslot coverage pre-
diction by changing the selection:
prediction on the RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot. The RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot is the throughput
extracted from the coding schemes.
- Application Throughput/Timeslot: Select Application Throughput/Timeslot Based on Service if you
want to base the coverage prediction on the application throughput per timeslot and choose the packet-based
Service on which to base the coverage prediction.
For a coverage prediction by packet throughput per timeslot, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the
Field "Throughput/Timeslot" is selected by default. If desired, you can change the values displayed by selecting
one of the following values from the Field list:
- Throughput/Timeslot: Each layer shows the throughput that a transmitter can carry on one timeslot.
- Best Throughput/Timeslot: The resulting coverage gives the best throughput/timeslot per pixel from the pre-
vious display.
- Average Throughput/Timeslot: Gives the average throughput that the transmitter can carry on one timeslot
per pixel. If there are different coverage areas for different TRXs, this study will calculate the union of these
coverages and display the average values over these coverage areas. While the other coverages for
throughput/timeslot perform an intersection over these coverage zones keeping the minimum value of
throughput per pixel.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 263

A9155 User Manual
5.5.2.3 Making a BLER Coverage Prediction

In A9155, you can make a coverage prediction of the block error rate (BLER) measured per transmitter, whether channels
have been allocated or not. If you have not yet allocated frequencies, you can do so before carrying out the coverage
prediction described in this section. For information on creating a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs"
on page 234.
The BLER is determined after A9155 determines which coding scheme is to be selected for a given C or CI. When the
coding scheme has been determined, 1 - BLER represents the efficiency factor applied to the maximum throughput of the
coding scheme to obtain the served throughput. The BLER can be determined for each pixel.
You can make a BLER coverage prediction for either GPRS, for EGPRS, or for both. As well, you can restrict the coverage
prediction to a selected terminal or mobility or to a combination of terminal and mobility. When you restrict the coverage
prediction to a selected terminal, A9155 bases the coverage prediction on the C and CI graphs for the selected terminal.
As well, A9155 respects the terminals defined coding scheme limit. When you select a mobility, A9155 considers which
transmitters have the GPRS/EGPRS equipment that can support the selected mobility. A9155 can use the noise figure
defined for the selected terminal or a user-defined noise figure if no terminal is selected or if the calculations are based on
an interpolation of the values for CI and C(I+N). For information on defining a terminal, see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/
EDGE Terminals" on page 303.
To make a BLER coverage prediction:
4. Select one of the following and click OK:
prediction on the RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot. The option RLC/MAC Throughput/Timeslot, under
Throughput/Timeslot on the Condition tab, is chosen automatically.
- Application Throughput/Timeslot: Select Application Throughput/Timeslot if you want to base the cov-
erage prediction on the application throughput per timeslot. The option Application Throughput/Timeslot
Based on Service, under Throughput/Timeslot on the Condition tab, is chosen automatically. You can then
choose the packet-based service on which to base the coverage prediction.
for each pixel.
Figure 5.50: Condition settings for a BLER coverage prediction
264 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


class.
8. Under Interference Condition, you can define how A9155 will calculate CI for the BLER coverage prediction.
Note: If, under GPRS/EGPRS, you select Based on C for the coverage prediction, the only option
you need to select under Interference Condition is the TRX type to consider from the
TRXs list.

mode.
- From the Calculations list, select the technology for which the packet throughput per timeslot calculation will
be calculated:
- GPRS/EDGE: If you select GPRS/EDGE both coding schemes (CS) and modulation and coding schemes
(MCS) will be used.
- GPRS: If you select GPRS only coding schemes (CS) will be used.
- EDGE: If you select EDGE only modulation and coding schemes (MCS) will be used.
- Select Based on C if you want to base the coverage prediction on C. If you select Based on C, the only option
you need to select under Interference Condition is the TRX type to consider from the TRXs list. Otherwise,
select Based on CI.
prediction to a selected terminal, A9155 bases the coverage prediction on the C and CI graphs for the
selected terminal, as well as on its noise figure. As well, A9155 respects the terminals defined coding scheme
limit.
selected mobility and relative threshold.
to be selected. Otherwise, A9155 will chose the coding scheme according to signal level and quality.
10. If desired, under Throughput/Timeslot, you can change the type of packet throughput per timeslot coverage pre-
diction by changing the selection:
prediction on the RLC/MAC throughput per timeslot.
- Application Throughput/Timeslot: Select Application Throughput/Timeslot Based on Service if you
want to base the coverage prediction on the application throughput per timeslot and choose the packet-based
Service on which to base the coverage prediction.
For a BLER coverage prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" is selected by default. Select one of the
following values from the Field list:
- BLER (%): The coverage is coloured according to the block error rate measured per transmitter. If the
throughput per timeslot is greater than the maximum throughput per timeslot, the BLER is 0%.
- Max BLER: Gives the coverage according to the maximum block error rate per pixel for each transmitter.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 265

A9155 User Manual
5.5.3 Making a Circuit Quality Indicator (BER, FER, or MOS)

Coverage Prediction
In A9155, you can make a circuit quality indicator coverage prediction based on the bit error rate (BER), the frame erasure
rate (FER), or the mean opinion score (MOS). The circuit quality indicator coverage predictions refer to the codec equip-
ment assigned to a transmitter or, optionally, to a terminal. For information on using codec equipment in transmitters and
terminals, see "Using Codec Equipment in Transmitters and Terminals" on page 295.
The circuit quality indicator coverage prediction can use an existing frequency plan. If you have not yet allocated frequen-
cies, you can do so before carrying out any of the coverage predictions described in this section. For information on creat-
ing a frequency plan, see "Allocating Frequencies and BSICs" on page 234.
Each of the circuit-specific studies described in this section can be carried out based on a fixed noise value or based on
the settings for a particular terminal as well as the settings for a particular mobility. For information on defining a terminal,
see "Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals" on page 303. For information on defining a mobility, see "Modelling GSM/
GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types" on page 302.
The circuit quality indicator coverage prediction displays the areas where the selected circuit quality indicator (BER, FER,
or MOS) for the transmitter satisfies the user-defined criteria. The quality indicator is calculated using CN or C(I+N) and
the adaptation or quality thresholds defined for the codec equipment on each transmitter. Transmitters that have no codec
equipment defined are not taken into consideration in this study. If a transmitter has codec equipment, A9155 proceeds
as follows:
If a terminal type is not defined or does not have codec equipment assigned, A9155 considers the codec equip-
ment assigned to the transmitter only.
If the terminal and the transmitter have different codec equipment, A9155 determines the intersection of the codec
modes contained in the transmitter and terminal codec equipment. The codec mode is then selected according to
the calculated CN or CI + N on each pixel. For a given quality or a given codec mode, look-up tables defined in
Codec Equipment provide the circuit quality indicator (BER, FER, or MOS) displayed as a result.
The quality indicator used for ideal link adaptation is determined by the codec equipment assigned to the transmitters.
To make a circuit quality indicator coverage prediction:
4. Select Circuit Quality Indicators and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the pilot signal
quality prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites
to display in the results. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 66.
for each pixel.
266 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 5.51: Condition settings BLER coverage prediction

class.
8. Under Interference Condition, you can define how A9155 will calculate interference for the throughput per
timeslot coverage prediction.
Note: If, under Quality Indicators Calculation, you select Calculations Based on CN for the
coverage prediction, the only option you need to select under Interference Condition is
the TRX type to consider from the TRXs list.
mode.
9. Under Quality Indicators Calculation, set the following parameters:
- Select Calculations Based on CN if you want to base the coverage prediction on CN. If you select Calcu-
lations Based on CN for the coverage prediction, the only option you need to select under Interference
Condition is the TRX type to consider from the TRXs list. The codec mode is selected only according to signal
level.
- Select Calculations Based on C(I+N) if you want to base the coverage prediction on C(I+N).
prediction to a selected terminal and the terminal type and the transmitter have different codec equipment,
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 267

A9155 User Manual
A9155 determines the intersection of the codec modes contained in the transmitter and terminal codec equip-
ment. The codec mode is then selected according to the calculated CN or CI + N on each pixel. For a given
quality or a given codec mode, look-up tables defined in Codec Equipment provide the circuit quality indicator
(BER, FER, or MOS) displayed as a result.
a mobility, A9155 considers the codec mode applicable for the selected mobility on the codec equipment.
For a circuit quality indicator coverage prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" is selected by default. Select
one of the following values from the Field list:
- BER: The coverage is coloured according to the bit error rate measured per transmitter.
- FER: The coverage is coloured according to the frame erasure rate measured per transmitter.
- MOS: The coverage is coloured according to the mean opinion score measured per transmitter.
- Max BER: The coverage is coloured according to the maximum bit error rate per pixel of the covering trans-
mitters.
- Max FER: The coverage is coloured according to the maximum frame erasure rate per pixel of the covering
transmitters.
- Max MOS: The coverage is coloured according to the maximum mean opinion score per pixel of the covering
transmitters.
Once A9155 has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. The results of
circuit quality indicator coverage predictions based on BER, FER, or MOS are broken down by transmitter, as you can see
by clicking the Expand button ( ) to expand the results of the coverage prediction after you have calculated it. The results
of circuit quality indicator coverage predictions based on Max BER, Max FER, or Max MOS are broken down by threshold.
5.5.4 Studying Interference Between Transmitters

In A9155, you can use the Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool to study the effects of an interfering signal from one trans-
mitter on the signal of any other transmitter within the computation zone. You can restrict the interference to a set threshold
or you can base it on a selected coverage prediction. Using a coverage prediction enables you to compare the results of
the Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool to the results of the selected coverage prediction.
Note: You must have a computation zone defined to use the Sector-to-Sector Interference
Tool. For information on creating a computation zone, see "Creating a Computation Zone"
on page 194.
To display interference between transmitters on the map:

1. Click View > Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool. The Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool window appears.
2. Under Transmitters:
- Select the transmitter whose signal is interfered from the Victim list or click the Victim button ( ) and select
the transmitter by clicking it on the map.
- Select the transmitter whose signal is interfering from the Interferer list or click the Interferer button ( ) and
select the transmitter by clicking it on the map.
The victim and interferer transmitters are displayed on the map with specific icons ( and respectively).
3. Under Coverage Conditions, select what you are going to base the interference calculation on:
- Signal Level: Enter a signal threshold.
- Based on Study: Select the coverage prediction on which you want to base the interference calculation on.
4. Click Calculate. The interference will be displayed on the map if you have selected the Visible check box (see
Figure 5.52).
268 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 5.52: The Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool
A9155 allows you to display the interference between transmitters in a histogram.

To display interference between transmitters in a histogram:
After you have calculated the interference as explained earlier in this section, click the Histogram button. The Sta-
tistics window appears.
5.5.5 Auditing a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Frequency Plan

When you have assigned frequencies to the TRXs, either manually or automatically, you can make an audit of the
frequency plan. The audit allows you to verify the consistency and validity of the following GSM/GPRS/EDGE network
parameters:
The transmitters to be allocated: The transmitters to be allocated, or TBA transmitters, are the active and filtered
transmitters belonging to the transmitters folder from which the AFP was started and that are located within the
focus zone.
The potential interferers: The potential interferers are transmitters whose calculation radius intersects the cal-
culation radius of any TBA transmitter.
Transmitters involved in the separation conditions with TBA transmitters: These are the neighbours, co-site
transmitters, transmitters, or subcells of exceptional pairs and, in case of BSIC allocation, neighbours of neigh-
bours.
The frequency plan audit automatically checks certain points and allows you to define additional points to be verified. The
points which are automatically verified are:
Each transmitter has a single BCCH TRX defined.
Subcell parameters respect the cell type on which the subcell is based.
TRX parameters respect the TRX type on which the TRX is based.
No frequency, HSN, or BSIC domain is empty.
For subcells where the hopping mode is NH or BBH, each TRX has a single, unique frequency.
For subcells where the hopping mode is SSH, each TRX has a defined frequency list.
For subcells where the hopping mode is SSH, the maximum MAL length is respected.
For subcells where the hopping mode is SSH, the MAIO is lower than the number of frequencies in the MAL.
The number of timeslots per subcell is lower than or equal to the multiplexing factor (or, for the BCCH subcell, the
number of timeslots equals the multiplexing factor minus one).
The number of timeslots per subcell is be 0.
You can configure the frequency plan audit to verify the following points as well:
Frequency domains belong to the assigned frequency band.
The current frequency plan respects the assigned allocation strategy (free or group-constrained).
The allocated resources, the frequency, HSN, or BSIC, belong to the assigned domain.
There is consistency between the excluded channels defined at the subcell and the assigned channels.
The exceptional separation constraints are respected.
No transmitter has the same BSIC-BCCH pair as one of its neighbours.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 269

A9155 User Manual
No transmitter has two neighbours with the same BSIC-BCCH pair.

To make a frequency plan audit:
3. Select Frequency Plan > Audit from the context menu. The Frequency Plan Audit dialogue appears.
4. On the General tab, under Loading, select the subcells to be considered:
- Load all the subcells potentially involved in separation constraints: Select this check box if you want all
transmitters involved in separation constraints to be considered in the audit. You can review and modify sep-
aration constraints and exceptional pairs on the Separation tab of this dialogue (see step 8.).
- Load all potential interferers: Select this check box if you want all potential interferers to be considered in
the audit.Check this box to load all the potential servers potentially involved in interferences with servers to be
normally taken into account through the computation zone.
5. Under Optional Checking, select the check boxes of the domain constraints you want to have verified by the
audit:
- Frequencies: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify that the current frequency plan respects the
assigned frequency domains.
- HSN: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify that the assigned HSNs belong to the assigned HSN
domains.
- Compliance with the Allocation Strategy: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify that the current
frequency plan respects the assigned allocation strategy (free or group-constrained).
- BSIC: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify that the assigned BSICs belong to the assigned
BSIC domains.
6. Select the Separation Constraints check box if you want the audit to verify that the currently defined separation
constraints are respected. You can review and modify separation constraints and exceptional pairs on the Sepa-
ration tab of this dialogue (see step 8.)
7. Select the (BSIC, BCCH) pairs check box if you want the audit to verify the following:
- That no transmitter has the same BSIC-BCCH pair as one of its neighbours.
- That no transmitter has two neighbours with the same BSIC-BCCH pair.
8. Click the Separations tab. On the Separations tab, you can, if you wish define or modify separation constraints
and exceptional separation constraints:
a. Click the Exceptional Pairs button to open the Exceptional Separation Constraints dialogue and define
exceptional frequency separations to define channel separations that apply to specific pairs of TRXs. During
automatic frequency planning, the separation rules are first considered, but they can be overridden by specific
entries in the Exceptional Separation Constraints table. For information on defining exceptional separation
constraints, see "Defining Exceptional Frequency Separations" on page 243.
b. When you have finished entering exceptional separation constraints, click Close to close the Exceptional
Separation Constraints dialogue.
c. In the table on the Separations tab, enter or modify the separation rules. The separation rules set the channel
separation that should exist between pairs of TRXs on the same transmitter, same site, or on adjacent sites.
For information on defining separation rules, see "Defining Separation Rules" on page 242.
9. Click the Detailed Results tab. On the Detailed Results tab, you can select the check boxes of the type of informa-
tion you want in the report.
- Error Messages: If you select this check box, the audit displays global warnings and error messages, as well
as a summary of separation constraint violations by transmitter/subcell/TRX pair and by TRX.
- Warnings Related to Separations: If you select this check box, the audit displays a description of each sep-
aration constraint violation.
- Additional Warnings: If you select this check box, the audit displays additional detailed warnings.
- Postpone the Global Summary: If you select this check box, the global summary will not be generated imme-
diately. Instead, the audit results will be displayed immediately and you can generate the global summary at
that point.
10. Click OK to start the audit. The Checking Planning Consistency dialogue appears (see Figure 5.53). The results
are given in a grid under Display. Under Messages are the detailed results as defined in step 9.
If you had selected the Postpone the Global Summary check box in step 9., the Messages area will be empty.
You can generate global summary now by clicking the Actions button and selecting Generate the Global
Summary.
270 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 5.53: Checking Planning Consistency dialogue
The results are listed in a table by transmitter, TRX type, and TRX and are coded by colour. Channels in black present no
separation violations. Channels in red present separation violations.
Any separation constraint violations are listed in the Separation Violations column. You can display details about sepa-
ration constraint violations by right-clicking the separation constraint violation and selecting Separation Constraint Viola-
tions from the context menu. A message box appears displaying details about the separation constraint violation (see
Figure 5.43). You can navigate to the TRX with which the current TRX has a separation violation by clicking the button in
the With the TRX column.
Figure 5.54: Separation violations
5.5.6 Checking Consistency Between Transmitters and Subcells

When network data is imported into an A9155 document, inconsistencies can occur between parameters that can defined
on the subcell and TRX and parameters that can be defined on the transmitter. You can perform an audit on the consist-
ency of these parameters and have A9155 automatically correct these problems as well.
For each transmitter, A9155 checks that:
The number of TRXs in the Transmitters table corresponds to the number of TRXs defined for this transmitter in
the TRXs table.
The list of channels used by the transmitter consists of all the channels assigned to TRXs of the transmitter.
The BCCH of the transmitter is the same as the channel assigned to the BCCH TRX of the transmitter.
The number of required TRXs indicated in the Transmitters table equals the sum of required TRXs of the trans-
mitters subcells.
The hopping mode of the transmitter corresponds to the hopping mode defined for its TCH subcell.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 271

A9155 User Manual
To make a subcell audit:

3. Select Subcells > Audit from the context menu. The Subcell Audit dialogue appears.
4. Define the subcell audit:
- Display report: Problems grouped by transmitter are displayed in the Events Viewer.
- Fix incompatible values in transmitters data with respect to their subcells: A9155 updates parameters
of transmitters that are inconsistent with their subcells and TRXs.
5. Click OK.
5.5.7 Displaying the Frequency Allocation

A9155 provides several tools that enable you to view the frequency allocation. You can use these tools to analyse a
frequency plan by displaying the overall distribution of channels or channel and BSIC use on the map. You can also search
for channels or BSICs.
"Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse" on page 272
"Displaying the Frequency Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 273
"Grouping Transmitters by Frequencies" on page 274
"Displaying the Channel Allocation Histogram" on page 274.
5.5.7.1 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse

In A9155, you can use the Search Tool to search for BCCH and non-BCCH channels, and BSICs. The Search Tool
allows you to view channel and BSIC reuse on the map.
The Search Tool has tabs allowing you to find transmitters using a given channel, BSIC, or BCCH-BSIC combination. If
you have already calculated and displayed a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best server, with the results
displayed by transmitter, the search results will be displayed by transmitter coverage. Channel reuse and any potential
problems will then be clearly visible. For information on coverage predictions by transmitter, see "Making a Coverage
Prediction by Transmitter" on page 197.
Note: By including the BCCH, BSIC, and channel list of each transmitter in the transmitter label,
the search results will be easier to understand. For information on defining the label, see
Searching for Channels
You can use the Search Tool to search for a channel. You can search in all channels, in control channels, or in non-control
channels.
To find a channel using the Search Tool:
1. Click View > Search Tool. The Search Tool window appears.
2. Select the Channel tab.
3. Enter a Channel.
4. Select from the As list what type of channels you want A9155 to search:
- All: all channels
- BCCH: control channels
- Non-BCCH: non-control channels
5. If you want only want the channel entered in the Channel box to be displayed, select the Co-channel Only check
box.
6. Click Search.
Transmitters with the same channel are displayed in red. Transmitters with two adjacent channels (i.e., a channel
higher and a channel lower) are displayed in yellow. Transmitters with a lower adjacent channel are displayed in
green; transmitters with a higher adjacent channel are displayed in green. Any transmitter with the same channel
is displayed in red, even if it also has adjacent channels. All other transmitters are displayed in grey.
If you selected the Co-channel Only check box, transmitters using the same channel are displayed in red; all
others, including transmitters with adjacent channels, are displayed in grey.
To restore the initial transmitter colours, click the Restore Colours button in the Search Tool window.
Searching for a BSIC
You can use the Search Tool to search for a BSIC.
272 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To find a BSIC using the Search Tool:

2. Select the BSIC tab.
3. Enter a BSIC.
4. Click Search.
Transmitters with the same BSIC are displayed in red. All other transmitters are displayed in grey.
Searching for a BCCH-BSIC Combination
You can use the Search Tool to search for a BCCH-BSIC.

To find a BSIC using the Search Tool:
2. Select the BCCH/BSIC tab.
3. Enter a BCCH.
4. Enter a BSIC.
5. Click Search.
Transmitters with the same BCCH, using the same BSIC are displayed in red. All other transmitters are displayed
in grey.
5.5.7.2 Displaying the Frequency Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings

You can use the display characteristics of transmitters to display frequency allocation-related information on the map.
To display frequency allocation-related information on the map:
You can display the following information per transmitter:
- BCCH: To display the BCCH of a transmitter, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "BCCH" as
the Field.
- BSIC: To display the BSIC of a transmitter, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "BSIC" as the
Field.
You can display the following information in the transmitter label or tooltip:
- BCCH: To display the BCCH of a transmitters subcells, select "BCCH" from the Label or Tip Text list.
- BSIC: To display the BSIC of a transmitter, select "BSIC" from the Label or Tip Text list.
- Channels: To display the channels allocated to a transmitter, select "Channels" from the Label or Tip Text
list.
- HSN: To display the HSN allocated to a transmitters subcells, select "HSN" from the Label or Tip Text list.
- MAIO: To display the MAIO allocated to a transmitters subcells, select "MAIO" from the Label or Tip Text list.
- Cell type: To display the cell type allocated to a transmitter, select "Cell type" from the Label or Tip Text list.
- Required TRXs per Transmitter or Subcell: To display the number of required TRXs per transmitter or per
subcell, select "Required TRXs" or "Subcell:Required TRXs," respectively, from the Label or Tip Text list.
- Number of TRXs Assigned: To display the number of TRXs assigned to a transmitter, select "Number of
TRXs" from the Label or Tip Text list.
- Frequency Band: To display the frequency band assigned to a transmitter, select "Frequency Band" from the
Label or Tip Text list.
- GPRS/EGPRS: To display which transmitters are GPRS/EGPRS-capable, select "GPRS/EGPRS" from the
Label or Tip Text list.
- GPRS/EGPRS Equipment: To display the GPRS/EGPRS equipment assigned to a transmitter, select
"GPRS/EGPRS Equipment" from the Label or Tip Text list.
- Codec Equipment: To display the codec equipment assigned to a transmitter, select "Codec Equipment"
from the Label or Tip Text list.
Note: Because labels are always displayed, you should avoid displaying too much information at
the same time.
5. Click OK.
For information on display options, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 273

A9155 User Manual
5.5.7.3 Grouping Transmitters by Frequencies

You can group transmitters on the Data tab of the Explorer window by their channel list or by their frequency band, or by
both.
To group transmitters by channels or by frequency band:
4. On the General tab, click Group by. The Group dialogue appears.
5. Under Available Fields, select the parameter you want to group transmitters by:
- Frequency band
- Channels
6. Click to add the parameter to the Group these fields in this order list. The selected parameter is added to
the list of parameters on which the transmitters will be grouped.
7. If you do not want the transmitters to be sorted by a certain parameter, select it in the Group these fields in this
order list and click . The selected parameter is removed from the list of parameters on which the transmitters
will be grouped.
8. Arrange the parameters in the Group these fields in this order list in the order in which you want the transmitters
to be grouped:
a. Select a parameter and click to move it up to the desired position.
b. Select a parameter and click to move it down to the desired position.

9. Click OK to save your changes and close the Group dialogue.
5.5.7.4 Displaying the Channel Allocation Histogram

After you have manually or automatically allocated frequencies, you can view channel allocation in the form of a table or
a histogram. For each channel used, A9155 displays both the channel load (i.e., the number of times the channel is used,
weighted by the fractional load) and the total number of times the channel is used. The information in the table can either
be copied or exported for use in another application.
To display the channel allocation table or histogram:
3. Select Frequency Plan > Channel Distribution. The Channel Use Statistics table appears.
4. You can do the following:
- Export: Click the Export button to open the Export dialogue and export the Channel Use Statistics table
contents as a TXT or CSV file. For information on using the Export dialogue, see "Exporting Tables to External
Files" on page 55.
- Histogram: Click the Histogram button to display the Distribution Histogram dialogue. The histogram rep-
resents the channels as a function of the frequency of their use. You can move the pointer over the histogram
to display the frequency of use of each channel. The results are highlighted simultaneously in the Detailed
Results list.
In the Distribution Histogram dialogue, you have the following options:
- Copy: Click the Copy button to copy the histogram to the clipboard. You can paste the histogram as a
graphic into another application, for example, a word-processor.
- Print: Click the Print button to print the histogram.
5.5.8 Calculating Key Performance Indicators of a GSM/GPRS/

EDGE Network
A9155 allows the user to calculate and analyse key performance indicators (KPI), such as the reduction factor, the block-
ing probability, and the delay, that are currently defined for the network. This allows you to verify how well the network
satisfies basic performance criteria.
To run a KPI calculation:
3. Right-click the Traffic Capture on which you want to base the KPI calculation. The context menu appears.
4. Select KPI Calculation from the context menu. The KPI Calculation dialogue appears (see Figure 5.55).
274 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 5.55: The KPI Calculation dialogue
5. Under Dimensioning Parameters, select the dimensioning model that will be used for the KPI calculation from
the Model list. You can access the parameters of the selected dimensioning model by clicking the Browse button
( ).
6. Click Calculate to run the KPI calculation.
The output of the calculation appears in the KPI Calculation dialogue under Results. You can select which
columns to display by clicking the Displayed Columns button and selecting or clearing the check box of the
columns. The following results are given for each transmitter in the Transmitter column:
- TRX Type: For each transmitter, the results are given by TRX type (e.g., BCCH, TCH, and TCH_INNER).
Together, the Transmitter and TRX Type columns identify the subcell.
- Number of TRXs: The number of TRXs assigned for both the subcell's circuit-switched and packet-switched
traffic, while taking into account the quality of service criterion assigned for each.
- Number of Shared/Circuit/Packet Timeslots: The distribution of shared, circuit, and packet timeslots for
each subcell. Shared timeslots can be used by both circuit and packet traffic, while circuit and packet timeslots
are dedicated to the defined type of traffic.
The timeslots are distributed according to the timeslot configuration defined for each TRX type.
- Load (%): The average demand in timeslots (packet and circuit), divided by the total number of timeslots avail-
able. It represents the average occupancy of the TRXs. This parameter is one of the principal results of dimen-
sioning along with the number of TRXs.
- Multiplexing Factor: The user or Temporary Block Flow (TBF) multiplexing factor. The multiplexing factor
corresponds to the number of timeslots per frame.
- Maximum Number of TRXs per Transmitter: The maximum number of TRXs that a transmitter can support
is an input of the KPI calculation. This parameter is provided by the equipment manufacturer. The value can
be set for each transmitter or taken from the dimensioning model for transmitters where this value is not set.
- Target Rate of Traffic Overflow (%): This input parameter defines the percentage of traffic that is allowed to
overflow from one subcell to another in case the traffic assigned to this subcell is greater than the maximum
traffic that it can accommodate. It can be considered an anticipation of the percentage of traffic that will be
rejected from higher priority subcells or layers to lower ones. The value is specified for each subcell.
- Half-rate Traffic Ratio (%): This input parameter is defined per subcell and indicates the percentage of sub-
cell traffic that uses half-rate access.
If the values are different for BCCH and TCH subcells, A9155 will use the values for the target rate of traffic
overflow and the half-rate traffic ratio from the BCCH subcell.
- Packet Traffic Demand (kbps): The Packet Traffic Demand is the total traffic demand in kilobits per second
generated by packet-switched service users within the coverage area of the transmitter.
- Average Demand in Packet Timeslots: The number of timeslots needed to satisfy the packet traffic demand
- Average Number of Timeslots per Connection (Packet): This input parameter defines the average number
of timeslots used by packet-switched-traffic users while accessing services. Packet-switched services allow
up to eight timeslots per connection. The average number of timeslots per connection corresponds to the
average number of downlink timeslots over which a single mobile terminal can communicate at one time.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 275

A9155 User Manual
- Circuit Traffic Demand (Erlangs): The Circuit Traffic Demand is the total traffic demand in Erlangs gener-
ated by circuit-switched-service users within the coverage area of the transmitter.
Note: For concentric cell types, the traffic demand on TCH subcells is different from the one cal-
culated during the traffic capture. For concentric cell types, the traffic demand on TCH sub-
cells is calculated from the traffic demand of the capture and the effective rate of traffic
overflow.
- Average Demand in Circuit Timeslots: The Average Demand in Circuit Timeslots is calculated taking into
account the effect of half-rate circuit-switched traffic: two half-rate users are equivalent to one full-rate user.
- Average Number of Timeslots per Connection (Circuit): The Average Number of Timeslots per Con-
nection (Circuit) is an input parameter. The number of timeslots per connection is "1" for full-rate traffic, oth-
erwise it depends on the half-rate traffic ratio.
At present, A9155 only models circuit calls using 1 timeslot per connection; this parameter is for forward com-
patibility.
- Served Circuit Traffic (Erlangs): The Served Circuit Traffic is the circuit-switched traffic in Erlangs that the
subcell can serve.
The served circuit-switched traffic is circuit traffic demand less the effective overflowed circuit traffic.
- Served Packet Traffic (kbps): The Served Packet Traffic is the packet-switched traffic in kilobits per second
that the subcell can serve.
- The served packet-switched traffic is packet traffic demand less the effective overflowed packet traffic.
- Effective Rate of Traffic Overflow (%): The Effective Rate of Traffic Overflow is the actual rate of traffic
that is rejected by the subcell and overflows because of a lack of packet timeslots. In a GSM network, the value
is the same as the blocking probability. In a more complex network, this value includes the traffic overflow from
all services.
In case of Erlang B, the effective rate of traffic overflow corresponds to the effective blocking rate. This value
is calculated from the required number of circuit timeslots (both shared and circuit timeslots) and the circuit
traffic demand in Erlang B tables.
In case of Erlang C, the effective rate of traffic overflow is zero except if the maximum number of TRXs is ex-
ceeded. The effective blocking rate is inferred from the required number of circuit timeslots (both shared and
circuit timeslots) and the circuit traffic demand in Erlang C tables.
- Probability of Circuit Blocking Rate (or Delay) (%): The Circuit Blocking Rate is the grade of service
(GoS) indicator for circuit-switched traffic. It can be either the rate at which calls are blocked (Erlang B) or
delayed (Erlang C), depending on which queuing model the dimensioning model uses.
- Minimum Throughput Reduction Factor (%): The Minimum Throughput Reduction Factor is the lowest
throughput reduction factor that can still guarantee service availability. The Minimum Throughput Reduction
Factor is one of the criteria for packet-switched traffic dimensioning. It is calculated using the parameters
defined for the services: the minimum service throughput; the maximum number of timeslots per connection;
the required availability; and the per pixel timeslot capacity of the subcell coverage area. This parameter is
calculated when making the traffic capture on which the KPI calculation is based.
- Throughput Reduction Factor (%): The Throughput Reduction Factor is calculated from the quality charts
using the packet load and available connections for each subcell. This reduction factor must be greater than
the minimum throughput reduction factor for packet-switched services for these services to be satisfactorily
available in the subcell.
- Maximum Packet Delay (s): The Maximum Packet Delay is the defined delay in seconds that must not be
exceeded for the service quality to be considered satisfactory.
- Packet Delay (s): The Delay is a key performance indicator (KPI) calculated using the quality graphs, the
load, and the number of connections available . This dimensioning output must not exceed the maximum delay
defined for the service for service availability to be considered satisfactory.
- Maximum Probability of Packet Delay (%): The Maximum Probability of Packet Delay is defined for each
packet service and is the highest probability that the service will be blocked that is acceptable in terms of
service availability.
- Probability of Packet Delay (Delay) (%): The Probability of Packet Delay is a dimensioning output and
must not exceed the Maximum Probability of Packet Delay defined for the service for service availability to
be considered satisfactory.
7. Click Commit to assign the load and the effective rate of traffic overflow to the subcells.
Note: KPI calculation is based on a traffic capture. Modifications to traffic maps, traffic parame-
ters, and transmitter properties (e.g., calculation area, GPRS/EGPRS equipment, etc.)
have an influence on the traffic capture. Therefore, if you modify some of these data, you
must recalculate the traffic capture before calculating KPIs.
276 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

5.6 Optimising and Verifying Network Capacity

An important step in the process of creating a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network is verifying the capacity of the network. This is
done using measurements of the strength of the pilot signal in different locations within the area covered by the network.
This collection of measurements is called a test mobile data path.
The data contained in a test mobile data path is used to verify the accuracy of current network parameters and to optimise
the network.
"Importing a Test Mobile Data Path" on page 277
"Network Verification" on page 280
"Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window" on page 285
5.6.1 Importing a Test Mobile Data Path

In A9155, you can analyse drive tests by importing test mobile data in the form of ASCII text files (with tabs, semi-colons,
or spaces as separator), TEMS FICS-Planet export files (with the extension PLN), or TEMS text export files (with the exten-
sion FMT).
For A9155 to be able to use the data in imported files, the imported files must contain the following information:
The position of test mobile data points. When you import the data, you must indicate which columns give the
abscissa and ordinate (XY coordinates) of each point.
Information identifying scanned cells (for example, serving subcells, neighbour subcells, or any other subcells). In
GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks, a transmitter is identified by its BCCH and its BSIC. Therefore, you must indicate
during the import process which columns contain the BCCH and the BSIC of transmitters and the BSIC format
(decimal or octal) used in the file.
You can import a single test mobile data file or several test mobile data files at the same time. If you regularly import test
mobile data files of the same format, you can create an import configuration. The import configuration contains information
that defines the structure of the data in the test mobile data file. By using the import configuration, you will not need to
define the data structure each time you import a new test mobile data file.
To import one or several test mobile data files:
2. Right-click the Test Mobile Data folder. The context menu appears.
4. You can import one or several files. Select the file or files you want to open.
Note: If you are importing more than one file, you can select contiguous files by clicking the first
file you want to import, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. You
can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file you want to
import.
5. Click Open. The Import of Measurement Files dialogue appears.
Note: Files with the extension PLN, as well as some FMT files (created with previous versions of
TEMS) are imported directly into A9155; you will not be asked to define the data structure
using the Import of Measurement Files dialogue.
6. If you already have an import configuration defining the data structure of the imported file or files, you can select
it from the Configuration list on the Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialogue. If you do not have
an import configuration, continue with step 7.
a. Under Configuration, select an import configuration from the Configuration list.
b. Continue with step 10.
Notes:
When importing a test mobile data path file, existing configurations are available in the Files of
type list of the Open dialogue, sorted according to their date of creation. After you have selected
a file and clicked Open, A9155 automatically proposes a configuration, if it recognises the exten-
sion. In case several configurations are associated with an extension, A9155 chooses the first
configuration in the list.
The defined configurations are stored, by default, in the file "NumMeasINIFile.ini", located in the
directory where A9155 is installed. For more information on the NumMeasINIFile.ini file, see the
Administrator Manual.
7. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can set the following parameters:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 277

A9155 User Manual
- Name: By default, A9155 names the new test mobile data path after the imported file. You can change this
name if desired.
- Under Receiver, set the Height of the receiver antenna and the Gain and Losses.
- Under Measurement Conditions,
- Units: Select the measurement units used.
- Coordinates: By default, A9155 imports the coordinates using the display system of the A9155 docu-
ment. If the coordinates used in the file you are importing are different than the coordinates used in the
A9155 document, you must click the Browse button ( ) and select the coordinate system used in the
test mobile data file. A9155 will then convert the data imported to the coordinate system used in the A9155
document.
8. Click the Setup tab (see Figure 5.56).
Figure 5.56: The Setup tab of the Import of Measurement Files dialogue
a. Under File, enter the number of the 1st Measurement Row, select the data Separator, and select the Dec-
imal Symbol used in the file.
b. Click Setup to link file columns and internal A9155 fields. The Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue ap-
pears.
c. Select the columns in the imported file that give the X-Coordinates and the Y-Coordinates of each point in
the test mobile data file.
Note: You can also identify the columns containing the XY coordinates of each point in the test
mobile data file by selecting them from the Field row of the table on the Setup tab.
d. In the BCCH Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the BCCH of
the scanned subcells. For example, if the string "BCCH" is found in the column names identifying the scram-
bling code group of scanned cells, enter it here. A9155 will then search for columns with this string in the col-
umn name.
If there is BCCH information contained in the test mobile data file, leave the BCCH Identifier box empty.
e. In the BSIC Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the BSIC of the
scanned subcells. For example, if the string "BSIC" is found in the column names identifying the BSIC of the
scanned subcells, enter it here. A9155 will then search for columns with this string in the column name.
f. From the BSIC Format list, select the scrambling code format, either "Decimal" or "Octal."
g. Click OK to close the Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue.
278 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Important:
If you have correctly entered the information under File on the Setup tab, and the necessary
values in the Test Mobile Data Configuration dialogue, A9155 should recognize all columns in
the imported file. If not, you can click the name of the column in the table in the Field row and
select the column name. For each field, you must ensure that each column has the correct data
type in order for the data to be correctly interpreted. The default value under Type is "<Ignore>".
If a column is marked with "<Ignore>", it will not be imported.
The data in the file must be structured so that the columns identifying the BCCH and the BSIC
are placed before the data columns for each subcell. Otherwise A9155 will not be able to properly
import the file.
9. If you wish to save the definition of the data structure so that you can use it again, you can save it as an import
configuration:
a. On the Setup tab, under Configuration, click Save. The Configuration dialogue appears.
b. By default, saves the configuration in a special file called "NumMeasINIfile.ini" found in A9155s installation
folder. In case you cannot write into that folder, you can click Browse to choose a different location.
c. Enter a Configuration Name and an Extension of the files that this import configuration will describe (for ex-
ample, "*.csv").
d. Click OK.
A9155 will now select this import configuration automatically every time you import a test mobile data path file
with the selected extension. If you import a file with the same structure but a different extension, you will be
able to select this import configuration from the Configuration list.
Notes:
You do not have to complete the import procedure to save the Import Configuration and to
have it available for a future use.
When importing a CW measurement file, you can expand the file by clicking the button ( )
in front of the file in the Setup part to display all the available import configurations. When
selecting the appropriate configuration, the associations are automatically done in the table
at the bottom of the dialogue.
You can delete an existing import configuration by clicking Delete when selecting it in the
Setup part.
10. Click Import, if you are only importing a single file, or Import All, if you are importing more than one file. The
mobile data are imported into the current A9155 document.
5.6.2 Displaying Test Mobile Data

When you have imported the test mobile data into the current A9155 document, you can display it in the map window.
Then, you can select individual test mobile data points to see information about the transmitters at that location.
To display information about a single test mobile data point:
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Test Mobile Data folder.
3. Select the display check box beside the test mobile data you want to display in the map window. The test mobile
data is displayed.
4. Click and hold the test mobile data point on which you want server and neighbour information. A9155 displays an
arrow pointing towards the serving transmitters and neighbours (see Figure 5.58 on page 284), with a number
identifying the server as numbered in the test mobile data. If the transmitter display type is "Automatic," both the
number and the arrow are displayed in the same colour as the transmitter. For information on changing the display
type to "Automatic," see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
5.6.3 Defining the Display of a Test Mobile Data Path

The management of Test Mobile Data Paths uses the standard A9155 display dialogue in order to display the points
according to any available attribute, to manage permanent labels on the map, tooltips and the legend. In other words, the
display of measurement path are managed in the same way than sites, transmitters, etc.
To access the display dialogue of any CW measurement session:
3. Right-click on the Test Mobile Data Path you want to manage its display
4. Choose the Properties option in the context menu,
5. Click on the Display tab,
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 279

A9155 User Manual
Thresholds, legend, tips and other handy display tools work like in transmitter and sites, for example. Each single point
may be displayed in a unique way, or according to:
its related text or integer attribute (discrete value)
its related numerical value (value interval).
In addition, a last option is available which permits to display points according to more than one criterion at a time. By
selecting Multiple Shadings from the Display Type, a dialogue opens in which you can define the following display for
each single point of the measurement path:
a symbol type according to any attribute
a symbol colour according to any attribute
a symbol size according to any attribute
With such settings, you can, for example, display a signal level by colour, choose a symbol type for Transmitter 1 (circle,
triangle, cross, etc.) and a size according to the altitude.
Notes:
Fast Display feature forces A9155 to use the lightest symbol to display points. This is
particularly useful with very large amounts of points when the standard display time may be
reduced.
Using Multiple Shading on symbols is possible only if Fast Display check box is cleared.
Test mobile data paths can be sorted in alphabetical order on the Data tab of the Explorer
by selecting Sort Alphabetically from the Test Mobile Data context menu.
You can export the display settings of a CW measurement path. Colours, symbols, and
other display settings can be saved in a .cfg file to make them available for use on another
test mobile data path. To access the import/export interface, click the Actions button on
the Display tab of the path property dialogue. This configuration file can also be imported
from the User Configuration part in the Tools menu.
5.6.4 Network Verification

The imported test mobile data is used to verify the GSM/GPRS/EGPRS network. To improve the relevance of the data,
A9155 allows you to filter out incompatible or inaccurate points. You can then use the data for coverage predictions, either
by comparing the imported measurements with previously calculated coverage predictions, or by creating new coverage
predictions using the imported test mobile data.
"Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths" on page 280
"Comparing Measurements with Predictions" on page 281
"Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter" on page 283
"Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 283.
5.6.4.1 Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths

When using a test mobile data path, some measured points may present values that are too far outside of the median
values to be useful in calibration. As well, test paths may include test points in areas that are not representative of the test
mobile data path as a whole. For example, a test path that includes two heavily populated areas might also include test
points from the more lightly populated region between the two.
In A9155, you can filter out points that are incompatible with the points you are studying, either by filtering out the clutter
classes where the incompatible points are located, or by filtering out points according to their properties.
To filter out incompatible points by clutter class:
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to filter incompatible points. The context menu appears.
5. Click the Filter tab.
6. By default, the data in all clutter classes is displayed. Clear the check box of each clutter class whose points you
do not want to use.
Note: You can permanently delete the points located in the clutter classes whose check boxes
you clear by selecting the Delete Points Outside Filter check box.
7. Click OK to apply the filter and close the dialogue.

To filter out incompatible points using a filter:
280 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

6. Click More. The Filter dialogue appears.
lowing table:

Combinations of filters are first made horizontally, then vertically. For more information on filters, see "Advanced
Data Filtering" on page 67.
Note: The Refresh Geo Data option available in the context menu of Test Mobile Data paths ena-
bles you to update heights (Alt DTM, Clutter height, DTM+Clutter) and the clutter class of
test mobile data points after adding new geographic maps or modifying existing ones.
5.6.4.2 Comparing Measurements with Predictions

5.6.4.2.1 Creating Coverage Predictions for Test Mobile Data Paths
You can create the following coverage predictions for all transmitters on each point of a test mobile data path:
Coverage by signal level
Coverage by C/I.
To create a coverage prediction along a test mobile data path:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 281

A9155 User Manual
3. Right-click the test mobile data to which you want to add a coverage prediction. The context menu appears.
4. Select Calculations > Create a New Study from the context menu. The Study Types dialogue appears.
5. Under Standard Studies, select one of the following coverage predictions and click OK:
Coverage by Signal Level:
a. Click the Condition tab. At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered.
You can click the arrow button ( ) and select one of the following thresholds:
range.
b. Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers.
c. If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Prob-
ability.
d. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter
class.
e. You can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the Reception from TRXs list.
Coverage by C/I:
a. Click the Condition tab. On the Condition tab, you can define the signals that will be considered for each pixel.
You can click the arrow button ( ) and select one of the following thresholds:
range.
b. Under Server, select "Best Signal Level per HCS Layer" to consider all servers. When you select "Best Signal
Level per HCS Layer" or "All," there may be areas where several transmitters experience interference. On
these pixels, several CI values are calculated. Therefore, on the Display tab, you select to display either the
lowest CI level or the highest CI level.
c. Enter a margin in the With a Margin text box. The default value is "5 dB."
d. If you select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Prob-
e. You can select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter
class.
f. Under Interference Condition, you can select which TRX type to consider by selecting it from the Interfered
TRXs list. Click the arrow button ( ) and select one of the following thresholds:
g. Select either CI or C(I+N).
h. Click the arrow button ( ) and select one of the following thresholds:
Note: You can not select Subcell C/I Threshold as both the lower and the upper end of the CI
range to be considered.
i. Select whether you want the defined interference condition to be Satisfied By:
- At least one TRX: When you select the option At least one TRX, the defined interference condition must
be satisfied by at least one TRX on a given pixel for the results to be displayed on that pixel.
- The worst TRX: When you select the option The worst TRX, A9155 selects the worst results for each
pixel. If the worst results do not satisfy the defined interference condition, the results will not be displayed
on that pixel.
j. If you have selected "C/(I+N)", you can define the value to be added to the interference. The defined noise
figure is added to the thermal noise value (defined at -121 dBm) to calculate the value of N. Select one of the
following:
282 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

box.
k. If you want discontinuous transmission mode for TRXs which support it taken into account during the calcula-
tion of interference, select the DTX taken into account check box and enter the percentage of time during
which a user is talking in the Voice Activity Factor text box.
l. Select the Traffic Load that will be used to calculate interference:
m. Select the Co-Channel check box if you want co-channel interference to be taken into consideration.
n. Select the Adjacent Channels check box if you want interference caused by adjacent channels to be taken
into consideration. The adjacent channel effect on the concerned victim channel, i.e., the interference, is de-
creased by the adjacent channel protection level.
o. Select the Detailed Results check box if you want to display detailed results per transmitter. The results dis-
mode.
6. When you have finished setting the parameters for the coverage prediction, click OK.
You can create a new coverage prediction by repeating the procedure from step 1. to step 6. for each new cover-
age prediction.
7. When you have finished creating new coverage predictions for these test mobile data, right-click the test mobile
data. The context menu appears.
8. Select Calculations > Calculate All the Studies from the context menu.
A new column for each coverage prediction is added in the table for the test mobile data. The column contains the
predicted values of the selected parameters for the transmitter. The propagation model used is the one assigned
to the transmitter for the main matrix (for information on the propagation model, see "Chapter 4: Managing Calcu-
lations in A9155").
You can display the information in these new columns in the Test Mobile Data window. For more information on
the Test Mobile Data window, see "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on page 283.
5.6.4.3 Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter

You can extract a specific field for a specific transmitter on each point of an existing test mobile data path. The extracted
information will be added to a new column in the table for the test mobile data.
To extract a field from a test mobile path:
3. Right-click the test mobile data from which you want to extract a field. The context menu appears.
4. Select Focus on a Transmitter from the context menu. The Field Selection for a Given Transmitter dialogue
appears.
5. Select a transmitter from the On the Transmitter list.
6. Click the For the Fields list. The list opens.
7. Select the check box beside the field you want extract for the selected transmitters.
Note: A9155 can display the seven servers per point. If you want to display for example, the point
signal level, remember to select the check box for the point signal level for all servers in the
For the Fields list. The new column will then display the point signal level for the selected
transmitter for all servers if a value exists.
8. Click OK. A9155 creates a new column in the test mobile path data table for the selected transmitters and with the
selected values.
5.6.4.4 Analysing Data Variations Along the Path

In A9155, you can analyse variations in data along any test mobile data path using the Test Mobile Data window. You
can also use the Test Mobile Data window to see which cell is the serving cell for a given test point.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 283

A9155 User Manual
To analyse data variations using the Test Mobile Data window.

3. Right-click the test mobile data you want to analyse. The context menu appears.
4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 5.58)
Figure 5.58: The Test Mobile Data window
5. Click Display at the top of the Test Mobile Data window. The Display Parameters dialogue appears (see
Figure 5.59).
Figure 5.59: The Display Parameters dialogue
6. In the Display Parameters dialogue:

- Select the check box next to any field you want to display in the Test Mobile Data window.
- If you wish, you can change the display colour by clicking the colour in the Colour column and selecting a new
colour from the palette that appears.
- Click OK to close the Display Parameters dialogue.
Note: You can change the display status or the colour of more than one field at a time. You can
select contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field
you want to import. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking
each field. You can then change the display status or the colour by right-clicking on the
selected fields and selecting the choice from the context menu.
The selected fields are displayed in the Test Mobile Data window.
7. You can display the data in the test mobile path in two ways:
- Click the values in the Test Mobile Data window.
284 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Click the points on the test mobile path in the map window.
The test mobile data path appears in the map window as an arrow pointing towards the serving cell, with a number
identifying the best server (see on page 284). If the transmitter display type is "Automatic," both the number and
the arrow are displayed in the same colour as the transmitter. For information on changing the display type to
"Automatic," see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
8. You can display a secondary Y-axis on the right side of the window in order to display the values of a variable with
different orders of magnitude than the ones selected in Display Parameters. This can be done by selecting this
variable from the list on the right. The displayed curve has the colours corresponding to this variable in the Display
Parameters dialogue.
9. You can change the zoom level of the Test Mobile Data window display in the Test Mobile Data window in the
following ways:
- Zoom in or out:
i. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window.
ii. Select Zoom In or Zoom Out from the context menu.
- Select the data to zoom in on:
i. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window on one end of the range of data you want to zoom in on.
ii. Select First Zoom Point from the context menu.
iii. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window on the other end of the range of data you want to zoom in on.
iv. Select Last Zoom Point from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window zooms in on the data be-
tween the first zoom point and the last zoom point.
Tip: If you open the table for the test mobile data you are displaying in the Test Mobile Data
window, A9155 will automatically display in the table the data for the point that is displayed
in the map and in the Test Mobile Data window (see on page 284).
5.6.5 Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window

You can print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window, using the context menu in the Test Mobile Data
window.
To print or export the contents of the Test Mobile Data window:
4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see on
page 284).
5. Define the display parameters and zoom level as explained in "Analysing Data Variations Along the Path" on
page 283.
6. Right-click the Test Mobile Data window. The context menu appears.
To export the Test Mobile Data window:
a. Select Copy from the context menu.

b. Open the document into which you want to paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window.
c. Paste the contents of the Test Mobile Data window into the new document.
To print the Test Mobile Data window:
a. Select Print from the context menu. The Print dialogue appears.
b. Click OK to print the contents of the Test Mobile Data window.
5.7 Advanced Configuration

In this section, the following advanced configuration options are explained:
"Defining Resource Ranges" on page 286
"Setting HCS Layers" on page 289
"Cell Types" on page 290
"TRX Equipment" on page 293
"Codec Equipment" on page 293
"GPRS/EDGE Equipment" on page 296
"Timeslot Configurations" on page 298
"Advanced Transmitter Configuration Options" on page 299
"GSM/GPRS/EDGE Multi-Service Traffic Data" on page 301
"Defining the Interferer Reception Threshold" on page 304
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 285

A9155 User Manual
"Modelling Shadowing" on page 304
5.7.1 Defining Resource Ranges

In A9155, when you allocate resources such as frequencies and BSICs, you do so using domains and groups. The
domains and groups define the range of resources that can be used by the transmitter, subcell, or TRX. Using defined
ranges of resources facilitates both allocation and management of resources.
"Frequencies" on page 286
"BSICs" on page 287
"Defining HSN Domains and Groups" on page 288
5.7.1.1 Frequencies
In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, you can manage frequencies by defining frequency domains and groups based on stand-
ard frequency bands. A frequency domain consists of one or several frequency groups. The frequency domain in turn
belongs to a frequency band. A frequency group is a set of channels. A frequency group can belong to one or several
frequency domains.
Frequency planning, both manual and automatic, is based on the frequency domains assigned to the TRX types in defined
cell types.
"Defining Frequency Bands" on page 286
"Defining Frequency Domains and Groups" on page 286.
5.7.1.1.1 Defining Frequency Bands

Frequency bands represent the defined frequency that frequency domains and groups refer to. In a GSM/GPRS/EDGE
project, the frequency bands are usually fixed items, whereas domains and groups can be defined and modified to respond
to the needs of the project.
The properties of frequency bands can be accessed from the Frequency Bands table.
To define a frequency band:
3. Select Network Settings > Frequencies > Bands. The Frequency Bands table appears.
4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to define a frequency band (for
information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48):
- Name: Enter a name for the frequency, for example, "GSM 1900." This name will appear in other dialogues
when you select a frequency band.
- Frequency (MHz): Enter the average frequency.
- Channel Width (kHz): Enter the width, in kHz, that each channel will cover.
- First Channel: Enter the number of the first channel in this frequency band.
- Last Channel: Enter the number of the last channel in this frequency band.
- Excluded Channels: Enter the channels that will not be included in this frequency band, even though they
are between the first and last channels.
- Multiplexing Factor: Enter the multiplexing factor of the frequency band. The user multiplexing factor corre-
sponds to the number of timeslots in a GSM/GPRS/EDGE frame.
Notes: You can also modify the properties of a frequency band using its Properties dialogue. You
can open the frequency band Properties dialogue by selecting the frequency band in the
Frequency Bands table and clicking the Properties button. The frequency band Proper-
ties dialogue has a General tab which allows you to modify the properties described above,
a Frequency Domains tab which indicates the frequency domains that belong to the fre-
quency band, and, if user-defined fields have been added to the Frequency Bands table,
an Other Properties tab.
5.7.1.1.2 Defining Frequency Domains and Groups

In a GSM/GPRS/EDGE project, the frequency bands are usually fixed items, whereas domains and groups can be defined
and modified to respond to the needs of the project. Frequency domains are linked to TRX types. Frequency groups are
used in frequency allocation.
To define frequency domains and groups:
3. Select Network Settings > Frequencies > Domains. The Frequency Domains table appears.
286 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to define a frequency domain (for
- Name: Enter a name for the frequency domain, for example, "GSM 1900 domain." This name will appear in
other dialogues when you select a frequency domain.
- Frequency Band: Select the frequency band the domain will belong to from the list.
5. Select the row containing the frequency domain and click the Properties button. The frequency domains Prop-
erties dialogue appears.
In the frequency domains Properties dialogue, you can modify the properties of the frequency domain and create
frequency groups.
6. Under Groups, in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to define a fre-
quency group (for information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48):
- Name: Enter a name for the frequency group, for example, "GSM 1900 domain Group1." This name will
appear in other dialogues when you select a frequency group.
- Min.: Enter the number of the first channel in this frequency group.
- Max.: Enter the number of the last channel in this frequency group.
- Step: Enter the value interval between channels in this frequency group.
- Excluded: Enter the channels that you do not want to use in this frequency group. You can enter or paste a
list of channels; the values must be separated with either a comma, or a semi-colon, or a space. You can also
enter a range of channels to be excluded from this group, by entering the first and last channel of the range
separated by a hyphen. For example, entering 520-525 corresponds to entering 520 521 522 523 524 525.
- Extra: Enter the additional channels, outside the first and last channels of the group, that you want to use in
this frequency group. You can enter or paste a list of channels; the values must be separated with either a
comma, or a semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a range of channels to be excluded from this group,
by entering the first and last channel of the range separated by a hyphen. For example, entering 520-525 cor-
responds to entering 520 521 522 523 524 525.
7. Click OK to close the frequency domains Properties dialogue.
8. Click Close to close the Frequency Domains table.
Notes: You can associate frequency groups to frequency domains using the Frequency Groups
table. You can open the Frequency Groups table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder
and selecting Network Settings > Frequencies > Groups from the context menu.
Although each group name in a single frequency domain must be unique, you can use the
same group name in different frequency domains.
5.7.1.2 BSICs
In GSM/GPRS/EDGE, the Base Station Identity Code (BSIC) is assigned to a BCCH to identify the transmitter on which
the BCCH is located. BSICs are made available according to country and area. The mobile uses the BSIC, which can be
in either decimal or octal format, to distinguish one BCCH from BCCHs on nearby transmitters. The BSIC is composed of
a Network Colour Code (NCC) and a BTS Colour Code (BCC). BSICs are modelled using domains and groups which can
be defined and modified:
A domain consists of one or more groups.
A group is a defined set of BSICs. A BSIC group can belong to one or more BSIC domains.
"Defining the BSIC Format" on page 287
"Defining BSIC Domains and Groups" on page 288.
5.7.1.2.1 Defining the BSIC Format

The BSIC is composed of a Network Colour Code (NCC) combined with a BTS Colour Code (BCC). Both the NCC and
the BCC are integers from 0 to 7, making a total of 64 possible BSICs. They are broken down into 8 groups (one group for
each possible NCC) of 8 BSICs. For each NCC-BCC pair, the resulting BSIC number can be in either decimal or octal
format.
Decimal format: In decimal format, all numbers from 0 to 9 can be used to define the BSIC. Because both the
NCC and the BCC are in octal format (using the numbers from 0 to 7), their combined value must be converted to
decimal format with the following equation:
NCCx8 + BCC
The resulting value is the BSIC in decimal format. For example, the NCC-BCC pair 3-2 results in a decimal BSIC
value of 26.
Octal format: Both the NCC and the BCC are already in octal format (using the numbers from 0 to 7), so they can
be combined directly to express the resulting BSIC. For example, the NCC-BCC pair 3-2 results in an octal BSIC
value of 32. The octal format is more commonly used than the decimal format.
In A9155, you define the format globally for the entire GSM/GPRS/EDGE document.
Important: When you import test mobile data, you must ensure that the defined BSIC format is the
same as that of the test mobile data before you import the data.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 287

A9155 User Manual
To define the BSIC format for a GSM/GPRS/EDGE document:

3. Select Network Settings > BSICs > Format and select one of the following:
- Decimal
- Octal
5.7.1.2.2 Defining BSIC Domains and Groups

BSICs are modelled using domains and groups which can be defined and modified. A domain consists of one or more
groups. You must assign a BSIC domain to each transmitter. A group is a defined set of BSICs. A BSIC group can belong
to one or more BSIC domains. Groups are used during automatic BSIC allocation.
3. Select Network Settings > BSICs > Domains. The BSIC Domains table appears. The BSIC Domains table con-
tains a default domain called "ALL BSICs;" it contains all 64 BSICs divided into 8 groups.
4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the name of the new BSIC domain.
5. Select the row containing the BSIC domain and click the Properties button. The BSIC domains Properties dia-
logue appears.
In the BSIC domains Properties dialogue, you can modify the properties of the BSIC domain and create BSIC
groups.
6. Under Groups, in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to define a BSIC
group (for information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48):
Important: When defining the BSIC group, ensure that the entered values are consistent with the
defined BSIC format (see "Defining the BSIC Format" on page 287).
- Name: Enter a name for the BSIC group. This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a BSIC
group.
- Min.: Enter the first BSIC in this BSIC group.
- Max.: Enter the last BSIC in this BSIC group.
- Step: Enter the value interval between BSICs in this BSIC group.
- Excluded: Enter the BSICs that you do not want to use in this BSIC group. You can enter or paste a list of
BSICs; the values must be separated with either a comma, or a semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a
range of BSICs to be excluded from this group, by entering the first and last BSIC of the range separated by
a hyphen. For example, entering 0-5 corresponds to entering 0 1 2 3 4 5.
- Extra: Enter the additional BSICs, outside the first and last BSICs of the group, that you want to use in this
BSIC group. You can enter or paste a list of BSICs; the values must be separated with either a comma, or a
semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a range of BSICs to be excluded from this group, by entering the
first and last BSIC of the range separated by a hyphen. For example, entering 0-5 corresponds to entering 0
1 2 3 4 5.
7. Click OK to close the BSIC domains Properties dialogue.
8. Click Close to close the BSIC Domains table.
Note: You can associate frequency groups to frequency domains using the BSIC Groups table.
You can open the BSIC Groups table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and select-
ing Network Settings > BSICs > Groups from the context menu.
5.7.1.3 Defining HSN Domains and Groups

In A9155, both base band hopping (BBH) and synthesised frequency hopping (SFH) are supported in GSM/GPRS/EDGE
projects. BBH and SFH are modelled using the hopping sequence number (HSN) along with other parameters such as the
MAL and the MAIOs.
The HSN describes the frequency hopping sequence. It can have one of 64 different values (from 0 to 63). Frequency
sequences are pseudo-random, except for HSN "0," where frequencies are used one after the other (cyclic hopping). In
A9155, HSNs are modelled in the form of HSN domains and groups:
A domain consists of one or more HSN groups.
A group is a defined set of HSNs. A HSN group can belong to one or more HSN domains.
Manual and automatic HSN allocation is based on the HSN domains assigned to TRX types in cell types; when you define
a cell type, you must assign an HSN domain to each TRX type. The assigned HSN domain will be used as a constraint
during automatic HSN allocation.
288 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


3. Select Network Settings > HSNs > Domains. The HSN Domains table appears. The HSN Domains table con-
tains a default domain called "ALL HSNs;" it contains all 64 HSNs.
4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the name of the new HSN domain.
5. Select the row containing the HSN domain and click the Properties button. The HSN domains Properties dia-
logue appears.
In the HSN domains Properties dialogue, you can modify the properties of the HSN domain and create HSN
groups.
6. Under Groups, in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to define a HSN
group (for information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48):
- Name: Enter a name for the HSN group. This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a HSN
group.
- Min.: Enter the first HSN in this HSN group.
- Max.: Enter the last HSN in this HSN group.
- Step: Enter the value interval between HSNs in this HSN group.
- Excluded: Enter the HSNs that you do not want to use in this HSN group. You can enter or paste a list of
HSNs; the values must be separated with either a comma, or a semi-colon, or a space. You can also enter a
range of HSNs to be excluded from this group, by entering the first and last HSN of the range separated by a
hyphen. For example, entering 0-5 corresponds to entering 0 1 2 3 4 5.
- Extra: Enter the additional HSNs, outside the first and last HSNs of the group, that you want to use in this HSN
group. You can enter or paste a list of HSNs; the values must be separated with either a comma, or a semi-
colon, or a space. You can also enter a range of HSNs to be excluded from this group, by entering the first
and last HSN of the range separated by a hyphen. For example, entering 0-5 corresponds to entering 0 1 2 3
4 5.
7. Click OK to close the HSN domains Properties dialogue.
8. Click Close to close the HSN Domains table.
Note: You can associate frequency groups to frequency domains using the HSN Groups table.
You can open the HSN Groups table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder and select-
ing Network Settings > HSNs > Groups from the context menu.
5.7.2 Setting HCS Layers

You can model hierarchical networks in A9155 by defining hierarchical cell structure (HCS) layers. HCS layers are defined
by the following parameters:
Priority
Layer reception threshold
Maximum speed.
The priority and layer reception threshold are used to determine the best server on each pixel. When there are several
possible transmitters, the best server will be determined by the priority. If there are transmitters on different layers having
the same priority, the transmitter for which the difference between the received signal level and the layer reception thresh-
old will be selected as the best server. Transmitters whose received signal level is below the layer reception threshold will
be ranked by the signal level, but will not be chosen as best server.
Note: You can set A9155 to select the transmitter with the highest received signal level as the
serving transmitter by changing an option in the atoll.ini file. For more information on chang-
ing options in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
The maximum speed is used to select HCS layer users according to the speed defined in the mobility.
To define HCS layers:
3. Select Network Settings > HCS Layers. The HCS Layers table appears.
4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to define a HCS layer (for infor-
mation on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48):
- Name: Enter a name for the HCS layer. This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a HCS layer.
- Priority: Enter a priority for the HCS layer. "0" is the lowest priority.
- Max. Speed (km/h): Enter a maximum mobility speed for the HCS layer.
- Layer Reception Threshold (dBm): Enter a layer reception threshold in dBm.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 289

A9155 User Manual
5.7.3 Cell Types

A cell type is a defined set of TRX types. The cell type, with its TRX types, constitutes the basic configuration of a trans-
mitter in GSM/GPRS/EDGE. By changing the cell type assigned to a transmitter or station template, you change its basic
configuration. You can create cell types and assign different existing TRX types to them.
"TRX Types" on page 290
"Creating a Cell Type" on page 290
"Examples of Cell Types" on page 291.
5.7.3.1 TRX Types

By default, the A9155 GSM/GPRS/EDGE document template has three types of TRXs:
BCCH: The BCCH TRX type is the BCCH carrier
TCH: The TCH TRX type is the default traffic carrier
TCH_INNER: The TRX type is the inner traffic carrier.
If necessary, you can define additional TRX types by creating them in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE document template. The
template is located in the templates directory, within the A9155 install directory, and is called "GSM_EGPRS.mdb." For
information on the A9155 document template, see the Administrator Manual.
5.7.3.2 Creating a Cell Type

A cell type must have a BCCH TRX type for the broadcast control channel and a TCH TRX type for the default traffic
carrier; it can also have a TCH_INNER TRX type. You can not have more than one instance of a given TRX type in a cell
type.
To create a cell type:
3. Select Network Settings > Cell Types. The Cell Types table appears.
4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the name of the new cell type. This name will appear in
other dialogues when you select a cell type.
5. Select the row containing the cell type and click the Properties button. The cell types Properties dialogue
appears.
In the cell types Properties dialogue, you can add and define the TRX types that will constitute the cell type.
6. Under TRX Types, in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to define a
TRX type (for information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48):
- TRX Type: Select a TRX type from the list.
- Frequency Domain: Select a frequency domain from the list. Only channels belonging to this frequency
domain will be allocated to TRXs of this TRX type during automatic or manual frequency planning.
- DL Power Offset: Enter a value for the reduction of power relative to the transmitter power. The downlink
power offset can be used to model inner subcells.
- Reception Threshold (dBm): Enter a minimum received signal for this TRX type.
- C/I Threshold (dB): Enter a minimum signal quality for this TRX type. The C/I Threshold can be used in inter-
ference studies and in the AFP.
- DTX Supported: If the TRX type supports DTX (Discontinuous Transmission) technology, select the DTX
Supported check box. Subcells supporting DTX can reduce interference they produce according to the
defined voice activity factor. This option has no impact on BCCH TRX type.
- Timeslot Configuration: Select a timeslot configuration from the list. The timeslot configuration defines the
distribution of circuit, packet and shared timeslots for the subcell, respecting the number of TRXs.
- Half-Rate Traffic Ratio (%): Enter the percentage of half-rate voice traffic in for this TRX type. This value is
used to calculate the number of timeslots required to respond to the voice traffic demand.
Important: The target rate of traffic overflow and the half-rate traffic ratio must be the same for BCCH
and TCH TRX types. If the values are different for BCCH and TCH TRX types, A9155 will
use the values for the target rate of traffic overflow and the half-rate traffic ratio from the
BCCH TRX type.
- Target Rate of Traffic Overflow (%): Enter the target rate of traffic overflow. The target rate of traffic overflow
is used during traffic analysis to distribute the traffic between subcells and layers. The value is the percentage
of candidate traffic overflowing to a subcell with a lower priority. It has an impact on the traffic capture between
inner and outer subcells, and between micro and macro layers. In other words, The target rate of traffic over-
flow can be considered to an estimation of the allowed percentage of traffic rejected from subcells or layers of
higher priority to subcells or layers of lower subcells (see Figure 5.7).
290 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: If the traffic overflow target is set to a value lower than the grade of service, it means that
the traffic rejected (according to the queuing model selected in the dimensioning model:
Erlang B or Erlang C) will be lost and will not overflow to other subcells.
- Hopping Mode: Select the frequency hopping mode supported by this TRX type. The hopping mode can be
either "Base Band Hopping mode (BBH)" or "Synthesized Hopping mode (SFH)." If frequency hopping is not
supported, select "Non Hopping."
- Allocation Strategy: Select the allocation strategy used during manual or automatic frequency planning.
There are two available allocation strategies:
- Group Constrained: Only channels belonging to a same group in the frequency domain can be assigned.
- Max. MAL Length: Enter the maximum length of the mobile allocation list (MAL), in other words, the maximum
number of channels allocated to the TRXs of subcells based on this TRX type during automatic frequency
planning if the Hopping Mode is either SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base Band Hopping)
and if the Allocation Strategy is Free.
- HSN Domain: Select the HSN domain for this TRX type. Only hopping sequence numbers (HSN) belonging
to the selected HSN domain will be allocated to subcells during automatic or manual frequency planning. The
HSNs are allocated if the Hopping Mode is either SFH (Synthesized Frequency Hopping) or BBH (Base Band
Hopping).
- Freeze HSN: If the HSN assigned to this TRX type is to be kept when a new AFP session is started, select
the Freeze HSN check box.
- AFP Weight: Enter an AFP weight. The AFP weight is used to increase or decrease the importance of a sub-
cell during automatic frequency planning. The value must be a real number. The higher the AFP weight is, the
higher the constraint on the TRX type.
- % Max. Interference: Enter the maximum level of interference allowable during automatic frequency plan-
ning. The interference is defined as a percentage of area or traffic, as defined during the calculation of the
interference matrices.
- Default TRX Equipment: Select the default TRX equipment for this TRX type. It will apply to all TRXs
belonging to a subcell based on this TRX type. By selecting the default TRX equipment, the maximum number
of coding schemes in GPRS (CS) and in EDGE (MCS) is set at the TRX type level. You can also define the
TRX equipment for each TRX.
- 8PSK Power Backoff (dB): Enter the average power reduction for E/GPRS transmitters due to 8PSK modu-
lation in EDGE. This has an impact on the EDGE service zone which can be seen in traffic analysis and EDGE
predictions.
- Number of Antennas (Transmission Diversity): Enter the number of antennas subcells based on this TRX
type can use for transmission. In most cases, a transmitter will transmit with only one antenna, however, some
transmitters are capable of transmission diversity. By transmitting on more than one antenna, the signal expe-
riences a gain of 3 dB. An additional transmission diversity gain can be defined per clutter class in order to
correctly model gain due to the environment.
Notes: An Other Properties tab is available if user-defined fields have been added to the Cell
Types table.
7. Click OK to close the cell types Properties dialogue.

8. Click Close to close the Cell Types table.
5.7.3.3 Examples of Cell Types

When you create a new GSM/GPRS/EDGE document, some cell types are provided by default. In this section, the param-
eters for two examples of cell types are given:
"Normal Cell Type" on page 291
"Concentric Cell Type" on page 292.
Normal Cell Type
A normal cell type consists of two TRX types:

BCCH TRX type
TCH TRX type
The table below describes the parameters to be specified for each hopping mode.
Parameter Hopping mode

Where Used in A9155 Non
BBH SFH
hopping
Automatic or manual frequency
Frequency domain x x x
planning
Maximum MAL (Mobile Allocation
Automatic frequency planning Not used x x
List) length
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 291

A9155 User Manual

BBH SFH
hopping
Allocation mode x x x
planning
Interference studies,
Min. C/I x x x
Automatic frequency planning
% max interference Automatic frequency planning x x x
= 0 for BCCH = 0 for BCCH = 0 for BCCH
Default DL power offset Signal level studies
= 0 for TCH = 0 for TCH = 0 for TCH
Base Band Synthesized
Default hopping mode Interference studies Non Hopping
Hopping Hopping
Default reception threshold Signal level studies x x x
AFP weight Automatic frequency planning x x x
HSN domain Automatic frequency planning Not used x x
Freeze HSN Automatic frequency planning x x x
Automatic frequency planning,
DTX support (default) x x x
Interference studies
Half-rate traffic ratio Traffic analysis x x x
Target rate of traffic overflow Traffic analysis x x x
Timeslot configuration Dimensioning x x x
Traffic analysis,
TRX equipment x x x
Packet studies
Traffic analysis,
8PSK power backoff x x x
Packet studies
No. of antennas Signal level studies x x x
Concentric Cell Type
A concentric cell type consists of three TRX types:

BCCH TRX type
TCH TRX type
TCH_INNER
The table below describes the parameters to be specified for each hopping mode.

BBH SFH
hopping
Frequency domain x x x
planning
Maximum MAL (Mobile Allocation
Automatic frequency planning Not used x x
List) length
Allocation mode x x x
planning
Interference studies,
Min. C/I x x x
Automatic frequency planning
% max interference Automatic frequency planning x x x
= 0 for BCCH = 0 for BCCH = 0 for BCCH
=> 0 for TCH => 0 for TCH => 0 for TCH
Default DL power offset
Signal level studies <> 0 for <> 0 for <> 0 for
TCH_INNER TCH_INNER TCH_INNER
Base Band Synthesized
Default hopping mode Interference studies Non Hopping
Hopping Hopping
Default reception threshold Signal level studies x x x
AFP weight Automatic frequency planning x x x
HSN domain Automatic frequency planning Not used x x
Freeze HSN Automatic frequency planning x x x
Automatic frequency planning,
DTX support (default) x x x
Interference studies
Half-rate traffic ratio Traffic analysis x x x
Target rate of traffic overflow Traffic analysis x x x
Timeslot configuration Dimensioning x x x
292 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

5.7.4 TRX Equipment

In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, coding schemes are modelled using TRX equipment. For each TRX, you can define a
maximum coding scheme for GPRS (CS) or for EDGE (MCS). The maximum CS and MCS can also be defined per termi-
nal, if the terminal is GPRS or EDGE-capable. Capacity will be limited by the lower of the maximum coding schemes
defined for the TRX equipment and for the terminal. For example, if the highest coding index number defined on the termi-
nal is lower than the value defined on the TRX equipment, capacity will be limited by the highest index number supported
by the terminal.
The coding scheme index number is an input in traffic captures (and, therefore, in dimensioning) and in GPRS coverage
predictions. It is important to keep in mind that, before dimensioning, in other words, before TRXs have been allocated to
transmitters, the TRX equipment defined per subcell is used in calculations. However, once TRXs have been allocated,
the value for TRX equipment is read from the TRXs. The TRX equipment, and any parameters or limitations, will have be
defined again for the TRXs. Otherwise, the equipment will not be taken into account during calculations.
In this section, the following is described:
"Creating or Importing TRX Equipment" on page 293.
5.7.4.1 Creating or Importing TRX Equipment

In A9155, you can create or import TRX equipment for GSM/GPRS/EDGE documents.
To create new TRX equipment:
3. Select Equipment > TRX Equipment. The TRX Equipment table appears. The TRX Equipment table contains
a entry called "Standard."
4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter the following parameters to create TRX equipment (for
- Name: Select a TRX type from the list.
- Max. CS: Enter the maximum number of coding schemes (CS) that the equipment can use. The CS is for
GPRS-compatible equipment.
- Max. MCS: Enter the maximum number of modulation and coding schemes (MCS) that the equipment can
use. The MCS is for EDGE-compatible equipment.
If you have TRX equipment data in text or comma-separated value (CSV) format, you can import it into the TRX Equip-
ment table in the current document. If the data is in another A9155 document, you can first export it in text or CSV format
and then import it into the TRX Equipment table of your current A9155 document. When you are importing, A9155 allows
you to select what values you import into which columns of the table.
To import new TRX equipment:
3. Select Equipment > TRX Equipment. The TRX Equipment table appears. The HSN Domains table contains a
entry called "Standard."
4. Right-click the TRX Equipment table. The context menu appears.
5. Select Import from the context menu. For information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from External
Files" on page 56.
5.7.5 Codec Equipment

In A9155, you can model configurations of voice codecs for GSM networks. The codec configurations are modelled with
codec equipment and their parameters are used in coverage predictions concerning voice quality indicators.
You can create different codec configurations for different Active Codec mode Sets (ACS). For example, a certain codec
configuration might have full-rate and half-rate codec modes defined for 12.2 kbps, 7.4 kbps, 5.9 kbps, and 4.75 kbps. This
configuration would then only be compatible with the defined modes.
When the codec equipment does not have the capacity for ideal link adaptation, adaptation thresholds are used in calcu-
lations (see "Setting Codec Mode Adaptation Thresholds" on page 294). When the codec equipment has the capacity for
ideal link adaptation, quality thresholds are used in calculations (see "Setting Codec Mode Quality Thresholds" on
page 295).
"Creating or Modifying Codec Equipment" on page 294
"Setting Codec Mode Adaptation Thresholds" on page 294
"Setting Codec Mode Quality Thresholds" on page 295
"Using Codec Equipment in Transmitters and Terminals" on page 295.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 293

A9155 User Manual
5.7.5.1 Creating or Modifying Codec Equipment

You create codec equipment by creating a new entry in the Codec Equipment table. Additional parameters, such as the
adaptation thresholds and the quality thresholds, can be set in the Properties dialogue for the codec equipment. The addi-
tional parameters are explained in the following sections:
"Setting Codec Mode Adaptation Thresholds" on page 294
"Setting Codec Mode Quality Thresholds" on page 295
To create or modify codec equipment:
3. Select Equipment > Codec Equipment. The Codec Equipment table appears.
4. If you are creating new codec equipment, enter the name of the codec equipment in the row marked with the New
Row icon ( ). This name will appear in other dialogues when you select codec equipment.
If you are modifying existing codec equipment, continue with the following step.
5. Set the following parameters for the codec equipment:

- Ideal Link Adaptation: Select the Ideal Link Adaptation check box if you want the codec mode that offers
the best quality indicator (BER, FER, or MOS) to be selected. Otherwise, A9155 will choose the codec mode
with the highest priority from those requiring an adaptation threshold lower than the calculated qualIty (CN or
CI + N).
- QI for Ideal Link Adaptation: Select the quality indicator to be used if the Ideal Link Adaptation check box
is selected.
- Reference Noise (dBm): Enter the receiver noise that provided the mapping (thresholds - codecs). In cov-
erage predictions, for a specific terminal leading to another receiver total noise, the thresholds will be shifted
by the noise difference
Note: You can add new fields to the Codec Equipment table by right-clicking the table and
selecting Table Fields from the context menu. The new fields will appear in the Codec
Equipment table and on the Other Properties tab of the selected codec equipments Prop-
erties dialogue.
5.7.5.2 Setting Codec Mode Adaptation Thresholds

A GSM network has a variety of different codec modes that allow it to optimise resource usage. These codec modes
include Full Rate (FR), Half Rate (HR), Enhanced Full Rate (EFR), and many Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) modes. A GSM
network, with different codec equipment on different transmitters, can dynamically allocate and manage resources based
on interference levels.
You can define quality thresholds for each codec mode compatible with the codec equipment in the Adaptation Thresholds
tab in the codec equipment Properties dialogue. These thresholds are used in calculations when the codec equipment
does not have the capacity for ideal link adaptation.
To define the codec mode adaptation thresholds to be used when the codec equipment does not have the capacity for
ideal link adaptation:
4. In the Codec Equipment table, right-click the record describing the codec equipment for which you want to define
adaptation thresholds. The context menu appears.
5. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The codec equipment Properties dialogue appears.
6. Select the Adaptation Thresholds tab. Each codec mode adaptation threshold has the following parameters:
- Codec Mode: The codec mode.
- Mobility: The mobility to which this configured codec mode applies. You can select "All" if you want it to apply
to all mobilities.
- Frequency Hopping: The type of frequency hopping to which this configured codec mode applies. You can
select "All" if you want the adaptation threshold to apply to any type of frequency hopping.
- Frequency Band: The frequency band to which this configured codec mode applies. You can select "All" if
you want it to apply to any frequency band.
- Adaptation Threshold (dB): Enter the adaptation threshold that will be used when the codec equipment does
not have the capacity for ideal link adaptation.
Note: You can create a new adaptation threshold by entering the parameters in the row marked
with the New Row icon ( ).
7. Click OK.
294 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

5.7.5.3 Setting Codec Mode Quality Thresholds

You can define quality thresholds for each codec mode compatible with the codec equipment in the Adaptation Thresholds
tab in the codec equipment Properties dialogue. These thresholds are used in calculations when the codec equipment
has the capacity for automatic mode selection.
The quality indicators that can be used with codec equipment are Bit Error Rate (BER), Frame Error Rate (FER), and Mean
Opinion Score (MOS). You can define each a quality threshold for each quality indicator, in combination with specific codec
modes, mobilities, frequency hopping modes, and frequency bands, as a function of CN and CI + N.
These quality thresholds are used in calculations when codec equipment has the capacity for ideal link adaptation. The
quality threshold chosen respects the combination of codec modes, mobilities, frequency hopping modes, and frequency
bands as well as the selected quality indicator.
To define the codec mode quality thresholds to be used when the codec equipment has the capacity for automatic mode
selection:
4. In the Codec Equipment table, right-click the record describing the codec equipment for which you want to define
adaptation thresholds. The context menu appears.
5. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The codec equipment Properties dialogue appears.
6. Select the Quality Graphs tab. Each quality indicator threshold has the following parameters:
- Quality Indicator: The quality indicator.
- Codec Mode: The codec mode to which this quality indicator threshold applies.
- Mobility: The mobility to which this quality indicator threshold applies. You can select "All" if you want it to
apply to all mobilities.
- Frequency Hopping: The type of frequency hopping to which this quality indicator threshold applies. You can
select "All" if you want it to apply to all types of frequency hopping.
- Frequency Band: The frequency band to which this quality indicator threshold applies. You can select "All" if
you want it to apply to all frequency bands.
- QI = f(C/N): The values of the graph defining the selected quality indicator threshold as a function of CN. You
can view the graph and edit its values by selecting the row containing the quality indicator and clicking the CN
Graph button.
- QI = f(C/I): The values of the graph defining the selected quality indicator threshold as a function of CI. You
can view the graph and edit its values by selecting the row containing the quality indicator and clicking the CI
Graph button.
Note: You can create a new quality indicator threshold by entering the parameters in the row
7. Click OK.
5.7.5.4 Using Codec Equipment in Transmitters and Terminals

In A9155, codec equipment can be assigned to transmitters and terminals. If codec equipment is assigned on both the
transmitter and terminal, A9155 takes the codec modes common to both and finds the possible modes, using the terminal-
side thresholds if the defined thresholds are different on transmitter and terminal sides. If no codec equipment is defined
either at the transmitter or in the terminal, the transmitter will not be considered in the specific quality indicators coverage
prediction.
To assign codec equipment to a transmitter:
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign codec equipment. The context menu appears.
Note: You can also access a transmitters Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter on
the map and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. Click the Equipment tab.

6. Under GSM Properties, select the Codec Equipment from the list.
To assign codec equipment to a terminal:
3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Terminals folder.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 295

A9155 User Manual
4. Right-click the terminal to which you want to assign codec equipment. The context menu appears.
5. Select Properties from the context menu. The terminals Properties dialogue appears.
6. Select the Codec Equipment from the list.
5.7.6 GPRS/EDGE Equipment

In A9155, you can model GPRS/EDGE equipment with coding schemes and their related thresholds. Any GPRS/EDGE-
capable transmitters must have GPRS/EDGE equipment assigned to them.
"Creating or Modifying GPRS/EDGE Equipment" on page 296
"Using GPRS/EDGE Equipment in Transmitters and Terminals" on page 297
"Adapting Coding Scheme Thresholds for a Maximum BLER" on page 297
"Displaying Coding Scheme Throughput Graphs" on page 297.
5.7.6.1 Creating or Modifying GPRS/EDGE Equipment

You create GPRS/EDGE equipment by creating a new entry in the GPRS/EDGE Equipment table. The coding scheme
thresholds for GPRS/EDGE equipment can be set in the Properties dialogue for the GPRS/EDGE equipment.
To create or modify GPRS/EDGE equipment:
3. Select Equipment > GPRS/EDGE Equipment. The GPRS/EDGE Equipment table appears.
4. If you are creating new GPRS/EDGE equipment, enter the name of the GPRS/EDGE equipment in the row marked
with the New Row icon ( ). This name will appear in other dialogues when you select GPRS/EDGE equipment.
If you are modifying existing GPRS/EDGE equipment, continue with the following step.
5. Set the following parameters for the GPRS/EDGE equipment:
- Technology: Select the technology that this equipment can be used with: GPRS/EDGE or just GPRS.
- Reference Noise (dBm): Enter the total noise at the receiver. The reference noise is used to convert values
of C in graphs to values of CN.
Note: You can add new fields to the GPRS/EDGE Equipment table by right-clicking the table and
selecting Table Fields from the context menu. The new fields will appear in the GPRS/
EDGE Equipment table and on the Other Properties tab of the selected GPRS/EDGE
equipments Properties dialogue.
6. In the GPRS/EDGE Equipment table, right-click the record describing the GPRS/EDGE equipment for which you
want to define adaptation thresholds. The context menu appears.
7. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The GPRS/EDGE equipment Properties dialogue appears.
The GPRS/EDGE equipment Properties dialogue has a General tab which allows you to modify the properties
described above.
8. Select the Thresholds tab. Each coding scheme threshold has the following parameters:
- Coding Scheme: The coding scheme.
- Reception Threshold (dBm): The signal level admission threshold for the corresponding coding scheme
when the ideal link adaptation option is cleared in GPRS/EDGE coverage predictions.
- C/I Threshold (dB): The C/I admission threshold for the corresponding coding scheme when the ideal link
adaptation option is cleared in GPRS/EDGE coverage predictions.
- Throughput = f(C) (kbps): The values of the graph defining the throughput as a function of C. You can view
the graph and edit its values by selecting the row containing the coding scheme and clicking the C Graph
button.
- Throughput = f(C/I) (kbps): The values of the graph defining the throughput as a function of CI. You can
view the graph and edit its values by selecting the row containing the coding scheme and clicking the CI
Graph button.
- Max. Throughput (kbps): The maximum throughput per timeslot using this coding scheme.
- 8PSK Modulation: The 8PSK Modulation check box is selected if this coding scheme supports it. This has
an impact on the EDGE service zone which can be seen in traffic analysis and EDGE predictions.
- EDGE: The EDGE check box is selected if this coding scheme supports EDGE.
- Frequency Hopping: The type of frequency hopping to which this coding scheme applies. You can select
"All" if you want it to apply to all types of frequency hopping.
- Mobility: The mobility to which this coding scheme applies. You can select "All" if you want it to apply to all
mobilities.
- Frequency Band: The frequency band to which this coding scheme applies. You can select "All" if you want
it to apply to all frequency bands.
296 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: You can create a new coding scheme threshold by entering the parameters in the row
9. Click OK.
5.7.6.2 Using GPRS/EDGE Equipment in Transmitters and Terminals

In A9155, GPRS/EDGE equipment can be assigned to transmitters. If GPRS/EDGE equipment is assigned on both the
transmitter and terminal, A9155 takes the GPRS/EDGE equipment common to both and finds the possible modes, using
the terminal-side thresholds if the defined thresholds are different on transmitter and terminal sides. If no GPRS/EDGE
equipment is defined either at the transmitter or in the terminal, the transmitter will not be considered in the specific quality
indicators coverage prediction.
To assign GPRS/EDGE equipment to a transmitter:
3. Right-click the transmitter to which you want to assign GPRS/EDGE equipment. The context menu appears.
5. Click the Equipment tab.

6. Under GPRS/EGPRS Properties, select the GPRS/EGPRS Transmitter check box.
7. Select the GPRS/EGPRS Equipment from the list.
To assign codec equipment to a terminal:
3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Terminals folder.
4. Right-click the terminal to which you want to assign GPRS/EDGE equipment. The context menu appears.
5. Select Properties from the context menu. The terminals Properties dialogue appears.
6. Select the GPRS Equipment from the list.
5.7.6.3 Adapting Coding Scheme Thresholds for a Maximum BLER

You can have A9155 automatically calculate the reception and CI thresholds for GPRS/EDGE equipment in A9155. You
enter the acceptable Block Error Rate (BLER) in the GPRS/EDGE equipment Properties dialogue and A9155 calculates
the thresholds required to ensure that the defined BLER is never exceeded. The admission threshold corresponds to
1 - BLER X max. throughout calculated for the coding scheme.
To calculate the reception and C/I thresholds for GPRS/EDGE equipment:
A9155 to automatically calculate reception and CI thresholds. The context menu appears.
6. Select the Thresholds tab.
7. Under Calculate the Thresholds to Get the Following BLER Value, enter a value in the BLER text box and click
the Calculate button. A9155 calculates the thresholds required to satisfy the entered BLER.
8. Click OK to close the GPRS/EDGE equipment Properties dialogue and save the new threshold values.
5.7.6.4 Displaying Coding Scheme Throughput Graphs

In GPRS/EDGE technology, coding schemes are linked with data transmission redundancy levels. With coding schemes,
two types of information is transmitted: user data and error correction data. There is a trade-off between accurate data
transmission and transmission rates. Low error correction offers potentially higher transmission rates, but also a higher
risk of data loss. On the other hand, a high rate of error correction ensures safer data transmission, but means a lower
transmission rate.
Coding schemes are defined to obtain the best compromise between the transmission rate and the safety of the data sent.
That is why each coding scheme has an optimum working range depending on either C or CI values. This optimum range
can be seen in the coding scheme throughput graphs for each defined GPRS/EDGE equipment. The graphs show the
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 297

A9155 User Manual
throughput as a function of radio conditions (C and C/I) as calculated using block error rates. The graphs can help choose
a coding scheme suitable to radio conditions.
To display the graph of the throughput as a function of C or CI for a given coding scheme:
A9155 to automatically calculate reception and CI thresholds. The context menu appears.
6. Select the Thresholds tab.
7. Select the coding scheme for which you want to display a throughput graph and click one of the following:
- C Graph: Click the C Graph button to display a graph defining the throughput as a function of C.
- C/I Graph: Click the C/I Graph button to display a graph defining the throughput as a function of CI.
8. Click OK to close the dialogue.
5.7.7 Timeslot Configurations

You can create timeslot configurations that can be used to allocate different timeslot types to TRXs. A timeslot configura-
tion describes how circuit, packet, and shared timeslots will be distributed in a subcell, depending on the number of TRXs.
Shared timeslots are used for both circuit-switched and packet-switched calls.
The distribution and definition of timeslot configurations have an influence on the network dimensioning results and the
calculation of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs).
Timeslot configurations are assigned to each TRX type of each cell type. If there is no timeslot configuration assigned to
a TRX type, the fields defined at the subcell level "Number of packet (circuit or shared) timeslots" are used.
In this section, the following is explained:
"Creating or Modifying a Timeslot Configuration" on page 298.
5.7.7.1 Creating or Modifying a Timeslot Configuration

To create or modify a timeslot configuration:
3. Select Network Settings > Timeslot Configurations. The List of Timeslot Configurations table appears.
4. If you are creating a new timeslot configuration, enter the name of the timeslot configuration in the row marked
with the New Row icon ( ). This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a timeslot configuration.
If you are modifying an existing timeslot configuration, continue with the following step.
5. Select the row containing the timeslot configuration and click the Properties button. The timeslot configurations
Under Mapping between TRX numbers and timeslot configurations, each row corresponds to a distribution of
timeslots and is identified by an index number. During dimensioning, A9155 determines the number of circuit and
packet timeslots required to meet the traffic demand. A9155 uses the timeslot configuration to determine how
many TRXs are needed to meet the need in timeslots. If, during dimensioning, there are not enough index
numbers in the timeslot configuration, A9155 reuses the last index number in the timeslot configuration.
6. In the timeslot configurations Properties dialogue, enter the following information for each index number:
- Number of Shared Timeslots: The number of timeslots that can be used for both circuit-switched (GSM) and
packet-switched (GPRS and EDGE) services.
- Number of Circuit Timeslots: The number of timeslots that can be used only for both circuit-switched (GSM)
services.
- Number of Packet Timeslots: The number of timeslots that can be used only for packet-switched (GPRS
and EDGE) services.
Note: In GSM/GPRS/EDGE the total number of timeslots per index number must not exceed 8 for
timeslot configurations intended for TCH TRXs and 7 for timeslot configurations intended
for BCCH TRXs.
7. Click OK to close the timeslot configurations Properties dialogue.

8. Click Close to close the List of Timeslot Configurations table.
298 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

5.7.8 Advanced Transmitter Configuration Options

A9155 offers several options to help you configure more complex transmitter situations. These options are explained in
this section:
"Defining Extended Cells" on page 299
"Advanced Modelling of Multi-Band Transmitters" on page 299.
5.7.8.1 Defining Extended Cells

Normally, coverage of a GSM cell is limited to a 35 km radius. Because users are at varying distances from the base station
and radio waves travel at a constant speed, the signal from users who are further than 35 km from the base station can
shift almost an entire timeslot, interfering with the signal on the adjacent timeslot. Extended GSM cells enable the operator
to overcome this limit by taking this delay into consideration when defining the timing advance for users in the extended
cells. Extended cells can cover distances from 70 to 140 km from the base station.
In a network with extended cells, A9155 will calculate coverage predictions from the extended cells defined minimum to
maximum range, but will calculate interference caused by the extended cell from the base station outwards.
To define an extended cell:
3. Right-click the transmitter for which you want to define an extended cell. The context menu appears.

6. Under Extended Cells, set a Min. Range and a Max. Range for the extended cell.
7. Click OK.
5.7.8.2 Advanced Modelling of Multi-Band Transmitters

In A9155 GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, all subcells share the same frequency band by default. However, by changing an
option in the atoll.ini file, you can model transmitters with more than one frequency band. For more information on changing
options in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
Once you have set the multi-band option in the atoll.ini file and restarted A9155, you can modify the properties of existing
transmitters to change them to multi-band transmitters or create a multi-band transmitter template. The relevant properties
of all multi-band transmitters can be accessed in a special table.
"Defining a Multi-Band Transmitter" on page 299
"Creating a Multi-Band Template" on page 300
"Accessing the Multi-Band Propagation Parameters Table" on page 301.
5.7.8.2.1 Defining a Multi-Band Transmitter

Each subcell on a transmitter is assigned a frequency domain. After making the necessary changes in the atoll.ini file, you
must change the frequency domain of one or more non-BCCH subcells to a domain on a frequency band that is different
from the frequency band used by the BCCH. You can then modify the frequency-band-specific settings:
Antenna type, height, mechanical and additional electrical downtilt,
Equipment losses
Propagation models and path loss matrices.
This settings are taken into account in:
Coverage predictions
Traffic capture
Dimensioning
Interference matrices.
To define the propagation settings for a frequency band used by a subcell:
3. Right-click the transmitter you want to change to a multi-band transmitter. The context menu appears.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 299

A9155 User Manual

6. Under Subcell (TRX Group) Settings, change the Frequency Domain for one of the TRXs to a frequency band
belonging to a different frequency band.
7. In the Subcell (TRX Group) Settings table, select the row of the TRX and click the Frequency Band Propaga-
tion button. The frequency band Properties dialogue appears.
8. Click the Antennas tab. You can set the following parameters:
- Height/Ground: The Height/Ground box gives the height of the antenna above the ground. This is added to
the altitude of the site as given by the DTM. If the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must
include the height of building.
Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the antenna. The other fields, Azimuth, Mechanical Down-
tilt, and Additional Electrical Downtilt, display additional antenna parameters.
- Under Secondary Antennas, you can select one or more secondary antennas in the Antenna column and
enter their Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, Additional Electrical Downtilt, and % Power, which is the per-
centage of power reserved for this particular antenna. For example, for a transmitter with one secondary
antenna, if you reserve 40% of the total power for the secondary antenna, 60% is available for the main
antenna.
9. Click the Propagation tab. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius,
and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix.
10. Click OK.
5.7.8.2.2 Creating a Multi-Band Template

If you will be creating new multi-band base stations, you can first create a multi-band template with the necessary param-
eters, including the propagation model parameters for each subcell using a different frequency band.
Note: To create a multi-band template, you must have an appropriate multi-band cell type to
assign to the template. If you have not already created a multi-band cell type, you must do
so before creating the template. For information on creating a cell type, see "Creating a Cell
Type" on page 290.
It is assumed that you have already set the multi-band transmitter option in the atoll.ini file and restarted A9155 before
beginning this procedure.
To create a multi-band template:
1. In the Radio toolbar, click the arrow to the right of the list of templates.
3. Under Station Templates, select the station template that most closely resembles the station template you want
to create and click Add. The Properties dialogue appears.
4. Create the multi-band template:
a. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue.
b. In the Name text box, give the template a descriptive name.
c. From the Cell Type list, select the multi-band cell type that corresponds to the type of station template you are
creating.
d. Make any other necessary changes to the station template parameters. For information on the parameters
available, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on page 177.
e. When you have finished setting the parameters for the station template, click OK to close the dialogue and
save your changes.
5. Set the propagation parameters for each frequency band in the multi-band template:
a. Select the multi-band template you have just created and click Add. Because the station template you select-
ed is a multi-band template, the New Station Template dialogue appears with the following options (see
Figure 5.60):
- Add a new station template: If you select this option and click OK, A9155 creates a new station template
based on the selected one.
- Add a new multi-band station template for the frequency band: If you select this option and click OK,
A9155 allows you to set the propagation parameters for the selected frequency band.
300 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 5.60: New Station Template dialogue
b. Select Add a new multi-band station template for the frequency band, choose a frequency band from the
list and click OK. A properties dialogue appears where you can set the antenna and propagation parameters
for the selected frequency band (see Figure 5.60):
- Under Main Antenna, you can modify the following: the antenna Model, 1st Sector Azimuth, from which
the azimuth of the other sectors are offset to offer complete coverage of the area, the Height of the an-
tenna from the ground (i.e., the height over the DTM; if the transmitter is situated on a building, the height
entered must include the height of building), the Mechanical Downtilt, and the Additional Electrical
Downtilt.
- Under Propagation, you can modify the following: the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for
both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. For information on propagation models, see "Chapter 4:
Managing Calculations in A9155".
Figure 5.61: Properties dialogue for frequency band of a multi-band template
6. Click OK. The properties defined for the frequency band appear in the Station Template Properties dialogue with
a name composed of the multi-band template they belong to followed by the frequency band, separated by "@".
7. Repeat step 5. for every frequency band modelled by the multi-band template.
5.7.8.2.3 Accessing the Multi-Band Propagation Parameters Table

In a GSM/GPRS/EDGE multi-band document, you can access the properties of all multi-band transmitters using the Multi-
Band Propagation Parameters table.
To open the Multi-Band Propagation Parameters table:
3. Select Subcells > Multi-Band Propagation Parameters from the context menu. The Multi-Band Propagation
Parameters table appears. Multi-band transmitters are identified in the Transmitter column, with the subcells
using a frequency band other than the main frequency band for that transmitter identified with a name composed
of the multi-band transmitter they belong to followed by the frequency band, separated by "@".
5.7.9 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Multi-Service Traffic Data

In A9155, you can define the traffic data in the GSM/GPRS/EDGE network. The data will be used in different network
calculations, such as, dimensioning and coverage predictions.
"Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services" on page 302
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 301

A9155 User Manual
"Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types" on page 302

"Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals" on page 303.
5.7.9.1 Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services

You can model both circuit and packet-switched GSM/GPRS/EDGE services.
"Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Service" on page 302
"Displaying the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services Table" on page 302
5.7.9.1.1 Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Service

You can define the various user services in GSM/GPRS/EDGE documents. The services can be circuit-switched or data-
switched. Currently the only circuit-switched service in a GSM/GPRS/EDGE network is a GSM voice service that uses a
single timeslot. The quality requirement parameters of services are mostly used in the dimensioning process.
To create or modify a service:
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Parameters folder.
3. Right-click the Services folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select New from the context menu. The Services New Element Properties dialogue appears.
Note: You can modify the properties of an existing service by right-clicking the service in the
Services folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.

- Name: A9155 proposes a name for the new service, but you can change the name to something more descrip-
tive.
- Type: You can select either Circuit or Packet as the service type. If you select Circuit, the only other appli-
cable parameter is Max. Probability of Blocking (or Delay) (Erlang B or C, respectively).
- Max. Probability of Blocking (or Delay): The maximum blocking rate defines the call blocking or call queuing
rate for the GSM voice services and the probability of delayed packets for EGPRS data services.
- Max. Packet Delay: The maximum period of time that a packet can be delayed before transmission.
- Min. Throughput (per User): The minimum throughput per user is used in the dimensioning process for
GPRS/EDGE networks.
- Required Availability for Minimum Throughput: The percentage of cell coverage where the minimum
throughput per user must be available. This value is also used in dimensioning.
- Max. Number of Timeslots: The maximum number of timeslots is used during dimensioning to limit the
number of timeslots that can be assigned to a user using this service. This parameter applies to packet-
switched services.
- Under Application Throughput, you can define the Scaling Factor and the Offset. The throughput scaling
factor and offset are used to determine the user or application level throughput in RLC/MAC throughput or
timeslot coverage prediction. These parameters model header information and other supplementary data that
do not appear at the application level.
6. Click OK.
5.7.9.1.2 Displaying the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Services Table

You can display the parameters of all the services in the Services table. You can modify any of the parameters or create
a new service.
To display the Services table:
4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Services table appears. For information on working with tables
in A9155, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48.
5.7.9.2 Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types

In a multi-layer GSM/GPRS/EDGE network, the speed the user is travelling is one of the most important criteria in allocat-
ing the user to a server. A mobile user travelling at a high speed is usually allocated a channel on the macro layer rather
than on the micro layer in order to minimise signalling and system load and to spread the traffic over several layers.
"Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Type" on page 303
"Displaying the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types Table" on page 303.
302 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

5.7.9.2.1 Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Type

To create or modify a mobility type:
3. Right-click the Mobility Types folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select New from the context menu. The Mobility Types New Element Properties dialogue appears.
Note: You can modify the properties of an existing mobility type by right-clicking the mobility type
in the Mobility Types folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.

- Name: A9155 proposes a name for the new mobility type, but you can change the name to something more
descriptive.
- Speed: The average speed of the mobility type. In a hierarchical network, a maximum speed is defined for
each HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure) layer. Any mobility that exceeds the defined maximum speed will not
be captured by that layer but passed on to the layer above.
6. Click OK.
5.7.9.2.2 Displaying the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Mobility Types Table

You can display the parameters of all the mobility types in the Mobility Types table. You can modify any of the parameters
or create a new mobility type.
To display the Mobility Types table:
4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Mobility Types table appears. For information on working with
tables in A9155, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48.
5.7.9.3 Modelling GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals

In GSM/GPRS/EDGE, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA,
or a cars on-board navigation device. In A9155, a terminal is modelled in terms of its GSM and GPRS/EDGE-relevant
parameters.
"Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminal" on page 303
"Displaying the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals Table" on page 304.
5.7.9.3.1 Creating or Modifying a GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminal

To create or modify a terminal:
3. Right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select New from the context menu. The Terminals New Element Properties dialogue appears.
Note: You can modify the properties of an existing terminal by right-clicking the terminal in the
Terminals folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.

- Name: A9155 proposes a name for the new terminal, but you can change the name to something more
descriptive.
- Number of DL Timeslots: If the terminal is GPRS or EDGE-compatible, you can enter the maximum number
of downlink timeslots the terminal can use. Terminals using only circuit-switched services will use only one
downlink timeslot.
- Main Band: The primary frequency band with which the terminal is compatible.
- Secondary Band: The secondary frequency band with which the terminal is compatible. The compatible fre-
quency bands are used to allocate the user to a transmitter using that frequency band if the network is a multi-
band network.
- Technology: The technology with which the terminal is compatible. You can choose between GSM, GPRS
(i.e., GSM/GPRS), or GPRS/EDGE (i.e., GSM/GPRS/EDGE).
- GPRS Equipment: If the terminal is GPRS or EDGE-compatible, select the GPRS equipment for the terminal.
This parameter is optional.
- Codec Equipment: Select the codec equipment for the terminal. This parameter is optional.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 303

A9155 User Manual
- Max. CS (GPRS): If the terminal is GPRS-compatible, the maximum number of coding schemes (CS) that the
terminal can use.
- Max. MCS (EDGE): If the terminal is EDGE-compatible, the maximum number of modulation and coding
schemes (MCS) that the terminal can use.
Note: The highest CS or MCS available to the terminal is limited by the maximum CS or MCS
defined for the TRX equipment assigned to a transmitter.
- Noise Figure: The noise caused by the terminal. This value is added to the thermal noise (set to -121 dBm
by default) in predictions when studying CN or CI + N instead of C or CI.
6. Click OK.
5.7.9.3.2 Displaying the GSM/GPRS/EDGE Terminals Table

You can display the parameters of all the terminals in the Terminals table. You can modify any of the parameters or create
a new terminal.
To display the Terminals table:
4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Terminals table appears. For information on working with tables
in A9155, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48.
5.7.10 Defining the Interferer Reception Threshold

In A9155, you can define a limit on the received signal level. This limit is used by A9155 to limit the input of interferers in
calculations. When the interferer reception threshold is set, the performance of calculations based on CI, such as cover-
age by CI level, interfered zones. and GPRS/EDGE studies can be improved. As well, the performance of calculations
using the Interference tab of the Point Analysis window, traffic analyses, and interference histograms can also be
improved.
This value is used as a filter criterion on interferers. A9155 will discard all interferers with a signal level lower than this
value.
To define the interferer reception threshold:
3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Predictions Properties dialogue appears.
5. Under Calculation Limitation, enter an Interferer Reception Threshold in dBm.
6. Click OK.
5.7.11 Modelling Shadowing

be worse.
In GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects, the standard deviation of the propagation model is used to calculate shadowing margins
on signal levels. You can also calculate shadowing margins on CI. For information on setting the model standard devia-
tion and the CI standard deviations for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties"
on page 105.
Shadowing can be taken into consideration when A9155 calculates the signal level (C) and the signal-to-noise ratio (CI)
for:
A point analysis (see "Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 186)
304 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

A coverage prediction (see "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 187, "Interference Coverage Predictions"
on page 253, "Packet-Specific Coverage Predictions" on page 259, and "Making a Circuit Quality Indicator (BER,
FER, or MOS) Coverage Prediction" on page 266)
Neighbours (see "Allocating Neighbours Automatically" on page 211)
Traffic capture (see "Calculating and Displaying a Traffic Capture" on page 227).
You can display the shadowing margins per clutter class. For information, see "Displaying the Shadowing Margins per
Clutter Class" on page 305.
5.7.11.1 Displaying the Shadowing Margins per Clutter Class

To display the shadowing margins per clutter class:
3. Select Shadowing Margins from the context menu. The Shadowing Margins dialogue appears (see
Figure 5.62).
4. You can set the following parameters:
- Cell Edge Coverage Probability: Enter the probability of coverage at the edge of the cell. The value you enter
in this dialogue is for information only.
- Standard Deviation: Select the type of standard deviation to be used to calculate the shadowing margin:
- From Model: The model standard deviation. A9155 will display the shadowing margin on the signal level.
- CI: The CI standard deviation. A9155 will display the shadowing margin on the CI level.
5. Click Calculate. The calculated shadowing margin is displayed.
6. Click Close to close the dialogue.
Figure 5.62: The Shadowing Margins dialogue
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 305

A9155 User Manual
306 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

CHAPTER 6
UMTS HSPA NETWORKS
Chapter 6: UMTS HSPA Networks
6 UMTS HSPA Networks

A9155 enables you to create and modify all aspects of a UMTS HSPA (HSDPA and HSUPA) network. Once you have
created the network, A9155 offers many tools to let you verify the network. Based on the results of your tests, you can
modify any of the parameters defining the network.
The process of planning and creating a UMTS HSPA network is outlined in "Designing a UMTS Network" on page 309.
Creating the network of base stations is explained in "Planning and Optimising UMTS Base Stations" on page 310. Allo-
cating neighbours and scrambling codes is also explained. In this section, you will also find information on how you can
display information on base stations on the map and how you can use the tools in A9155 study base stations.
In "Studying Network Capacity" on page 381, using traffic maps to study network capacity is explained. Creating simula-
tions using the traffic map information and analysing the results of simulations is also explained.
6.1 Designing a UMTS Network

Figure 6.1 depicts the process of planning and creating a UMTS HSPA network.
1
Open an Existing Project
or Create a New One
2
Network Configuration
- Add Network Elements
- Change Parameters
3
Basic Predictions
(Best Server, Signal Level)
4
Neighbour Allocation
5a 5b 5c
Traffic Maps Monte-Carlo User-defined values
Simulations 5
Cell Load
Conditions
6 6a
UMTS/HSPA Predictions Prediction Study Reports
7
Scrambling Code Plan
Figure 6.1: Planning a UMTS network - workflow
The steps involved in planning a UMTS HSPA network are described below. The numbers refer to Figure 6.1.
1. Open an existing radio-planning document or create a new one ( 1 ).

- You can open an existing A9155 document by selecting File > Open.
- Creating a new a new A9155 document is explained in "Chapter 2: Starting an A9155 Project".
2. Configure the network by adding network elements and changing parameters ( 2 ).

You can add and modify the following elements of base stations:
- "Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 316

- "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 316
- "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 317.
You can also add base stations using a base station template (see "Placing a New Station Using a Station
Template" on page 317).
3. Carry out basic coverage predictions ( 3 )

- "Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 329
- "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 330 and "Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 338
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 309

A9155 User Manual
4. Allocate neighbours, automatically or individually ( 4 ).

- "Planning Neighbours" on page 366.
5. Before making more advanced coverage predictions, you need to define cell load conditions ( 5 ).
You can define cell load conditions in the following ways:
- You can generate realistic cell load conditions by creating a simulation based on a traffic map ( 5a and 5b )
(see "Studying Network Capacity" on page 381).
- You can define them manually either on the Cells tab of each transmitters Properties dialogue or in the Cells
table (see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 317) ( 5c ).
6. Make UMTS-specific coverage predictions using the defined cell load conditions ( 6 ).
- "UMTS-Specific Studies" on page 349
- "HSDPA Coverage Prediction" on page 361
- "HSUPA Coverage Prediction" on page 363.
7. Allocate scrambling codes ( 7 ).

- "Planning Scrambling Codes" on page 374.
6.2 Planning and Optimising UMTS Base Stations

existing ones.
as the TMA, feeder cables, etc. In a UMTS project, you must also add cells to each transmitter. A cell refers to the char-
acteristics of a carrier on a transmitter.
Antenna
- Azimuth
- Mechanical tilt
TMA
Antenna
- Height
Feeder Cable
BTS
- BTS noise figure
- Power
Site
- X, Y coordinates
Figure 6.2: A transmitter
A9155 lets you create one site, transmitter, or cell at a time, or create several at once by creating a station template. Using
a station template, you can create one or more base stations at the same time. In A9155, a base station refers to a site
with its transmitters, antennas, equipment, and cells.
results of calculated coverage predictions can be displayed on the map, compared, or studied.
terminals. This data can be then used to make quality studies, such as effective service area, noise, or handover status
predictions, on the network.
"Creating a UMTS Base Station" on page 311
"Creating a Dual-Band UMTS Network" on page 324
310 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


"Planning Neighbours" on page 366
"Planning Scrambling Codes" on page 374.
6.2.1 Creating a UMTS Base Station

When you create a UMTS site, you create only the geographical point; you must add the transmitters and cells afterwards.
The site, with the transmitters, antennas, equipment, and cells is called a base station.

example, cells. You will usually create a new base station using a station template, as described in "Placing a New Station
Using a Station Template" on page 317. This section describes the following elements of a base station and their param-
eters:
"Cell Definition" on page 314.

The parameters of a site can be found in the sites Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has two tabs:
of the site here.
calculations.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 311

A9155 User Manual

The Equipment tab:
- Max Number of Uplink Channel Elements: The maximum number of physical radio resources for the current
site in the uplink. By default A9155 enters the maximum possible (256).
- Max Number of Downlink Channel Elements: The maximum number of physical radio resources for the cur-
rent site in the downlink. By default A9155 enters the maximum possible (256).
- Equipment: You can select equipment from the list. To create new site equipment, see "Creating Site Equip-
ment" on page 420.
If no equipment is assigned to the site, A9155 considers the following default values:
- Rake efficiency factor = 1

- MUD factor = 0
- Carrier selection = UL minimum noise
- Overhead CEs downlink and uplink = 0
- The option AS restricted to neighbours is not selected, and A9155 uses one channel element on the
uplink or downlink for any service during power control simulation.

Properties dialogue has two tabs: the General tab and the Transmitter tab. Once you have created a transmitter, its Prop-
erties dialogue has three additional tabs: the Cells tab (see "Cell Definition" on page 314), the Propagation tab (see "Chap-
ter 4: Managing Calculations in A9155"), and the Display tab (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33).
The General tab:
name. If you want to change the way A9155 names transmitters, see the Administrators Manual.
- Frequency Band: You can select a Frequency Band for the transmitter. Once you have selected the fre-
quency band, you can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the band. For information on
the frequency band Properties dialogue, see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 416.
312 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Transmission/Reception: Under Transmission/Reception, you can see the total losses and the noise
figure of the transmitter. A9155 calculates losses and noise according to the characteristics of the equipment
assigned to the transmitter. Equipment can be assigned by using the Equipment Specifications dialogue
which appears when you click the Equipment button.
losses you define are used to initialise total transmitter UL and DL losses:
ment" on page 131.
page 131.
- BTS: You can select a base transceiver station (BTS) equipment from the BTS list. You can click the
Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the BTS. For information on creating a BTS, see "Defin-
ing BTS Equipment" on page 131.
- Feeder Length: You can enter the feeder length at transmission and reception.
- Miscellaneous Losses: You can enter miscellaneous losses at transmission and reception. The value
you enter must be positive.
- Receiver Antenna Diversity Gain: You can enter a receiver antenna diversity gain. The value you enter
must be positive.
Note: Any loss related to the noise due to a transmitters repeater is included in the calculated
losses. A9155 always considers the values in the Real boxes in prediction studies even if
they are different from the values in the Computed boxes. The information in the real BTS
Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in the Equip-
ment Specifications dialogue. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and
reception and the real BTS Noise Figure at reception if you wish. Any value you enter must
be positive.
- Diversity: Under Diversity, you can select the type of diversity from the Transmission and Reception lists.
- Antennas:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 313

A9155 User Manual
the main antenna.
6.2.1.1.3 Cell Definition

In A9155, a cell is defined as a carrier, with all its characteristics, on a transmitter; the cell is the mechanism by which you
can configure a UMTS multi-carrier network. In other words, a transmitter has one cell for every carrier.
When you create a transmitter, A9155 reminds you to create at least one cell for the transmitter. The following explains
the parameters of a UMTS cell, including the parameters for HSDPA and HSUPA functionality. As you create a cell, A9155
calculates appropriate values for some fields based on the information you have entered. You can, if you wish, modify
these values.
The properties of a UMTS cell are found on Cells tab of the Properties dialogue of the transmitter to which it is assigned.
The Cells tab has the following options:
Inter-Carrier Power Sharing: You can enable power sharing between cells by selecting the Inter-Carrier Power
Sharing check box under HSDPA and entering a value in the Maximum Shared Power box. In order for Inter-
Carrier Power Sharing to be available, you must have at least one HSDPA carrier with dynamic power allocation.
Inter-Carrier Power Sharing enables the network to dynamically allocate available power from R99-only and
HSDPA carriers among HSDPA carriers.
When you select Inter-Carrier Power Sharing and you define a maximum shared power, the Max Power of each
cell is used to determine the percentage of the transmitter power that the cell cannot exceed.
The most common scenario is where you have R99-only cells that are not using 100% of their power and can share
it with an HSDPA carrier. To use power sharing efficiently, you should set the Max Power of the HSDPA cells to
the same value as the Maximum Shared Power. For example, if the Maximum Shared Power is defined as
43 dBm, the Max Power of all HSDPA cells should be set to 43 dBm in order to be able to use 100% of the avail-
able power. In this case, all of an R99 cells unused power can be allocated to the HSDPA cell.
Name: By default, A9155 names the cell after its transmitter, adding the carrier number in parentheses. If you
change transmitter name or carrier, A9155 does not update the cell name. You can enter a name for the cell, but
for the sake of consistency, it is better to let A9155 assign a name. If you want to change the way A9155 names
cells, see the Administrators Manual.
Carrier: The number of the carrier.
Active: If this cell is to be active, you must select the Active check box.
Max Power (dBm): The maximum available downlink power for the cell.
Pilot Power (dBm): The pilot power.
SCH power (dBm): The average power of both the synchronisation channels (P-SCH and S-SCH).
Note: The SCH power is only transmitted 110 of the time. Consequently, the value entered for
the SCH power should only be 110 of its value when transmitted, in order to respect its
actual interference on other channels.
Other CCH power (dBm): The power of other common channels (P-CCPCH, S-CCPCH, AICH, PICH, P-SCH,
and S-SCH).
Note: By default, the SCH power and CCH power are set as absolute values. You can set these
values as relative to the pilot power by right-clicking the Transmitters folder on the Data
tab of the Explorer window and selecting Properties from the context menu. Then, on the
Global Parameters tab of the Properties dialogue, under DL Powers, you can select Rela-
tive to Pilot. The SCH power and CCH power will then be set as relative to the pilot power.
AS Threshold (dB): The active set threshold. It is the EcI0 margin in comparison with the EcI0 of the best
server. It is used to determine which cells, apart from the best server, will be part of the active set.
DL Peak Rate per User (kbps): The downlink peak rate per user in kbps. The DL peak rate per user is the max-
imum connection rate in the downlink for a user. The DL and UL peak rates are taken into account during power
control simulation.
UL Peak Rate per User (kbps): The uplink peak rate per user in kbps. The UL peak rate per user is the maximum
connection rate in the uplink for a user. The DL and UL peak rates are taken into account during power control
simulation.
Max DL Load (% Max Power): The percentage of the maximum downlink power (set in Max Power) not to be
exceeded. This limit will be taken into account during the simulation if the option DL Load is selected. If the DL
load option is not selected during a simulation, this value is not taken into consideration.
Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor not to be exceeded. This limit can be taken into
account during the simulation.
Total Power (dBm): The total transmitted power on downlink is the total power necessary to serve R99 and
HSDPA users. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user.
UL Load Factor (%): The uplink cell load factor. This factor corresponds to the ratio between the uplink total inter-
ference and the uplink total noise. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user.
UL Reuse Factor: The uplink reuse factor is determined from uplink intra and extra-cell interference (signals
received by the transmitter respectively from intra and extra-cell terminals). This is the ratio between the total
314 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

uplink interference and the intra-cell interference. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the
user.
Scrambling code domain: The scrambling code domain to which the allocated scrambling code belongs. This
and the scrambling code reuse distance are used by the scrambling code planning algorithm.
SC Reuse Distance: The scrambling code reuse distance. This and the scrambling code domain are used by the
scrambling code planning algorithm.
Primary scrambling code: The primary scrambling code.
Comments: If desired, you can enter any comments in this field.
Max number of intra-carrier neighbours: The maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours for this cell. This
value is used by the intra-carrier neighbour allocation algorithm.
Max number of inter-carrier neighbours: The maximum number of inter-carrier neighbours for this cell. This
value is used by the inter-carrier neighbour allocation algorithm.
Max number of inter-technology neighbours: The maximum number of inter-technology neighbours for this
cell. This value is used by the inter-technology neighbour allocation algorithm.
Neighbours: You can access a dialogue in which you can set both intra-technology (intra-carrier and inter-carrier)
and inter-technology neighbours by clicking the Browse button ( ). For information on defining neighbours, see
"Planning Neighbours" on page 366.
Tip: The Browse button ( ) might not be visible in the Neighbours box if this is a new cell.
You can make the Browse button appear by clicking Apply.
HSDPA: The HSDPA check box is selected if the cell has HSDPA functionality. When the HSDPA check box is
selected, the following fields are also available:
- HSDPA Dynamic Power Allocation: If you are modelling dynamic power allocation, the HSDPA Dynamic
Power Allocation should be checked. During a simulation, A9155 first allocates power to R99 users and then
dynamically allocates the remaining power of the cell to the HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA users. At
the end of the simulation, you can commit the calculated HSDPA power and total power values to each cell.
Note: In the context of dynamic power allocation, the total power equals the maximum power
minus the power headroom.
- Available HSDPA Power (dBm): When you are modelling static power allocation, the HSDPA Dynamic
Power Allocation check box is cleared and the available HSDPA power is entered in this box. This is the
power available for the HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA users.
- Power Headroom (dB): The power headroom is a reserve of power that A9155 keeps for Dedicated Physical
Channels (DPCH) in case of fast fading. During simulation, HSDPA users will not be connected if the cell
power remaining after serving R99 users is less than the power headroom value.
- HS-SCCH Dynamic Power Allocation: If you are modelling dynamic power allocation the HS-SCCH
Dynamic Power Allocation check box should be checked and a value should be entered in HS-SCCH Power
(dBm). During power control, A9155 will control HS-SCCH power in order to meet the minimum quality
threshold (as defined for each mobility type). The value entered in HS-SCCH Power (dBm) is the maximum
power available for each HS-SCCH channel. The calculated power for each HSDPA user during the simulation
cannot exceed this maximum value.
- HS-SCCH Power (dBm): The value for each HS-SCCH channel will be used if you are modelling dynamic
power allocation. If you have selected the HS-SCCH Dynamic Power Allocation check box and modelling
dynamic power allocation, the value entered here represents a maximum for each HSDPA user. If you have
not selected the HS-SCCH Dynamic Power Allocation check box and are modelling static power allocation,
the value entered here represents the actual HS-SCCH power per HS-SCCH channel.
- Number of HS-SCCH Channels: The maximum number of HS-SCCH channels for this cell. Each HSDPA
user consumes one HS-SCCH channel. Therefore, at any given time (over a time transmission interval), the
number of HSDPA users cannot exceed the number of HS-SCCH channels per cell.
- Min. Number of HS-PDSCH Codes: The minimum number of OVSF codes available for HS-PDSCH chan-
nels. This value will be taken into account during simulations in order to find a suitable bearer.
- Max Number of HS-PDSCH codes: The maximum number of OVSF codes available for HS-PDSCH chan-
nels. This value will be taken into account during simulations and coverage predictions in order to find a suit-
able bearer.
- Max Number of HSDPA Users: The maximum number of HSDPA bearer users (HSDPA and HSUPA users)
that this cell can support at any given time.
- Number of HSDPA Users: The number of HSDPA bearer users (HSDPA and HSUPA users) is an average
and can be used for certain coverage predictions. You can enter this value yourself, or have the value calcu-
lated by A9155 using a simulation.
- HSDPA Scheduler Algorithm: The scheduling technique that will be used to rank the HSDPA users to be
served:
- Max C/I: "n" HSDPA users (where "n" corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined) are
scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). Then, they are sorted in descend-
ing order by the channel quality indicator (CQI).
- Round Robin: HSDPA users are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order).
- Proportional Fair: "n" HSDPA users (where "n" corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users
defined) are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). Then, they are sorted
in descending order according to a random parameter which corresponds to a combination of the user
rank in the simulation and the channel quality indicator (CQI).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 315

A9155 User Manual
Note: The random parameter is calculated by giving both the user simulation rank and the CQI a
weight of 50%. You can change the default weights by setting the appropriate options in the
atoll.ini file. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
HSUPA: The HSUPA check box is selected if the cell has HSUPA functionality. When the HSUPA check box is
- DL HSUPA Power: The power (in dBm) allocated to HSUPA DL channels (E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH).
This value must be entered by the user.
- Max Number of HSUPA Users: The maximum number of HSUPA users that this cell can support at any given
time.
- UL Load Factor Due to HSUPA (%): The percentage of the load factor due to HSUPA. This value can be a
simulation result or can be entered by the user.
- Number of HSUPA Users: The number of HSUPA users is an average and can be used for certain coverage
predictions. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user.

example, cells. In this part you will learn how to create one at a time!!
This section describes how to create or modify the following elements of a base station:
"Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 317.

page 311).
4. Click OK.
Tip: If you are creating several sites at the same time, or modifying several existing sites, you
can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Sites table. You can open the
Sites table by right-clicking the Sites folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and
selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data,
see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 54.

Figure 6.4).
316 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

4. Click OK. If you are creating a new transmitter, A9155 reminds you to create a cell. For information on creating a
cell, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 317.
Tips:
6.2.1.2.3 Creating or Modifying a Cell

You can modify an existing cell or you can create a new cell. You can access the properties of a cell, described in "Cell
Definition" on page 314, through the Properties dialogue of the transmitter where the cell is located.
To create or modify a cell:
3. Right-click the transmitter on which you want to create a cell or whose cell you want to modify. The context menu
appears.
5. Select the Cells tab.
6. Modify the parameters described in "Cell Definition" on page 314.
7. Click OK.
Tips:
If you are creating or modifying several cells at the same time, you can do it more quickly by
editing the data directly in the Cells table. You can open the Cells table by right-clicking the
Transmitters folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Cells > Open Table
from the context menu. You can either edit the data in the table, paste data into the table (see
"Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 54), or import data into the table (see "Importing
Tables from External Files" on page 56).
If you want to add a cell to an existing transmitter on the map, you can add the cell by right-
clicking the transmitter and selecting New Cell from the context menu.

ent parameters, instead of building the network by first creating the site, then the transmitters, and finally by adding the
cells.

Tips:
page 38.
You can also place a series of stations using a A9155 template. You do this by defining an area on the map where you
want to place the stations. A9155 calculates the placement of each station according to the defined hexagonal cell radius
in the station template. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on
page 318.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 317

A9155 User Manual

Note: If the Hexagonal Design button is not available ( ), the hexagonal cell radius for this
site.

place the station.

A9155 comes with UMTS station templates, but you can also create and modify station templates. The tools for working
with station templates can be found on the Radio toolbar (see Figure 6.6).

Name of the station template, the number of Sectors, each with a transmitter, and the Hexagon Radius, i.e., the
theoretical radius of the hexagonal area covered by each sector.
318 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

5. Click the Transmitter tab. In this tab (see Figure 6.8), if the Active check box is selected, you can modify the fol-
lowing:
- Under Transmission/Reception, you can click the Equipment button to open the Equipment Specifica-
tions dialogue and modify the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA), feeder cables, or base transceiver station
(BTS). For information on the Equipment Specifications dialogue, see "Transmitter Description" on
page 312.
- The information in the real Total Losses in transmission and reception boxes is calculated from the informa-
tion you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue (see Figure 6.5 on page 313). Any loss related to
the noise due to a transmitters repeater is included in the calculated losses. A9155 always considers the
values in the Real boxes in prediction studies even if they are different from the values in the Computed
boxes. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and reception if you wish. Any value you enter
must be positive.
- The information in the real BTS Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in
the Equipment Specifications dialogue. You can modify the real BTS Noise Figure at reception if you wish.
Any value you enter must be positive.
- Under Diversity, you can select the diversity from the Transmission and Reception lists.
6. Click the W-CDMA/UMTS tab. In this tab (see Figure 6.9), you modify the Carriers (each corresponding to a cell)
that this station supports. For information on carriers and cells, see "Cell Definition" on page 314.
- You can select the Carriers for this template.
- Under Power, you can select the Power Shared Between Cells check box. As well, you can modify the Pilot,
the SCH, the Other CCH powers, and the AS Threshold.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 319

A9155 User Manual
- Under Simulation Constraints, you can modify the Max Power, the Max DL Load (defined as a percentage
of the maximum power), the DL Peak Rate/User, the Max UL Load Factor, and the UL Peak Rate/User.
- Under Load Conditions, you can modify the Total Transmitted Power, the UL Load Factor, and the UL
Reuse Factor.
- You can also modify the Number of Uplink and Downlink Channel Elements and select the Equipment.
Figure 6.9: Station Template Properties dialogue W-CDMA/UMTS tab
7. Click the HSDPA/HSUPA tab.

In this tab (see Figure 6.10), if the HSDPA supported check box is selected, you can modify the following under
HSDPA (for more information on the fields, see "Cell Definition" on page 314):
- You can select the Allocation Strategy (Static or Dynamic). If you select Static as the Allocation Strategy,
you can enter the HSDPA Power. If you select Dynamic as the Allocation Strategy, you select the Inter-
Carrier Power Sharing option and enter the Max. Shared Power.
- Under HS-PDSCH, you can modify the Min. and Max number of codes and the Power Headroom.
- Under HS-SCCH, you can select the Allocation Strategy (Static or Dynamic) and the Number of channels.
If you select Static as the Allocation Strategy, you must enter the value of the HS-SCCH/pilot gain.
- Under Scheduler, you can modify the Algorithm, the Max Number of Users, and the Number of Users.
Under HSUPA, if the HSUPA supported check box is selected, you can modify the following (for more information
on the fields, see "Cell Definition" on page 314):
- You can modify the DL Power, the UL Load, the Max Number of Users, and the Number of Users.
320 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 6.10: Station Template Properties dialogue HSDPA tab
8. Click the Neighbours tab. In this tab (see Figure 6.11), you can modify the Max Number of Intra- and Inter-Car-
rier Neighbours and the Max Number of Inter-Technology Neighbours. For information on defining neigh-
bours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 366.
your changes.

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 321

A9155 User Manual
after each one.
vi. Enter, if desired, a Default value for the new field.
ii. Click the Delete button. The user-defined field appears in strikeout. It will be definitively deleted when you
close the dialogue.
6. Click OK.

deleted.
4. Click OK.

You can create base stations individually as explained in "Creating a UMTS Base Station" on page 311, or you can create
one or several base stations by using station templates as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template"
on page 317. However, if you have a large data-planning project and you already have existing data, you can import this
data into your current A9155 document and create a group of base stations.
page 84.

ing data into.
322 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


6.2.3.1 Changing the Position of the Transmitter Relative to the Site

By default, transmitters are placed on the site. However, transmitters are occasionally not located directly on the site, but
a short distance away. In A9155, you can change the position of the transmitter relative to the site by adjusting the Dx and
Dy parameters on the General Tab of the Transmitter Property dialogue. Dx and Dy are the distance in metres of the
transmitter from the site position. You can also modify the position of the transmitter on the map, using the mouse.
To move a transmitter using the mouse:
1. On the map, click the transmitter you want to move.

2. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). A
cross appears under the pointer.
3. Click the green rectangle and drag it to change the transmitters position
relative to the site.
The current position (Dx and Dy) of the transmitter is displayed in the far
right of the status bar.
4. Release the mouse when you have moved the selected transmitter to the
desired position.
The position of the selected transmitter is modified on the General tab of
Note: If you make a mistake when changing the position of the transmitter, you can undo your
changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo or by pressing CTRL+Z) to undo the
changes made.

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 323

A9155 User Manual
6.2.5 Creating a Dual-Band UMTS Network

In A9155, you can model a dual-band UMTS network, i.e., a network consisting of 2100 MHz and 900 MHz transmitters,
in one document. Creating a dual-band UMTS network consists of the following steps:
1. Defining the two frequency bands in the document (see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 416).
2. Selecting and calibrating a propagation model for each frequency band (see "Chapter 4: Managing Calculations
in A9155").
3. Assigning a frequency band, with its propagation model, to each transmitter (see "Transmitter Description" on
page 312).
4. Assigning a frequency band to each terminal (see "Modelling Terminals" on page 353).

The UL total gain value in service areas studies (effective service area and UL Eb/Nt service area) and the noise
rise generated at the donor transmitter by the repeater.

b. Enter a Noise Figure. The repeater causes a rise in noise at the donor transmitter, so the noise figure is used
to calculate the UL loss to be added to the donor transmitter UL losses. The noise figure must be a positive
value.
c. Enter minimum and maximum repeater amplification gains in the Min. Gain and Max Gain columns. These
d. Enter a Gain Increment. A9155 uses the increment value when you increase or decrease the repeater am-
calculations.
modify.

324 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

page 325.

pasting data into.

antenna.
ton.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 325

A9155 User Manual
the feeder.
- Under Total Gains, enter the gains in the Downlink and Uplink or click Calculate to determine the actual
gains. If you have modified any parameter in the General, Donor Side, or Coverage Side tabs, click Apply
before clicking the Calculate button. A9155 uses the DL total gain values to calculate the signal level received
from the repeater. The UL total gain value is considered in UL Eb/Nt service area studies.
The DL total gain is applied to each power (pilot power, SCH power, etc.). It takes into account losses between
the donor transmitter and the repeater, donor characteristics (donor antenna gain, reception feeder losses),
amplification gain, and coverage characteristics (coverage antenna gain and transmission feeder losses).
The UL total gain is applied to each terminal power. It takes into account losses between the donor transmitter
and the repeater, donor part characteristics (donor antenna gain, transmission feeder losses), amplification
gain and coverage part characteristics (coverage antenna gain and reception feeder losses).

the feeder.

You can update the UL and DL total gains of all repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate Gains from the
Transmitters context menu.
Note: You can prevent A9155 from updating the UL and DL total gains of selected repeaters by
creating a custom field called "FreezeTotalGain" in the Repeaters table and setting the
value of the field to "True." Afterwards, when you select Repeaters > Calculate Gains from
the Transmitters context menu, A9155 will only update the UL and DL total gains for
repeaters with the custom field "FreezeTotalGain" set to "False."

326 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA



ing data into.

- Under Donor-Repeater Link, select Optical Fibre Link and enter the Fibre Losses.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 327

A9155 User Manual
from the remote antenna. The UL total gain value is considered in UL EbNt service area studies.
The DL total gain is applied to each power (pilot power, SCH power, etc.). It takes into account losses between
the donor transmitter and the remote antenna.
and the remote antenna.

properties of the antenna. Then, enter the Azimuth and the Mechanical Downtilt.
the feeder.

You can update the UL and DL total gains of all remote antennas by selecting Remote Antennas > Calculate
Gains from the Transmitters context menu.
Note: You can prevent A9155 from updating the UL and DL total gains of selected remote anten-
nas by creating a custom field called "FreezeTotalGain" in the Remote Antennas table and
setting the value of the field to "True." Afterwards, when you select Remote Antennas >
Calculate Gains from the Transmitters context menu, A9155 will only update the UL and
DL total gains for remote antennas with the custom field "FreezeTotalGain" set to "False."

tages:

Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites to be studied limits the number of sites to be calculated,
which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations. In a smaller project, the time savings may not be signif-
icant. In a larger project, especially when you are making repeated studies in order to see the effects of small
changes in site configuration, the savings in time is considerable. Limiting the number of sites by drawing a compu-
tation zone also limits the resulting calculated coverage.
328 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

defines the area where A9155 computes path loss matrices, coverage studies, Monte Carlo, power control simu-
lations, etc., while the focus zone or hot spot zone is the area taken into consideration when generating reports
and results.
studied.

resolution.

In A9155, you can make a point analysis to study reception along a profile between a reference transmitter and a UMTS
user. Before studying a site, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic
data into account and computes losses along the transmitter-receiver path. The profile is calculated in real time, using the
propagation model, allowing you to study the profile and get a prediction on each selected point.
lowing:
5. The profile analysis appears in the Profile tab of the Point Analysis Tool window. The altitude (in metres) is


3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 329

A9155 User Manual
class.

choose to display a profile only with a selected
carrier.

prediction.

2. Right-click the Transmitters folder and select Group by > Sites from the context menu. The transmitters are now
displayed in the Transmitters folder by the site on which they are situated.

mitters.
330 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

and you can obtain more accurate results by using for the main and extended matrices propagation models
best suited for each distance.
g. Close the table.
5. Select Coverage by Signal Level and click OK. A study properties dialogue appears.

Display Resolution
Prediction
City Center 5m
City 20 m
County 50 m
State 100 m
- At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the signal level range to be considered. In Figure 6.13, a signal
level less than or equal to -120 dBm will be considered.
- Under Server, select "All" to consider signal levels from all servers.
Probability.
class.
- You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. The cover-
age prediction displays the strength of the received pilot signal.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 331

A9155 User Manual
( ).

332 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


"Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active" on page 337
"UMTS-Specific Studies" on page 349
"HSDPA Coverage Prediction" on page 361
"HSUPA Coverage Prediction" on page 363

Path loss is caused by objects in the transmitter-receiver path and is calculated by the propagation model. In A9155, the
path loss matrices are needed for all base stations that are active, filtered and whose propagation zone intersects a rectan-
gle containing the computation zone (for an explanation of the computation zone, see "Studying Signal Level Coverage"
on page 330) and must be calculated before predictions and simulations can be made.
matrices in the A9155 document results in a more portable but significantly larger document. in the case of large radio-
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 333

A9155 User Manual
Manual.
5. Click OK.

are recalculated.
334 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


for those to which you have assigned a propagation model either individually or as part of a group.
Important: When you assign a propagation model globally, you override any selection you might have
made to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters.
If, after assigning a propagation model to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters, you assign a prop-
agation model globally, you will override the propagation models that you had assigned to individual transmitters
or to a group of transmitters.
3. If you have assigned a default propagation model for coverage predictions, as described in "Defining a Default
Propagation Model" on page 151, this is the propagation model that will be used for all transmitters whose main
propagation model is "(Default model)." If a transmitter has any other propagation model chosen as the main prop-
agation model, that is the propagation model that will be used.
"Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 336.

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 335

A9155 User Manual

"Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 336 will override this entry.

selected group.

- Main Resolution
ters.
When you assign a main and extended propagation model to a single transmitter, it overrides any changes made globally.
appears.
336 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


Note: You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in
the toolbar.


Note: You can save the computation zone in the user configuration. For information on exporting
page 71.
6.2.10.5 Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active

In A9155, you can also set individual cells on a transmitter as active or inactive.
You can set an individual transmitter as active from its context menu or you can set more than one transmitter as active
by activating them from the Transmitters context menu or by activating the transmitters cells from the Cells table.
4. Select Active Transmitter from the context menu. The transmitter is now active.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 337

A9155 User Manual
To set more than one transmitter as active using the Transmitters table:
3. Select Open Table. The Transmitters table appears with each transmitters parameters in a second row.
4. For each transmitter that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Active column.
To set more than one cell as active using the Cells table:
3. Select Cells > Open Table. The Cells table appears with each cells parameters in a row.
4. For each cell that you want to set as active, select the check box in the Active column.

specific to UMTS are covered in "UMTS-Specific Studies" on page 349, "HSDPA Coverage Prediction" on page 361, and
"HSUPA Coverage Prediction" on page 363.
the coverage prediction into a template which will appear in the Study Types dialogue. You can also select Duplicate
from the coverage predictions context menu to create a copy. By duplicating an existing prediction that has the parameters
you wish to study, you can create a new coverage prediction more quickly than by creating a new coverage prediction. If
you clone a coverage prediction, by selecting Clone from the context menu, you can create a copy of the coverage predic-
tion with the calculated coverage. You can then change the display, providing that the selected parameter does not inval-
idate the calculated coverage prediction.

prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to study.
for each pixel.
- At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered. In Figure 6.16, a signal
ability.
338 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

class.
- You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. The coverage
prediction displays the strength of the received pilot signal.

8. Choose to display the results by best signal level. The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds.
For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
Selecting "All" or "Best signal level" on the Conditions tab will give you the same results because A9155 displays
the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best signal level" necessitates, however, the longest time
for calculation.
Figure 6.17).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 339

A9155 User Manual

A coverage prediction by transmitter allows the user to predict which server is the best at each pixel. You can base the
coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range.
To make a coverage prediction by transmitter:
for each pixel.
level less than or equal to -120 dBm or greater then -85 dBm will be considered.
- Under Server, select "Best signal level."
You can also define a Margin. A9155 will then consider the best signal level on each pixel and any other signal
level within the defined margin of the best one.
ability.
class.
- You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account.

"Second best signal level" on the Conditions tab setting "Discrete Values" as the Display
Type and "Transmitter" as the Field on the Display tab.
340 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


range.
for each pixel.
- Under Server, select "Best signal level" and define a Margin. A9155 will then consider the best signal level
on each pixel and any other signal level within the defined margin of the best one.
ability.
class.
- You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. The coverage
prediction displays the strength of the received pilot signal.

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 341

A9155 User Manual




3. At the top of the Reception tab, select the carrier to be analysed.
342 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

appears.
- Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability, and,

Notes:
You can save the focus zone in the user configuration. For information on saving the focus zone
in the user configuration, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 71.
You can include population statistics in the focus or hot spot zone by importing a population map.
For information on importing maps, see "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 99.

erties dialogue.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 343

A9155 User Manual
use the computation zone. However, by using a focus zone for the report, you can create a report for a specific number of
sites, instead of creating a report for every site that has been calculated.
4. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report is
based on the hot spot zones and on the focus zone if available or on the hot spot zones and computation zone if
there is no focus zone.
3. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The coverage prediction report table appears. The report shows
zone if available or on the computation zone if there is no focus zone.
tion map:
- "Population" (Population [total]: The total number of inhabitants inside the zone.
5. Click OK.

page 343.
344 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA



3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 345

A9155 User Manual
erage between them.
figure.
A new base station is added, either by creating the site and adding the transmitters, as explained in "Creating a UMTS
Base Station" on page 311, or by placing a station template, as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a Station
Template" on page 317. Once the new site base station been added, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated,
but then it will be impossible to compare the two predictions. Instead, the original signal level coverage prediction can be
copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated to show the effect of the new site (see
Figure 6.24).
346 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


resolution.
- Intersection
- Union
- Difference
new base station.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 347

A9155 User Manual

cate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated, to show how modifying the antenna tilt has affected coverage
(see Figure 6.27).
348 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

resolution.
- Intersection
- Union
- Difference
5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 6.28, shows clearly the increase in coverage due to
6.2.10.8 UMTS-Specific Studies

In UMTS, the quality of the signal and the size of the area that can be covered are influenced by the network load. As the
network load increases, the area a cell can effectively cover decreases. For this reason, the network load must be defined
in order to calculate UMTS-specific studies.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 349

A9155 User Manual
If you have traffic maps, you can do a Monte-Carlo simulation to model power control and evaluate the network load for a
generated user distribution. If you do not have traffic maps, A9155 can calculate the network load using the UL load factor
and DL total power defined for each cell.
In this section, the UMTS-specific coverage predictions will be calculated using UL load factor and DL total power param-
eters defined at the cell level. For the purposes of these studies, each pixel is considered a non-interfering user with a
defined service, mobility type, and terminal.
Before making a coverage prediction, you will have to set the UL load factor and DL total power and the parameters that
define the services and users. These are explained in the following sections:
"Setting the UL Load Factor and the DL Total Power" on page 350.
"Service and User Modelling" on page 350.
Several different types of UMTS-specific coverage predictions are explained in this section. The following quality studies
are explained:
"Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction" on page 354
"Studying Service Area (EbNt) Downlink or Uplink" on page 355
"Studying Effective Service Area" on page 356.
The following noise studies, also coverage predictions, are explained:
"Studying Downlink Total Noise" on page 358
"Calculating Pilot Pollution" on page 359.
Another type of coverage prediction, the handover study, is also explained:
"Making a Handover Status Coverage Prediction" on page 359.
You can also make a point analysis using the Point Analysis window. The analysis is calculated using UL load factor and
DL total power parameters defined at the cell level and provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal,
a mobility and a service:
"Making an AS Analysis" on page 360.
You can define a RSCP threshold to further define how results are displayed. A9155 uses the RSCP threshold to calculate
coverage predictions and to make the AS analysis. A9155 checks which pixels have a pilot signal level which exceeds the
defined RSCP threshold. Defining the RSCP threshold is explained in the following section:
"Defining the RSCP Threshold" on page 354
6.2.10.8.1 Setting the UL Load Factor and the DL Total Power

If you are setting the UL load factor and the DL total power for a single transmitter, you can set these parameters on the
Cells tab of the transmitters Properties dialogue. However, you can set the UL load factor and the DL total power for all
cells using the Cells table.
To set the UL load factor and the DL total power using the Cells table:
3. Select Cells > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears.
4. Enter a value in the following columns:
- Total Power (dBm)
- UL Load Factor (%)
For a definition of the values, see "Cell Definition" on page 314.
5. To enter the same values in one column for all cells in the table:
6.2.10.8.2 Service and User Modelling

Before you can model services, you must already have R99 radio bearers defined in your A9155 document. Only the
following R99 radio bearer parameters are used in predictions:
Max TCH Power (dBm)
UL and DL Target (dB) per mobility
The type of bearer.
For information on defining R99 radio bearers, "Defining R99 Radio Bearers" on page 418.
"Modelling Services" on page 351
"Creating a Mobility Type" on page 352
350 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

"Modelling Terminals" on page 353.
Modelling Services
Services are the various services available to subscribers. These services can be either circuit-switched or packet-
switched services. This section explains how to create a service. However, only the following parameters are used in
predictions:
R99 bearer parameters
Handover capabilities
HSPA capabilities
Body loss
HSPA application throughput parameters
Before you can model services, you must have defined R99 bearers. For information on defining R99 radio bearers, see
"Defining R99 Radio Bearers" on page 418.
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
5. You can edit the fields on the General tab to define the new service. Some fields depend on the Type of service
you choose. You can change the following parameters:
tive.
- R99 Radio Bearer: Select an R99 radio bearer from the list. If you want to edit the settings of the selected
R99 radio bearer, click the Browse button ( ) to open the bearers Properties dialogue.
- Type: You can select either Circuit or Packet as the service type.
If you want the service to be able to use HSDPA channels, select Packet and the HSDPA check box. For pack-
et services that can use HSDPA channels, you have the following options:
- A-DPCH Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink A-DPCH activity factors (for services that support
HSDPA) are used to estimate the average power on A-DPCH channels.
- Average Requested Rate: You can enter the average requested rate for uplink and downlink. This rate
is the requested average rate which guarantees a minimum average downlink rate during an HSDPA call.
It is used twice in a simulation: once during user distribution generation in order to calculate the number
of HSDPA users attempting a connection and then during power control as a quality target to be compared
to the real obtained average throughput.
- Application Throughput: Under Application Throughput, you can set a Scaling Factor between the
application throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control) throughput and a throughput Offset. These
parameters model the header information and other supplementary data that does not appear at the appli-
cation level.
If you want the service to be able to use HSUPA channels, select Packet, the HSDPA check box, and the
HSUPA check box. For packet services that can use HSUPA channels, you have the following options:
- E-DPCCH Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink E-DPCCH activity factors (for services that support
HSUPA) are used to estimate the average power on E-DPCCH channels.
is the requested average rate which guarantees a minimum average rate during an HSUPA call. It is used
twice in a simulation: once during user distribution generation in order to calculate the number of HSUPA
users attempting a connection and then during power control as a quality target to be compared to the real
obtained average throughput.
cation level.
If you select Packet to create R99-bearer packet services that do not use HSDPA or HSUPA, you have the
following option:
- Efficiency Factor: The uplink and downlink efficiency factors are used to determine duration of usage by
the user. It does this by determining the average usage of the network by the user.
is the average rate obtained by a user of the service. It is used in simulations during user distribution
generation to calculate the number of users attempting a connection and to determine their activity status.
If you select Circuit, you have the following options.
- Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink activity factors are used to determine the probability of activity
for each user when making a Monte-Carlo distribution for a power control simulation.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 351

A9155 User Manual
is the average rate obtained by a user of the service. It is used in simulations during user distribution
generation to calculate the number of users attempting a connection and to determine their activity status.
- Carrier: You can select one of the available carriers or all carriers. The specified carrier is considered in sim-
ulation when admitting a transmitter to the mobile active set. If the transmitter uses the specified carrier, A9155
selects it. Otherwise, it will choose another one, using the carrier selection mode defined in the site equipment
properties. The carrier specified for the service is not used in predictions (i.e., AS analysis and coverage pre-
dictions). In predictions, A9155 considers the carrier selection mode defined in the site equipment properties.
If no particular carrier is specified in the service properties, it will consider the carrier selection mode defined
in the site equipment properties.
- Soft Handoff Allowed: Select the Soft Handoff Allowed check box if you want the network to be able to use
soft handoff with this service.
- Priority: Enter a priority for this service. "0" is the lowest priority.
- Body Loss: Enter a body loss for the service. The body loss is the loss due to the body of the user. For
example, in a voice connection the body loss, due to the proximity of the users head, is estimated to be 3dB.
6. If you selected Circuit as the Type in step 5., continue to step 7. If you selected Packet as the Type in step 5.,
an additional tab, the Packet tab, appears. Click the Packet tab.
In the Packet tab, you can set the following parameters for packet switched services:
- Under Session, you can set:

- Average Number of Packet Calls: Enter the average number of packet calls in the uplink and downlink
during one session.
- Average Time Between Two Packet Calls: Enter the average time between two packet calls (in millisec-
onds) in the uplink and downlink.
- Under Packet Calls, you can set:
- Min. Size (Kbytes): Enter the minimum size of a packet call in kilobytes in the uplink and downlink.
- Max Size (Kbytes): Enter the maximum size of a packet call in kilobytes in the uplink and downlink.
- Average Time Between Two Packets (ms): Enter the average time between two packets in milliseconds
in the uplink and downlink.
- Under Packet, you can set:
- Size (Bytes): Enter the packet size in bytes in the uplink and downlink.
7. Click OK.
Creating a Mobility Type
In UMTS, information about receiver mobility is important to efficiently manage the active set: a mobile used by someone
travelling a certain speed and a mobile used by a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same transmitters.
EcI0 requirements and Eb/Nt targets per radio bearer and per link (up and down) are largely dependent on mobile speed.
The following parameters are used in predictions:
EcI0 threshold
HS-SCCH EcNt Threshold
5. You can enter or modify the following parameters in the Mobility Types New Element Properties dialogue:
- Name: Enter or modify the descriptive name for the mobility type.
- Average Speed: Enter or modify an average speed for the mobility type. This field is for information only; the
average speed is not used by any calculation.
- EcI0 Threshold: Enter or modify the minimum EcI0 required from a transmitter to enter the active set. This
value must be verified for the best server.
- HS-SCCH EcNt Threshold: Enter or modify the minimum quality required in order for the HSDPA link to be
available. This parameter is used by A9155 to determine the HS-SCCH power when the user has selected
dynamic allocation in the cell properties. For static allocation, A9155 calculates the HS-SCCH EcNt from the
HS-SCCH power set in the cell properties and compares it to this threshold. This field is only used with
HSDPA.
6. Click OK.
352 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Modelling Terminals
In UMTS, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a cars on-
board navigation device.
Receiver equipment
Main band
Maximum terminal power
Gain and losses
Noise figure
Active set size
DL rake factor
Rho factor
Compressed mode capability
HSPA capability and HSPA-specific categories:
- UE category
- MUD factor (for HSDPA only).
Terminal folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
- Name: You can change the name of the terminal.
- Reception Equipment: Select a type of reception equipment from the list. You can create a new type of
reception equipment by opening the Reception Equipment table. To open the Reception Equipment table,
right-click the Terminals folder in the UMTS Parameters folder on the Data tab and select Reception Equip-
ment from the context menu.
- Main Band: Select the frequency band with which the terminal is compatible. Leave this field empty if the ter-
minal works on any frequency band.
- Min. Power: Set the minimum transmission power. The minimum and maximum transmission power make up
the dynamic range for uplink power control.
- Max Power: Set the maximum transmission power.
- Gain: Set the antenna gain.
- Losses: Set the reception losses.
- Noise Figure: Set the terminal noise figure,
- Active Set Size: Set the active set size. The active set size is the maximum number of transmitters to which
a terminal can be connected at one time.
- DL Rake Factor: Set the DL rake factor. This enables A9155 to model the rake receiver on DL.
Note: The rake efficiency factor, used for calculating recombination in uplink has to be set in the
site equipment properties. For information on setting site equipment properties, see "Creat-
ing Site Equipment" on page 420.
- Rho factor (%): This parameter enables A9155 to take into account the self-interference produced by the ter-
minal. Because hardware equipment is not perfect, the input signal experiences some distortion which affects,
in turn, the output signal. This factor defines how much distortion the system generates. Entering 100% means
the system is perfect (there is no distortion) and the output signal will be 100% equal to the input signal. On
the other hand, if you specify a value different than 100%, A9155 considers that the transmitted energy is not
100% signal and contains a small percentage of interference generated by the equipment, i.e., self-interfer-
ence. A9155 considers this parameter to calculate the signal to noise ratio in the uplink.
- Compressed Mode: Check the Compressed Mode check box if the terminal uses compressed mode. Com-
pressed mode is generally used to prepare hard-handover of users with single receiver terminals.
6. Click the HSDPA/HSUPA tab.
Under HSDPA, you can modify the following parameters:
- HSDPA supported: Check the HSDPA supported check box if the terminal is able to use HSDPA channels.
- UE Category: Select a user equipment category. HSDPA user equipment capabilities are standardised into
12 different categories according to 3GPP specifications.
- MUD Factor: Enter a multi-user detection factor (MUD). MUD is based on an algorithm used to improve
mobile receiver capacity. It reduces intra-cell interference and allows for higher EcNt. MUD is modelled by a
coefficient between 0 and 1; this factor is considered in calculating DL interference. If MUD is not supported,
enter "0."
If you have selected the HSDPA supported check box, you can modify the following parameters under HSDPA:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 353

A9155 User Manual
- HSUPA supported: Check the HSUPA supported check box if the terminal is able to use HSUPA channels.
- UE Category: Select a user equipment category. HSUPA user equipment capabilities are standardised into
6 different categories according to 3GPP specifications.
7. Click OK.
6.2.10.8.3 Defining the RSCP Threshold

To define the minimum pilot RSCP threshold:
5. Under Calculation Limitation, enter a Min. Pilot RSCP Threshold.
6. Click OK.
6.2.10.8.4 Making Quality Studies

In A9155, you can make several predictions to study the quality. In this section, the following quality predictions are
explained:
"Studying Service Area (EbNt) Downlink or Uplink" on page 355
"Studying Effective Service Area" on page 356
"Creating a Quality Study Using Quality Indicators" on page 357.
Note: A table listing quality indicators (BER, BLER, etc.) to be analysed is available. Quality stud-
ies proposed by A9155 depend on quality indicators specified in this table.
Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction
A pilot signal quality prediction enables you to identify areas where there is at least one transmitter whose pilot quality is
received sufficiently well to be added to the probe mobile active set.
A9155 calculates the best pilot quality received on each pixel. Then, depending on the coverage prediction definition, it
compares this value either to the EcI0 threshold defined for the selected mobility type, or to user-defined EcI0 thresh-
olds. The pixel is coloured if the condition is fulfilled (in other words, if the best EcI0 is higher than the EcI0 mobility
threshold or specified EcI0 thresholds).
To make a pilot signal quality prediction:
4. Select Pilot Reception Analysis (Ec/I0) and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
to study. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 66.
6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 6.29).
Select "(None)" from Simulation. In this case, the coverage prediction is not going to be based on a simulation.
A9155 will calculate the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total power defined in the cell
properties.
Note: When you base a coverage prediction on simulations, you would select the simulations on
which you would be basing the coverage prediction from the Simulation list.
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 350. You
must also select which Carrier is to be considered.
If you want the pilot signal quality prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into
account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.
You can also select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter
class.
354 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 6.29: Simulation settings for a coverage prediction on overlapping zones

For a pilot signal quality prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "EcI0 (dB)" is selected
by default. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the pilot signal quality. For information on defining
display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
You can also set parameters to display the following results:
- Where at least one transmitter is in the active set: Select "Unique" as the Display Type.
- Where at least one transmitter is in the active set, with information on the best server: Select "Discrete
Value" as the Display Type and "Transmitter" as the Field.
- The pilot quality relative to the EcI0 threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "EcI0
margin (dB)" as the Field.
9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the pilot signal quality prediction. The progress
of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.
Studying Service Area (EbNt) Downlink or Uplink
A9155 calculates the traffic channel quality (as defined by EbNt) when using the maximum power allowed. In the cover-
age prediction, the downlink or uplink service area is limited by the maximum traffic channel power allowable per cell and
by the pilot quality. If the received pilot is below the set threshold, A9155 will not display the traffic channel quality. Mobile
macro-diversity is taken in consideration to evaluate the traffic channel quality (EbNt) at the probe mobile. A9155
combines the signal from each transmitter in the probe mobile active set.
To make a coverage prediction on service area (Eb/Nt) downlink or uplink:
4. Select one of the following studies and click OK:
- Service Area (Eb/Nt) Downlink
- Service Area (Eb/Nt) Uplink
The prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the service area
(EbNt) coverage prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select
which base stations to study. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 66.
properties.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 355

A9155 User Manual
If you want the service area (EbNt) coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing
taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.
class.

For a service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Max
EbNt (dB)" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the service area (EbNt)
downlink or uplink prediction makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the traffic chan-
nel quality. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
- The traffic channel quality relative to the EbNt threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type
and "EbNt margin (dB)" as the Field.
- The power required to reach the EbNt threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and
"Required power (dB)" as the Field.
- Where traffic channel quality exceeds the EbNt threshold for each mobility type: On the Condition tab,
select "All" as the Mobility Type. The parameters on the Display tab are automatically set.
9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the service area (EbNt) coverage prediction.
The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.
Studying Effective Service Area
The effective service area is the intersection zone between the pilot reception area, and the uplink and downlink service
areas. In other words, the effective service area prediction calculates where a service actually is available for the probe
mobile.
To make an effective service area prediction:
4. Select Effective Service Area and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the effective
service area prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which
base stations to study. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 66.
properties.
If you want the effective service area prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into
class.
You can select the Downgrading Allowed check box if you want the effective service area prediction to take into
consideration circumstances when the R99 bearer is downgraded. When downgrading is enabled, A9155 will
consider only the lowest bearer.

For an effective service area prediction, the Display Type "Unique" is selected by default. The coverage prediction
will display where a service actually is available for the probe mobile. For information on defining display proper-
ties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
356 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the effective service area prediction. The
Creating a Quality Study Using Quality Indicators
You can create a quality study based on a given quality indicators (BER, BLER, or FER). The coverage prediction will show
for each pixel the measurement of the selected quality indicator.
This type of coverage prediction is not available in the list of standard studies; you can, however, use quality indicators in
a study by first ensuring that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set and then creating a coverage
prediction, selecting display parameters that use these quality indicators.
Before you define the quality study, you must ensure that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set.
To check the parameters of the quality indicators:
4. Select Quality Indicators from the context menu. The Quality Indicators table appears.
For each quality indicator in the Name column, you can set the following parameters:
- Used for Packet Services: Select the Used for Packet Services check box if the quality indicator is to be
used for packet services.
- Used for Circuit Services: Select the Used for Circuit Services check box if the quality indicator is to be
used for circuit services.
- Measured Parameter for QI: From the list, select the parameter that will be measured to indicate quality.
- QI Interpolation: Select the QI Interpolation check box if you want A9155 to interpolate between two existing
QI values. Clear the QI Interpolation check box if you want A9155 to take the closest QI value.
5. Close the Quality Indicators table.
6. In the UMTS Parameters folder, right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears.
7. Select Reception Equipment from the context menu. The Reception Equipment table appears.
"Standard" is the default reception equipment type for all terminals.
8. Double-click the reception equipment type for which you want to verify the correspondence between the measured
quality and the quality indicator. The reception equipment types Properties dialogue appears.
9. Click the Quality Graphs tab.
10. Ensure that a Quality Indicator has been chosen for each R99 Bearer. You can edit the values in the DL and
UL Quality Indicator Tables by clicking directly on the table entry, or by selecting the Quality Indicator and
clicking the Downlink Quality Graphs or the Uplink Quality Graphs buttons.
11. Click OK to close the reception equipment types Properties dialogue.
Once you have ensured that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set, you can use the measured
quality to create a quality study. How you define a coverage prediction according to the measured quality indicator,
depends several parameters:
The settings made in the Quality Indicators table
The service you want to study
The quality indicator you want to use (BER, BLER, or FER)
The coverage prediction you want to use (Pilot Reception Analysis, the Service Area Downlink, or Service Area
Uplink).
In the following example, you will create a quality study showing BLER, for a user on foot, and with mobile internet access.
To create a quality study showing BLER for a user on foot, and with mobile internet access:
4. Select Service Area (EbNt) Downlink and click OK. the coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
(EbNt) downlink prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select
properties.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 357

A9155 User Manual
- Terminal: Select the appropriate terminal for mobile Internet access from the Terminal list.
- Service: Select "Mobile Internet Access" from the Service list.
- Mobility: Select "Pedestrian" from the Mobility list.
- Carrier: If you want to study a certain carrier, you can select it from the Carrier list. Otherwise, select "All."
If you want the service area (EbNt) downlink prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing
class.
You can select the Downgrading Allowed check box if you want the service area (EbNt) downlink prediction to
take into consideration circumstances when the R99 bearer is downgraded. When downgrading is enabled, A9155
will consider only the lowest bearer.

Select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and "BLER" as the Field. The exact of the field value will depend on
the name given in the Quality Indicators table. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Prop-
erties of Objects" on page 33.
A9155 calculates for each pixel the DL traffic channel quality (EbNt) (provided when using the maximum traffic channel
power allowed). Then, it calculates the corresponding BLER value from the quality graph (BLER=f(DL EbNt)). The pixel
is coloured if the condition is fulfilled (i.e., if BLER is evaluated as being higher than the specified threshold).
6.2.10.8.5 Studying Noise

A9155 has several coverage predictions that enable you to study the downlink total noise, downlink noise rise or pilot pollu-
tion. In this section, the following noise predictions are explained:
"Studying Downlink Total Noise" on page 358
Studying Downlink Total Noise
In the downlink total noise prediction, A9155 calculates and displays the areas where the downlink total noise or the down-
link noise rise exceeds a set threshold.
To make a downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction:
4. Select Downlink Total Noise and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the downlink total
noise or downlink noise rise prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter
to select which base stations to study. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 66.
properties.
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 350.
If you want the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the
Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text
box.
class.

For a downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" is selected by
default. The Field you choose determines which information the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise predic-
tion makes available.
- Downlink total noise prediction: When making a downlink total noise prediction, select one of the following
in the Field list:
358 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Min. noise level

- Average noise level
- Max noise level
- Downlink noise rise prediction: When making a downlink noise rise prediction, select one of the following
in the Field list:
- Min. noise rise
- Average noise rise
- Max noise rise
9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise
prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.
Calculating Pilot Pollution
A transmitter which fulfils all the criteria to enter a mobiles active set but which is not admitted because the active set limit
has already been reached is considered a polluter.
In the pilot pollution prediction, A9155 calculates and displays the areas where the probe mobile is interfered by the pilot
signal from polluter transmitters.
To make a pilot pollution prediction:
4. Select Pilot Pollution and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the pilot pollution
prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which base stations
properties.
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 350. You
If you want the pilot pollution prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account
check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.
class.

For a pilot pollution prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" and the Field "Number of polluters" are selected
by default. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the pilot pollution prediction. The progress of
the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.
6.2.10.8.6 Making a Handover Status Coverage Prediction

In the handover status prediction, A9155 calculates and displays the zones where a handover can be made. For a hando-
ver to be possible, there must be a potential active transmitter, i.e., a transmitter that fulfils all the criteria to enter the mobile
active set, and the service chosen by the user must be available.
You can also use the handover status coverage prediction to display the number of potential active transmitters.
To make a handover status coverage prediction:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 359

A9155 User Manual
4. Select Handoff Status and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the handover
status coverage prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select
properties.
If you want the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the
Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text
box.
class.
7. Click the Display tab. The settings you select on the Display tab determine the information that the coverage pre-
diction will display.
- To display the handover status:
i. Select "Discrete Values" from the Display Type list.
ii. Select "Status" from the Field list. The coverage prediction will display two values: No handoff and Not
connected.
- To display the number of potential active transmitters:
i. Select "Value Intervals" from the Display Type list.
ii. Select "Potential active transmitter nb" from the Field list. The coverage prediction will display the number
of potential active transmitters.
9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the handover status coverage prediction. The
6.2.10.8.7 Making an AS Analysis

The Point Analysis window gives you information on reception for any point on the map. The AS Analysis tab gives you
information on the pilot quality (EcI0) (which is the main parameter used to define the mobile active set), the connection
status, and the active set of the probe mobile. Analysis is based on the UL load percentage and the DL total power of cells.
The analysis is provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility and a service.
You can make an AS analysis to verify a coverage prediction. In this case, before you make the AS analysis, ensure the
coverage prediction you want to use in the AS analysis is displayed on the map.
For information on the criteria for belonging to the active set, see "Conditions for Entering the Active Set" on page 422.
To make an AS analysis:
1. Click the Point Analysis button ( ) on the toolbar. The Point Analysis window appears (see Figure 6.31).
2. Click the AS Analysis tab.
3. At the top of the AS Analysis tab, select "None" from Simulation.
4. If you are making an AS analysis to verify a coverage prediction, you can recreate the conditions of the coverage
prediction:
a. Select the same Terminal, Service, and Mobility studied in the coverage prediction.
b. Right-click the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dia-
logue appears.
select "EcI0" from the Shadowing Margin list.
c. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue.
5. Move the pointer over the map to make an active set analysis for the current location of the pointer.
As you move the pointer, A9155 indicates on the map which is the best server for the current position (see
Figure 6.30).
360 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Information on the current position is given on the AS Analysis tab of the Point Analysis window. See Figure 6.31
on page 361 for an explanation of the displayed information.
Figure 6.30: Point analysis on the map
6. Click the map to leave the point analysis pointer at its current position.
To move the pointer again, click the point analysis pointer on the map and drag it to a new position.
7. Click the Point Analysis button ( ) on the toolbar again to end the point analysis.
Select the load conditions (DL Power This vertical bar represents the lower boundary of the
and UL Load from a simulation or Select the parameters of the probe user to active set (defined as the signal value of the best
user-defined values) to use in this be studied. server at the current point minus the AS_Threshold -
analysis. defined in the global properties from the Transmitters
folder).
This vertical bar The connection status (pilot and uplink

The pilot reception in terms of active set components for the set represents the EcI0 and downlink traffic) for the current point.
conditions. The active set is displayed in grey. Solid bars threshold become the
indicate the transmitters which respect the active set best server (threshold : successful connection
constraints. Even if more transmitters respect the constraints, defined in the mobility
the active set size is limited to the number defined in the terminal type properties dialogue). : failed connection
properties and is a function of the current service.
Figure 6.31: AS Analysis tab

The bar graph displays the following information:
The pilot quality (EcI0) reception of all transmitters using the selected carrier (the colour of the bar colour corre-
sponds to the colour of the transmitter on the map).
The thresholds of the active set (EcI0 threshold, (EcI0) best server active set threshold). The portion of the graph
with the grey background indicates the transmitters in the active set.
The pilot and the availability of service on UL and DL.
If there is at least one successful connection (for pilot, downlink, or uplink), double-clicking the icons in the right-hand frame
will open a dialogue with additional information.
6.2.10.9 HSDPA Coverage Prediction

The HSDPA coverage prediction allows you to study many HSDPA-related parameters, depending on the parameters
defined. The parameters used as input for the HSDPA coverage prediction are the HSDPA power, and the total transmitted
power for each cell. If the coverage prediction is not based on a simulation, these values are taken from the cell properties.
For information about the cell parameters, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 317. For information on the formulas
used to calculate different throughputs, see the Technical Reference Guide.
To make an HSDPA coverage prediction:
4. Select HSDPA Study and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the HSDPA cov-
erage prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which base
stations to study. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 66.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 361

A9155 User Manual
properties.
You must select a Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 350. For an HSDPA coverage
prediction, under Terminal, you must chose an HSDPA-capable terminal and, under Service, you must chose a
service with HSDPA.
If you want to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a
percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.
class.
- To analyse the uplink and downlink A-DPCH qualities on the map:
- The maximum DL A-DPCH quality relative to the EbNt threshold: Select "Max A-DPCH EbNt DL
(dB)" as the Field. A9155 determines downlink A-DPCH quality at the receiver for the maximum traffic
channel power allowed for the best server.
- The maximum UL A-DPCH quality relative to the EbNt threshold: Select "Max A-DPCH EbNt UL
(dB)" as the Field. A9155 determines uplink A-DPCH quality at the receiver for the maximum terminal
power allowed.
- To analyse the HS-SCCH quality or power:
- The HS-SCCH power per HS-SCCH channel relative to the power threshold: Select "HS-SCCH Pow-
er (dBm)" as the Field. This display option is relevant only if HS-SCCH power is allocated dynamically.
- The HS-SCCH EcNt per HS-SCCH channel relative to the EcNt threshold: Select "HS-SCCH EcNt
(dBm)" as the Field. This display option is relevant only if HS-SCCH power is allocated statically.
- To model fast link adaptation for a single HSDPA user or for a defined number of HSDPA users:
For a single HSDPA user, A9155 considers one HSDPA user on each pixel and determines the best HSDPA
bearer that the user can obtain by considering the entire available HSDPA power of the cell.
- The HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt relative to the EcNt threshold: Select "HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt" as the Field. A9155
calculates the best HS-PDSCH EcNt on each pixel.
- The channel quality indicator (CQI) relative to the EcNt threshold: Select "CQI" as the Field. A9155
displays either the CPICH CQI or the HS-PDSCH CQI, depending on the option selected under HSDPA
on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue (see "Creating or Modifying a
Transmitter" on page 316).
- The MAC rate relative to the threshold: Select "MAC Rate (kbps)" as the Field. A9155 calculates the
MAC rate from the transport block size of the selected HSDPA bearer.
- The MAC throughput relative to the threshold: Select "MAC Throughput (kbps)" as the Field. The MAC
throughput is calculated from the MAC rate.
- The RLC peak rate relative to the threshold: Select "RLC Peak Rate (kbps)" as the Field. A9155
displays the RLC peak rate that the selected HSDPA bearer can by supplied with. The RLC peak rate is
a characteristic of the HSDPA bearer.
- The RLC peak throughput relative to the threshold: Select "RLC Peak Throughput (kbps)" as the
Field. A9155 calculates the RLC peak throughput from the RLC peak rate.
- The average RLC throughput relative to the threshold: Select "Average RLC Throughput (kbps)" as
the Field.
- The application throughput relative to the threshold: Select "Application Throughput (kbps)" as the
Field. Using the RLC peak rate, the BLER, the HSDPA service scaling factor, and the throughput offset,
A9155 calculates the application throughput. The application throughput represents the net throughput
without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.).
A9155 can consider several HSDPA users per pixel. When the coverage prediction is not based on a simula-
tion, this value is taken from the cell properties. A9155 considers the defined number of HSDPA users on each
pixel and determines the best HSDPA bearer that each user can obtain. The coverage prediction results dis-
played are the average results for one user. The HSDPA power of the cell is shared between the HSDPA us-
ers. You can display the following results:
- The average MAC throughput per mobile relative to the threshold: Select "MAC Throughput per
Mobile (kbps)" as the Field. A9155 calculates the average MAC throughput per mobile from the from the
MAC throughput of each user.
- The average RLC throughput per mobile relative to the threshold: Select "RLC Throughput per
Mobile (kbps)" as the Field. A9155 calculates the average RLC throughput per mobile from the RLC
throughput of each user.
- The average application throughput per mobile relative to the threshold: Select "Application
Throughput per Mobile (kbps)" as the Field. Using the RLC peak rate, the BLER, the HSDPA service scal-
ing factor, and the throughput offset, A9155 calculates the average application throughput per mobile from
the application throughput of each user.
362 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

When no value is defined in the Cells table for the total transmitted power and the number of HSDPA users,
A9155 uses the following default values:
- Total transmitted power = 50% of the maximum power (i.e, 40 dBm if the maximum power is set to
43 dBm)
- Number of HSDPA users = 1
On the other hand, no default value is used for the HSDPA power; this parameter must be defined by the user.
For information on selecting the best bearer, see the Technical Reference Guide. For information on defining
Note: Each HSDPA user is associated to an R99 dedicated channel A-DCH, in the uplink and
downlink. Therefore, user must first initiate a A-DCH connection in order to be able to use
HSDPA channels. To manage this R99 connection, the HSDPA service is linked to a R99
bearer.
6.2.10.10 HSUPA Coverage Prediction

The HSUPA coverage prediction allows you to study several HSUPA-related parameters. The parameters used as input
for the HSUPA study are the uplink load factor the uplink reuse factor, the uplink load factor due to HSUPA and the maxi-
mum uplink load factor for each cell. If the coverage prediction is not based on a simulation, these values are taken from
the cell properties. For information about the cell parameters, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 317. For infor-
mation on the formulas used to calculate required E-DPDCH Ec/Nt, required terminal power, and different throughputs,
see the Technical Reference Guide.
To make an HSUPA coverage prediction:
4. Select HSUPA Study and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the HSUPA cov-
properties.
You must select a Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 350. For an HSUPA coverage
prediction, under Terminal, you must chose an HSUPA-capable terminal and, under Service, you must chose a
service with HSUPA.
HSUPA Resources: A9155 can calculate the HSUPA coverage prediction in one of two ways:
- For a single user: After allocating capacity to all R99 users, the entire remaining load will be allocated to a
single HSUPA user.
- Shared by HSUPA users defined or calculated per cell: After allocating capacity to all R99 users, the
remaining load of the cell will be shared equally between all the HSUPA users. When the coverage prediction
is not based on a simulation, the number of HSUPA users is taken from the cell properties. The displayed
results of the coverage prediction will be for one user.
When no value is defined in the Cells table, A9155 uses the following default values:
- Uplink load factor = 50%

- Uplink reuse factor = 1
- Uplink load factor due to HSUPA = 0%
- Maximum uplink load factor = 75%
- Number of HSUPA users = 1
If you want the coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account
class.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 363

A9155 User Manual
diction will display. You can set parameters to display the following results:
- The required E-DPDCH EcNt relative to the threshold: Select "Required E-DPDCH EcNt (dB)" as the
Field. A9155 selects the best HSUPA bearer whose required E-DPDCH EcNt does not exceed the maximum
E-DPDCH EcNt allowed. The required E-DPDCH EcNt is a property of the selected HSUPA bearer.
- The power required for the selected terminal relative to the threshold: Select "Required Terminal Power
(dBm)" as the Field. A9155 calculates the required terminal power from the required E-DPDCH Ec/Nt.
- The MAC Rate relative to the threshold: Select "MAC Rate (kbps)" as the Field. A9155 calculates the MAC
rate from the transport block size of the selected HSUPA bearer.
- The RLC peak rate relative to the threshold: Select "RLC Peak Rate (kbps)" as the Field. A9155 displays
the RLC peak rate that the selected HSUPA bearer can supply. The RLC peak rate is a property of the HSUPA
bearer.
- The guaranteed RLC throughput relative to the threshold: Select "Minimum RLC Throughput (kbps)" as
the Field.
- The application throughput relative to the threshold: Select "Application Throughput (kbps)" as the Field.
Using the RLC peak rate, the BLER, the HSUPA service scaling factor, and the throughput offset, A9155 cal-
culates the application throughput. The application throughput represents the net throughput without coding
(redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.).


page 343).

4. Click OK.

364 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


raster format.

AGD formats.


select:
the study,
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 365

A9155 User Manual
Notes

You can set neighbours for each cell manually, or you can let A9155 automatically allocate neighbours, based on the
parameters that you set. When allocating neighbours, the cell to which you are allocating neighbours is referred to as the
reference cell. The cells that fulfil the requirements to be neighbours are referred to as possible neighbours. When allo-
cating neighbours to all active and filtered transmitters, A9155 allocates neighbours only to the cells within the focus zone
and considers as possible neighbours all the active and filtered cells whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle
containing the computation zone. If there is no focus zone, A9155 allocates neighbours only to the cells within the compu-
tation zone.
neighbours to base stations or transmitters as you add them. You can use automatic allocation on all cells in the document,
or you can define a group of cells either by using a focus zone or by grouping transmitters in the Explorer window. For
information on creating a focus zone, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on
page 343. For information on grouping transmitters in the Explorer window, see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 61.
A9155 supports the following neighbour types in a UMTS network:
Intra-technology neighbours: Intra-technology neighbours are cells defined as neighbours that also use UMTS.
Intra-technology neighbours can be divided into:
- Intra-carrier neighbours: Cells defined as neighbours which perform handover using the same carrier.
- Inter-carrier neighbours: Cells defined as neighbours which perform handover using a different carrier.
Inter-technology neighbours: Inter-technology neighbours are cells defined as neighbours that use a technology
other than UMTS.
"Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell" on page 371

c. Select Cells > Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table
appears.

In A9155, you can define neighbour constraints that will be taken into consideration during the automatic allocation of
4. Right-click the cell for which you want to define neighbour constraints. The context menu appears.
5. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The cells Properties dialogue appears.
366 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

a. Select the cell from the list in the Neighbours column.
9. Click OK.
Notes: You can also create exceptional pairs using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology
selecting Cells > Neighbours > Intra-Technology Exceptional Pairs.

A9155 can automatically allocate both intra- and inter-carrier neighbours in a UMTS network. A9155 allocates neighbours
based on the parameters you set in the Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue.
To automatically allocate intra-carrier UMTS neighbours:
3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neighbour Alloca-
tion dialogue appears.
4. Click the Intra-Carrier Neighbours tab. You can set the following parameters:
- Max. Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference cell and a possible neighbour.
a cell. This value can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the Cells table.
- Min. Pilot Signal Level: Enter the minimum pilot signal level which must be provided by reference cell A
and possible neighbour cell B.
- Min. EcI0: Enter the minimum EcI0 which must be provided by reference cell A in an overlapping area.
Reference cell A must also be the best server in terms of pilot quality in the overlapping area.
- EcI0 Margin: Enter the maximum difference of EcI0 between reference cell A and possible neighbour
cell B in the overlapping area.
- Power Contributing to I0: You can let A9155 base the interference ratio on the Total Power Used (as
defined in the cell properties) or on a percentage of the maximum power (% Max Power).
- % Min. Covered Area: Enter the minimum, in percentage, that a possible neighbour cells coverage area must
overlap the reference cells coverage area.
- Carriers: Select the carriers on which you want to run the allocation. You can choose one or more carriers
(A9155 will allocate neighbours to cells using the selected carriers).
- Force co-site cells as neighbours: Select the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box if you want
cells located on the same site as the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours.
- Force adjacent cells as neighbours: Select the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box if you want
cells that are adjacent to the reference cell to be automatically considered as neighbours. A cell is considered
adjacent if there is at least one pixel in the reference cells coverage area where the possible neighbour cell
is the best server, or where the possible neighbour cell is the second best server in the reference cells active
set (respecting the handover margin).
- Force symmetry: Select the Force symmetry check box if you want neighbour relations to be reciprocal. In
other words, a reference cell will be a possible neighbour to all of the cells that are its neighbours. If the neigh-
bour list of any cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbour and that cell will be removed from
the list of neighbours of the reference cell.
6. Click the Importance Weighting button to set the relative importance of possible neighbours:
reasons.
- Adjacency Factor: If you have selected the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box in step 5., set
the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being adjacent to the reference cell.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 367

A9155 User Manual
- Co-site Factor: If you have selected the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box in step 5., set the
minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being located on the same site as reference
cell.
7. Click Run. A9155 begins the process of allocating intra-carrier neighbours. A9155 first checks to see whether the
path loss matrices are valid before allocating neighbours. If the path loss matrices are not valid, A9155 recalcu-
lates them.
- Cell: The name of the reference cell.

- Number: The total number of neighbours allocated to the reference cell.
- Maximum Number: The maximum number of neighbours that the reference cell can have.
- Neighbour: The cell that will be allocated as a neighbour to the reference cell.
- Cause: The reason A9155 has allocated the possible neighbour cell, as identified in the Neighbour column,
to the reference cell, as identified in the Cell column.
- Co-site
- Adjacency
- Symmetry
- Coverage
- Existing
- Coverage: The amount of reference cells coverage area that the neighbour overlaps, in percentage and in
square kilometres.
- Adjacency: The area of the reference cell, in percentage and in square kilometres, where the neighbour cell
is best server or second best server.
8. Select the Commit check box for each neighbour you want to assign to a cell. You can use many of A9155s table
shortcuts, such as filtering and sorting. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data
Tables" on page 48.
9. Click Commit. All the neighbours whose Commit check box is selected are assigned to the reference cells. Neigh-
bours are listed in the Intra-technology Neighbours tab of each cells Properties dialogue.
To automatically allocate inter-carrier UMTS neighbours:
4. Click the Inter-Carrier Neighbours tab. You can set the following parameters:
- Max. Number of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of inter-carrier neighbours that can be allocated to
- Min. EcI0: Enter the minimum EcI0 which must be provided by reference cell A and possible
neighbour B in an overlapping area. Possible neighbour B must also be the best server in terms of pilot
quality in the overlapping area.
- EcI0 Margin: Enter the EcI0 margin relative to the EcI0 of the reference cell A. See the Technical
Reference Guide for an explanation of how the EcI0 margin is used in different inter-carrier handover
scenarios.
- Carriers: Select the carriers on which you want to run the allocation. You can choose one or more carriers
(A9155 will allocate neighbours to cells using the selected carriers).
368 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of the minimum percentage of shared cov-
erage between the possible neighbour cell and the reference cell.
cell.
7. Click Run. A9155 begins the process of allocating inter-carrier neighbours. A9155 first checks to see whether the
lates them.

- Co-site
- Symmetry
- Coverage
- Existing
square kilometres.
Tables" on page 48.
Notes
ties dialogue.

When you create a new base station, you can let A9155 allocate neighbours to it automatically. A9155 considers the cells
of the new base station and other cells whose coverage area intersects with the coverage area of the cells of the new base
station.
on page 61.
page 367.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 369

A9155 User Manual

When you add a new transmitter, you can let A9155 allocate neighbours to it automatically. A9155 considers the cells of
the new transmitters and other cells whose coverage area intersects the coverage area of the cells of the new transmitter.
page 367.

"Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Cell" on page 371.

relation (in other words, A9155 indicates which is the reference cell and which is the neighbour) and whether the neighbour
relation is symmetric.
To display the neighbour relations of a cell on the map:
where the selected cell is the reference cell and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric.
where the selected cell is neighbour and where the neighbour relation is not symmetric.
selected cell and the neighbour.
4. Carrier: Because neighbour relations are between cells, you must select the carrier of the cells.
6. Select Neighbours from the menu. The neighbours of a cell will be displayed when you select a transmitter.
7. Click the Visual Management button ( ) in the Radio toolbar.

line.
370 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

6.2.11.4.2 Displaying the Coverage of Each Neighbour of a Cell

coverage areas of a cells neighbours and colour them according to any neighbour characteristic available in the Neigh-
bours table.
To display the coverage of each neighbour of a cell:

8. In order to restore colours and cancel the neighbour display, click the left side of the Neighbour graphic man-
agement icon ( ).
Note: Only intra-carrier neighbour coverage areas are displayed.
6.2.11.5 Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell

cating or deleting neighbours per cell. You can allocate or delete neighbours directly on the map or using the Cells tab of
"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue" on page 371
Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue
To allocate or delete UMTS neighbours using the Cells tab of the transmitters Properties dialogue:
3. Click the Cells tab.
4. On the Cells tab, there is a column for each cell. Click the Browse button ( ) beside Neighbours in the cell for
which you want to allocate or delete neighbours. The cells Properties dialogue appears.
6. If desired, you can enter the maximum number of neighbours in the following boxes:
- Max Number Inter-Carrier
- Max Number Intra-Carrier
a. Under List, select the cell from the list in the Neighbour column in the row marked with the New Row icon
( ).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 371

A9155 User Manual
Note: A9155 automatically sets the importance for manually allocated neighbours to "1."
c. Click elsewhere in the table to complete creating the new neighbour.

9. Click OK.
To allocate or delete UMTS neighbours using the Neighbours table:

3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours table
appears.
a. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), select a reference cell in the Cell column.
d. Click elsewhere in the table to create the new neighbour and add a new blank row to the table.
to "1."

b. Select Symmetrise from the context menu. A symmetric neighbour relation is created between the cell in the
Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column.
bour Relations.
tween the cell in the Neighbour column and the cell in the Cell column is deleted.
372 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA



3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Audit from the context menu. The Neighbour Audit dialogue appears.
- Neighbourhood type: Select whether you want to perform an audit on Intra-Carrier or Inter-Carrier neigh-
bour relations.
- Average No. of Neighbours: The average number of neighbours per cell
- Empty Lists: Which cells have no neighbours (in other words, which cells have an empty neighbour list)
- Full Lists: Which cells having the maximum number of neighbours allowed (in other words, which cells have
a full neighbour list)
- Lists > Max Number: Which cells having more than the maximum number of neighbours allowed
- Missing Co-sites: Which cells have no co-site neighbours
- Missing Symmetrics: Which cells have non-symmetric neighbour relations
- Exceptional Pairs: Which cells have forced neighbours or forbidden neighbours.
- Average Number of Neighbours: X; where, X is the average number of neighbours (integer) per cell for the
plan audited.
- Empty Lists: x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having no neighbours (or empty neighbours list)
Syntax: |CELL|
- Full Lists (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having Y number of neighbours
listed in their respective neighbours lists.
Syntax: |CELL| |NUMBER| |MAX NUMBER|
- Lists > Max Number (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having more than
Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists.
Note: If the field Maximum number of neighbours in the Transmitters table is empty, the Full
Lists check and the Lists > Max Number check use the Default Max Number value
defined in the audit dialogue.
Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR|
Syntax: |CELL| |NEIGHBOUR| |TYPE| |REASON|
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 373

A9155 User Manual


The neighbour data of an A9155 document is stored in a series of tables. You can export the neighbour data to use it in
3. Select Cells > Neighbours and then select the neighbour table containing the data you want to export from the
context menu:
- Intra-Technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology (intra-carrier and inter-
carrier) neighbours in the current A9155 document.
- Inter-Technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the inter-technology neighbours in the current
A9155 document.
- Intra-technology Exceptional Pairs: This table contains the data for the intra-technology exceptional pairs
- Inter-technology Exceptional Pairs: This table contains the data for the inter-technology exceptional pairs
6.2.12 Planning Scrambling Codes

In UMTS, 512 scrambling codes are available, numbered from 0 to 511. Although UMTS scrambling codes are displayed
in decimal format by default, they can also be displayed and calculated in hexadecimal format, in other words using the
numbers 0 to 9 and the letters A to F.
A9155 facilitates the management of scrambling codes by letting you create groups of scrambling codes and domains,
where each domain is a defined set of groups.
You can also assign scrambling codes manually or automatically to any cell in the network.
Once allocation is completed, you can audit the scrambling codes, view scrambling code reuse on the map, and make an
analysis of scrambling code distribution.
The procedure for planning scrambling codes for a UMTS project is:
Preparing for scrambling code allocation
- "Defining the Scrambling Code Format" on page 374
- "Creating Scrambling Code Domains and Groups" on page 375
- "Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 375.
Allocating scrambling codes
- "Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells" on page 376
- "Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells Manually" on page 377.
"Checking the Consistency of the Scrambling Code Plan" on page 378.
Displaying the allocation of scrambling codes
- "Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 378
- "Displaying Scrambling Code Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 379
- "Grouping Transmitters by Scrambling Code" on page 379
- "Displaying the Scrambling Code Allocation Histogram" on page 380
- "Making a Scrambling Code Interference Zone Prediction" on page 380.
- "Making a Scrambling Code Interference Analysis" on page 381
Notes
Within the context of primary scrambling code allocation, "neighbours" refer to intra-carrier
neighbours.
According to 3GPP specifications, the 512 possible scrambling codes can be broken down into
groups, each containing 8 codes. Because the term "group" in A9155 refers to user-defined sets
of scrambling codes, these groups of 8 codes each are referred to as "clusters" in A9155. As
well, A9155 allows you to change the number of codes in a cluster.
6.2.12.1 Defining the Scrambling Code Format

Scrambling codes may be displayed in decimal or hexadecimal format. The selected format is used to display scrambling
codes in dialogues and tables such as in the Domains and Groups tables, the Cells table, and the Scrambling Code
Allocation dialogue.
374 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

The decimal format is the default format in A9155. The accepted decimal values are from 0 to 511. The decimal format is
also used, even if you have chosen the hexadecimal format, to store scrambling codes in the database and to display
scrambling code distribution or the results of a scrambling code audit.
The hexadecimal format uses the numbers 0 to 9 and the letters A to F for its base characters. In A9155, hexadecimal
values are indicated by a lower-case "h" following the value. For example, the hexadecimal value "3Fh" is "63" as a decimal
value. You can convert a hexadecimal value to a decimal value with the following equation, where A, B, and C are decimal
values within the hexadecimal index ranges:
2
A 16 + B 16 + C
For example, the hexadecimal value "3Fh" would be calculated as shown below:
2
0 16 + 3 16 + 15 = 63
To define the scrambling code format for an A9155 document:
3. Select Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Format from the context menu and select either Decimal or Hex-
adecimal.
6.2.12.2 Creating Scrambling Code Domains and Groups

A9155 facilitates the management of scrambling codes by letting you create domains, each containing groups of scram-
bling codes.
The procedure for managing scrambling codes in a UMTS document consists of the following steps:
1. Creating a scrambling code domain, as explained in this section.
2. Creating groups, each containing a range of scrambling codes, and assigning them to a domain, as explained in
this section.
3. Assigning a scrambling code domain to a cell or cells. If there is no scrambling code domain, A9155 will consider
all 512 possible scrambling codes when assigning codes.
To create a scrambling code domain:
3. Select Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Domains. The Domains table appears.
4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), enter a Name for the new domain.
5. Click in another cell of the table to create the new domain and add a new blank row to the table.
6. Double-click the domain to which you want to add a group. The domains Properties dialogue appears.
7. Under Groups, enter the following information for each group you want to create.
- Name: Enter a name for the new scrambling code group.
- Min.: Enter the lowest available primary scrambling code in this groups range. The minimum and maximum
scrambling codes must be entered in the format, decimal or hexadecimal, set for the A9155 document (for
information on setting the scrambling code format, see "Defining the Scrambling Code Format" on page 374).
- Max: Enter the highest available primary scrambling code in this groups range.
- Step: Enter the separation interval between each primary scrambling code.
- Excluded: Enter the scrambling codes in this range that you do not want to use.
- Extra: Enter any additional scrambling codes (i.e., outside the range defined by the Min. and Max fields) you
want to add to this group. You can enter a list of codes separated by either a comma, semi-colon, or a space.
You can also enter a range of scrambling codes separated by a hyphen. For example, entering, "1, 2, 3-5"
means that the extra scrambling codes are "1, 2, 3, 4, 5."
8. Click in another cell of the table to create the new group and add a new blank row to the table.
6.2.12.3 Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation

You can also define pairs of cells which cannot have the same primary scrambling code. These pairs are referred to as
exceptional pairs. Exceptional pairs are used along with other constraints, such as neighbours, reuse distance, and
domains, in allocating scrambling codes.
To create a pair of cells that cannot have the same scrambling code:
3. Select Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Exceptional Pairs. The Exceptional Separation Constraints
table appears. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48.
4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), select one cell of the new exceptional pair in the Cell column
and the second cell of the new exceptional pair from the Cell_2 column.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 375

A9155 User Manual
5. Click in another cell of the table to create the new exceptional pair and add a new blank row to the table.
6.2.12.4 Allocating Scrambling Codes

A9155 can automatically assign scrambling codes to the cells of a UMTS network according to set parameters. For exam-
ple, it takes into account the definition of groups and domains of scrambling codes, the selected scrambling code allocation
strategy (clustered, distributed per cell, distributed per site and one cluster per site), minimum code reuse distance, and
any constraints imposed by neighbours.
You can also allocate scrambling codes manually to the cells of a UMTS network.
In this section, the following methods of allocating scrambling codes are described:
"Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells" on page 376
"Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells Manually" on page 377.
Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells
The allocation algorithm enables you to automatically allocate primary scrambling codes to cells in the current network.
You can choose among several automatic allocation strategies (for more information, see the Technical Reference Guide):
Clustered: The purpose of this strategy is to choose for a group of mutually constrained cells, scrambling codes
among a minimum number of clusters. In this case, A9155 will preferentially allocate all the codes from same
cluster.
Distributed per cell allocation: This strategy consists in using as many clusters as possible. A9155 will prefer-
entially allocate codes from different clusters.
One cluster per site: This strategy allocates one cluster to each base station, then, one code of the cluster to
each cell of each base station. When all the clusters have been allocated and there are still base stations
remaining to be allocated, A9155 reuses the clusters at another base station.
Distributed per site: This strategy allocates a group of adjacent clusters to each base station in the network, then,
one cluster to each transmitter of the base station according to its azimuth and finally one code of the cluster to
each cell of each transmitter. The number of adjacent clusters per group depends on the number of transmitters
per base station you have in your network; this information is required to start allocation based on this strategy.
When all the groups of adjacent clusters have been allocated and there are still base stations remaining to be allo-
cated, A9155 reuses the groups of adjacent clusters at another base station.
To automatically allocate primary scrambling codes:
3. Select Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Automatic Allocation. The Primary Scrambling Codes dialogue
appears.
4. Set the following parameters in the Primary Scrambling Codes dialogue:
- Under Constraints, you can set the constraints on automatic scrambling code allocation.
- Existing Neighbours: Select the Existing Neighbours check box if you want to consider intra-carrier
neighbour relations and then choose the neighbourhood level to take into account:
Neighbours of a cell are referred to as the first order neighbours, neighbours neighbours are referred to
as the second order neighbours and neighbours neighbours neighbours as the third order neighbours.
First Order: No cell will be allocated the same scrambling code as its neighbours.
Second Order: No cell will be allocated the same scrambling code as its neighbours or its second order
neighbours.
Third Order: No cell will be allocated the same scrambling code as its neighbours or its second order
neighbours or its third order neighbours.
A9155 can only consider neighbour relations if neighbours have already been allocated. For information
on allocating neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 366.
Note: A9155 can take into account inter-technology neighbour relations as constraints when allo-
cating scrambling codes to the UMTS neighbours of a GSM transmitter. In order to consider
inter-technology neighbour relations in scrambling code allocation, you must make the
Transmitters folder of the GSM A9155 document accessible in the UMTS A9155 docu-
ment. For information on making links between GSM and UMTS A9155 documents, see
"Displaying Both Networks in the Same A9155 Document" on page 754
- Additional EcI0 Conditions: Select the Additional EcI0 Conditions check box, if you want to set
constraints related to EcI0 and then enter a Min. EcI0 and EcI0 Margin. If you wish you can also select
the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. If cells
meet the EcI0 conditions to enter the reference cells active set, they will be not allocated the same
scrambling code as the reference cell.
376 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: A9155 takes into account the total downlink power used by the cell in order to evaluate I0.
I0 equals the sum of total transmitted powers. If this parameter is not specified in the cell
properties, A9155 uses 50% of the maximum power.
- Default Reuse Distance: Enter the radius within which two cells on the same carrier cannot have the same
primary scrambling code.
Note: A reuse distance can be defined at the cell level (in the cell Properties dialogue or in the
Cells table). If defined, a cell-specific reuse distance will be used instead of the value
entered here.
- Under Strategy, you can select an automatic allocation strategy:

- Clustered
- Distributed per Cell
- One Cluster per Site
- Distributed per Site
- Carrier: Select the Carrier on which you want to run the allocation. You may choose one carrier (A9155 will
assign primary scrambling codes to transmitters using the selected carrier) or all of them.
- No. of codes per cluster: According to 3GPP specifications, the number of codes per cluster is 8. If you wish,
you can change the number of codes per cluster.
- Use a Maximum of Codes: Select the Use a Maximum of Codes check box to make A9155 use the max-
imum number of codes. For example, if there are two cells using the same domain with two scrambling codes,
A9155 will assign the remaining code to the second cell even if there are no constraints between these two
cells (for example, neighbour relations, reuse distance, etc.). If you do not select this option, A9155 only
checks the constraints, and allocates the first ranked code in the list.
- Reset All Codes: Select the Reset All Codes check box if you want A9155 to delete currently allocated
scrambling codes and recalculate all scrambling codes. If you do not select this option, A9155 will keep cur-
rently allocated scrambling codes and will only allocate scrambling codes to cells that do not yet have codes
allocated.
- Allocate Carriers Identically: Select the Allocate Carriers Identically check box if you want A9155 to allo-
cate the same primary scrambling code to each carrier of a transmitter. If you do not select this option, A9155
allocates scrambling codes independently for each carrier.
5. Click Run. A9155 begins the process of allocating scrambling codes.
Once A9155 has finished allocating scrambling codes, the codes are visible under Results. A9155 only displays
newly allocated scrambling codes.

- Site: The name of the base station.
- Cell: The name of the cell.
- Code: The primary scrambling code allocated to the cell.
Note: If the set constraints make it impossible to allocate scrambling codes to one or more cells,
A9155 will post an error message in the Event Viewer window.
6. Click Commit. The primary scrambling codes are committed to the cells.
Note: You can save automatic scrambling code allocation parameters in a user configuration. For
information on saving automatic scrambling code allocation parameters in a user configura-
tion, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 71.
Tips:
If you need to allocate scrambling codes to the cells on a single transmitter, you can allocate them
automatically by selecting Allocate Scrambling Codes from the transmitters context menu.
If you need to allocate scrambling codes to all the cells on group of transmitters, you can allocate
them automatically by selecting Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Automatic Allocation
from the transmitter groups context menu.
Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells Manually
When you allocate scrambling codes to a large number of cells, it is easiest to let A9155 allocate scrambling codes auto-
matically, as described in "Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to UMTS Cells" on page 376. However, if you want
to add a primary scrambling code to one cell or to modify the primary scrambling code of a cell, you can do it by accessing
the properties of the cell.
To allocate a scrambling code to a UMTS cell manually:
1. On the map, right-click the transmitter to whose cell you want to allocate a scrambling code. The context menu
appears.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 377

A9155 User Manual

4. Enter a Primary Scrambling Code in the cells column.
5. Click OK.
6.2.12.5 Checking the Consistency of the Scrambling Code Plan

Once you have completed allocating scrambling codes, you can verify whether the allocated scrambling codes respect the
specified constraints by performing an audit of the plan. The scrambling code audit also enables you to check for incon-
sistencies if you have made some manual changes to the allocation plan.
To perform an audit of the allocation plan:
3. Select Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Audit. The Code and Cluster Audit dialogue appears.
4. In the Code and Cluster Audit dialogue, select the allocation criteria that you want to check:
- No. of codes per cluster: Enter the number of scrambling codes per cluster.
- Neighbours: If you select the Neighbours check box, A9155 will check that no cell has the same scrambling
code as any of its neighbours. The report will list any cell that does have the same scrambling code as one of
its neighbours.
- Second Order Neighbours: If you select the Second Order Neighbours check box, A9155 will check that
no cell has the same scrambling code as any of the neighbours of its neighbours. The report will list any cell
that does have the same scrambling code as one of the neighbours of its neighbours.
- Neighbours in different clusters: If you select the Neighbours in different clusters check box, A9155 will
check that neighbour cells have scrambling codes from different clusters. The report will list any neighbour
cells that does have scrambling codes from the same cluster.
- Domain Compliance: If you select the Domain Compliance check box, A9155 will check if allocated scram-
bling codes belong to domains assigned to cells. The report will list any cells with scrambling codes that do
not belong to domains assigned to the cell.
- Site Domains Not Empty: If you select the Site Domains Not Empty check box, A9155 will check for and
list base stations for which the allocation domain (i.e., the list of possible scrambling codes, with respect to the
configured allocation constraints) is empty.
- One Cluster per Site: If you select the One Cluster per Site check box, A9155 will check for and list base
stations whose cells have scrambling codes coming from more than one cluster.
- Distance: If you select the Distance check box and set a reuse distance, A9155 will check for and list cells
that do not respect this code reuse distance.
- Exceptional Pairs: If you select the Exceptional Pairs check box, A9155 will check for and display pairs of
cells that are listed as exceptional pairs but still use the same scrambling code.
5. Click OK. A9155 displays the results of the audit in a text file called CodeCheck.txt, which it opens at the end of
the audit. For each selected criterion, A9155 gives the number of detected inconsistencies and details each of
them.
6.2.12.6 Displaying the Allocation of Scrambling Codes

Once you have completed allocating scrambling codes, you can verify several aspects of scrambling code allocation. You
have several options for displaying scrambling codes:
"Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 378
"Displaying Scrambling Code Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 379
"Grouping Transmitters by Scrambling Code" on page 379
"Displaying the Scrambling Code Allocation Histogram" on page 380
"Making a Scrambling Code Interference Zone Prediction" on page 380.
"Making a Scrambling Code Interference Analysis" on page 381
Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation
In A9155, you can search for scrambling codes and scrambling code groups using the Search Tool. Results are displayed
in the map window in red.
If you have already calculated and displayed a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best server, with the results
displayed by transmitter, the search results will be displayed by transmitter coverage. Scrambling codes and scrambling
code groups and any potential problems will then be clearly visible. For information on coverage predictions by transmitter,
see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 340.
To find scrambling codes or scrambling code groups using the Search Tool:
1. Create, calculate, and display a coverage prediction by transmitter. For information on coverage predictions by
transmitter, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 340.
The Search Tool window is a docking window. For information on docking windows, see "Docking or Floating an
A9155 Window" on page 26.
3. You can search either for a specific scrambling code or scrambling code group:
378 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To search for a scrambling code:
a. Select Scrambling Code.

b. Enter a scrambling code in the text box.
To search for a scrambling code group:
a. Select SC Group.
b. Select a scrambling code group from the list.
4. Select the carrier you wish to search on from the For the Carrier list, or select "(All)" to search for the scrambling
code or scrambling code group in all carriers.
5. Click Search. Transmitters with cells matching the search criteria are displayed in red. Transmitters that do not
match the search criteria are displayed in grey.
Displaying Scrambling Code Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings
You can use the display characteristics of transmitters to display scrambling code-related information.
To display scrambling code-related information on the map:
- Primary scrambling code: To display the primary scrambling code of a transmitters cell, select "Discrete
values" as the Display Type and "Cells: Primary scrambling code" as the Field.
- Ranges of primary scrambling codes: To display ranges of primary scrambling codes, select "Value inter-
vals" as the Display Type and "Cells: Primary scrambling code" as the Field.
- Scrambling code domain: To display the scrambling code domain of a transmitters cell, select "Discrete
values" as the Display Type and "Cells: Scrambling code domain" as the Field.
- Primary scrambling code: To display the primary scrambling code of a transmitters cell in the transmitter
label or tooltip, "Cells: Primary scrambling code" from the Label or Tip Text list.
- Scrambling code domain: To display the primary scrambling code domain of a transmitters cell in the trans-
mitter label or tooltip, "Cells: Scrambling code domain" from the Label or Tip Text list.
- Scrambling code reuse distance: To display the scrambling code reuse distance of a transmitters cell in the
transmitter label or tooltip, "Cells: SC reuse distance" from the Label or Tip Text list.
5. Click OK.
Grouping Transmitters by Scrambling Code
You can group transmitters on the Data tab of the Explorer window by their primary scrambling code, their scrambling
code domain, or by their scrambling code reuse distance.
To group transmitters by scrambling code:
5. Under Available Fields, scroll down to the Cell section.
6. Select the parameter you want to group transmitters by:
- Scrambling code domain
- Primary scrambling code
- SC reuse distance
will be grouped.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 379

A9155 User Manual
to be grouped:

Note: If a transmitter has more than one cell, A9155 cannot arrange the transmitter by cell. Trans-
mitters that cannot be grouped by cell are arranged in a separate folder under the Trans-
mitters folder.
Displaying the Scrambling Code Allocation Histogram
You can use a histogram to analyse the use of allocated scrambling codes in a network. The histogram represents the
scrambling codes or scrambling code clusters as a function of the frequency of their use.
To display the scrambling code histogram:
3. Select Cells > Primary Scrambling Codes > Scrambling Code Distribution. The Distribution Histograms
dialogue appears.
Each bar represents a scrambling code or a cluster, its height depending on the frequency of its use.
4. Select Scrambling codes to display scrambling code use and Clusters to display scrambling code cluster use.
5. Move the pointer over the histogram to display the frequency of use of each scrambling code or cluster. The results
are highlighted simultaneously in the Detailed Results list.
Making a Scrambling Code Interference Zone Prediction
You can make a scrambling code interference zone prediction to view areas covered by cells using the same scrambling
code. A9155 checks on each pixel whether the best server and other servers satisfying the conditions to enter the user
active set have the same scrambling code. If so, A9155 considers that there is scrambling code interference.
To make a scrambling code interference zone prediction:
4. Select Scrambling Zone Interference Zones and click OK.
On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the scrambling code interference zone
6. Click the Condition tab.

properties.
If you want the scrambling code interference zone prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadow-
ing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.
class.

For a scrambling code interference zone prediction, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field
"Transmitter" is selected by default. Each pixel where there is scrambling code interference is displayed with the
same colour as that defined for the interfered transmitter. In the Explorer window, the coverage prediction results
are first arranged by interfered transmitter and then by interferer. For information on defining display properties,
see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
380 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- The number of interferers for each transmitter: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Number
of interferers per transmitter" as the Field. In the Explorer window, the coverage prediction results are
arranged by interfered transmitter.
- The total number of interferers on one pixel: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Number of
interferers" as the Field. In the Explorer window, the coverage prediction results are arranged according to
the number of interferers.
8. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the scrambling code interference zone predic-
tion. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.
Making a Scrambling Code Interference Analysis
The SC Interference tab of the Point Analysis window gives you information on reception for any point on the map where
there is scrambling code interference. Scrambling code interference occurs when the best server and other servers satis-
fying the conditions to enter the user active set have the same scrambling code. When there is scrambling code interfer-
ence, A9155 displays the pilot quality (EcI0) received from interfered and interferer transmitters .
The analysis is based on the UL load percentage and the DL total power of each cell. The analysis is provided for a user-
definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility, and a service.
You can make a scrambling code interference analysis to verify a scrambling code interference zone prediction. In this
case, before you make the scrambling code interference analysis, ensure the coverage prediction you want to use in the
scrambling code interference analysis is displayed on the map.
To make a scrambling code interference analysis:
1. Click the Point Analysis button ( ) on the toolbar. The Point Analysis window appears.
2. Click the SC Interference tab.
3. At the top of the SC Interference tab, select "None" from Simulation.
4. If you are making a scrambling code interference analysis to verify a coverage prediction, you can recreate the
conditions of the coverage prediction:
a. Select the same Terminal, Service, and Mobility studied in the coverage prediction.
logue appears.
Note: If you are making a scrambling code interference analysis to make a prediction on a defined
point, you can use the instructions in this step to define a user.
5. Move the pointer over the map to make a scrambling code interference analysis for the current location of the
pointer.

A UMTS network automatically regulates power on both uplink and downlink with the objective of minimising interference
and maximising network capacity. In the case of HSDPA, the network uses A-DCH power control in the uplink and down-
link and a fast link adaptation (in other words, the selection of an HSDPA bearer) in the downlink. A9155 can simulate
these network regulation mechanisms, thereby enabling you to study the capacity of the UMTS network.
In A9155, a simulation is based on a realistic distribution of R99 and HSDPA users at a given point in time. The distribution
of users at a given moment is referred to as a snapshot. Based on this snapshot, A9155 calculates various network param-
eters such as the active set for each mobile, the required power of the mobile, the total DL power and DL throughput per
cell, and the UL load per cell. Simulations are calculated in an iterative fashion.
When several simulations are performed at the same time using the same traffic information, the distribution of users will
be different, according to a Poisson distribution. Consequently you can have variations in user distribution from one snap-
shot to another.
To create snapshots, services and users must be modelled. As well, certain traffic information in the form of traffic maps
must be provided. Once services and users have been modelled and traffic maps have been created, you can make simu-
lations of the network traffic.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 381

A9155 User Manual

"Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations" on page 389
"Analysing the Results of a Simulation" on page 405.

The first step in making a simulation is defining how the network is used. In A9155, this is accomplished by creating all of
the parameters of network use, in terms of services, users, and equipment used.
R99 radio bearers: Bearer services are used by the network for carrying information. The R99 Radio Bearer table
lists all the available radio bearers. You can create new R99 radio bearers and modify existing ones by using the
R99 Radio Bearer table. For information on defining R99 radio bearers, see "Defining R99 Radio Bearers" on
page 418.
These services can be either circuit-switched or packet-switched. For information on modelling end-user services,
see "Modelling Services" on page 351.
Mobility type: In UMTS, information about receiver mobility is important to efficiently manage the active set: a
mobile used by a driver moving quickly or a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same transmitters.
EcI0 requirements and EbNt targets per radio bearer and per link (uplink or downlink) are largely dependent on
mobile speed. For information on creating a mobility type, see "Creating a Mobility Type" on page 352.
Terminals: In UMTS, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone,
a PDA, or a cars on-board navigation device. For information on creating a terminal, see "Modelling Terminals"
on page 353.

A9155 provides four types of traffic maps for UMTS projects. These maps can be used for the different types of traffic data
sources as follows:
Live traffic data from the OMC: Traffic maps per transmitter and per service, where traffic is spread over the
best server coverage area of each transmitter and each coverage area is assigned either the total throughput
demand or the number of active users or Erlangs. For more information, see "Live Traffic Data From the OMC" on
carries densities of user profiles and mobility types, and traffic raster maps based on environments, where
each pixel has an environment class assigned. For more information, see "Marketing-based Traffic Data" on
page 383, "Importing a User Profile Based Traffic Map" on page 385, and "Importing an Environment Class Based
Population-based traffic data: Traffic raster maps based on user densities, where each pixel has an actual
user density assigned. For more information, see "Population-based Traffic Data" on page 388 and "Importing a
Traffic Density Map" on page 388.

The OMC (Operations and Maintenance Centre) collects data from all the cells in a network. This includes, for example,
the number of active users or Erlangs in each cell and the traffic characteristics related to different services. You can use
this data to create traffic maps containing either the number of active users in each cell or Erlangs in each cell for circuit-
switched services or the data transfer characteristics of all the services in each cell.

You can input either the total throughput demand or the number of active users or Erlangs for each sector in this type of
traffic map. A coverage prediction by transmitter is required to create this traffic map. If you do not already have a coverage
prediction by transmitter in your document, you must create and calculate it. For more information, see "Making a Cover-
age Prediction by Transmitter" on page 340.
382 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

4. Select Map based on Transmitters and Services (Throughputs) or Map based on Transmitters and Services
(# Active Users) or Map based on Transmitters and Services (Erlangs).
5. Click the Create Map button. The Traffic per Transmitter dialogue appears.
A9155 document.
7. Enter the data required in the Traffic per Transmitter dialogue:
- If you are creating a Map based on Transmitters and Services (Throughputs), enter the throughput
demands in the uplink and downlink for each sector and for each listed service.
- If you are creating a Map based on Transmitters and Services (# Active Users), enter the active users in
the uplink and downlink for each sector and for each listed service.
- If you are creating a Map based on Transmitters and Services (Erlangs), enter Erlangs, i.e. the total
number of users, active and inactive, for each sector and for each service. This map is relevant for circuit-
switched services, that currently exist in the document, only. If you create new circuit switched services, the
traffic map will not take them into account automatically.
8. Click OK. The Cell Traffic Map Properties dialogue appears.

equal 100.
equal 100.
11. Under Clutter Distribution, for each clutter class, enter:
- A weight to spread the traffic over the vector.
- The percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during Monte-Carlo simu-
lations.
Live traffic per sector maps if you add or remove a base station. You must first recalculate the coverage prediction by trans-
mitter. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 340. Once you have recalcu-
lated the coverage prediction, you can update the traffic map.
5. Click OK. The Traffic Map Properties dialogue appears.


which are in turn defined by the terminal used, the calls per hour, and duration (for circuit-switched calls) or uplink and
downlink volume (for packet-switched calls).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 383

A9155 User Manual

web browsing.
To create or modify a user profile:

- Service: Select a service from the list. For information on services, see "Modelling Services" on page 351.
- Terminal: Select a terminal from the list. For information on terminals, see "Modelling Terminals" on page 353.
- Calls/Hour: For circuit-switched services, enter the average number of calls per hour for the service. The calls
For packet-switched services, the Calls/Hour value is defined as the number of sessions per hour. A session
not by the time.
- UL Volume: For packet-switched services, enter the average uplink volume per session in kilobytes.
can assign a weight to each clutter class for each environment class. You can also specify the percentage of indoor
subscribers for each clutter class. In a Monte-Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties)
will be added to the indoor users path loss.
To create or modify a UMTS environment:

6. Enter a Name for the new UMTS environment.
bination that this UMTS environment will describe:
384 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Wk Sk
N k = N Area --------------------------

Wi Si
i
where:

10. If you wish you can specify a percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. During a Monte-Carlo simu-
lation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss.


9. Click Import. A9155 imports the traffic map. The traffic maps properties dialogue appears.
entire map.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 385

A9155 User Manual
Figure 6.33: Traffic map properties dialogue - Traffic tab
select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a user profile from the UMTS Parame-
ters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the user profile in the Choice column.
the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a mobility type from the UMTS Parameters
folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the mobility type in the Choice column.
be exactly the same as the corresponding names in the UMTS Parameters folder of the
Data tab. If the imported user profile or mobility does not match, A9155 will display a warn-
ing.
Wk Sk
N k = N Area --------------------------

Wi Si
i
where:


To create a traffic map based on environment classes:
386 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


the Code column.
The environments available are those available in the Environments folder, under UMTS Parameters on the
Data tab of the Explorer window. For more information, see "Modelling Environments" on page 384.
on page 33.

Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.
Draw Map Delete Map

You can display the statistics of an environment class-based traffic map. A9155 provides absolute (surface) and relative
(percentage of the surface) statistics on the focus zone for each environment class. If you do not have a focus zone
appears.
Si
Sk
k
5. Click Close.
clutter class.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 387

A9155 User Manual

Population-based traffic data can be based on population statistics and user densities can be calculated from the density
of inhabitants. In the traffic maps based on population statistics, you can enter the number of active or potential users per

mobility type, a service, and percentage of indoor users as defined in the Traffic tab of the traffic density maps properties
dialogue.
4. Select Map based on Traffic Densities.

11. Select whether the users are active in the Uplink/Downlink, only in the Downlink, or only in the Uplink.
equal 100.
equal 100.
100.
15. Under Clutter Distribution, enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users.
An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. You do not have to define
a clutter weighting for traffic density maps because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel.

your 2G network packet and circuit service traffic, and then import these maps as traffic density maps into your UMTS
document. These maps can then be used in traffic simulations like any other type of map.
To import a 2G traffic map into a UMTS document:
3. Import the traffic exported in step 2 to your UMTS document as a traffic density map. For more information on
importing traffic density maps, see "Importing a Traffic Density Map" on page 388.
388 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


Grid, or Vertical Mapper format. The exported traffic map can then be imported as a traffic density map.
minal.
- Direction: Select one of the following:
- Uplink/Downlink: Select Uplink/Downlink to export only active mobiles with both uplink and downlink
traffic.
- Downlink: Select Downlink to export mobiles with downlink traffic only.
- Uplink: Select Uplink to export mobiles with uplink traffic only.
- the direction whether you want to cumulate traffic on the uplink and the downlink, only on the uplink, or
only on the downlink.
cumulated traffic.
6.3.3 Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations

Once you have modelled the network services and users and have created traffic maps, you can create simulations. The
simulation process consists of two steps:
1. Obtaining a realistic user distribution: A9155 generates a user distribution using a Monte-Carlo algorithm; this
user distribution is based on the traffic database and traffic maps and is weighted by a Poisson distribution
between simulations of a same group.
Each user is assigned a service, a mobility type, and an activity status by random trial, according to a probability
law that uses the traffic database.
The user activity status is an important output of the random trial and has direct consequences on the next step
of the simulation and on the network interferences. A user may be either active or inactive. Both active and inactive
users consume radio resources and create interference.
Then, A9155 randomly assigns a shadowing error to each user using the probability distribution that describes the
shadowing effect.
Finally, another random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone (possibly according to the
clutter weighting and the indoor ratio per clutter class).
2. Modelling network power control: A9155 uses a power control algorithm for R99 server users, and an algorithm
mixing A-DPCH power control and fast link adaptation for HSDPA users and an additional loop modelling noise
rise scheduling for HSUPA users. The power control simulation algorithm is described in "The Power Control Sim-
ulation Algorithm" on page 389.
6.3.3.1 The Power Control Simulation Algorithm

The power control algorithm (see Figure 6.35) simulates the way a UMTS network regulates itself by using uplink and
downlink power controls in order to minimize interference and maximize capacity. HSDPA users are linked to the A-DPCH
radio bearer (an R99 radio bearer). Therefore, the network uses a A-DPCH power control on UL and DL and then it
performs fast link adaptation on DL in order to select an HSDPA radio bearer. For HSUPA users, the network first uses a
E-DPCCH/A-DPCH power control on UL and DL, checks that there is an HSDPA connection on downlink and then carries
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 389

A9155 User Manual
out noise rise scheduling in order to select an HSUPA radio bearer on uplink. A9155 simulates these network regulation
mechanisms for each user distribution. During each iteration of the algorithm, all the mobiles (R99, HSDPA, and HSUPA
service users) selected during the user distribution generation attempt to connect one by one to network transmitters. The
process is repeated until the network is balanced, i.e., until the convergence criteria (on UL and DL) are satisfied.
Initialisation
R99 part
Mi Best Server Determination
Mi Active Set Determination
For HSDPA users, this part of UL Power Control

the algorithm is performed for For each R99, HSDPA
the A-DPCH bearer (R99 bearer) and HSUPA mobile, Mi
For HSUPA users, this part is
performed for the E-DPCCH/A-
DPCH bearer (R99 bearer) DL Power Control
UL and DL Interference Update
Congestion and Radio Resource Control
HSDPA part
For each HSDPA and

HSUPA mobile, Mi Fast Link Adaptation
Mobile Scheduling
Radio Resource Control
HSUPA part
Admission Control
For each HSUPA

mobile, Mi
Noise Rise Scheduling
Radio Resource Control
Convergence Study
Figure 6.35: Schematic view of simulation algorithm
As shown in Figure 6.35, the simulation algorithm is divided in three parts. All users are evaluated by the R99 part of the
algorithm. HSDPA and HSUPA users, unless they have been rejected during the R99 part of the algorithm, are then eval-
uated by the HSDPA part of the algorithm. Finally, HSUPA users, unless they have been rejected during the R99 or
HSDPA parts of the algorithm, are then evaluated by the HSUPA part of the algorithm.
Description of the R99 Portion of the Simulation
The R99 part of the algorithm simulates power control, congestion and radio resource control performed for R99 bearers
for both R99, HSDPA and HSUPA users. A9155 considers each user in the order established during the generation of the
user distribution, determines his best server and his active set. A9155 first calculates the required terminal power in order
to reach the EbNt threshold requested by the R99 bearer on UL, followed by the required traffic channel power in order
to reach the EbNt threshold requested by the R99 bearer on DL. After calculating power control, A9155 updates the cell
load parameters. A9155 then carries out congestion and radio resource control, verifying the cell UL load, the total power
transmitted by the cell, the number of channel elements and OVSF codes consumed by the cell.
At this point, R99, HSDPA and HSUPA users can be either connected or rejected. They are rejected if:
The signal quality is not sufficient:
- On the downlink, the pilot quality is not high enough (no cell in the user active set): status is "EcI0 pilot < EcI0
min. pilot"
- On the downlink, there is not enough reception on traffic channel: the status is "Ptch > Ptch max"
- On the uplink, there is not enough power to transmit: the status is "Pmob > Pmob max"
Even if constraints above are respected, the network may be saturated:
- The maximum uplink load factor is exceeded (at admission or congestion): the status is either "Admission
rejection" or "UL load saturation"
- There are not enough channel elements on site: the status is "channel element saturation"
- There is not enough power for cells: the status is "DL load saturation"
- There are no more OVSF codes available: the status is "code saturation"
Description of the HSDPA Portion of the Simulation
In the HSDPA part, A9155 processes all HSDPA bearer users, i.e., HSDPA and HSUPA users. The HSDPA part of the
algorithm simulates fast link adaptation, the scheduling of HSDPA users, and radio resource control on downlink. Two fast
link adaptations are done, one before mobile scheduling and one after.
390 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

HSDPA bearer selection is based on look-up tables, available by double-clicking the corresponding entry in the Reception
Equipment table, under the Terminals context menu and it depends on reported CQI, UE and cell capabilities as detailed
below.
Figure 6.36: HSDPA bearer selection
The HSDPA and HS-SCCH powers of a cell are evaluated before calculating HS-PDSCH EcNt. The HSDPA power (the
power dedicated to HS-SCCH and HS-PDSCH of HSDPA bearer users) of a cell can be either fixed (statically allocated)
or dynamically allocated. If it is dynamically allocated, the power allocated to HSDPA depends on how much power is
required to serve R99 traffic. In other words, the power available after all common channels (including the power for down-
link HSUPA channels) and all R99 traffic have been served is allocated to HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA bearer
users. Similarly, the power per HS-SCCH can be either fixed or dynamically allocated in order to attain the HS-SCCH
EcNt threshold. Using the HS-SCCH and HSDPA powers, A9155 evaluates the HS-PDSCH power (the difference
between the HSDPA power and the HS-SCCH power), calculates the HS-PDSCH EcNt and, from that, the corresponding
CQI (from the graph CQI=f(HS-PDSCH EcNt) defined for the terminal reception equipment and the user mobility). Then,
A9155 selects the HSDPA bearer associated to this CQI (in the table Best Bearer=f(HS-PDSCH CQI) defined for the termi-
nal reception equipment and the user mobility) and compatible with the user equipment and cell capabilities.
Before mobile scheduling, each user is processed as if he is the only user in the cell. This means that A9155 determines
the HSDPA bearer for each HSDPA and HSUPA user by considering for each the entire HSDPA power available of the
cell.
During scheduling, cell radio resources are shared between HSDPA and HSUPA users by the scheduler. The scheduler
simultaneously manages the maximum number of users within each cell and ranks them according to the selected sched-
uling technique:
Max C/I: "n" HSDPA users (where "n" corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined) are sched-
uled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). Then, they are sorted in descending order by
the channel quality indicator (CQI).
Round Robin: HSDPA users are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order).
Proportional Fair: "n" HSDPA users (where "n" corresponds to the maximum number of HSDPA users defined)
are scheduled in the same order as in the simulation (i.e., in random order). Then, they are sorted in descending
order according to a random parameter which corresponds to a combination of the user rank in the simulation and
the channel quality indicator (CQI).
After mobile scheduling, A9155 carries out a second fast link adaptation. HSDPA and HSUPA users are processed in the
order defined by the scheduler and the cells HSDPA power is shared among them.
Then, A9155 checks to see if enough codes are available for the HSDPA bearer assigned to the user (taking into account
the maximum number of OVSF codes defined for the cell). If not, A9155 allocates a lower HSDPA bearer ("downgrading")
which needs fewer OVSF codes. If no OVSF codes are available, the user is delayed.
At this point, HSDPA bearer users can be connected, rejected, or delayed. They are rejected if the maximum number of
HSDPA users per cell is exceeded (status is "HSDPA scheduler saturation") and delayed if:
They cannot obtain the lower HSDPA bearer (bearer index 5): the status is "HSDPA Delayed"
The HS-SCCH signal quality is not sufficient: the status is "HSDPA Delayed"
There are no more HS-SCCH channels available: the status is "HSDPA Delayed"
There are no more OVSF codes available: the status is "HSDPA Delayed"
Description of the HSUPA Portion of the Simulation
In the HSUPA part, A9155 processes all the HSUPA users who are connected to an HSDPA bearer or were delayed in
the previous step. It considers each user in the order established during the generation of the user distribution without
exceeding the maximum number of HSUPA users within each cell. The HSUPA part of the algorithm simulates an admis-
sion control on these HSUPA users followed by noise rise scheduling. The happy bit mechanism is modelled as well and
radio resource control is performed at the end of the HSUPA part of the simulation.
A9155 first selects a list of HSUPA bearers that are compatible with the user equipment capabilities for each HSUPA user.
Then, during admission control, it checks that the lowest compatible bearer in terms of the required E-DPDCH EcNt does
not require a terminal power higher than the maximum terminal power allowed.
Then, A9155 begins noise rise scheduling. The noise rise scheduling algorithm attempts to evenly share the remaining
cell load between the users admitted in admission control; in terms of HSUPA, each user is allocated a right to produce
interference. The remaining cell load factor on uplink depends on the maximum load factor allowed on uplink and how
much uplink load is produced by the served R99 traffic. From this value, A9155 calculates the maximum E-DPDCH EcNt
allowed and can select an HSUPA bearer. The HSUPA bearer is selected based on the values in a look-up table, and
depends on the maximum E-DPDCH EcNt allowed and on UE capabilities.
Note: You can open the HSUPA Bearer Selection table by right-clicking Terminals on the Data
tab of the Explorer window and selecting Reception Equipment. Then, double-clicking the
entry in the Reception Equipment table opens the Properties dialogue from which you
can select the HSUPA Bearer Selection tab.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 391

A9155 User Manual
A9155 selects the best HSUPA bearer from the HSUPA compatible bearers, in other words, the HSUPA bearer with the
highest potential throughput where the required E-DPDCH Ec/Nt is lower than the maximum E-DPDCH EcNt allowed and
the required terminal power is lower than the maximum terminal power. In this section, the potential throughput refers to
the ratio between the RLC peak rate and the number of retransmissions. When several HSUPA bearers are available,
A9155 selects the one with the lowest required E-DPDCH EcNt.
Then, A9155 checks that each user has obtained the average requested rate (defined in the properties of the service). A
user is considered as "happy" if the RLC peak rate provided by the HSUPA bearer exceeds the average requested rate
and "unhappy" if not. A9155 collects the unused load of "happy" users and redistributes it among the "unhappy" users.
This process is repeated until there is no more available load.
Finally, A9155 carries out radio resource control, verifying the uplink load of all the cells and performs a new distribution
of the load if cells are overloaded.
At this point, HSUPA users can be either connected, or rejected. They are rejected if:
The maximum number of HSUPA users per cell is exceeded (the status is "HSUPA scheduler saturation")
The terminal power required to obtain the lowest compatible HSUPA bearer exceeds the maximum terminal power
in the admission control (the status is "HSUPA Admission Rejection").
Bearer Downgrading
If you select the option "Rate Downgrading," when creating a simulation, R99, HSDPA and HSUPA service users can be
downgraded under certain circumstances. When the downgrading is allowed, A9155 does not reject R99, HSDPA and
HSUPA users directly; it downgrades them beforehand.
The R99 to R99 bearer downgrading occurs when:
The cell resources are insufficient when the user is admitted
- The maximum uplink load factor is exceeded
The cell resources are insufficient during congestion control
- The maximum uplink load factor is exceeded
- There is not enough power for cells
- There are not enough channel elements on the site
- There are no more OVSF codes available
The user maximum connection power is exceeded during power control:
- On the downlink, the maximum traffic channel power is exceeded
- On the uplink, the maximum terminal power is exceeded
For all these reasons, the users R99 bearer will be downgraded to another R99 bearer of the same type (same traffic
class). Upon admission and during power control, downgrading is only performed on the user who causes the problem.
During congestion control, the problem is at the cell level and therefore, downgrading is performed on several users
according to their service priority. Users with the lowest priority services will be the first to be downgraded.
If R99 bearer downgrading does not fix the problem, the user will be rejected.
For an HSDPA bearer user, downgrading is triggered upon admission (into the R99 portion) when the best serving cell
does not support HSDPA traffic. When this happens, the HSDPA bearer user will not be able to get an HSDPA bearer and
will be downgraded to an R99 bearer of the same type as the A-DPCH bearer and the user will be processed as an R99
user.
For an HSUPA bearer user, downgrading is triggered upon admission (into the R99 portion) when the best serving cell
does not support HSUPA traffic. When this happens, the HSUPA bearer user will not be able to get an HSUPA bearer and
will be downgraded to an R99 bearer of the same type as the E-DPCCH/A-DPCH bearer and the user will be processed
as an R99 user.
6.3.3.2 Creating Simulations

In A9155, simulations enable you to model UMTS HSPA network regulation mechanisms in order to minimise interference
and maximise capacity.
You can create one simulation or a group of simulations that will be performed in sequence.
To create a simulation or a group of simulations:
2. Right-click the UMTS Simulations folder. The context menu appears.
3. Select New from the context menu. The properties dialogue for a new simulation or group of simulations appears.
4. On the General tab of the dialogue, enter a Name and Comments for this simulation or group of simulations.
5. Under Execution on the General tab, you can set the following parameters:
- Number of Simulations: Enter the number of simulations to be carried out. All simulations created at the
same time are grouped together in a folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window.
- Execute Later: If you select the Execute Later check box, the simulation will not be carried out until you click
the Calculate button ( ). If the Execute Later check box is not selected, the simulation will be carried out
as soon as you click OK and close the dialogue.
392 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: Execute Later enables you to automatically calculate UMTS coverage predictions after
simulations with no intermediary step by creating your simulations, creating your predic-
tions, and then clicking the Calculate button ( ).
- Information to retain: You can select the level of detail that will be available in the output:
- Only the average simulation and statistics: None of the individual simulations are displayed or availa-
ble in the group. Only an average of all simulations and statistics is available.
Note: Some calculation and display options available for prediction studies are not available when
the option "Only the average simulation and statistics" is selected.
- No information about mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. For each of them, a
properties window containing simulation output, divided among four tabs Statistics, Sites, Cells, and
Initial conditions is available.
- Standard information about mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. The properties
window for each simulation contains an additional tab with output related to mobiles.
- Detailed information about mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. The properties
window for each simulation contains additional mobile-related output on the Mobiles and Mobiles (Shad-
owing values) tabs.
Tip: When you are working on very large radio-planning projects, you can reduce memory con-
sumption by selecting Only the average simulation and statistics under Information to
retain.
6. Under Cell Load Constraints on the General tab, you can set the constraints that A9155 must respect during the
simulation:
- Number of Channel Elements: Select the Number of Channel Elements check box if you want A9155 to
respect the number of channel elements defined for each site.
- Number of Codes: Select the Number of Codes check box if you want A9155 to respect the number of
OVSF codes available each cell.
- UL Load Factor: If you want the UL load factor to be considered in the simulation, select the UL Load Factor
check box.
- Max UL Load Factor: If you want to enter a global value for the maximum uplink cell load factor, click the
button ( ) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum uplink cell load factor. If
you want to use the maximum uplink cell load factor as defined in the properties for each cell, click the button
( ) beside the box and select Defined per Cell.
- DL Load (% Max Power): If you want the DL load to be considered in the simulation, select the DL Load (%
Max Power) check box and enter a maximum downlink cell load in the Max DL Load box.
- Max DL Load (% Max Power): If you want to enter a global value for the maximum downlink cell load, as a
percentage of the maximum power, click the button ( ) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then,
enter a maximum downlink cell load, as a percentage of the maximum power. If you want to use the maximum
downlink cell load factor as defined in the properties for each cell, click the button ( ) beside the box and
select Defined per Cell.
7. Under Bearer Negotiation on the General tab, check the Rate Downgrading check box if you want to permit
bearer downgrading during the simulation. When a constraint is not respected, user bearers are downgraded. If
the constraint is still not satisfied after downgrading, users are rejected. If downgrading is not selected, users will
be rejected immediately, starting with users with the lowest service priority, if a constraint can not be respected.
Note: You can prevent downgrading for certain services by setting the service priority to 100. In
this case, users with the service will not be downgraded; if a constraint is not respected,
they will be rejected immediately.
8. On the Source Traffic tab, enter the following:

ers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
- Select Traffic Maps to Be Used: Select the traffic maps you want to use for the simulation.
to make a simulation on a specific type of traffic map, you must ensure that you select only traffic maps of the
same type. For information on the types of traffic maps, see "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 382.
9. Click the Advanced tab.

10. Under Generator Initialisation, enter an integer as the generator initialisation value. If you enter "0", the default,
the user and shadowing error distribution will be random. If you enter any other integer, the same user and shad-
owing error distribution will be used for any simulation using the same generator initialisation value.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 393

A9155 User Manual
Tip: Using the same generated user and shadowing error distribution for several simulations can
be useful when you want to compare the results of several simulations where only one
parameter changes.
11. Under Convergence, enter the following parameters:

- Max Number of Iterations: Enter the maximum number of iterations that A9155 should run to make conver-
gence.
- UL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interference and connected users on
the uplink that must be reached between two iterations.
- DL Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of interference and connected users on
the downlink that must be reached between two iterations.
12. Click OK. A9155 immediately begins the simulation unless you selected the Execute Later check box on the Gen-
eral tab.
All simulations created at the same time are grouped together in a folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window. You can
now use the completed simulations for specific UMTS and HSDPA coverage predictions (see "Making Coverage Predic-
tions Using Simulation Results" on page 406) or for an AS analysis using the Point Analysis window (see "Making an AS
Analysis of Simulation Results" on page 406).
6.3.3.3 Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map

A9155 enables you to display on the map the distribution of the traffic generated by all simulations according to different
parameters. You can, for example, display the traffic according to service, activity status, pilot signal strength, or soft
handover gain.
You can set the display of the traffic distribution according to discrete values and the select the value to be displayed. Or,
you can select the display of the traffic distribution according to value intervals, and then select the parameter and the
value intervals that are to be displayed. You can also define the colours of the icon and the icon itself.
For information on changing display characteristics, see "Defining the Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
In this section are the following examples of traffic distribution:
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Handover Status" on page 394
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status" on page 395
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Service" on page 395.
Tip: You can make the traffic distribution easier to see by hiding geo data and predictions. For
information, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
6.3.3.3.1 Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Handover Status

In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the handover status.
To display the traffic distribution by the handover status:
3. Select Properties from the context menu. The UMTS Simulations Properties dialogue appears.
4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "HO Status (Sites/No. Trans-
mitters Act. Set)" as the Field.
5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by handover status (see Figure 6.37).
Figure 6.37: Displaying the traffic distribution by handover status
394 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

6.3.3.3.2 Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status

In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the connection status.
To display the traffic distribution by the connection status:
4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Connection status" as the
Field.
5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by connection status (see Figure 6.38).
Figure 6.38: Displaying the traffic distribution by connection status
6.3.3.3.3 Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Service

In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by service.
To display the traffic distribution by service:
4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Service" as the Field.
5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by service (see Figure 6.39).
Figure 6.39: Displaying the traffic distribution by service
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 395

A9155 User Manual
6.3.3.4 Displaying the User Active Set on the Map

A9155 enables you to display on the map the active set for each user generated by a simulation.
To display the active set for a user:
On the map, click and hold the icon of the user whose best and second-best servers you want to display.
The servers in the users active set are connected to the user with lines the same colour as the serving transmitter.
The best server is indicated with the number "1", the second-best with number "2" and so on. Figure 6.40 shows
a user with three servers in his active set.
Figure 6.40: The active set of a user
6.3.3.5 Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation

After you have created a simulation, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 392, you can display the results.
To access the results of a single simulation:
3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the folder of the simulation group containing the simulation whose results
you want to access.
4. Right-click the simulation. The context menu appears.
5. Select Properties from the context menu. The simulation properties dialogue appears.
One tab gives statistics of the results of the simulation. Other tabs in the simulation properties dialogue contain
simulation results as identified by the tab title. A final tab lists the initial conditions of the simulation. The amount
of detail available when you display the results depends on the level of detail you selected from the Information
to retain list on the General tab of the properties dialogue for the group of simulations. For more information on
the different options, see step 5. of "Creating Simulations" on page 392.
The Statistics tab: The Statistics tab contains the following two sections:
- Request: Under Request, you will find data on the connection requests:
- A9155 calculates the total number of users who try to connect. This number is the result of the first random
trial; power control has not yet finished. The result depends on the traffic description and cartography.
- During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service and an activity status. The number of users
per activity status and the UL and DL rates that all users could theoretically generate are provided.
- The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per activity status, and UL and DL
rates) is given.
- Results: Under Results, you will find data on the connection requests:
- The number of iterations that were run in order to converge.
- The number and the percentage of non-connected users is given along with the reason for rejection.
These figures include rejected and delayed users. These figures are determined at the end of the simula-
tion and depend on the network design.
- The number and percentage of R99 bearer users connected to a cell, the number of users per activity
status, and the UL and DL total rates they generate. These figures include R99 users as well as HSDPA
and HSUPA users (since all of them request an R99 bearer); they are determined in the R99 part of the
algorithm. These data are also given per service.
- The total number and the percentage of connected users with an HSDPA bearer, the number of users per
activity status, and the DL total rate that they generate. Both HSDPA and HSUPA users are considered
since they both request an HSDPA bearer.
- The total number of connected HSUPA users and the percentage of users with an HSUPA bearer, the
number of users per activity status, and the UL total rate they generate. Only HSUPA users are consid-
ered.
396 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

The Sites tab: The Sites tab contains the following information per site:
- Max No. of CEs (DL and UL): The maximum number of channel elements available on uplink and downlink
for R99 bearers requested by R99, HSDPA and HSUPA users.
- No. of CEs Used (DL and UL): The number of channel elements required on uplink and downlink for R99
bearers to handle the traffic of current simulation.
- No. CEs Due to SHO Overhead DL and UL: The number of extra channel elements due to soft handover,
on uplink and downlink.
- Carrier Selection: The carrier selection method defined on the site equipment.
- Overhead CEs/Cell Downlink and Uplink: The overhead channel elements per cell on the downlink and on
the uplink, defined on the site equipment.
- AS Restricted to Neighbours: Whether the active set is restricted to neighbours of the reference cell. This
option is selected on the site equipment.
- Rake Factor: The rake factor, defined on the site equipment, enables A9155 to model a rake receiver on
downlink.
- MUD Factor: The multi-user detection factor, defined on the site equipment, is used to decrease intra-cell
interference on uplink.
- Compressed Mode: Whether compressed mode is supported. This option is defined on the site equipment.
- Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps): The Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps).
- Instantaneous HSDPA MAC Throughput (kbps): The Instantaneous HSDPA MAC throughput (kbps).
- HSUPA Rate (kbps): The HSUPA peak rate in kbps.
- DL and UL Throughput for Each Service: The R99 throughput in kbitss for each service. The result is
detailed on the downlink and uplink only when relevant.
The Cells tab: The Cells tab contains the following information, per site, transmitter, and carrier:
- Max Power (dBm): The maximum power as defined in the cell properties.
- Pilot Power (dBm): The pilot power as defined in the cell properties.
- SCH power (dBm): The SCH power as defined in the cell properties.
- Other CCH power (dBm): The power of other common channels. It includes the other CCH power and the
DL HSUPA power as defined in the cell properties.
- Available HSDPA Power (dBm): The available HSDPA power as defined in the cell properties. This is the
power available for the HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA users. The value is either fixed by the user when
the HSDPA power is allocated statically, or by a simulation when the option HSDPA Power Dynamic Alloca-
tion is selected.
- AS Threshold (dB): The active set threshold as defined in cell properties
- Gain (dBi): The gain as defined in the antenna properties for that transmitter.
- Reception loss (dB): The reception loss as defined in the transmitter properties.
- Transmission loss (dB): The transmission loss as defined in the transmitter properties.
- BTS Noise Figure (dB): The BTS noise figure as defined in the transmitter properties
- Total Transmitted R99 Power (dBm): The total transmitted R99 power is the power transmitted by the cell
on common channels (Pilot, SCH, other CCH), HSUPA channels (E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH) and R99
traffic-dedicated channels.
- Total Transmitted Power (dBm): The total transmitted power of the cell is the sum of the total transmitted
R99 power and the available HSDPA power. If HSDPA power is allocated statically, this total transmitted
power must be lower than or equal to the maximum power. If HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the total
transmitted power equals the maximum power minus the power headroom. In other words, the HSDPA power
corresponds to the difference between the total transmitted power and the R99 transmitted power.
Note: When the constraint "DL load" is set and HSDPA power is statically allocated, the total
transmitted power cannot exceed the maximum DL load (defined either in the cell proper-
ties, or in the simulation). On the other hand, if HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the
control is carried out on the R99 transmitted power, which cannot exceed the maximum DL
load.
- UL Total Noise (dBm): The uplink total noise takes into account the total signal received at the transmitter on
a carrier from intra and extra-cell terminals using the same carrier and adjacent carriers (uplink total interfer-
ence) and the thermal noise.
- Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor that the cell can support. It is defined either in the
cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialogue.
- Max DL Load (% Used Power): The maximum percentage of power that the cell can use. It is defined either
in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialogue.
- UL load factor (%): The uplink cell load factor corresponds to the ratio between the uplink total interference
and the uplink total noise. If the constraint "UL load factor" has been selected, UL cell load factor is not allowed
to exceed the user-defined maximum UL load factor (either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation
dialogue).
- DL Load Factor (%): The DL load factor of the cell i corresponds to the ratio (DL average interference [due
to transmitter signals on the same and adjacent carriers] for terminals in the transmitter i area) (DL average
total noise [due to transmitter signals and to thermal noise of terminals] for terminals in the transmitter i area).
- UL and DL noise rise (dB): The uplink and downlink noise rises are calculated from uplink and downlink load
factors. These data indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget).
- DL R99 Load (% Power Used): The percentage of power used for R99 channels is determined by the total
transmitted R99 power-maximum power ratio (power stated in W). When the constraint "DL load" is set and
HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the DL R99 Load can not exceed the user-defined Max DL Load
(defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 397

A9155 User Manual
- Reuse factor (UL): The uplink reuse factor is the ratio between the uplink total interference and the intra-cell
interference.
- Reuse efficiency factor (UL): The uplink reuse efficiency factor is the reciprocal of the uplink reuse factor.
- Number of UL and DL radio links: The number of radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter
links on the same carrier. This data is calculated on uplink and on downlink and indicates the number of users
connected to the cell on uplink and downlink. Because of handover, a single user can use several radio links.
- Connection Success Rate (%): The connection success rate gives the ratio of connected users over the total
number of users in the cell.
- HSDPA Application Throughput (kbps): This is the net HSDPA throughput without coding (redundancy,
overhead, addressing, etc.).
- Min. HSDPA RLC Peak Rate (kbps): The minimum HSDPA RLC peak rate corresponds to the lowest of RLC
peak rates obtained by HSDPA bearer users connected to the cell.
- Max HSDPA RLC Peak Rate (kbps): The maximum HSDPA RLC peak rate corresponds to the highest of
RLC peak rates obtained by HSDPA bearer users connected to the cell.
- Avg. Instantaneous HSDPA Throughput (kbps): The average instantaneous HSDPA rate (kbps) is the
average number of kbits per second that the cell supports on downlink to provide one connected user with an
HSDPA bearer.
- Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps): The instantaneous HSDPA rate (kbps) is the number of kbits per
second that the cell supports on downlink to provide simultaneous connected users with an HSDPA bearer.
- Instantaneous HSDPA MAC Throughput (kbps): The Instantaneous HSDPA MAC throughput (kbps) that
the cell carries.
- No. of Simultaneous HSDPA Users: The number of simultaneous HSDPA users corresponds to the number
of HSDPA bearer users that the cell supports at one time, i.e. within one time transmission interval. All these
users are connected to the cell at the end of the HSDPA part of the simulation; they have a connection with
the R99 bearer (ADPCH-UL64 for HSDPA users and ADPCH-EDPCCH bearer for HSUPA users) and an
HSDPA bearer.
Note: The number of HSDPA bearer users cannot exceed the number of HS-SCCH channels per
cell at any given moment (within a time transmission interval).
- No. of HSDPA Users: The number of HSDPA users including the connected and delayed HSDPA bearer
users.
- No. of HSUPA Users: The number of HSUPA users connected to the cell.
- HSUPA UL load factor (%): The uplink cell load factor due to HSUPA traffic.
- No. of Codes (512 Bits): The number of 512-bit OVSF codes used per cell.
- The types of handover as a percentage: A9155 estimates the percentages of handover types for each
transmitter. A9155 only lists the results for the following handover status, no handover (11), softer (12), soft
(22), softer-soft (23) and soft-soft (33) handovers; the other handover status (other HO) are grouped.
- R99 UL and DL throughput (kbps): The uplink and downlink R99 throughputs represent the numbers of kbits
per second delivered by the cell respectively on uplink and on downlink to supply HSUPA, HSDPA, and R99
users with a R99 bearer. All the radio links in the cell, i.e., links due to handover, are taken into account in the
throughput calculation.
- R99 UL and DL throughput without HO (kbps): The uplink and downlink R99 throughputs represent the
numbers of kbits per second delivered by the cell respectively on uplink and on downlink to supply HSUPA,
HSDPA, and R99 users with a R99 bearer. Only the links with the best server are taken into account in the
calculation of throughput.
- Min Ptch (dBm): The minimum power allocated to a traffic channel to supply services.
- Max Ptch (dBm): The maximum power allocated to a traffic channel to supply services.
- Avg Ptch: The average power allocated to a traffic channel to supply services.
- Rejected users: The number of rejected users per cell are sorted by the following values: Pmob > PmobMax,
Ptch > PtchMax, EcIo < (EcIo) Min., UL Load Saturation, Ch. Elts Saturation, DL Load Saturation,
Multiple Causes, Code Saturation, Admission Rejection, HSDPA Delayed, HSDPA Scheduler Satura-
tion, and HSUPA Scheduler Saturation.
The Mobiles tab: The Mobiles tab contains the following information:
Note: The Mobiles tab only appears if, when creating the simulation as explained in "Creating
Simulations" on page 392, you select either "Standard information about mobiles" or
"Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain.
- X and Y: The coordinates of users who attempt to connect (the geographic position is determined by the
second random trial).
- Service: The service assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution.
- Terminal: The assigned terminal. A9155 uses the assigned service and activity status to determine the ter-
minal and the user profile.
- User: The assigned user profile. A9155 uses the assigned service and activity status to determine the terminal
and the user profile.
- Mobility: The mobility type assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution.
- Activity: The activity status assigned during the first random trial during the generation of the user distribution.
- Carrier: The carrier used for the mobile-transmitter connection.
- DL and UL Requested Rate (kbps): For an R99 user, the DL and UL Requested Rate correspond to the DL
and UL nominal rates of the R99 bearer associated to the service.
398 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

For an HSDPA user, the uplink requested rate corresponds to the nominal rate of ADPCH-UL64 R99 bearer
and the downlink requested rate is the sum of the ADPCH-UL64 radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak
rate that the selected HSDPA radio bearer can provide. Here, the HSDPA user is treated as if he is the only
user in the cell and then, A9155 determines the HSDPA bearer the user would obtain by considering the entire
HSDPA power available of the cell.
For an HSUPA user, the uplink requested rate corresponds to the RLC peak rate of the requested HSUPA
radio bearer. The requested HSUPA radio bearer is selected from the HSUPA bearers compatible with the
user equipment; it is the lowest HSUPA bearer that provides the lowest potential throughput that is higher than
the average requested rate. In this section, the potential throughput refers to the ratio between the RLC peak
rate and the number of retransmissions. The downlink requested rate is the sum of the ADPCH-EDPCCH ra-
dio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate that the requested HSDPA radio bearer can provide. The re-
quested HSDPA bearer is determined as explained in the previous paragraph.
- DL and UL Obtained Rate (kbps): For an R99 user, the obtained rate is the same as the requested rate if he
is connected without being downgraded. Otherwise, the obtained rate is lower (it corresponds to the nominal
rate of the selected R99 bearer). If the user was rejected, the obtained rate is zero.
For an HSDPA user connected to an HSDPA bearer, the uplink obtained rate equals the requested one and
the downlink obtained rate corresponds to the instantaneous rate; this is the sum of the ADPCH-UL64 radio
bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate provided by the selected HSDPA radio bearer after scheduling and
radio resource control. If the HSDPA user is delayed (he is only connected to an R99 radio bearer), uplink and
downlink obtained rates correspond to the uplink and downlink nominal rates of ADPCH-UL64 radio bearer.
Finally, if the HSDPA user is rejected either in the R99 part or in the HSDPA part (i.e., because the HSDPA
scheduler is saturated), the uplink and downlink obtained rates are zero.
For a connected HSUPA user, on uplink, if the user is connected to an HSUPA bearer, the obtained uplink
rate is the sum of the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate provided by the se-
lected HSUPA radio bearer after noise rise scheduling. On downlink, if the user is connected to an HSDPA
bearer, the obtained downlink rate corresponds to the instantaneous rate. The instantaneous rate is the sum
of the ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer nominal rate and the RLC peak rate provided by the selected HSDPA
radio bearer after scheduling and radio resource control. If the user is delayed, the obtained downlink rate cor-
responds to the downlink nominal rate of ADPCH-EDPCCH radio bearer. If the HSUPA user is rejected, the
obtained uplink and downlink rates are "0."
- Mobile Total Power (dBm): The mobile total power corresponds to the total power transmitted by the ter-
minal.
- Connection Status: The connection status indicates whether the user is connected, delayed or rejected at
the end of the simulation. If connected, the connection status corresponds to the activity status. If rejected, the
rejection cause is given. If delayed (for HSDPA users only), the status is "HSDPA delayed."
- Best-server: The best server among the transmitters in the mobile active set.
- HO status (Sites/No. Transmitters Act. Set): The HO status is the number of sites compared to the number
of transmitters in the active set.
- AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4: The name of the cell that is the best server, the second-best server, and so on is given
in a separate column for each cell in the active set.
- Ec/I0 AS 1, 2, 3, 4, (dB): EcI0 is given in a separate column for each cell in the active set.
- Indoor: This field indicates whether indoor losses have been added or not.
- Active compressed mode: This field indicates whether active compressed mode is supported by the mobile
or not.
The following columns only appear if, when creating the simulation as explained in "Creating Simulations" on
page 392, you select "Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain:
- HSDPA Application Throughput (kbps): The HSDPA application throughput is the net HSDPA throughput
without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the instantaneous HSDPA rate
(i.e., the DL obtained rate), the BLER, the HSDPA service scaling factor and the throughput offset.
- Served HSDPA Power: This is the HSDPA power required to provide the HSDPA bearer user with the down-
link obtained rate.
- Required HSDPA Power: The required HSDPA power is the HSDPA power required to provide the HSDPA
bearer user with the downlink requested rate. If the HSDPA bearer allocated to the user is the best one, the
required HSDPA power corresponds to the available HSDPA power of the cell. On the other hand, if the
HSDPA has been downgraded in order to be compliant with cell and UE capabilities, the required HSDPA
power will be lower than the available HSDPA power of the cell.
- No. of HSUPA Retransmissions (Required): The number of retransmissions for the requested HSUPA radio
bearer.
- No. of HSUPA Retransmissions (Obtained): The number of retransmissions for the obtained HSUPA radio
bearer.
- HSUPA Application Throughput (kbps): The HSUPA application throughput is the net HSUPA throughput
without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the UL obtained rate, the BLER,
the HSUPA service scaling factor and the throughput offset.
- Cell Power TCH AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (dBm): The cell power transmitted on the downlink is given for
each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set.
- Ntot DL AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (dBm): The total noise on the downlink for each link between the mobile and
a transmitter in the \active set.
- Load Factor AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (%): The load factor on the downlink for each link between the mobile
and a transmitter in the active set. It corresponds to the ratio between the total interference on the downlink
and total noise at the terminal.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 399

A9155 User Manual
- Noise rise AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (dB): The noise rise on the downlink for each link between the mobile
and a transmitter in the active set.
- Reuse Factor AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL): The DL reuse factor for each link between the mobile and a trans-
mitter in the active set. It is calculated from the interference received at the terminal from the intra cell area
and the total interference received at the terminal from all the transmitters (intra and extra-cell and inter-car-
rier).
- Iintra AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (dBm): The intra-cell interference for each cell (I) of the active set.

I int ra = P DL
DL
tot
(ic ) Fortho P DL
tot
(ic ) PSCH

i i LT
- Iextra AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (DL) (dBm): The extra-cell interference for each cell (I) of the active set.

I extra =
DL
P DL
tot
(ic ) Fortho P DL
tot
(ic ) PSCH

Tx ,iTx LT
- Total Att. AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4 (dB): The total attenuation for each link between the mobile and a transmitter
in the active set.
- No. Uplink CEs: The number of channel elements consumed on the uplink by the mobile.
- No. Downlink CEs: The number of channel elements consumed on the downlink by the mobile.
- Name: The name of the mobile, as assigned during the random user generation.
- Clutter: The clutter class on which the mobile is located.
- Orthogonality Factor: The orthogonality factor used in the simulation. The orthogonality factor is the
remaining orthogonality of the OVSF codes at reception. The value used is the orthogonality factor set in the
clutter classes, or on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue.
- % Pilot Finger: The percentage pilot finger used in the simulation, defined per clutter class or globally for all
clutter classes.
- UL SHO Gain (dB): The uplink soft handover gain is calculated if mobile receivers are connected either on
DL or on UL and DL.
- DL SHO Gain (dB): The downlink soft handover gain is calculated if mobile receivers are connected either on
DL or on UL and DL.
- No. of Codes (512 Bits): The number of OVSF codes used per mobile.
The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab: The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab contains information on the shad-
owing margin for each link between the receiver and up to ten closest potential transmitters:
Note: The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab only appears if, when creating the simulation as
explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 392, you select "Detailed information about
mobiles" under Information to Retain.
- Name: The name assigned to the mobile.

- Value at Receiver (dB): The value of the shadowing margin at the receiver.
- Path To: The name of the potential transmitter.
- Value (dB): The shadowing value for the potential link in the corresponding Path To column. These values
depend on the model standard deviation per clutter type on which the receiver is located and are randomly
distributed on a gaussian curve.
The Packet Session Parameters tab: The Packet Session Parameters tab contains the following information:
Note: The Packet Session Parameters tab only appears if, when creating the simulation as
- Name: The name assigned to the mobile making the packet session.
- NPC (DL): The number of packet calls on the downlink.
- SPC (DL): The size of the packet calls on the downlink.
- NP (DL): The number of packets on the downlink per packet call.
- DP (DL): The time on the downlink between packet calls.
- NPC (UL): The number of packet calls on the uplink.
- SPC (UL): The size of the packet calls on the uplink.
- NP (UL): The number of packets on the uplink per packet call.
- DP (UL): The time on the uplink between packet calls.
The Initial Conditions tab: The Initial Conditions tab contains the following information:
- The global transmitter parameters:

- The spreading width
- The default orthogonality factor
- The default uplink soft handover gain
- Whether the MRC in softer/soft is defined or not
- The methods used to calculate I0 and Nt
- Parameters to compressed mode.
400 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- The input parameters specified when creating the simulation:

- The maximum number of iterations
- The uplink and downlink convergence thresholds
- The simulation constraints such as maximum power, the maximum number of channel elements, the
uplink load factor and the maximum load
- The name of the traffic maps used.
6.3.3.6 Displaying the Average Results of a Group of Simulations

After you have created a group of simulations, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 392, you can display the
average results of the group. If you wish to display the results of a single simulation of a group, see "Displaying the Results
of a Single Simulation" on page 396.
To access the averaged results of a group of simulations:
3. Right-click the group of simulations whose results you want to access.
4. Select Average Simulation from the context menu. A properties dialogue appears.
One tab gives statistics of the results of the group of simulations. Other tabs in the properties dialogue contain
simulation results for all simulations, both averaged and as a standard deviation.
- During the first random trial, each user is assigned a service. The UL and DL rates that all users could
theoretically generate are provided.
rates) is given.
These figures include rejected and delayed users. These figures are determined at the end of the simula-
tion and depend on the network design.
- The number and percentage of R99 bearer users connected to a cell, the number of users per activity
status, and the total UL and DL rates they generate. These figures include R99 users as well as HSDPA
and HSUPA users (since all of them request an R99 bearer); they are determined in the R99 part of the
algorithm. These data are also given per service.
- The total number and the percentage of connected users with an HSDPA bearer, the number of users per
activity status, and DL total rate that they generate. Both HSDPA and HSUPA users are considered since
they both request an HSDPA bearer.
- The total number of connected HSUPA users and the percentage of users with an HSUPA bearer, the
number of users per activity status, and UL and DL total rates they generate. Only HSUPA users are
considered.
The Sites (Average) and Sites (Standard Deviation) tabs: The Sites (Average) and Sites (Standard Deviation)
tabs contains the following average and standard deviation information, respectively, per site:
- Max No. of CEs (DL and UL): The maximum number of channel elements available on uplink and downlink
for R99 bearers requested by R99, HSDPA and HSUPA users.
- No. of CEs Used (DL and UL): The number of channel elements required on uplink and downlink for R99
bearers to handle the traffic of current simulation.
- No. CEs Due to SHO Overhead DL and UL: The number of extra channel elements due to soft handover,
on uplink and downlink.
- Overhead CEs/Cell Downlink and Uplink: The overhead channel elements per cell on the downlink and on
the uplink, defined on the site equipment.
- Rake Factor: The rake factor, defined on the site equipment, enables A9155 to model a rake receiver on
downlink.
interference on uplink.
- Compressed Mode: Whether compressed mode is supported. This option is defined on the site equipment.
- Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps): The Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps).
- Instantaneous HSDPA MAC Throughput (kbps): The Instantaneous HSDPA MAC throughput (kbps).
- HSUPA Rate (kbps): The HSUPA peak rate in kbps.
- DL and UL Throughput for Each Service: The R99 throughput in kbitss for each service.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 401

A9155 User Manual
The Cells (Average) and Cells (Standard Deviation) tabs: The Cells (Average) and Cells (Standard Deviation)
tabs contains the following average and standard deviation information, respectively, per site, transmitter, and
carrier:
- SCH power (dBm): The SCH power as defined in the cell properties.
- Other CCH power (dBm): The power of other common channels. It includes the other CCH power and the
DL HSUPA power as defined in the cell properties.
- Available HSDPA Power (dBm): The available HSDPA power as defined in the cell properties. This is the
power available for the HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA bearer users. The value is either fixed by the
user when the HSDPA power is allocated statically, or by a simulation when the option HSDPA Power
Dynamic Allocation is selected.
- AS Threshold (dB): The active set threshold as defined in cell properties
- Total Transmitted R99 Power (dBm): The total transmitted R99 power is the power transmitted by the cell
on common channels (Pilot, SCH, other CCH), HSUPA channels (E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH) and R99
traffic-dedicated channels.
- Total Transmitted Power (dBm): The total transmitted power of the cell is the sum of the total transmitted
R99 power and the available HSDPA power. If HSDPA power is allocated statically, this total transmitted
power must be lower than or equal to the maximum power. If HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the total
transmitted power equals the maximum power minus the power headroom. In other words, the HSDPA power
corresponds to the difference between the total transmitted power and the R99 transmitted power.
Note: When the constraint "DL load" is set and HSDPA power is statically allocated, the total
transmitted power cannot exceed the maximum DL load (defined either in the cell proper-
ties, or in the simulation). On the other hand, if HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the
control is carried out on the R99 transmitted power, which cannot exceed the maximum DL
load.
- UL Total Noise (dBm): The uplink total noise takes into account the total signal received at the transmitter on
a carrier from intra and extra-cell terminals using the same carrier and adjacent carriers (uplink total interfer-
ence) and the thermal noise.
- Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor that the cell can support. It is defined either in the
cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialogue.
- Max DL Load (% Used Power): The maximum percentage of power that the cell can use. It is defined either
in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialogue.
- UL load factor (%): The uplink cell load factor corresponds to the ratio between the uplink total interference
and the uplink total noise. If the constraint "UL load factor" has been selected, UL cell load factor is not allowed
to exceed the user-defined maximum UL load factor (either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation
dialogue).
- UL load factor due to HSUPA (%): The uplink cell load factor due to HSUPA traffic.
- DL Load Factor (%): The DL load factor of the cell i corresponds to the ratio (DL average interference [due
to transmitter signals on the same carrier] for terminals in the transmitter i area) (DL average total noise [due
to transmitter signals and to thermal noise of terminals] for terminals in the transmitter i area).
- UL and DL noise rise (dB): The uplink and downlink noise rises are calculated from uplink and downlink load
factors. These data indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget).
- DL R99 Load (% Power Used): The percentage of power used for R99 channels is determined by the total
transmitted R99 power-maximum power ratio (power stated in W). When the constraint "DL load" is set and
HSDPA power is allocated dynamically, the DL R99 Load can not exceed the user-defined Max DL Load
(defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation).
- Reuse factor (UL): The uplink reuse factor is the ratio between the uplink total interference and the intra-cell
interference.
- Reuse efficiency factor (UL): The uplink reuse efficiency factor is the reciprocal of the uplink reuse factor.
- Number of UL and DL radio links: The number of radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter
links on the same carrier. This data is calculated on uplink and on downlink and indicates the number of users
connected to the cell on uplink and downlink. Because of handover, a single user can use several radio links.
- HSDPA Application Throughput (kbps): The HSDPA application throughput is the net HSDPA throughput
without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the instantaneous HSDPA rate
(i.e., the DL obtained rate), the BLER, the HSDPA service scaling factor and the throughput offset.
- Min. HSDPA RLC Peak Rate (kbps): The minimum HSDPA RLC peak rate corresponds to the lowest of RLC
peak rates obtained by HSDPA bearer users connected to the cell.
- Max HSDPA RLC Peak Rate (kbps): The maximum HSDPA RLC peak rate: It corresponds to the highest of
RLC peak rates obtained by HSDPA bearer users connected to the cell.
- Avg. Instantaneous HSDPA Throughput (kbps): The average instantaneous HSDPA rate (kbps) is the
average number of kbits per second that the cell supports on downlink to provide one connected user with an
HSDPA bearer.
- Instantaneous HSDPA Rate (kbps): The instantaneous HSDPA rate (kbps) is the number of kbits per
second that the cell supports on downlink to provide simultaneous connected users with an HSDPA bearer.
402 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Instantaneous HSDPA MAC Throughput (kbps): The Instantaneous HSDPA MAC throughput (kbps) that
the cell carries.
- No. of Simultaneous HSDPA Users: The number of simultaneous HSDPA users corresponds to the number
of HSDPA bearer users that the cell supports at a time, i.e. within one time transmission interval. All these
users are connected to the cell at the end of the simulation HSDPA part; they have a connection with the R99
bearer (ADPCH-UL64 for HSDPA users and ADPCH-EDPCCH bearer for HSUPA users) and an HSDPA
bearer. At any given moment in time (within a time transmission interval), the number of simultaneous HSDPA
users cannot exceed the number of HS-SCCH channels per cell.
- No. of HSDPA Users: The number of HSDPA users include the connected and delayed HSDPA bearer users.
- No. of Codes (512 Bits): The number of OVSF codes used per cell.
- The types of handover as a percentage: A9155 estimates the percentages of handover types for each
transmitter. A9155 only lists the results for the following handover status, no handover (11), softer (12), soft
(22), softer-soft (23) and soft-soft (33) handovers; the other handover status (other HO) are grouped.
- R99 UL and DL throughput (kbps): The uplink and downlink R99 throughputs represent the numbers of kbits
per second delivered by the cell respectively on uplink and on downlink to supply HSUPA, HSDPA, and R99
users with a R99 bearer. All the radio links in the cell, i.e., links due to handover, are taken into account in the
throughput calculation.
- R99 UL and DL throughput without HO (kbps): The uplink and downlink R99 throughputs represent the
numbers of kbits per second delivered by the cell respectively on uplink and on downlink to supply HSUPA,
HSDPA, and R99 users with a R99 bearer. Only the links with the best server are taken into account in the
calculation of throughput.
- Min Ptch (dBm): The minimum power allocated to a traffic channel to supply services.
- Max Ptch (dBm): The maximum power allocated to a traffic channel to supply services.
- Avg Ptch: The average power allocated to a traffic channel to supply services.
- Rejected users: The number of rejected users per cell are sorted by the following values: Pmob > PmobMax,
Ptch > PtchMax, EcIo < (EcIo) Min., UL Load Saturation, Ch. Elts Saturation, DL Load Saturation,
Multiple Causes, Code Saturation, Admission Rejection, HSDPA Delayed, HSDPA Scheduler Satura-
tion, and HSUPA Scheduler Saturation.
6.3.3.7 Updating Cell Values With Simulation Results

After you have created a simulation or a group of simulations, as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 392, you
can update values for each cell with the results calculated during the simulation. The following values are updated:
Total Transmitted Power
UL Load Factor
UL Reuse Factor
Available HSDPA Power
Number of HSDPA Users
UL Load Factor due to HSUPA
Number of HSUPA Users.
To update cell values with simulation results:
1. Display the simulation results:
To display the results for a group of simulations:

b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
c. Right-click the group of simulations whose results you want to access.
d. Select Average Simulation from the context menu. A properties dialogue appears.
To display the results for a single simulation:

b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Parameters folder.
c. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the folder of the simulation group containing the simulation whose re-
sults you want to access.
d. Select Properties from the context menu. The simulation properties dialogue appears.
3. On the Cells tab, click Commit Results. The following values are updated for each cell:
- Total Transmitted Power
- UL Load Factor
- UL Reuse Factor
- Available HSDPA Power
- Number of HSDPA Users
- UL Load Factor due to HSUPA
- Number of HSUPA Users.
.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 403

A9155 User Manual
6.3.3.8 Adding New Simulations to an A9155 Document

When you have created a simulation or group of simulations, you can re-examine the same conditions by adding new
simulations to the A9155 document. In A9155, there are the following ways of adding new simulations:
Adding to a group: When you add one or more simulations to an existing group of simulations, A9155 reuses the
same input (radio, traffic, and simulation parameters) as those used to generate the group of simulations. It then
generates a new user distribution and performs the power control simulation.
To add a simulation to a group of simulations, see "Adding a Simulation to a Group of Simulations" on page 404.
Replaying a group: When you replay an existing group of simulations, A9155 reuses the same user distribution
(users with a service, a mobility and an activity status) and traffic parameters (such as, maximum and minimum
traffic channel powers allowed, Eb/Nt thresholds, etc.) as the ones used to calculate the initial simulation. On the
other hand, the shadowing error distribution between simulations is different and only radio data modifications
(new transmitters, changes to the antenna azimuth, etc.) are taken into account during the power control (or rate/
power control) simulation.
To replay a group of simulations, see "Replaying a Simulation or Group of Simulations" on page 404.
Using the Generator Initialisation Number: When you create groups of simulations using the same generator
initialisation number (which must be an integer other than 0) A9155 generates the same user and shadowing error
distributions (user with a service, a mobility, an activity status and a shadowing error) in all groups using the same
number. However, any modifications to traffic parameters (such as, maximum and minimum traffic channel powers
allowed, EbNt thresholds, etc.) and radio data (new transmitter, azimuth, etc.) are taken into account during the
power control simulation.
By creating and calculating one group of simulations, making a change to the network and then creating and calcu-
lating a new group of simulations using the same generator initialisation number, you can see the difference your
parameter changes make.
To create a new simulation to a group of simulations using the generator initialisation number, see "Adding a Simu-
lation to a Group of Simulations" on page 404.
Duplicating a Group: When you duplicate a group, A9155 creates a group of simulations with the same simula-
tion parameters as those used to generate the group of simulations. You can then modify the simulation parame-
ters before calculating the group.
To duplicate a group of simulations, see "Duplicating a Simulation or Group of Simulations" on page 405.
Adding a Simulation to a Group of Simulations
To add a simulation to an existing group of simulations:

2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the UMTS Simulations folder.
3. Right-click the group of simulations to which you want to add a simulation. The context menu appears.
4. Select New from the context menu. The properties dialogue of the group of simulations appears.
Note: When adding a simulation to an existing group of simulations, the parameters originally
used to calculate the group of simulations are used for the new simulations. Consequently,
few parameters can be changed for the added simulation.
5. On the General tab of the dialogue, if desired, change the Name and Comments for this group of simulations.
- Number of Simulations: Enter the number of simulations to added to this group of simulations.
eral tab.
Replaying a Simulation or Group of Simulations
To replay an existing simulation or group of simulations:

3. Right-click the group of simulations you want to replay. The context menu appears.
4. Select Replay from the context menu.
5. Under Convergence, you can set the following parameters:
gence.
404 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

6. Under Bearer Negotiation on the General tab, check the Rate Downgrading check box if you want to permit
bearer downgrading during the simulation.
7. Under Cell Load Constraints, you can set the constraints as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 392
that A9155 must respect during the simulation.
8. Select the level of detail as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 392 that will be available in the output
from the Information to retain list.
eral tab.
Creating a New Simulation or Group of Simulations Using the Generator Initialisation Number
To create a new simulation or group of simulations using the generator initialisation number:
5. Under Generator Initialisation, enter an integer as the generator initialisation value. The integer must be the
same generator initialisation number as used in the group of simulations with the user and shadowing error distri-
butions you want to use in this simulation or group of simulations. If you enter "0", the default, the user and shad-
owing error distribution will be random. If you enter any other integer, the same user and shadowing error
distribution will be used for any simulation using the same generator initialisation value.
6. For information on setting other parameters, see "Creating Simulations" on page 392.
Tip: You can create a new group of simulations with the same parameters as the original group
of simulations by duplicating an existing one as explained in "Duplicating a Simulation or
Group of Simulations" on page 405.
Duplicating a Simulation or Group of Simulations
To duplicate an existing simulation or group of simulations:

3. Right-click the simulation or group of simulations you want to duplicate. The context menu appears.
4. Select Duplicate from the context menu. The properties dialogue for the duplicated group of simulations appears.
You can change the parameters for the duplicated simulation or group of simulations as explained in "Creating
Simulations" on page 392.

When you create a simulation or a group of simulations, you are basing it on a set of traffic conditions that represent the
situation you are creating the network for. However, traffic can, and in fact most likely will, increase. You can test the
performance of the network against an increased traffic load without changing traffic parameters or maps by using the
global scaling factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of
subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
1. Create a simulation or group of simulations by:
- Creating a new simulation or group of simulations as described in "Creating Simulations" on page 392.
- Duplicating an existing simulation or group of simulations as described in "Adding New Simulations to an
A9155 Document" on page 404.
2. Click the Source Traffic tab of the properties dialogue.
per sector).
6.3.4 Analysing the Results of a Simulation

In A9155, you have several methods available to help you analyse simulation results. You can make an active set analysis
of a real-time probe user or you can make a coverage study where each pixel is considered as a probe user with a defined
terminal, mobility, and service. The analyses are based on a single simulation or on an averaged group of simulations.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 405

A9155 User Manual
You can find information on the analysis methods in the following sections:
"Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results" on page 406
"Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results" on page 406.
6.3.4.1 Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results

status, and the active set of the probe mobile. Analysis is based on the UL load percentage and the DL total power of cells.
In this case, these parameters can be either outputs of a given simulation, or average values calculated from a group of
simulations. The analysis is provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility and a service.
Before you make an AS analysis:
Ensure the simulation or group of simulations you want to use in the AS analysis is displayed on the map.
Replay the simulation or group of simulations you want to use if you have modified radio parameters since you
made the simulation.
Note: The AS analysis does not take possible network saturation into account. Therefore, there is
no guarantee that a simulated mobile with the same receiver characteristics can verify the
point analysis, simply because the simulated network may be saturated.
To make an AS analysis of simulation results:
1. Click the Point Analysis button ( ) on the toolbar. The Point Analysis window appears. (see Figure 6.12).
3. At the top of the AS Analysis tab, select from the Simulation list, the simulation or group of simulations you want
to base the AS analysis on.
4. Select the Terminal, Service, and Mobility.
5. Right-click the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue
appears.
6. Select or clear the following options:
- Whether shadowing is to be taken into account (and, if so, the cell edge coverage probability and shadowing
margin).
- Whether indoor coverage is to be taken into account.
- Whether downgrading is allowed.
6.3.4.2 Making Coverage Predictions Using Simulation Results

When no simulations are available, A9155 uses the UL load factor, the DL total power, the UL reuse factor, the HSDPA
power, the number of HSDPA users, the number of HSUPA users, and the UL load factor due to HSUPA defined for each
cell to make coverage predictions. For information on cell properties, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 317; for
information on modifying cell properties, see "Cell Definition" on page 314.
Once you have made simulations, A9155 can use this information instead of the defined parameters in the cell properties
to make coverage predictions where each pixel is considered as a probe user with a terminal, mobility, profile, and service.
For each coverage prediction based on simulation results, you can base the coverage prediction on a selected simulation
or on a group of simulations, choosing either an average analysis of all simulations in the group or a statistical analysis
based on a defined probability.
The coverage predictions that can use simulation results are:
Coverage predictions on the pilot or on a service:
- Pilot Reception Analysis: For information on making a pilot reception analysis, see "Making a Pilot Signal
Quality Prediction" on page 354.
- Service Area Downlink: For information on making a coverage prediction on the downlink service area, see
"Studying Service Area (EbNt) Downlink or Uplink" on page 355.
406 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Service Area Uplink: For information on making a coverage prediction on the uplink service area, see "Stud-
ying Service Area (EbNt) Downlink or Uplink" on page 355.
- Effective Service Area: For information on making a pilot pollution coverage analysis, see "Studying Effective
Service Area" on page 356.
Coverage predictions on noise and interference:
- Downlink Total Noise: For information on making a downlink total noise coverage prediction, see "Studying
Downlink Total Noise" on page 358.
- Pilot Pollution: For information on making a pilot pollution coverage analysis, see "Calculating Pilot Pollution"
on page 359.
A handover status coverage prediction to analyse macro-diversity performance:
- Handoff Status: For information on making a handover status coverage prediction, see "Making a Handover
Status Coverage Prediction" on page 359.
An HSDPA coverage prediction to analyse A-DPCH qualities, HS-SCCH power or quality per HS-SCCH channel
and to model fast link adaptation.
- HSDPA Coverage Prediction: For information on making an HSDPA coverage prediction, see "HSDPA Cov-
erage Prediction" on page 361.
An HSUPA coverage prediction to analyse the required E-DPDCH Ec/Nt, the required terminal power, and the
obtained HSUPA bearer.
- HSUPA Coverage Prediction: For information on making an HSUPA coverage prediction, see "HSUPA Cov-
The procedures for the coverage predictions assume that simulation results are not available. When no simulations are
available, you select "(None)" from the Simulation list, on the Condition tab. However, when simulations are available you
can base the coverage prediction on one simulation or a group of simulations.
To base a coverage prediction on a simulation or group of simulations, when setting the parameters:
2. From the Simulation list, select the simulation or group of simulations on which you want to base the coverage
prediction.
3. If you select a group of simulations from the Simulation list, select one of the following:
- All: If you select All to make a statistical analysis of all simulations based on the defined Probability (the prob-
ability must be between 0 and 1). This will make a global analysis of all simulations in a group and with an
evaluation of the network stability in terms of fluctuations in traffic.
- Average: Select Average make the coverage prediction on the average of the simulations in the group.

An important step in the process of creating a UMTS HSPA network is verifying the capacity of the network. This is done
using measurements of the strength of the pilot signal in different locations within the area covered by the network. This
collection of measurements is called a test mobile data path.
the network.

sion FMT).
Information identifying scanned cells (for example, serving cells, neighbour cells, or any other cells). In UMTS net-
works, a cell is identified by its scrambling code. Therefore, you must indicate during the import process which
columns contain the scrambling code of cells and the scrambling code format (decimal or hexadecimal) used in
the file. Because a scrambling code can belong to several groups, you can also indicate from which group the
scrambling code has been selected.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 407

A9155 User Manual

import.
Notes:
name if desired.
document.
408 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

pears.
d. In the SC Group Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the scram-
bling code group of scanned cells. For example, if the string "SC_Group" is found in the column names iden-
tifying the scrambling code group of scanned cells, enter it here. A9155 will then search for columns with this
string in the column name.
If there is no scrambling code group information contained in the test mobile data file, leave the SC Group
Identifier box empty.
e. In the SC Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the scrambling code
of scanned cells. For example, if the string "SC" is found in the column names identifying the scrambling code
of scanned cells, enter it here. A9155 will then search for columns with this string in the column name.
f. From the Scramb. Code Format list, select the scrambling code format, either "Decimal" or "Hexadecimal."
Important:
The data in the file must be structured so that the columns identifying the scrambling code group
and the scrambling code are placed before the data columns for each cell. Otherwise A9155 will
not be able to properly import the file.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 409

A9155 User Manual
configuration:
ample, "*.csv").
d. Click OK.
Notes:
Setup part.

Then, you can select individual test mobile data points to see information about the active set at that location.
data is displayed.
4. Click and hold the test mobile data point on which you want active set information. A9155 displays an arrow
pointing towards the serving cells (see Figure 6.43 on page 414), with a number identifying the server as num-
bered in the test mobile data. If the transmitter display type is "Automatic," both the number and the arrow are
displayed in the same colour as the transmitter. For information on changing the display type to "Automatic," see

display of measurement path are managed in the same way than sites, transmitters, etc...
In addition, a last option is available which permits to display points according to more than one criteria at a time. By select-
ing the Multiple Shadings... option in the Display type scrolling box, a dialogue opens in which you can define the following
display for each single point of the measurement path:
410 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

With such settings, you can, for example, display a signal level in shading of colours, choose a symbol type according to
Transmitter 1 (circles, triangle, cross, etc.) and a size according to the altitude.
Notes:
The Fast Display' feature forces A9155 to use the lightest symbol to display the points.
This is particularly useful in the case of very large amounts of points when the standard
display time may be reduced.
The use of the Multiple Shading display feature on the symbols is possible only if the 'Fast
Display' symbol is unchecked.
Test Mobile Data paths can be sorted in alphabetical order in the Explorer window data tab
by choosing Sort Alphabetically from the Test Mobile Data path folder context menu.
It is possible to export the display settings of a measurement path. Colours symbols and
other display settings can be save in a .cfg file in order to make them available for a future
use on another path. To access the import/export interface, click the button in

The imported test mobile data is used to verify the UMTS HSPA network. To improve the relevance of the data, A9155
allows you to filter out incompatible or inaccurate points. You can then use the data for coverage predictions, either by
comparing the imported measurements with previously calculated coverage predictions, or by creating new coverage
predictions using the imported test mobile data.
"Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter" on page 413

values to be useful in calibration. As well, test paths may include test points in areas that are not representative of the test
do not want to use.
you clear by selecting the Delete points outside the filter check box.

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 411

A9155 User Manual

lowing table:

bles you to update heights (Alt DTM, Clutter height, DTM+Clutter) and the clutter class of
test mobile data points after adding new geographic maps or modifying existing ones.

Pilot signal level and coverage by signal level
Pilot reception analysis (EcI0), service area (EbNt) downlink, and service area (EbNt) uplink.
- Coverage by Signal Level: Click the Condition tab.
- At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be calculated. Under Server, you
can select whether to calculate the signal level from all transmitters, or only the best or second-best signal.
If you choose to calculate the best or second-best signal, you can enter a Margin. If you select the Shad-
412 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

owing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can
select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Finally, you can select the Carrier to be studied.
- Pilot Reception Analysis (EcI0): Click the Condition tab.
- On the Condition tab, you can select which Simulation to study. Or you can select a group of simulations
and either select All to perform an average analysis of all simulations in the group based on a Probability
(between 0 and 1) or select Average to perform statistical analysis of all simulations.
- If you want to perform the coverage prediction without a simulation, you can select "(None)" from Simu-
lation. In this case, A9155 calculates the coverage prediction using the UL load factor and the DL total
power defined in the cell properties.
- You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility, as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on
page 350. You must also select which Carrier is to be considered.
- If you want the pilot signal quality prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken
into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.
class.
- Service Area (EbNt) Downlink: Click the Condition tab.
- If you want the service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shad-
owing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability
text box.
class.
- Service Area (EbNt) Uplink: Click the Condition tab.
text box.
class.
age prediction.
lations in A9155").

4. Select Focus on a Transmitter from the context menu. The Field Select for a Given Transmitter dialogue
appears.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 413

A9155 User Manual

7. Select the check box beside the field you want extract for the selected transmitter.
Note: A9155 can display the best server and up to six other servers in the active set. If you want
to display for example, the point signal level, remember to select the check box for the point
signal level for all servers in the For the Fields list. The new column will then display the
point signal level for the selected transmitter for all servers if a value exists.
selected values.

4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 6.43).
Figure 6.44).
414 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


identifying the best server (see Figure 6.43 on page 414). If the transmitter display type is "Automatic," both the
following ways:
- Zoom in or out:
in the map and in the Test Mobile Data window (see Figure 6.43 on page 414).

window.
4. Select Open the Analysis Tool from the context menu. The Test Mobile Data window appears (see Figure 6.43
on page 414).
page 414.

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 415

A9155 User Manual

"Defining Inter-Carrier Interference" on page 416
"Defining Frequency Bands" on page 416
"The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 417
"Site Equipment" on page 420
"Conditions for Entering the Active Set" on page 422
"Modelling Shadowing" on page 423.
6.5.1 Defining Inter-Carrier Interference

If you want A9155 to take into account the interference between two carriers, you must create a carrier pair with an inter-
ference reduction factor. A9155 will take the interference reduction factor into account on both the uplink and the downlink.
To create a pair of carriers with an interference reduction factor:
3. Select Frequency Bands > Interference Reduction Factors from the context menu. The Inter-Carrier Interfer-
ence Reduction Factor table appears.
4. For each carrier pair for which you want define inter-carrier interference:
a. Enter the first carrier of the pair in the 1st Carrier column.
b. Enter the second carrier of the pair in the 2nd Carrier column.
c. Enter an interference reduction factor in the Reduction Factor (dB) column. When A9155 is calculating in-
terference, it subtracts the interference reduction factor from the calculated interference. If the interference re-
duction factor is set to "0," A9155 assumes that the carriers in the defined pair generate as much interference
as cells with the same carrier interference.
Important: The interference reduction factor must be a positive value.
For every pair of carriers that is not defined, A9155 assumes that there is no inter-carrier interference.
d. Press ENTER to create the carrier pair and to create a new row in the table.
6.5.2 Defining Frequency Bands

To define frequency bands:
3. Select Frequency Bands > Open Table from the context menu.
4. In the table, enter one frequency band per row. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with
Data Tables" on page 48. For each frequency band, enter:
- Name: Enter a name for the frequency, for example, "Band 2100." This name will appear in other dialogues
- Average Frequency (MHz): Enter the average frequency.
- First Carrier: Enter the number of the first carrier in this frequency band.
- Last Carrier: Enter the number of the last carrier in this frequency band. If this frequency band has only one
carrier, enter the same number as entered in the First Carrier field.
Important: When you have more than one frequency band, the carriers must be numbered sequen-
tially, contiguously (i.e., you cannot skip numbers in a range of carriers, and the range of
carriers in one band cannot overlap the range of carriers in another), and uniquely (i.e., you
can only use each number once).
For example:
Band 2100: First carrier: 0; Last carrier 1 and Band 900: First carrier: 2 and Last carrier: 2
- Spreading Width (MHz): Enter the width, in MHz, that this frequency band will cover.
5. When you have finished adding frequency bands, click Close.
416 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

6.5.3 The Global Transmitter Parameters

On the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue, you can define many network parameters that
are used in UMTS power control simulations. Many parameters are used as default values for all transmitters.
This section explains the options available on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue, and
explains how to access the tab:
"The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 417
"Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 417.
6.5.3.1 The Options on the Global Parameters Tab

The Global Parameters tab has the following options:
DL Power: Under DL Power, you can define whether the power values on the downlink are Absolute or Relative
to Pilot. The power values affected are the synchronisation channel and other common channel powers defined
in the cell properties, as well as the minimum and maximum traffic channel powers per R99 radio bearer.
Interferences: Under Interferences, you can define the parameters used to calculate interference on the down-
link: the orthogonality factor, and the method used to calculate I0 and Nt.
- Default Ortho. Factor: The default orthogonality factor (between 0 and 1) enables you to take into account
the non-orthogonality of OVSF codes caused by multipath.
- I0: You can select "Total noise" and A9155 will calculate I0 using the noise generated by all transmitters plus
thermal noise or you can select "Without pilot" and A9155 will calculate I0 using the total noise less the pilot
signal and orthogonal part of traffic channels and other common channels.
- Nt: You can select "Total noise" and A9155 will calculate Nt as the noise generated by all transmitters plus
thermal noise or you can select "Without useful signal" and A9155 will calculate Nt as the total noise less the
signal of the studied cell.
Handoff: Under Handoff, you can define the parameters used to model soft handoff on the uplink.
- Default UL Macro-Diversity Gain: You can set a default value for the uplink gain due to macro-diversity on
soft and soft-soft handovers. If you clear the Shadowing taken into account check box on the Condition tab
when defining a coverage prediction or during a point analysis, A9155 uses this value. If you select the Shad-
owing taken into account check box on the Condition tab, A9155 calculates the UL macro-diversity gain,
based on the standard deviation value of EbNt on the uplink defined per clutter class.
- +MRC in Softer/Soft: If you select the +MRC (maximal ratio combining) in Softer/Soft check box, A9155
selects the serving cell during a softer/soft handover by recombining the signal of co-site transmitters and mul-
tiplying the resulting signal by the rake efficiency factor and then comparing this value to the signal received
at transmitters located on the other sites of the active set. A9155 chooses the greatest value and multiplies it
by the macro-diversity gain.
Compressed Mode: Under Compressed Mode, you can define the parameters related to compressed mode.
Compressed mode is used when a mobile supporting compressed mode is connected to a cell located on a site
with a compressed-mode-capable equipment and either the pilot RSCP, or the received EcI0, or both of them are
lower than the defined activation thresholds.
- RSCP Activation Threshold: You can select the RSCP Active check box and enter a RSCP Activation
Threshold.
- EcI0 Activation Threshold: You can select the EcI0 Active check box and enter a EcI0 Activation
Threshold.
Note: You must select either the RSCP Active check box or the EcI0 Active check box or both.
- EbNt UL and DL Target Increase: When compressed mode is activated, EbNt requirements in UL and DL
are increased. In order to take this into account, A9155 adds UL and DL EbNt target increase values to the
UL and DL EbNt requirements set for each radio bearer.
HSDPA: Under HSDPA, you can define how total noise is calculated and how the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator)
is evaluated for HSDPA.
- CQI: You can select Based on CPICH quality and A9155 will measure the CQI based on the pilot EcNt or
you can select Based on HS-PDSCH quality and A9155 will measure the CQI based on the HS-PDSCH
EcNt. Depending on the option selected, you will have to define either a CQI=f(CPICH Ec/Nt) graph, or a
CQI=f(HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt) graph in the Properties dialogue of the terminal equipment. The calculated CQI will
be used to determine the best bearer.
6.5.3.2 Modifying Global Transmitter Parameters

You can change global transmitter parameters on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue.
To change global transmitter parameters:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 417

A9155 User Manual
3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Transmitters Properties dialogue appears.
4. Click the Global Parameters tab.
5. Modify the parameters described in "The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 417.
6. Click OK.
6.5.4 Radio Bearers

Bearer services are used by the network for carrying information. In this section, the following are explained:
"Defining R99 Radio Bearers" on page 418
"Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers" on page 419
"Defining HSUPA Radio Bearers" on page 419.
6.5.4.1 Defining R99 Radio Bearers

Bearer services are used by the network for carrying information. The R99 Radio Bearer table lists all the available radio
bearers. You can create new R99 radio bearers and modify existing ones by using the R99 Radio Bearer table.
Only the following R99 radio bearer parameters are used in predictions:
Max TCH Power (dBm)
UL and DL Target (dB) per mobility
The type of bearer.
To create or modify an R99 radio bearer:
4. Select R99 Radio Bearer from the context menu. The R99 Radio Bearer table appears.
5. In the R99 Radio Bearer table, you can enter or modify the following fields:
- Name: You can modify the name of the bearer. If you are creating a new R99 radio bearer, enter a name in
the row marked with the New Row icon ( ).
- Nominal Uplink Rate (Kbps): Enter or modify the nominal uplink rate in kilobytes per second.
- Nominal Downlink Rate (Kbps): Enter or modify the nominal downlink rate in kilobytes per second.
- Type: Select or modify the service type. There are four classes: Conversational, Streaming, Interactive, and
Background. This field corresponds to the QoS (quality of service) class or traffic class that the bearer will
belong to.
- Uplink Coding Factor: Enter or modify the uplink coding factor.
- Downlink Coding Factor: Enter or modify the downlink coding factor. The uplink and downlink coding factors
model the data rate increase due to coding operations (CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) attachment, trans-
port block concatenation and code block segmentation, channel coding, radio frame equalisation, interleaving,
radio frame segmentation, and rate matching). The uplink and downlink coding factors are only used to esti-
mate the number of OVSF codes required by the service.
- UL DPCCH/DPCH Power Ratio: Enter or modify the uplink DPCCH (Dedicated Physical Control Channel)/
DPCH (Dedicated Physical Channel) power ratio. The DPCH power is the combination of the DPCCH and the
DPDCH (Dedicated Physical Data Channel) power.
- DL DPCCH/DPCH Power Ratio: Enter or modify the downlink DPCCH (Dedicated Physical Control Channel)/
DPCH (Dedicated Physical Channel) power ratio.
- Min. TCH Power (dBm): Enter or modify the minimum traffic channel power. The minimum and maximum
traffic channel power make up the dynamic range for downlink power control.
- Max TCH Power (dBm): Enter or modify the maximum traffic channel power.
Note: The maximum and minimum traffic channel powers can be either absolute values or values
relative to the pilot power; this depends on the option defined on the Global Parameters tab
of the Transmitters Properties dialogue.
6. When you have finished entering or modifying the R99 radio bearer parameters, double-click the row of the R99
radio bearer to open the bearers Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue appears.
7. Click the General tab. The options on the General tab are the same as those already described in step 5. The
uplink and downlink Spreading Factor is calculated automatically by A9155 according to 3GPP specifications.
The coding factor is only used to evaluate the spreading factor, i.e. the number of OVSF codes required by the
service.
8. Click the EbNt tab. On the EbNt tab, you can define downlink and uplink EbNt requirements. These are the
thresholds (in dB) that must be reached to provide users with the service. These parameters depend on the
mobility type and reception equipment; these parameters must be defined for each possible combination of
mobility type and reception equipment.
Using Transmission (Tx) and Reception (Rx) diversity results in a quality gain on received downlink and uplink
EbNt. In A9155, this is modelled by reducing the downlink and uplink EbNt requirements. Therefore, in addition
to downlink and uplink EbNt requirements, you can specify gains on received downlink and uplink EbNt for each
418 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

possible diversity configuration. A9155 will consider them when Tx or Rx diversity configurations are assigned to
transmitters.
- Mobility: Select a mobility type from the list.

right-click the Terminals folder in the UMTS Parameters folder on the Data tab and select Reception Equip-
ment from the context menu.
- UL Target (dB): Enter or modify the uplink (EbNt) threshold.
- UL 2RX div. Gain (dB): Enter or modify the two-receiver uplink diversity gain in dB.
- UL 4RX div. Gain (dB): Enter or modify the four-receiver uplink diversity gain in dB.
- DL Target (dB): Enter or modify the downlink (EbNt) threshold.
- DL Open Loop div. Gain (dB): Enter or modify the downlink open loop diversity gain in dB.
- DL Closed Loop div. Gain (dB): Enter or modify the downlink closed loop diversity gain in dB.
9. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialogue.
6.5.4.2 Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers

In each cell, the scheduler selects the HSDPA resource per UE and per TTI. This HSDPA resource is called a TFRC
(Transport Format Resource Combination) and is the set of parameters such as the transport format, the modulation
scheme, and the number of used HS-PDSCH channels. In A9155, the TFRC are referred to as HSDPA radio bearers.
During a simulation, and for the HSDPA coverage prediction, A9155 selects a suitable HSDPA radio bearer and uses its
RLC peak rate. The HSDPA radio bearer selection is based on UE capabilities (maximum number of HS-PDSCH chan-
nels, transport block size, and whether it uses 16 QAM modulation), cell capabilities (maximum number of HS-PDSCH
channels), and reported CQI.
The HSDPA Radio Bearer table lists the available HSDPA radio bearers. You can create new HSDPA radio bearers and
modify existing ones by using the HSDPA Radio Bearer table.
To open the HSDPA Radio Bearer table:
4. Select HSDPA Radio Bearer from the context menu. The HSDPA Radio Bearer table appears with the following
information:
- Radio Bearer Index: The bearer index number.
- Transport Block Size (Bits): The transport block size in bits.
- Number of HS-PDSCH Channels Used: The number of HS-PDSCH channels used.
- 16QAM Modulation Used: The check box is selected if the HSDPA radio bearer uses 16QAM modulation. If
this option is not selected, A9155 assumes that QPSK modulation is used.
- RLC Peak Rate (bps): The RLC peak rate represents the peak rate without coding (redundancy, overhead,
addressing, etc.).
6.5.4.3 Defining HSUPA Radio Bearers

In each cell, the scheduler selects the HSUPA resource per UE, per Node B, and per user service. This HSUPA resource
is called a TFC (Transport Format Combination) and requires a defined ratio of E-DPDCH power over DPCCH power. This
ratio is modelled as the required E-DPDCH EcNt. The combination of the TFC and the power offset is modelled in A9155
as HSUPA radio bearers.
During a simulation, and for the HSUPA coverage prediction, A9155 selects a suitable HSUPA radio bearer. The HSUPA
radio bearer selection is based on UE capabilities (maximum number of E-DPDCH codes, smallest spreading factor, and
TTI length) and the required E-DPDCH EcNt.
The HSUPA Radio Bearer table lists the available HSUPA radio bearers.
To open the HSUPA Radio Bearer table:
4. Select HSUPA Radio Bearer from the context menu. The HSUPA Radio Bearer table appears:
- TTI Duration (ms): The TTI duration in ms. The TTI can be 2 or 10 ms.
- Number of E-DPDCH Codes: The number of E-DPDCH channels used.
- Minimum Spreading Factor: The minimum spreading factor used.
addressing, etc.).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 419

A9155 User Manual
6.5.5 Site Equipment

6.5.5.1 Creating Site Equipment
To create a new piece of UMTS site equipment:
2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears.
3. Select Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. The Equipment table appears.
4. In the Equipment table, each row describes a piece of equipment. For information on working with data tables,
see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48. For the new piece of UMTS equipment you are creating, enter the
following:
- Name: The name you enter will be the one used to identify this piece of equipment.
- Manufacturer: The name of the manufacturer of this piece of equipment.
- MUD factor: Multi-User Detection (MUD) is a technology used to decrease intra-cell interference in the uplink.
MUD is modelled by a coefficient between 0 and 1; this factor is considered in the UL interference calculation.
In case MUD is not supported by equipment, enter 0 as value.
- Rake receiver efficiency factor: This factor enables A9155 to model the rake receiver on UL. A9155 uses
this factor to calculate the uplink SHO gain and uplink signal quality in simulations, point-to-point handover
analysis and coverage studies. This parameter is considered in the uplink for softer and softer-softer hando-
vers; it is applied to the sum of signals received on the same site. The factor value can be between 0 and 1.
It models losses due to the imperfection of signal recombination.
Note: The rake efficiency factor used to model the recombination in downlink can be set in termi-
nal properties.
- Carrier selection: Carrier selection refers to the carrier selection method used during the transmitter admis-
sion control in the mobile active set. The selected strategy is used in simulations when no carrier is specified
in the properties of the service (all the carriers can be used for the service) or when the carrier specified for
the service is not used by the transmitter. On the other hand, the specified carrier selection mode is always
taken into account in predictions (AS analysis and coverage studies). Choose one of the following:
- UL min. noise: The carrier with the minimum UL noise (carrier with the lowest UL load factor) is selected.
- DL min. power: The carrier with the minimum DL total power is selected.
- Random: The carrier is randomly chosen.
- Sequential: Carriers are sequentially loaded. The first carrier is selected as long as it is not overloaded.
Then, when the maximum uplink load factor is reached, the second carrier is chosen and so on.
- Overhead uplink and downlink CEs: The overhead uplink and downlink channel elements (CEs) correspond
to the numbers of channel elements that a cell uses for common channels in the uplink and downlink. This
setting is also used for OVSF code allocation; it indicates the number of OVSF codes to be allocated to control
channels per cell.
- AS restricted to neighbours: Select this option if you want the other transmitters in the active set to belong
to the neighbour list of the best server.
- Compressed Mode: If you select this option, cells located on sites with this equipment are able to manage
compressed mode when radio conditions require it. Compressed mode is generally used to prepare the hard
handover of users with single receiver terminals.
5. Click the Close button ( ) to close the table.
6.5.5.2 Defining Channel Element Consumption per UMTS Site Equipment and
R99 Radio Bearer
The number of channel elements consumed by a user depends on the site equipment, on the R99 radio bearer, and the
link direction (up or down). The number of channel elements consumed can be defined for UMTS simulations.
To define channel element consumption during UMTS simulations:
2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears.
3. Select Equipment > Channel Element Consumption from the context menu. The CE Consumption table
appears.
4. For each equipment-R99 radio bearer pair, enter in the CE Consumption table the number of UL and DL channel
elements that A9155 will consume during the power control simulation.
420 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

6.5.6 Receiver Equipment

6.5.6.1 Setting Receiver Height
When you make UMTS coverage predictions, you can define the height of the receiver.
To define the height of the receiver:
4. Click the Receiver tab.
5. Enter a receiver Height. This value will be used when calculating a UMTS coverage predictions and a point
analysis.
6. Click OK.
6.5.6.2 Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment

In A9155, reception equipment is used when you create a terminal. The graphs defined for each reception equipment entry
are used for quality studies and for selecting HSDPA and HSUPA bearers.
To create or modify reception equipment:
5. Double-click the reception equipment type you want to modify. The reception equipment types Properties dia-
logue appears.
Note: You can create a new reception equipment type by entering a name in the row marked with
the New Row icon ( ) and pressing ENTER.

7. Ensure that a Quality Indicator has been chosen for each R99 Bearer. You can edit the values in the DL and UL
Quality Indicator Tables by clicking directly on the table entry, or by selecting the Quality Indicator and clicking
the Downlink Quality Graphs or the Uplink Quality Graphs buttons.
The DL and UL Quality Indicator tables describe the variation of the quality indicator as a function of the meas-
ured parameter (as defined in the Quality Indicators table). The Uplink and Downlink Quality Graphs are used
for quality studies. If no Mobility is entered, the values in the quality graphs are used for all mobility types.
8. Click the HSDPA Bearer Selection tab.
9. Ensure that the values for each Mobility in the CQI Table and the Best HSDPA Bearer Table have been entered.
You can edit the values in the CQI Table and the Best HSDPA Bearer Table by clicking directly on the table entry,
or by selecting the Mobility and clicking the CQI Graph or the Best Bearer Graph buttons.
The CQI table describes the variation of the CPICH CQI as a function of the CPICH Ec/Nt (or the variation of HS-
PDSCH CQI as a function of the HS-PDSCH Ec/Nt); the values displayed depend on the calculation parameter
you have selected in the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue (for more information,
see "The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 417).
The Best HSDPA Bearer table describes the index of the best HSDPA bearer as a function of the HS-PDSCH
CQI.
The CQI graphs and best bearer graphs are used in the simulation and in the HSDPA prediction study to model
fast link adaptation (selection of the HSDPA bearer).
The supplier RRM (radio resource management) strategy can be taken into account using the Best HSDPA
Bearer table, for example:
- You can define several pieces of reception equipment with a separate table for each. You can reserve low
bearer indexes for poor-performance reception equipment and higher bearer indexes for high-performance
equipment.
- You can specify a graph for each mobility. Here, you can reserve low bearer indexes for high speeds and
higher bearer indexes for low speeds.
- You can also give priority to either one user by assigning him a high bearer index or to all users by assigning
them low bearer indexes.
10. Click the HSDPA Quality Graphs tab.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 421

A9155 User Manual
11. Ensure that a Quality Indicator has been chosen for each Radio Bearer Index. You can edit the values in the
DL Quality Indicator Table by clicking directly on the table entry, or by selecting the Quality Indicator and
clicking the Downlink Quality Graph button.
The Downlink Quality table describes the variation of the BLER as a function of the HS-PDSCH EcNt. It is used
to calculate the application throughput for the HSDPA coverage prediction. If no Mobility is entered, the values in
the quality graphs are used for all mobility types.
12. Click the HSUPA Bearer Selection tab.

13. Ensure that, for each Radio Bearer Index and Mobility pair, you have entered a value for the Number of
Retransmissions and for the Requested EcNt Threshold.
The values are used in the simulation and in the HSUPA prediction to model noise rise scheduling and in the selec-
tion of the HSUPA radio bearer.
Early Termination Probabilities is intended for future use; it is not at present used by A9155.
14. Click the HSUPA Quality Graphs tab.

15. Ensure that a Quality Indicator has been chosen for each Radio Bearer Index and that there is a value defined
for the Number of Retransmissions. You can edit the values in the UL Quality Indicator Table by clicking
directly on the table entry, or by selecting the Quality Indicator and clicking the Uplink Quality Graph button.
The Uplink Quality table describes the variation of the BLER as a function of the E-DPDCH EcNt. It is used to
calculate the application throughput for the HSUPA coverage prediction. If no Mobility is entered, the values in
the quality graphs are used for all mobility types.
6.5.6.3 HSDPA UE Categories

HSDPA user equipment capabilities are standardised into 12 different categories according to 3GPP specifications.
To edit a UE category:
4. Select HSDPA User Equipment Categories from the context menu. The HSDPA User Equipment Categories
table appears.
5. The HSDPA User Equipment Categories table has the following columns:
- Category: The number identifying the HSDPA UE category.
- Max. Number of HS-PDSCH Channels: The maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels allowed for the cat-
egory.
- Min. Number of TTI Between Two TTI Used: The minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Interval)
between two TTI used.
- Max. Transport Block Size (bits): The maximum transport block size allowed for the category.
- 16QAM Modulation: Select the check box if the category supports 16QAM modulation. If 16QAM modulation
is not selected, QPSK is used.
6.5.6.4 HSUPA UE Categories

HSUPA user equipment capabilities are standardised into 6 different categories according to 3GPP specifications.
To edit a UE category:
4. Select HSUPA User Equipment Categories from the context menu. The HSUPA User Equipment Categories
table appears.
5. The HSUPA User Equipment Categories table has the following columns:
- Category: The number identifying the HSUPA UE category.
- Max. Number of E-DPDCH Codes: The maximum number of E-DPDCH codes allowed for the category.
- TTI 2 ms: Select the check box if a TTI of 2 ms is supported. If a 2 ms TTI is not selected, a 10 ms TTI is used.
- Minimum Spreading Factor: Enter the minimum spreading factor supported.
- Maximum Block Size for a 2 ms TTI (bits): The maximum transport block size allowed for a 2 ms TTI.
- Maximum Block Size for a 10 ms TTI (bits): The maximum transport block size allowed for a 10 ms TTI.
6.5.7 Conditions for Entering the Active Set

The mobile active set is the list of the transmitters to which the mobile is connected. The active set may consist of one or
more transmitters; depending on whether the service supports soft handover and on the terminal active set size. The trans-
mitters must use the same frequency band as that defined for the terminal for them to belonng to the users active set.
422 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

It is, however, the quality of the pilot (EcI0) that finally determines whether or not a transmitter can belong to the active set.
In order for a given transmitter to enter the mobile active set as best server, the pilot quality from this transmitter must
exceed an upper threshold defined in the properties of the mobility type. In addition, the pilot quality must be the highest
one.
In order for a transmitter to enter the active set:
It must use the same carrier as the best server transmitter. In A9155, carriers are modelled using cells. For infor-
mation on accessing cell properties, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 317. For a description of the prop-
erties of a cell, see "Cell Definition" on page 314.
The pilot quality difference between the cell and the best server must not exceed the AS-threshold set per cell.
For information on accessing the AS threshold defined for a given cell, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on
page 317.
If you have selected to restrict the active set to neighbours, the transmitter must be a neighbour of the best server.
You can restrict the active set to neighbours by selecting the AS Restricted to Neighbours option in the Site
Equipment table. For an explanation of how to set the AS Restricted to Neighbours option, see "Creating Site
Equipment" on page 420.
The active set for HSDPA users is different in the following way: HSDPA physical channels do not support soft handover,
therefore the user is never connected to more than one transmitter at a time.

be worse.
In UMTS projects, the standard deviation of the propagation model is used to calculate shadowing margins on signal
levels. You can also calculate shadowing margins on EcI0 and EbNt values and the macro-diversity gain. For informa-
tion on setting the model standard deviation and the EcI0 and EbNt standard deviations for each clutter class or for all
Shadowing can be taken into consideration when A9155 calculates the signal level, EcI0, and EbNt for:
A coverage prediction (see "Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 330).
A9155 always takes shadowing into consideration when calculating a Monte-Carlo-based UMTS simulation.
You can display the shadowing margins and the macro-diversity gain per clutter class. For information, see "Displaying
the Shadowing Margins and Macro-diversity Gain per Clutter Class" on page 423.
6.5.8.1 Displaying the Shadowing Margins and Macro-diversity Gain per Clutter
Class
To display the shadowing margins and macro-diversity gain per clutter class:
3. Select Shadowing Margins from the context menu. The Shadowing Margins and Gains dialogue appears (see
Figure 6.45).
- Standard Deviation: Select the type of standard deviation to be used to calculate the shadowing margin or
macro-diversity gains:
- From Model: The model standard deviation. A9155 will display the shadowing margin of the signal level.
- EcI0: The EcI0 standard deviation. A9155 will display the EcI0 shadowing margin and the resulting DL
pilot macro-diversity gains. The macro-diversity gains will be calculated using the values you enter in 1st
- 2nd Best Signal Difference and 2nd - 3rd Best Signal Difference.
- EbNt UL: The EbNt UL standard deviation. A9155 will display the EbNt UL shadowing margin and the
resulting UL macro-diversity gains. The macro-diversity gains will be calculated using the values you enter
in 1st - 2nd Best Signal Difference and 2nd - 3rd Best Signal Difference.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 423

A9155 User Manual
- EbNt DL: The EbNt DL standard deviation. A9155 will display the EbNt DL shadowing margin.
5. If you select "EcI0" or "EbNt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, you can enter the differ-
ences that will be used to calculate the macro-diversity gain under Macro-Diversity Parameters:
- 1st - 2nd Best Signal Difference: If you selected "EcI0" as the standard deviation under Standard Devia-
tion, enter the allowed EcI0 difference between the best server and the second one. This value is used to
calculate DL macro-diversity gains. If you selected "EbNt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard
Deviation, enter the allowed Eb/Nt difference between the best server and the second one. This value is used
to calculate UL macro-diversity gains.
- 2nd - 3rd Best Signal Difference: If you selected "EcI0" as the standard deviation under Standard Devia-
tion, enter the allowed EcI0 difference between the second-best server and the third one. This value is used
to calculate DL macro-diversity gains. If you selected "EbNt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard
Deviation, enter the allowed Eb/Nt difference between the second-best server and the third one. This value
is used to calculate UL macro-diversity gains.
6. Click Calculate. The calculated shadowing margin is displayed. If you selected "EcI0" or "EbNt UL" as the
standard deviation under Standard Deviation, A9155 also displays the macro-diversity gains for two links and for
three links.
Figure 6.45: The Shadowing Margins and Gains dialogue
424 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

CHAPTER 7
CDMAONE/CDMA2000 NETWORKS
Chapter 7: cdmaOne/CDMA2000 Networks
7 cdmaOne/CDMA2000 Networks
A9155 enables you to create and modify all aspects of cdmaOne, CDMA2000 1xRTT (1st eXpansion Radio Telephone
Technology) and CDMA2000 1xEV-DO (1xEvolution Data Only) Rev.0 and Rev.A networks. Once you have created the
network, A9155 offers many tools to let you verify the network. Based on the results of your tests, you can modify any of
the parameters defining the network.
Planning the CDMA network and creating the network of base stations is explained in "Planning and Optimising CDMA
Base Stations" on page 427. Allocating neighbours is explained in "Planning Neighbours" on page 484 and allocating PN
offset codes is explained in "Planning PN Offsets" on page 492. In this section, you will also find information on how you
can display information on base stations on the map and how you can use the tools in A9155 to study base stations.
Using test mobile data paths to verify the network is explained in "Verifying and Optimising Network Quality" on page 522.
How to filter imported pilot mobile data paths, and how to use the data in coverage predictions is also explained.
A Note on the Terminology Used in This Chapter
In this chapter, the term "CDMA" is used to refer to both IS-95 cdmaOne and CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO technologies.
The terminology used in CDMA is slightly different from the standard terminology used in A9155. Therefore, the terminol-
ogy used in explanations reflects the standard CDMA terminology with the equivalent A9155 terminology given when refer-
ences are made to the user interface.
CDMA A9155
handoff handover
radio configuration terminal
reverse link uplink (UL)
forward link downlink (DL)
7.1 Planning and Optimising CDMA Base Stations

existing ones.
as the TMA, feeder cables, etc. In a CDMA project, you must also add cells to each transmitter. A cell refers to the char-
acteristics of a carrier on a transmitter.
Antenna
- Azimuth
- Mechanical tilt
TMA
Antenna
- Height
Feeder Cable
BTS
- BTS noise figure
- Power
Site
- X, Y coordinates
Figure 7.46: A transmitter
results of calculated coverage predictions can be displayed on the map, compared, or analysed.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 427

A9155 User Manual
terminals. This data can be then used to make quality studies, such as effective service area, noise, or handoff status
predictions, on the network.
"Creating a CDMA Base Station" on page 428
"Planning Neighbours" on page 484
"Planning PN Offsets" on page 492.
7.1.1 Creating a CDMA Base Station

When you create a CDMA site, you create only the geographical point; you must add the transmitters and cells afterwards.
The site, with the transmitters, antennas, equipment, and cells is called a base station.

example, cells. You will usually create a new base station using a station template, as described in "Placing a New Station
Using a Station Template" on page 434. This section describes the following elements of a base station and their param-
eters:
"Cell Definition" on page 431.

428 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

of the site here.
calculations.
The Equipment tab:
- Max Number of Uplink Channel Elements per Carrier: The maximum number of physical radio resources
on the reverse link per carrier for the current site. By default A9155 enters the maximum possible (256).
- Max Number of Downlink Channel Elements per Carrier: The maximum number of physical radio
resources on the forward link per carrier for the current site. By default A9155 enters the maximum possible
(256).
- Max Number of EV-DO Channel Elements per Carrier: The maximum number of EV-DO radio resources
on the reverse link per carrier for the current site. This parameter is used only with CDMA2000 1xEV-DO. By
default A9155 enters the maximum possible (96).
With 1xEV-DO, only one user on the forward link can be served at a given time. This user consumes only one
channel element. On the reverse link, there can be more than one user with each user consuming one channel
element, therefore, the maximum number of EV-DO radio resources applies only to the reverse link.
ment" on page 533.
If no equipment is assigned to the site, A9155 considers the following default values:
- Rake efficiency factor = 1

- MUD factor = 0
- Carrier selection = reverse link minimum noise
- Overhead CEs forward link and reverse link = 0
- The option AS restricted to neighbours is not selected, the option Pool of CEs shared is not selected,
the option Power Pooling between Transmitters is not selected and A9155 uses one channel element
on the forward link or reverse link for any service during power control simulation.

erties dialogue has three additional tabs: the Cells tab (see "Cell Definition" on page 431), the Propagation tab (see
"Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 453), and the Display tab (see "Display Properties of
Objects" on page 33).
The General tab:
name. If you want to change the way A9155 names transmitters, see the Administrator Manual.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 429

A9155 User Manual
- Transmission/Reception: Under Transmission/Reception, you can define the total losses and the noise
figure in the Real text boxes. A9155 can calculate losses and noise according to the characteristics of the
equipment assigned to the transmitter; the calculated values are indicated in the Computed text boxes.
A9155 always considers the values in the Real boxes in prediction studies even if they are different from the
values in the Computed boxes. You can update the values in the Real boxes with the values in the Computed
text boxes. For information, see "Updating the Values for Total Losses and the BTS Noise Figure for Trans-
mitters" on page 132.
You can assign equipment by using the Equipment Specifications dialogue which appears when you click
the Equipment button.
losses you define are used to set the transmitter noise figure and the total transmitter reverse link and forward
link losses:
ment" on page 131.
page 131.
must be positive.
430 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

reception losses.
- Antennas:
the main antenna.
7.1.1.1.3 Cell Definition

can configure a CDMA multi-carrier network. In other words, a transmitter has one cell for every carrier.
the parameters of a CDMA cell. As you create a cell, A9155 calculates appropriate values for some fields based on the
information you have entered. You can, if you wish, modify these values.
The properties of a CDMA cell are found on Cells tab of the Properties dialogue of the transmitter to which it is assigned.
cells, see the Administrator Manual.
Carrier: The number of the carrier and the type of carrier. For CDMA2000 projects, you can choose 1xRTT or
1xEV-DO as the carrier type; for cdmaOne projects, only 1xRTT is available.
The following options are valid for 1xRTT carriers:
- Active: If this cell is active, you must select the Active check box.
- Max Power (dBm): The maximum available forward link power for the cell.
- Pilot Power (dBm): The pilot power.
- Synchro Power (dBm): The synchronisation power.
- Paging Power (dBm): The paging power.
Note: By default, the synchronisation power and paging power are set as absolute values. You
can set these values as relative to the pilot power by right-clicking the Transmitters folder
on the Data tab of the Explorer window and Properties from the context menu. Then, on
the Global Parameters tab of the Properties dialogue, under DL Powers, you can select
Relative to Pilot. The synchronisation power and paging power will then be set as relative
to the pilot power.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 431

A9155 User Manual
- Max DL Load (% Max Power): The percentage of the maximum forward link power (set in Max Power) not
to be exceeded. This limit will be taken into account during the simulation if the options DL Load and Max DL
Load defined per cell are selected. If these options are not selected during a simulation, this value is not taken
into consideration.
- Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum reverse link load factor not to be exceeded. This limit can be taken
into account during the simulation. This limit will be taken into account during the simulation if the options UL
Load Factor and Max UL Load Factor defined per cell are selected. If these options are not selected during
a simulation, this value is not taken into consideration.
- Total Power (dBm): The total transmitted power on forward link. This value can be a simulation result or can
be entered by the user.
- UL Load Factor (%): The reverse link cell load factor. This factor corresponds to the ratio between the reverse
link total interference and the reverse link total noise. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered
by the user.
- Max number of intra-carrier neighbours: The maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours for this cell. This
- Max number of inter-carrier neighbours: The maximum number of inter-carrier neighbours for this cell. This
- Max number of inter-technology neighbours: The maximum number of inter-technology neighbours for this
- Neighbours: You can access a dialogue in which you can set both intra-technology (intra-carrier and inter-
carrier) and inter-technology neighbours by clicking the Browse button ( ). For information on defining
neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 484.
- PN Offset Domain: The Pseudo Noise (PN) offset domain to which the cell belongs. The PN offset domain is
a set of groups, with each group containing several PN offsets.
- PN Offset Reuse Distance (m): The distance within which the PN offset defined for this cell can be reused.
- PN Offset: The PN offset is a time offset used by a cell to shift a Pseudo Noise sequence.
- Power Reserved for Pooling (dB): The power reserved for pooling is the maximum amount of power that
can be allocated to this cell by other transmitters on the site using the same carrier. This value is only used if
the site equipment allows power pooling between transmitters.
The following options are valid for 1xEV-DO carriers:
- Active: If this cell is active, you must select the Active check box.
- Max Power (dBm): The power transmitted by a 1xEV-DO cell when there is at least one user. For 1xEV-DO
carriers, the BTS always transmits at maximum power (the DL maximum power) unless it has no user to sup-
port. When there is no user, the BTS transmits a very low level of power during idle traffic slots (DL maximum
power + Idle gain).
- Idle Power Gain (dB): The gain applied to the DL power when there is no active user connected to the cell.
It must be a negative value.
- MUG Table = f(No. Users): You can access the MUG (Multi-User Gain) table by clicking the Browse button
( ). The MUG table is a graph of gain as a function of the number of users. The average cell throughput is
higher with multiple users than with a single user. This is modelled by the MUG graph.
- Noise Rise Threshold (dB): The noise rise threshold. The noise rise threshold and the acceptable noise rise
margin are considered in the simulation during reverse link congestion. A9155 ensures that the cell reverse
link noise rise is within a range defined by the noise rise threshold plus the margin and the noise rise threshold
minus the margin.
- Acceptable Noise Rise Margin (dB): The acceptable noise rise margin.
- DRC Error Rate (%): The error rate as a percentage received by the cell on the Data Rate Control (DRC)
channel. The cell may receive the DRC channel from a mobile incorrectly. If this happens, the mobile will not
be scheduled for data transmission. This value is taken into account during rate control when A9155 calculates
the average cell throughput on the forward link.
- EV-DO Timeslots Dedicated to BCMS (%): The percentage of timeslots dedicated to Broadcast/Multicast
Services (BCMS). This parameter is taken into account during rate control when A9155 calculates the cell
average forward link throughput.
- EV-DO Timeslots Dedicated to Control Channels (%): The percentage of timeslots dedicated to control
channels (control, pilot, and ACK channels). This parameter is taken into account during rate control when
A9155 calculates the cell average forward link throughput.
- BCMS Rate (kbps): The BCMS rate. Two rates are available: 204.8 kbps and 409.6 kbps. This parameter is
taken into account during rate control when A9155 calculates the cell average forward link throughput.
- Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum reverse link load factor not to be exceeded. This limit can be taken
into account during the simulation.
- Total Power (dBm): The total transmitted power on forward link. This value can be a simulation result or can
be entered by the user.
- UL Load Factor (%): The reverse link cell load factor. This factor corresponds to the ratio between the reverse
link total interference and the reverse link total noise. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered
by the user.
- Max number of intra-carrier neighbours: The maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours for this cell. This
- Max number of inter-carrier neighbours: The maximum number of inter-carrier neighbours for this cell. This
432 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Max number of inter-technology neighbours: The maximum number of inter-technology neighbours for this
- Neighbours: You can access a dialogue in which you can set both intra-technology (intra-carrier and inter-
carrier) and inter-technology neighbours by clicking the Browse button ( ). For information on defining
neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 484.
- PN Offset Domain: The Pseudo Noise (PN) offset domain to which the cell belongs. The PN offset domain is
a set of groups, with each group containing several PN offsets.
- PN Offset Reuse Distance (m): The distance within which the PN offset defined for this cell can be reused.
- PN Offset: The PN offset is a time offset used by a cell to shift a Pseudo Noise sequence.
- Max No. of EV-DO Users: The maximum number of EV-DO carrier users that this cell can support at any
given time.

example, cells. This section describes how to create or modify the following elements of a base station:

c. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 7.47
on page 428).
4. Click OK.

Figure 7.48).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 433

A9155 User Manual
Tips:

Definition" on page 431, through the Properties dialogue of the transmitter where the cell is located. How you access the
Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new cell or modifying an existing cell.
appears.
6. Modify the parameters described in "Cell Definition" on page 431.
7. Click OK.
Tips:

ent parameters, instead of building the network by first creating the site, then the transmitters, and finally by adding the
cells.

Tips:
page 38.
You can also place a series of stations using a station template. You do this by defining an area on the map where you
want to place the stations. A9155 calculates the placement of each station according to the defined hexagonal cell radius
in the station template. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station Template" on
page 435.
434 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Once you have created one or more stations, the hexagons describing their cell radius remain visible. You can choose not
to display them.
To hide the hexagons after creating stations using the Hexagonal Design button ( ) or the New Station button ( ):
On the Data tab, clear the display check box beside the Hexagonal Design folder.
site.

place the station.

A9155 comes with CDMA station templates, but you can also create and modify station templates. The tools for working

Name of the station template, the number of Sectors, i.e., the number of transmitters on the site, and the Hexagon
Radius, i.e., the theoretical radius of the hexagonal area covered by each sector.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 435

A9155 User Manual
the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. For information on propagation models, see "Assigning a Propa-
gation Model to One Transmitter" on page 453.
5. Click the Transmitter tab. In this tab (see Figure 7.52). You can modify the following:
- Active: If the transmitters in this station template are to be active, you must select the Active check box.
Active transmitters are displayed in red in the Transmitters folder of the Data tab.
- Transmission/Reception: Under Transmission/Reception, you can define the total losses and the noise
figure in the Real text boxes. A9155 can calculate losses and noise according to the characteristics of the
equipment assigned to the transmitter; the calculated values are indicated in the Computed text boxes.
A9155 always considers the values in the Real boxes in prediction studies even if they are different from the
values in the Computed boxes. You can update the values in the Real boxes with the values in the Computed
text boxes. For information, see "Updating the Values for Total Losses and the BTS Noise Figure for Trans-
mitters" on page 132.
You can assign equipment by using the Equipment Specifications dialogue which appears when you click
the Equipment button. For information on the Equipment Specifications dialogue, see "Transmitter Descrip-
tion" on page 429.
436 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

6. Click the CDMA/CDMA2000 tab. In this tab (see Figure 7.53), you modify the specifications of the Carriers (each
corresponding to a cell) that each transmitter supports. For information on carriers and cells, see "Cell Definition"
on page 431.
- You can select the Carriers used by each transmitter.
- Under Power, you can define the Pilot, the Paging, and the Synchro powers, and the Idle Power Gain.
- Under Simulation Constraints, you can modify the Max Power, the Max DL Load (defined as a percentage
of the maximum power), Max No. of Users (EV-DO), Pooled Power, and the Max UL Load Factor.
- Under Load Conditions, you can modify the Total Transmitted Power and the UL Load Factor.
- You can also modify the Number of Uplink and Downlink Channel Elements and select the Equipment.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 437

A9155 User Manual
Figure 7.53: Station Template Properties dialogue CDMA/CDMA2000 tab
7. Click the Neighbours tab. In this tab (see Figure 7.54), you can modify the Max Number of Intra- and Inter-Car-
rier Neighbours and the Max Number of Inter-Technology Neighbours. For information on defining neigh-
bours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 484.
your changes.
438 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


after each one.
close the dialogue.
6. Click OK.

deleted.
4. Click OK.

You can create base stations individually as explained in "Creating a CDMA Base Station" on page 428, or you can create
one or several base stations by using station templates as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template"
on page 434. However, if you have a large data-planning project and you already have existing data, you can import this
data into your current A9155 document and create a group of base stations.
page 84.

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 439

A9155 User Manual
Important: The table you copy from must have the same column layout as the table you are pasting
data into.



A repeater receives, amplifies, and re-transmits the radiated or conducted RF carrier in both the forward and reverse link.
It has a donor side and a server side. The donor side receives the signal from a donor transmitter. This signal may be
carried by different types of links such as radio link or microwave link. The server side re-transmits the received signal.
440 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

The additional coverage these systems provide to transmitters on the forward link.
The reverse link total gain value in service area studies (effective service area and reverse link EbNt service area)
and the noise rise generated at the donor transmitter by the repeater.
"Hints for Updating Repeater Parameters" on page 443

to calculate the reverse link loss to be added to the donor transmitter reverse link losses. The noise figure must
be a positive value.
calculations.
modify.

identify the repeater and the donor transmitter. In the Explorer window, the repeater is found in the Transmitters
folder of the Data tab under its donor transmitter.
page 442.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 441

A9155 User Manual

paste it into the Repeaters table in your current A9155 document. You can open the Repeaters table by right-
clicking the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Repeaters > Open Table
pasting data into.

antenna.
ton.
the feeder.
5. Click the Coverage Site tab. You can modify the following parameters:
442 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

before clicking the Calculate button. A9155 uses the forward link total gain values to calculate the signal level
received from the repeater. The reverse link total gain value is considered in reverse link EbNt service area
studies.
The forward link total gain is applied to each power (pilot power, SCH power, etc.). It takes into account losses
between the donor transmitter and the repeater, donor characteristics (donor antenna gain, reception feeder
losses), amplification gain, and coverage characteristics (coverage antenna gain and transmission feeder
losses).
The reverse link total gain is applied to each terminal power. It takes into account losses between the donor
transmitter and the repeater, donor part characteristics (donor antenna gain, transmission feeder losses), am-
plification gain and coverage part characteristics (coverage antenna gain and reception feeder losses).

properties of the antenna. Then, enter the Azimuth and the Mechanical Downtilt. By default, the char-
acteristics (antenna, azimuth, height, etc.) of the repeater coverage side correspond to the characteristics
of the donor transmitter.
the feeder.

You can update the reverse link and forward link total gains of all repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 443

A9155 User Manual


its tooltip and label identify the remote antenna and the donor transmitter. In the Explorer window, the remote
antenna is found in the Transmitters folder of the Data tab under its donor transmitter.

paste it into the Remote Antennas table in your current A9155 document. You can open the Remote Antennas
table by right-clicking the Transmitters folder in the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Remote
Antennas > Open Table from the context menu.
data into.

Note: A remote antenna does not have equipment and its amplification gain is set to zero.
- Under Donor-Repeater Link, select Optical Fibre Link and enter the Cable Losses.
5. Click the Coverage Site tab. You can modify the following parameters:
444 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

before clicking the Calculate button. A9155 uses the forward link total gain values to calculate the signal level
received from the remote antenna. The reverse link total gain value is considered in reverse link EbNt service
area studies.
The forward link total gain is applied to each power (pilot power, SCH power, etc.). It takes into account losses
between the donor transmitter and the remote antenna.
The reverse link total gain is applied to each terminal power. It takes into account losses between the donor
transmitter and the remote antenna.

the feeder.

You can update the reverse link and forward link total gains of all remote antennas by selecting Remote
Antennas > Calculate Gains from the Transmitters context menu.

tages:

In a larger project, especially when you are making repeated studies in order to see the effects of small changes
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 445

A9155 User Manual
in site configuration, the savings in time are considerable. Limiting the number of sites by drawing a computation
zone also limits the resulting calculated coverage.
defines the area where A9155 computes path loss matrices, coverage studies, Monte Carlo, power control simu-
lations, etc., while the focus zone or hot spot zone is the area taken into consideration when generating reports
and results.
studied.

resolution.
"Studying Signal Level Coverage" on page 447

In A9155, you can make a point analysis to study reception along a profile between a reference transmitter and a CDMA
user. Before studying a site, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic
data into account and computes losses along the transmitter-receiver path. The profile is calculated in real time, using the
propagation model, allowing you to study the profile and get a prediction on each selected point.
lowing:
In CDMA2000, 1xEV-DO always transmits at full power, unlike 1xRTT. Therefore, if you do a point analysis on all
carriers, the values displayed will always be for the maximum power transmitted by the cell, in other words, the
power for the 1xEV-DO carrier. In order to display the values of the 1xRTT carrier, you must select it. When you
select the 1xRTT carrier, the point analysis displays the strength of the received pilot signal.
5. Select the Carrier to be displayed at the top of the Profile tab.

The profile analysis appears in the Profile tab of the Point Analysis Tool window. The altitude (in metres) is
446 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA



- Select the Shadowing Taken into Account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability,
and select "From Model" from the Shadowing Margin list.
class.

carrier.

As you are building your radio-planning project, you may want to check the coverage of a new site without having to calcu-
late the entire project. You can do this by selecting the site with its transmitters and then creating a new coverage predic-
tion.
the strength of the best signal received at each pixel of the area studied.

Tip: If you wish to study only transmitters by their status, at this step you could group them by
status.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 447

A9155 User Manual

mitters.
and you can obtain more accurate results by using propagation models best suited for each distance for the
main and extended matrices.
e. In the Main Matrix columns:
- Select a Main Propagation Model
- Enter a Main Calculation Radius and Main Resolution.
f. If desired, in the Extended Matrix columns:
- Select an Extended Propagation Model
- Enter an Extended Calculation Radius and Extended Resolution.
g. Close the table.

Display Resolution
Prediction
City Centre 5m
City 20 m
County 50 m
State 100 m
- At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the signal level range to be considered. In Figure 7.56, a signal
level greater than or equal to -120 dBm will be considered.
- Under Server, select "All" to consider signal levels from all servers.
Probability.
class.
- You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. In
CDMA2000, 1xEV-DO always transmits at full power, unlike 1xRTT. Therefore, if you select "All", the
values displayed will always be for the maximum power transmitted by the cell, in other words, the power
for the 1xEV-DO carrier. In order to make a coverage prediction on the transmitted power of the 1xRTT
carrier, you must select the carrier. When you select the 1xRTT carrier, the coverage prediction displays
the strength of the received pilot signal.
448 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

( ).

When you make a coverage prediction on a group of base stations, A9155 calculates all base stations that are active,
filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects a rectangle contain-
ing the computation zone. The computation zone is the area covered by the rectangle defined by the calculation radius.
When you set the propagation model, you can define the calculation radius. For information on setting the propagation
model and defining the calculation radius, see "Assigning a Propagation Model" on page 452.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 449

A9155 User Manual

"Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active" on page 455
"CDMA-Specific Coverage Predictions" on page 466

450 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Manual.
If you are working in a multi-user A9155 environment, ensure that the path to the Shared Directory is correct.
5. Click OK.
you can check if the path loss matrices are invalid without creating a coverage prediction.
4. Click the Propagation tab. The path loss matrix information is listed in the Available Results table. You have the
following display options:

are recalculated.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 451

A9155 User Manual
Figure 7.58: Path loss matrices statistics

for those to which you have assigned a propagation model either individually or as part of a group.
Important: When you assign a propagation model globally, you override any selection you might have
made to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters.
If, after assigning a propagation model to an individual transmitter or to a group of transmitters, you assign a prop-
agation model globally, you will override the propagation models that you had assigned to individual transmitters
or to a group of transmitters.
3. If you have assigned a default propagation model for coverage predictions, as described in "Assigning a Default
Propagation Model for Coverage Predictions" on page 454, this is the propagation model that will be used for all
transmitters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)." If a transmitter has any other propagation model
chosen as the main propagation model, that is the propagation model that will be used.
In this section, the following methods of assigning a propagation model are explained:
"Assigning a Default Propagation Model for Coverage Predictions" on page 454.

452 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA



selected group.

- Main Resolution
ters.
appears.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 453

A9155 User Manual
Assigning a Default Propagation Model for Coverage Predictions
You can assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions. This propagation model is used as for all transmit-
ters whose main propagation model is "(Default model)."
To assign a default propagation model for coverage predictions:
6. Enter a Default Resolution. When you create a new coverage prediction, the resolution by default is the value
you have entered here.
Tip: By making the necessary entry in the atoll.ini file, if you clear the value entered in the Res-
olution box when you create a coverage prediction, A9155 will calculate the coverage pre-
diction using the currently defined default resolution. That way, if you have many coverage
predictions, you can change their resolution by changing the default resolution and recalcu-
lating the coverage predictions. A9155 will then calculate them using the updated resolu-
tion. For information on changing entries in the atoll.ini file, see the Administrator Manual.
7. Click OK. The selected propagation model will be used for coverage predictions for all transmitters whose main
propagation model is "(Default model)."

the toolbar.


454 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

page 71.

4. Select Activate Transmitter from the context menu. The transmitter is now active.
3. Select Cells > Open Table. The Cells table appears with each cells parameters in a second row.

specific to CDMA are covered in "CDMA-Specific Coverage Predictions" on page 466.
Once you have created a coverage prediction, you can use the coverage predictions context menu to make the coverage
prediction into a template which will appear in the Study Types dialogue. You can also select Duplicate from the cover-
age predictions context menu to create a copy. By duplicating an existing coverage prediction that has the parameters
you wish to study, you can create a new coverage prediction more quickly. If you clone a coverage prediction, by selecting
Clone from the context menu, you can create a copy of the coverage prediction with the calculated coverage. You can

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 455

A9155 User Manual

for each pixel.
ability.
class.
- You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. In CDMA2000,
1xEV-DO always transmits at full power, unlike 1xRTT. Therefore, if you select "All", the values displayed will
always be for the maximum power transmitted by the cell, in other words, the power for the 1xEV-DO carrier.
In order to make a coverage prediction on the transmitted power of the 1xRTT carrier, you must select the
carrier. When you select the 1xRTT carrier, the coverage prediction displays the strength of the received pilot
signal.

8. Choose to display the results by best signal level. The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds.
For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
Selecting "All" or "Best signal level" on the Conditions tab will give you the same results because A9155 displays
the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best signal level" necessitates, however, the longest time
for calculation.
Figure 7.60).
456 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


A coverage prediction by transmitter allows the user to predict which server is the best at each pixel. You can base the
coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range.
for each pixel.
level greater than or equal to -120 dBm or greater then -85 dBm will be considered.
- Under Server, select "Best signal level."
You can also define a Margin. A9155 will then consider the best signal level on each pixel and any other signal
level within the defined margin of the best one.
ability.
class.
- You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 457

A9155 User Manual

"Second best signal level" on the Conditions tab setting "Discrete Values" as the Display
Type and "Transmitter" as the Field on the Display tab.

range.
for each pixel.
- Under Server, select "Best signal level" and define a Margin. A9155 will then consider the best signal level
on each pixel and any other signal level within the defined margin of the best one.
ability.
class.
- You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. In CDMA2000,
1xEV-DO always transmits at full power, unlike 1xRTT. Therefore, if you select "All", the values displayed will
always be for the maximum power transmitted by the cell, in other words, the power for the 1xEV-DO carrier.
458 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

In order to make a coverage prediction on the transmitted power of the 1xRTT carrier, you must select the
carrier. When you select the 1xRTT carrier, the coverage prediction displays the strength of the received pilot
signal.



3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 459

A9155 User Manual


Once you have calculated the coverage prediction, you can use the Point Analysis tool to analyse the coverage predic-
tion. Therefore, you will recreate the conditions of the coverage prediction.
You can also use the Reception tab of the Point Analysis tool without a coverage prediction, to study reception at any
point on the map as long as you have valid path loss matrices.
appears.
4. Recreate the conditions of the coverage prediction using the options in the Analysis Properties dialogue:
- Shadowing taken into account: If the coverage prediction using shadowing, select the Shadowing taken
into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability and select "From Model" from the
Shadowing Margin list.
- Indoor Coverage: If the coverage prediction calculated indoor coverage, select the Indoor Coverage check
box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
You can also use the Analysis Properties dialogue to:
5. At the top of the Reception tab, select the Carrier to be analysed.
460 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


Notes:

erties dialogue.
use the computation zone. However, by using a focus zone for the report, you can create a report for a specific number of
4. Select Generate Report from the context menu. the coverage prediction report table appears. The report is based
on the hot spot zones and on the focus zone if available or on the hot spot zones and computation zone if there
is no focus zone.
3. Select Generate Report from the context menu. the coverage prediction report table appears. The report shows
zone if available or on the calculation zone if there is no focus zone.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 461

A9155 User Manual
tion map:
- "Population" (Population [total]: The total number of inhabitants inside the zone.
5. Click OK.

page 460.
462 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


erage between them.
figure.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 463

A9155 User Manual
A new site is added, either by creating the site and adding the transmitters, as explained in "Creating a CDMA Base
Station" on page 428, or by placing a station template, as explained in "Placing a New Station Using a Station Template"
on page 434. Once the new base station has been added, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated, but then
it will be impossible to compare the two predictions. Instead, the original signal level coverage prediction can be copied by
selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated to show the effect of the new base station (see
Figure 7.67).

resolution.
464 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Intersection
- Union
- Difference
new site.
(see Figure 7.70).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 465

A9155 User Manual
resolution.
- Intersection
- Union
- Difference
5. Click OK to create the comparison. The comparison in Figure 7.71, shows clearly the increase in coverage due at
7.1.9.8 CDMA-Specific Coverage Predictions

In CDMA, the quality of the signal and the size of the area that can be covered are influenced by the network load. As the
network load increases, the area a cell can effectively cover decreases. For this reason, the network load must be defined
in order to calculate CDMA-specific coverage predictions.
466 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

If you have traffic maps, you can do a Monte-Carlo simulation to model power control and evaluate the network load for a
generated user distribution. If you do not have traffic maps, A9155 can calculate the network load using the reverse link
load factor and forward link total power defined for each cell.
In this section, the CDMA-specific coverage predictions will be calculated using reverse link load factor and forward link
total power parameters defined at the cell level. For the purposes of these studies, each pixel is considered a non-inter-
fering user with a defined service, mobility type, and terminal.
Before making a prediction, you will have to set the reverse link load factor and forward link total power and the parameters
that define the services and users. These are explained in the following sections:
"Setting the Reverse Link Load Factor and the Forward Link Total Power" on page 467.
Several different types of CDMA-specific coverage predictions are explained in this section. The following quality studies
are explained:
"Studying Service Area (EbNt) Uplink and Downlink for 1xRTT" on page 474
"Studying Service Area (EbNt) Reverse Link for EV-DO" on page 475
The following noise studies, also coverage predictions, are explained:
"Studying Forward Link Total Noise" on page 478
Another type of coverage prediction, the handoff study, is also explained:
"Making a Handoff Status Coverage Prediction" on page 479.
You can also make a point analysis using the Point Analysis window. The analysis is calculated using reverse link load
factor and forward link total power parameters defined at the cell level and provided for a user-definable probe receiver
which has a terminal, a mobility and a service:
"Making an AS Analysis" on page 480.
You can define a RSCP threshold to further define how results are displayed. A9155 uses the RSCP threshold to calculate
coverage predictions and to make the AS analysis. A9155 checks which pixels have a pilot signal level which exceeds the
defined RSCP threshold. Defining the RSCP threshold is explained in the following section:
"Defining the RSCP Threshold" on page 472
7.1.9.8.1 Setting the Reverse Link Load Factor and the Forward Link Total Power
If you are setting the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power for a single transmitter, you can set these
parameters on the Cells tab of the transmitters Properties dialogue. However, you can set the reverse link load factor
and the forward link total power for all cells using the Cells table.
To set the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power using the Cells table:
- Total Power (dBm)
- UL Load Factor (%)
For a definition of the values, see "Cell Definition" on page 431.

The different services offered by a CDMA network require different data rates. Voice, for example, does not require a very
high data rate whereas a data service being used for video conferencing requires a much higher data rate. CDMA
responds to the differing data rate requirements with a range of carriers. For example, CDMA2000 can provide voice using
cdmaOne. Data services, which require higher data rates than voice, can be provided using 1xRTT or 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 or
Rev. A.
For more information on the data rates available for voice, 1xRTT, and 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 and Rev. A, see "Data Rates
Available for Services in CDMA" on page 532.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 467

A9155 User Manual
Note: You must define a 1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearer before you can model services using it.
For information on defining 1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearers, "Defining the 1xEV-DO Rev. A
Radio Bearers" on page 533.
The CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 reverse link traffic channel allows five data rates. The CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Rev. A
reverse link traffic channel can have many more different data rates. In A9155, the CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Rev. A reverse
link traffic channel is modelled using radio bearers. You must define a 1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearer before you can model
services using it.
"Modelling Services" on page 468
"Creating a Mobility Type" on page 470
Modelling Services
Services are the various services available to subscribers. In CDMA, services can be either voice or data. cdmaOne alone
offers only voice services. CDMA2000 can provide voice using cdmaOne, and data using 1xRTT or 1xEV-DO.
This section explains how to create a service. The options available depend on the type of service you create.
Only the following parameters are used in coverage predictions:
Voice-specific parameters:
- Handoff capabilities
- Terminal
- Max TCH Power (dBm)
- UL Target (dB)
- DL Target (dB)
- Reception Equipment
- UL Pilot Threshold (dB)
- UL Gain FCH/Pilot (dB)
- Body loss
1xRTT-specific parameters:
- Handoff capabilities
- Terminal
- Max TCH Power (dBm)
- UL Target (dB)
- DL Target (dB)
- Reception Equipment
- UL Pilot Threshold (dB)
- UL Gain FCH/Pilot (dB)
- UL Gain SCH/Pilot (dB)
- Body loss
1xEV-DO-specific parameters:
- Body loss
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder.

6. Enter a Name for the service. A9155 proposes a name for the service, but you can change the name to something
more descriptive.
7. Select a Type for the service. The options available depend on the type of service:
- Speech: Available for all CDMA projects. The following options are available for services with the type
Speech:
- Preferred Carrier: Select the preferred carrier for the service. This is the carrier that will be used during
simulations, if the transmitter supports it. If the preferred carrier is not available, A9155 will choose another
carrier using the carrier selection mode defined in the site equipment properties.
- Priority: Enter a priority for the service. A priority of "0" gives the lowest priority. The priority is used during
simulations to decide which terminal will be rejected when the network is overloaded.
- Soft Handoff Allowed: Select the Soft Handoff Allowed check box if this service can have a soft hand-
off.
- Activity Factor FCH: Enter an activity factor for the FCH on the uplink (reverse link) and on the downlink
(forward link). The activity factor can be from "0," indicating no activity during connection, to "1," indicating
468 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

constant activity during connection. The activity factor is used to calculate the average power transmitted
on the FCH.
- Application Throughput: The application throughput is not used for services with the type Speech.
example, in a voice connection the body loss, due to the proximity of the users head, is estimated to be
3dB.
- 1xRTT Data: Only available for CDMA2000 projects. The following options are available for services with the
type 1xRTT Data:
- Soft Handoff Allowed: Select the Soft Handoff Allowed check box if this service can have a soft hand-
off.
- Activity Factor FCH: Enter an activity factor for the FCH on the uplink (reverse link) and on the downlink
(forward link). The activity factor can be from "0," indicating no activity during connection, to "1," indicating
constant activity during connection. The activity factor is used to calculate the average power transmitted
on the FCH.
- Application Throughput: The application throughput is not used for services with the type Speech.
- Rate Probabilities SCH: Under Rate Probabilities SCH, you can enter the probability of the service
having the specified rate, from 2 to 16 times the nominal rate (defined in the terminal properties), on the
uplink (reverse link) and on the downlink (forward link). The sum of the probabilities must be lower than or
equal to 1. The rate probabilities are used during simulations to determine the throughput requested by
each user.
3dB.
- 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 Data: Only available for CDMA2000 projects. The following options are available for services
with the type 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 Data:
- Application Throughput: Under Application Throughput, enter a Scaling Factor between the appli-
cation throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control) throughput and a throughput Offset in kilobits per
second. The application throughput is calculated by multiplying the RLC throughput by the scaling factor
and subtracting the offset.
- Rate Probabilities UL: Under Rate Probabilities UL, you can enter the probability of the service having
the specified rate on the uplink (reverse link) for each of the 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 data rates. The sum of the
probabilities must be lower than or equal to 1. The rate probabilities are used during simulations to deter-
mine the throughput requested by each user.
- UL Throughput Due to TCP Acknowledgement: If the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is used on
the downlink (forward link), check the TCP Used check box. When TCP is used, reverse link traffic due to
acknowledgements is generated. The traffic generated is calculated using the graph which describes the
reverse link traffic due to TCP acknowledgements as a function of the forward link application throughput.
The generated traffic is taken into account in simulation during the reverse link power control.
3dB.
- 1xEV-DO Rev. A Data: Only available for CDMA2000 projects. The following options are available for serv-
ices with the type 1xEV-DO Rev. A Data:
- Application Throughput: Under Application Throughput, enter a Scaling Factor between the appli-
cation throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control) throughput and a throughput Offset in kilobits per
second. The application throughput is calculated by multiplying the RLC throughput by the scaling factor
and subtracting the offset.
- Rate Probabilities UL: Under Rate Probabilities UL, you can enter the probability of the service having
the specified rate. In the column marked with the New Column icon ( ), select a Radio Bearer Index
and enter a Usage Probability. A9155 automatically creates a new blank column. The sum of the prob-
abilities must be lower than or equal to 1. The rate probabilities are used during simulations to determine
the throughput requested by each user. If the bearer is not defined under Rate Probabilities UL, it is
assumed that there are no users using the bearer.
- UL Throughput Due to TCP Acknowledgement: If the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is used on
the downlink (forward link), check the TCP Used check box. When TCP is used, reverse link traffic due to
acknowledgements is generated. The traffic generated is calculated using the graph which describes the
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 469

A9155 User Manual
reverse link traffic due to TCP acknowledgements as a function of the forward link application throughput.
The generated traffic is taken into account in simulation during the reverse link power control.
3dB.
8. If you selected "1xEV-DO Rev. 0 Data" or "1xEV-DO Rev. A Data" as the Type in step 5., continue to step 9. If
you selected Speech" or "1xRTT Data" as the Type in step 5., an additional tab, the EbNt tab, is available.
Click the EbNt tab. In the EbNt tab, you must define each possible combination of radio configuration and SCH
factor. The SCH factor is the multiplying factor of the terminal nominal rate used to calculate the data rate. The
following table lists the SCH factors available and the corresponding data rates.
SCH Factor Data Rate

0 FCH nominal rate
2 (FCH nominal rate) + 2*(FCH nominal rate)
For each combination, you must define the thresholds, targets, and gains:
- Terminal: Select a radio configuration from the list.

- SCH Factor: Enter an SCH factor.
- Min. and Max. TCH Power (dBm): Enter the minimum and maximum TCH power. The TCH can be equal to
the FCH or the SCH, depending on the entered SCH factor. The values entered can be absolute to relative to
the pilot power, depending on the option chosen on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties
dialogue. The minimum and maximum traffic channel power make up the dynamic range for forward link power
control.
- UL Target (dB): Enter the EbNt required on the reverse link for TCH. The TCH can be equal to the FCH or
the SCH, depending on the entered SCH factor. The value defined for the UL Target is only used when the
reverse link power control is based on traffic quality as set on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters
- DL Target (dB): Enter the EbNt required on the forward link for TCH. The TCH can be equal to the FCH or
the SCH, depending on the entered SCH factor.
- Reception Equipment: Select the type of reception equipment from the list.
- UL Pilot Threshold (dB): Enter the pilot EcNt required on the reverse link. The value defined for the UL Pilot
Threshold is only used when the reverse link power control is based on pilot quality as set on the Global
Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue.
- UL Gain FCH/Pilot (dB): Enter the FCH gain on the reverse link relative to the pilot. The value defined for the
UL Gain FCH/Pilot is only used when the reverse link power control is based on pilot quality as set on the
Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue.
- UL Gain SCH/Pilot (dB): Enter the SCH gain on the reverse link relative to the pilot. The value defined for the
UL Gain SCH/Pilot is only used when the reverse link power control is based on pilot quality as set on the
Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. This value is not used for services of Type
"Speech."
9. Click OK.
In CDMA, information about receiver mobility is important to efficiently manage the active set: a mobile used by someone
travelling a certain speed and a mobile used by a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same transmitters.
ET_AddcI0 requirements and the Ec/Nt threshold (used only by 1xEV-DO) are largely dependent on mobile speed.
The following parameters are used in coverage predictions:
T_Add
T_Drop
Min. EcNt (UL)
- T_Add: Enter or modify the minimum EcI0 required from a transmitter to be the best server in the active set.
- T_Drop: Enter or modify the minimum EcI0 required from a transmitter not to be rejected from the active set.
470 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Min. EcNt (UL): Enter or modify the minimum EcNt required on the reverse link. This parameter is only used
for CDMA2000 1xEV-DO. This parameter is considered during reverse link power control in order to calculate
the required reverse link pilot power.
- Max Rate = f(CI) (Rev 0): The graph of the data rate on the forward link as a function of (CI). This parameter
is only used for CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Rev 0.
- Max Rate = f(CI) (Rev A): The graph of the data rate on the forward link as a function of (CI). This parameter
is only used for CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Rev A.
6. Click OK.
Modelling Terminals
In CDMA, a radio configuration is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or
a cars on-board navigation device. In A9155, radio configurations are modelled using terminals.
The following parameters are used in coverage predictions:
Reception equipment
Gain and losses
Noise figure
Rho factor
Voice and 1xRTT-specific parameters:
- Active set size on FCH and SCH
- Number of fingers
- DL rake factor
- Pilot power percentage
- Nominal rate
1xEV-DO Rev. 0-specific parameters:
- Acknowledgement (ACK) channel gain
- Data Rate Control (DRC) channel gains
- Data channel gains
1xEV-DO Rev. A-specific parameters:
- Acknowledgement (ACK) channel gain
- Radio Reverse Indicator (RRI) channel gain
- Data Rate Control (DRC) channel gains
- Data channel and Auxiliary pilot gains
- Type: You can change the type of equipment.
right-click the Terminals folder in the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder on the Data tab and select
Reception Equipment from the context menu.
- Min. Power: Set the minimum transmission power. The minimum and maximum transmission power make up
the dynamic range for reverse link power control in simulations.
- Noise Figure: Set the terminal noise figure.
- Rho factor (%): This parameter enables A9155 to take into account the self-interference produced by the ter-
minal. Because hardware equipment is not perfect, the input signal experiences some distortion which affects,
in turn, the output signal. This factor defines how much distortion the system generates. Entering 100% means
the system is perfect (there is no distortion) and the output signal will be 100% equal to the input signal. On
the other hand, if you specify a value different than 100%, A9155 considers that the transmitted energy is not
100% signal and contains a small percentage of interference generated by the equipment, i.e., self-interfer-
ence. A9155 considers this parameter to calculate the signal to noise ratio in the reverse link.
6. Click the 1xRTT tab. You can modify the following parameters:
- DL Rake Factor: Set the forward link rake factor. This enables A9155 to model the rake receiver on the for-
ward link.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 471

A9155 User Manual
- Active Set Size: Set the active set size for both the fundamental channel (FCH) and the supplementary
channel (SCH). The active set size is the maximum number of transmitters to which a terminal can be con-
nected at one time.
Note: For EV-DO-capable terminals, the FCH active set size also determines the active set site
on the reverse link.
- Number of Fingers: Enter the maximum number of signals that the terminal can recombine. The value of this
field must be lower than the value of the active set size. The value in this field is the same for both FCH and
SCH.
- Nominal Rate: Set the nominal rate on both the Downlink and the Uplink.
- Pilot Power Percentage: Enter the percentage of the total mobile power that is dedicated to the reverse link
pilot power. This parameter is used during the reverse link power control (if based on traffic quality) in order
to calculate the mobile power.
7. Click the 1xEV-DO Rev 0 tab (available only for CDMA2000). The values on this tab are relative to the reverse link
pilot power. They are added to the required reverse link pilot power in order to calculate power on the ACK, DRC,
and traffic data channels. You can modify the following parameters:
- Acknowledgement Channel Gain: Enter the gain on the acknowledgement (ACK) channel.
- Data Rate Control Channel Gains (DRC): Under Data Rate Control Channel Gains (DRC), enter the gain
for the following handoff types: No Handoff, Softer, and Soft handoff.
- Data Channel Gains: Under Data Channel Gains, enter the gain for each supported reverse link rate on the
traffic data channel.
8. Click the 1xEV-DO Rev A tab (available only for CDMA2000). The values on this tab are relative to the reverse
link pilot power. They are added to the required reverse link pilot power in order to calculate power on the ACK,
RRI, DRC, and traffic data channels. You can modify the following parameters:
- Acknowledgement Channel Gain: Enter the gain on the acknowledgement (ACK) channel.
- Radio Reverse Indicator (RRI) Channel Gain: Enter the gain on the radio reverse indicator channel.
- Data Rate Control Channel Gains (DRC): Under Data Rate Control Channel Gains (DRC), enter the gain
for the following handoff types: No Handoff, Softer, and Soft handoff.
- Data Channels/Auxiliary Pilot Gains: Under Data Channels/Auxiliary Pilot Gains, enter the gains on the
traffic data and auxiliary pilot channels according to the radio bearer index. The auxiliary pilot is only used the
highest rates.
9. Click OK.
7.1.9.8.3 Defining the RSCP Threshold

To define the minimum pilot RSCP threshold:
2. Right-click on the Predictions folder. The context menu appears.
5. Under Calculation Limitation, enter a Min. Pilot RSCP Threshold.
6. Click OK.

explained:
"Studying Service Area (EbNt) Uplink and Downlink for 1xRTT" on page 474
"Studying Service Area (EbNt) Reverse Link for EV-DO" on page 475
"Studying the Forward Link EV-DO Throughput" on page 474
"Studying Effective Service Area" on page 476
"Creating a Quality Study Using Quality Indicators" on page 476.
Note: A table listing quality indicators (BER, BLER, etc.) to be analysed is available. Quality stud-
ies proposed by A9155 depend on quality indicators specified in this table.
received sufficiently well to be added to the probe mobile active set.
A9155 calculates the best pilot quality received on each pixel. Then, depending on the coverage prediction definition, it
compares this value either to the EcI0 threshold defined for the selected mobility type, or to user-defined EcI0 thresh-
472 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

olds. The pixel is coloured if the condition is fulfilled (in other words, if the best EcI0 is higher than the EcI0 mobility
threshold, T_Add, or specified EcI0 thresholds).
4. Select Pilot Reception Analysis (Ec/I0) and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
A9155 will calculate the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total power
defined in the cell properties.
If you want the pilot signal quality prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into
class.
Figure 7.72: Simulation settings for a coverage prediction on overlapping zones

For a pilot signal quality prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "EcI0 (dB)" is selected
by default. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the pilot signal quality. For information on defining
- Where at least one transmitter is in the active set: Select "Unique" as the Display Type.
- Where at least one transmitter is in the active set, with information on the best server: Select "Discrete
Value" as the Display Type and "Transmitter" as the Field.
- The pilot quality relative to the EcI0 threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "EcI0
margin (dB)" as the Field.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 473

A9155 User Manual
Studying Service Area (EbNt) Uplink and Downlink for 1xRTT
A9155 calculates the traffic channel quality on FCH (as defined by EbNt) when using the maximum power allowed.
In the coverage prediction, the forward link service area is limited by the maximum traffic channel power allowable on FCH
per cell and by the pilot quality. The reverse link service area is limited by the maximum terminal power allowable on FCH
and by the pilot quality. On both the forward and reverse links, if the received pilot is below the set threshold on a given
pixel, A9155 will not display the traffic channel quality. Mobile macro-diversity is taken in consideration to evaluate the
traffic channel quality (EbNt). A9155 combines the signal from each transmitter in the probe mobile active set.
To make a coverage prediction on service area (Eb/Nt) forward link or reverse link:
4. Select one of the following studies and click OK:
- Service Area (Eb/Nt) Uplink
- Service Area (Eb/Nt) Downlink
The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
You must select a 1xRTT-capable Terminal, a 1xRTT Service, and a Mobility, as defined in "Service and User
Modelling" on page 467. You must also select a 1xRTT Carrier.
class.

forward link or reverse link prediction makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the
traffic channel quality. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on
page 33.

- The throughput on the forward or reverse link: Select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Rate
(Kbps)" as the Field.
Studying the Forward Link EV-DO Throughput
A9155 calculates the pilot channel quality (as defined by EcNt) and, using the calculated EcNt, A9155 calcultes the
maximum data rate that can be supplied.
To make a forward link EV-DO throughput coverage prediction:
474 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

4. Select Service Area (Eb/Nt) Downlink and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
You must select an EV-DO-capable Terminal, an EV-DO Service, and a Mobility, as defined in "Service and
User Modelling" on page 467. You must also select an EV-DO Carrier.
class.

By default, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Max EbNt (dB)" is selected when you make
a service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction. For a forward link EV-DO throughput coverage prediction, you can,
however, change the display to one of the following:
- The EcNt ratio: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "CI (dB)" as the Field.
- The throughput on the forward link: Select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Rate (Kbps)" as the
Field.
Studying Service Area (EbNt) Reverse Link for EV-DO
A9155 calculates the reverse link EV-DO traffic channel quality (EbNt) with an uplink data channel rate of 9.6 kbps. The
service area is limited by the maximum terminal power allowed and by the pilot quality. Mobile macro-diversity is taken in
consideration to evaluate the traffic channel quality (EbNt). A9155 combines the signal from each transmitter in the probe
mobile active set.
To make a coverage prediction on service area (Eb/Nt) reverse link:
4. Select Service Area (Eb/Nt) Uplink and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
You must select an EV-DO-capable Terminal, an EV-DO Service, and a Mobility, as defined in "Service and
User Modelling" on page 467. You must also select an EV-DO Carrier.
class.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 475

A9155 User Manual
reverse link prediction makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the traffic channel
quality with an uplink data channel rate of 9.6 kbps. For information on defining display properties, see "Display
Properties of Objects" on page 33.
- The throughput: Select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Rate (Kbps)" as the Field.
The effective service area is the intersection zone between the pilot reception area, and the reverse link and forward link
service areas. In other words, the effective service area prediction calculates where a service actually is available for the
probe mobile.
4. Select Effective Service Area and click OK. the coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
If you want the effective service area prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into
class.

will display where a service actually is available for the probe mobile with the nominal FCH rate for 1xRTT or with
a data channel rate of 9.6 kbps for EV-DO. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties
Creating a Quality Study Using Quality Indicators
You can create a quality study based on a given quality indicators (BER, BLER, or FER). The coverage prediction will show
for each pixel the measurement of the selected quality indicator.
This type of coverage prediction is not available in the list of standard studies; you can, however, use quality indicators in
a study by first ensuring that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set and then creating a coverage
prediction, selecting display parameters that use these quality indicators.
476 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Before you define the quality study, you must ensure that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set.
To check the parameters of the quality indicators:
4. Select Quality Indicators from the context menu. The Quality Indicators table appears.
For each quality indicator in the Name column, you can set the following parameters:
- Used for Packet Services: Select the Used for Packet Services check box if the quality indicator is to be
used for data services (i.e., 1xRTT, 1xEV-DO Rev. 0, or 1xEV-DO Rev. A).
- Used for Circuit Services: Select the Used for Circuit Services check box if the quality indicator is to be
used for voice services.
- Measured Parameter for QI: From the list, select the parameter that will be measured to indicate quality.
- QI Interpolation: Select the QI Interpolation check box if you want A9155 to interpolate between two existing
QI values. Clear the QI Interpolation check box if you want A9155 to take the closest QI value.
5. Close the Quality Indicators table.
6. In the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters folder, right-click the Terminals folder. The context menu appears.
8. Double-click the reception equipment type for which you want to verify the correspondence between the measured
quality and the quality indicator. The reception equipment types Properties dialogue appears.
10. Ensure that a Quality Indicator has been chosen for each Service. You can edit the values in the DL and UL
Quality Indicator Tables by clicking directly on the table entry, or by selecting the Quality Indicator and clicking
the Downlink Quality Graphs or the Uplink Quality Graphs buttons. The graph gives the variation of the quality
indicator as a function of the measured parameter.
Once you have ensured that the parameters of the quality indicators have been correctly set, you can use the measured
quality to create a quality study. How you define a coverage prediction according to the measured quality indicator,
depends several parameters:
The settings made in the Quality Indicators table
The service you want to study
The quality indicator you want to use (BER, BLER, or FER)
The coverage prediction you want to use (Pilot Reception Analysis, the Service Area Downlink, or Service Area
Uplink).
In the following example, you will create a quality study showing BLER, for a user on foot, and with a 1xRTT data service.
To create a quality study showing BLER for a user on foot, and with a 1xRTT data service:
4. Select Service Area (EbNt) Downlink and click OK. The coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
(EbNt) downlink prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select
- Terminal: Select the appropriate radio configuration for mobile Internet access from the Terminal list.
- Service: Select "1xRTT Data" from the Service list.
- Mobility: Select "Pedestrian" from the Mobility list.
- Carrier: Select "1xRTT" from the Carrier list.
If you want the service area (EbNt) downlink prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing
class.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 477

A9155 User Manual
Select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and "BLER" as the Field. The exact of the field value will depend on
the name given in the Quality Indicators table. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Prop-
erties of Objects" on page 33.
A9155 calculates for each pixel the forward link traffic channel quality (EbNt) (provided when using the maximum traffic
channel power allowed). Then, it calculates the corresponding BLER value from the quality graph (BLER=f(DL EbNt)).
The pixel is coloured if the condition is fulfilled (i.e., if BLER is evaluated as being higher than the specified threshold).

A9155 has several coverage predictions that enable you to study the forward link total noise, forward link noise rise or pilot
pollution. In this section, the following noise predictions are explained:
"Studying Forward Link Total Noise" on page 478
Studying Forward Link Total Noise
In the forward link total noise prediction, A9155 calculates and displays the areas where the forward link total noise or the
forward link noise rise exceeds a set threshold.
To make a forward link total noise or forward link noise rise prediction:
4. Select Downlink Total Noise and click OK. the coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the forward link
total noise or forward link noise rise prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create
a Filter to select which base stations to study. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 66.
If you want the forward link total noise or forward link noise rise prediction to consider shadowing, you can select
the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability
text box.
class.

For a forward link total noise or forward link noise rise prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" is selected
by default. The Field you choose determines which information the forward link total noise or forward link noise
rise prediction makes available.
- Downlink total noise prediction: When making a forward link total noise prediction, select one of the fol-
lowing in the Field list:
- Min. noise level
- Max noise level
- Downlink noise rise prediction: When making a forward link noise rise prediction, select one of the following
in the Field list:
- Min. noise rise
- Average noise rise
- Max noise rise
9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the forward link total noise or forward link noise
rise prediction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.
478 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Calculating Pilot Pollution
A transmitter which fulfils all the criteria to enter a mobiles active set but which is not admitted because the active set limit
has already been reached is considered a polluter.
In the pilot pollution prediction, A9155 calculates and displays the areas where the probe mobile is interfered by the pilot
signal from polluter transmitters. For 1xRTT, pilot pollution is the same on the forward and on the reverse links because
1xRTT can be connected to more than one transmitter on both the forward and on the reverse links. EV-DO, on the other
hand, can only be connected to one transmitter on the forward link, but several on the reverse link. Therefore, pilot pollution
for EV-DO will be different on the forward link and on the reverse link. The pilot pollution coverage prediction only calcu-
lates pilot pollution on the forward link.
To make a pilot pollution prediction:
4. Select Pilot Pollution and click OK. the coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the pilot pollution
You must select a Terminal, Service, and Mobility as defined in "Service and User Modelling" on page 467. You
If you want the pilot pollution prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account
class.

For a pilot pollution prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" and the Field "Number of polluters" are selected
by default. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
7.1.9.8.6 Making a Handoff Status Coverage Prediction

In the handoff status prediction, A9155 calculates and displays the zones where a handoff can be made. For a handoff to
be possible, there must be a potential active transmitter, i.e., a transmitter that fulfils all the criteria to enter the mobile
active set, and the service chosen by the user must be available.
You can also use the handoff status coverage prediction to display the number of potential active transmitters.
For 1xRTT, the handoff status is the same on the forward and on the reverse links because 1xRTT can be connected to
more than one transmitter on both the forward and on the reverse links. EV-DO, on the other hand, can only be connected
to one transmitter on the forward link, but several on the reverse link. Therefore, the handoff status coverage prediction
for EV-DO is calculated on the reverse link.
To make a handoff status coverage prediction:
4. Select Handoff Status and click OK. the coverage prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the handoff status
coverage prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 479

A9155 User Manual
If you want the forward link total noise or forward link noise rise prediction to consider shadowing, you can select
the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability
text box.
class.
- To display the handoff status:
i. Select "Discrete Values" from the Display Type list.
ii. Select "Status" from the Field list. The coverage prediction will display the number of cells the probe mo-
bile is connected to and the number of sites these cells are located on.
- To display the number of potential active transmitters:
i. Select "Value Intervals" from the Display Type list.
ii. Select "Potential active transmitter nb" from the Field list. the coverage prediction will display the number
of potential active transmitters.
9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the handoff status coverage prediction. The
7.1.9.8.7 Making an AS Analysis

status, and the active set of the probe mobile. Analysis is based on the reverse link load percentage and the forward link
total power of cells. The analysis is provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility and a
service.
You can make an AS analysis to verify a coverage prediction. In this case, before you make the AS analysis, ensure the
coverage prediction you want to use in the AS analysis is displayed on the map.
To make an AS analysis:
1. Click the Point Analysis button ( ) on the toolbar. The Point Analysis window appears (see Figure 7.74).
3. At the top of the AS Analysis tab, select "None" from Simulation.
4. If you are making an AS analysis to verify a coverage prediction, you can recreate the conditions of the coverage
prediction:
a. Select the same Terminal, Service, Mobility, Carrier, DL Rate, and UL Rate studied in the coverage predic-
tion.
If the coverage prediction was for 1xRTT, you must select "FCH" for both the DL Rate and UL Rate. If the
coverage prediction was for EV-DO, you must select "9.6 kbps" for the UL Rate.
logue appears.
Note: If you are making an AS analysis to make a prediction on a defined point, you can use the
instructions in this step to define a user.
480 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 7.73).
Figure 7.73: Point analysis on the map
Select the load conditions (DL Power Select the parameters of the probe user to
and UL Load from a simulation or be studied.
user-defined values) to use in this T_Add as defined in the Mobility
analysis. type.
The pilot reception in terms of active set components for the set T_Drop as defined in The connection status (pilot and uplink
conditions. The active set is displayed in grey. Solid bars the Mobility type. and downlink traffic) for the current point.
indicate the transmitters which respect the active set
constraints. Even if more transmitters respect the constraints, : successful connection
the active set size is limited to the number defined in the terminal
properties and is a function of the current service. : failed connection
Figure 7.74: AS Analysis tab
The bar graph displays the following information:

The pilot quality (EcI0) reception of all transmitters using the selected carrier (the colour of the bar colour corre-
sponds to the colour of the transmitter on the map).
The thresholds of the active set (T_Add and T_Drop). The portion of the graph with the grey background indicates
the transmitters in the active set.
The pilot and the availability of service on the reverse link and forward link.
If there is at least one successful connection (for pilot, forward link, or reverse link), double-clicking the icons in the right-
hand frame will open a dialogue with additional information.

If you want to print or export just a part of the coverage prediction, you can define the area using a polygon zone.
Note: A9155 offers several different polygon zones, each used to define areas of a project for dif-
ferent purposes. For information on the types of polygon zones available, see "Using Zones
in the Map Window" on page 40.

"Defining a Printing Zone" on page 482
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 481

A9155 User Manual
7.1.9.9.1 Defining a Printing Zone

context menu.

You can print the entire map, or you can define an area of the map to be printed (see "Defining a Printing Zone"
on page 482).

482 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


4. Click OK.

Important: The coverage export zone can only export in raster format. You can not export in raster
format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example, coverage predic-
tions with the display type set by transmitter, by a transmitter attribute, by signal level, by
path loss, or by total losses). Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be
exported in raster format.

AGD formats.
2. Click the button to expand the Predictions folder.

a. Click the button to expand the coverage prediction.

select:
the study,
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 483

A9155 User Manual
ii. If desired, change the reference coordinate system for the file being exported. When selecting a different
coordinate system than the one initially defined within A9155, the file is converted using the selected co-
ordinate system.
Notes

containing the computation zone. If there is no focus zone, A9155 allocates neighbours to the cells within the computation
zone.
A9155 supports the following neighbour types in a CDMA network:
Intra-technology neighbours: Intra-technology neighbours are cells defined as neighbours that both use CDMA.
Intra-technology neighbours can be divided into:
- Intra-carrier neighbours: Cells defined as neighbours which perform handoff using the same carrier.
- Inter-carrier neighbours: Cells defined as neighbours which perform handoff using a different carrier.
other than CDMA.

appears.

484 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Intra-Technology Exceptional Pairs from the context menu. The Exceptional
Pairs of Intra-Technology Neighbours table appears.
4. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), select the cell for which you want to define neighbour constraints
from the Cell column.
5. From the Neighbour column, select the second cell of the exceptional pair.
6. In the Status column, select one of the following:

A9155 can automatically allocate both intra- and inter-carrier neighbours in a CDMA network. A9155 allocates neighbours
based on the parameters you set in the Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue.
To automatically allocate intra-carrier CDMA neighbours:
a cell. This value can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each cell in the Cells table.
- T_Add: Enter or modify the minimum EcI0 required from a transmitter not to be rejected from the active
set.
- T_Drop: Enter or modify the minimum EcI0 required from a transmitter to enter the active set.
- Shadowing Taken into Account: If desired, select the Shadowing taken into account check box and
- Carriers: Select the carriers on which you want to run the allocation. You can choose one or more carriers;
A9155 will allocate neighbours to cells using the selected carriers.
is the best server, or where the possible neighbour cell is the second best server in the reference cells active
set.
reasons.
- Adjacency Factor: If you have selected the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box in step 5., set
the minimum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being adjacent to the reference cell.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 485

A9155 User Manual
cell.
lates them.

- Co-site
- Adjacency
- Symmetry
- Coverage
- Existing
square kilometres.
Tables" on page 48.
To automatically allocate inter-carrier CDMA neighbours:
- Max. Number of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of inter-carrier neighbours that can be allocated to
- Margin: Enter the signal margin relative to the pilot signal of the reference cell A. See the Technical Refer-
ence Guide for an explanation of how the margin is used in different inter-carrier handoff scenarios.
486 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

reasons.
cell.
lates them.

- Co-site
- Symmetry
- Coverage
- Existing
square kilometres.
Tables" on page 48.
Notes
ties dialogue.

station.
on page 61.
page 485.

the new transmitters and other cells whose coverage area intersects with the coverage area of the cells of the new trans-
mitter.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 487

A9155 User Manual

page 485.


7. Click the Visual Management button ( ) in the Radio toolbar.

line.
488 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


bours table.

Tip: If you want, you can display the number of handoff attempts for each cell-neighbour pair.
To display the number of handoff attempts, you must first create a new field of Type "Inte-
ger" in the Intra-Technology Neighbour table for the number of handoff attempts. Once
you have imported or entered the values in the new column, you can select this field from
the Field list in step 6., along with "Value Intervals" as the Display Type. For information
on adding a new field to a table, see .
agement icon ( ).

"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue" on page 489
To allocate or delete CDMA neighbours using the Cells tab of the transmitters Properties dialogue:
( ).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 489

A9155 User Manual
b. Click elsewhere in the table to complete creating the new neighbour.

8. Click OK.
To allocate or delete CDMA neighbours using the Neighbours table:

appears.
a. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), select a reference cell in the Cell column.
c. Click elsewhere in the table to create the new neighbour and add a new blank row to the table.
to "1."

bour Relations.
490 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA



3. Select Cells > Neighbours > Audit from the context menu. The Neighbour Audit dialogue appears.
bour relations.
- Average No. of Neighbours: The average number of neighbours per cell.
- Empty Lists: Which cells have no neighbours (in other words, which cells have an empty neighbour list).
- Full Lists: Which cells having the maximum number of neighbours allowed (in other words, which cells have
a full neighbour list). The maximum number of neighbours can be either set here for all transmitters, or spec-
ified for each transmitter in the Cells table.
- Lists > Max Number: Which cells having more than the maximum number of neighbours allowed. The max-
imum number of neighbours can be either set here for all transmitters, or specified for each transmitter in the
Cells table.
- Missing Co-sites: Which cells have no co-site neighbours.
- Missing Symmetrics: Which cells have non-symmetric neighbour relations.
- Average Number of Neighbours: X; where, X is the average number of neighbours (integer) per cell for the
plan audited.
- Empty Lists: x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having no neighbours (or empty neighbours list)
Syntax: |CELL|
- Full Lists (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having Y number of neighbours
- Lists > Max Number (default max number = Y): x/X; x number of cells out of a total of X having more than
Y number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 491

A9155 User Manual

The neighbour data of an A9155 document is stored in a series of tables. You can export the neighbour data for use in
3. Select Cells > Neighbours and then select the neighbour table containing the data you want to export from the
context menu:
- Intra-Technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology (intra-carrier and inter-
carrier) neighbours in the current A9155 document.
- Intra-Technology Exceptional Pairs Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology
exceptional pairs (forced and forbidden) in the current A9155 document.
7.1.11 Planning PN Offsets

In CDMA, 512 pseudo noise (PN) offsets are available, numbered from 0 to 511.
A9155 facilitates the management of PN offsets by letting you create groups of PN offsets and domains, where each
domain is a defined set of groups.
You can also assign PN offsets manually or automatically to any cell in the network.
Once allocation is completed, you can audit the PN offsets, view PN offset reuse on the map, and made an analysis of PN
offset distribution.
The procedure for planning PN offsets for a CDMA project is:
Preparing for PN offset allocation
- "Creating PN Offset Domains and Groups" on page 492
- "Defining Exceptional Pairs for PN Offset Allocation" on page 493.
Allocating PN offsets
- "Automatically Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA Cells" on page 493
- "Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA Cells Manually" on page 494.
"Checking the Consistency of the PN Offset Plan" on page 495.
Displaying the allocation of PN offsets
- "Using the Search Tool to Display PN Offset Allocation" on page 495
- "Displaying PN Offset Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 496
- "Grouping Transmitters by PN Offset" on page 496
- "Displaying the PN Offset Allocation Histogram" on page 496
- "Making a PN Offset Interference Zone Prediction" on page 497.
- "Making a PN Offset Interference Analysis" on page 497
Note: Within the context of PN offset allocation, "neighbours" refer to intra-carrier neighbours.
7.1.11.1 Creating PN Offset Domains and Groups

A9155 facilitates the management of PN offsets by letting you create domains, each containing groups of PN offsets.
The procedure for managing PN offsets in a CDMA document consists of the following steps:
1. Creating a PN offset domain, as explained in this section.
2. Creating groups, each containing a range of PN offsets, and assigning them to a domain, as explained in this sec-
tion.
3. Assigning a PN offset domain to a cell or cells. If there is no PN offset domain, A9155 will consider all 512 possible
PN offsets when assigning PN offsets.
To create a PN offset domain:
3. Select Cells > PN Offsets > Domains. The Domains table appears.
492 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Group: Enter a name for the new PN offset group.

- Min.: Enter the lowest available primary PN offset in this groups range.
- Max: Enter the highest available PN offset in this groups range.
- Step: Enter the separation interval between each PN offset.
- Excluded: Enter the PN offsets in this range that you do not want to use.
- Extra: Enter any additional PN offsets (i.e., outside the range defined by the Min. and Max fields) you want to
add to this group. You can enter a list of PN offsets separated by either a comma, semi-colon, or a space. You
can also enter a range of PN offsets separated by a hyphen. For example, entering, "1, 2, 3-5" means that the
extra PN offsets are "1, 2, 3, 4, 5."
7.1.11.2 Defining Exceptional Pairs for PN Offset Allocation

You can also define pairs of cells which cannot have the same PN offset. These pairs are referred to as exceptional pairs.
Exceptional pairs are used along with other constraints, such as neighbours, reuse distance, and domains, in allocating
PN offsets.
To create a pair of cells that cannot have the same PN offset:
3. Select Cells > PN Offsets > Exceptional Pairs. The Exceptional Separation Constraints table appears. For
information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48.
7.1.11.3 Allocating PN Offsets

A9155 can automatically assign PN offsets to the cells of a CDMA network according to set parameters. For example, it
takes into account the definition of groups and domains of PN offsets, minimum PN offset reuse distance, and any
constraints imposed by neighbours.
You can also allocate PN offsets manually to the cells of a CDMA network.
In this section, the following methods of allocating PN offsets are described:
"Automatically Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA Cells" on page 493
"Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA Cells Manually" on page 494.
Automatically Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA Cells
The allocation algorithm enables you to automatically allocate PN offsets to cells in the current network.
To automatically allocate primary PN offsets:
3. Select Cells > PN Offsets > Automatic Allocation. The PN Offsets dialogue appears.
4. Set the following parameters in the PN Offsets dialogue:
- Under Constraints, you can set the constraints on automatic PN offset allocation.
- Existing Neighbours: Select the Existing Neighbours check box if you want to consider intra-carrier
neighbour relations and then choose the neighbourhood level to take into account:
Neighbours of a cell are referred to as the first order neighbours, neighbours neighbours are referred to
as the second order neighbours and neighbours neighbours neighbours as the third order neighbours.
First Order: No cell will be allocated the same PN Offset as its neighbours.
Second Order: No cell will be allocated the same PN Offset as its neighbours or its second order neigh-
bours.
Third Order: No cell will be allocated the same PN Offset as its neighbours or its second order or third
order neighbours.
on allocating neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours" on page 484.
Note: A9155 can take into account inter-technology neighbour relations as constraints when allo-
cating PN Offsets to the CDMA2000 neighbours of a GSM transmitter. In order to consider
inter-technology neighbour relations in PN Offset allocation, you must make the Transmit-
ters folder of the GSM A9155 document accessible in the CDMA2000 A9155 document.
For information on making links between GSM and CDMA2000 A9155 documents, see
"Displaying Both Networks in the Same A9155 Document" on page 754.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 493

A9155 User Manual
- Second Order Neighbours: If you select the Second Order Neighbours check box, no cell will be allo-
cated the same PN offset as any of its neighbours or any of its neighbours neighbours.
- Additional EcI0 Conditions: Select the Additional EcI0 Conditions check box if you want to set
constraints related to EcI0 and then enter a T_Add and T_Drop. If you wish you can also select the
Shadowing Taken into Account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability. If cells meet
the EcI0 conditions to enter the reference cells active set, they will be not allocated the same PN offset
as the reference cell.
Note: A9155 takes into account the total forward link power used by the cell in order to evaluate
I0. I0 equals the sum of total transmitted powers. If this parameter is not specified in the cell
properties, A9155 uses 50% of the maximum power.
- Default Reuse Distance: Enter the radius within which two cells on the same carrier cannot have the same
PN offset.
Cells table). If defined, a cell-specific reuse distance will be used instead of the value
entered here.
- Carrier: Select the Carrier on which you want to run the allocation. You may choose one carrier (A9155 will
assign PN offsets to transmitters using the selected carrier) or all of them.
- Reset All PN Offsets: Select the Reset All PN Offsets check box if you want A9155 to delete currently allo-
cated PN offsets and recalculate all PN offsets. If you do not select this option, A9155 will keep currently allo-
cated PN offsets and will only allocate PN offsets to cells that do not yet have PN offsets allocated.
- Allocate Carriers Identically: Select the Allocate Carriers Identically check box if you want A9155 to allo-
cate the same PN Offset to each carrier of a transmitter. If you do not select this option, A9155 allocates PN
Offsets independently for each carrier.
5. Click Run. A9155 begins the process of allocating PN offsets.
Once A9155 has finished allocating PN offsets, they are visible under Results. A9155 only displays newly allo-
cated PN offsets.

- Code: The PN offset allocated to the cell.
Note: If the set constraints make it impossible to allocate PN offsets to one or more cells, A9155
will post an error message in the Event Viewer window.
6. Click Commit. The PN offsets are committed to the cells.
Note: You can save automatic PN offset allocation parameters in a user configuration. For infor-
mation on saving automatic PN offset allocation parameters in a user configuration, see
"Exporting a User Configuration" on page 71.
Tips:
If you need to allocate PN offsets to the cells on one transmitter, you can allocate them automat-
ically by selecting Allocate PN Offsets from the transmitters context menu.
If you need to allocate PN offsets to all the cells on group of transmitters, you can allocate them
automatically by selecting Cells > PN Offsets > Automatic Allocation from the transmitter
groups context menu.
Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA Cells Manually
When you allocate PN offsets to a large number of cells, it is easiest to let A9155 allocate PN offsets automatically, as
described in "Automatically Allocating PN Offsets to CDMA Cells" on page 493. However, if you want to add a PN offset
to one cell or to modify the PN offset of a cell, you can do it by accessing the properties of the cell.
To allocate a PN offset to a CDMA cell manually:
1. On the map, right-click the transmitter to whose cell you want to allocate a PN offset. The context menu appears.
4. Enter a PN Offset in the cells column.
5. Click OK.
494 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

7.1.11.4 Checking the Consistency of the PN Offset Plan

Once you have completed allocating PN offsets, you can verify whether the allocated PN offsets respect the specified
constraints by performing an audit of the plan. The PN offset audit also enables you to check for inconsistencies if you
have made some manual changes to the allocation plan.
3. Select Cells > PN Offsets > Audit. The Code Audit dialogue appears.
4. In the Code Audit dialogue, select the allocation criteria that you want to check:
- Neighbours: If you select the Neighbours check box, A9155 will check that no cell has the same PN offset
as any of its neighbours. The report will list any cell that does have the same PN offset as one of its neighbours.
no cell has the same PN offset as any of the neighbours of its neighbours. The report will list any cell that does
have the same PN offset as one of the neighbours of its neighbours.
- Domain Compliance: If you select the Domain Compliance check box, A9155 will check if allocated PN off-
sets belong to domains assigned to cells. The report will list any cells with PN offsets that do not belong to
domains assigned to the cell.
that do not respect this PN offset reuse distance.
cells that are listed as exceptional pairs but still use the same PN offsets.
5. Click OK. A9155 displays the results of the audit in a text file called CodeCheck.txt, which opens at the end of the
audit. For each selected criterion, A9155 gives the number of detected inconsistencies and details each of them.
7.1.11.5 Displaying the Allocation of PN Offsets

Once you have completed allocating PN offsets, you can verify several aspects of PN offset allocation. You have several
options for displaying PN offsets:
"Using the Search Tool to Display PN Offset Allocation" on page 495
"Displaying PN Offset Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 496
"Grouping Transmitters by PN Offset" on page 496
"Displaying the PN Offset Allocation Histogram" on page 496
"Making a PN Offset Interference Zone Prediction" on page 497.
"Making a PN Offset Interference Analysis" on page 497
Using the Search Tool to Display PN Offset Allocation
In A9155, you can search for PN offsets and PN offset groups using the Search Tool. Results are displayed in the map
window in red.
If you have already calculated and displayed a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best server, with the results
displayed by transmitter, the search results will be displayed by transmitter coverage. PN offsets and PN offset groups and
any potential problems will then be clearly visible. For information on coverage predictions by transmitter, see "Making a
Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 457.
To find PN offsets or PN offset groups using the Search Tool:
1. Create, calculate, and display a coverage prediction by transmitter. For information on coverage predictions by
transmitter, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 457.
3. You can search either for a specific PN offset or PN offset group:
To search for a PN offset:
a. Select PN Offset.
b. Enter a PN offset in the text box.
To search for a PN offset group:
a. Select PN Offset Group.

b. Select a PN offset group from the list.
4. Select the carrier you wish to search for from the For the Carrier list, or select "(All)" to search for the PN offset
or PN offset group in all carriers.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 495

A9155 User Manual
Displaying PN Offset Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings
You can use the display characteristics of transmitters to display PN offset-related information.
To display PN offset-related information on the map:
- PN offset: To display the PN offset of a transmitters cell, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and
"Cells: PN Offset" as the Field.
- Ranges of PN offsets: To display ranges of PN offsets, select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and
"Cells: PN Offset" as the Field.
- PN offset domain: To display the PN offset domain of a transmitters cell, select "Discrete values" as the Dis-
play Type and "Cells: PN Offset Domain" as the Field.
- PN offset: To display the PN offset of a transmitters cell in the transmitter label or tooltip, "Cells: PN offset"
from the Label or Tip Text list.
- PN offset domain: To display the PN offset domain of a transmitters cell in the transmitter label or tooltip,
"Cells: PN offset domain" from the Label or Tip Text list.
5. Click OK.
Grouping Transmitters by PN Offset
You can group transmitters on the Data tab of the Explorer window by their PN offset, their PN offset domain, or by their
PN offset reuse distance.
To group transmitters by PN offset:
- PN offset
- PN offset domain
the list of parameters on which the transmitters will be grouped. For more information on grouping objects, see
"Advanced Grouping" on page 63.
mitters folder.
Displaying the PN Offset Allocation Histogram
You can use a histogram to analyse the use of allocated PN offsets in a network. The histogram represents the PN offsets
as a function of the frequency of their use.
To display the PN offset histogram:
3. Select Cells > PN Offset > PN Offset Distribution. The Distribution Histograms dialogue appears.
Each bar represents a PN offset, its height depending on the frequency of its use.
4. Move the pointer over the histogram to display the frequency of use of each PN offset. The results are highlighted
simultaneously in the Detailed Results list.
496 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Making a PN Offset Interference Zone Prediction
You can make a PN offset interference zone prediction to view areas covered by cells using the same PN offset. A9155
checks on each pixel if the best server and other servers satisfying the conditions to enter the user active set have the
same PN Offset. If so, A9155 considers that there is PN Offset interference.
To make a PN Offset interference zone prediction:
4. Select PN Offset Interference Zones and click OK.
On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the PN Offset interference zone predic-
tion, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to study. For
information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 66.

If you want the PN Offset interference zone prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing
class.

For a PN Offset interference zone prediction, the Display Type "Discrete Values" based on the Field "Transmitter"
is selected by default. Each pixel with PN Offset interference is displayed with the same colour as that defined for
the interfered transmitter. In the Explorer window, the coverage prediction results are ordered first by interfered
transmitter and then by interferer. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of

- The number of interferers for each transmitter: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Number
of interferers per transmitter" as the Field. In the Explorer window, the coverage prediction results are
arranged by interfered transmitter.
- The total number of interferers on one pixel: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Number of
interferers" as the Field. In the Explorer window, the coverage prediction results are arranged according to
the number of interferers.
8. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the PN offset interference zone coverage pre-
diction. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is displayed in the Event Viewer.
Making a PN Offset Interference Analysis
The PN Offset Interference tab of the Point Analysis window gives you information on the reception for any point on the
map where there is PN Offset interference. PN Offset interference occurs when the best server and other servers satisfying
the conditions to enter the user active set have the same PN Offset. When there is PN Offset interference, A9155 displays
the pilot quality (EcI0) received from interfered and interferer transmitters .
Analysis is based on the UL load percentage and the DL total power of cells. The analysis is provided for a user-definable
probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility and a service.
You can make a PN Offset interference analysis to review the PN Offset interference zone coverage prediction. In this
case, before you make the PN Offset interference analysis, you should ensure that the coverage prediction you want to
use in the PN Offset interference analysis is displayed on the map.
To make a PN Offset interference analysis:
1. Click the Point Analysis button ( ) on the toolbar. The Point Analysis window appears.
2. Click the PN Offset Interference tab.
3. At the top of the PN Offset Interference tab, select "None" from Simulation.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 497

A9155 User Manual
4. If you are making a PN Offset interference analysis to verify a coverage prediction, you can recreate the conditions
of the coverage prediction:
a. Select the Terminal, Service, and Mobility studied in the coverage prediction.
logue appears.
- Select the Shadowing taken into account check box and enter a Cell Edge Coverage Probability and
Note: If you are making a PN Offset interference analysis to make a coverage prediction on a
defined point, you can use the instructions in this step to define a user.
5. Move the pointer over the map to make a PN Offset interference analysis for the current location of the pointer.

A CDMA network automatically regulates power with the objective of minimising interference and maximising network
capacity. In the case of cdmaOne and CDMA2000 1xRTT, fast power control is made on both the forward and reverse
links (uplink and downlink, respectively). In CDMA2000 1xRTT, power control can be performed on either the FCH and
SCH or on the pilot channel. In CDMA2000 EV-DO, rate control is used instead of power control on the forward link. On
the reverse link, power control is made on the pilot channel. A9155 can simulate these network regulation mechanisms,
thereby enabling you to study the capacity of the CDMA network.
In A9155, a simulation is based on a realistic distribution of users at a given point in time. The distribution of users at a
given moment is referred to as a snapshot. Based on this snapshot, A9155 calculates various network parameters such
as the active set for each mobile, the required power of the mobile, SHO gain, the total forward link power and forward link
throughput per cell, and the reverse link load per cell. Simulations are calculated in an iterative fashion.
shot to another.
"Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations" on page 505

the parameters used in the network, in terms of services, users, and equipment used.
For information on modelling end-user services, see "Modelling Services" on page 468.
Mobility type: In CDMA, information about receiver mobility is important to efficiently manage the active set: a
mobile used by a driver moving quickly or a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same transmitters.
EcI0 requirements and EbNt targets per radio bearer and per link (forward or reverse) are largely dependent on
mobile speed. For information on creating a mobility type, see "Creating a Mobility Type" on page 470.
Radio configuration: In CDMA, a radio configuration is the user equipment that is used in the network, for
example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a cars on-board navigation device. In A9155, radio configurations are mod-
elled using terminals. For information on creating a terminal, see "Modelling Terminals" on page 471.

498 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

A9155 provides four types of traffic maps for CDMA projects. These maps can be used for the different types of traffic data
sources as follows:
demand or the number of users. For more information, see "Live Traffic Data From the OMC" on page 499 and
"Creating a Traffic Map Based on Live Data" on page 499.
each pixel has an environment class assigned. For more information, see "Marketing-based Traffic Data" on
user density assigned. For more information, see "Population-based Traffic Data" on page 504 and "Importing a

the number of active users in each cell and the traffic characteristics related to different services. You can use this data to
create traffic maps containing the number of active users in each cell or the data transfer characteristics of all the services
in each cell.

You can input the total throughput demand or the total number of active users for each sector in this type of traffic map. A
coverage prediction by transmitter is required to create this traffic map. If you do not already have a coverage prediction
by transmitter in your document, you must create and calculate it. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Predic-
tion by Transmitter" on page 457.
Note: Because each of the CDMA technologies has capabilities and services that are specific to
it, it is recommended to create a separate traffic map for:
- voice
- 1xRTT data
- EV-DO data

(# Active Users).
A9155 document.
demands in the reverse link and forward link for each sector and for each listed service.
- If you are creating a Map based on Transmitters and Services (# Active Users), enter the active users in
the reverse link and forward link for each sector and for each listed service.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 499

A9155 User Manual
equal 100.
equal 100.
lations.
Live traffic per sector maps if you add or remove a base station. You must first recalculate the coverage prediction by trans-


which are in turn defined by the terminal used, the calls per hour, and duration.
web browsing.

- Calls/Hour: Enter the average number of calls per hour for the service. One call lasting 1000 seconds
presents the same activity probability as two calls lasting 500 seconds each.
- Duration: Enter the average duration of a call in seconds.
The calls per hour and duration are used to calculate the activity probability.
500 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To create or modify a CDMA environment:

6. Enter a Name for the new CDMA environment.
bination that this CDMA environment will describe:
9. For each clutter class, enter a weight that will be used to distribute users on the map.
The number of users per clutter class is calculated using the following equation:
Wk Sk
N k = N Area --------------------------

Wi Si
i
where:


the New Traffic Map dialogue.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 501

A9155 User Manual
6. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported vector formats: DXF format (DXF),
A9155 Geographic Data File (AGD), ArcView format (SHP), MapInfo file (MIF or TAB), or Planet Data File
(index).
entire map.
select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a user profile from the CDMA/
CDMA2000 Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the user profile
in the Choice column.
the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a mobility type from the CDMA/CDMA2000
Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the mobility type in the Choice
column.
be exactly the same as the corresponding names in the CDMA/CDMA2000 Parameters
folder of the Data tab. If the imported user profile or mobility does not match, A9155 will dis-
play a warning.
11. Under Clutter Distribution, enter a weight for each class that will be used to distribute users on the map.
The user distribution per clutter class is calculated using the following equation:
Wk Sk
N k = N Area --------------------------

Wi Si
i
where:

502 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


To create a traffic map based on environment classes:
6. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported raster formats (8 bit): TIFF, BIL, IST,
BMP, PlaNET, GRC Vertical Mapper, and Erdas Imagine.
the Code column.
The environments available are those available in the Environments folder, under CDMA/CDMA2000 Parame-
ters on the Data tab of the Explorer window. For more information, see "Modelling Environments" on page 501.
on page 33.

Draw Map Delete Map

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 503

A9155 User Manual

appears.
Si
Sk
k
5. Click Close.
clutter class.

Population-based traffic data can be based on population statistics and user densities can be deduced from the density of
inhabitants. In the traffic maps based on population statistics, you can enter the number of active or potential users per

The traffic density map defines the density of users (i.e., the number of users per km2) per pixel. For a traffic density of X
users per km, A9155 will distribute x users per pixel during the simulations, where x depends on the size of the pixels.
These x users will have a terminal, a mobility type, a service, and percentage of indoor users as defined in the Traffic tab
of the traffic density maps properties dialogue.
Note: Because each of the CDMA technologies has capabilities and services that are specific to
it, it is recommended to create a separate traffic density map for:
- voice
- 1xRTT data
- EV-DO data

the New Traffic Map dialogue.
6. Select the file to import. The file must be in one of the following supported raster formats (16 or 32 bit): BIL, BMP,
PlaNET, TIFF, ISTAR, and Erdas Imagine.
12. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of radio configuration used in this map. The total per-
centages must equal 100 for this map.
13. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in this map. The total percentages must
equal 100 for this map.
14. Under Services (%), enter the percentage of each service type used in this map. The total percentages must equal
100.
504 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


your 2G network packet and circuit service traffic, and then import these maps as traffic density maps into your CDMA
To import a 2G traffic map into a CDMA document:
3. Import the traffic exported in step 2 to your CDMA document as a traffic density map. For more information on

A9155 allows you to export the cumulated traffic of all the traffic maps. The cumulated traffic can be exported in 32-bit BIL
and ArcView Grid formats. When exporting in BIL format, A9155 allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb.
3. Select Export Cumulated Traffic from the context menu.
6. Specify the area to export, the terminals, mobility types, and service, the traffic maps to consider, the direction
(reverse link or forward link or both), and the export resolution.
7. Click OK.

shadowing effect.
Finally, another random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone (possibly according to the
clutter weighting and the indoor ratio per clutter class).
2. Modelling network power control: A9155 uses a power control algorithm for cdmaOne and CDMA2000 1xRTT
users, and performs the forward link power control on the FCH and SCH and the reverse link power control on
either the pilot channel or on the FCH and SCH for 1xRTT users. For users of 1xEV-DO, A9155 performs the
reverse link power control on the pilot channel. On the forward link, A9155 performs rate control based on the CI
ratio calculated for the mobile. The power control simulation algorithm is described in "The Power Control Simu-
lation Algorithm" on page 505.
7.2.3.1 The Power Control Simulation Algorithm

The power control algorithm simulates the way a CDMA network regulates itself by using forward link and reverse link
power controls or, in the case of CDMA2000 1xEV-DO, rate control in the forward link and power control in the reverse
link in order to minimize interference and maximize capacity.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 505

A9155 User Manual
A9155 simulates the network regulation mechanisms for each user distribution. During each iteration of the algorithm, all
the mobiles (voice, 1xRTT data, and EV-DO data service users) selected during the user distribution generation attempt
to connect one by one to network transmitters. The process is repeated until the network is balanced, i.e., until the conver-
gence criteria (on the forward and the reverse link) are satisfied.
The cdmaOne Power Control Simulation Algorithm
The cdmaOne power control simulation algorithm (see Figure 7.79) simulates the power control, congestion, and radio
resource control performed for cdmaOne users. A9155 considers each user in the order established during the generation
of the user distribution, determines his best server and his active set. A9155 first calculates the required terminal power
in order to reach the EbNt target on the reverse link, followed by the power required on the FCH in order to reach the
EbNt target on the forward link. After performing power control, A9155 updates the reverse link load factor and the total
forward link transmitted power. A9155 then carries out congestion and radio resource control, verifying the cell reverse
link load, the forward link load, and the number of channel elements and Walsh codes consumed by the cell.
Figure 7.79: Power control simulation for cdmaOne
At this point, users can be either connected or rejected. They are rejected if:
- On the forward link, the pilot quality is not high enough (no cell in the user active set): status is "EcI0 pilot <
EcI0 min. pilot."
- On the reverse link, there is not enough power to transmit: the status is "Pmob > Pmob max."
- On the forward link, the quality of the received signal is not high on the traffic channel: the status is "Ptch >
Ptch max."
The network is saturated:
- The maximum reverse link load factor is exceeded (at admission or during congestion control): the status is
either "Admission rejection" or "UL load saturation."
- There are not enough available channel elements on the site: the status is "channel element saturation."
- There is not enough power for cells: the status is "DL load saturation."
- There are no more Walsh codes available: the status is "code saturation."
The CDMA2000 1xRTT Power Control Simulation Algorithm
The CDMA2000 1xRTT power control simulation algorithm (see Figure 7.80) simulates the power control, congestion, and
radio resource control performed for CDMA2000 1xRTT users. A9155 considers each user in the order established during
the generation of the user distribution, determines his best server and his active set. A9155 performs the forward link
power control on the FCH and SCH and the reverse link power control on either the pilot channel or on the FCH and SCH,
depending on the option selected under UL 1xRTT Power Control Based On on the Global Parameters tab of the Trans-
mitter Properties dialogue (see "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 433).
After performing power control, A9155 updates the reverse link load factor and the total forward link transmitted power.
A9155 then carries out congestion and radio resource control, verifying the cell reverse link load, the forward link load, and
the number of channel elements and Walsh codes consumed by the cell.
506 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 7.80: Power control simulation for CDMA2000 1xRTT
The SCH rate on the forward and the reverse links can be downgraded. A9155 will downgrade the forward link SCH rate
until:
The required forward link quality level on SCH is reached,
The total forward link power of a cell is lower than the maximum power allowed,
The number of channel elements consumed on the forward link by a site is lower than the maximum number of
channel elements allowed,
The number of Walsh codes used by a cell is lower than the maximum number of Walsh codes available per cell.
A9155 will downgrade the reverse link SCH rate until:
The required reverse link quality level on SCH or on pilot is reached,
The number of channel elements consumed on the reverse link by a site is lower than the maximum number of
channel elements allowed.
Downgraded SCH rates cannot be lower than the FCH nominal rate. When downgrading the SCH rate does not solve the
problem, the SCH is not allocated to the mobile. In this case, if the requirements of a mobile cannot be met by using the
FCH alone, the mobile is rejected.
EcI0 min. pilot."
- On the forward link, the quality of the received signal is not high enough on the traffic channel: the status is
"Ptch > Ptch max."
- There is not enough power for cells: the status is "DL load saturation."
- There are no more Walsh codes available: the status is "code saturation."
The CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Rate and Power Control Simulation Algorithm
The CDMA2000 1xEV-DO simulation algorithm (see Figure 7.81) simulates the power and rate controls, congestion, and
radio resource control performed for CDMA2000 1xEV-DO users. A9155 considers each user in the order established
during the generation of the user distribution, determines his best server and his active set. A9155 performs the reverse
link power control on the pilot channel. On the forward link, there is no power control; the transmitter transmits at full power.
Instead, A9155 performs rate control based on the CI ratio calculated for the mobile.
After performing rate and power control, A9155 updates the reverse link load factor. A9155 then carries out congestion
and radio resource control, verifying the cell reverse link load and the number of channel elements and MAC indexes
consumed by the cell.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 507

A9155 User Manual
Figure 7.81: Power control simulation for CDMA2000 1xEV-DO
During reverse link power control, A9155 may downgrade the rate on the reverse link traffic data channel until the required
reverse link quality level is reached. If downgrading does not allow the quality level to be reached, the mobile is rejected.
During congestion control, A9155 may adjust the rate on the reverse link traffic data channel of mobiles until the reverse
link cell noise rise is between the noise rise threshold plus the acceptable noise rise margin and the noise rise threshold
minus the acceptable noise rise margin.
EcI0 min. pilot."
- There are not enough MAC indexes per cell, or the maximum number of EV-DO users per cell may be
exceeded during the radio resource control: the status is "1xEV-DO resources saturation."

In A9155, simulations enable you to model CDMA network regulation mechanisms used to minimise interference and
maximise capacity.
2. Right-click the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder. The context menu appears.
508 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: Execute Later enables you to automatically calculate CDMA coverage predictions after
simulations with no intermediary step by creating your simulations, creating your predic-
tions, and then clicking the Calculate button ( ).
- Only the average simulation and statistics: None of the individual simulations are displayed or availa-
ble in the group. Only an average of all simulations and statistics is available.
Note: Some calculation and display options available for prediction studies are not available when
the option "Only the average simulation and statistics" is selected.
- No information about mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. For each of them, a
properties window containing simulation output, divided among four tabs Statistics, Sites, Cells, and
Initial conditions is available.
- Standard information about mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. The properties
window for each simulation contains an additional tab with output related to mobiles.
- Detailed information about mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. The properties
window for each simulation contains additional mobile-related output on the Mobiles and Mobiles (Shad-
owing values) tabs.
sumption by selecting Only the average simulation and statistics under Information to
retain.
simulation:
- Number of Channel Elements: Select the Number of Channel Elements check box if you want A9155 to
respect the maximum number of channel elements defined for each site.
- Number of Codes: Select the Number of Codes check box if you want A9155 to respect the number of
Walsh codes available for each cell.
- UL Load Factor: If you want the reverse link load factor to be verified in the simulation and not to exceed the
Max UL Load Factor, select the UL Load Factor check box and define a value for the Max UL Load Factor.
- Max UL Load Factor: If you want to enter a global value for the maximum reverse link cell load factor, click
the button ( ) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum reverse link cell load
factor. If you want to use the maximum reverse link cell load factor as defined in the properties for each cell,
click the button ( ) beside the box and select Defined per Cell.
- DL Load (% Pmax): If you want the forward link load to be verified in the simulation and not to exceed the
Max DL Load, select the DL Load (% Pmax) check box and enter a maximum forward link cell load in the
Max DL Load box.
- Max DL Load (% Pmax): If you want to enter a global value for the maximum forward link cell load, as a per-
centage of the maximum power, click the button ( ) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then,
enter a maximum forward link cell load, as a percentage of the maximum power. If you want to use the max-
imum forward link cell load as defined in the properties for each cell, click the button ( ) beside the box and
select Defined per Cell.

parameter changes.

gence.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 509

A9155 User Manual
the reverse link that must be reached between two iterations.
the forward link that must be reached between two iterations.
eral tab.
now use the completed simulations for specific CDMA coverage predictions (see "Making Coverage Predictions Using
Simulation Results" on page 521) or for an AS analysis using the Point Analysis window (see "Making an AS Analysis of
Simulation Results" on page 520).

parameters. You can, for example, display the traffic according to service, activity status, or soft handoff gain.
You can set the display of the traffic distribution according to discrete values and then select the value to be displayed. Or,
In this section are the following examples of traffic distribution display:
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Handoff Status" on page 510
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status" on page 511
7.2.3.3.1 Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Handoff Status

In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the handoff status.
To display the traffic distribution by the handoff status:
3. Select Properties from the context menu. The CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations Properties dialogue appears.
4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "HO Status (Sites/No. Trans-
mitters Act. Set)" as the Field.
The handoff status is displayed as "XY" where "Y" is the number of transmitters to which the mobile is connected
and "X" is the number of sites. For example, "12" means that the mobile is connected to two different transmitters
on one site. "23" would mean that the mobile is connected to three different transmitters on two sites. If a mobile
is not connected, the handoff status is given as "00".
5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by handoff status (see Figure 7.82).
Figure 7.82: Displaying the traffic distribution by handoff status
510 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


Field.

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 511

A9155 User Manual
7.2.3.4 Displaying the User Active Set on the Map

A9155 enables you to display on the map the active set for each user generated by a simulation.
To display the active set for a user:
On the map, click and hold the icon of the user whose best and second-best servers you want to display.
The servers in the users active set are connected to the user with lines the same colour as the serving transmitter.
The best server is indicated with the number "1", the second-best with number "2" and so on. Figure 7.85 shows
a user with three servers in his active set.
Figure 7.85: The active set of a user

2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder.
you want to access.
5. Select Properties from the context menu. The simulation properties dialogue appears.
simulation results as identified by the tab title. A final tab lists the initial conditions of the simulation. The amount
of detail available when you display the results depends on the level of detail you selected from the Information
to retain list on the General tab of the properties dialogue for the group of simulations. For more information on
the different options, see step 5. of "Creating Simulations" on page 508.
trial; power control has not yet started. The result depends on the traffic description and cartography.
per activity status and the reverse link and forward link rates that all users could theoretically generate are
provided.
- The breakdown per service (total number of users, number of users per activity status, and reverse link
and forward link rates) is given.
- Results: Under Results, you will find data on the connection results:
- The number and the percentage of rejected users is given along with the reason for rejection. These
figures are determined at the end of the simulation and depend on the network design.
- The number and percentage of users connected to a cell, the number of users per activity status, and the
reverse link and forward link total rates they generate.
- Max No. of CEs per Carrier (DL and UL): The maximum number of channel elements available per 1xRTT
carrier on the forward and reverse links.
- Max No. of EV-DO CEs per Carrier: The maximum number of channel elements available per 1xEV-DO car-
rier.
512 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- No. Ch Elts (FCH Uplink and Downlink): The number of channel elements used by the FCH on the forward
and reverse links by the site.
- No. Ch Elts (SCH Uplink and Downlink): The number of channel elements used by the SCH on the forward
and reverse links by the site.
- No. EV-DO CEs: The number of channel elements used by EV-DO users.
- No. CEs Due to SHO Overhead DL and UL (FCH): The number of extra channel elements due to soft
handoff, on reverse link and forward link for cdmaOne and CDMA2000 1xRTT users.
- No. EV-DO CEs Due to SHO Overhead: The number of extra channel elements due to soft handoff, on
reverse link and forward link for CDMA2000 1xEV-DO users.
- Rake Factor: The rake factor, defined on the site equipment, enables A9155 to model a rake receiver on the
reverse link.
interference on the reverse link.
- Service kbps Throughput FCH (Uplink and Downlink): The throughput in kbitss for each service on the
FCH. The result is detailed on the forward and reverse link only when relevant.
- Service kbps Throughput SCH (Uplink and Downlink): The throughput in kbitss for each service on the
SCH. The result is detailed on the forward and reverse link only when relevant.
The Cells (1xRTT) tab: The Cells (1xRTT) tab contains the following information, per site, transmitter, and 1xRTT
carrier:
- Synchro Power (dBm): The synchro power as defined in the cell properties.
- Paging Power (dBm): The paging power as defined in the cell properties.
- Total DL Power Used (dBm): The total transmitted power on the forward link.
- Total DL FCH Power Used: The total power used on the forward link for the FCH.
- Total DL SCH Power Used: The total power used on the forward link for the SCH.
- UL Total Noise (dBm): The total noise on the reverse link.
- UL Load Factor (%): The cell load factor on the reverse link corresponds to the ratio between the total inter-
ference on the reverse link and the total noise on the reverse link. If the constraint "UL Load Factor" has been
selected, the cell load factor on the reverse link is not allowed to exceed the user-defined maximum load factor
on the reverse link (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation creation dialogue).
- DL Load Factor (%): The load factor of the cell i on the forward link corresponds to the ratio (average inter-
ference on the forward link [due to transmitter signals on the same carrier] for terminals in the transmitter i
area) (average total noise on the forward link [due to transmitter signals and to thermal noise of terminals]
for terminals in the transmitter i area).
- DL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise on the forward link is calculated from the load factor on the forward link.
These data indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget).
- DL Load (% Used Power): The percentage of power used is determined by the total transmitted power-max-
imum power ratio (power stated in W). When the constraint "DL load" is set, the DL Load can not exceed the
user-defined Max DL Load (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation).
- Number of UL and DL Radio Links: The number of radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter
links on the same carrier. This data is calculated on the forward and reverse links and indicates the number
of users connected to the cell on the forward and reverse links. Because of handover, a single user can use
several radio links.
- UL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise on the reverse link is calculated from the load factor on the reverse link.
- Reuse Factor (UL): The reverse link reuse factor is the ratio between the reverse link total interference and
the intra-cell interference.
- Reuse Efficiency Factor (UL): The reuse efficiency factor on the reverse link is the reciprocal of the reuse
factor on the reverse link.
- No. of Codes (128 bits): The total number of 128-bit Walsh codes used by cell.
- No. of FCH Codes (128 bits): The total number of 128-bit Walsh codes used by the FCH of the cell.
- No. of SCH Codes (128 bits): The total number of 128-bit Walsh codes used by the SCH of the cell. This field
is not used in cdmaOne.
- The Types of Handoff as a Percentage: A9155 estimates the percentages of handoff types for each trans-
mitter. A9155 only lists the results for the following handoff status, no handoff (11), softer (12), soft (22),
softer-soft (23) and soft-soft (33) handoffs; the other handoff status (other HO) are grouped.
- No. Ch Elts (FCH Uplink and Downlink): The number of channel elements used by the FCH on the forward
and reverse links.
- No. Ch Elts (SCH Uplink and Downlink): The number of channel elements used by the SCH on the forward
and reverse links.
- Kbps Throughput (FCH Uplink and Downlink): The throughput of the FCH on the forward and reverse links.
- Kbps Throughput (SCH Uplink and Downlink): The throughput of the SCH on the forward and reverse links.
- Min. P. TCH (dBm): The minimum power allocated to a traffic channel for supplying services.
- Max. P. TCH (dBm): The maximum power allocated to a traffic channel for supplying services.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 513

A9155 User Manual
- Avg. P. TCH (dBm): The average power allocated to a traffic channel for supplying services.
- Rejected Users: The number of rejected users per cell are sorted by the following reasons: Pmob >
PmobMax, Ptch > PtchMax, EcIo < (EcIo) Min., UL Load Saturation, Ch. Elts Saturation, DL Load Sat-
uration, Multiple Causes, Code Saturation, and Admission Rejection.
The Cells (1xEV-DO) tab: The Cells (1xEV-DO) tab contains the following information, per site, transmitter, and
1xEV-DO carrier:
Note: The Cells (1xEV-DO) tab only applies to CDMA2000 projects.
- Idle Power Gain (dB): The idle power gain as defined in the cell properties.
- BTS Noise Figure (dB): The BTS noise figure as defined in the transmitter properties.
- UL Total Noise (dBm): The total noise received by the cell on the reverse link.
on the reverse link (defined either in the cell properties or in the simulation creation dialogue).
- Reuse Efficiency Factor (UL): The reuse efficiency factor on the reverse link is the reciprocal of the reuse
factor on the reverse link.
- Number of UL Radio Links: The number of radio links on the reverse link.
- DL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise on the forward link is calculated from the load factor on the forward link.
- Connection Success Rate (%): The percentage of connections that are successfully made.
- The Types of Handoff as a Percentage: A9155 estimates the percentages of handoff types for each trans-
mitter on the reverse link. A9155 only lists the results for the following handoff status, no handoff (11), softer
(12), soft (22), softer-soft (23) and soft-soft (33) handoffs; the other handoff status (other HO) are
grouped.
- UL and DL Throughput (kbps): The throughput on the forward and reverse links.
uration, Multiple Causes, Code Saturation, Admission Rejection, and 1xEV-DO Resources Saturation.
The Mobiles (1xRTT) tab: The Mobiles (1xRTT) tab contains the following information for cdmaOne and
CDMA2000 1xRTT users:
Note: The Mobiles (1xRTT) tab only appears if, when creating the simulation as explained in "Cre-
ating Simulations" on page 508, you select either "Standard information about mobiles" or
"Detailed information about mobiles" under Information to Retain.
- Terminal: The assigned radio configuration.
- User: The assigned user profile.
- DL and UL Requested Rate (kbps): The DL and UL Requested Rates correspond to the forward and
reverse data rates requested by the user before power control.
- DL and UL Obtained Rate (kbps): The obtained rates are the same as the requested rates if the user is con-
nected without being downgraded. If the user has been downgraded, the throughput is calculated using the
downgrading factor. If the user was rejected, the obtained rate is zero.
- Mobile Total Power (dBm): This value corresponds to the total power transmitted by the terminal.
- Uplink Pilot Power: The power transmitted by the terminal on the reverse pilot channel.
- Mobile FCH Power: The power transmitted by the terminal on the FCH channel.
- Mobile SCH Power: power transmitted by the terminal on the SCH channel. This field does not apply to
cdmaOne.
- Connection Status: The connection status indicates whether the user is connected or rejected at the end of
the simulation. If connected, the connection status corresponds to the activity status. If rejected, the rejection
cause is given.
- AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6: The name of the cell that is the best server, the second-best server, and so
on is given in a separate column for each cell in the active set.
- Ec/I0 AS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (dB): EcI0 is given in a separate column for each cell in the active set.
514 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Downgrading factor DL and UL (SCH): The downgrading factor for the SCH on both the forward and the
reverse links. The downgrading factor is used to calculated how much the SCH rate will be downgraded if the
requested rate cannot be provided.
- Ntot DL AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (dBm): The total noise on the forward link for each link between the
mobile and a transmitter in the active set.
- Cell Power FCH AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (DL) (dBm): The cell power transmitted on the FCH forward
link is given for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set.
- Cell Power SCH AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (DL) (dBm): The cell power transmitted on the SCH forward
link is given for each link between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set.
- Load Factor AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (DL) (%): The load factor on the forward link for each link
between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set. It corresponds to the ratio between the total interference
on the forward link and total noise at the terminal.
- Noise Rise AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (DL) (dB): The noise rise on the forward link for each link
between the mobile and a transmitter in the active set.
- Reuse Factor AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (DL): The forward link reuse factor is the ratio between the
forward link total interference and the intra-cell interference. It is calculated for each link between the mobile
and a transmitter in the active set.
- Iintra AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (DL) (dBm): The intra-cell interference on the forward link for each cell
(I) of the active set.
ra (ic ) = (1 Fortho ) P tot ( ic )

DL
I int DL
txi
- Iextra AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (DL) (dBm): The extra-cell interference on the forward link for each
cell (I) of the active set.
DL
I extra (ic ) = P (ic ) DL
tot
txj , j i
- Total Att. AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (dB): The total attenuation for each link between the mobile and
a transmitter in the active set.
remaining orthogonality of the OVSF codes at reception. The value used is the orthogonality factor set in the
- SHO Gain FCH DL and UL (dB): The soft handoff gain for the FCH on the forward and the reverse link. The
soft handoff gain on the forward link is calculated if mobile receivers are connected either on the forward link
or on the forward link and the reverse link.
- SHO Gain SCH DL and UL (dB): The soft handoff gain for the SCH on the forward and the reverse link. The
soft handoff gain on the forward link is calculated if mobile receivers are connected either on the forward link
or on the forward link and the reverse link.
The Mobiles (1xEV-DO) tab: The Mobiles (1xEV-DO) tab contains the following information for CDMA2000
1xEV-DO users:
Note: The Mobiles (1xEV-DO) tab only applies to CDMA2000 projects and only appears if, when
creating the simulation as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 508, you select
either "Standard information about mobiles" or "Detailed information about mobiles" under
Information to Retain.
- Terminal: The assigned radio configuration.
- User: The assigned user profile.
- UL Requested Rate (kbps): The UL Requested Rate corresponds to the data rate requested by the user
before power control.
- UL Obtained Rate: The obtained rate is the same as the requested rate if the user is connected without being
downgraded. If the user has been downgraded, the throughput is calculated using the downgrading factor. If
the user was rejected, the obtained rate is zero.
- DL Max. Data Rate: The maximum data rate on the forward link depends on the value of CI at the terminal.
A9155 calculates this value from the Max rate=f(CI) graph specified in the mobility type properties.
- Mobile Total Power (dBm): The mobile total power corresponds to the total power transmitted by the ter-
minal.
cause is given.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 515

A9155 User Manual
- AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6: The name of the cell that is the best server, the second-best server, and so
on is given in a separate column for each cell in the active set.
- Ec/I0 AS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (dB): EcI0 is given in a separate column for each cell in the active set.
- Downgrading factor UL: The downgrading factor on the reverse link. The downgrading factor is used to cal-
culated how much the data rate will be downgraded if the requested rate cannot be provided.
- UL Throughput Due to TCP (kbps): The traffic on the reverse link generated due to Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP) acknowledgements.
- CI DL (Pilot) (dB): CI for the pilot on the forward link.
- Ntot DL (Data) (dBm): The total noise on the forward link.
- DL Load Factor (%): The load factor on the forward link. It corresponds to the ratio between the total interfer-
ence on the forward link and total noise at the terminal.
- DL Noise Rise (dB): The noise rise on the forward link.
- Total Att. AS1, AS2, AS3, AS4, AS5, AS6 (dB): The total attenuation for each link between the mobile and
a transmitter in the active set.
remaining orthogonality of the Walsh codes at reception. The value used is the orthogonality factor set in the
- UL SHO Gain (dB): The soft handoff gain on the reverse link.
The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab: The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab contains information on the shad-
owing margin for each link between the receiver and up to ten potential transmitters. A9155 selects the transmit-
ters which have the receiver in their propagation zone and have the lowest path losses. The ten transmitters with
the lowest path losses are selected and sorted in ascending order by path loss.
Note: The Mobiles (Shadowing Values) tab only appears if, when creating the simulation as
- Name: The name assigned to the mobile.

- Value at Receiver (dB): The value of the shadowing error at the receiver. This value is the same for a given
receiver for each given receiver-potential transmitter link. The value is generated randomly.
- Path To: The name of the potential transmitter.
- Value (dB): The shadowing error for the receiver-potential transmitter link in the corresponding Path To
column. These values are generated randomly.

- The default orthogonality factor
- The default reverse link soft handoff gain
- Whether the MRC in softer/soft is defined or not
- The method used to calculate Nt
- The reverse link and forward link convergence thresholds
- The simulation constraints such as maximum power, the maximum number of channel elements, the
reverse link load factor and the maximum load
- The name of the traffic maps used.
- The parameters related to the clutter classes.

516 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

trial; power control has not yet started. The result depends on the traffic description and cartography.
per activity status and the reverse link and forward link rates that all users could theoretically generate are
provided.
- Results: Under Results, you will find data on the connection results:
- The number and the percentage of rejected users is given along with the reason for rejection. These
figures are determined at the end of the simulation and depend on the network design.
- The number and percentage of users connected to a cell, the number of users per activity status, and the
reverse link and forward link total rates they generate.
The Cells (Average - 1xRTT) and Cells (Standard Deviation - 1xRTT) tabs: The Cells (Average - 1xRTT) and
Cells (Standard Deviation - 1xRTT) tabs contain the following average and standard deviation information, respec-
tively, per site, transmitter, and 1xRTT carrier:
- UL Total Noise (dBm): The total noise on the reverse link takes into account the total signal received at the
transmitter on a carrier from intra and extra-cell terminals using the same carrier and adjacent carriers (total
interference on the reverse link) and the thermal noise.
- Reuse efficiency factor (UL): The reverse link reuse efficiency factor is the reciprocal of the reverse link
reuse factor.
- DL Load Factor (%): The forward link load factor of the cell i corresponds to the ratio (forward link average
interference [due to transmitter signals on the same carrier] for terminals in the transmitter i area) (forward
link average total noise [due to transmitter signals and to thermal noise of terminals] for terminals in the trans-
mitter i area).
- DL Noise Rise (dB): The forward link noise rise is calculated from the forward link load factor. These data
indicate signal degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget).
- Total DL Power Used (dBm): The total power transmitted on the forward link.
- DL Load (% Used Power): The percentage of power used is determined by the total transmitted power-max-
imum power ratio (power stated in W). When the constraint "DL load" is set, the DL Load can not exceed the
user-defined Max DL Load (defined either in the cell properties, or in the simulation).
- Number of UL and DL Radio Links: The number of radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter
links on the same carrier. This data is calculated on the forward and reverse links and indicates the number
of users connected to the cell on the forward and reverse links. Because of handover, a single user can use
several radio links.
- No. of Codes (128 bits): The average number of 128-bit Walsh codes used per cell.
- The types of handoff as a percentage: A9155 estimates the percentages of handoff types for each trans-
- Min. P. TCH (dBm): The minimum power allocated to a traffic channel for supplying services.
- Max. P. TCH (dBm): The maximum power allocated to a traffic channel for supplying services.
- Avg. P. TCH (dBm): The average power allocated to a traffic channel for supplying services.
uration, Multiple Causes, Code Saturation, and Admission Rejection.
The Cells (Average - 1xEV-DO) and Cells (Standard Deviation - 1xEV-DO) tabs: The Cells (Average -
1xEV-DO) and Cells (Standard Deviation - 1xEV-DO) tabs contain the following average and standard deviation
information, respectively, per site, transmitter, and 1xEV-DO carrier:
- UL Total Noise (dBm): The total noise on the reverse link takes into account the total signal received at the
transmitter on a carrier from intra and extra-cell terminals using the same carrier and adjacent carriers (total
interference on the reverse link) and the thermal noise.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 517

A9155 User Manual
- Reuse efficiency factor (UL): The reverse link reuse efficiency factor is the reciprocal of the reverse link
reuse factor.
- Number of UL Radio Links: The number of radio links on the reverse link.
- Connection Success Rate (%): The percentage of connections that are successfully made.
- The types of handoff as a percentage: A9155 estimates the percentages of handoff types for each trans-
- UL and DL Throughput (kbps): The throughput on the forward and reverse links.
uration, Multiple Causes, Code Saturation, Admission Rejection, and 1xEV-DO Resources Saturation.
7.2.3.7 Updating Cell Values With Simulation Results

UL Load Factor
Total DL Power

b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder.

b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the CDMA/CDMA2000 Simulations folder.
- UL Load Factor
- Total DL Power

traffic channel powers allowed, Eb/Nt thresholds, etc.) as the ones used to calculate the initial simulation. On the
other hand, the shadowing error distribution between simulations is different and only radio data modifications
(new transmitters, changes to the antenna azimuth, etc.) are taken into account during the power control (or rate/
power control) simulation.
To replay a group of simulations, see "Replaying a Group of Simulations" on page 519.
initialisation number (which must be an integer other than 0) A9155 generates the same user and shadowing error
518 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

allowed, EbNt thresholds, etc.) and radio data (new transmitter, azimuth, etc.) are taken into account during the
power control simulation.
To duplicate a group of simulations, see "Duplicating a Group of Simulations" on page 520.

eral tab.
Replaying a Group of Simulations
To replay an existing group of simulations:

gence.
the reverse link that must be reached between two iterations.
the forward link that must be reached between two iterations.
6. Under Cell Load Limits, you can set the constraints as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 508 that
A9155 must respect during the simulation.
7. Select the level of detail as explained in "Creating Simulations" on page 508 that will be available in the output
from the Information to retain list.
eral tab.
Creating a New Group of Simulations Using the Generator Initialisation Number
To create a new group of simulations using the generator initialisation number:

3. Select New from the context menu. The properties dialogue for a new group of simulations appears.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 519

A9155 User Manual

butions you want to use in this group of simulations. If you enter "0", the default, the user and shadowing error
distribution will be random. If you enter any other integer, the same user and shadowing error distribution will be
used for any simulation using the same generator initialisation value.
of simulations by duplicating an existing one as explained in "Duplicating a Group of Simula-
tions" on page 520.
Duplicating a Group of Simulations
To duplicate an existing group of simulations:

3. Right-click the group of simulations you want to duplicate. The context menu appears.
You can change the parameters for the duplicated simulation or group of simulations as explained in "Creating
Simulations" on page 508.

When you create a group of simulations, you are basing it on a set of traffic conditions that represent the situation you are
creating the network for. However, traffic can, and in fact most likely will, increase. You can test the performance of the
network against an increased traffic load without changing traffic parameters or maps by using the global scaling factor.
For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers (for environment
and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
1. Create a group of simulations by:
- Creating a new group of simulations as described in "Creating Simulations" on page 508.
- Duplicating an existing group of simulations as described in "Adding New Simulations to an A9155 Document"
on page 518.
per sector).

In A9155, you have several methods available to help you analyse simulation results. You can make an active set analysis
of a real-time probe user or you can make a coverage study where each pixel is considered as a probe user with a defined
terminal, mobility, and service. The analyses are based on a single simulation or on an averaged group of simulations.
You can find information on the analysis methods in the following sections:
"Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results" on page 520
7.2.4.1 Making an AS Analysis of Simulation Results

status, and the active set of the probe mobile. Analysis is based on the reverse link load factor and the forward link total
power of cells. In this case, these parameters can be either outputs of a given simulation, or average values calculated
from a group of simulations. The analysis is provided for a user-definable probe receiver which has a terminal, a mobility
and a service.
Before you make an AS analysis:
Ensure the simulation or group of simulations you want to use in the AS analysis is displayed on the map.
Replay the simulation or group of simulations you want to use if you have modified radio parameters since you
made the simulation.
520 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: The AS analysis does not take possible network saturation into account. Therefore, there is
no guarantee that a simulated mobile with the same receiver characteristics can verify the
point analysis, simply because the simulated network may be saturated.
To make an AS analysis of simulation results:
1. Click the Point Analysis button ( ) on the toolbar. The Point Analysis window appears. (see Figure 7.55).
3. At the top of the AS Analysis tab, select from the Simulation list, the simulation or group of simulations you want
to base the AS analysis on.
4. Select the Terminal, Service, Mobility, Carrier, and DL and UL Rates.
5. Right-click the Point Analysis window and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue
appears.
6. Select or clear the following options:
- Whether shadowing is to be taken into account (and, if so, the cell edge coverage probability and shadowing
margin).
- Whether indoor coverage is to be taken into account.

When no simulations are available, A9155 uses the reverse link load factor, the total forward link power defined for each
cell to make coverage predictions. For information on cell properties, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 434; for
information on modifying cell properties, see "Cell Definition" on page 431.
Coverage predictions on the pilot or on a service:
- Pilot Reception Analysis: For information on making a pilot reception analysis, see "Making a Pilot Signal
Quality Prediction" on page 472.
- Service Area Downlink: For information on making a coverage prediction on the forward link service area,
see "Studying Service Area (EbNt) Uplink and Downlink for 1xRTT" on page 474 or "Studying the Forward
Link EV-DO Throughput" on page 474.
- Service Area Uplink: For information on making a coverage prediction on the reverse link service area, see
"Studying Service Area (EbNt) Uplink and Downlink for 1xRTT" on page 474 or "Studying Service Area
(EbNt) Reverse Link for EV-DO" on page 475.
- Effective Service Area: For information on making a pilot pollution coverage analysis, see "Studying Effective
Service Area" on page 476.
- Downlink Total Noise: For information on making a forward link total noise coverage prediction, see "Stud-
ying Forward Link Total Noise" on page 478.
- Pilot Pollution: For information on making a pilot pollution coverage analysis, see "Calculating Pilot Pollution"
on page 479.
A handoff status coverage prediction to analyse macro-diversity performance:
- Handoff Status: For information on making a handoff status coverage prediction, see "Making a Handoff
Status Coverage Prediction" on page 479.
The procedures for the coverage predictions assume that simulation results are not available. When no simulations are
available, you select "(None)" from the Simulation list, on the Condition tab. However, when simulations are available you
can base the coverage prediction on one simulation or a group of simulations.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 521

A9155 User Manual
To base a coverage prediction on a simulation or group of simulations, when setting the parameters:
2. From the Simulation list, select the simulation or group of simulations on which you want to base the coverage
prediction.
3. If you select a group of simulations from the Simulation list, select one of the following:
- All: Select All to make a statistical analysis of all simulations based on the defined Probability (the probability
must be between 0 and 1). This will make a global analysis of all simulations in a group and with an evaluation
of the network stability in terms of fluctuations in traffic.
- Average: Select Average make the coverage prediction on the average of the simulations in the group.
7.3 Verifying and Optimising Network Quality

An important step in the process of creating a CDMA network is verifying the quality of the network. This is done using
measurements of the strength of the pilot signal and other parameters in different locations within the area covered by the
network. This collection of measurements is called a test mobile data path.
the network.

sion FMT).
Information identifying scanned cells (for example, serving cells, neighbour cells, or any other cells). In CDMA net-
works, a cell is identified by its PN offset. Therefore, you must indicate during the import process which columns
contain the PN offset of cells. Because a PN offset can belong to several groups, you can also indicate from which
group the PN offset has been selected.
The data in the file must be structured so that the columns identifying the PN offset group and the PN offset are placed
before the data columns for each cell. Otherwise A9155 will not be able to properly import the file.
import.
522 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Notes:
name if desired.
document.
pears.
d. In the PN Group Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the PN offset
group of scanned cells. For example, if the string "PN_Group" is found in the column names identifying the PN
offset group of scanned cells, enter it here. A9155 will then search for columns with this string in the column
name.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 523

A9155 User Manual
If there is no PN offset group information contained in the test mobile data file, leave the PN Group Identifier
box empty.
e. In the PN Offset Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the PN offset
of scanned cells. For example, if the string "PN" is found in the column names identifying the PN offset of
scanned cells, enter it here. A9155 will then search for columns with this string in the column name.
f. Ensure that the PN offset format selected in the PN Offset Format list is "Decimal."
Important:
configuration:
ample, "*.csv").
d. Click OK.
Notes:
Setup part.

data is displayed.

524 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Notes:

The imported test mobile data is used to verify the CDMA network. To improve the relevance of the data, A9155 allows
you to filter out incompatible or inaccurate points. You can then compare the imported measurements with previously
calculated coverage predictions.
"Extracting Data From a Test Mobile Path for a Selected Transmitter" on page 528

values to be useful. As well, test paths may include test points in areas that are not representative of the test mobile data
path as a whole. For example, a test path that includes two heavily populated areas might also include test points from the
more lightly populated region between the two.
do not want to use.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 525

A9155 User Manual

lowing table:

Combinations of filters are first made horizontally, then vertically. For more information on how filters work, see
"Advanced Data Filtering" on page 67.
Note: You can permanently delete the points that do not fulfil the filter conditions by selecting the
Delete points outside the filter check box.
526 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

7.3.4.2 Refreshing Geo Data for Test Mobile Data

After you have modified existing geo data or added new geographic maps, you can refresh the geo data for the test mobile
data. This allows you to update height and clutter class ifromationi for the test mobile data points.
To refresh geo data for test mobile data points:
3. Select Refresh Geo Data from the context menu. The test mobile data path points are updated with data from the
new and modified geo data.

Pilot signal level and coverage by signal level
Pilot reception analysis (EcI0), service area (EbNt) forward link, and service area (EbNt) reverse link.
- Coverage by Signal Level: Click the Condition tab.
- At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be calculated. Under Server, you
can select whether to calculate the signal level from all transmitters, or only the best or second-best signal.
If you choose to calculate the best or second-best signal, you can enter a Margin. If you select the Shad-
owing Taken into Account check box, you can change the Cell Edge Coverage Probability. You can
select the Indoor Coverage check box to add indoor losses. Indoor losses are defined per clutter class.
Finally, you can select the Carrier to be studied.
- Pilot Reception Analysis (EcI0): Click the Condition tab.
lation. In this case, A9155 calculates the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the
forward link total power defined in the cell properties.
- If you want the pilot signal quality prediction to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken
into account check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box.
class.
- Service Area (EbNt) Downlink: Click the Condition tab.
lation. In this case, A9155 calculates the coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the
forward link total power defined in the cell properties.
text box.
class.
- Service Area (EbNt) Uplink: Click the Condition tab.
lation. In this case, A9155 coverage prediction using the reverse link load factor and the forward link total
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 527

A9155 User Manual
text box.
class.
age prediction.
lations in A9155").
7.3.4.4 Extracting Data From a Test Mobile Path for a Selected Transmitter
When you have test mobile path data, you can extract the data from a selected field for a specific transmitter from each
test mobile path data point where measurements for that transitter exist. The extracted information will be added to a new
column in the table for the test mobile data.
For example, if you wanted to know the pilot strength for the transmitter named "site15_2", you could extract the data from
every point on which the pilot strength from that particular transmitter was measured. In the table for that test mobile path,
A9155 adds a new column, identifying both the field selected and the transmitter.
appears.
7. Select the check box beside the field you want extract for each of the transmitters measured.
Note: A test mobile data path contains the same measurements on each point for several differ-
ent transmitters. If you want to extract the maximum data for the selected transmitter, you
must select the same field for all the transmitters, because the selected transmitter could
be "Transmitter 1" for some test mobile data points, but "Transmitter 2" or any other for
other points.
8. Click OK. The column is added to the data table for the test mobile data path.
After you have extracted the data for the selected transmitter, you can display the table for the test mobile data path with
the extracted data.
To display the test mobile path table:
3. Right-click the test mobile data whose data table you want to display. The context menu appears.
4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The test mobile data table appears with a new column containing the
measurements extracted for the selected transmitter.

528 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 7.89).

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 529

A9155 User Manual
following ways:
- Zoom in or out:

window.
on page 529).
page 528.


"The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 531
"Data Rates Available for Services in CDMA" on page 532
"Defining the 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearers" on page 533
"Site Equipment" on page 533
"Receiver Equipment" on page 534
"Conditions for Entering the Active Set" on page 534

ference reduction factor. A9155 will take the interference reduction factor into account on both the reverse link and the
forward link.
530 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To create a pair of carriers with an interference reduction factor:

3. Select Cells > Interference Reduction Factors from the context menu. The Inter-Carrier Interference Reduc-
tion Factor table appears.
c. Enter an interference reduction factor in the Reduction Factor (dB) column. When A9155 is calculating in-
terference, it subtracts the interference reduction factor from the calculated interference. If the interference re-
duction factor is set to "0," A9155 assumes that the carriers in the defined pair generate as much interference
as cells with the same carrier interference.
Important: The interference reduction factor must be a positive value.
d. Press ENTER to create the carrier pair and to create a new row in the table.

On the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue, you can define many network parameters that
are used in CDMA power control simulations and predictions. Many parameters are used as default values for all trans-
mitters.
"The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 531

The Global Parameters tab has the following options:
Frequency Band: Under Frequency Band, you can define the frequency band and the carriers:
- Frequency: The average frequency of the frequency band.
- # First Carrier and # Last Carrier: The number of the first and the last carrier.
- Spreading Width: The frequency band spreading width, by default 1,2288 MHz. The spreading width corre-
sponds to the system chip rate. It is used to calculate the forward and reverse link processing gain.
- Carrier Types: Clicking the Carrier Types button opens a table where you can define the carriers and
whether the carrier is 1xRTT or 1xEV-DO.
DL Power: Under DL Power, you can define whether the power values on the forward link are Absolute or Rel-
ative to Pilot. The power values affected are the synchronisation power and the paging power defined in the cell
properties and the TCH power in 1xRTT and Speech service properties.
Note: If you change the option under DL Power, the affected values in the cell properties are not
automatically converted. Therefore, you should define the values as absolute or relative
before you create cells.
UL 1xRTT Power Control Based On: Under UL 1xRTT Power Control Based On, you can define whether the
the reverse link power control for the 1xRTT network is based on Traffic Quality or Pilot Quality.
Interferences: Under Interferences, you can define the parameters used to calculate interference on the forward
link: the orthogonality factor and the method used to calculate Nt.
- Default Ortho. Factor: The default orthogonality factor (between 0 and 1) enables you to take into account
the non-orthogonality of Walsh codes caused by multipath. The default orthogonality factor is used when there
are no clutter class maps.
Handoff: Under Handoff, you can define the parameters used to model soft handoff on the reverse link.
- Default UL Macro-Diversity Gain: You can set a default value for the reverse link gain due to macro-diversity
on soft and soft-soft handoffs. If you clear the Shadowing taken into account check box on the Condition
tab when defining a coverage prediction or during a point analysis, A9155 uses this value. If you select the
Shadowing taken into account check box on the Condition tab, A9155 calculates the reverse link macro-
diversity gain, based on the standard deviation value of EbNt on the reverse link defined per clutter class.
- +MRC in Softer/Soft: If you select the +MRC (maximal ratio combining) in Softer/Soft check box, A9155
selects the serving cell during a softer/soft handoff by recombining the signal of co-site transmitters and mul-
tiplying the resulting signal by the rake efficiency factor and then comparing this value to the signal received
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 531

A9155 User Manual
at transmitters located on the other sites of the active set. A9155 chooses the greatest value and multiplies it
by the macro-diversity gain.

2. Right-click on the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears.
6. Click OK.
7.4.3 Data Rates Available for Services in CDMA

The different services offered by a CDMA network require different data rates. CDMA responds to the differing data rate
requirements with a range of carriers. For example, CDMA2000 can provide voice using cdmaOne. Data services, which
require higher data rates than voice, can be provided using 1xRTT or 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 or Rev. A.
The following table gives the data rates available for voice, 1xRTT, and 1xEV-DO Rev. 0 and Rev. A.
Service Reverse Link Forward Link

Speech N FCH * N FCH
1xRTT Data N FCH N FCH
3 X N FCH 3 X N FCH
5 X N FCH 5 X N FCH
For 1xRTT, N FCH can be 9.6 or
14.4 kbps on either the forward or 9 X N FCH 9 X N FCH
reverse link. 17 X N FCH 17 X N FCH
1xEV-DO Rev. 0 Data 9.6 38.4
19.2 76.8
38.4 153.6
76.8 307.6
153.6 614.4
921.6
1228.8
1843.2
2457.6
1xEV-DO Rev. A Data 4.8 4.8
9.6 9.6
19.2 19.2
38.4 38.4
76.8 76.8
115.2 115.2
153.6 153.6
230.4 230.4
307.2 307.2
460.8 460.8
614.4 614.4
921.6 921.6
1228.8 1228.8
1848.2 1848.2
2457.6
3072.0
* N FCH is the nominal throughput of FCH.
532 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

7.4.4 Defining the 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearers

The CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Rev. A reverse link traffic channel can have up to 14 different data rates. In A9155, 1xEV-DO
Rev. A reverse link traffic channel is modelled using radio bearers. The 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer table lists all the
1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearers with their throughput and identifying index numbers. You must define the 1xEV-DO Rev. A
radio bearers before you can model services using them. You can create new bearers and modify existing ones by using
the 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer table.
To create or modify a 1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearer:
4. Select 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer from the context menu. The 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer table
appears.
5. In the 1xEV-DO Rev. A Radio Bearer table, you can enter or modify the following fields:
- Radio Bearer Index: You can modify the index number of the radio bearer. This index number is used to iden-
tify the 1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearer. If you are creating a new 1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearer, enter an index
number in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ).
- Throughput (Kbps): Enter or modify the throughput in kilobits per second.

To create a new piece of CDMA site equipment:
2. Right-click on the Sites folder. The context menu appears.
3. Select Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. The Equipment table appears.
see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48. For the new piece of CDMA equipment you are creating, enter the
following:
- MUD Factor: Multi-User Detection (MUD) is a technology used to decrease intra-cell interference on the
reverse link. MUD is modelled by a coefficient between 0 and 1; this factor is considered in the reverse link
interference calculation. In case MUD is not supported by equipment, enter 0 as value.
- Rake Factor: This factor enables A9155 to model the rake receiver on the reverse link. A9155 uses this factor
to calculate the reverse link signal quality in simulations, point analysis and coverage studies. This parameter
is considered on the reverse link for softer and softer-softer handoffs; it is applied to the sum of signals
received on the same site. The factor value can be between 0 and 1. It models losses due to the imperfection
of signal recombination.
Note: The rake efficiency factor used to model the recombination on the forward link can be set in
terminal properties.
- Carrier Selection: Carrier selection refers to the carrier selection method used during the transmitter admis-
sion control in the mobile active set. The selected strategy is used in simulations when no carrier is specified
in the properties of the service (when all the carriers can be used for the service) or when the carrier specified
for the service is not used by the transmitter. On the other hand, the specified carrier selection mode is always
taken into account in coverage predictions (AS analysis and coverage studies). Choose one of the following:
- UL Min. Noise: The carrier with the minimum reverse link noise (carrier with the lowest reverse link load
factor) is selected.
- DL Min. Power: The carrier with the minimum forward link total power is selected.
- Random: The carrier is randomly chosen.
- Sequential: Carriers are sequentially loaded. The first carrier is selected as long as it is not overloaded.
Then, when the maximum reverse link load factor is reached, the second carrier is chosen and so on.
- Overhead Downlink and Uplink CEs: The overhead reverse link and forward link channel elements (CEs)
correspond to the numbers of channel elements that a cell uses for common channels in the forward and the
reverse link. This setting is also used for Walsh code allocation; it indicates the number of Walsh codes to be
allocated to control channels per cell.
- AS restricted to neighbours: Select this option if you want the other transmitters in the active set to belong
to the neighbour list of the best server.
- Pool of CEs Shared: Select this option if you want all cells on the site to share channel elements.
- Power Pooling Between Transmitters: Select this option if you want all cells on the site to share power on
the traffic channels.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 533

A9155 User Manual
7.4.5.2 Defining Channel Element Consumption per CDMA Site Equipment and
Radio Configuration
The number of channel elements consumed by a user depends on the site equipment, on the radio configuration, and the
link direction (forward or reverse). The number of channel elements consumed can be defined for CDMA simulations.
To define channel element consumption during CDMA simulations:
3. Select Equipment > Channel Element Consumption from the context menu. The CE Consumption table
appears.
4. For each equipment-radio configuration pair, enter in the CE Consumption table the number of reverse link and
forward link channel elements that A9155 will consume during the power control simulation.
7.4.6 Receiver Equipment

When you make CDMA coverage predictions, you can define the height of the receiver.
5. Enter a receiver Height. This value will be used when calculating a CDMA coverage predictions and during a point
analysis.
6. Click OK.
7.4.7 Conditions for Entering the Active Set

The mobile active set is the list of the transmitters to which the mobile is connected. The active set may consist of one or
more transmitters; depending on whether the service supports soft handoff and on the terminal active set size. The quality
of the pilot (EcI0) is what determines whether or not a transmitter can belong to the active set.
In order for a given transmitter to enter the mobile active set as best server, the pilot quality from this transmitter must
exceed an upper threshold (T_Add) defined in the properties of the mobility type. In addition, the pilot quality must be the
highest one.
In order for a transmitter to enter the active set:
It must use the same carrier as the best server transmitter. In A9155, carriers are modelled using cells. For infor-
mation on accessing cell properties, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 434. For a description of the prop-
erties of a cell, see "Cell Definition" on page 431.
The pilot quality from the transmitter must exceed the lower threshold (T_Drop) defined in the properties of the
mobility type.
If you have selected to restrict the active set to neighbours, the transmitter must be a neighbour of the best server.
You can restrict the active set to neighbours by selecting the AS Restricted to Neighbours option in the Site
Equipment table. For an explanation of how to set the AS Restricted to Neighbours option, see "Creating Site
Equipment" on page 533.

Normally, the signal received at any given point is spread on a gaussian curve around an average value with a specific
be worse.
534 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

In CDMA projects, the standard deviation of the propagation model is used to calculate shadowing margins on signal
levels. You can also calculate shadowing margins on EcI0 and EbNt values and the macro-diversity gain. For informa-
tion on setting the model standard deviation and the EcI0 and EbNt standard deviations for each clutter class or for all
Shadowing can be taken into consideration when A9155 calculates the signal level, EcI0, and EbNt for:
A9155 always takes shadowing into consideration when calculating a Monte-Carlo-based CDMA simulation.
You can display the shadowing margins and the macro-diversity gain per clutter class. For information, see "Displaying
the Shadowing Margins and Macro-diversity Gain per Clutter Class" on page 535.
7.4.8.1 Displaying the Shadowing Margins and Macro-diversity Gain per Clutter
Class
Figure 7.90).
- EcI0: The EcI0 standard deviation. A9155 will display the EcI0 shadowing margin and the resulting
forward link pilot macro-diversity gains. The macro-diversity gains will be calculated using the values you
enter in 1st - 2nd Best Signal Difference and 2nd - 3rd Best Signal Difference.
- EbNt UL: The EbNt reverse link standard deviation. A9155 will display the EbNt reverse link shadow-
ing margin and the resulting reverse link macro-diversity gains. The macro-diversity gains will be calcu-
lated using the values you enter in 1st - 2nd Best Signal Difference and 2nd - 3rd Best Signal
Difference.
- EbNt DL: The EbNt forward link standard deviation. A9155 will display the EbNt forward link shadow-
ing margin.
5. If you select "EcI0" or "EbNt UL" as the standard deviation under Standard Deviation, you can enter the differ-
ences that will be used to calculate the macro-diversity gain under Macro-Diversity Parameters:
- 1st - 2nd Best Signal Difference: If you selected "EcI0" as the standard deviation under Standard Devia-
tion, enter the allowed EcI0 difference between the best server and the second one. This value is used to
calculate forward link macro-diversity gains. If you selected "EbNt UL" as the standard deviation under
Standard Deviation, enter the allowed Eb/Nt difference between the best server and the second one. This
value is used to calculate reverse link macro-diversity gains.
- 2nd - 3rd Best Signal Difference: If you selected "EcI0" as the standard deviation under Standard Devia-
tion, enter the allowed EcI0 difference between the second-best server and the third one. This value is used
to calculate forward link macro-diversity gains. If you selected "EbNt UL" as the standard deviation under
Standard Deviation, enter the allowed EbNt difference between the second-best server and the third one.
This value is used to calculate reverse link macro-diversity gains.
6. Click Calculate. The calculated shadowing margin is displayed. If you selected "EcI0" or "EbNt UL" as the
standard deviation under Standard Deviation, A9155 also displays the macro-diversity gains for two links and for
three links.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 535

A9155 User Manual
Figure 7.90: The Shadowing Margins and Gains dialogue
536 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

CHAPTER 8
TD-SCDMA NETWORKS
Chapter 8: TD-SCDMA Networks
8 TD-SCDMA Networks
A9155 enables you to create and modify all aspects of a TD-SCDMA network. Once you have created the network, A9155
offers many tools to let you verify the network. Based on the results of your tests, you can modify any of the parameters
defining the network.
Planning the TD-SCDMA network and creating the network of base stations is explained in "Planning and Optimising TD-
SCDMA Base Stations" on page 539. Allocating neighbours and scrambling codes is also explained. In this section, you
will also find information on how you can display information on base stations on the map and how you can use the tools
in A9155 study base stations.
8.1 Planning and Optimising TD-SCDMA Base Stations

As described in "Chapter 2: Starting an A9155 Project", you can start an A9155 document from a template, with no base
stations, or from a database with a set of base stations. As you work on your A9155 document, you will still need to create
base stations and modify existing ones.
as the TMA, feeder cables, etc. In a TD-SCDMA project, you must also add cells to each transmitter. A cell refers to the
characteristics of a carrier on a transmitter.
results of calculated coverage predictions can be displayed on the map, compared, and analysed.
A9155 enables you to model network traffic by allowing you to create services, user terminals, user profiles, and traffic
environments. This data can be then used to make quality coverage predictions, such as effective service area, noise, or
interference predictions, on the network.
"Creating a TD-SCDMA Base Station" on page 539.
"Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 550.
"Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map" on page 551.
"Display Hints for Base Stations" on page 551.
"Creating a Dual-Band TD-SCDMA Network" on page 552.
"Creating a Repeater" on page 552.
"Creating a Remote Antenna" on page 555.
"Setting the Working Area of an A9155 Document" on page 556.
"Studying a Single Base Station" on page 557.
"Studying Base Stations" on page 562.
"Planning Frequencies" on page 598.
"Planning Scrambling Codes" on page 609.
8.1.1 Creating a TD-SCDMA Base Station

When you create a TD-SCDMA site, you create only the geographical point; you must add the transmitters and cells after-
wards. The site, with the transmitters, antennas, equipment, and cells is called a base station.
Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 546. If you want to create or modify one of the elements of a base station,
see "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 545. If you need to create a large number of base stations,
A9155 allows you to import them from another A9155 document or from an external source. For information, see "Creating
a Group of Base Stations" on page 550.
"Definition of a Base Station" on page 539.
"Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 545.
"Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 546.

example, cells. You will usually create a new base station using a station template, as described in "Placing a New Base
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 539

A9155 User Manual
parameters:
"Site Description" on page 540.
"Transmitter Description" on page 540.
"Cell Description" on page 543.

- Name: A9155 automatically enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the name here. If you
want to change the default name that A9155 gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual.
of the site here.
calculations.
The Equipment tab:
ment" on page 656. If no equipment is assigned to the site, A9155 considers JD Factor = 0 by default.

erties dialogue has three additional tabs: the Cells tab (see "Cell Description" on page 543), the Propagation tab (see
"Chapter 4: Managing Calculations in A9155"), and the Display tab (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33).
The General tab:
- Frequency Band: You can select a Frequency Band for the transmitter. Once you have selected the fre-
quency band, you can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the frequency band. For infor-
mation on the frequency band Properties dialogue, see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 650.
540 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- TransmissionReception: Under TransmissionReception, you can see the total losses and the noise
assigned to the transmitter. Equipment can be assigned by using the Equipment Specifications dialogue
which appears when you click the Equipment button.
losses you define are used to initialise total transmitter UL and DL losses:
ment" on page 131.
page 131.
must be positive.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 541

A9155 User Manual
losses. A9155 always considers the values in the Real boxes in coverage predictions even
if they are different from the values in the Computed boxes. The information in the real
BTS Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in the
Equipment Specifications dialogue. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmis-
sion and reception and the real BTS Noise Figure at reception if you wish. Any value you
enter must be positive.
- Antennas:
- HeightGround: The HeightGround box gives the height of the antenna above the ground. This is add-
ed to the altitude of the site as given by the DTM. If the transmitter is situated on a building, the height
entered must include the height of building.
- Smart Antenna: Under Smart Antenna, the available smart antenna equipment are visible in the Equip-
ment list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the smart antenna equip-
ment. For more information on smart antenna equipment, see "Smart Antenna Equipment" on page 654.
The smart antenna has the same height and tilt as the main antenna.
In case you have a smart antenna equipment based on Grid of Beams (GOB) or Adaptive Beam mod-
elling, it is recommended to verify that the smart antenna beams are consistent with the main antenna pat-
tern.
The combined antenna pattern display can be used to understand any inconsistencies in smart antenna
results. If the gird of beams and the main antenna do not have the same gains, the smart antenna could
provide worse results than the main antenna for traffic timeslots.
To verify the smart antenna and main antenna patterns:
i. Click the Browse button ( ). The Smart Antenna Equipment Properties dialogue appears.
ii. Under Modelling Type, click the Parameters button. The Modelling by Grid of Beams (GOB) or Adap-
tive Beam dialogue appears.
iii. Under Patterns, click the Combined button. A dialogue displays the combined antenna patterns of all the
smart antenna beams and the main antenna (see Figure 8.4).
542 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 8.4: Smart antenna and main antenna patterns
the main antenna.
The main antenna is used to transmit the pilot signals. Coverage predictions based on the P-CCPCH signal are
performed using the main antenna. It is also used for traffic signals if there is no smart antenna equipment selected
for the transmitter.
If there is a smart antenna equipment assigned to the transmitter, traffic data is transmitted and received using the
smart antenna, while the pilot and other common channels are transmitted using the main antenna.
Important: Transmitters that are using a smart antenna equipment should not be assigned any sec-
ondary antennas, remote antennas, or repeaters.
8.1.1.1.3 Cell Description

can configure a TD-SCDMA multi-carrier network. In other words, a transmitter has one cell for every carrier.
the parameters of a TD-SCDMA cell, including the parameters for HSDPA functionality. As you create a cell, A9155 calcu-
lates appropriate values for some fields based on the information you have entered. You can, if you wish, modify these
values.
The properties of a TD-SCDMA cell are found on Cells tab of the Properties dialogue of the transmitter to which it is
assigned.
N-Frequency Mode: If the transmitter is compatible with N-frequency mode, you must select the N-Frequency
Mode check box. Transmitters compatible with the N-frequency mode have one master carrier, and may have one
or more slave carriers. Transmitters which are not compatible with the N-frequency mode have stand-alone car-
riers. Master carriers have P-CCPCH, DwPCH, and Other CCH powers defined, while slave carriers do not. For
more information on the N-frequency mode and allocation of carrier types, see "Planning Frequencies" on
page 598.
cells, see the Administrator Manual.
Carrier: The number of the carrier.
Carrier Type: The type of carrier, i.e., Stand-alone, Master, or Slave.
Max Power (dBm): The maximum available downlink power for the cell.
P-CCPCH Power [TS0] (dBm): The power of the P-CCPCH channel.
Other CCH power [TS0] (dBm): The average power of the control channels (including S-CCPCH) that are not
transmitted continuously on TS0. For example, if P dBm is transmitted during 1 s over a period of 10 s , you
should enter P/10 dBm in order to correctly represent the average interference from these channels.
RSCP P-CCPCH T_Comp [TS0] (dB): The RSCP P-CCPCH comparative threshold for determining the transmit-
ters to keep in the list of potential servers. This parameter is used in the baton handover coverage prediction along
with RSCP P-CCPCH T_Addand RSCP P-CCPCH T_Drop parameters set for different mobility types.
DwPCH Power [DwPTS] (dBm): The power of the DwPTS timeslot.
Max Difference Between 2 Transmitted Powers (dB): The maximum difference between the powers transmitted
by this cell on two DCH. This parameter is used during Monte Carlo simulations in order to avoid too much differ-
ence between users in the same cell.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 543

A9155 User Manual
Scrambling code domain: The scrambling code domain to which the allocated scrambling code belongs. This
and the scrambling code reuse distance are used by the automatic scrambling code allocation algorithm.
SC Reuse Distance: The scrambling code reuse distance. This and the scrambling code domain are used by the
scrambling code planning algorithm.
Scrambling code: The scrambling code allocated to the cell.
Timeslot Configuration: The configuration of the traffic timeslots in the frame. You can select from the 5 possible
timeslot configurations in TD-SCDMA, i.e., (D)UDDDDD, (D)UUDDDD, (D)UUUDDD, (D)UUUUDD, and
(D)UUUUUD. There are two switching points in the frame, one after the first mandatory downlink timeslot (D), and
the other can be after 1 to 5 uplink timeslots. The symmetric configuration is selected by default.
Required Resource Units in UL: The number of resource units required in the uplink.
Required Resource Units in DL: The number of resource units required in the downlink. You can calculate the
number of required resource units in the uplink and downlink using the network capacity calculation tools. For infor-
mation on calculating network capacity, see "TD-SCDMA Network Capacity" on page 617.
Comments: If desired, you can enter any comments in this field.
HSDPA: The HSDPA check box is selected if the cell has HSDPA functionality. When the HSDPA check box is
- Available HSDPA Power (dBm): This is the power available for the HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH of HSDPA
users.
- Power Headroom (dB): The power headroom is a reserve of power that A9155 keeps for Dedicated Physical
Channels (DPCH) in case of fast fading. During simulation, HSDPA users will not be connected if the cell
power remaining after serving R99 users is less than the power headroom value.
- Max Number of HS-PDSCH codes: The maximum number of OVSF codes available for HS-PDSCH chan-
nels. This value will be taken into account during simulations and coverage predictions in order to find a suit-
able bearer.
Max number of intra-technology neighbours: The maximum number of intra-technology neighbours for this
cell. This value is used by the intra-technology neighbour allocation algorithm.
Max number of inter-technology neighbours: The maximum number of inter-technology neighbours for this
Neighbours: You can access a dialogue in which you can set both intra-technology and inter-technology neigh-
bours by clicking the Browse button ( ). For information on defining neighbours, see "Planning Frequencies"
on page 598.
Timeslots: You can access a dialogue in which you can access per-timeslot information, i.e, for each of the six
traffic timeslots, about the cell by clicking the Browse button ( ) (see Figure 8.5).
Tip: The Browse buttons ( ) might not be visible in the Neighbours and Timeslot boxes if
this is a new cell. You can make the Browse buttons appear by clicking Apply.
Timeslot properties dialogue has the following options:

- Blocked: If this timeslot is to be blocked, i.e., not used for traffic, you must select the Blocked check box. A
blocked timeslot is not used by the Dynamic Channel Allocation (DCA) algorithm and does not carry any traffic.
- Other CCH power (dBm): The power of other common channels (S-CCPCH, FPACH, and PICH) on the
traffic timeslot. Other common control channels can be transmitted on a downlink traffic timeslot using the
main antenna.
- Total Power (dBm): The total transmitted power on downlink is the total power necessary to serve R99 and
HSDPA users on the downlink timeslots. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered by the user.
- Max DL Load (% Max Power): The percentage of the maximum downlink power (set in Max Power) not to
be exceeded. This limit will be taken into account during the simulation if the option DL Load is selected. If the
DL load option is not selected during a simulation, this value is not taken into consideration.
- UL Load Factor (%): The uplink load factor for uplink timeslots. This factor corresponds to the ratio between
the uplink total interference and the uplink total noise. This value can be a simulation result or can be entered
by the user.
- Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor not to be exceeded. This limit can be taken into
account during the simulation.
- Geographic distribution of the UL and DL loads: The geographical distribution of downlink transmitted
power and uplink loads computed for cells whose transmitters have a smart antenna equipment. This value is
a simulation result.
- Resource Units Overhead: The number of resource units corresponding to overhead. You can enter the
Resource Units Overhead, which is taken into consideration during network dimensioning. For information
on calculating network capacity, see "TD-SCDMA Network Capacity" on page 617.
544 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 8.5: Timeslot properties dialogue

"Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 545.
"Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 545.

page 540).
4. Click OK.

Figure 8.2).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 545

A9155 User Manual

Tips:

Description" on page 543, through the Properties dialogue of the transmitter where the cell is located. How you access
the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new cell or modifying an existing cell.
appears.
6. Modify the parameters described in "Cell Description" on page 543.
7. Click OK.
Tips:
8.1.1.3 Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template

In A9155, a base station is defined as a site with one or more transmitters sharing the same properties. With A9155, you
can create a network by placing base stations based on station templates. This allows you to build your network quickly
with consistent parameters, instead of building the network by first creating the site, then the transmitters, and finally by
adding the cells.
To place a new base station using a station template:

3. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new base station. The
exact coordinates of the pointers current location are visible in the Status bar.
4. Click to place the base station.
Tips:
To place the base station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you click the New
Station button. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on
page 38.
If you let the pointer rest over the base station you have placed, A9155 displays its tip text with
its exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
546 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

You can also place a series of base stations using a station template. You do this by defining an area on the map where
you want to place the base stations. A9155 calculates the placement of each base station according to the defined hexag-
onal cell radius in the station template. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station
To place a series of base stations within a defined area:
2. Click the Hexagonal Design button ( ), to the left of the template list. A hexagonal design is a group of base
stations created from the same station template.
3. Draw a zone delimiting the area where you want to place the series of base stations:
A9155 fills the delimited zone with new base stations and their hexagonal shapes. Base station objects such as
sites and transmitters are also created and placed into their respective folders.
You can work with the sites and transmitters in these base stations as you work with any base station object, adding, for
example, another antenna to a transmitter.
Placing a Base Station on an Existing Site
When you place a new base station using a station template as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station
Template" on page 546, the site is created at the same time as the base station. However, you can also place a new base
station on an existing site.
To place a base station on an existing site:

place the base station.

A9155 comes with TD-SCDMA station templates, but you can also create and modify station templates. The tools for work-
ing with station templates can be found on the Radio toolbar (see Figure 8.6).

4. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. On this tab (see Figure 8.7), you can modify the following:
- Name: The name of the station template.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 547

A9155 User Manual
- Sectors: The number of Sectors, each with a transmitter, of the base station created using this station tem-
plate.
- Hexagon Radius: The theoretical radius of the hexagonal area covered by each sector.
- Frequency Band: You can select a Frequency Band for the transmitters of the station template.
- Under Antennas:
- Height: The Height box gives the height of the antenna above the ground. This is added to the altitude of
the site as given by the DTM. If the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include
the height of building.
- 1st Sector Azimuth: The azimuth angle of the first sector. If it is a multi-sector station template, the
azimuth of the other sectors are offset to offer complete coverage of the area.
- Main Antenna: Under Main Antenna, the type of antenna is visible in the Model list. The other fields,
Azimuth, Mechanical Downtilt, and Additional Electrical Downtilt, display additional antenna param-
eters.
- Smart Antenna: Under Smart Antenna, the available smart antenna equipment are visible in the Equip-
ment list.

5. Click the Transmitter tab. On this tab (see Figure 8.8), if the Active check box is selected, you can modify the fol-
lowing:
- Under TransmissionReception, you can click the Equipment button to open the Equipment Specifica-
page 540.
The information in the real Total Losses in transmission and reception boxes is calculated from the informa-
tion you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue (see Figure 8.3 on page 542). Any loss related to
the noise due to a transmitters repeater is included in the calculated losses. A9155 always considers the val-
ues in the Real boxes in coverage predictions even if they are different from the values in the Computed box-
es. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and reception if you wish. Any value you enter must
be positive.
The information in the real BTS Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in
the Equipment Specifications dialogue. You can modify the real BTS Noise Figure at reception if you wish.
Any value you enter must be positive.
548 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

6. Click the TD-SCDMA tab. On this tab (see Figure 8.9), you modify the Carriers (each corresponding to a cell) that
this base station supports. For information on carriers and cells, see "Cell Description" on page 543.
- You can select the number of Carriers for this template.
- You can select whether the transmitters created with this template are compatible with the N-Frequency
Mode or not. If you select the N-Frequency Mode check box, the transmitters created using this station tem-
plate will have at least one master carrier with P-CCPCH, DwPCH, and Other CCH powers. If there are more
than one carriers on the transmitters, the rest of the carriers will be slave carriers. Slave carriers will not have
any P-CCPCH, DwPCH, and Other CCH powers. If you do not select the N-Frequency Mode check box, the
transmitters created using this template will have stand-alone carriers.
- Under Power, you can modify the Max, P-CCPCH, DwPCH, and the Other CCH powers.
- You can select a default Timeslot Configuration for the cells.
- You can also select the default Equipment for the sites.
Figure 8.9: Station Template Properties dialogue TD-SCDMA tab

7. Click the HSDPA tab.
On this tab (see Figure 8.10), if the HSDPA supported check box is selected, you can modify the following under
HSDPA (for more information on the fields, see "Cell Description" on page 543):
- You can enter the Available HSDPA Power.
- You can define a Power Headroom.
- You can select the Max Number of HS-PDSCH Codes.
Figure 8.10: Station Template Properties dialogue HSDPA tab
your changes.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 549

A9155 User Manual

v. For Type, you can select from Text, Short integer, Long integer, Single, Double, TrueFalse,
DateTime, and Currency. If you choose text, you can also set the field Size (in characters), and create
a Choice list, by entering the possible selections directly in the Choice list window and pressing ENTER
after each one.
ii. Click the Delete button. The user-defined field appears in strikethrough. It will be definitively deleted when
6. Click OK.

deleted.
4. Click OK.

You can create base stations individually as explained in "Creating a TD-SCDMA Base Station" on page 539, or you can
create one or several base stations by using station templates as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station
Template" on page 546. However, if you have a large data-planning project and you already have existing data, you can
import this data into your current A9155 document and create a group of base stations.
page 84.

550 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

ing data into.
Design tool on the Radio toolbar. For information, see "Placing a New Base Station Using
a Station Template" on page 546.


3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 551

A9155 User Manual
8.1.5 Creating a Dual-Band TD-SCDMA Network

In A9155, you can model a dual-band TD-SCDMA network, i.e., a network consisting of 2100 MHz and 900 MHz trans-
mitters, in one document. Creating a dual-band TD-SCDMA network consists of the following steps:
1. Defining the two frequency bands in the document (see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 650).
in A9155").
page 540).

The UL total gain value in service areas coverage predictions (effective service area and UL EbNt service area)
and the noise rise generated at the donor transmitter by the repeater.
Notes:
It is advised not to assign repeaters to transmitters that have a smart antenna equipment
assigned to them.
Broad-band repeaters are not modelled. A9155 assumes that all carriers from the 3G donor

"Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment" on page 552.
"Placing a Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 552.
"Creating Several Repeaters" on page 553.
"Defining the Properties of a Repeater" on page 553.

to calculate the UL loss to be added to the donor transmitter UL losses. The noise figure must be a positive
value.
calculations.
modify.

552 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


page 553.

pasting data into.

antenna.
ii. Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the HeightGround box. This will be added to the altitude
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 553

A9155 User Manual
ton.
the feeder.
from the repeater. The UL total gain value is considered in UL EbNt service area coverage predictions.
The DL total gain is applied to each power (P-CCPCH power, DwPCH power, etc.). It takes into account losses
between the donor transmitter and the repeater, donor characteristics (donor antenna gain, reception feeder
losses), amplification gain, and coverage characteristics (coverage antenna gain and transmission feeder
losses).
and the repeater, donor part characteristics (donor antenna gain, transmission feeder losses), amplification
gain and coverage part characteristics (coverage antenna gain and reception feeder losses).

i. Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the HeightGround box. This will be added to the altitude
properties of the antenna. Then, enter the Azimuth and the Mechanical Downtilt. By default, the char-
acteristics (antenna, azimuth, height, etc.) of the repeater coverage side correspond to the characteristics
of the donor transmitter.
the feeder.
tion parameters. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the Propagation Model, Radius, and Resolution for
both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. By default, the propagation characteristics of the repeater (model,
calculation radius, and grid resolution) are the same as those of the donor transmitter. For information on propa-
gation models, see "Chapter 4: Managing Calculations in A9155".

You can update the calculated azimuths and downtilts of the donor-side antennas of all repeaters by selecting
You can update the UL and DL total gains of all repeaters by selecting Repeaters > Calculate Gains from the
Transmitters context menu.
554 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


If desired, you can model a remote antenna with equipment or a remote antenna connected to a base station with antennas
by creating a repeater. For information on creating a repeater, see "Creating a Repeater" on page 552.
Note: You should not assign remote antennas to transmitters that have a smart antenna equip-
ment assigned to them.

"Placing a Remote Antenna on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 555.
"Creating Several Remote Antennas" on page 555.
"Defining the Properties of a Remote Antenna" on page 555.


ing data into.

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 555

A9155 User Manual
- Enter "0" as the Amplification gain.
- Under Donor-Repeater Link, select Optical Fibre Link and enter the Cable Losses.
- Select the Active check box. Only active remote antennas (displayed with in red in the Transmitters folder in
the Data tab of the Explorer window) are calculated.
from the remote antenna. The UL total gain value is considered in UL EbNt service area coverage predic-
tions.
The DL total gain is applied to each power (P-CCPCH power, DwPCH power, etc.). It takes into account losses
between the donor transmitter and the remote antenna.
and the remote antenna.

i. Enter the height off the ground of the antenna in the HeightGround box. This will be added to the altitude
the feeder.
agation parameters, as with transmitters. On the Propagation tab, you can modify the Propagation Model,
Radius, and Resolution for both the Main Matrix and the Extended Matrix. By default, the propagation charac-
teristics of the remote antenna (model, calculation radius, and grid resolution) are the same as those of the donor
transmitter. For information on propagation models, see "Chapter 4: Managing Calculations in A9155".

You can update the UL and DL total gains of all remote antennas by selecting Remote Antennas > Calculate

tages:
556 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 74. Filtering enables you to keep only the base stations with
the characteristics you want to study.

In a larger project, especially when you are making repeated coverage predictions in order to see the effects of
small changes in site configuration, the savings in time is considerable. Limiting the number of sites by drawing a
computation zone also limits the resulting calculated coverage.
defines the area where A9155 computes path loss matrices, coverage predictions, Monte Carlo, power control
simulations, etc., while the focus zone or hot spot zone is the area taken into consideration when generating
reports and results.
studied.

As you create a base station, you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. Coverage predictions on
groups of sites can take a large amount of time and consume a lot of computer resources. Restricting your coverage
prediction to the base station you are currently working on allows you get the results quickly. You can expand your cover-
age prediction to a number of base stations once you have optimised the settings for each individual base station.
Before studying a base station, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and
geographic data into account and computes losses along the transmitter-receiver path. This allows you to predict the
received signal level at any given point. Any coverage prediction you make on a base station uses the propagation model
to calculate its results.
"Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 557.

In A9155, you can make a point analysis to study reception along a profile between a reference transmitter and a
TD-SCDMA user. The profile is calculated in real time, using the propagation model, allowing you to study the profile with-
out calculating the path loss matrices. You can assign a propagation model to all transmitters at once, to a group of trans-
mitters, or to a single transmitter
"Assigning a Propagation Model to All Transmitters" on page 557.
"Assigning a Propagation Model to a Group of Transmitters" on page 558.
"Assigning a Propagation Model to One Transmitter" on page 558.
"Making a Point Analysis" on page 559.
For more information about the available propagation models, see "Chapter 4: Managing Calculations in A9155".

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 557

A9155 User Manual


selected group.

- Main Resolution
ters.
appears.
558 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Making a Point Analysis

lowing:
The profile analysis appears in the Profile tab of the Point Analysis Tool window. The altitude (in metres) is


the context menu on all tabs of the Point Analysis Tool window. You can:
class.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 559

A9155 User Manual

carrier.

prediction.
560 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA



mitters.
and you can obtain more accurate results by using for the main and extended matrices propagation models
best suited for each distance.
g. Close the table.
The Study Types dialogue lists the coverage predictions available. They are divided into Standard Studies,
supplied with A9155, and Customized Studies. Unless you have already created some customized coverage
predictions, the Customized Studies list will be empty.
5. Select RSCP P-CCPCH Coverage and click OK. A coverage prediction properties dialogue appears.

Display Resolution
Prediction
City Centre 5m
City 20 m
County 50 m
State 100 m
will be considered for each pixel (see Figure 8.13). You can set:
- Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. Gain and Losses defined in the
terminal properties are used.
- Service: The service to be considered in the coverage prediction. Body Loss defined in the service prop-
erties is used.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. RSCP P-CCPCH Threshold
defined in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 561

A9155 User Manual
- Carrier: You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. If
you select "All", A9155 performs the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest power.
- Timeslot: The RSCP P-CCPCH coverage prediction is performed for TS0.
Probability.
class.
Figure 8.13: Condition settings for an RSCP P-CCPCH coverage prediction
you may make the coverage prediction invalid. You will then have to recalculate the predic-
tion to obtain valid results.
Once A9155 has finished calculating the coverage prediction, the results are displayed in the map window. The RSCP P-
CCPCH coverage prediction can be found in the Predictions folder on the Data tab. A9155 automatically locks the results
of a coverage prediction as soon as it is calculated, as indicated by the icon ( ) beside the coverage prediction in the
( ).

"Path Loss Matrices" on page 562.
"The Calculation Process" on page 564.
"Creating a Computation Zone" on page 564.
"Setting Transmitters or Cells as Active" on page 565.
"Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 565.
"Analysing a Coverage Prediction" on page 572.
"Signal Quality Coverage Predictions" on page 579.
"HSDPA Coverage Prediction" on page 595.

562 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

One file per transmitter with the extension LOS for its main path loss matrix.
Manual.
5. Click OK.
you can check if the path loss matrices are invalid without creating a coverage prediction.

are recalculated.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 563

A9155 User Manual

results of the coverage predictions as soon as they are calculated, as indicated by the icon ( ) beside the cov-
erage predictions in the Predictions folder.
the toolbar.


564 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

page 71.

3. Select Cells > Open Table. The Cells table appears with each cells parameters in a second row.

A9155 offers a series of coverage predictions that are based on the received signal level per pixel. These signal levels
can be the P-CCPCH signal on TS0, the DwPCH signal on the DwPTS timeslot, and the UpPCH signal on the UpPTS
timeslot. Coverage predictions based on interference and network load conditions are covered in "Signal Quality Coverage
Predictions" on page 579, and "HSDPA Coverage Prediction" on page 595.
the coverage prediction into a template (which will appear in the Study Types dialogue. You can also select Duplicate
from the coverage predictions context menu to create a copy. By duplicating an existing coverage prediction that has the
parameters you wish to study, you can create a new prediction more quickly. If you clone a coverage prediction, by select-
ing Clone from the context menu, you can create a copy of the coverage prediction with the calculated coverage. You can
"Making an RSCP P-CCPCH Coverage Prediction" on page 566.
"Making a Best Server P-CCPCH Coverage Prediction" on page 567.
"Making a P-CCPCH Pollution Coverage Prediction" on page 568.
"Making an RSCP DwPCH Coverage Prediction" on page 569.
"Making an RSCP UpPCH Coverage Prediction" on page 571.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 565

A9155 User Manual
8.1.10.5.1 Making an RSCP P-CCPCH Coverage Prediction

An RSCP P-CCPCH coverage prediction allows you to predict the signal strength of the pilot channel (TS0) using the main
antenna of the transmitter at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a
defined range.
To make an RSCP P-CCPCH coverage prediction:
4. Select RSCP P-CCPCH Coverage and click OK.
6. Click the Condition tab (see Figure 8.15). The coverage prediction parameters on the Conditions tab allow you to
define the signals that will be considered for each pixel. You can set:
- Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. Gain and Losses defined in the terminal
properties are used.
- Service: The service to be considered in the coverage prediction. Body Loss defined in the service properties
is used.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. RSCP P-CCPCH T_Add (RSCP P-
CCPCH Threshold) defined in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage
prediction.
- Carrier: You can select the Carrier to be studied, or select "All" to have all carriers taken into account. If you
select "All", A9155 performs the coverage prediction for the carrier with the highest power.
ability.
class.
Figure 8.15: Condition settings for an RSCP P-CCPCH coverage prediction

For a P-CCPCH coverage area prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "RSCP P-
CCPCH" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the P-CCPCH prediction
makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the RSCP P-CCPCH level. For information
on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
- RSCP Margin: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "RSCP Margin" as the Field. RSCP Margin
is the margin between the RSCP P-CCPCH and the RSCP P-CCPCH T_Add given for the selected Mobility.
- Cell Edge Coverage Probability: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and "Cell Edge Coverage
Probability" as the Field.
Figure 8.16).
566 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 8.16: RSCP P-CCPCH coverage prediction
8.1.10.5.2 Making a Best Server P-CCPCH Coverage Prediction

A best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction the user to predict which server is the best at each pixel according to the
signal strength of the pilot channel (TS0) using the main antenna of the transmitter. You can base the coverage on the
signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range.
4. Select Best Server P-CCPCH Coverage and click OK.
for each pixel. On the Condition tab, you can set:
is used.
prediction.
- Timeslot: The best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction is performed for TS0.
ability.
class.
Figure 8.17: Condition settings for a best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 567

A9155 User Manual

Figure 8.18).
Figure 8.18: Best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction
8.1.10.5.3 Making a P-CCPCH Pollution Coverage Prediction

A P-CCPCH pollution coverage prediction is composed of pixels that are, for a defined condition, covered by the pilot
signal of at least two transmitters. The coverage prediction considers signal strengths of the pilot channel (TS0) transmitter
using the main antenna of the transmitters. You can base a P-CCPCH coverage prediction on the signal level, path loss,
or total losses within a defined range.
4. Select P-CCPCH Pollution and click OK.
for each pixel. On the Condition tab, you can set:
is used.
prediction.
- Timeslot: The P-CCPCH pollution coverage prediction is performed for TS0.
ability.
class.
- Pollution Margin: The margin for determining which signals to consider. A9155 considers signal levels which
are within the defined margin of the best signal level.
568 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 8.19: Condition settings for a P-CCPCH pollution coverage prediction

Figure 8.20).
Figure 8.20: P-CCPCH pollution coverage prediction
8.1.10.5.4 Making an RSCP DwPCH Coverage Prediction

An RSCP DwPCH coverage prediction allows you to predict the signal strength of the DwPCH channel (DwPTS timeslot)
using the main antenna of the transmitter at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total
losses within a defined range.
To make an RSCP DwPCH coverage prediction:
4. Select RSCP DwPCH Coverage and click OK.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 569

A9155 User Manual
is used.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. RSCP DwPCH Threshold defined in
the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction.
- Timeslot: The RSCP DwPCH coverage prediction is performed for DwPTS timeslot.
ability.
class.
Figure 8.21: Condition settings for an RSCP DwPCH coverage prediction

For a DwPCH coverage area prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "RSCP DwPCH"
is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the DwPCH prediction makes availa-
ble. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the RSCP DwPCH level. For information on defining

is the margin between the RSCP DwPCH and the RSCP DwPCH Threshold given for the selected Mobility.
Figure 8.22).
570 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 8.22: RSCP DwPCH coverage prediction
8.1.10.5.5 Making an RSCP UpPCH Coverage Prediction

An RSCP UpPCH coverage prediction allows you to predict the signal strength of the UpPCH channel (UpPTS timeslot)
using the main antenna of the transmitter at each pixel. You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total
losses within a defined range.
To make an RSCP UpPCH coverage prediction:
4. Select RSCP UpPCH Coverage and click OK.
- Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. UpPCH Power, Gain, and Losses
defined in the terminal properties are used.
is used.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. RSCP UpPCH Threshold defined in
the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction.
- Timeslot: The RSCP UpPCH coverage prediction is performed for UpPTS timeslot.
ability.
class.
Figure 8.23: Condition settings for an RSCP UpPCH coverage prediction
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 571

A9155 User Manual
For an UpPCH coverage area prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "RSCP UpPCH"
is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the UpPCH prediction makes available.
Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the RSCP UpPCH level. For information on defining display
properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
is the margin between the RSCP UpPCH and the RSCP UpPCH Threshold given for the selected Mobility.
Figure 8.24).
Figure 8.24: RSCP UpPCH coverage prediction

Once you have completed a coverage prediction, you can analyse the results with the tools that A9155 provides.
You can select which coverage predictions to display or to hide by selecting or clearing the display check box. For infor-
mation on managing the display, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
"Displaying the Legend Window" on page 572.
"Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips" on page 572.
"Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab" on page 573.
"Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 573.
"Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics" on page 575.


572 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA



At the top of the Reception tab, you can select the carrier to be analysed.
appears.
area where A9155 computes path loss matrices, coverage predictions, Monte Carlo, power control simulations, etc., while
the focus and hot spot zones are the areas taken into consideration when generating reports and results. When you create
a coverage prediction report, it gives the results for the focus zone and for each of the defined hot spot zones.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 573

A9155 User Manual


Notes:

erties dialogue.
use the calculation zone. However, by using a focus zone for the report, you can create a report for a specific number of
4. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The prediction report table appears. The report is based on the
hot spot zones and on the focus zone if available or on the hot spot zones and computation zone if there is no
focus zone.
3. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The prediction report table appears. The report shows all dis-
played coverage predictions in the same order as in the Predictions folder. The report is based on the focus zone
if available or on the calculation zone if there is no focus zone.
tion map:
574 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


5. Click OK.
value data (revenue, number of customers, etc.) or density data (revenuekm, number of customerkm, etc.). Data is

displays a histogram using the coverage prediction colours, interval steps, and shading as defined in the Display tab of
the coverage predictions Properties dialogue. You can also display a cumulative distribution function (CDF) or an inverse
page 573.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 575

A9155 User Manual

of the comparison coverage in one of the following ways:
by both coverage predictions are displayed in red).
colour (for example, pixels covered by both coverage predictions are red, pixels covered only by the first prediction
are green, and pixels covered only by the second prediction are blue).
erage between them.
"Example 1: Studying the Effect of a New Base Station" on page 576.
An RSCP P-CCPCH coverage prediction of the current network is made as described in "Making an RSCP P-CCPCH
Coverage Prediction" on page 566. The results are displayed in Figure 8.28. An area with poor coverage is visible on the
right side of the figure.
Figure 8.28: RSCP P-CCPCH coverage prediction of existing network
A new base station is added, either by creating the site and adding the transmitters, as explained in "Creating a TD-
SCDMA Base Station" on page 539, or by using a station template, as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using a
Station Template" on page 546. Once the new base station has been added, the original coverage prediction can be recal-
culated, but then it will be impossible to compare the two predictions. Instead, the original RSCP P-CCPCH coverage
prediction can be copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated to show the effect of
the new base station (see Figure 8.29).
576 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 8.29: RSCP P-CCPCH coverage prediction of network with new base station

2. From the context menu, select Compare with and, from the menu that opens, select the prediction you want to
compare with the first. The Comparison Properties dialogue appears.
resolution.
- Intersection
- Union
- Difference
new base station.
Figure 8.30: Comparison of both RSCP P-CCPCH coverage predictions
If you have an area in a network that is poorly covered by current transmitters, you have several options for improving
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 577

A9155 User Manual
A best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction of the current network is made as described in "Making a Best Server P-
CCPCH Coverage Prediction" on page 567. The results are displayed in Figure 8.31. The coverage prediction shows that
one transmitter is covering its area poorly. The area is indicated with a red oval in the figure.
Figure 8.31: Best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction of the existing network
(see Figure 8.32).
Figure 8.32: Best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction of network after modifications
resolution.
- Intersection
- Union
- Difference
578 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 8.33: Comparison of both best server P-CCPCH coverage predictions
8.1.10.7 Signal Quality Coverage Predictions

In TD-SCDMA, the quality of the signal and the size of the area that can be covered are influenced by the network load.
As the network load increases, the area a cell can effectively cover decreases. For this reason, the network load must be
defined in order to calculate signal quality coverage predictions.
If you have traffic maps, you can do a Monte Carlo simulation to model power control and evaluate the network load for a
generated user distribution. You can base a coverage prediction on simulation results by committing the results of a simu-
lation to cell properties. If you do not have traffic maps, you can enter these values manually in the Cells and Cell Param-
eters per Timeslot tables. A9155 calculates the network load using the UL load factor and DL traffic power defined for
each timeslot of each cell.
In this section, the signal quality coverage predictions will be calculated using UL load factor and DL traffic power param-
eters defined at the timeslot level for each cell. For the purposes of these coverage predictions, each pixel is considered
a non-interfering user with a defined timeslot, service, mobility type, and terminal.
Before making a prediction, you will have to set the UL load factor and DL traffic power and the parameters that define the
services and users. These are explained in the following sections:
"Setting the UL Load Factor and the DL Traffic Power" on page 579.
Several different types of signal quality coverage predictions, based either on EbNt, CI, or traffic channel quality, are
explained in this section. The following quality coverage predictions are explained:
"Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction" on page 583.
"Making a DwPTS Signal Quality Prediction" on page 585.
"Studying Downlink and Uplink Service Area" on page 586.
"Studying Downlink and Uplink Traffic Channel Coverage" on page 589.
The following noise coverage predictions, also coverage predictions, are explained:
"Studying Downlink Total Noise" on page 591.
A coverage prediction is available for determining the interference between cells in the case of asymmetric and different
timeslot configurations used for different cells:
"Studying Cell to Cell Interference" on page 592.
Another type of coverage prediction, the baton handover coverage prediction, is also explained:
"Making a Baton Handover Coverage Prediction" on page 593.
You can define the minimum RSCP threshold for your network in order to limit the calculation range and optimise the calcu-
lation time. For all the calculations, A9155 only considers the pixels where the RSCP P-CCPCH exceeds the minimum
RSCP threshold. Defining the minimum RSCP threshold for the network is explained in the following section:
"Defining the Minimum RSCP P-CCPCH Threshold" on page 583.
8.1.10.7.1 Setting the UL Load Factor and the DL Traffic Power

If you are setting the UL load factor and the DL traffic power for a single transmitter, you can set these parameters on the
timeslot properties dialogue available from the Cells tab of the transmitters Properties dialogue. However, you can set
the UL load factor and the DL traffic power for all the timeslots of all the cells using the Cell Parameters per Timeslot
table.
To set the UL load factor and the DL traffic power using the Cell Parameters per Timeslot table:
3. Select Cells > Timeslot from the context menu. The Cell Parameters per Timeslot table appears.
4. Enter:
- DL Traffic Power (dBm): The value of downlink traffic power for downlink timeslots.
- UL Load Factor (%): The value of uplink load factor for uplink timeslots.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 579

A9155 User Manual
Uplink and downlink timeslots can be distinguished by referring to the cells Timeslot Configuration. For a defi-
nition of the values, see "Cell Description" on page 543.

"Modelling Services" on page 580.
"Creating a Mobility Type" on page 581.
Modelling Services
Services are the various services available to subscribers. These services can be either circuit-switched or packet-
switched services. This section explains how to create a service. However, only the following parameters are used in
predictions:
Maximum TCH Power (dBm)
Uplink and downlink EbNt or CI TCH targets (dB) per mobility
Body loss
HSDPA application throughput parameters
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
5. You can edit the fields on the General tab to define the new service. Some fields depend on the Type of service
you choose. You can change the following parameters:
tive.
- Type: You can select either Circuit or Packet as the service type.
If you want the service to be able to use HSDPA channels, select Packet and the HSDPA check box. For pack-
et services that can use HSDPA channels, you have the following options:
- A-DPCH Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink A-DPCH activity factors (for services that support
HSDPA) are used to estimate the average power on A-DPCH channels.
is the requested average HS-PDSCH rate which guarantees a minimum average downlink rate during an
HSDPA call. It is used twice in a simulation: once during user distribution generation in order to calculate
the number of HSDPA users attempting a connection and then during power control as a quality target to
be compared to the real obtained average throughput.
cation level.
If you select Packet to create a service that does not use HSDPA, you have the following option:
- Efficiency Factor: The uplink and downlink efficiency factors are used to determine duration of usage by
the user. It does this by determining the average usage of the network by the user.
If you select Circuit, you have the following options.
- Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink activity factors are used to determine the probability of activity
for each user when making a Monte Carlo distribution for a power control simulation.
- Carrier: You can select one of the available carriers or all carriers. The specified carrier is considered in sim-
ulation when connecting a mobile user to a transmitter. If the transmitter uses the specified carrier, A9155
selects it.
example, in a voice connection the body loss, due to the proximity of the users head, is estimated to be 3 dB.
- Nominal Uplink Rate (Kbps): Enter or modify the nominal uplink rate in kilobytes per second.
- Nominal Downlink Rate (Kbps): Enter or modify the nominal downlink rate in kilobytes per second.
- Uplink Processing Gain: Enter or modify the uplink processing gain.
- Downlink Processing Gain: Enter or modify the downlink processing gain.
- Under Allowed Downlink Traffic Channel Power, you can set the minimum and maximum downlink traffic
channel powers, which make up the dynamic range for downlink power control.
- Min.: Enter or modify the minimum traffic channel power.
- Max: Enter or modify the maximum traffic channel power.
580 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Under Resource Units, you can define the uplink and downlink resource unit consumption in terms of uplink
and downlink timeslots and numbers of codes for different spreading factors.
- DL: Enter or modify the number of downlink traffic timeslots for the service.
- UL: Enter or modify the number of uplink traffic timeslots for the service.
You can access the Resource Unit Consumption dialogues by clicking the Browse button ( ) to the
right of the timeslot field. In the Resource Unit Consumption dialogues, you can enter the number of
OVSF codes of different lengths for each timeslot. This information is used to carry out network dimen-
sioning and to simulate the Dynamic Channel Allocation (DCA) algorithm. For information on calculating
network capacity, see "TD-SCDMA Network Capacity" on page 617. For information on the dynamic chan-
nel allocation, see "The Monte Carlo Simulation Algorithm" on page 628.
6. If you selected Circuit as the Type in step 5., continue to step 8. If you selected Packet as the Type in step 5.,
an additional tab, the Packet tab, appears. Click the Packet tab.
In the Packet tab, you can set the following parameters for packet switched services:
- Under Session, you can set:

- Average Number of Packet Calls: Enter the average number of packet calls in the uplink and downlink
during one session.
- Average Time Between Two Packet Calls: Enter the average time between two packet calls (in millisec-
onds) in the uplink and downlink.
- Under Packet Calls, you can set:
- Min. Size (Kbytes): Enter the minimum size of a packet call in kilobytes in the uplink and downlink.
- Max Size (Kbytes): Enter the maximum size of a packet call in kilobytes in the uplink and downlink.
- Average Time Between Two Packets (ms): Enter the average time between two packets in milliseconds
in the uplink and downlink.
- Under Packet, you can set:
- Size (Bytes): Enter the packet size in bytes in the uplink and downlink.
7. Click the Required Thresholds tab. On the Required Thresholds tab, you can define downlink and uplink EbNt,
or CI, requirements (in dB) and the TCH thresholds (in dBm). The EbNt, or CI, quality targets are used to deter-
mine the coverage area for the service, and the TCH thresholds must be reached to provide users with the service.
These parameters depend on the mobility type and reception equipment; these parameters must be defined for
each possible combination of mobility type and reception equipment.
- Mobility: Select a mobility type from the list.
- Reception Equipment: Select a type of reception equipment from the list. For more information on reception
equipment, see "Reception Equipment" on page 656.
- Uplink TCH EbNt Target (dB) or Uplink TCH CI Target (dB): Enter or modify the uplink EbNt threshold
for Service Area (EbNt) Uplink and Effective Service Area coverage predictions, or the uplink CI
threshold for the Service Area (CI) Uplink and Effective Service Area (CI) coverage predictions. This
value is used as the minimum requirement limit the coverage predictions.
- Downlink TCH EbNt Target (dB) or Downlink TCH CI Target (dB): Enter or modify the downlink EbNt
threshold for Service Area (EbNt) Downlink and Effective Service Area coverage predictions, or the down-
link CI threshold for the Service Area (CI) Downlink and Effective Service Area (CI) coverage predic-
tions. This value is used as the minimum requirement limit the coverage predictions.
Note: You can switch between EbNt and CI quality targets by modifying the following options in
the Atoll.ini file:
- For coverage predictions:
[TD-SCDMA]
QualityTargets = SINR or EBNT
- For simulations:
SimuQualityParams = SINR or EBNT
- RSCP TCH Uplink Threshold (dBm): Enter or modify the uplink RSCP TCH threshold. This value is used as
the minimum requirement limit for the Uplink RSCP TCH coverage prediction.
- RSCP TCH Downlink Threshold (dBm): Enter or modify the downlink RSCP TCH threshold. This value is
used as the minimum requirement limit for the Downlink RSCP TCH coverage prediction.
Radio propagation conditions as well as connection propertiescriteria vary with the vehicular speed of mobiles: a mobile
used by a speed driver or a pedestrian will not necessarily be connected to the same transmitters and both users will not
experience the same service characteristics. EcI0 requirements and EbNt targets per service and per link (up and down)
are largely dependent on mobile speed.
RSCP P-CCPCH T_Add (RSCP P-CCPCH Threshold)
RSCP P-CCPCH TDrop
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 581

A9155 User Manual
RSCP DwPCH Threshold

RSCP UpPCH Threshold
P-CCPCH EbNt (or CI) Threshold
DwPCH CI Threshold
HS-SCCH EcNt Threshold (DL)
- Average Speed: Enter or modify an average speed for the mobility type. This field is for information only; the
average speed is not used by any calculation.
- Under Baton Handover Parameters, you can set the minimum required pilot signal levels from transmitters
for entering and exiting the list of potential servers.
- RSCP P-CCPCH T_Add (RSCP P-CCPCH Threshold): The minimum signal level from transmitters
required for entering the list of potential servers.
- RSCP P-CCPCH TDrop: The signal level from transmitters below which a transmitter cannot enter the list
of potential servers.
- RSCP DwPCH Threshold: Enter or modify the minimum signal level required for the DwPTS coverage. This
value is used as the minimum requirement limit for the RSCP DwPCH Coverage.
- RSCP UpPCH Threshold: Enter or modify the minimum signal level required for the UpPTS coverage. This
value is used as the minimum requirement limit for the RSCP UpPCH Coverage.
- P-CCPCH EbNt Threshold or P-CCPCH CI Threshold: Enter or modify the minimum P-CCPCH EbNt or
CI quality. This value is used as the minimum requirement limit for the P-CCPCH (EbNt) Reception Anal-
ysis or P-CCPCH (CI) Reception Analysis coverage prediction.
Note: You can switch between EbNt and CI quality targets by modifying the following options in
the Atoll.ini file:
- For coverage predictions:

[TD-SCDMA]
QualityTargets = SINR or EBNT
- For simulations:
SimuQualityParams = SINR or EBNT
- DwPCH CI Threshold: Enter or modify the minimum DwPCH CI quality. This value is used as the minimum
requirement limit for the DwPCH (CI) Reception Analysis coverage prediction.
- HS-SCCH EcNt Threshold (DL): Enter or modify the minimum quality required in order for the HSDPA link
to be available. A9155 calculates the HS-SCCH EcNt from the HS-SCCH power set in the cell properties and
compares it to this threshold. This field is only used with HSDPA.
6. Click OK.
Modelling Terminals
In TD-SCDMA, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a cars
on-board navigation device.
Reception equipment
UpPCH power
Gain and losses
Noise figure
JD factor
Rho factor
HSDPA capability and UE category
582 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Reception Equipment: Select a type of reception equipment from the list. For more information on reception
equipment, see "Reception Equipment" on page 656.
- Under Power, you can set the minimum and maximum transmission power limits and the UpPCH power for
the UpPTS timeslot.
- Min. Power: Set the minimum transmission power. The minimum and maximum transmission powers
make up the dynamic range for uplink power control.
- UpPCH Power: The transmission power for the UpPTS timeslot.
- Under Interference, you can set the parameters that influence interference:
- Noise Figure: Set the terminal noise figure.
- JD Factor: Enter a joint detection factor (JD). Joint detection is used to model interference cancellation at
the user terminal. JD is modelled by a coefficient between 0 and 1; this factor is considered in calculating
downlink interference. If JD is not supported, enter "0."
- Rho factor (%): This parameter enables A9155 to take into account the self-interference produced by the
terminal. Because hardware equipment is not perfect, the input signal experiences some distortion which
affects, in turn, the output signal. This factor defines how much distortion the system generates. Entering
100% means the system is perfect (there is no distortion) and the output signal will be 100% equal to the
input signal. On the other hand, if you specify a value different than 100%, A9155 considers that the trans-
mitted energy is not 100% signal and contains a small percentage of interference generated by the equip-
ment, i.e., self-interference. A9155 considers this parameter to calculate the signal to noise ratio in the
uplink.
- Under HSDPA, you can modify the following parameters:
- HSDPA supported: Check the HSDPA supported check box if the terminal is able to use HSDPA chan-
nels.
- UE Category: Select a user equipment category. HSDPA user equipment capabilities are standardised
into 12 different categories according to 3GPP specifications.
6. Click OK.
8.1.10.7.3 Defining the Minimum RSCP P-CCPCH Threshold

To define the minimum RSCP P-CCPCH threshold:
5. Under Calculation Limitation, enter a Min. RSCP P-CCPCH Threshold.
6. Click OK.
8.1.10.7.4 Making Quality Coverage Predictions

explained:
"Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction" on page 583.
"Making a DwPTS Signal Quality Prediction" on page 585.
"Studying Downlink and Uplink Traffic Channel Coverage" on page 589.
Note: A table listing quality indicators (BER, BLER, etc.) to be analysed is available. Quality cov-
erage predictions proposed by A9155 depend on quality indicators specified in this table.
received sufficiently well.
A9155 calculates the best pilot quality received on each pixel. Then, depending on the prediction definition, it compares
this value either to the P-CCPCH EbNt or CI threshold defined for the selected mobility type. The pixel is coloured if the
condition is fulfilled (in other words, if the received pilot quality is better than the P-CCPCH EbNt or CI threshold). The
total noise, Nt, includes the pilot power (P-CCPCH). The processing gain used for the EbNt coverage prediction is the
one defined on the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. For more information on the global
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 583

A9155 User Manual
parameters, see "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 650. The coverage prediction is limited by the RSCP P-
CCPCH threshold of the selected mobility type.
4. Select P-CCPCH (EbNt) Reception Analysis or P-CCPCH (CI) Reception Analysis and click OK. The pre-
diction Properties dialogue appears.
is used.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. P-CCPCH EbNt Threshold or P-
CCPCH CI Threshold defined in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the cov-
erage prediction.
- Timeslot: The P-CCPCH (EbNt) or (CI) reception analysis predictions are performed for TS0.
ability.
class.
Figure 8.34: Condition settings for an P-CCPCH (EbNt) reception analysis coverage prediction

For a pilot signal quality prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "EbNt (dB)" or
"CI (dB)" is selected by default. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the pilot signal quality. For
information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
Once A9155 has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window (see Figure 8.35).
584 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 8.35: P-CCPCH (EbNt) reception analysis coverage prediction
Making a DwPTS Signal Quality Prediction
A DwPTS signal quality prediction enables you to identify areas where there is at least one transmitter whose DwPTS
signal quality is received sufficiently well.
A9155 calculates the best DwPTS signal quality received on each pixel. Then, depending on the prediction definition, it
compares this value with the DwPCH CI threshold defined for the selected mobility type. The pixel is coloured if the condi-
tion is fulfilled (in other words, if the received DwPTS signal quality is better than the DwPCH CI threshold. The coverage
prediction is limited by the RSCP DwPCH threshold of the selected mobility type.
To make a DwPTS signal quality prediction:
4. Select DwPCH (CI) Reception Analysis and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears.
is used.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. DwPCH CI Threshold defined in the
mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction.
- Timeslot: The DwPCH (CI) reception analysis predictions are performed for DwPTS.
ability.
class.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 585

A9155 User Manual
Figure 8.36: Condition settings for a DwPCH (CI) reception analysis coverage prediction
For a DwPTS signal quality prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "CI (dB)" is
selected by default. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the DwPTS signal quality. For information
on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the DwPTS signal quality prediction. The
Figure 8.37: DwPCH (CI) reception analysis coverage prediction
Studying Downlink and Uplink Service Area
A9155 calculates the traffic channel quality, as defined by EbNt or CI, on the uplink or on the downlink considering the
effect of any smart antenna equipment assigned to transmitters, and the smart antenna simulation results stored for the
selected timeslot. The coverage prediction is limited by the RSCP P-CCPCH threshold of the selected mobility type.
To make a prediction on service area (EbNt or CI) downlink or uplink:
4. Select one of the following coverage predictions and click OK:
- Service Area (EbNt) Downlink
- Service Area (CI) Downlink
- Service Area (EbNt) Uplink
- Service Area (CI) Uplink
586 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

properties are used. For the uplink service area coverage prediction, A9155 calculates the EbNt or CI using
the Max Power defined for the selected terminal.
- Service: The service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The Uplink TCH EbNt Threshold and
Downlink TCH EbNt Threshold (or Uplink TCH CI Threshold and Downlink TCH CI Threshold) are
used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Body Loss defined in the service properties is
also used. For the downlink traffic channel coverage prediction, A9155 calculates the EbNt or CI using the
Max Allowed Downlink Traffic Channel Power defined for the selected service. The processing gains are
also used for the EbNt coverage predictions.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The Uplink TCH EbNt Threshold
and Downlink TCH EbNt Threshold (or Uplink TCH CI Threshold and Downlink TCH CI Threshold),
defined in the service selected above, corresponding to the selected mobility type are used as the minimum
requirement for the coverage prediction.
- Timeslot: The service area coverage predictions can be performed for any downlink or uplink timeslot.
ability.
class.
Figure 8.38: Condition settings for a downlink service area (EbNt) coverage prediction

For a service area prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Max EbNt (dB)" or "Max
CI (dB)" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which information the service area downlink or
uplink prediction makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the traffic channel quality.
- The traffic channel quality relative to the EbNt or CI threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display
Type and "EbNt margin (dB)" or "CI margin (dB)" as the Field.
- The power required to reach the EbNt or CI threshold: Select "Value Intervals" as the Display Type and
- Where traffic channel quality exceeds the EbNt or CI threshold for each mobility type: On the Condi-
tion tab, select "All" as the Mobility Type. The parameters on the Display tab are automatically set.
9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the service area prediction. The progress of the
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 587

A9155 User Manual
Figure 8.39: Downlink (above) and uplink (below) service area (EbNt) coverage predictions
The aim of this coverage prediction is to identify the areas where there can be coverage problems for a service either on
the downlink or on the uplink.
A9155 calculates the traffic channel quality, as defined by EbNt or CI, on the uplink and on the downlink considering the
effect of any smart antenna equipment assigned to transmitters, and the smart antenna simulation results stored for the
selected timeslot. The effective service area is the intersection zone between the uplink and downlink service areas. The
coverage prediction is limited by the RSCP P-CCPCH threshold of the selected mobility type.
4. Select Effective Service Area or Effective Service Area (CI) and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue
appears.
properties are used. For the uplink, A9155 calculates the EbNt or CI using the Max Power defined for the
selected terminal.
Downlink TCH EbNt Threshold (or Uplink TCH CI Threshold and Downlink TCH CI Threshold) are
used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Body Loss defined in the service properties is
also used. For the downlink traffic channel, A9155 calculates the EbNt or CI using the Max Allowed Down-
link Traffic Channel Power defined for the selected service. The processing gains are also used for the
EbNt coverage predictions.
588 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The Uplink TCH EbNt Threshold
and Downlink TCH EbNt Threshold (or Uplink TCH CI Threshold and Downlink TCH CI Threshold),
defined in the service selected above, corresponding to the selected mobility type are used as the minimum
requirement for the coverage prediction.
- Timeslot: The effective service area coverage predictions can be performed for any downlink or uplink
timeslot.
ability.
class.
Figure 8.40: Condition settings for an effective service area (EbNt) coverage prediction

will display where a service actually is available for the probe mobile. For information on defining display proper-
ties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
Figure 8.41: Effective service area (EbNt) coverage prediction
Studying Downlink and Uplink Traffic Channel Coverage
A9155 calculates the received traffic channel power on the uplink or on the downlink considering the effect of any smart
antenna equipment assigned to transmitters, and the smart antenna simulation results stored for the selected timeslot.
The coverage prediction is limited by the RSCP P-CCPCH threshold of the selected mobility type.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 589

A9155 User Manual
4. Select one of the following coverage predictions and click OK:
- Downlink RSCP TCH Coverage
- Uplink RSCP TCH Coverage
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the traffic channel
properties are used. For the uplink traffic channel coverage prediction, A9155 calculates the RSCP using the
Max Power defined for the selected terminal.
- Service: The service to be considered in the coverage prediction. The RSCP TCH Uplink Threshold or
RSCP TCH Downlink Threshold is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Body
Loss defined in the service properties is also used. For the downlink traffic channel coverage prediction,
A9155 calculates the RSCP using the Max Allowed Downlink Traffic Channel Power defined for the
selected service.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The RSCP TCH Uplink Threshold
or RSCP TCH Downlink Threshold, defined in the service selected earlier, corresponding to the selected
mobility type is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction.
- Timeslot: The RSCP TCH coverage predictions can be performed for any downlink or uplink timeslot.
ability.
class.
Figure 8.42: Condition settings for a downlink RSCP TCH coverage prediction

For a downlink or uplink traffic channel coverage area prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the
Field "RSCP TCH DL" or "RSCP TCH UL" is selected by default. The Field you choose determines which infor-
mation the TCH prediction makes available. Each pixel is displayed in a colour corresponding to the RSCP TCH
DL or RSCP TCH UL level. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on
page 33.
is the margin between the RSCP TCH DL or RSCP TCH UL and the RSCP TCH Downlink Threshold or
RSCP TCH Uplink Threshold, respectively, given for the selected Service.
590 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 8.43: Downlink (above) and uplink (below) RSCP TCH coverage predictions

A9155 has the following coverage prediction that enables you to study the downlink total noise:
"Studying Downlink Total Noise" on page 591.
Studying Downlink Total Noise
In the downlink total noise prediction, A9155 calculates and displays the areas where the downlink total noise exceeds a
set threshold. The downlink total noise is based on the cumulate effect of all downlink powers, including P-CCPCH.
To make a downlink total noise prediction:
4. Select Downlink Total Noise and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the downlink total
noise coverage prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select
is used.
- Mobility: The downlink total noise calculation does not depend on the mobility type.
- Timeslot: The downlink total noise coverage predictions can be performed for any downlink timeslot.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 591

A9155 User Manual
ability.
class.
Figure 8.44: Condition settings for a downlink total noise coverage prediction

Select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and one of the following options as Field:
- Min. noise level
- Max noise level
9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the downlink total noise or downlink noise rise
Figure 8.45: Downlink total noise coverage prediction
8.1.10.7.6 Studying Interference Between Cells

A coverage prediction is available that enables you to analyse the effect of different timeslot configurations allocated to
different cells. Different timeslot configurations have different switching points between uplink and downlink parts of the
subframe. Different switching points may cause interference between the two opposite links, up and down. If all the cells
have the same timeslot configuration assigned, there will be no inter-cell interference.
A9155 has the following coverage prediction that enables you to study cell to cell interference:
Studying Cell to Cell Interference
If different cells have different timeslot configurations assigned to them, the difference of switching point between the uplink
and the downlink parts of the subframe may cause interference between the two opposite links, up and down, i.e., on the
same timeslot, a cell receiving data in the uplink is interfered by nearby cells transmitting in the downlink.
592 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

The Cell to Cell Interference coverage prediction displays the level of interference received by a cell. The prediction sums
the interfering signals in the downlink received by the victim cell in the uplink over the selected timeslot. Interference is
calculated using the total transmitted power of the timeslot.
To make a cell-to-cell interference coverage prediction:
4. Select Cell to Cell Interference and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the cell to cell
is used.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction.
- Timeslot: The cell to cell interference coverage prediction can be performed for any timeslot.
ability.
class.
Figure 8.46: Condition settings for a cell to cell interference coverage prediction
- Click the Display tab.

For a pilot pollution prediction, the Display Type "Value Intervals" and the Field "Max Interference Level" are
selected by default. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
Once A9155 has finished calculating the prediction, the results are displayed in the map window.
8.1.10.7.7 Making a Baton Handover Coverage Prediction

In the baton handover coverage prediction, A9155 calculates and displays the zones where a baton handover can be
made. For a handover to be possible, there must be a potential serving transmitter, and the service chosen by the user
must be available.
The serving cell is first determined for each pixel. The serving cell is the one whose RSCP P-CCPCH at a pixel is above
the RSCP P-CCPCH T_Add and is the highest among all the cells that satisfy the T_Add criterion. Then, all the cells whose
RSCP P-CCPCH are higher than the RSCP P-CCPCH T_Drop are added to a preliminary handover set. Next, from among
the cells listed in the preliminary handover set using the P-CCPCH RSCP TDrop, only the cells whose RSCP P-CCPCH
is within the range defined by the RSCP P-CCPCH from the best server and the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Comp margin are
kept in the handover set. The number of potential neighbours per pixel displayed on the map are calculated from this set.
RSCP P-CCPCH T_Comp [TS0] (dB) is set per cell.
To make a baton handover coverage prediction:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 593

A9155 User Manual
4. Select Baton Handover Analysis and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the baton
handover coverage prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select
is used.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. RSCP P-CCPCH TAdd, and RSCP
P-CCPCH T_Drop defined in the mobility properties are used to define the signal level range for transmitters
to enter the preliminary handover set.
- Timeslot: The baton handover coverage prediction is performed for TS0.
ability.
class.
Figure 8.47: Condition settings for a baton handover analysis coverage prediction
7. Click the Display tab. The settings you select on the Display tab determine the information that the prediction will
display.
For a baton handover analysis, the Display Type "Value Intervals" and the Field "Number of Potential Neigh-
bours" are selected by default. You can also display the baton handover coverage surface area only by selecting
"Unique" as the Display Type. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects"
on page 33.
594 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 8.48: Baton handover analysis coverage prediction
8.1.10.8 HSDPA Coverage Prediction

The HSDPA coverage prediction allows you to study HSDPA-related parameters. The parameters used as input for the
HSDPA coverage prediction are the HSDPA power, and the total transmitted power for each timeslot. For information
about the cell and timeslot parameters, see "Cell Description" on page 543. For information on the formulas used to calcu-
late different throughputs, see the Technical Reference Guide.
To make an HSDPA coverage prediction:
4. Select HSDPA Study and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the HSDPA cov-
- Terminal: The HSDPA-compatible terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. Gain, Losses, and
HSDPA UE Category defined in the terminal properties are used.
- Service: The HSDPA-compatible service to be considered in the coverage prediction. Body Loss and
HSDPA Application Throughput parameters (Scaling Factor and Offset) defined in the service properties
is used.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. HS-SCCH EcNt Threshold (DL)
- Timeslot: The HSDPA coverage prediction can be performed for any downlink timeslot.
ability.
class.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 595

A9155 User Manual
Figure 8.49: Condition settings for a baton handover analysis coverage prediction
diction will display. To model fast link adaptation for a single HSDPA user or for a defined number of HSDPA users:
For a single HSDPA user, A9155 considers one HSDPA user on each pixel and determines the best HSDPA
bearer that the user can obtain by considering the available HSDPA power of the cell.
- The HS-PDSCH EcNt relative to the EcNt threshold: Select "HS-PDSCH EcNt (dB)" as the Field. A9155
calculates the best HS-PDSCH EcNt on each pixel.
- The channel quality indicator (CQI) relative to the EcNt threshold: Select "CQI" as the Field. A9155 dis-
plays either the P-CCPCH CQI or the HS-PDSCH CQI, depending on the option selected under HSDPA on
the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue (see "The Options on the Global Param-
eters Tab" on page 650).
- The RLC peak rate relative to the threshold: Select "RLC Peak Rate (kbps)" as the Field. A9155 displays
the RLC peak rate that the selected HSDPA bearer can provide. The RLC peak rate is a characteristic of the
HSDPA bearer.
Figure 8.50: HSDPA coverage prediction (Display type: HS-PDSCH EcNt)

"Printing Coverage Prediction Results" on page 597.
"Defining a Coverage Export Zone" on page 597.
596 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


page 573).

4. Click OK.

raster format.

AGD formats.
2. Click the button to expand the Predictions folder.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 597

A9155 User Manual

a. Click the button to expand the coverage prediction.

6. Click Save to export the prediction coverage results.
select:
the study,
i. If desired, change the export resolution. The default resolution is the resolution of the prediction coverage
iii. Click Export to finish exporting the prediction coverage results.
Notes:
8.1.11 Planning Frequencies

TD-SCDMA networks can work in single-carrier as well as multi-carrier modes. In single-carrier mode, each transmitter
has one and only one cellcarrier, which is considered a stand-alone carrier. In multi-carrier mode, each transmitter can
have up to six carriers. In this case, a transmitter would have one master carrier and several slave carriers. The master
carrier is used for P-CCPCH broadcast, scrambling code broadcast, and handover management, whereas the slave carri-
ers are only used for carrying traffic. The multi-carrier mode is called N-Frequency Mode in A9155.
You can set the type of carrier for each cell of a transmitter manually, or you can let A9155 automatically allocate carrier
types to cells, for transmitters that support the N-frequency mode. Allocating frequencies to the cells of an N-frequency
compatible transmitter means assigning a carrier type to each cell of that transmitter. A transmitter that is N-frequency
mode compatible can have one master carrier and a number of slave carriers. Transmitters that are not N-frequency mode
compatible have stand-alone carriers.
You can use automatic allocation on all cells in the document, or you can define a group of cells either by using a focus
zone or by grouping transmitters in the Explorer window. For information on creating a focus zone, see "Creating a Focus
or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 573. For information on grouping transmitters in the Explorer
window, see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 61.
"Setting Up N-Frequency Mode" on page 599.
"Allocating Frequencies Automatically" on page 599.
"Checking Automatic Allocation Results" on page 599.
"Allocating Carrier Types per Transmitter" on page 600.
"Checking the Consistency of the Frequency Allocation Plan" on page 600.
598 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

8.1.11.1 Setting Up N-Frequency Mode

In A9155, you can define whether transmitters are compatible with the N-frequency mode or not.
To set up N-frequency mode:
4. In the Transmitters table, select the N-Frequency Mode check box for transmitters that are compatible with the
N-frequency mode and will be taken into account in the automatic frequency allocation.
For more information on transmitter properties, see "Transmitter Description" on page 540.

For more information on automatic frequency allocation, see "Allocating Frequencies Automatically" on page 599.
8.1.11.2 Allocating Frequencies Automatically

A9155 can automatically allocate master and slave carriers to N-frequency mode compatible transmitters in a TD-SCDMA
network. A9155 allocates master carriers to transmitters according to the distance between transmitters and their orienta-
tion (azimuths). Two transmitters who are very close to each other or are directed towards each other will not have the
same master carrier.
To automatically allocate frequencies (master and slave carriers):
3. Select Cells > Global > N-Frequency Mode > Automatic Frequency Allocation from the context menu. The
Automatic Frequency Allocation dialogue appears.
4. Select the Reset Existing Allocation check box if you want A9155 to delete the existing masterslave carrier allo-
cation before allocating.
5. Click Run. A9155 allocates master and slave carriers to N-frequency mode compatible transmitters.
6. Under Results, A9155 lists the transmitters to which it has allocated master and slave carriers in the Transmitters
column and the carrier number of the transmitters master carrier in the Master Carrier column.
7. Click Commit to apply the allocation to the transmitters listed in the Transmitters column.
8. Click Close to close the Automatic Frequency Allocation dialogue.

You can verify the results of automatic frequency allocation in the following ways:
"Displaying Frequency Allocation on the Map" on page 599.
"Displaying the Coverage of the Master Carrier" on page 599.
8.1.11.3.1 Displaying Frequency Allocation on the Map

You can view the master carrier allocation directly on the map. A9155 can display the master carrier number for every N-
frequency compatible transmitter.
To display the master carrier number on the map:
5. Select "Discrete Values" as Display Type and "Cells: Carrier Type" as Field.
6. Select "Cells: Carrier Type" as Label.
7. Click OK.
The transmitters are coloured according to the carrier type, and the master carrier number is displayed on the map with
each transmitter.
8.1.11.3.2 Displaying the Coverage of the Master Carrier

By combining the display characteristics of a coverage prediction with the carrier type display options, A9155 can display
the coverage areas of a transmitters master carrier.
To display the coverage of the master carrier of a transmitter:
Create, calculate, and display a best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction, with the Display Type set to "Discrete
Values" and the Field set to "Cells: Carrier Type". For information on creating a coverage by transmitter prediction,
see "Making a Best Server P-CCPCH Coverage Prediction" on page 567.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 599

A9155 User Manual
8.1.11.4 Allocating Carrier Types per Transmitter

Although you can let A9155 allocate frequencies and carrier types automatically, you can adjust the overall allocation of
carriers by allocating carriers per transmitter. You can allocate carrier types using the Cells tab of the Transmitter Prop-
erties dialogue.
To allocate TD-SCDMA carrier types using the Cells tab of the transmitters Properties dialogue:
1. On the map, right-click the transmitter whose carrier types you want to change. The context menu appears.
4. On the Cells tab, there is a column for each cell. Select the carrier type for each cell of the transmitter from the
Carrier Type list.
5. Click OK.
8.1.11.5 Checking the Consistency of the Frequency Allocation Plan

You can perform an audit of the current frequency allocation plan.
To perform an audit of the frequency allocation plan:
3. Select Cells > Global > N-Frequency Mode > Audit from the context menu. The N-Frequency Mode Audit dia-
logue appears.
4. The audit checks for:
- For Master Carriers:
- Transmitters in N-Frequency Mode: The transmitters that are not N-frequency mode compatible.
- One Master Carrier per Transmitter: The transmitters that have either no or more than one master
carrier.
- Defined P-CCPCH Power: The transmitters whose master carriers do not have a P-CCPCH power
defined.
- For Stand-alone Carriers:
- Defined P-CCPCH Power: The transmitters whose stand-alone carriers do not have a P-CCPCH power
defined.
- For Slave Carriers:
- Linked to a Master Carrier: The transmitters whose slave carriers are not linked to any master carrier.
In other words, the transmitters that do not have any master carrier, but have slave carriers.
- P-CCPCH, DwPCH, and Other CCH Fields Empty: The transmitters whose slave carriers have P-
CCPCH, DwPCH, and Other CCH powers defined.
- Timeslot Configurations, Scrambling Codes, and Neighbours Same as The Master Carrier: Select
this check box if you want the audit to check for slave carriers that do not have the same timeslot config-
urations, scrambling codes, and neighbours as the master carrier.
5. Click Run. A9155 performs the audit and lists the results under Problems occurred during the audit: X trans-
mitters have inconsistencies. The list includes:
- More Than One Master Carrier: Transmitters that have more than one master carrier.
- Master P-CCPCH Not Defined: Transmitters whose master carrier does not have a P-CCPCH power defined.
- Stand-alone P-CCPCH Not Defined: Transmitters whose stand-alone carriers do not have P-CCPCH
powers defined.
- Slaves Without Masters: Transmitters that have only slave carriers and no master carrier.
- Slave Power Defined: Transmitters whose slave carriers have P-CCPCH, DwPCH, or Other CCH powers
defined.
- Master-Slave Attribute Differences: Transmitters whose slave carriers have different timeslot configura-
tions, scrambling codes, and neighbours than the master carrier.
- Inconsistency N-Frequency ModeCarrier Types: Transmitters that are not N-frequency mode compatible.
6. Click Resolve to resolve the inconsistencies found by the audit. A9155 makes the timeslot configurations and
scrambling codes of the slave carriers the same as the master carrier. It also empties the neighbour list of the slave
carriers.
7. Click Close to close the N-Frequency Mode Audit dialogue.

600 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

containing the computation zone. If there is no focus zone, A9155 allocates neighbours only to the cells within the compu-
tation zone.
A9155 supports the following neighbour types in a TD-SCDMA network:
Intra-technology neighbours: Intra-technology neighbours are two TD-SCDMA cells defined as neigh-
bours.Intra-technology neighbours can be divided into:
- Intra-carrier neighbours: Cells defined as neighbours which perform handover using the same carrier. Intra-
carrier neighbours in TD-SCDMA are based on the baton handover principle. Baton handover is a kind of soft
handover in which each mobile makes a list of transmitters, based on the RSCP P-CCPCH, called a handover
set. Mobiles make measurements of RSCP P-CCPCH from all the transmitters in the handover set continu-
ously in order to make a handover when needed.
For N-frequency mode compatible transmitters, intra-carrier neighbours are only calculated for master car-
riers. If two transmitters have the same master carriers, they can have intra-carrier neighbours only, and no
inter-carrier neighbours.
- Inter-carrier neighbours: Cells defined as neighbours which perform handover using a different carrier. Inter-
carrier neighbours in TD-SCDMA are based on the hard handover principle. Hard handovers are performed
based on overlapping surface areas between cells based on the RSCP P-CCPCH.
For N-frequency mode compatible transmitters, inter-carrier neighbours are only calculated for master car-
riers. If two transmitters have different master carriers, they can have inter-carrier neighbours only, and no
intra-carrier neighbours.
For N-frequency mode compatible transmitters, neighbours are only stored for the master carriers because
the slave carriers have the same neighbours as their master carrier.
other than TD-SCDMA.

3. Select Cells > Global > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears.
4. Right-click on the cell for which you want to define neighbour constraints. The context menu appears.
5. Select Properties from the context menu. The cells Properties dialogue appears.
a. Select the cell from the list in the Neighbours column.
9. Click OK.
Note: You can also create exceptional pairs using the Exceptional Pairs of Intra-Technology
selecting Cells > Global > Neighbours > Intra-Technology Exceptional Pairs.

A9155 can automatically allocate both intra- and inter-carrier neighbours in a TD-SCDMA network. A9155 allocates neigh-
bours based on the parameters you set in the Automatic Neighbour Allocation dialogue.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 601

A9155 User Manual
To automatically allocate intra-carrier TD-SCDMA neighbours:

3. Select Cells > Global > Neighbours > Automatic Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Neigh-
bour Allocation dialogue appears.
- Max Inter-site Distance: Set the maximum distance between the reference cell and a possible neighbour.
- Max Number of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of intra-carrier neighbours that can be allocated to
- P-CCPCH RSCP TAdd: Enter the P-CCPCH RSCP TAdd, which defines the minimum RSCP P-CCPCH
required for the serving cell. If there is more than one cell whose RSCP P-CCPCH is higher than the P-
CCPCH RSCP TAdd, the cell with the highest RSCP P-CCPCH is kept as the serving cell.
- P-CCPCH RSCP TDrop: Enter the P-CCPCH RSCP TDrop, which defines the minimum RSCP P-
CCPCH required for cells to enter a preliminary handover set. All the cells whose RSCP P-CCPCH is
higher than the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Drop are added to the set.
- P-CCPCH RSCP T_Comp: Enter the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Comp, which defines the handover set limit.
From among the cells listed in the preliminary handover set using the P-CCPCH RSCP TDrop, only the
cells whose RSCP P-CCPCH is within the range defined by the RSCP P-CCPCH from the best server and
the P-CCPCH RSCP T_Comp margin are kept in the handover set.
is the best server.
- Force symmetry: Select the Force symmetry check box if you want neighbour relationships to be reciprocal.
In other words, a reference cell will be a possible neighbour to all of the cells that are its neighbours. If the
neighbour list of any cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbour and that possible neighbour
cell will be removed from the list of neighbours of the reference cell.
reasons.
- Adjacency Factor: If you selected the Force adjacent cells as neighbours check box in step 5., set the min-
imum and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being adjacent to the reference cell.
- Co-site Factor: If you selected the Force co-site cells as neighbours check box in step 5., set the minimum
and maximum importance of a possible neighbour cell being located on the same site as reference cell.
lates them.

- Co-site
602 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Adjacency
- Symmetry
- Coverage
- Existing
square kilometres.
Tables" on page 48.
To automatically allocate inter-carrier TD-SCDMA neighbours:
- Max Number of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of inter-carrier neighbours that can be allocated to
- Min. RSCP P-CCPCH: Enter the minimum RSCP P-CCPCH which must be provided by reference cell A
- Handover Start: Enter the handover start margin which must be provided by reference cell A in an over-
lapping area. Reference cell A must also be the best server in terms of RSCP P-CCPCH in the overlapping
End Start
area. RSCP P-CCPCH Highest M HO < RSCP P-CCPCH Cell A < RSCP P-CCPCH Highest M HO
- Handover End: Enter the handover end margin between reference cell A and possible neighbour cell B
in the overlapping area.
- Force symmetry: Select the Force symmetry check box if you want neighbour relationships to be reciprocal.
In other words, a reference cell will be a possible neighbour to all of the cells that are its neighbours. If the
neighbour list of any cell is full, the reference cell will not be added as a neighbour and that possible neighbour
cell will be removed from the list of neighbours of the reference cell.
- Coverage Factor: Set the minimum and maximum importance of the minimum percentage of shared cov-
erage between the possible neighbour cell and the reference cell.
cell.
lates them.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 603

A9155 User Manual

- Co-site
- Symmetry
- Coverage
- Existing
square kilometres.
Tables" on page 48.
Notes:
ties dialogue.
Allocating Neighbours to a New Base Station
station.
on page 61.
4. Define the automatic neighbour allocation parameters as described in "Allocating Frequencies Automatically" on
page 599.
Allocating Neighbours to a New Transmitter
the new transmitters and other cells whose coverage area intersects the coverage area of the cells of the new transmitter.
page 601.

"Displaying Frequency Allocation on the Map" on page 599.
"Displaying the Coverage of the Master Carrier" on page 599.
604 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


1. Click the menu button ( ) of the Neighbour Display button ( ) in the Radio toolbar. The menu appears.
2. Select Display Options from the context menu. The Neighbour Display dialogue appears.
line.
Figure 8.51: Neighbours of Site 22(0)
bours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Neighbour Display button ( ) in the

bours table.
1. Create, calculate, and display a best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction, with the Display Type set to "Discrete
Values" and the Field set to Transmitter. For information on creating a coverage by transmitter prediction, see
"Making a Best Server P-CCPCH Coverage Prediction" on page 567.

5. The Intra-technology Neighbour Display dialogue appears.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 605

A9155 User Manual

agement icon ( ).

c. Select Cells > Global > Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neigh-
bours table appears.

"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue" on page 606.
"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table" on page 607.
To allocate or delete TD-SCDMA neighbours using the Cells tab of the transmitters Properties dialogue:
6. If desired, you can enter the maximum number of neighbours in the following boxes:
- Max Number Inter-Carrier
- Max Number Intra-Carrier
( ).
c. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished creating the new exceptional pair.
606 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

9. Click OK.
To allocate or delete TD-SCDMA neighbours using the Cells tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue:
3. Select Cells > Global > Neighbours > Intra-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Neighbours
table appears.
a. In the row marked with the new row icon ( ), select a reference cell in the Cell column.
d. Click in another cell of the table to create the new neighbour and add a new blank row to the table.
to "1."

a. Select the neighbour in the Neighbour column. The context menu appears.
bour Relations.
bours on the map as explained in "Displaying Frequency Allocation on the Map" on page 599.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 607

A9155 User Manual

neighbours by clicking the menu button ( ) of the Neighbour Display button ( ) in the

3. Select Cells > Global > Neighbours > Audit from the context menu. The Neighbour Audit dialogue appears.
bour relations.
- Average No. of Neighbours: The average number of neighbours per cell.
- Empty Lists: Which cells have no neighbours (in other words, which cells have an empty neighbour list).
- Full Lists: Which cells have the maximum number of neighbours allowed (in other words, which cells have a
full neighbour list).
- Lists > Max Number: Which cells have more than the maximum number of neighbours allowed.
- Missing Co-sites: Which cells have no co-site neighbours.
- Missing Symmetrics: Which cells have non-symmetric neighbour relations.
- Average number of neighbours: X; where, X is the average number of neighbours (integer) per cell for the plan
audited.
- Empty Lists: xX; x number of cells out of a total of X have no neighbours (or empty neighbours list).
Syntax: |CELL|
- Full Lists (default max number = Y): xX; x number of cells out of a total of X have Y number of neighbours
- Lists > max number (default max number = Y): xX; x number of cells out of a total of X have more than Y
number of neighbours listed in their respective neighbours lists.
Note: If the field Maximum number of neighbours in the Cells table is empty, the above two
checks take into account the Default Max Number value defined in the audit dialogue.
- Non symmetric links: X; total number of non-symmetric neighbour links in the audited neighbour plan.
608 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


The neighbour data for an A9155 document is stored in a series of tables. You can export the neighbours data to use it in
3. Select Cells > Global > Neighbours and then select the neighbour table containing the data you want to export
from the context menu:
- Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology (intra-carrier and inter-carrier) neighbours
in the current A9155 document.
- Exceptional Pairs of Intra-technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology
exceptional pairs (forced and forbidden) in the current A9155 document.
8.1.13 Planning Scrambling Codes

In TD-SCDMA, 128 scrambling codes (or P-CCPCH midamble codes) of 16-bit lengths are available, numbered from 0 to
127. Although TD-SCDMA scrambling codes are displayed in decimal format by default, they can also be displayed and
calculated in hexadecimal format, in other words using the numbers 0 to 9 and the letters A to F.
A9155 facilitates the management of scrambling codes by letting you create groups of scrambling codes and domains,
where each domain is a defined set of groups.
You can also assign scrambling codes manually or automatically to any cell in the network. Once allocation is complete,
you can audit the scrambling codes, view scrambling code reuse on the map, and analyse the distribution of scrambling
codes.
Downlink synchronisation, SYNC_DL, codes are assigned to cells in order to distinguish nearby cells, and for synchroni-
zation purposes. There are 32 different SYNC_DL codes of 64 bit lengths defined for the whole system in downlink.
According to 3GPP specifications, the 127 possible scrambling codes can be broken down into 32 groups, each containing
4 codes. Because the term "group" in A9155 refers to user-defined sets of scrambling codes, these groups of 4 codes
each are referred to as "clusters" in A9155. Each cluster of scrambling codes is related to a SYNC_DL code used by a
base station.
The procedure of planning scrambling codes for a TD-SCDMA project is:
Preparing for scrambling code allocation
- "Defining the Scrambling Code Format" on page 609.
- "Creating Scrambling Code Domains and Groups" on page 610.
- "Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 610.
Allocating scrambling codes
- "Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to TD-SCDMA Cells" on page 611.
- "Allocating Scrambling Codes to TD-SCDMA Cells Manually" on page 612.
"Checking the Consistency of the Scrambling Code Plan" on page 613.
Displaying the allocation of scrambling codes
- "Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 613.
- "Displaying Scrambling Code Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 614.
- "Grouping Transmitters by Scrambling Code" on page 614.
- "Displaying the Scrambling Code Allocation Histogram" on page 615.
- "Making a Scrambling Code Interference Prediction" on page 615.
Note: Within the context of scrambling code allocation, "neighbours" refer to intra-carrier neigh-
bours.
8.1.13.1 Defining the Scrambling Code Format

Scrambling codes may be displayed in decimal or hexadecimal format. The selected format is used to display scrambling
codes in dialogues and tables such as in the Domains and Groups tables, the Cells table, and the Scrambling Code
Allocation dialogue.
The decimal format is the default format in A9155. The accepted decimal values are from 0 to 127. The decimal format is
also used, even if you have chosen the hexadecimal format, to store scrambling codes in the database and to display
scrambling code distribution or the results of a scrambling code audit.
The hexadecimal format uses the numbers 0 to 9 and the letters A to F for its base characters. In A9155, hexadecimal
values are indicated by a lower-case "h" following the value. For example, the hexadecimal value "3Fh" is "63" as a decimal
value. You can convert a hexadecimal value to a decimal value with the following equation, where X, Y, and Z are decimal
values within the hexadecimal index ranges:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 609

A9155 User Manual
2
X 16 + Y 16 + Z
For example, the hexadecimal value "3Fh" would be calculated as shown below:
2
0 16 + 3 16 + 15 = 63
To define the scrambling code format for an A9155 document:

3. Select Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Format from the context menu and select either Decimal or Hex-
adecimal.
8.1.13.2 Creating Scrambling Code Domains and Groups

A9155 facilitates the management of scrambling codes by letting you create domains, each containing groups of scram-
bling codes.
The procedure for managing scrambling codes in a TD-SCDMA document consists of the following steps:
1. Creating a scrambling code domain, as explained in this section.
2. Creating groups, each containing a range of scrambling codes, and assigning them to a domain, as explained in
this section.
3. Assigning a scrambling code domain to a cell or cells. If there is no scrambling code domain, A9155 will consider
all 128 possible scrambling codes when assigning codes.
To create a scrambling code domain:
3. Select Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Domains. The Domains table appears.
- Name: Enter a name for the new scrambling code group.
- Min.: Enter the lowest available scrambling code in this groups range. The minimum and maximum scram-
bling codes must be entered in the format, decimal or hexadecimal, set for the A9155 document. For informa-
tion on setting the scrambling code format, see "Defining the Scrambling Code Format" on page 609.
- Max: Enter the highest available scrambling code in this groups range.
- Step: Enter the separation interval between each scrambling code.
- Excluded: Enter the scrambling codes within the range defined by the Min. and Max fields that you do not
want to use.
- Extra: Enter any additional scrambling codes (i.e., outside the range defined by the Min. and Max fields) you
want to add to this group. You can enter a list of codes separated by either a comma, semi-colon, or a space.
You can also enter a range of scrambling codes separated by a hyphen. For example, entering, "1, 2, 3-6"
means that the extra scrambling codes are "1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6".
8.1.13.3 Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation

You can also define pairs of cells which cannot have the same scrambling code. These pairs are referred to as exceptional
pairs. Exceptional pairs are used along with other constraints, such as neighbours, reuse distance, and domains, in allo-
cating scrambling codes.
To create a pair of cells that cannot have the same scrambling code:
3. Select Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Exceptional Pairs. The Exceptional Separation Constraints
table appears. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48.
8.1.13.4 Allocating Scrambling Codes

In an A9155 TD-SCDMA document, you allocate scrambling codes to cells by creating domains, with each domain
containing one or more groups of scrambling codes. This combination of groups and domains defines which scrambling
codes can be used by the cell. For information on scrambling code domains and groups, see "Creating Scrambling Code
Domains and Groups" on page 610.
610 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

You can also define pairs of cells which cannot have the same scrambling code. These pairs are referred to as exceptional
pairs. For information on exceptional pairs, see "Defining Exceptional Pairs for Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 610.
A9155 can automatically assign scrambling codes to the cells of a TD-SCDMA network according to set parameters. For
example, it takes into account the definition of groups and domains of scrambling codes, the selected scrambling code
allocation strategy (clustered, distributed per cell, distributed per site and one SYNC_DL per site), minimum code reuse
distance, and any constraints imposed by neighbours.
In this section, the following methods of allocating scrambling codes are described:
"Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to TD-SCDMA Cells" on page 611.
"Allocating Scrambling Codes to TD-SCDMA Cells Manually" on page 612.
Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to TD-SCDMA Cells
The allocation algorithm enables you to automatically allocate scrambling code to cells in the current network. You can
choose among several automatic allocation strategies (for more information, see the Technical Reference Guide):
Clustered: The purpose of this strategy is to choose for a group of mutually constrained cells, scrambling codes
among a minimum number of clusters. In this case, A9155 will preferentially allocate all the codes from same
cluster.
Distributed per Cell: This strategy consists in using as many clusters as possible. A9155 will preferentially allo-
cate codes from different clusters.
One SYNC_DL per Site: This strategy allocates one SYNC_DL code to each base station, then, one code of the
cluster associated with the SYNC_DL code to each cell of each base station. When all the SYNC_DL codes have
been allocated and there are still base stations remaining to be allocated, A9155 reuses the SYNC_DL codes at
another base station. Select this strategy if you want to allocate the same scrambling code to the master and the
slave carriers. For more information on master and slave carriers, see "Planning Frequencies" on page 598.
Distributed per Site: This strategy allocates a group of adjacent clusters to each base station in the network, then,
one cluster to each transmitter of the base station, according to its azimuth, and finally one code of the cluster to
each cell of each transmitter. The number of adjacent clusters per group depends on the number of transmitters
per base station you have in your network; this information is required to start allocation based on this strategy.
When all the groups of adjacent clusters have been allocated and there are still base stations remaining to be allo-
cated, A9155 reuses the groups of adjacent clusters at another base station.
To automatically allocate scrambling codes:
3. Select Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Automatic Allocation. The Scrambling Codes and SYNC_DL
Codes dialogue appears.
4. Set the following parameters in the Scrambling Codes and SYNC_DL Codes dialogue:
- Under Constraints, you can set the constraints on automatic scrambling code allocation.
- Existing Neighbours: Select the Existing Neighbours check box if you want to consider neighbour re-
lations and then choose the neighbourhood level to take into account:
Neighbours of a cell are referred to as first order neighbours, neighbours neighbours are referred to as
second order neighbours and neighbours neighbours neighbours as third order neighbours.
First Order: No cell will be allocated the same scrambling code as its neighbours.
Second Order: No cell will be allocated the same scrambling code as its neighbours or its second order
neighbours.
Third Order: No cell will be allocated the same scrambling code as its neighbours or its second order
neighbours or its third order neighbours.
on allocating neighbours, see "Planning Frequencies" on page 598.
Note: A9155 can take into account inter-technology neighbour relations as constraints to allocate
different scrambling codes to the TD-SCDMA neighbours of a GSM transmitter. In order to
consider inter-technology neighbour relations in scrambling code allocation, you must make
the Transmitters folder of the GSM A9155 document accessible in the TD-SCDMA A9155
document. For information on making links between GSM and TD-SCDMA A9155 docu-
ments, see "Displaying Both Networks in the Same A9155 Document" on page 754.
- Default Reuse Distance: Enter the radius within which two cells on the same carrier cannot have the
same scrambling code.
Cells table). A cell-specific reuse distance will be used instead of the value entered here.
- Under Strategy, you can select an automatic allocation strategy:

- Clustered
- Distributed per Cell
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 611

A9155 User Manual
- One SYNC_DL per Site

- Distributed per Site
- Carrier: Select the carrier on which you want to run the allocation. You may choose one carrier (A9155 will
assign scrambling codes to transmitters using the selected carrier) or all of them.
- No. of Codes per SYNC_DL: According to 3GPP specifications, the number of scrambling codes per
SYNC_DL is 4. If you wish, you can change the number of codes per SYNC_DL.
- Use a Maximum of Codes: Select the Use a Maximum of Codes check box to make A9155 use the max-
imum number of codes. For example, if there are two cells using the same domain with two scrambling codes,
A9155 will assign the remaining code to the second cell even if there are no constraints between these two
cells (for example, neighbour relations, reuse distance, etc.). If you do not select this option, A9155 only
checks the constraints, and allocates the first ranked code in the list.
- Reset All Codes: Select the Reset All Codes check box if you want A9155 to delete currently allocated
scrambling codes and recalculate all scrambling codes. If you do not select this option, A9155 keeps the cur-
rently allocated scrambling codes and only allocates scrambling codes to cells that do not yet have codes allo-
cated.
5. Click Run. A9155 begins the process of allocating scrambling codes.
If you have selected the Distributed per Site allocation strategy, a Distributed per Site Allocation Parameters
dialogue appears.
a. In the Distributed per Site Allocation Parameters dialogue, enter the Max Number of Transmitters per
Site.
b. Select the Neighbours in Other SYNC_DL or Secondary Neighbours in Other SYNC_DL check boxes in
the Additional Constraints section, if you want the automatic allocation to consider constraints related to first
order and second order neighbours.
c. Click OK.
Once A9155 has finished allocating scrambling codes, the codes are visible under Results. A9155 only displays
newly allocated scrambling codes.

- Code: The scrambling code allocated to the cell.
- SYNC_DL: The SYNC_DL code allocated to the cell.
Notes:
A9155 allocate the same scrambling code to each carrier of a transmitter.
If the set constraints make it impossible to allocate scrambling codes to one or more cells, A9155
posts an error message in the Event Viewer window.
6. Click Commit. The scrambling codes are stored in the cell properties.
Note: You can save automatic scrambling code allocation parameters in a user configuration. For
information on saving automatic scrambling code allocation parameters in a user configura-
tion, see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 71.
Tips:
If you need to allocate scrambling codes to the cells on a single transmitter, you can allocate them
automatically by selecting Allocate Scrambling Codes from the transmitters context menu.
If you need to allocate scrambling codes to all the cells on group of transmitters, you can allocate
them automatically by selecting Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Automatic Allocation
from the transmitter groups context menu.
Allocating Scrambling Codes to TD-SCDMA Cells Manually
When you allocate scrambling codes to a large number of cells, it is easiest to let A9155 allocate scrambling codes auto-
matically, as described in "Automatically Allocating Scrambling Codes to TD-SCDMA Cells" on page 611. However, if you
want to add a scrambling code to one cell or to modify the scrambling code of a cell, you can do it by accessing the prop-
erties of the cell.
After allocation, you can use the audit tool to check the reuse scrambling code distances between cells and the compati-
bility of the domains of the cells for each base station.
To allocate a scrambling code to a TD-SCDMA cell manually:
1. On the map, right-click the transmitter to whose cell you want to allocate a scrambling code. The context menu
appears.
4. Enter a Scrambling Code in the cells column.
612 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

5. Click OK.
8.1.13.5 Checking the Consistency of the Scrambling Code Plan

Once you have completed allocating scrambling codes, you can verify whether the allocated scrambling codes respect the
specified constraints by performing an audit of the plan. The scrambling code audit also enables you to check for incon-
sistencies if you have made some manual changes to the allocation plan.
3. Select Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Audit. The Code and SYNC_DL Audit dialogue appears.
4. In the Code and SYNC_DL Audit dialogue, select the allocation criteria that you want to check:
- No. of Codes per SYNC_DL: Enter the number of scrambling codes per SYNC_DL. This number is set to 4
by default, which is the number of scrambling codes attached to each SYNC_DL.
- Neighbours: If you select the Neighbours check box, A9155 will check that no cell has the same scrambling
code as any of its neighbours. The report will list any cell that does have the same scrambling code as one of
its neighbours.
no cell has the same scrambling code as any of the neighbours and its neighbours neighbours. The report will
list any cell that does have the same scrambling code as one of the neighbours or its neighbours neighbours.
- Neighbours in different SYNC_DLs: If you select the Neighbours in different SYNC_DLs check box,
A9155 will check that neighbour cells have scrambling codes from different SYNC_DLs. The report will list any
neighbour cells that does have scrambling codes from the same SYNC_DL.
- Domain Compliance: If you select the Domain Compliance check box, A9155 will check if allocated scram-
bling codes belong to domains assigned to cells. The report will list any cells with scrambling codes that do
not belong to domains assigned to the cell.
- Site Domains Not Empty: If you select the Site Domains Not Empty check box, A9155 will check for and
list base stations for which the allocation domain (i.e., the list of possible scrambling codes, with respect to the
configured allocation constraints) is empty.
- One SYNC_DL per Site: If you select the One SYNC_DL per Site check box, A9155 will check for and list
base stations whose cells have scrambling codes coming from more than one SYNC_DL.
that do not respect this code reuse distance.
cells that are listed as exceptional pairs but have the same scrambling code allocated.
5. Click OK. A9155 displays the results of the audit in a text file called CodeCheck.txt. For each selected criterion,
A9155 gives the number of detected inconsistencies and details each of them.
8.1.13.6 Displaying the Allocation of Scrambling Codes

Once you have completed allocating scrambling codes, you can verify several aspects of scrambling code allocation. You
have several options for displaying scrambling codes:
"Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 613.
"Displaying Scrambling Code Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings" on page 614.
"Grouping Transmitters by Scrambling Code" on page 614.
"Displaying the Scrambling Code Allocation Histogram" on page 615.
"Making a Scrambling Code Interference Prediction" on page 615.
Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation
In A9155, you can search for scrambling codes and scrambling code groups using the Search Tool. Results are displayed
in the map window in red.
If you have already calculated and displayed a coverage prediction by transmitter based on the best server P-CCPCH,
with the results displayed by transmitter, the search results will be displayed by transmitter coverage. Scrambling codes
and scrambling code groups and any potential problems will then be clearly visible.
To find scrambling codes or scrambling code groups using the Search Tool:
1. Create, calculate, and display a best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction. For information, see "Making a Best
Server P-CCPCH Coverage Prediction" on page 567.
3. You can search either for a specific scrambling code or for a scrambling code group:
To search for a scrambling code:
a. Select Scrambling Code.

b. Enter a scrambling code in the text box.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 613

A9155 User Manual
To search for a scrambling code group:
a. Select SC Group.
b. Select a scrambling code group from the list.
4. Select the carrier you wish to search on from the For the Carrier list, or select "(All)" to search for the scrambling
code or scrambling code group in all carriers.
Displaying Scrambling Code Allocation Using Transmitter Display Settings
You can use the display characteristics of transmitters to display scrambling code-related information.
To display scrambling code-related information on the map:
- Scrambling code: To display the scrambling code of a transmitters cell, select "Discrete values" as the Dis-
play Type and "Cells: Scrambling code" as the Field.
- Ranges of scrambling codes: To display ranges of scrambling codes, select "Value intervals" as the Display
Type and "Cells: Scrambling code" as the Field.
- Scrambling code domain: To display the scrambling code domain of a transmitters cell, select "Discrete
values" as the Display Type and "Cells: Scrambling code domain" as the Field.
- Scrambling code: To display the scrambling code of a transmitters cell in the transmitter label or tooltip,
"Cells: Scrambling code" from the Label or Tip Text list.
- Scrambling code domain: To display the scrambling code domain of a transmitters cell in the transmitter
label or tooltip, "Cells: Scrambling code domain" from the Label or Tip Text list.
5. Click OK.
Grouping Transmitters by Scrambling Code
You can group transmitters on the Data tab of the Explorer window by their scrambling code or scrambling code domain.
To group transmitters by scrambling code:
- Scrambling code domain
- Scrambling code
will be grouped.
to be grouped:
614 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

mitters folder.
Displaying the Scrambling Code Allocation Histogram
You can use a histogram to analyse the use of allocated scrambling codes in a network. The histogram represents the
scrambling codes or SYNC_DLs as a function of the frequency of their use.
To display the scrambling code histogram:
3. Select Cells > Global > Scrambling Codes > Code Distribution. The Distribution Histograms dialogue
appears.
Each bar represents a scrambling code or a SYNC_DL code, its height depending on the frequency of its use.
4. Select Scrambling codes to display scrambling code use and Clusters to display SYNC_DL code use.
5. Move the pointer over the histogram to display the frequency of use of each scrambling code or SYNC_DL. The
results are highlighted simultaneously in the Detailed Results list.
Making a Scrambling Code Interference Prediction
You can make a scrambling code interference coverage prediction to view areas covered by cells using the same scram-
bling code. The coverage prediction displays areas where transmitters other than the best server, whose received signal
level is within the Pollution Margin set in the coverage prediction properties, interfere the best server signal. The inter-
fered pixels are coloured according to the interfered scrambling code.
You can also select a colour
To make a scrambling code interference zone coverage prediction:
4. Select Scrambling Code Interferences and click OK. The prediction Properties dialogue appears.
5. Click the General tab. On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the scrambling
code interference coverage prediction, and add some Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter
to select which base stations to study. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 66.
is used.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. RSCP P-CCPCH Threshold defined
in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction.
- Timeslot: The scrambling code interference coverage prediction is performed for TS0.
ability.
class.
- Pollution Margin: The margin for determining which signals to consider. A9155 considers signal levels which
are within the defined margin of the best signal level.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 615

A9155 User Manual
Figure 8.52: Condition settings for a scrambling code interference coverage prediction

For a coverage prediction on overlapping zones, the Display Type "Value Intervals" based on the Field "Interfer-
ence Scrambling Code" is available. Each interference zone will then be displayed in a colour corresponding to
the interfered scrambling code per pixel. For information on defining display properties, see "Display Properties of
9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the scrambling code interference zone coverage
Figure 8.53).
Figure 8.53: Condition settings for a scrambling code interference coverage prediction
A specific colour is assigned to areas where more than one scrambling code is interfered. You can analyse these areas
in more detail using the Search Tool. For more information on using the Search Tool for scrambling code interference
analysis, see "Using the Search Tool to Display Scrambling Code Allocation" on page 613.

A TD-SCDMA network automatically regulates power on both uplink and downlink with the objective of minimising inter-
ference and maximising network capacity. In the case of HSDPA, fast link adaptation (in other words, the selection of an
HSDPA bearer) is performed in the downlink. A9155 can simulate these network regulation mechanisms, thereby enabling
you to study the capacity of the TD-SCDMA network.
In A9155, a simulation is based on a realistic distribution of R99 users at a given point in time. The distribution of users at
a given moment is referred to as a snapshot. Based on this snapshot, A9155 calculates various network parameters such
as the required power of the mobile, the total DL power and the UL load per timeslot. Simulations are calculated in an
iterative fashion.
When several simulations are performed at a time using the same traffic information, the distribution of users will be differ-
ent, according to a Poisson distribution. Consequently you can have variations in user distribution from one snapshot to
another.
616 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

"TD-SCDMA Network Capacity" on page 617.
"Defining Multi-service Traffic Data" on page 621.
"Creating a Traffic Map" on page 621.
"Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations" on page 628.
8.2.1 TD-SCDMA Network Capacity

The capacity of a TD-SCDMA cell can be defined as the number of resource units available on the uplink and downlink.
There can be a maximum of 16 users (16 OVSF codes) per timeslot. This means that each timeslot counts for 16 resource
units.
There are 6 timeslots in a TD-SCDMA subframe, which can be used in uplink or downlink. There are different combinations
of uplink and downlink timeslots possible, which are referred to as timeslot configurations. Each cell can have a different
timeslot configuration assigned to it, which gives the number of uplink and downlink timeslots.
The following table lists the capacity of a cell for different possible timeslot configurations:
Timeslot Configuration Resource Units in Uplink Resource Units in Downlink

UDDDDD 16 80
UUDDDD 32 64
UUUDDD 48 48
UUUUDD 64 32
UUUUUD 80 16
Assuming ideal dynamic channel allocation (DCA), all the resource units within a subframe, i.e., 6 x 16 = 96 (TS0 is not
used) can be allocated and used. The total resource units in a network, i.e., the network capacity, is given by:
Network Capacity = Number of Timeslots per Subframe Number of Codes per Timeslot Number of Carriers
This section explains the network capacity and network dimensioning analysis tools:
"Calculating Available Network Capacity" on page 617.
"Calculating Required Network Capacity" on page 618.
8.2.1.1 Calculating Available Network Capacity

You can calculate the available capacity of your TD-SCDMA network in A9155 using the Network Capacity Estimation
dialogue.
To calculate the available network capacity:
3. Select Calculations > Network Capacity from the context menu. The Network Capacity Estimation dialogue
appears.
The dialogue contains three columns which list the names of the cells in the network, and the numbers of uplink
and downlink resource units in these cells. The last row in this dialogue displays the total uplink and downlink
resource units.
The uplink and downlink Resource Units Overhead defined for each timeslot per cell is considered when calculat-
ing the number of available resource units.
Displaying the Available Network Capacity on the Map
You can create a best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction in order to display the available network capacity, i.e., the
number of available resource units in uplink or downlink, of your TD-SCDMA network on the map.
To display the available cellnetwork capacity on the map:
1. Create a best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction, as explained in "Making a Best Server P-CCPCH Coverage
Prediction" on page 567, with the following display parameters:
- In step 7., set the Display Type "Value intervals" based on the Field "Resource Units Available in DL" or
"Resource Units Available in UL" according to what you would like to display. Each coverage zone will then
be displayed according to the number of available resource units for the cell (carrier used for the coverage
prediction).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 617

A9155 User Manual
Figure 8.54: Available network capacity coverage prediction (Display tab)
Figure 8.55: Available network capacity coverage prediction
8.2.1.2 Calculating Required Network Capacity

You can calculate the number of required resource units according to a given traffic demand, compare it with the network
capacity (see "Calculating Available Network Capacity" on page 617), and analyse how many resource units each cell
requires, in your TD-SCDMA network in A9155 using the Dimensioning dialogue.
The dimensioning tool takes traffic data as input from the traffic maps that you select before calculating the number of
required resources.
To calculate the required network capacity:
3. Select Calculations > Network Dimensioning from the context menu. The Dimensioning dialogue appears.
Before the calculations, the dialogue contains a Source Traffic tab. On the Source Traffic tab, select:
maps. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of users
(for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the ratesusers (for live traffic maps per sector).
- Select Traffic Maps to be Used: Select the traffic maps you want to use for dimensioning.
- Under Coverage, select the best server P-CCPCH Coverage to be used for distributing the traffic among the
cells of the network.
4. Click Calculate. A9155 distributes the traffic among cells using the information from traffic maps and the coverage
prediction, calculates the capacity of each cell, and displays the results in a new Results Per Cell tab.
618 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

The Results Per Cell tab contains five columns which list the names of the cells in the network, and the numbers
of uplink and downlink resource units available and required per cell. The last row in this dialogue displays the total
uplink and downlink resource units, required and available. Cells for which the required resource units are more
than the available units, are displayed in red.
The uplink and downlink Resource Units Overhead defined for each timeslot per cell is considered when calculat-
ing the number of available resource units.
5. Click Commit to store the number of required resource units per cell in the Cells table.
Changing transmitter parameters does not effect the dimensioning results if you have not updated the best server P-
CCPCH coverage prediction used for the dimensioning calculations. If you want to compare dimensioning results after
modifying some transmitter parameters, you will have to (re)calculate a best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction, and
run the dimensioning calculations based on this coverage prediction.
Displaying the Required Network Capacity on the Map
You can create a best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction in order to display the required network capacity, i.e., the
number of required resource units in uplink or downlink, of your TD-SCDMA network on the map. The number of required
resource units is an output of the network dimensioning feature which can be stored in the Cells table. For more informa-
tion, see "Calculating Required Network Capacity" on page 618.
To display the required cellnetwork capacity on the map:
- In step 7., set the Display Type "Value intervals" based on the Field "Cells: Required Resource Units in DL"
or "Cells: Required Resource Units in UL" according to what you would like to display. Each coverage zone
will then be displayed according to the number of required resource units for the cell (carrier used for the cov-
erage prediction).
Figure 8.56: Required network capacity coverage prediction (Display tab)
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 619

A9155 User Manual
Figure 8.57: Required network capacity coverage prediction
Displaying Usage of Resource Units on the Map
You can create a best server P-CCPCH coverage prediction in order to display the usage of resource units, i.e., the
percentage of available resource units which are effectively used by the traffic in uplink or downlink, of your TD-SCDMA
network on the map.
To display the usage of resource units on the map:
- In step 7., set the Display Type "Value intervals" based on the Field "Resource Units Used in DL" or
"Resource Units Used in UL" according to what you would like to display. Each coverage zone will then be
displayed according to the percentage of available resource units that are used in each cell (carrier used for
the coverage prediction).
Figure 8.58: Resource unit usage coverage prediction (Display tab)

620 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 8.59: Resource unit usage coverage prediction
Cells with high percentages of usage have dimensioning problems.

These services can be either circuit-switched or packet-switched services. For information on modelling end-user
services, see "Modelling Services" on page 580.
Mobility types: In TD-SCDMA, information about receiver mobility is important to accurately model the channel
characteristics: a mobile used by a speed driver or a pedestrian will not necessarily undergo the same radio wave
behaviour. EbNt or CI targets for uplink and downlink are largely dependent on mobile speed. For information
on creating a mobility type, see "Creating a Mobility Type" on page 581.
Terminals: In TD-SCDMA, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile
phone, a PDA, or a cars on-board navigation device. For information on creating a terminal, see "Modelling Ter-
minals" on page 582.

A9155 provides four types of traffic maps for TD-SCDMA projects. These maps can be used for the different types of traffic
data sources as follows:
demand or the number of active users or Erlangs. For more information, see "Live Traffic Data From the OMC" on
each pixel has an environment class assigned. For more information, see "Marketing-Based Traffic Data" on
user density assigned. For more information, see "Population-Based Traffic Data" on page 627 and "Importing a

the number of active users or Erlangs in each cell and the traffic characteristics related to different services. You can use
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 621

A9155 User Manual
this data to create traffic maps containing either the number of active users in each cell or Erlangs in each cell for circuit-
switched services or the data transfer characteristics of all the services in each cell.

You can input either the total throughput demand or the number of active users or Erlangs for each sector in this type of
traffic map. A best server RSCP P-CCPCH coverage prediction is required to create this traffic map. If you do not already
have a best server RSCP P-CCPCH coverage prediction in your document, you must create and calculate it. For more
information, see "Making a Best Server P-CCPCH Coverage Prediction" on page 567.
(# Active Users) or Map based on Transmitters and Services (Erlangs).
import AGD (A9155 Geographic Data) format files that you have exported from another
A9155 document.
6. Select a best server RSCP P-CCPCH coverage prediction from the list of available coverage predictions.
- If you are creating a Map based on Transmitters and Services (# Active Users), enter the numbers of active
users in the uplink and downlink for each sector and for each listed service.
- If you are creating a Map based on Transmitters and Services (Erlangs), enter Erlangs, i.e. the total
number of users, active and inactive, for each sector and for each service. This map is relevant for circuit-
switched services, that currently exist in the document, only. If you create new circuit switched services, the
traffic map will not take them into account automatically.

equal 100.
equal 100.
lations.
Live traffic per sector maps if you add or remove a base station. You must first recalculate the best server RSCP P-CCPCH
coverage prediction. For more information, see "Making a Best Server P-CCPCH Coverage Prediction" on page 567.
Once you have recalculated the coverage prediction, you can update the traffic map.
Select the updated best server RSCP P-CCPCH coverage prediction and define traffic values for the new trans-
mitter(s) listed at the bottom of the table. Deleted or deactivated transmitters are automatically removed from the
table.

6. Click OK. The traffic map is updated on the basis of the selected best server RSCP P-CCPCH coverage predic-
tion.
622 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

8.2.3.2 Marketing-Based Traffic Data

which are in turn defined by the terminal used, the calls per hour, and duration (for circuit-switched calls) or uplink and
downlink volume (for packet-switched calls).
"Modelling User Profiles" on page 623.
web browsing.

- CallsHour: For circuit-switched services, enter the average number of calls per hour for the service. The calls
For packet-switched services, the CallsHour value is defined as the number of sessions per hour. A session
not by the time.
- UL Volume: For packet-switched services, enter the average uplink volume per session in kilobytes.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 623

A9155 User Manual
To create or modify a TD-SCDMA environment:


6. Enter a Name for the new TD-SCDMA environment.
7. In the row marked with the New Row icon ( ), set the following parameters for each user profilemobility com-
bination that this TD-SCDMA environment will describe:
- Density (Subscriberskm2): Enter a density in terms of subscribers per square kilometre for the combination
Wk Sk
N k = N Area --------------------------

Wi Si
i
where:

For example: An area of 10 km with a subscriber density of 100km. Therefore, in this area, there are 1000


624 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

entire map.
select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a user profile from the TD-SCDMA
Parameters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the user profile in the Choice
column.
the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a mobility type from the TD-SCDMA Parame-
ters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the mobility type in the Choice column.
be exactly the same as the corresponding names in the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder of
the Data tab. If the imported user profile or mobility does not match, A9155 will display a
warning.
Wk Sk
N k = N Area --------------------------

Wi Si
i
where:


3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 625

A9155 User Manual


the Code column.
The environments available are those available in the Environments folder, under TD-SCDMA Parameters on
the Data tab of the Explorer window. For more information, see "Modelling Environments" on page 623.
on page 33.

Draw Polygon Delete Polygon

appears.
Si
Sk
k
5. Click Close.
626 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

clutter class.
8.2.3.3 Population-Based Traffic Data


The traffic density map defines the density of users per pixel. For a traffic density of X users per km, A9155 distributes x
users per pixel during the simulations, where x depends on the size of the pixels. These x users will have a terminal, a
dialogue.

11. Select whether the users are active in the UplinkDownlink, only in the Downlink, or only in the Uplink.
equal 100.
equal 100.
100.

your 2G network packet and circuit service traffic, and then import these maps as traffic density maps into your TD-SCDMA
To import a 2G traffic map into a TD-SCDMA document:
3. Import the traffic exported in step 2 to your TD-SCDMA document as a traffic density map. For more information
on importing traffic density maps, see "Importing a Traffic Density Map" on page 627.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 627

A9155 User Manual

Grid, or Vertical Mapper format. When exporting in BIL format, A9155 allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb. The
exported traffic map can then be imported as a traffic density map.
minal.
traffic.
cumulated traffic.

shadowing effect.
Finally, another random trial determines user positions in their respective traffic zone (according to the clutter
weighting and the indoor ratio per clutter class).
2. Modelling dynamic channel allocation and power control: A9155 performs dynamic channel allocation and
power control for mobiles generated in the previous step. The power control simulation algorithm is described in
"The Monte Carlo Simulation Algorithm" on page 628.
8.2.4.1 The Monte Carlo Simulation Algorithm

The dynamic channel allocation (DCA) simulates the way a TD-SCDMA network allocates resource units to users access-
ing different services. The power control algorithm (see Figure 8.62) simulates the way a TD-SCDMA network regulates
itself by using uplink and downlink power controls in order to minimize interference and maximize capacity. The average
HSDPA power per cell is considered in order to take into account the effect of HSDPA users. A9155 simulates the network
regulation mechanisms for each user distribution. During each iteration of the algorithm, all the mobiles selected during
628 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

the user distribution generation attempt to connect one by one to the networks transmitters. The process is repeated until
the network is balanced, i.e., until the convergence criteria (on UL and DL) are satisfied.
Figure 8.62: Schematic view of simulation algorithm
A9155 considers each user in the order in which the users are generated, and determines their best server. A9155 then
selects the cell and the timeslot to be allocated to each user according to the selected DCA strategy:
Load: The least loaded cell or timeslot is selected.
- Cell: A9155 calculates the ISCP (Interference Signal Code Power) for all the timeslots of all the cells of the
users best server considering the effect of smart antenna equipment, if any. Next, A9155 selects the carrier
with the lowest ISCP and the least load that has enough free timeslots to support the users service.
- Timeslot: A9155 selects the least loaded timeslots that have enough free OVSF codes for the users service.
Available RUs: The cell or timeslot with the most available resource units is selected.
- Cell: A9155 calculates the number of available resource units for all the timeslots of all the cells of the users
best server. Next, A9155 selects the carrier with most number of available resource units.
- Timeslot: A9155 selects the timeslots with the most available resource units.
Direction of Arrival: The cell or timeslot selected is the one which does not have an interfering mobile located
nearby at the same angle as the direction of arrival of the wanted mobile.
- Cell: A9155 calculates the number of interfering mobiles which are located in the same direction as the
wanted user for all the timeslots of all the cells of the users best server. Next, A9155 selects the carrier with
least number of interfering mobiles in the direction of the wanted user.
- Timeslot: A9155 selects the timeslots with that have the least number of interfering mobiles in the direction
of the wanted user.
Sequential: Cells and timeslots are selected in a sequential order.
- Cell: A9155 allocates the carriers to users one by one. For example, if there are 3 carriers, A9155 allocates
carrier 0 to user 0, carrier 1 to user 1, carrier 2 to user 2, carrier 0 to user 3, and so on.
- Timeslot: A9155 allocates timeslots to users one by one.
DCA reduces interference and maximises the usage of resource units.
In TD-SCDMA networks, interference for a given timeslot can be of the following four types:
DL -> DL: Cell A and cell B both transmitting in downlink.
UL -> UL: Cell A and cell B both receiving in uplink.
DL -> UL: Cell A receiving in uplink and cell B transmitting in downlink.
UL -> DL: Cell A transmitting in downlink and cell B receiving in uplink.
Next, A9155 performs uplink and downlink power control considering the effect of smart antenna equipment, if any. A9155
first calculates the required terminal power in order to reach the EbNt or CI threshold required by the service in the uplink,
followed by the required traffic channel power in order to reach the EbNt or CI threshold required by service in the down-
link. A9155 updates the downlink and uplink ISCP for all the users.
After carrying out power control, A9155 updates the cell load parameters. For each cell whose transmitter has a smart
antenna equipment assigned, A9155 updates the geometrical distribution of power transmitted using the smart antenna
in the downlink for each timeslot, which has to be updated for each user. A9155 also saves the geometrical distribution of
uplink loads calculated using the smart antenna in the uplink.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 629

A9155 User Manual
A9155 then carries out congestion and radio resource control, verifying the UL load, the total transmitted power, the
number of resource units and OVSF codes consumed considering the services which require several timeslots.
At this point, the users can be either connected or rejected. They are rejected if:
- On the downlink, the RSCP P-CCPCH is not high enough: status is "RSCP P-CCPCH < Min. RSCP P-
CCPCH"
- On the downlink, there is not enough reception on traffic channel: the status is "Ptch > Ptch max"
- On the uplink, there is not enough power to transmit: the status is "Pmob > Pmob max"
Even if constraints above are respected, the network (cell and timeslot) may be saturated:
- The maximum uplink load factor is exceeded (at admission or congestion): the status is either "Admission
rejection" or "UL load saturation"
- There are not enough resource units in the cell: the status is "RU saturation"
- There is not enough power for cells: the status is "DL load saturation"

In A9155, simulations enable you to model TD-SCDMA network regulation mechanisms in order to minimise interference
and maximise capacity.
2. Right-click the TD-SCDMA Simulations folder. The context menu appears.
Note: Execute Later enables you to automatically calculate TD-SCDMA coverage predictions
after simulations with no intermediary step by creating your simulations, creating your pre-
dictions, and then clicking the Calculate button ( ).
- Only the Average Simulation and Statistics: None of the individual simulations are displayed or avail-
able in the group. Only an average of all simulations and statistics is available.
Note: Some calculation and display options available for coverage predictions are not available
when the option "Only the average simulation and statistics" is selected.
- No Information About Mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. For each of them, a
properties window containing simulation output, divided among four tabs - Statistics, Sites, Cells, and
Initial Conditions - is available.
- Standard Information About Mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. The properties
window of each simulation contains an additional tab with output related to mobiles.
sumption by selecting Only the Average Simulation and Statistics under Information to
retain.
simulation:
check box.
- Max UL Load Factor: If you want to enter a global value for the maximum uplink load factor, click the button
( ) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum uplink load factor. If you want to
use the maximum uplink load factor as defined in the properties for each timeslot, click the button ( ) beside
the box and select Defined per Cell.
- DL Load (% Max Power): If you want the DL load to be considered in the simulation, select the DL Load
(% Max Power) check box and enter a maximum downlink load in the Max DL Load box.
- Max DL Load (% Max Power): If you want to enter a global value for the maximum downlink load, as a per-
630 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

enter a maximum downlink load, as a percentage of the maximum power. If you want to use the maximum
downlink load as defined in the properties for each timeslot, click the button ( ) beside the box and select
Defined per Cell.
7. On the TD-SCDMA tab of the dialogue, under Settings, enter an Angular Step in degrees which is used to build
the geometrical distributions of uplink and downlink loads. Angular step in used with grid of beams, statistical and
adaptive beam modelling. For more information on the different smart antenna models, see "Types of Smart
Antenna Modelling" on page 652.
8. Under DCA Strategies, select the strategy to be used for selecting carriers and timeslots during the simulations.
There are four different strategies available:
- Load: The least loaded cell or timeslot is selected.
- Available RUs: The cell or timeslot with the most available resource units is selected.
- Direction of Arrival: The cell or timeslot selected is the one which does not have an interfering mobile located
nearby at the same angle as the direction of arrival of the wanted mobile.
- Sequential: Cells and timeslots are selected in a sequential order.
For more information about the DCA strategies, see "The Monte Carlo Simulation Algorithm" on page 628.
9. Select the Calculate Interference Between Mobiles check box and enter a maximum distance to consider
between interfering mobiles in the Max Distance field.
ers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the ratesusers (for live traffic maps per sector).
to make a simulation based on a specific type of traffic map, you must ensure that you select only traffic maps
of the same type. For information on the types of traffic maps, see "Creating a Traffic Map" on page 621.

parameter changes.

gence.
eral tab.
now use the completed simulations for specific TD-SCDMA and HSDPA coverage predictions (see "Making Coverage
Predictions Using Simulation Results" on page 640).

parameters. You can, for example, display the traffic according to service, activity status, or pilot signal strength.
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Activity Status" on page 632.
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Connection Status" on page 632.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 631

A9155 User Manual
8.2.4.3.1 Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Activity Status

In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the activity status.
To display the traffic distribution by the activity status:
3. Select Properties from the context menu. The TD-SCDMA Simulations Properties dialogue appears.
4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "DL Activity" or "UL Activity"
as the Field.
5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by downlink or uplink activity status (see Figure 8.63).
Figure 8.63: Displaying the traffic distribution by downlink activity status

Field.

632 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


8.2.4.4 Displaying the User Best Server on the Map

A9155 enables you to display on the map the best serving transmitter for each user generated by a simulation.
To display the best server for a user:
On the map, click and hold the icon of the user whose best server you want to display.
The users best server is connected to the user with a line of the same colour as the serving transmitter. The best
server is indicated with the number "1". Figure 8.66 shows a user with its best server.
Figure 8.66: The best server of a user

you want to access.
5. Select Properties from the context menu. A simulation properties dialogue appears.
simulation results as identified by the tab title. A final tab lists the initial conditions of the simulation.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 633

A9155 User Manual
rates) is given.
These figures are determined at the end of the simulation and depend on the network design.
- The number and percentage of users connected, the number of users per activity status, and the UL and
DL total rates they generate. These data are also given per service.
- JD Factor: The joint detection factor, defined in the site equipment, is used to decrease intra-cellular interfer-
ence on uplink.
- DL Throughput (kbps): For each service, the aggregate downlink throughput of all the transmitters at each
site.
- UL Throughput (kbps): For each service, the aggregate uplink throughput of all the transmitters at each site.
The Cells tab: Cell level results are determined from the results calculated per timeslot. The Cells tab contains
the following information, per site, transmitter, carrier:
- P-CCPCH Power [TS0] (dBm): The P-CCPCH power as defined in the cell properties.
- DwPCH Power [DwPTS] (dBm): The DwPCH power as defined in the cell properties.
- Other CCH power [DL Traffic TS] (dBm): The power of other common channels per timeslot.
- Noise Figure (dB): The noise figure as defined in the transmitter properties.
- DL Traffic Power (dBm): The DL traffic power is the power transmitted by the cell on a downlink traffic
timeslot.
- DL Load (% Used Power): The percentage of the power used is determined by the ratio of the total trans-
mitted power and the maximum power (powers stated in W). When the constraint "DL Load" is set, the DL
PTimeslot
Used Used
Load cannot exceed the user-defined Max DL Load. P Cell =
i
i DL
UL Load UL Load
the uplink total interference and the uplink total noise. F Cell = Avg ( F Timeslot )
i
i UL
- UL Noise Rise (dB): The uplink noise rise is calculated from the uplink load factor. It indicates the signal deg-
radation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget).
- DL Load Factor (%): The downlink load factor for downlink timeslots. This factor corresponds to the ratio
DL Load DL Load
between the downlink total interference and the downlink total noise. F Cell = Avg ( F Timeslot )
i
i DL
- DL Noise Rise (dB): The downlink noise rise is calculated from the downlink load factor. It indicates the signal
degradation due to cell load (interference margin in the link budget).
- Number of DL Radio Links: The number of downlink radio links corresponds to the number of user-trans-
mitter links on the same carrier (i.e., the sum of the number connected mobiles and the number of inactive
mobiles). This data indicates the number of users connected to the cell on the downlink.
- Number of UL Radio Links: The number of uplink radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter
links on the same carrier (i.e., the sum of the number connected mobiles and the number of inactive mobiles).
This data indicates the number of users connected to the cell on the uplink.
- Connection Success Rate (%): The percentage of users able to connect to the cell with respect to the total
number of users attempting to connect. It is the ratio between the number of connected mobiles and the
number of connected and rejected mobiles.
- UL Requested Rate (kbps): Sum of all the uplink throughputs requested by the mobiles attempting to con-
nected to a carrier.
- R99 UL Throughput (kbps): The R99 traffic carried by the cell in terms of throughput in the uplink.
- DL Requested Rate (kbps): Sum of all the downlink throughputs requested by the mobiles attempting to con-
nected to a carrier.
- R99 DL Throughput (kbps): The R99 traffic carried by the cell in terms of throughput in the downlink.
- Required Resource Units in UL: The number of resource units required to carry the traffic demand in the
uplink.
- UL Resource Units: The number of resource units used in the cell in the uplink.
- Required Resource Units in DL: The number of resource units required to carry the traffic demand in the
downlink.
- DL Resource Units: The number of resource units used in the cell in the downlink.
The Timeslots tab: The Cells tab contains the following information, per site, transmitter, carrier, and timeslot:
634 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Other CCH power (dBm): The power of other common channels per timeslot.
timeslot.
power and uplink loads computed for cells whose transmitters have a smart antenna equipment. This field con-
tains binary data if you are using a 3rd party smart antenna model.
- Max DL Load (% Used Power): The maximum percentage downlink power that a cell can use. It is defined
either in the cell properties or in the simulation creation dialogue.
Load cannot exceed the user-defined Max DL Load.
- Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor not to be exceeded. This limit is taken into account
during the simulation if the option UL Load is selected. If the UL load option is not selected during a simula-
tion, this value is not taken into consideration.
the uplink total interference and the uplink total noise.
between the downlink total interference and the downlink total noise.
- Required Resource Units: The number of resource units required on a timeslot to carry the traffic. Each
timeslot can have a maximum of 16 resource units.
- User: The assigned user profile. A9155 uses the assigned service and activity status to determine the terminal
and the user profile.
- DL Activity: The activity status on the downlink assigned during the first random trial during the generation of
the user distribution.
- UL Activity: The activity status on the uplink assigned during the first random trial during the generation of
the user distribution.
cause is given.
- Best-server: The users best server.
- RSCP P-CCPCH: The received signal code power on the P-CCPCH pilot channel.
- DL and UL Requested Rate (kbps): The DL and UL Requested Rate correspond to the DL and UL nominal
rates of the service associated to the user.
- DL and UL Obtained Rate (kbps): The obtained rate is the same as the requested rate if a user is connected.
If the user is rejected, the obtained rate is zero.
- 1st, 2nd, 3rd TS Rank (DL): A mobile can have at most three timeslots allocated for traffic. These columns
list the numbers of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd timeslot assigned to a user. For example, if a user is assigned two
timeslots, 4 and 6, on the downlink, the 1st TS Rank (DL) will be 4 and 2nd TS Rank (DL) will be 6.
- 1st, 2nd, 3rd TS Rank (UL): A mobile can have at most three timeslots allocated for traffic. These columns
list the numbers of the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd timeslot assigned to a user. For example, if a user is assigned two
timeslots, 2 and 3, on the downlink, the 1st TS Rank (UL) will be 2 and 2nd TS Rank (UL) will be 3.
- 1st, 2nd, 3rd TS Total Mobile Power (UL) (dBm): The total mobile power corresponds to the total power
transmitted by the terminal on the uplink and on the timeslots assigned to the mobile.
- 1st, 2nd, 3rd TS Cell Traffic Power (DL) (dBm): The cell traffic power corresponds to the power transmitted
by the cell on the downlink for a mobile on the timeslots assigned to the mobile.

- The method used to calculate Nt.
- The uplink and downlink convergence thresholds
- The simulation constraints such as maximum DL load and the maximum UL load factor
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 635

A9155 User Manual
- The name of the traffic maps used

- The parameters defined per clutter class, such as the uplink and downlink orthogonality factors, indoor
loss, spreading angle, and the various standard deviations (Model, P-CCPCH EbNt or CI, DL EbNt or
CI, and UL EbNt or CI).

rates) is given.
These figures are determined at the end of the simulation and depend on the network design.
- The number and percentage of users connected, the number of users per activity status, and the UL and
DL total rates they generate. These data are also given per service.
The Sites (Average) and Sites (Standard Deviation) tabs: The Sites (Average) and Sites (Standard Deviation)
tabs contain the following average and standard deviation information, respectively, per site:
- JD Factor: The joint detection factor, defined in the site equipment, is used to decrease intra-cellular interfer-
ence on uplink.
- DL Throughput (kbps): For each service, the aggregate downlink throughput of all the transmitters at each
site.
- UL Throughput (kbps): For each service, the aggregate uplink throughput of all the transmitters at each site.
The Cells (Average) and Cells (Standard Deviation) tabs: The Cells (Average) and Cells (Standard Deviation)
tabs contain the following average and standard deviation information, respectively, per site, transmitter, and
carrier:
- DwPCH Power [DwPTS] (dBm): The DwPCH power as defined in the cell properties.
timeslot.
- DL Load (% Max Power): The percentage of the power used is determined by the ratio of the total transmitted
power and the maximum power (powers stated in W). When the constraint "DL Load" is set, the DL Load
cannot exceed the user-defined Max DL Load.
- Number of DL Radio Links: The number of downlink radio links corresponds to the number of user-trans-
mitter links on the same carrier. This data indicates the number of users connected to the cell on the downlink.
- Number of UL Radio Links: The number of uplink radio links corresponds to the number of user-transmitter
links on the same carrier. This data indicates the number of users connected to the cell on the uplink.
- Connection Success Rate (%): The percentage of users able to connect to the cell with respect to the total
number of users attempting to connect.
- UL Requested Rate (kbps): The traffic demand in terms of throughput in the uplink.
- UL Obtained Rate (kbps): The traffic carried by the cell in terms of throughput in the uplink.
- DL Requested Rate (kbps): The traffic demand in terms of throughput in the downlink.
- DL Obtained Rate (kbps): The traffic carried by the cell in terms of throughput in the downlink.
- Required Resource Units in UL: The number of resource units required to carry the traffic demand in the
uplink.
636 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- UL Resource Units: The number of resource units available in the cell in the uplink.
- Required Resource Units in DL: The number of resource units required to carry the traffic demand in the
downlink.
- DL Resource Units: The number of resource units available in the cell in the downlink.
The Timeslots (Average) and Timeslots (Standard Deviation) tabs: The Timeslots (Average) and Timeslots
(Standard Deviation) tabs contain the following average and standard deviation information, respectively, per site,
transmitter, carrier, and timeslot:
timeslot.
power and uplink loads computed for cells whose transmitters have a smart antenna equipment. This field con-
tains binary data if you are using a 3rd party smart antenna model.
- Max DL Load (% Used Power): The maximum percentage downlink power that a cell can use. It is defined
either in the cell properties or in the simulation creation dialogue.
Load cannot exceed the user-defined Max DL Load.
- Max UL Load Factor (%): The maximum uplink load factor not to be exceeded. This limit is taken into account
during the simulation if the option UL Load is selected. If the UL load option is not selected during a simula-
tion, this value is not taken into consideration.
between the downlink total interference and the downlink total noise.
- Required Resource Units: The number of resource units required on a timeslot to carry the traffic. Each
timeslot can have a maximum of 16 resource units.
8.2.4.7 Updating Cell and Timeslot Values With Simulation Results

Cell:
- Required resource units in uplink and downlink.
Timeslot:
- DL Traffic Power
- UL Load Factor
- Geographic distribution of UL and DL loads
To update cell and timeslot values with simulation results:

b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.

b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the TD-SCDMA Parameters folder.
d. Select Properties from the context menu. A simulation properties dialogue appears.
3. On the Cells tab, click Commit Results.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 637

A9155 User Manual

traffic channel powers allowed, EbNt or CI thresholds, etc.) as the ones used to calculate the initial simulation.
On the other hand, the shadowing error distribution between simulations is different and only radio data modifica-
tions (new transmitters, changes to the antenna azimuth, etc.) are taken into account during the power control sim-
ulation.
To replay a group of simulations, see "Replaying a Simulation or Group of Simulations" on page 638.
initialisation number (which must be an integer other than 0), A9155 generates the same user and shadowing error
allowed, EbNt or CI thresholds, etc.) and radio data (new transmitter, azimuth, etc.) are taken into account
during the power control simulation.
To duplicate a group of simulations, see "Duplicating a Group of Simulations" on page 640.

2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the TD-SCDMA Simulations folder.
eral tab.
Replaying a Simulation or Group of Simulations
To replay an existing simulation or group of simulations:

gence.
638 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

6. Under Cell Load Constraints, you can set the following parameters:
check box.
- Max UL Load Factor: If you want to enter a global value for the maximum uplink load factor, click the button
( ) beside the box and select Global Threshold. Then, enter a maximum uplink load factor. If you want to
use the maximum uplink load factor as defined in the properties for each timeslot, click the button ( ) beside
the box and select Defined per Cell.
- DL Load (% Max Power): If you want the DL load to be considered in the simulation, select the DL Load
(% Max Power) check box and enter a maximum downlink load in the Max DL Load box.
- Max DL Load (% Max Power): If you want to enter a global value for the maximum downlink load, as a per-
enter a maximum downlink load, as a percentage of the maximum power. If you want to use the maximum
downlink load as defined in the properties for each timeslot, click the button ( ) beside the box and select
Defined per Cell.
7. Under TD-SCDMA Parameters, you can set the following parameters:
- Angular Step: Angle in degrees which is used to build the geometrical distributions of uplink and downlink
loads. Angular step in used with grid of beams, statistical and adaptive beam modelling. For more information
on the different smart antenna models, see "Types of Smart Antenna Modelling" on page 652.
- Carrier Selection and Timeslot Selection: DCA Strategies to be used for selecting carriers and timeslots
during the simulations. There are four different strategies available:
- Load: The least loaded cell or timeslot is selected.
- Available RUs: The cell or timeslot with the most available resource units is selected.
- Direction of Arrival: The cell or timeslot selected is the one which does not have an interfering mobile
located nearby at the same angle as the direction of arrival of the wanted mobile.
- Sequential: Cells and timeslots are selected in a sequential order.
For more information about the DCA strategies, see "The Monte Carlo Simulation Algorithm" on page 628.
- Calculate Interference Between Mobiles: Select the check box and enter a maximum distance to consider
between interfering mobiles in the Max Distance field.
8. Select the level of Information to retain:
- Only the Average Simulation and Statistics: None of the individual simulations are displayed or available
in the group. Only an average of all simulations and statistics is available.
Note: Some calculation and display options available for coverage predictions are not available
when the option "Only the average simulation and statistics" is selected.
- No Information About Mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. For each of them, a prop-
erties window containing simulation output, divided among four tabs - Statistics, Sites, Cells, and Initial Con-
ditions - is available.
- Standard Information About Mobiles: All the simulations are listed and can be displayed. The properties
window of each simulation contains an additional tab with output related to mobiles.
sumption by selecting Only the Average Simulation and Statistics under Information to
retain.
eral tab.
Creating a New Simulation or Group of Simulations Using the Generator Initialisation Number
To create a new simulation or group of simulations using the generator initialisation number:
butions you want to use in this simulation or group of simulations. If you enter "0", the default, the user and shad-
owing error distribution will be random. If you enter any other integer, the same user and shadowing error
distribution will be used for any simulation using the same generator initialisation value.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 639

A9155 User Manual
of simulations by duplicating an existing one as explained in "Duplicating a Group of Simula-
tions" on page 640.
Duplicating a Group of Simulations
To duplicate an existing group of simulations:

3. Right-click the group of simulations you want to duplicate. The context menu appears.
You can change the parameters for the duplicated group of simulations as explained in "Creating Simulations" on
page 630.

When you create simulation or a group of simulations, you are basing it on a set of traffic conditions that represent the
performance of the network against a higher traffic load without changing traffic parameters or maps by using the global
scaling factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of subscribers
(for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the ratesusers (for live traffic maps per sector).
1. Create a simulation or group of simulations by:
- Creating a new simulation or group of simulations as described in "Creating Simulations" on page 630.
- Duplicating an existing simulation or group of simulations as described in "Adding New Simulations to an
A9155 Document" on page 638.
initial number of subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the ratesusers (for live traffic maps
per sector).

In A9155, you can make a coverage prediction where each pixel is considered as a probe user with a defined terminal,
mobility, and service. The analysis can be based on a single simulation or on an averaged group of simulations.
You can find information on the analysis method in the following sections:

When no simulations are available, A9155 uses the UL load factor the DL traffic power defined for each timeslot to make
coverage predictions. For information on cell properties, see "Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 546; for information
on modifying cell properties, see "Cell Description" on page 543.
Coverage predictions on P-CCPCH EbNt or CI, or on a service EbNt or CI:
- P-CCPCH (EbNt) Reception Analysis or P-CCPCH (CI) Reception Analysis: For information on making
a P-CCPCH reception analysis, see "Making a Pilot Signal Quality Prediction" on page 583.
- DwPCH (CI) Reception Analysis: For information on making a DwPCH reception analysis, see "Making a
DwPTS Signal Quality Prediction" on page 585.
- Service Area Downlink: For information on making a coverage prediction the downlink service area, see
- Service Area Uplink: For information on making a coverage prediction the uplink service area, see "Studying
Downlink and Uplink Service Area" on page 586.
- Effective Service Area: For information on making a coverage analysis for the effective service area, see
- Downlink Total Noise: For information on making a downlink total noise coverage prediction, see "Studying
Downlink Total Noise" on page 591.
640 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Cell to Cell Interference: For information on making a coverage analysis for cell to cell interference, see
A coverage prediction for baton handover analysis:
- Baton Handover: For information on making a baton handover coverage prediction, see "Making a Baton
Handover Coverage Prediction" on page 593.
An HSDPA coverage prediction to analyse HS-PDSCH quality and HSDPA data rate:
- HSDPA Coverage Prediction: For information on making an HSDPA coverage prediction, see "HSDPA Cov-
To base a coverage prediction on a simulation or group of simulations, store the results of a simulation or the average
results of a group of simulations in the Cells and Cell Parameters per Timeslot tables as explained in:
"Updating Cell and Timeslot Values With Simulation Results" on page 637.

An important step in the process of creating a TD-SCDMA network is verifying the capacity of the network. This is done
using measurements of the RSCP P-CCPCH in different locations within the area covered by the network. This collection
of measurements is called a test mobile data path.
the network.
"Importing a Test Mobile Data Path" on page 641.
"Network Verification" on page 644.
"Printing and Exporting the Test Mobile Data Window" on page 649.

sion FMT).
The position of test mobile data points: When you import the data, you must indicate which columns give the
Information identifying scanned cells (for example, serving cells, neighbour cells, or any other cells): In
TD-SCDMA networks, a cell is identified by its scrambling code. Therefore, you must indicate during the import
process which columns contain the scrambling code of cells, the scrambling code format (decimal or hexadecimal)
used in the file. Because a scrambling code can belong to several groups, you can also indicate the group from
which the scrambling code has been selected.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 641

A9155 User Manual
Notes:
name if desired.
document.
pears.
d. In the SC Group Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the scram-
bling code group of scanned cells. For example, if the string "SC_Group" is found in the column names iden-
tifying the scrambling code group of scanned cells, enter it here. A9155 will then search for columns with this
string in the column name.
If there is no scrambling code group information contained in the test mobile data file, leave the SC Group
Identifier box empty.
642 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

e. In the SC Identifier box, enter a string that must be found in the column names identifying the scrambling code
of scanned cells. For example, if the string "SC" is found in the column names identifying the scrambling code
of scanned cells, enter it here. A9155 will then search for columns with this string in the column name.
f. From the Scramb. Code Format list, select the scrambling code format, either "Decimal" or "Hexadecimal."
Important:
The data in the file must be structured so that the columns identifying the scrambling code group
and the scrambling code are placed before the data columns for each cell. Otherwise A9155 will
not be able to properly import the file.
configuration:
ample, "*.csv").
d. Click OK.
Notes:
Setup part.

data is displayed.

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 643

A9155 User Manual

Notes:

The imported test mobile data is used to verify the TD-SCDMA network. To improve the relevance of the data, A9155
allows you to filter out incompatible or inaccurate measurement points. You can then use the data for coverage predictions,
either by comparing the imported measurements with previously calculated coverage predictions, or by creating new
coverage predictions using the imported test mobile data.
"Filtering Incompatible Points Along Test Mobile Data Paths" on page 644.
"Comparing Measurements with Predictions" on page 646.
"Extracting a Field From a Test Mobile Path for a Transmitter" on page 647.

values to be useful. As well, test mobile data paths may include test points in areas that are not representative of the test
do not want to use.
644 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


lowing table:

bles you to update heights (DTM, clutter heights, DTM + clutter) and the clutter class of test
mobile data points after adding new geographic maps or modifying existing ones.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 645

A9155 User Manual

RSCP P-CCPCH coverage prediction.
P-CCPCH (EbNt) reception analysis, service area (EbNt) downlink, and service area (EbNt) uplink.
P-CCPCH (CI) reception analysis, service area (CI) downlink, and service area (CI) uplink.
RSCP P-CCPCH Coverage:
a. Click the Condition tab.

b. Select:
- Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. Gain and Losses defined in the
terminal properties are used.
erties is used.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. RSCP P-CCPCH Threshold
Probability.
class.
P-CCPCH (EbNt) Reception Analysis or P-CCPCH (CI) Reception Analysis:

b. Select:
- Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. Gain and Losses defined in the ter-
minal properties are used.
erties is used.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. P-CCPCH EbNt Threshold or
P-CCPCH CI Threshold defined in the mobility properties is used as the minimum requirement for the
coverage prediction.
- Timeslot: The P-CCPCH reception analysis prediction is performed for TS0.
Probability.
class.
Service Area Downlink or Service Area Uplink:

b. Select:
- Terminal: The terminal to be considered in the coverage prediction. Gain and Losses defined in the ter-
minal properties are used. For the uplink service area coverage prediction, A9155 calculates the EbNt
using the Max Power defined for the selected terminal.
Downlink TCH EbNt Threshold (or Uplink TCH CI Threshold and Downlink TCH CI Threshold)
are used as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction. Body Loss defined in the service prop-
erties is also used. For the downlink traffic channel coverage prediction, A9155 calculates the EbNt using
the Max Allowed Downlink Traffic Channel Power defined for the selected service.
- Mobility: The mobility type to be considered in the coverage prediction. The Uplink TCH EbNt Thresh-
old and Downlink TCH EbNt Threshold (or Uplink TCH CI Threshold and Downlink TCH CI
Threshold), defined in the service selected above, corresponding to the selected mobility type are used
as the minimum requirement for the coverage prediction.
- Timeslot: The service area coverage predictions can be performed for any downlink or uplink timeslot.
646 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Probability.
class.
age prediction.
to the transmitter for the main matrix. For information on the propagation model, see "Chapter 4: Managing Calcu-
lations in A9155".

appears.
7. Select the check box beside the field you want extract for the selected transmitter.
Note: A9155 can display the best server. If you want to display, for example, the point signal
level, remember to select the check box for the point signal level for all servers in the For
the Fields list. The new column will then display the point signal level for the selected trans-
mitter for all servers if a value exists.
selected values.

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 647

A9155 User Manual
Figure 8.69).
Figure 8.70: Test mobile data display parameters

648 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

9. You can change the zoom level of the Test Mobile Data window display in the following ways:
- Zoom in or out:

window.
on page 648).
page 647.


"Defining Frequency Bands" on page 650.
"The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 650.
"Smart Antenna Modelling" on page 652.
"Radio Bearers" on page 656.
"Site Equipment" on page 656.
"Reception Equipment" on page 656.
"Maximum System Range" on page 659.
"Maximum System Range" on page 659.
"TD-SCDMA Network Capacity" on page 617.

ference reduction factor. A9155 takes the interference reduction factor into account on both the uplink and the downlink.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 649

A9155 User Manual
To define the interference reduction factor between a pair of carriers:

3. Select Frequency Bands > Interference Reduction Factors from the context menu. The Inter-Carrier Interfer-
ence Reduction Factor table appears.
c. Enter an interference reduction factor in the Reduction Factor (dB) column. When A9155 calculates interfer-
ence, it subtracts the interference reduction factor from the calculated interference. An interference reduction
factor of 0 dB means that the interference between the pair of carriers is the same as between cells using the
same carrier
d. Press ENTER to create the carrier pair and to create a new row.

3. Select Frequency Bands > Open Table from the context menu.
- Name: Enter a name for the frequency, for example, "Band 2010." This name will appear in other dialogues
- Average Frequency (MHz): Enter the average frequency.
- First Carrier: Enter the number of the first carrier in this frequency band.
- Last Carrier: Enter the number of the last carrier in this frequency band. If this frequency band has only one
carrier, enter the same number as entered in the First Carrier field.
Important: When you have more than one frequency band, the carriers must be numbered sequen-
tially, contiguously (i.e., you cannot skip numbers in a range of carriers, and the range of
carriers in one band cannot overlap the range of carriers in another), and uniquely (i.e., you
can only use each number once).
For example:
Band 2010: First carrier: 0; Last carrier 1 and Band 900: First carrier: 2; Last carrier: 2
- Bandwidth (MHz): Enter the bandwidth of the frequency band, in MHz.


On the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue, you can define network parameters that are used
in TD-SCDMA power control simulations. Many parameters are used as default values for all transmitters.
"The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 650.

The Global Parameters tab lists a number of parameters that are fixed for the TD-SCDMA technology and cannot be modi-
fied. Other parameters on this tab can be modified. The parameters that are fixed include:
Frame: Under Frame, you have all the frame and subframe parameters:
- Number of Timeslots per Subframe: There are 7 timeslots in a TD-SCDMA subframe. These timeslots can
be used for uplink or downlink according to the timeslot configuration selected for each cell.
- Duration: Under Duration, you have the frame and subframe duration:
- Frame: The duration of a TD-SCDMA frame (10 ms). A frame includes two subframes of equal duration.
- Subframe: The duration of a TD-SCDMA subframe (5 ms).
- Number of Chips per Timeslot: Under Number of Chips per Timeslot, you have the number of chips cor-
responding to the data, midamble, and the guard periods.
- Data: The number of data chips in each timeslot (704).
- Midamble: The number of midamble chips in each timeslot (144).
- Guard Period: The number of chips in the guard period of each timeslot (16).
650 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

The subframe duration, the number of timeslots per subframe, and the numbers of chips per timeslot are used
to calculate the processing gain for each service (see example below).
- Number of Chips Dedicated to Pilot: Under Number of Chips Dedicated to Pilot, you have the description
of the pilot timeslot:
- DwPTS: The Total number of chips used in the DwPTS timeslot (96), which are divided into a Guard
Period (32) and a Synch period (64).
- Guard Period: The number of chips in the guard period between DwPTS and UpPTS (96).
- UpPTS: The Total number of chips used in the UpPTS timeslot (160), which are divided into a Guard
Period (32) and a Synch period (128).
The parameters that can be modified include:
DL Power: Under DL Power, you can define whether the power values on the downlink are Absolute or Relative
to Pilot. The power values effected are the DwPCH powers and other common channel powers defined in the cell
properties for TS0 and for each timeslot, as well as the minimum and maximum traffic channel powers defined for
services.
Spreading Rate: The chip rate used in TD-SCDMA for spreading the user signals (1.28 Mcps by default).
P-CCPCH Processing Gain: The processing gain is the ratio of the spread bandwidth to the unspread bandwidth.
It is set to 13.8 dB (= 24 times) by default.
Spreading Factor: Under Spreading Factor, you have the minimum and maximum spreading factors allowed in
TD-SCDMA:
- Min.: The lowest spreading factor that can be used (1).
- Max: The highest spreading factor that can be used (16).
Interferences: Under Interferences, you can define the parameter used to calculate interference on the downlink.
thermal noise, or you can select "Without useful signal" and A9155 will calculate Nt as the total noise less the
HSDPA: Under HSDPA, you can define how total noise is calculated and how the CQI (Channel Quality Indicator)
is evaluated for HSDPA.
- CQI: You can select Based on P-CCPCH quality and A9155 will measure the CQI based on the pilot EbNt
or you can select Based on HS-PDSCH quality and A9155 will measure the CQI based on the HS-PDSCH
EcNt. Depending on the option selected, you will have to define either a CQI=f(P-CCPCH EbNt) graph, or
a CQI=f(HS-PDSCH EcNt) graph in the reception equipment. The calculated CQI will be used to determine
the best bearer.
Example: Processing Gain Calculation
The processing gain is the ratio between the chip rate transmitted on the air interface and the data rate of a service. The
processing gains on the uplink and downlink are calculated from the uplink and downlink data rates of the service that you
have set. The following example shows how the processing gains are calculated for different services.
W
G P = Processing Gain = -----
R
Where W is the chip rate for TD-SCDMA, and R is the data rate of the service per timeslot.
The chip rate is calculated from the number of data chips per timeslot and the subframe duration:
TS
N Data Chips 704
W = -------------------------- = --------------- = 140800 bps
D Subframe 0.005
TS
Where N Data Chips is the number of data chips per timeslot (704), and D Subframe is the subframe duration (5 ms).
Taking the service "Mobile Internet Access" for example, the service data rates per timeslot in uplink and downlink are
calculated to be:
DL 384000 UL 64000
R = -------------------- = 128000 bps and R = ---------------- = 64000 bps
3 1
Where 3 and 1 are the number of downlink and uplink timeslots, respectively.
The uplink and downlink processing gains are then calculated:
DL 140800 UL 140800
GP = -------------------- = 1.1 = 0.414 dB and G P = -------------------- = 2.2 = 3.4242 dB
128000 64000

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 651

A9155 User Manual

6. Click OK.
8.4.4 Smart Antenna Modelling

Smart antenna refers to a system of antenna arrays with smart signal processing algorithms that are used to identify the
direction of arrival (DOA) of the signal, and use it to calculate beam-forming vectors, to track and locate the antenna beam
on the mobile.
There are two main types of smart antennas, switched beam smart antennas and adaptive array smart antennas. Switched
beam systems have several available fixed beam patterns. A decision is made as to which beam to access, at any given
point in time, based upon the requirements of the system. Adaptive arrays allow the antenna to steer the beam to any
direction of interest while simultaneously nulling interfering signals.
A9155 TD-SCDMA includes four smart antenna modelling types:
"Grid of Beams (GOB) Modelling" on page 652.
"Statistical Modelling" on page 654.
"Adaptive Beam Modelling" on page 654.
"3rd Party Smart Antenna Modelling" on page 654.
The following section explains how to work with smart antenna equipment in A9155:
"Smart Antenna Equipment" on page 654.
How smart antennas are used in dynamic channel allocation (DCA) during the Monte Carlo simulations is described in
"The Monte Carlo Simulation Algorithm" on page 628.
8.4.4.1 Types of Smart Antenna Modelling

The following smart antenna modelling methods are available in A9155. These methods can be divided into two catego-
ries. The first category of models, which includes grid of beams (GOB), adaptive beam, and 3rd party modelling, requires
Monte Carlo simulations in order to simulate the effect of the dynamic channel allocation (DCA) and power control. The
results generated by the Monte Carlo simulations using the smart antenna equipment based on any of these methods are
stored in the TD-SCDMA document, and can be reused for coverage prediction studies.
The second category, which includes the statistical modelling, does not require Monte Carlo simulations. Statistical model-
ling is based on simulation results in terms of probabilities of CI gains, and can be used directly in coverage predictions.
The smart antenna equipment that uses statistical modelling contains a list of CI gain graphs that depend on the spread-
ing angle
8.4.4.1.1 Grid of Beams (GOB) Modelling

In A9155 TD-SCDMA, a list of beams (antenna patterns) can be used to create a grid of beams smart antenna equipment.
A GOB in A9155 comprises a list of antenna patterns. Each antenna pattern usually has a different azimuth. All the
antenna patterns are stored in the Antennas table, and are individually accessible under the Antennas folder. The lists
of antennas forming the GOBs are accessible in the Antenna Lists dialogue from the Antennas folders context menu.
During Monte Carlo simulations, A9155 selects the best suited beam from the GOB for each mobile generated. The best
suited beam is the one using which the mobile receives the highest signal level.
In downlink, all the interfering signals received at each mobile are attenuated according to the antenna pattern of the
selected beam. If the wanted and interfered users are in the same direction with respect to the beam selected for the
wanted user, the interference will be high. Otherwise, the interfering signals will be attenuated. In uplink, the interfering
signals received at the cell are attenuated according to the antenna pattern of the selected beam.
Important: Although the number of beams in a GOB is not limited, calculation times with a large num-
ber of beams will be longer.
A9155 TD-SCDMA project template contains sample smart antenna equipment. You should create smart antenna equip-
ment according to the specifications of your equipment supplier, or import them in A9155, in order to use real data in calcu-
lations.
The following sections explain how to create and import grids of beams:
"Creating a Grid of Beams (GOB)" on page 652.
"Adding Antennas to a Grid of Beams (GOB)" on page 653.
"Importing a Grid of Beams (GOB)" on page 653.
"Grid of Beams (GOB) Import Format" on page 653.
Creating a Grid of Beams (GOB)
In A9155, a grid of beams is a list of antennas. A list of antennas can include any number of antennas listed in the Antennas
folder.
To create an antenna list:
2. Right-click the Antennas folder. The context menu appears.
652 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

3. Select Antenna List > Open Table from the context menu. The Antenna Lists table appears.
4. Create a new antenna list in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ).
5. Click the Properties button. The New Antenna List Properties dialogue appears.
6. Select the antennas from the Antennas column to add to the antenna list in each new row.
7. Click OK to close the dialogue.
8. Click Close to close the Antenna Lists table.
You can also export an antenna list to an external file by clicking the Export button, or import an existing antenna list by
clicking the Import button in the New Antenna List Properties dialogue.
Adding Antennas to a Grid of Beams (GOB)
You can add antennas, or beams, from the antennas folder to an existing grid of beams or antenna list.
To add antennas to an antenna list:
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Antennas folder.
3. Right-click the antenna that you want to add to an antenna list. The context menu appears.
4. Select Add the Antenna to a List from the context menu. The Antenna Addition in a List dialogue appears.
5. Select the antenna list to which you want to add the antenna from the Antenna List.
6. Click OK to add the antenna to the list.
You can also add all the antennas in the Antennas folder or a subfolder to an antenna list by selecting Antenna List >
Add Antennas to a List from the folders context menu.
Importing a Grid of Beams (GOB)
You can import existing antenna lists to be used as grids of beams in A9155.
To import an antenna list:
2. Right-click the Antennas folder. The context menu appears.
3. Select Antenna List > Import Antennas from a List from the context menu. The Open dialogue appears.
4. Select an Index file to import.
5. Click Open to import the antenna list to A9155. The Import of antennas from a list dialogue appears.
6. Enter a name for the new antenna list.
7. Click OK to import the antenna list.
A9155 adds the antennas referred to in the index file to the Antennas folder, and adds the new antenna list to the
Antenna Lists table.
Grid of Beams (GOB) Import Format
A9155 supports standard, Planet-like antenna list format for export and import. An index file contains the list of files which
contain the horizontal antenna patterns and a file which contains the vertical antenna pattern.
The horizontal antenna pattern files have the following format:
NAME Name of the antenna

MAKE Name of manufacturer
FREQUENCY Operating frequency (in MHz)
H_WIDTH Horizontal beamwidth (in degrees)
FRONT_TO_BACK Front to back gain ratio (in dB)
GAIN Antenna gain (in dBi)
HORIZONTAL Horizontal pattern range (in degrees)
DEGREEa ATTENUATION
a.The last row is repeated for every degree value.
The vertical antenna pattern file has the following format:
NAME Name of the antenna

V_WIDTH Vertical beamwidth (in degrees)
VERTICAL Vertical pattern range (in degrees)
DEGREEa ATTENUATION
a.The last row is repeated for every degree value.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 653

A9155 User Manual
The fields in bold are obligatory. The keyword <ALL> can be used with NAME to indicate that the vertical pattern is the
same for all the files containing the horizontal antenna patterns.
8.4.4.1.2 Statistical Modelling

The statistical modelling approach is aimed at providing a fast and reliable coverage and capacity analysis without the
need of accurate traffic inputs or Monte Carlo simulations.
Statistical modelling is based on cumulative distribution functions of CI gains according to spreading angles. Spreading
angles can be defined for each clutter class.
For the transmitters that have a statistical smart antenna equipment assigned, all coverage predictions, including the ones
carried out for traffic timeslots, are calculated using the main antenna. During the calculation of coverage predictions,
A9155 reads the spreading angle for each pixel from the corresponding clutter class. Then, for the given pixel and spread-
ing angle, A9155 reads the CI gain to take into account in the prediction.
The CI gain considered in the coverage prediction is determined according to the probability threshold set. The CI gain
value to be used corresponds to the cumulative probability, i.e., 100 % less the probability threshold entered. For example,
for a probability threshold of 80 %, the cumulative probability is 20 %. If an exact value of CI gain is not available for the
calculated cumulative probability, A9155 performs linear interpolation between the two available surrounding values.
If no CI gain graph is available, the main antenna is used Monte Carlo simulations and coverage predictions.
Two default smart antenna equipment using statistical modelling are available in A9155, ULA4 and ULA8 for 4 and 8
antenna elements, respectively. In these sample equipment, antenna elements have been considered to be half a wave-
length apart. The cumulative distribution functions (CDF) of the CI gains are the results of a number of simulations
performed for two values of spreading angles (0 and 10) using the Optimum Combining algorithm which maximises the
signal to noise and interference ratio (SNIR).
Note: Alcatel-Lucent can provide CDFs of CI gains, on request, for any ULA (Uniform Linear
Array) or UCA (Uniform Circular Array) equipment, any combining algorithm, and any angu-
lar spread.
8.4.4.1.3 Adaptive Beam Modelling

The ideal adaptive beam model available in A9155 TD-SCDMA makes use of a selected beam (antenna) pattern. You can
create a adaptive beam smart antenna equipment and assign it an antenna pattern from among the antennas available in
the Antennas folder.
During Monte Carlo simulations, A9155 orients the selected antenna pattern horizontally towards each mobile generated
in order to maximise the received signal.
In downlink, all the interfering signals received at each mobile are attenuated according to the antenna pattern of the adap-
tive beam. If the wanted and interfered users are in the same direction with respect to the beam directed towards the
wanted user, the interference will be high. Otherwise, the interfering signals will be attenuated. In uplink, the interfering
signals received at the cell are attenuated according to the antenna pattern of the adaptive beam.
The adaptive beam modelling gives the ideal results that can be obtained using adaptive smart antennas.
8.4.4.1.4 3rd Party Smart Antenna Modelling

If you have a 3rd party smart antenna model available, you can use it in A9155 TD-SCDMA thanks to A9155s smart
antenna API. A9155s smart antenna provides the possibility to interface any external smart antenna module with A9155.
Any external smart antenna models available are listed in the Smart Antenna Models folder of the Modules tab of the
Explorer window. A9155 is fully capable of using the features of any external smart antenna model, which can be based
on MMSE (Minimum Mean Square Error), EBB (Eigen-Beam Beamforming), or any other specific modelling method.
8.4.4.2 Smart Antenna Equipment

You can use several smart antenna equipment in your TD-SCDMA document which can be based on different smart
antenna modelling methods.
To create a new smart antenna equipment:
3. Select Equipment > Smart Antenna Equipment from the context menu. The Smart Antenna Equipment table
appears.
4. In the table, create one smart antenna equipment per row. For information on using data tables, see "Working with
Data Tables" on page 48. For each smart antenna equipment, enter a Name and some Comments, if you wish,
and select a Modelling Type. The modelling types include Grid of Beams (GOB), Adaptive Beam, Statistical,
and Antenna Model.
If you selected Grid of Beams (GOB), Adaptive Beam, or Statistical as Modelling Type, continue with step 5..
If you selected Antenna Model as Modelling Type, continue with step 9..
5. Click the Properties button. The smart antenna properties dialogue appears.
6. On the General tab of this dialogue, you can modify the Name, Modelling Type, and Comments.
654 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

7. Under Modelling Type, Click the Parameters button. This button opens a dialogue containing the parameters
specific to the selected modelling type.
If you selected Grid of Beams (GOB) as Modelling Type, the Grid of Beams (GOB) Modelling dialogue
appears. In this dialogue:
a. Select a DL Grid of Beams, the grid of beams to be used in downlink. The list of available grid of beams con-
tains all the grid of beams listed in the Antennas Lists table. For more information on creating grids of beams,
see "Grid of Beams (GOB) Modelling" on page 652.
b. Select a UL Grid of Beams, the grid of beams to be used in uplink. If you do not select a UL Grid of Beams,
A9155 uses the main antenna for uplink calculations.
c. Click the Properties button. The Properties dialogue appears. In this dialogue, you can modify the Name and
Modelling Type of the smart antenna equipment, and enter any comments if you wish.
d. Under Patterns,
i. Click the Separate button. The Grid of Beams Properties dialogue appears. This dialogue displays the
the antenna patterns of all the beams separately.
ii. Or, click the Combined button. The Grid of Beams Properties dialogue appears. This dialogue displays
the combined patterns of all the beams.
iii. Click OK to close the Grid of Beams Properties dialogue.
Notes:
If you have opened the smart antenna properties dialogue from the Transmitter tab of a trans-
mitters properties dialogue, by clicking the Browse ( ) button, these patterns will also
include the main antenna pattern, if any.
The combined antenna pattern display can be used to understand any inconsistencies in smart
antenna results. If the gird of beams and the main antenna do not have the same gains, the smart
antenna could provide worse results than the main antenna for traffic timeslots.
e. Click OK to close the Grid of Beams (GOB) Modelling dialogue.

If you selected Statistical as Modelling Type, the Statistical Modelling dialogue appears. In this dialogue:
a. Select a Probability Threshold (%), the probability threshold used to read the CI gain graphs. For more in-
formation on the probability threshold and CI gains, see "Statistical Modelling" on page 654.
b. Define a Spreading Angle () per column.
c. Click the Browse ( ) button corresponding to the CI Gain Graph for each column. The CI Gain Graph
dialogue appears. The CI Gain Graph provides the cumulative probability of each CI value.
d. Click OK to close the CI Gain Graph dialogue.
e. Click OK to close the Statistical Modelling dialogue.
If you selected Adaptive Beam as Modelling Type, the Adaptive Beam Modelling dialogue appears. In this
dialogue:
a. Select a DL Adaptive Beam, the adaptive beam to be used in downlink. The list of available adaptive beams
contains all the antennas listed in the Antennas folder.
b. Select a UL Adaptive Beam, the adaptive beam to be used in uplink. If you do not select a UL Adaptive
Beam, A9155 uses the main antenna for uplink calculations.
c. Under Patterns,
i. Click the Separate or Combined button. The Adaptive Beam Properties dialogue appears. This dia-
logue displays the adaptive beam pattern.
ii. Click OK to close the Adaptive Beam Properties dialogue.
Notes:
If you have opened the smart antenna properties dialogue from the Transmitter tab of a trans-
mitters properties dialogue, by clicking the Browse ( ) button, these patterns will also
include the main antenna pattern, if any.
The combined antenna pattern display can be used to understand any inconsistencies in smart
antenna results. If the adaptive beam and the main antenna do not have the same gains, the
smart antenna could provide worse results than the main antenna for traffic timeslots.
d. Click OK to close the Adaptive Beam Modelling dialogue.

8. Click OK to close the smart antenna properties dialogue.
9. Click Close to close the Smart Antenna Equipment table.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 655

A9155 User Manual
Note: Properties of external 3rd party smart antenna models may vary. These properties can be
accessed from the Smart Antenna Models folder under the Modules tab of the Explorer
window.
8.4.5 Radio Bearers

Radio bearers are used by the network for carrying information. In this section, the following are explained:
"Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers" on page 656.
8.4.5.1 Defining HSDPA Radio Bearers

In each cell, the scheduler selects the HSDPA resource per UE and per TTI (Transmission Time Interval). This HSDPA
resource is called a TFRC (Transport Format Resource Combination) and is the set of parameters such as the transport
format, the modulation scheme, and the number of used HS-PDSCH codes. In A9155, the TFRC are referred to as HSDPA
radio bearers.
During a simulation, and for the HSDPA coverage prediction, A9155 selects a suitable HSDPA radio bearer and uses its
RLC peak rate. The HSDPA radio bearer selection is based on UE capabilities (maximum number of HS-PDSCH chan-
nels, transport block size, and whether it uses 16 QAM modulation), cell capabilities (maximum number of HS-PDSCH
channels), and reported CQI.
The HSDPA Radio Bearer table lists the available HSDPA radio bearers. You can create new HSDPA radio bearers and
modify existing ones by using the HSDPA Radio Bearer table.
To open the HSDPA Radio Bearer table:
4. Select HSDPA Radio Bearers from the context menu. The HSDPA Radio Bearer table appears with the following
information:
- Number of HS-PDSCH Channels Used: The number of HS-PDSCH channels used.
- 16QAM Modulation Used: The check box is selected if the HSDPA radio bearer uses 16QAM modulation. If
this option is not selected, A9155 assumes that QPSK modulation is used.
addressing, etc.).

To create a new piece of TD-SCDMA site equipment:
3. Select Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. The Site Equipment table appears.
see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48. For the new piece of TD-SCDMA equipment you are creating, enter
the following:
- JD factor: Joint Detection (JD) is a technology used to decrease intra-cellular interference in the uplink. JD is
modelled by a coefficient between 0 and 1; this factor is considered in the UL interference calculation. In case
JD is not supported by equipment, enter 0 as value.
8.4.7 Reception Equipment

When you make TD-SCDMA coverage predictions, you can define the height of the receiver.
656 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

5. Enter a receiver Height. This value will be used when calculating a TD-SCDMA coverage predictions and a point
analysis.
6. Click OK.
8.4.7.2 Creating or Modifying Reception Equipment

In A9155, reception equipment is used when you create a terminal. The graphs defined for each reception equipment entry
are used for selecting HSDPA bearers.
To create or modify reception equipment:
5. Double-click the reception equipment type you want to modify. The reception equipment types Properties dia-
logue appears.
Note: You can create a new reception equipment type by entering a name in the row marked with
the New Row icon ( ) and pressing ENTER.
6. Click the HSDPA Bearer Selection tab.

7. Ensure that the values for each Mobility in the CQI Table and the Best HSDPA Bearer Table have been entered.
You can edit the values in the CQI Table and the Best HSDPA Bearer Table by clicking directly on the table entry,
or by selecting the Mobility and clicking the CQI Graph or the Best Bearer Graph buttons.
The CQI table describes the variation of the P-CCPCH CQI as a function of the P-CCPCH EbNt (or the variation
of HS-PDSCH CQI as a function of the HS-PDSCH EcNt); the values displayed depend on the calculation param-
eter you have selected in the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters Properties dialogue. For more informa-
tion, see "The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 650.
The Best HSDPA Bearer table describes the index of the best HSDPA bearer as a function of the HS-PDSCH
CQI.
The CQI graphs and best bearer graphs are used in the simulation and in the HSDPA coverage prediction to model
fast link adaptation (selection of the HSDPA bearer).
The supplier RRM (radio resource management) strategy can be taken into account using the Best HSDPA
Bearer table, for example:
- You can define several pieces of reception equipment with a separate table for each. You can reserve low
bearer indexes for poor-performance reception equipment and higher bearer indexes for high-performance
equipment.
- You can specify a graph for each mobility. Here, you can reserve low bearer indexes for high speeds and
higher bearer indexes for low speeds.
- You can also give priority to either one user by assigning him a high bearer index or to all users by assigning
them low bearer indexes.
8.4.7.3 HSDPA User Equipment Categories

HSDPA user equipment capabilities are standardised into 12 different categories according to 3GPP specifications.
To edit an HSDPA user equipment category:
4. Select HSDPA User Equipment Categories from the context menu. The HSDPA User Equipment Categories
table appears.
5. The HSDPA User Equipment Categories table has the following columns:
- Category: The number identifying the HSDPA UE category.
- Max Number of HS-PDSCH Channels: The maximum number of HS-PDSCH channels allowed for the cat-
egory.
- Min. Number of TTI Between Two TTI Used: The minimum number of TTI (Transmission Time Intervals)
between two TTI used.
- Max Transport Block Size (bits): The maximum transport block size allowed for the category.
- 16QAM Modulation: Select the check box if the category supports 16QAM modulation. If 16QAM modulation
is not selected, QPSK is used.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 657

A9155 User Manual

Normally, the signal received at any given point is spread on a gaussian curve around an average value with a specific
In other words, in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be better and in 50% of the measured cases, the result will
be worse.
In TD-SCDMA projects, the model standard deviation is used to calculate shadowing margins on signal levels. You can
also calculate shadowing margins on EbNt values. For information on setting the model standard deviation and the EbNt
standard deviations for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 105.
Shadowing can be taken into consideration when A9155 calculates the signal level and EbNt for:
A point analysis (see "Making a Point Analysis" on page 559).
A9155 always takes shadowing into consideration when calculating a Monte Carlo-based TD-SCDMA simulation.
You can display the shadowing margins per clutter class. For information, see "Displaying the Shadowing Margins" on
page 658.
8.4.8.1 Displaying the Shadowing Margins

Figure 8.71).
- P-CCPCH EbNt: The P-CCPCH EbNt standard deviation. A9155 will display the P-CCPCH EbNt
shadowing margin.
- DL EbNt: The DL EbNt standard deviation. A9155 will display the DL EbNt shadowing margin.
- UL EbNt: The UL EbNt standard deviation. A9155 will display the UL EbNt shadowing margin
658 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

8.4.9 Maximum System Range

Each sector in a TDD network has an intrinsic maximum coverage range. This maximum system range is defined by the
distance after which the uplink and downlink signals can interfere with each other. You can set the maximum range of your
TD-SCDMA system through the Properties dialogue of the Predictions folder.
To set the maximum range of the system:
4. Click the System tab. On the system tab, you can set the following parameters:
- Max Range: Select the Max Range check box if you want to apply a maximum system range limit, and enter
the maximum system range in the text box to the right.
5. Click OK.
The default value for the maximum system range is 11250 m, which is the distance corresponding to the duration of the
guard period in the pilot timeslot. The maximum system range is the distance after which the uplink and downlink pilot
timeslots could be unsynchronised. The maximum system range is calculated as follows:
Each subframe of 5 ms duration contains 1 pilot timeslot and 7 downlink or uplink timeslots. The pilot timeslot is divided
into a downlink pilot timeslot (DwPTS), a guard period (GP), and uplink pilot timeslot (UpPTS). The lengths of DwPTS, GP,
and UpPTS are 96, 96, and 160 chips, respectively. Each of the other 7 timeslots contains 704 data chips, 144 midamble
chips, and 16 guard period chips. All in all, a 5 ms subframe contains 6400 chips. The duration of the guard period of the
pilot can be calculated as:
0.005
D GP = --------------- 96 = 75 s
6400
The maximum system range is half the distance that the RF signal can travel in DGP:
8
75 s 3 10 m/s
R System = ----------------------------------------------------- = 11250 m
2
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 659

A9155 User Manual
660 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

CHAPTER 9
WIMAX BWA NETWORKS
Chapter 9: WiMAX BWA Networks
9 WiMAX BWA Networks

WiMAX (Wireless Interoperability for Microwave Access) refers to a group of broadband wireless access (BWA) standards
which use OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing) and SOFDMA (Scalable Orthogonal Frequency Division
Multiple Access) technologies. The WiMAX air interface is described in the IEEE 802.16d and the IEEE 802.16e standards.
The 802.16d standard is the complete specification for fixed broadband wireless access networks using OFDM and the
802.16e specifications describe mobile broadband wireless access networks which use SOFDMA and support handovers
and user terminal speeds of up to 100 km/hr.
A9155 enables you to design IEEE 802.16d and IEEE 802.16e broadband wireless access networks. Two separate docu-
ment templates, named WiMAX 802.16d and WiMAX 802.16e, are available for designing and planning these networks.
A9155 can predict radio coverage, manage mobile and fixed subscriber data, and evaluate network capacity. A9155
WiMAX also supports smart antennas.
A9155 enables you to model fixed and mobile users in WiMAX environments. The data input corresponding to fixed
subscribers, which is an important requirement of fixed wireless access networks, is modelled using a subscriber database
integrated into the module. You can carry out calculations on fixed subscriber locations as well as base your calculations
on mobile user scenarios during Monte Carlo simulations. You can also perform interference predictions, resource alloca-
tion, and other calculations on mobile users.
A9155 uses Monte Carlo simulations to generate realistic network scenarios (snapshots) using a Monte Carlo statistical
engine for scheduling and resource allocation. Realistic user distributions can be generated using different types of traffic
maps or subscriber data. A9155 uses realistic user distributions as input for simulations.
Coverage predictions can be created to study the following parameters:
The signal level received from cells
The carrier-to-interference-and-noise ratio
The radio bearer coverage
The channel throughput per pixel
WiMAX service and analysis coverage predictions can be created from either Monte Carlo simulation results or from a
user-defined network load configuration (uplink and downlink traffic loads and uplink noise rise). GSM GPRS EGPRS, IS-
95 cdmaOne, CDMA2000 1xRTT, CDMA2000 1xEV-DO, and UMTS HSPA networks can be planned in the same A9155
session.
Tip: Before working with the A9155 WiMAX module for the first time, it is highly recommended
to go through the "Glossary of WiMAX Terms" on page 748. This will help you get accus-
tomed to the terminology used in A9155.
9.1 Planning and Optimising WiMAX Base Stations

As described in "Chapter 2: Starting an A9155 Project", you can start an A9155 document from a template, with no base
stations, or from a database with a set of base stations. As you work on your A9155 document, you will still need to create
base stations and modify existing ones.
as the TMA, feeder cables, etc. In a WiMAX project, you must also add cells to each transmitter. A cell refers to the char-
acteristics of an RF channel on a transmitter.
and a transmitter with its antennas, equipment, and cells.
In A9155, you can study a single base station or a group of base stations using coverage predictions. A9155 allows you
to make a variety of coverage predictions, such as signal level or transmitter coverage predictions. The results of calcu-
lated coverage predictions can be displayed on the map, compared, and studied.
terminals. This data can be then used to make network quality studies, such as C/(I+N), WiMAX radio bearer, and through-
put coverage predictions.
"Creating a WiMAX Base Station" on page 664.
"Creating a Group of Base Stations" on page 673.
"Modifying Sites and Transmitters Directly on the Map" on page 673.
"Display Hints for Base Stations" on page 674.
"Creating a Multi-Band WiMAX Network" on page 674.
"Setting the Working Area of an A9155 Document" on page 674.
"Studying a Single Base Station" on page 675.
"Studying Base Stations" on page 680.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 663

A9155 User Manual
9.1.1 Creating a WiMAX Base Station

When you create a WiMAX site, you create only the geographical point; you must add the transmitters and cells afterwards.
The site with a transmitter and its antennas, equipment, and cells is called a base station.
Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 669. If you want to create or modify one of the elements of a base station,
see "Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 668. If you need to create a large number of base stations,
A9155 allows you to import them from another A9155 document or from an external source. For information, see "Creating
a Group of Base Stations" on page 673.
"Definition of a Base Station" on page 664.
"Creating or Modifying a Base Station Element" on page 668.
"Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template" on page 669.

example, cells. You will usually create a new base station using a station template, as described in "Placing a New Base
parameters:
"Cell Description" on page 666.

of the site here.
calculations.

erties dialogue has three additional tabs: the Cells tab (see "Cell Description" on page 666), the Propagation tab (see
"Chapter 4: Managing Calculations in A9155"), and the Display tab (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33).
664 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

The General tab:

- Transmission/Reception: Under Transmission/Reception, you can see the total losses and the noise
assigned to the transmitter. Equipment can be assigned using the Equipment Specifications dialogue which
appears when you click the Equipment button.
losses you define are used to initialise total transmitter losses in the uplink and downlink:
ment" on page 131.
page 131.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 665

A9155 User Manual
must be positive.
Note: A9155 always considers the values in the Real boxes in coverage predictions even if they
are different from the values in the Computed boxes. The information in the real Total
Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you entered in the Equip-
ment Specifications dialogue. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and
reception and the real Total Noise Figure at reception if you wish. Any value you enter
must be positive.
- Antennas:
Downtilt, and Additional Electrical Downtilt, display additional antenna parameters. The mechanical
and additional electrical downtilts defined for the main antenna are also used for the calculations using the
smart antenna equipment.
- Smart Antenna: Under Smart Antenna, the available smart antenna equipment is available in the Equip-
ment list. You can click the Browse button ( ) to access the properties of the smart antenna equip-
ment. For more information on smart antenna equipment, see "Defining Smart Antenna Equipment" on
page 737.
- Number of MIMO Antennas: Enter the number of antennas used for MIMO in the Transmission and
Reception fields. For more information on how the number of MIMO antennas are used, see "Multiple
Input Multiple Output Systems" on page 738.
the main antenna.
9.1.1.1.3 Cell Description

In A9155, a cell is defined as an RF channel, with all its characteristics, on a transmitter; the cell is the mechanism by
which you can configure a WiMAX network. Currently, the WiMAX module allows only one cell per transmitter.
When you create a transmitter, A9155 reminds you to create a cell for the transmitter. The following explains the param-
eters of a WiMAX cell. As you create a cell, A9155 calculates appropriate values for some fields based on the information
you have entered. You can, if you wish, modify these values.
The properties of a WiMAX cell are found on Cells tab of the Properties dialogue of the transmitter to which it is assigned.
Name: By default, A9155 names the cell after its transmitter, adding a suffix in parentheses. If you change trans-
mitter name, A9155 does not update the cell name. You can enter a name for the cell, but for the sake of consist-
ency, it is better to let A9155 assign a name. If you want to change the way A9155 names cells, see The
666 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

BSID: The Base Station ID.

Preamble Power (dBm): The cells transmission power over the preamble of the frame.
Traffic Power Offset (dB): The power offset to be subtracted from the power defined in the Preamble Power
(dBm) field to determine the transmission power of the traffic subcarriers during the loaded part of the frame.
Traffic subcarriers are off during the empty part of the frame.
Pilot Power Offset (dB): The power offset to be subtracted from the power defined in the Preamble Power (dBm)
field to determine the transmission power of the pilot subcarriers during the loaded part of the frame.
Idle Pilot Power Offset (dB): The power offset to be subtracted from the power defined in the Preamble Power
(dBm) field to determine the transmission power of the pilot subcarriers during the empty part of the frame.
If the cells transmitter has a smart antenna equipment assigned, the transmission power of cell increases by
10 Log ( n ) (in dB), where n is the number of antenna elements of the smart antenna. This gain in the transmis-
sion power is referred to as the power combination gain.
Frequency Band: The cells frequency band from the Frequency Band list.
Channel Number: The number of the channel from the list of available channels.
UL Traffic Load (%): The uplink traffic load percentage. By default, the uplink traffic load is set to 100%.
DL Traffic Load (%): The downlink traffic load percentage. By default, the downlink traffic load is set to 100%.
WiMAX Equipment: You can select the cells reception equipment from the WiMAX Equipment list. For more
information, see "Defining WiMAX Reception Equipment" on page 735. The cells reception equipment parame-
ters are used in the uplink calculations.
Max Number of Users: The maximum number of simultaneous users supported by the cell.
UL Noise Rise (dB): The uplink noise rise in dB. By default, the uplink noise rise is set to 0.
Note: You can set the values for uplink and downlink traffic loads, and the uplink noise rise manu-
ally to actual network values, or use the values computed during Monte Carlo simulations.
Monte Carlo simulation results can be stored in the cells by clicking the Commit Results
button in the simulation results dialogue.
AAS Simulation Results: This field stores the simulation results generated for transmitters using a smart
antenna. During the Monte Carlo simulations, the Adaptive Antenna System algorithm used in A9155 WiMAX
BWA module performs beamforming in downlink, and uses the MMSE (Minimum Mean Square Error) algorithm
in uplink for cancelling inteference. After the simulations, you can store these results for all the cells. The results
stored in this field are the angular distributions of the downlink traffic power spectral density and the uplink noise
rise. You can view these patterns in the Cells table.
AAS Usage (DL) (%): You can set the percentage of the total downlink traffic load that corresponds to the traffic
loads of the users supported by the smart antenna equipment. For example, if the downlink traffic load is 80%,
and you set the AAS usage to 50%, it means that 40% of the downlink traffic load is supported by the smart
antenna equipment while the other 40% is supported by the main antenna. You can set the value of segmentation
usage manually or store a calculated value from simulation results.
AMS Threshold (dB): The C/(I+N) threshold for switching from spatial multiplexing to space-time transmit diver-
sity as the C/(I+N) conditions get worse than a given threshold. For more information on Adaptive MIMO switching,
see "Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems" on page 738.
The following parameters are only available in WiMAX 802.16d documents.
Antenna Diversity Support: The type of antenna diversity technique supported by the cell. You can select
Standard, AAS, STTD, SM, AMS, Standard+AAS, Standard+STTD, Standard+SM, or Standard+AMS. Spe-
cific calculations will be performed (gains will be applied) for terminals supporting corresponding antenna diversity
techniques (AAS or MIMO). A cell that supports only Standard does not have any antenna diversity mechanism,
and only the users with simple (neither AAS nor MIMO) terminals can connect to this cell. A cell that supports
Standard+an antenna diversity technique can carry traffic using terminals capable of that diversity technique. For
example, Standard+AAS can support ordinary as well as AAS-capable terminals, and Standard+STTD/SM/AMS
can support ordinary and MIMO-capable terminals. Ordinary terminals cannot connect to a cell that does not sup-
port Standard.
The following parameters are only available in WiMAX 802.16e documents.
Frame Configuration: The cells frame configuration selected from the list. For more information on frame con-
figurations, see "Defining Frame Configurations" on page 733.
Preamble Index: A preamble index for the cell. It is an integer value from 0 to 113. The preamble indices are
defined in the IEEE 802.16 specifications. They provide the segment number and IDCell (DL_PermBase for the
first permutation zone of the frame) which is referred to as Cell PermBase in A9155 to avoid ambiguity with cell
ID which is the name of a cell in A9155.
Segmentation Usage (DL) (%): You can set the percentage of the total downlink traffic load that corresponds to
the segmented part of the frame. For example, if the downlink traffic load is 80%, and you set the segmentation
usage to 50%, it means that 40% of the downlink traffic load is on the segmented part of the frame while the other
40% is on the non-segmented part. You can set the value of segmentation usage manually or store a calculated
value from simulation results.
To see examples of how to setup cells with and without segmentation, and how to setup cells with PUSC, FUSC,
and permutation zones of other subchannel allocation modes, see "Tips and Tricks" on page 741.
Neighbours: You can access a dialogue in which you can set both intra-technology and inter-technology neigh-
bours by clicking the Browse button ( ). For information on defining neighbours, see "Planning Neighbours"
on page 706.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 667

A9155 User Manual

"Creating or Modifying a Cell" on page 669

page 664).
4. Click OK.

Figure 9.2).
Tips:
668 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


Description" on page 666, through the Properties dialogue of the transmitter where the cell is located. How you access
the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new cell or modifying an existing cell.
appears.
6. Modify the parameters described in "Cell Description" on page 666.
7. Click OK.
9.1.1.3 Placing a New Base Station Using a Station Template

In A9155, a base station is defined as a site with one or more transmitters sharing the same properties. With A9155, you
can create a network by placing base stations based on station templates. This allows you to build your network quickly
with consistent parameters, instead of building the network by first creating the site, then the transmitters, and finally by
adding the cells.
2. Click the New Base Station button ( ) in the Radio toolbar.

3. In the map window, move the pointer over the map to where you would like to place the new base station. The
exact coordinates of the pointers current location are visible in the Status bar.
4. Click to place the base station.
Tips:
To place the base station more accurately, you can zoom in on the map before you click the New
Station button. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on
page 38.
If you let the pointer rest over the base station you have placed, A9155 displays its tip text with
its exact coordinates, allowing you to verify that the location is correct.
You can also place a series of base stations using a station template. You do this by defining an area on the map where
you want to place the base stations. A9155 calculates the placement of each base station according to the defined hexag-
onal cell radius in the station template. For information on defining the cell radius, see "Creating or Modifying a Station
To place a series of base stations within a defined area:
2. Click the Hexagonal Design button ( ), to the left of the template list. A hexagonal design is a group of base
stations created from the same station template.
3. Draw a zone delimiting the area where you want to place the series of base stations:
A9155 fills the delimited zone with new base stations and their hexagonal shapes. Base station objects such as
sites and transmitters are also created and placed into their respective folders.
You can work with the sites and transmitters in these base stations as you work with any base station object, adding, for
example, another antenna to a transmitter.
When you place a new station using a station template as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station
Template" on page 669, the site is created at the same time as the station. However, you can also place a new station on
an existing site.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 669

A9155 User Manual
To place a base station on an existing site:

3. Click the New Base Station button ( ) in the Radio toolbar.

place the station.

A9155 comes with WiMAX station templates, but you can also create and modify station templates. The tools for working

Name of the station template, the number of Sectors, each with a transmitter, and the Hexagon Radius, i.e., the
theoretical radius of the hexagonal area covered by this base sector.
670 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Under Antennas, you can modify the following: the Height/Ground of the antennas from the ground (i.e., the
height over the DTM; if the transmitter is situated on a building, the height entered must include the height of
building), the main antenna Model, 1st Sector Azimuth, from which the azimuth of the other sectors are offset
to offer complete coverage of the area, the Mechanical Downtilt, and the Additional Electrical Downtilt for
the antennas.
Under Smart Antenna, you can select the smart antenna Equipment used by the transmitter, and under
Number of MIMO Antennas, you can enter the number of antennas used for Transmission and for Recep-
tion for MIMO.
5. Click the Transmitter tab. In this tab (see Figure 9.6), if the Active check box is selected, you can modify the fol-
lowing:
- Under Transmission/Reception, you can click the Equipment button to open the Equipment Specifica-
page 664.
The information in the computed Total Losses in transmission and reception boxes is calculated from the in-
formation you entered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue (see Figure 9.3 on page 666). A9155 al-
ways considers the values in the Real boxes in coverage predictions even if they are different from the values
in the Computed boxes. You can modify the real Total Losses at transmission and reception if you wish. Any
value you enter must be positive.
The information in the computed Total Noise Figure reception box is calculated from the information you en-
tered in the Equipment Specifications dialogue. You can modify the real Total Noise Figure at reception if
you wish. Any value you enter must be positive.
6. Click the WiMAX tab. In this tab (see Figure 9.7), you can modify the following:
- Under Powers, you can modify the Preamble Power, and the power offsets for the data and pilot subcarriers
in Traffic Power Offset, Pilot Power Offset, and Idle Pilot Power Offset.
- Frequency Band, Channel Number, WiMAX Equipment, and Max Number of Users.
- Under Default Loads, you can enter the default values for DL Traffic Load, UL Traffic Load, and UL Noise
Rise.
Figure 9.7: Station Template Properties dialogue WiMAX tab (common)
Apart from the above parameters, you can also modify in the WiMAX tab,
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 671

A9155 User Manual
For WiMAX 802.16d documents:
- Under Antenna Diversity, you can select the type of antenna diversity mode supported by the transmitter.
Diversity Support can be Standard, AAS, STTD, SM, AMS, Standard+AAS, Standard+STTD,
Standard+SM, or Standard+AMS.
You can also enter the AMS Threshold, and the DL AAS Usage ratio.
Figure 9.8: Station Template Properties dialogue WiMAX tab (WiMAX 802.16d)
For WiMAX 802.16e documents:
- Under Antenna Diversity, you can enter the AMS Threshold, and the DL AAS Usage ratio.
- Under WiMAX 802.16e, you can select a Frame Configuration, and define a Preamble Index and the DL
Segmentation Usage ratio.
- Under Max Number of Neighbours, you can set the maximum numbers of Intra-technology and Inter-tech-
nology neighbours.
Figure 9.9: Station Template Properties dialogue WiMAX tab (WiMAX 802.16e)
your changes.

ii. Enter a Name for the new field.
iii. For Type, you can select from Text, Short integer, Long integer, Single, Double, True/False, Date/
after each one.
iv. Enter, if desired, a Default value for the new field.
v. Click OK to close the Field Definition dialogue and save your changes.
close the dialogue.
672 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


6. Click OK.

deleted.
4. Click OK.

You can create base stations individually as explained in "Creating a WiMAX Base Station" on page 664, or you can create
one or several base stations by using station templates as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using a Station
Template" on page 669. However, if you have a large project and you already have existing data, you can import this data
into your current A9155 document and create a group of base stations.
page 84.

data into.
Importing data: If you have base station data in text or comma-separated value (CSV) format, you can import it
into the tables in the current document. If the data is in another A9155 document, you can first export it in text or
CSV format and then import it into the tables of your current A9155 document. When you are importing, A9155
allows you to select what values you import into which columns of the table.
Design tool on the Radio toolbar. For information, see "Placing a New Base Station Using
a Station Template" on page 669.

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 673

A9155 User Manual


A9155 allows to you to display information about base stations in a number of ways. This enables you not only to display
selected information, but also to distinguish base stations at a glance.
always be visible; too much information in the label will make it harder to distinguish the information you are looking
for. For information on defining the label, see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 35.
transmitters. You can also define the display type for transmitters as "Automatic." A9155 then automatically
assigns a colour to each transmitter, ensuring that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters
surrounding it. For information on defining the transmitter colour, see "Defining the Display Type" on page 34.
9.1.5 Creating a Multi-Band WiMAX Network

In A9155, you can model a multi-band WiMAX network, for example, a network consisting of 3.3 GHz, 5.8 GHz, and
2.5 GHz cells, in one document. Creating a multi-band WiMAX network consists of the following steps:
1. Defining the frequency bands in the document (see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 731).
in A9155").
page 664 and "Cell Description" on page 666).
4. Assigning a frequency band to each cell and a relevant propagation model to each transmitter (see "Creating or
Modifying a Cell" on page 669 and "Creating or Modifying a Transmitter" on page 668).

to the base stations that you are interested in and generate only the results you need.
In A9155, there are two ways of restricting the number of base stations covered by a coverage prediction, each with its
own advantages:
Filtering the desired base stations
You can simplify the selection of base stations to be studied by using a filter. You can filter base stations according
to one or more fields, or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. You can
create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon. For information
on graphic filters, see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 74. This enables you to keep only the base
stations with the characteristics you want for your calculations.

Drawing a computation zone to encompass the base stations to be studied limits the number of base stations to
be calculated, which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations. In a smaller project, the time savings may
not be significant. In a larger project, especially when you are making repeated calculations in order to see the
effects of small changes in the base station configuration, the savings in time is considerable. Limiting the number
of base stations by drawing a computation zone also limits the resulting calculated coverage.
674 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus zone or hot spot zones. The computation zone
defines the area where A9155 computes path loss matrices, coverage predictions, Monte Carlo, power control
simulations, etc., while the focus zone or hot spot zones are the areas taken into consideration when generating
reports and results.
studied.

As you create a base station, you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. Coverage predictions on
groups of base stations can take a large amount of time and consume a lot of computer resources. Restricting your cover-
age prediction to the base station you are currently working on allows you get the results quickly. You can expand your
coverage prediction to a number of base stations once you have optimised the settings for each individual base station.
Before studying a base station, you must assign a propagation model. The propagation model takes the radio and
geographic data into account and computes propagation losses along the transmitter-receiver path. This allows you to
predict the received signal level at any given point. Any coverage prediction you make on a base station uses the propa-
gation model to calculate its results.
"Making a Point Analysis to Study the Profile" on page 675.

In A9155, you can make a point analysis to study reception along a profile between a reference transmitter and a user.
The profile is calculated in real time, using the propagation model, allowing you to study the profile without calculating the
path loss matrices.
In A9155, you can assign a propagation model to all transmitters at once, to a group of transmitters, or to a single trans-
mitter. A9155 selects the propagation model to be used as follows:
Predictions folder: The propagation model set on the Predictions tab of the Properties dialogue of the Predic-
tions folder is considered as the default main propagation model, and is used for calculations performed on trans-
mitters that do not have a main propagation model set.
Transmitters folder or subfolder: If set, the main and extended propagation models set on the Propagation tab
of the Properties dialogue of the Transmitters folder are considered in calculations in priority over the default
propagation model defined in the Predictions folder.
Individual transmitters: Main and extended propagation models can be set for each individual transmitter on the
Propagation tab of the Properties dialogue of each transmitter. These propagation models have priority over the
default propagation model defined in the Predictions folder properties.
Note: If you select a different main propagation model for an individual transmitter, no main prop-
agation model is displayed on the Propagation tab of the Properties dialogue of the Trans-
mitters folder. If you select a main propagation model on the Propagation tab of the
Properties dialogue again, you will clear any changes made to individual transmitters.

"Making a Point Analysis" on page 677.
For more information about the available propagation models, see "Chapter 4: Managing Calculations in A9155".

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 675

A9155 User Manual



selected group.

- Main Resolution
ters.
When you assign a main and extended propagation model to a single transmitter, it overrides any changes you have previ-
ously made globally.
appears.
- Select a Propagation Model.
676 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


Note: You can also define the propagation models for a transmitter by right-clicking it in the map
window and selecting Properties from the context menu.
Making a Point Analysis
Once you have defined a propagation model as explained in "Chapter 4: Managing Calculations in A9155", you can make
a point analysis to:
study the reception in real time along a profile between a reference transmitter and a WiMAX user, and
evaluate the signal levels coming from the surrounding transmitters at a given point (using existing path loss
matrices).
lowing:
The profile analysis appears in the Profile tab of the Point Analysis Tool window. The altitude is reported on the
vertical axis and the receiver-transmitter distance on the horizontal axis. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone
between the transmitter and the receiver, with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS). A9155 displays the
angle of the LOS read from the vertical antenna pattern. Along the profile, if the signal meets an obstacle, this
causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a red vertical line (if the propagation model used takes diffraction
mechanisms into account). The main peak is the one that intersects the most with the Fresnel ellipsoid. With some
propagation models using a 3 knife-edge Deygout diffraction method, the results may display two additional atten-
uations peaks. The total attenuation is displayed above the main peak.

the context menu on all tabs of the Point Analysis Tool window. You can:
- Select Signal Level, Path loss, or Total losses from the Result Type list.
class.
Model details are only available for the Standard Propagation Model.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 677

A9155 User Manual
You can select a different transmitter and Displays data, including received signal, shadowing margin,
choose to display a profile only with a selected propagation model used, and transmitter-receiver distance.
carrier.
Fresnel ellipsoid Line of sight Attenuation with diffraction
6. To end the point analysis, click the Point Analysis Tool ( ) in the Radio toolbar again.

by the current filter parameters), and whose propagation zone intersects the rectangle containing the computation zone.
Site 130 is within the coverage zone but has no active transmitters. Therefore, it will not be taken into consideration either.
678 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

prediction.
This section explains how to calculate the signal level coverage of a single base station. A signal level coverage prediction
displays the signal of the best server for each pixel of the area studied.
Note: You can use the same procedure to study the signal level coverage of several base stations
by grouping the transmitters. For information on grouping transmitters, see "Grouping Data


mitters.
and you can obtain more accurate results by using propagation models best suited for the main and extended
matrices.
g. Close the table.
The Study Types dialogue lists the coverage prediction types available. They are divided into Standard Studies,
supplied with A9155, and Customized Studies. Unless you have already created some customized studies, the
Customized Studies list will be empty.

Display Resolution
Prediction
City Centre 5m
City 20 m
County 50 m
State 100 m
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 679

A9155 User Manual
- At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the signal level range to be considered.
- Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. Selecting "All" or "Best signal level" will give you the
same results because A9155 displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best signal
level" necessitates, however, a longer time for calculation.
When you select "Best signal level" or "Second best signal level," you can also define a Margin that A9155
will take into consideration.
Probability.
class.
- Under Field, select "Best signal level."
( ).

"Path Loss Matrices" on page 681.
"The Calculation Process" on page 682.
"Creating a Computation Zone" on page 682.
"Setting Transmitters as Active" on page 683.
"Signal Level Coverage Predictions" on page 683.
"WiMAX-Specific Coverage Predictions" on page 695.
680 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


Path loss is caused by objects in the transmitter-receiver path. In A9155, the path loss matrices must be calculated before
predictions and simulations can be made.
radio-planning project. In this case, the radio data is stored in a database and the path loss matrices are read-only and are
stored in a location accessible to all users. When the user changes his radio data and recalculates the path loss matrices,
the calculated changes to the path loss matrices are stored locally; the common path loss matrices are not modified. These
will be recalculated by the administrator taking into consideration the changes to radio data made by all users. For more
information on working in a multi-user environment, see the Administrator Manual.
One file per transmitter with the extension LOS for its main path loss matrix.
will be stored locally.

culations are performed. In order to keep consistency between the A9155 document and the
stored calculations, you should save the A9155 document before closing it if you have
updated the path loss matrices.
database and the path loss matrices are stored in a directory that is accessible to all users. Any changes you
make will not be saved to this directory; they will be saved in the location indicated in Private Directory. The
path loss matrices in the shared directory are updated by a user with administrator rights based on the updated
information in the database. For more information on shared directories, see the Administrator Manual.
5. Click OK.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 681

A9155 User Manual
are recalculated.


You can also create a computation zone with one of the following methods:
page 71.
682 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

9.1.8.4 Setting Transmitters as Active

When you make a coverage prediction, A9155 considers all base stations that are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected
Therefore, before you define a coverage prediction, you must ensure that all the transmitters on the base stations you wish
to study have been activated. In the Explorer window, active transmitters are indicated with a red icon ( ) in the Trans-
mitters folder and inactive transmitters are indicated with a white icon ( ).
by activating them from the Transmitters context menu.
To set more than one transmitter as active:
4. In the Active column, select the check box ( ) corresponding to each transmitter you want to set as active.
the distributed calculation server application on other workstations or on servers. Once the distributed calculation server
application is installed on a workstation or server, the computer is available for distributed path loss calculation to other
computers on the network. For information on setting up the distributed calculation server application, see The Adminis-
trator Manual.

A9155 offers a series of standard coverage predictions based on the measured signal level of each pixel; other factors,
such as interference, are not taken into consideration. Coverage predictions specific to WiMAX are covered in "WiMAX-
Specific Coverage Predictions" on page 695.
the coverage prediction into a template (which will appear under the heading Customized Studies in the Study Types
dialogue. You can also select Duplicate from the coverage predictions context menu to create a copy. By duplicating an
existing prediction that has the parameters you wish to study, you can create a new coverage prediction more quickly. If
you clone a coverage prediction, by selecting Clone from the context menu, you can create a copy of the prediction with
the calculated coverage. You can then change the display, providing that the selected parameter does not invalidate the
calculated coverage prediction.

A coverage prediction by signal level allows you to predict coverage zones by the transmitter signal strength at each pixel.
You can base the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 683

A9155 User Manual
On the General tab, you can change the default Name and Resolution of the coverage prediction, and add some
Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which sites to study. For information on filter-
ing, see "Filtering Data" on page 66.
for each pixel.
- At the top of the Condition tab, you can set the range of signal level to be considered.
- Under Server, select "All" to consider all servers. Selecting "All" or "Best signal level" will give you the same
results because A9155 displays the results of the best server in either case. Selecting "Best signal level"
necessitates, however, the longest time for calculation.
ability.
class.

If you choose to display the results by best signal level, the coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresh-
olds. If you choose to display the results by signal level, the coverage prediction results will be arranged according
to transmitter. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
Figure 9.15).
684 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


A coverage prediction by transmitter allows the user to predict coverage zones by transmitter at each pixel. You can base
the coverage on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a defined range.
for each pixel.
ability.
class.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 685

A9155 User Manual

Figure 9.17).
Figure 9.17: Coverage prediction by transmitter

ters. You can base a coverage prediction on overlapping zones on the signal level, path loss, or total losses within a
defined range.
686 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


for each pixel.
ability.
class.

Figure 9.19).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 687

A9155 User Manual
Figure 9.19: Coverage prediction on overlapping zones

Once you have performed a coverage prediction study, you can analyse the results with the tools that A9155 provides.
You can select which coverage predictions to display or to hide by selecting or clearing the display check box. For infor-
mation on managing the display, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 28.
"Displaying the Legend Window" on page 688.
"Displaying Coverage Prediction Results Using Tooltips" on page 688.
"Using the Point Analysis Reception Tab" on page 689.
"Creating a Focus or Hot Spot Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 689.
"Displaying a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 690.
"Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistics" on page 691.


688 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


appears.
4. To end the point analysis, click the Point Analysis Tool ( ) in the Radio toolbar again.
area where A9155 computes path loss matrices, coverage predictions, Monte Carlo, power control simulations, etc., while
the focus and hot spot zones are the areas taken into consideration when generating reports and results. When you create
a coverage prediction report, it gives the results for the focus zone and for each of the defined hot spot zones.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 689

A9155 User Manual

Notes:

erties dialogue.
use the computation zone. However, by using a focus zone or hot spot zones for the report, you can create a report for a
specific number of base stations, instead of creating a report for every base station that has been calculated.
The focus zone or hot spot zones must be defined before you display a report; it is not necessary to define them before
computing the coverage. For information on defining a focus zone or hot spot zones, see "Creating a Focus or Hot Spot
Zone for a Coverage Prediction Report" on page 689.
4. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The prediction report table appears. The report is based on the
hot spot zones and on the focus zone if available or on the hot spot zones and computation zone if there is no
focus zone.
3. Select Generate Report from the context menu. The prediction report table appears. The report shows all dis-
played coverage predictions in the same order as in the Predictions folder. The report is based on the hot spot
zones and on the focus zone if available or on the hot spot zones and computation zone if there is no focus zone.
tion map:
5. Click OK.
690 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: If an environment traffic map exists in the project, you can display the report by the ratio of
covered environment classes.
value data (revenue, number of customers, etc.) or density data (revenue/km, number of customers/km, etc.). Data is

tation zone. However, by using a focus zone, you can display the statistics for a specific number of base stations, instead
of displaying statistics for every base station that has been calculated. Hot spot zones are not taken into consideration
when displaying statistics.
page 689.

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 691

A9155 User Manual
by both coverage predictions are displayed in red).
colour (for example, pixels covered by both predictions are red, pixels covered only by the first prediction only are
green, and pixels covered only by the second prediction are blue).
5. Calculate the duplicate coverage prediction.
erage between them.
figure.
A new base station is added, either by creating the base station and adding the transmitters, as explained in "Creating a
WiMAX Base Station" on page 664, or by placing a station template, as explained in "Placing a New Base Station Using
a Station Template" on page 669. Once the new site has been added, the original coverage prediction can be recalculated,
but then it will be impossible to compare the two predictions. Instead, the original signal level coverage prediction can be
copied by selecting Duplicate from its context menu. The copy is then calculated to show the effect of the new base station
(see Figure 9.24).
692 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their names and
resolutions.
- Intersection
- Union
- Difference
new base station.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 693

A9155 User Manual

impossible to compare the two predictions. Instead, the original coverage prediction can be copied by selecting Duplicate
from its context menu. The copy is then calculated, to show how modifying the antenna tilt has affected coverage (see
Figure 9.27).
694 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

in coverage, you can compare the two predictions.
The General tab contains information about the coverage predictions being compared, including their names and
resolutions.
- Intersection
- Union
- Difference
covered by both predictions in one colour and all pixels covered by only one prediction in another colour. The
9.1.8.7 WiMAX-Specific Coverage Predictions

In WiMAX, the quality of the signal and the size of the area that can be covered are influenced by network loads. As the
network load increases, the area a cell can effectively cover decreases. For this reason, network loads must be defined in
order to calculate WiMAX-specific coverage predictions.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 695

A9155 User Manual
A9155 offers a series of WiMAX coverage predictions which are based on the measured signal level from the best server
and the measured signal levels from other cells (interference) at each pixel, i.e., carrier-to-interference-and-noise ratio, or
C/(I+N).
The downlink interference experienced from different cells of the network is weighted by their respective downlink traffic
loads. The measure of uplink interference for each cell is provided by the uplink noise rise.
If you have traffic maps, you can do a Monte Carlo simulation to determine the downlink traffic loads and the uplink noise
rise values for a generated user distribution. If you do not have traffic maps, A9155 can calculate the WiMAX-specific
coverage predictions using the downlink traffic loads and the uplink noise rise values defined for each cell.
In this section, the WiMAX-specific coverage predictions will be calculated using downlink traffic loads and the uplink noise
rise values defined at the cell level. For the purposes of these coverage predictions, each pixel is considered a non-inter-
fering user with a defined service, mobility type, and terminal.
Before making a prediction, you will have to set the downlink traffic loads and the uplink noise rise and the parameters that
define the services and users. These are explained in the following sections:
"Setting the Traffic Loads and the UL Noise Rise" on page 696.
Several different types of WiMAX-specific coverage predictions are explained in this section. The following quality studies
are explained:
"Making a Coverage by C/(I+N) Level" on page 698.
"Making a Coverage by Best Bearer" on page 700.
"Making a Coverage by Channel Throughput" on page 702.
9.1.8.7.1 Setting the Traffic Loads and the UL Noise Rise

If you are setting the traffic loads and the uplink noise rise for a single transmitter, you can set these parameters on the
Cells tab of the transmitters Properties dialogue. However, you can set the traffic loads and the uplink noise rise for all
cells using the Cells table.
To set the traffic loads and the uplink noise rise using the Cells table:
- DL Traffic Load (%)
- UL Traffic Load (%)
- UL Noise Rise (dB)
- AAS Usage (DL) (%)
- Segmentation Usage (DL) (%) (WiMAX 802.16e)
For a definition of the values, see "Cell Description" on page 666.

A9155 can base its quality studies on the UL and DL traffic load and on the UL noise rise entered in the Cells table (for
more information, see "Setting the Traffic Loads and the UL Noise Rise" on page 696). Before you can model services,
you must define WiMAX radio bearers. For more information on WiMAX radio bearers, see "Defining WiMAX Radio Bear-
ers" on page 734.
"Modelling Services" on page 696.
"Modelling Mobility Types" on page 697.
Modelling Services
Services are the various services available to users. These services can be either voice or data type services. This section
explains how to create a service. The following parameters are used in predictions:
Throughput scaling factor
Throughput offset
Body loss
696 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the WiMAX Parameters folder.
5. You can edit the fields on the General tab to define the new service. Some fields depend on the type of service
you choose. You can change the following parameters.
- Name: A9155 proposes a name for the new service, but you can set a more descriptive name.
- Type: You can select either Voice or Data as the service type.
- QoS Class: Select a QoS class for the service. You have the option to choose from UGS (Unsolicited Grant
Service), rtPS (Real-Time Polling Service), ErtPS (Extended Real-Time Polling Service), nrtPS (Non-Real-
Time Polling Service), and BE (Best Effort).
- Activity Factor: The uplink and downlink activity factors are used to determine the probability of activity for
users accessing a voice type service during Monte Carlo simulations.
- Highest Bearer: Select the highest bearer that the service can use in the uplink and downlink. This is consid-
ered as an upper limit during bearer determination.
- Max Throughput Demand: Enter the highest throughput that the service can demand in the uplink and down-
link. This value is not considered for services UGS as the quality of service.
- Min. Throughput Demand: Enter the minimum required throughput that the service should have in order to
be available in the uplink and downlink. This value is not considered for BE services.
- Average Requested Throughput: Enter the average requested throughput for uplink and downlink. The
average requested throughput is used in a simulation during user distribution generation in order to calculate
the number of users attempting a connection.
- Application Throughput: Under Application Throughput, you can set a Scaling Factor between the appli-
cation throughput and the RLC (Radio Link Control) throughput and a throughput Offset. These parameters
model the header information and other supplementary data that does not appear at the application level.
example, in a voice connection the body loss, due to the proximity of the users head, is estimated to be 3 dB.
6. Click OK.
The application throughput parameters are used in throughput coverage predictions and for application throughput calcu-
lation.
Modelling Mobility Types
In WiMAX, information about the receiver mobility is required for determining which bearer selection threshold and quality
graph to use from the reception equipment referred to in the terminal. Mobiles used at high speeds and at walking speeds
do not have the same quality characteristics. C/(I+N) requirements for different radio bearers are largely dependent on
mobile speed.
- Name: Enter a descriptive name for the mobility type.
- Average Speed: Enter an average speed for the mobility type. This field is for information only; the average
speed is not used by any calculation.
6. Click OK.
Modelling Terminals
In WiMAX, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone, a PDA, or a cars
on-board navigation device.
Antenna
Reception equipment
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 697

A9155 User Manual

Gain and losses
Noise figure
Type of antenna diversity supported
Number of transmission and reception antennas for MIMO
Terminals folder and selecting Properties from the context menu.
5. You can enter or modify the following parameters in the Terminals New Element Properties dialogue:
- Name: Enter a descriptive name for the terminal.
- Under Transmission/Reception,
- Min Power: Enter the minimum transmission power of the terminal.
- Max Power: Enter the maximum transmission power of the terminal.
- Noise Figure: Enter the noise figure of the terminal (used to calculate the downlink total noise).
- Losses: Enter the losses of the terminal.
- Reception Equipment: Select a reception equipment from the list of available WiMAX equipment. For
more information on WiMAX equipment, see "Defining WiMAX Reception Equipment" on page 735. The
terminals reception equipment parameters are used in the downlink calculations.
- Under Antenna,
- Model: Select an antenna model from the list of available antennas. If you do not select an antenna for
the terminal, A9155 uses an isotropic antenna in calculations.
Note: Keep in mind that in case you do not select an antenna, A9155 uses an isotropic antenna,
not an omni-directional antenna, in calculations. An isotropic antenna has spherical radia-
tion patterns in the horizontal as well as vertical planes.
- Gain: Enter the terminal antenna gain if you have not selected an antenna model in the Model field. If you
have selected an antenna, the Gain field is disabled and shows the gain of the selected antenna.
- Antenna Diversity Support: Select the type of antenna diversity technique supported by the terminal.
Terminals capable of a certain antenna diversity (AAS or MIMO) will be allocated to cells (permutation
zones in WiMAX 802.16e) that support the same type of antenna diversity.
- Number of Transmission Antennas: Under MIMO, enter the number of antennas used by the terminal
in transmission.
- Number of Reception Antennas: Under MIMO, enter the number of antennas used by the terminal in
reception.
6. Click OK.

In A9155, you can make several coverage predictions to study the network quality. In this section, the following quality
predictions are explained:
"Making a Coverage by C/(I+N) Level" on page 698.
"Making a Coverage by Best Bearer" on page 700.
"Making a Coverage by Channel Throughput" on page 702.
Making a Coverage by C/(I+N) Level
Downlink and uplink coverage predictions by C/(I+N) level predict the interference levels and signal quality levels in the
part of the network being studied.
A9155 calculates the best server for each pixel depending on the downlink signal level. Then, depending on the prediction
definition, it calculates the interference from other cells, and finally calculates the C/(I+N). The pixel is coloured if the
display threshold condition is fulfilled (in other words, if the C/(I+N) is higher than C/(+N) threshold).
Coverage prediction by C/(I+N) level computes the co-channel interference as well as the adjacent channel interference,
which is reduced by the adjacent channel suppression factor defined in the Frequency Bands table. For more information
on frequency bands, see "Defining Frequency Bands" on page 731.
To make a coverage prediction by C/(I+N) level:
4. Select Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (DL) or Coverage by C/(I+N) Level (UL) and click OK.
698 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


Comments. Under Configuration, you can create a Filter to select which base stations to study. For information
on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 66.

On the condition tab, you can select a Terminal, a Mobility type, and a Service. The C/(I+N) coverage prediction
is always a best server coverage prediction. The Noise Figure defined in the terminal types properties dialogue is
used in the coverage prediction to determine the total noise in the downlink, and the Noise Figure of the transmitter
is used to determine the total noise in the uplink.
For more information on services, terminals, mobility types, and WiMAX equipment, see "Modelling Services" on
page 696, "Modelling Terminals" on page 697, "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 697, and "Defining WiMAX
Reception Equipment" on page 735, respectively.
check box and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. The shadowing margin for
C(I+N) calculations is based on the C/I standard deviation.
You can also have the coverage prediction take Indoor Coverage into consideration.
Figure 9.29: Condition settings for a coverage prediction by C/(I+N) level

You can choose between displaying results by C/(I+N) Level or Total Noise (I+N) level. The coverage prediction
results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of
Figure 9.30 and Figure 9.31).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 699

A9155 User Manual
Figure 9.30: Coverage prediction by downlink C/(I+N)
Figure 9.31: Coverage prediction by uplink C/(I+N)
Making a Coverage by Best Bearer
Downlink and uplink best radio bearer coverage predictions calculate and display the best WiMAX radio bearers based on
C(I+N) for each pixel.
To make a coverage prediction by best bearer:
4. Select Coverage by Best Bearer (DL) or Coverage by Best Bearer (UL) and click OK.
700 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

On the Condition tab, you can select a Terminal, a Mobility type, and a Service. The C/(I+N) coverage prediction
is always based on the best server. The Noise Figure defined in the terminal types properties dialogue is used in
the coverage prediction to determine the total noise in the downlink, and the Noise Figure of the transmitter is used
to determine the total noise in the uplink. As well, the bearer selection for each pixel according to the C(I+N) level
is performed using the bearer selection thresholds defined in the reception equipment. This reception equipment
is the one defined in the selected terminal for the downlink coverage predictions, and the one defined in the cell
properties of the serving transmitter for the uplink coverage predictions. Mobility is used to index the bearer selec-
tion threshold graph to use.
Figure 9.32: Condition settings for a coverage prediction on WiMAX bearers

You can display results by Best Bearer. The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For infor-
mation on adjusting the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
9. Click the Calculate button ( ) in the Radio toolbar to calculate the WiMAX bearer coverage prediction. The
Figure 9.33 and Figure 9.34).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 701

A9155 User Manual
Figure 9.33: Coverage prediction by downlink best bearer
Figure 9.34: Coverage prediction by uplink best bearer
Making a Coverage by Channel Throughput
Downlink and uplink channel throughput coverage predictions calculate and display the channel throughputs based on
C(I+N) and bearer calculations for each pixel.
To make a coverage prediction by channel throughput:
4. Select Coverage by Channel Throughput (DL) or Coverage by Channel Throughput (UL) and click OK.
702 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

On the Condition tab, you can select a Terminal, a Mobility type, and a Service. The C/(I+N) coverage prediction
is always based on the best server. The Noise Figure defined in the terminal types Properties dialogue is used
in the coverage prediction to determine the total noise in the downlink, and the Noise Figure of the transmitter is
used to determine the total noise in the uplink. As well, the bearer selection for each pixel according to the C(I+N)
level is performed using the bearer selection thresholds defined in the reception equipment. This reception equip-
ment is the one defined in the selected terminal for the downlink coverage predictions, and the one defined in the
cell properties of the serving transmitter for the uplink coverage predictions. The mobility is used to indicate the
bearer selection threshold graph to use. The service is used for the application throughput parameters defined in
the service Properties dialogue.
Figure 9.35: Condition settings for a throughput coverage prediction

You can choose between displaying results by Peak RLC Throughput, Effective RLC Throughput, or Applica-
tion Throughput. The coverage prediction results will be in the form of thresholds. For information on adjusting
the display, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
A9155 calculates the peak RLC channel throughputs from the information provided in the Global Parameters and in the
terminal and mobility properties for the terminal and mobility selected in the coverage prediction. A9155 determines the
total number of symbols in the downlink and the uplink subframes from the information in the Global Parameters. Then,
A9155 determines the bearer at each pixel and multiplies the bearer efficiency by the number of symbols in the frame to
determine the peak RLC channel throughputs.
The effective RLC channel throughputs are the peak RLC throughputs reduced by retransmission due to errors, or the
Block Error Rate (BLER). A9155 uses the block error rate graphs of the reception equipment defined in the selected termi-
nal or the reception equipment of the cell of the serving transmitter.
The application level throughput is the effective RLC throughput reduced by the overheads of the different layers between
the RLC and the Application layers. For more information on throughput calculation, see the Technical Reference Guide.
For more information on the Global Parameters, see "The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 731.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 703

A9155 User Manual
Figure 9.36: Coverage prediction by downlink channel throughput
Figure 9.37: Coverage prediction by uplink channel throughput

"Printing Coverage Prediction Results" on page 704.
"Defining a Coverage Export Zone" on page 705.

supports printing to a variety of paper sizes, from A0 to A4.
704 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

page 689).

4. Click OK.

raster format.

AGD formats.
3. Select the display check box ( ) beside the coverage prediction you want to export. The coverage prediction is
displayed on the map.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 705

A9155 User Manual


7. Click Save to export the prediction coverage results.
select:
the study,
i. If desired, change the export resolution. The default resolution is the resolution of the prediction coverage
iii. Click Export to finish exporting the prediction coverage results.
Note: When selecting a coordinate system different than the one initially defined in A9155, the
file is converted using the selected coordinate system.

You can set neighbours for each cell manually. When allocating neighbours, the cell to which you are allocating neighbours
is referred to as the reference cell. The cells that fulfil the requirements to be neighbours are referred to as possible neigh-
bours.
neighbours to base stations as you add them.
A9155 supports the following neighbour types in a WiMAX network:
Intra-technology neighbours: Intra-technology neighbours are cells defined as neighbours that also use
WiMAX. Intra-technology neighbour cells perform handover using a different carrier.
other than WiMAX.
"Allocating and Deleting Neighbours per Cell" on page 706.
"Importing Neighbours" on page 708.
"Checking Neighbour Allocation" on page 708.

You can adjust the overall allocation of neighbours by allocating or deleting neighbours per cell. You can allocate or delete
neighbours directly on the map or using the Cells tab of the Transmitter Properties dialogue.
"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Cells Tab of the Transmitter Properties Dialogue" on page 706.
"Allocating or Deleting Neighbours Using the Neighbours Table" on page 707.
To allocate or delete WiMAX neighbours using the Cells tab of the transmitters Properties dialogue:
706 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

4. On the Cells tab, click the Browse button ( ) beside Neighbours in the cell for which you want to allocate or
delete neighbours. The cells Properties dialogue appears.
6. If desired, you can enter the maximum number of neighbours.
( ).
c. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished creating the new neighbour.
9. Click OK.
To allocate or delete WiMAX neighbours using the Neighbours table:

appears.
a. In the row marked with the new row icon ( ), select a reference cell in the Cell column.
d. Click in another cell of the table to create the new neighbour and add a new blank row to the table.
to "1."

6. To make all neighbour relations symmetric, right-click the Neighbours table and select Symmetrise All Neigh-
bour Relations.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 707

A9155 User Manual


appears.
9.1.9.3 Checking Neighbour Allocation

"Displaying Neighbour Relations on the Map" on page 708.

708 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

line.
Figure 9.38: Neighbours of Site 22(0)

bours table.
1. Create, calculate, and display a "Coverage by Transmitter" coverage prediction, with the Display Type set to
"Discrete Values" and the Field set to Transmitter (for information on creating a coverage by transmitter prediction,
see "Making a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter" on page 685).
5. The Intra-technology Neighbour Display dialogue appears.

agement icon ( ).

The neighbour data for an A9155 document is stored in a series of tables. You can export the neighbours data to use it in
3. Select Cells > Neighbours and then select the neighbours table containing the data you want to export from the
context menu:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 709

A9155 User Manual
- Intra-technology Neighbours: This table contains the data for the intra-technology neighbours in the current
A9155 document.

Interference is the major limiting factor in the performance of WiMAX networks. It has been recognized as the major bottle-
neck in network capacity and is often responsible for poor performance. Frequency reuse means that in a given coverage
area there are several cells that use a given set of frequencies. The cells that use the same frequency are called co-chan-
nel cells, and the interference from users with the same channel in the other co-channel cells is called co-channel inter-
ference. Unlike thermal noise which can be overcome by increasing the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), co-channel
interference cannot be countered by simply increasing the carrier power of a transmitter. This is because an increase in
carrier transmission power will increase the interference to neighbouring co-channel cells. To reduce co-channel interfer-
ence, co-channel cells must be physically separated sufficiently by a distance, called the reuse distance. For a network
with a limited number of frequency channels, a large reuse distance can guarantee a high QoS for the system, but the
capacity will be decreased.
Another type of interference in WiMAX networks is adjacent channel interference. Adjacent channel interference results
from imperfect receiver filters which allow nearby frequencies to interfere with the used frequency channel. Adjacent chan-
nel interference can be minimized through careful filtering and channel assignment.
In A9155, a simulation is based on a realistic distribution of users at a given point in time. The distribution of users at a
given moment is referred to as a snapshot. Based on this snapshot, A9155 calculates various network parameters such
as the downlink and uplink traffic loads, the uplink noise rise, the user throughputs, etc. Simulations are calculated in an
iterative fashion.
shot to another.
or subscriber lists must be provided. Once services and users have been modelled and traffic maps and subscriber lists
have been created, you can make simulations of the network traffic.
"Defining Multi-service Traffic Data" on page 710.
"Creating a Traffic Map" on page 710.
"Exporting a Traffic Map" on page 717.
"Subscriber Database" on page 718.
"Calculating and Displaying Traffic Simulations" on page 722.

WiMAX radio bearers: Radio bearers are used by the network for carrying information. The WiMAX Radio
Bearer table lists all the available radio bearers. You can create new radio bearers and modify existing ones by
using the WiMAX Radio Bearer table. For information on defining radio bearers, see "Defining WiMAX Radio
Bearers" on page 734.
Services: Services are the various services, such as VoIP, FTP download, etc., available to users. These services
can be either of the type "voice" or "data". For information on modelling end-user services, see "Modelling Serv-
ices" on page 696.
Mobility type: In WiMAX, information about receiver mobility is important to determine the users channel quality
and throughputs. For information on modelling mobility types, see "Modelling Mobility Types" on page 697.
Terminals: In WiMAX, a terminal is the user equipment that is used in the network, for example, a mobile phone,
a PDA, or a cars on-board navigation device. For information on modelling terminals, see "Modelling Terminals"
on page 697.

The OMC (Operations and Maintenance Centre)
710 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

A9155 provides four types of traffic maps for WiMAX projects. These maps can be used for the different types of traffic
data sources as follows:
demand or the number of users. For more information, see "Live Traffic Data From the OMC" on page 711 and
"Creating a Traffic Map Based on Live Data" on page 711.
each pixel has an environment class assigned. For more information, see "Marketing-Based Traffic Data" on
page 712, "Importing a User Profile-Based Traffic Map" on page 713, and "Importing an Environment Class-Based
user density assigned. For more information, see "Population-Based Traffic Data" on page 716 and "Importing a

the number of active users in each cell and the traffic characteristics related to different services. You can use this data to
create traffic maps containing the number of active users in each cell or the data transfer characteristics of all the services
in each cell.

You can input the total throughput demand or the total number of users for each sector in this type of traffic map. A cover-
age prediction by transmitter is required to create this traffic map. If you do not already have a coverage prediction by trans-
mitter in your document, you must create and calculate it. For more information, see "Making a Coverage Prediction by
Transmitter" on page 685.
(# Users).
import AGD (A9155 Geographic Data) format files that you have exported from another
A9155 document.
- If you are creating a Map based on Transmitters and Services (# Users), enter the number of active users
in the uplink and downlink for each sector and for each listed service.

9. Select the Traffic tab. Enter the following:
a. Under Terminals (%), enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentages
must equal 100.
b. Under Mobilities (%), enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. The total percentages must
equal 100.
c. Under Clutter Distribution, for each clutter class, enter:
- The percentage of indoor users. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during Monte-Carlo
simulations.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 711

A9155 User Manual
live traffic per sector maps if you add or remove a base station. You must first recalculate the coverage prediction by trans-
9.2.2.2 Marketing-Based Traffic Data

A user profile models the behaviour of different user categories. Each user profile is defined by a list of services which are
in turn defined by the terminal used, the calls per hour, and duration (for calls of the type "voice") or uplink and downlink
volume (for calls of the type "data").
Environment classes are used to describe the distribution of users on a map. An environment class describes its environ-
ment using a list of user profiles, each with an associated mobility type and a given density (i.e., the number of users with
the same profile per km).
The sections "Importing a User Profile-Based Traffic Map" on page 713 and "Importing an Environment Class-Based Traf-
"Modelling User Profiles" on page 712.
web browsing.

- Name: Enter a descriptive name for the user profile.
- Calls/Hour: For services of the type "voice," enter the average number of calls per hour for the service. The
calls per hour is used to calculate the activity probability. For services of the type "voice," one call lasting 1000
seconds presents the same activity probability as two calls lasting 500 seconds each.
For services of the type "data," the Calls/Hour value is defined as the number of sessions per hour. A session
stops using a service. In services of the type "data," however, he may not use the service continually. For ex-
not by the time.
712 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Duration (sec.): For services of the type "voice," enter the average duration of a call in seconds. For services
of the type "data," this field is left blank.
- UL Volume (KBytes): For services of the type "data," enter the average uplink volume per session in kilo-
bytes.
- DL Volume (KBytes): For services of the type "data," enter the average downlink volume per session in kil-
obytes.
6. Click OK.
given density (i.e., the number of users with the same profile per km). To get an appropriate user distribution, you can
assign a weight to each clutter class for each environment class. You can also specify the percentage of indoor subscribers
for each clutter class. In a Monte-Carlo simulation, an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be
added to the indoor users path loss.
To create or modify a WiMAX environment:

6. Enter a Name for the new WiMAX environment.
bination that this WiMAX environment will describe:
Wk Sk
N k = N Area --------------------------

Wi Si
i
where:

For example: An area of 10 km with a user density of 100/km. Therefore, in this area, there are 1000 users. The
area is covered by two clutter classes: Open and Building. The clutter weighting for Open is "1" and for Building is
"4." Given the respective weights of each clutter class, 200 subscribers are in the Open clutter class and 800 in
the Building clutter class.
10. If you wish you can specify a percentage of indoor users for each clutter class. During a Monte Carlo simulation,
an additional loss (as defined in the clutter class properties) will be added to the indoor users path loss.
11. Click OK.
9.2.2.2.1 Importing a User Profile-Based Traffic Map

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 713

A9155 User Manual
To import a user profile based traffic map:

the New Traffic Map dialogue. For information, see "Creating an Environment Class-Based

entire map.
select the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a user profile from the WiMAX Param-
eters folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the user profile in the Choice column.
the source field from the Choice column. If you want to assign a mobility type from the WiMAX Parameters
folder of the Data tab, under Defined, select "By value" and select the mobility type in the Choice column.
be exactly the same as the corresponding names in the WiMAX Parameters folder of the
Data tab. If the imported user profile or mobility does not match, A9155 will display a warn-
ing.
Wk Sk
N k = N Area --------------------------

Wi Si
i
714 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

where:

12. If you wish you can specify a percentage of indoor subscribers for each clutter class. During a Monte Carlo simu-
9.2.2.2.2 Importing an Environment Class-Based Traffic Map


the Code column.
The environments available are those available in the Environments folder, under WiMAX Parameters on the
Data tab of the Explorer window. For more information, see "Modelling Environments" on page 713.
on page 33.
13. Click OK.
9.2.2.2.3 Creating an Environment Class-Based Traffic Map

Draw Map Delete Map
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 715

A9155 User Manual
9.2.2.2.4 Displaying Statistics on an Environment Class-Based Traffic Map

appears.
Si
Sk
k
5. Click Close.
clutter class.
9.2.2.3 Population-Based Traffic Data


dialogue.

equal 100.
equal 100.
100.
An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte Carlo simulations. You do not have to define
716 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA


your 2G network packet and circuit service traffic, and then import these maps as traffic density maps into your WiMAX
To import a 2G traffic map into a WiMAX document:
3. Import the traffic exported in step 2 to your WiMAX document as a traffic density map. For more information on

Grid, or Vertical Mapper format. When exporting in BIL format, A9155 allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb. The
exported traffic map can then be imported as a traffic density map.
minal.
traffic.
cumulated traffic.
9.2.3 Exporting a Traffic Map

To export a traffic map:
3. Right-click the traffic map you want to export. The context menu appears.
4. Select Save as from the context menu.
5. Enter a file name and select a file format for the traffic map.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 717

A9155 User Manual
6. Click Save.
For a raster traffic map you have to define:
The Export Region:
- Entire Project Area: Saves the entire traffic map.
- Only Pending Changes: Saves only the modifications made to the map.
- Computation Zone: Saves only the part of the traffic map inside the computation zone.
An export Resolution.
9.2.4 Subscriber Database

The WiMAX BWA module includes a subscriber database for modelling fixed user distributions in a network. A subscriber
database can be used for Fixed Wireless Access (FWA) networks, like the IEEE 802.16d. The subscriber database
consists of subscriber lists. You can create subscriber lists in A9155 by adding subscribers to the list using the mouse, or
by copying data from any other source, such as a spreadsheet. You can also directly import subscriber lists in A9155 from
text (TXT) and comma separated value (CSV) files.
A9155 can allocate reference or serving base stations (cells) to subscribers. You can also have the subscriber antenna
oriented towards its serving cell to decrease interference. The automatic server allocation performs a number of calcula-
tions on the subscriber locations.
"Creating a Subscriber List" on page 718.
"Performing Calculations on Subscriber lists" on page 721.
9.2.4.1 Creating a Subscriber List

You create subscribers in A9155 in two steps. First, you create a subscriber list, and then you add subscribers to the list.
You can add subscribers to the list directly on the map using the mouse. For more information, see "Adding Subscribers
to a Subscriber List Using the Mouse" on page 720.
If you need to create a large number of subscribers, A9155 allows you to import them from another A9155 document or
from an external source. For information, see "Importing a Subscriber List" on page 720.
To create a subscriber list:
2. Right-click the Subscribers folder. The context menu appears.
3. Select New List from the context menu. The Subscriber List N Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 9.41),
where N is an incremental digit.
Figure 9.41: New subscriber list dialogue - General tab
4. Select the General tab.

- You can enter a Name for the subscriber list.
- You can choose a Coordinate System for the subscriber list.
- You can Sort the subscriber list. For information on filtering, see "Sorting Data" on page 64.
- You can create a Filter to select subscribers. For information on filtering, see "Filtering Data" on page 66.
5. Click the Table tab. On the Table tab you can modify the various fields in the subscriber list, add user-defined fields
to the table, or, most importantly, change the default parameters for the fields in the table. These default param-
eters will be assigned to all the subscribers in this list created by using the mouse on the map (see Figure 9.42).
To modify the default values for these fields:
a. Select the field whose default value you want to modify.
b. Click Properties. The Field Definition dialogue appears.
c. Enter the new default value.
d. Click OK.
718 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 9.42: New subscriber list dialogue - Table tab
The following parameters are available by default in a new subscriber list:
- ID: The subscriber ID in the subscriber list. It is an automatically created identification number.
- X and Y coordinates: The geographical coordinates of the subscriber. A subscriber location is always fixed.
- Height: The altitude of the subscriber antenna with respect to the ground (DTM).
- Name: You can assign a descriptive name to each subscriber.
- User Profile: A user profile defines the traffic demand characteristics of subscribers. A9155 determines the
activity status of subscribers during simulations according to the information in the user profiles. For more
information, see "Modelling User Profiles" on page 712.
- Terminal: A terminal (CPE) is the user equipment with an antenna, reception equipment, and noise charac-
teristics.
- Azimuth: The orientation of the subscriber antenna in the horizontal plane. Azimuth is always considered with
respect to the north. You can either define this value manually or let A9155 calculate it for the subscriber.
A9155 points the subscriber antenna towards its serving base station.
- Mechanical Downtilt: The orientation of the subscriber antenna in the vertical plane. Mechanical downtilt is
positive when it is downwards and negative when upwards. You can either define this value manually or let
A9155 calculate it for the subscriber. A9155 points the subscriber antenna towards its serving base station.
- Lock Status: You can choose to lock the subscriber antenna orientation and server. Use this option if you do
not want A9155 to change the assigned server or the antenna orientation.
- Serving Base Station: The serving transmitter of the subscriber. You can either define this value manually
or let A9155 calculate it for the subscriber.
- Reference Cell: The reference cell of the serving transmitter of the subscriber. You can either define this value
manually or let A9155 calculate it for the subscriber.
- Received Power (DL) (dBm): The signal level received at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value
is generated by A9155 during the calculations on subscriber lists.
- Interference + Noise (DL) (dBm): The interference + noise level experienced at the subscriber location in the
downlink. This value is generated by A9155 during the calculations on subscriber lists.
- C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The C/(I+N) at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by A9155
during the calculations on subscriber lists.
- Bearer (DL): The highest WiMAX bearer available for the C/(I+N) level at the subscriber location in the down-
link. This value is generated by A9155 during the calculations on subscriber lists.
- BLER (DL): The Block Error Rate read from the subscribers terminal types reception equipment for the
C(I+N) level at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by A9155 during the calcula-
tions on subscriber lists.
- Peak RLC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The maximum RLC channel throughput attainable using the
highest bearer available at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by A9155 during
the calculations on subscriber lists.
- Effective RLC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The effective RLC channel throughput attainable using the
highest bearer available at the subscriber location in the downlink. This value is generated by A9155 during
the calculations on subscriber lists.
- Received Power (UL) (dBm): The signal level received at the serving transmitter from the subscriber terminal
in the uplink. This value is generated by A9155 during the calculations on subscriber lists.
- Interference + Noise (UL) (dBm): The interference + noise level experienced at the serving transmitter of the
subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by A9155 during the calculations on subscriber lists.
- C/(I+N) (UL) (dB): The C/(I+N) at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is gener-
ated by A9155 during the calculations on subscriber lists.
- Bearer (UL): The highest WiMAX bearer available for the C/(I+N) level at the serving transmitter of the sub-
scriber in the uplink. This value is generated by A9155 during the calculations on subscriber lists.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 719

A9155 User Manual
- BLER (UL): The Block Error Rate read from the reference cells reception equipment for the C/(I+N) level at
the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by A9155 during the calculations
on subscriber lists.
- Transmission Power (UL) (dBm): The transmission power of the subscribers terminal after power control in
the uplink. This value is generated by A9155 during the calculations on subscriber lists.
- Number of Used Subchannels (UL): The number of subchannels being used by the subscriber in the uplink
after subchannelisation. This value is generated by A9155 during the calculations on subscriber lists.
- Peak RLC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The maximum RLC channel throughput attainable using the
highest bearer available at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by
A9155 during the calculations on subscriber lists.
- Effective RLC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The effective RLC channel throughput available using the
highest bearer available at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink. This value is generated by
A9155 during the calculations on subscriber lists.
Note: In A9155, channel throughputs are peak RLC, effective RLC, or application level through-
puts achieved at a given location using the highest WiMAX bearer with the entire channel
resources.
For more information on the calculations that you can carry out on subscriber lists, see "Performing Calculations
on Subscriber lists" on page 721.
6. Click the Display tab. You can modify how subscribers added to the list are displayed. For information on defining
the display properties, see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 33.
7. Click OK. A9155 creates a new subscriber list.
You can now move the pointer over the map and click once to place a new subscriber at the location of the pointer. Press
ESC or click the Selection button ( ), to finish adding subscribers on the map. For information on adding subscribers to
a list, see "Adding Subscribers to a Subscriber List Using the Mouse" on page 720.
You can open the subscriber list table containing all the subscribers and their parameters.
To open the subscriber list table:
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Subscribers folder.
3. Right-click the subscriber list you want to open. The context menu appears.
9.2.4.1.1 Adding Subscribers to a Subscriber List Using the Mouse

You can use the mouse to add subscribers to an existing subscriber list. A9155 applies the default parameters defined in
the Table tab of the subscriber list Properties dialogue to all the subscribers you add to the list. For more information on
the Table tab, see "Creating a Subscriber List" on page 718.
To add subscribers to a subscriber list using the mouse:
3. Right-click the subscriber list to which you want to add subscribers. The context menu appears.
4. Select Add Subscribers from the context menu. The pointer changes to subscriber addition mode ( ).
5. Move the mouse over the Map window, and click once to add each subscriber.
6. Press ESC or click the normal pointer button ( ) to finish adding subscribers.
Tip: To place subscribers more accurately, before clicking the map, you can zoom in on the
map. For information on using the zooming tools, see "Changing the Map Scale" on
page 38.
9.2.4.1.2 Importing a Subscriber List

You can also import subscriber lists from text files (TXT) or comma separated value files (CSV), including Microsoft Excel
files exported in CSV format.
To import a subscriber list:
2. Right-click the Subscribers folder. The context menu appears.
3. Select Import from the context menu.
For more information on importing table data, see "Importing Tables from External Files" on page 56.
720 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Note: You can also export subscriber lists. For information on exporting table data, see "Exporting
Tables to External Files" on page 55.
9.2.4.2 Performing Calculations on Subscriber lists

You can perform calculations on subscriber lists without having to carry out simulations first. A9155 does not base calcu-
lations performed on subscriber lists on the path loss matrices calculated for transmitters. This is because the path loss
matrices are calculated for a given receiver height (1.5 m by default), but each subscriber in a subscriber list can have a
different height. Therefore, A9155 recalculates the path loss, received power, and other output for each subscriber when
you perform calculations based on subscribers.
A9155 includes an Automatic Server Allocation feature which performs the following for all the subscribers in a list:
Azimuth: The orientation of the subscriber antenna in the horizontal plane. Azimuth is always considered with
respect to the North. A9155 calculates this value according to the serving base station if the Lock Status field is
set to either Server or None. A9155 points the subscriber antenna towards its serving base station.
Mechanical Downtilt: The orientation of the subscriber antenna in the vertical plane. Mechanical downtilt is pos-
itive when it is downwards and negative when upwards. A9155 calculates this value according to the serving base
station if the Lock Status field is set to either Server or None. A9155 points the subscriber antenna towards its
serving base station.
Serving Base Station: The serving transmitter of the subscriber. A9155 determines the serving base station for
subscribers whose Lock Status field is set to None.
Reference Cell: The reference cell of the serving transmitter of the subscriber. A9155 determines the reference
cells for subscribers whose Lock Status field is set to None.
Received Power (DL) (dBm): The signal level received at the subscriber location in the downlink.
Interference + Noise (DL) (dBm): The interference + noise level experienced at the subscriber location in the
downlink.
C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The C/(I+N) at the subscriber location in the downlink.
Bearer (DL): The highest WiMAX bearer available for the C/(I+N) level at the subscriber location in the downlink.
Permutation Zone ID (DL) (WiMAX 802.16e): The permutation zone number of the downlink permutation zone
allocated to the subscriber.
BLER (DL): The Block Error Rate read from the subscribers terminal types reception equipment for the C/(I+N)
level at the subscriber location in the downlink.
Peak RLC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The maximum RLC channel throughput attainable using the
highest bearer available at the subscriber location in the downlink.
Effective RLC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The effective RLC channel throughput attainable using the
highest bearer available at the subscriber location in the downlink.
Received Power (UL) (dBm): The signal level received at the serving transmitter from the subscriber terminal in
the uplink.
Interference + Noise (UL) (dBm): The interference + noise level experienced at the serving transmitter of the
subscriber in the uplink.
C/(I+N) (UL) (dB): The C/(I+N) at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink.
Bearer (UL): The highest WiMAX bearer available for the C/(I+N) level at the serving transmitter of the subscriber
in the uplink.
Permutation Zone ID (UL) (WiMAX 802.16e): The permutation zone number of the uplink permutation zone allo-
cated to the subscriber.
BLER (UL): The Block Error Rate read from the reference cells reception equipment for the C/(I+N) level at the
serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink.
Transmission Power (UL) (dBm): The transmission power of the subscribers terminal after power control in the
uplink.
Number of Used Subchannels (UL): The number of subchannels being used by the subscriber in the uplink after
subchannelisation.
Peak RLC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The maximum RLC channel throughput attainable using the
highest bearer available at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink.
Effective RLC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The effective RLC channel throughput attainable using the
highest bearer available at the serving transmitter of the subscriber in the uplink.
Notes:
In A9155, channel throughputs are peak RLC, effective RLC, or application level throughputs
achieved at a given location using the highest WiMAX bearer with the entire channel resources.
To perform calculations on a subscriber list:

3. Right-click the subscriber list on which you want to perform calculations. The context menu appears.
4. Select Calculations > Automatic Server Allocation from the context menu. The Automatic Server Allocation
dialogue appears.
If you want the calculations to consider shadowing, you can select the Shadowing taken into account check box
and enter a percentage in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability text box. The shadowing margin for signal level
calculations is based on the model standard deviation, and the shadowing margin for C/(I+N) calculations is based
on the C/I standard deviation.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 721

A9155 User Manual
5. Click Calculate to start the calculations. The progress of the calculation, as well as any error messages, is dis-
played in the Event Viewer.
6. Once the calculations are finished, click Close to close the Event Viewer.
7. Click Commit to store the results in the subscriber list.

To plan and optimise WiMAX networks, you will need to study the network capacity and to study the network coverage
taking into account realistic user distribution and traffic demand scenarios.
In A9155, a simulation corresponds to a given distribution of WiMAX users. It is a snapshot of a WiMAX network. The
principal outputs of a simulation are a geographic user distribution with a certain traffic demand, resources allocated to
each user of this distribution, and cell traffic loads.
You can create groups for one or more simulations and carry out as many simulations as required. A new simulation for
each different traffic scenario can help visualise the networks response to different traffic demands. Each user distribution
(each simulation generates a new user distribution) is a Poisson distribution of the number of active users. Therefore, each
simulation may have a varying number of users accessing the network.
WiMAX simulation results can be displayed on the map as well as listed in tabular form for analysis. Simulation outputs
are divided into two categories: results related to cells and results related to mobiles.
WiMAX simulation results can be stored in the cells table and used in C/(I+N), bearer, and throughput coverage predic-
tions.
"WiMAX Traffic Simulation Algorithm" on page 722.
"Creating Simulations" on page 723.
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution on the Map" on page 724.
"Displaying the Results of a Single Simulation" on page 728.
"Updating Cell Load Values With Simulation Results" on page 730.
"Estimating a Traffic Increase" on page 730.
9.2.5.1 WiMAX Traffic Simulation Algorithm

The simulation process in WiMAX consists of the following steps:
1. Mobile Generation and Distribution
Simulations require traffic data, such as traffic maps (raster, vector, or live traffic data) or subscriber lists. A9155
generates a user distribution for each simulation using a Monte Carlo algorithm. This user distribution is based on
the traffic data input and is weighted by a Poisson distribution.
Each mobile generated during the simulations is assigned a service, a mobility type, and a terminal according to
the user profile assigned to it. A transmission status is determined according to the connection probabilities. The
transmission status is an important output of the simulation as it has a direct impact on the next step of the simu-
lation process, i.e., the radio resource management (RRM), and has an impact on the interference level in the
network.
The geographical location of each mobile is determined randomly for the mobiles generated based on the traffic
data from traffic maps. The mobiles generated based on the traffic data from subscriber lists are located on the
subscriber locations.
2. Best Server Determination

A9155 determines the best server for each mobile based on the signal level in the downlink.
3. Downlink Calculations
The downlink calculations include the calculation of downlink C/(I+N), determination of the best available bearer
for the C/(I+N), allocation of resources (RRM), and calculation of user throughputs.
Segmentation is performed if the frame configuration, selected for a cell, supports segmentation. Interference
calculation is based on the probabilities of collision between segments. The effect of power concentration is not
considered.
4. Uplink Calculations
The uplink calculations include the calculation of uplink C/(I+N), determination of the best available bearer for the
C/(I+N), uplink power control and subchannelisation depending on the bearer, allocation of resources (RRM),
update of uplink noise rise values for cells, and calculation of user throughputs.
5. Radio Resource Management and Cell Load Calculation

A9155 uses an intelligent scheduling algorithm to perform radio resource management. The scheduling algorithm
is explained in detail in the Technical Reference Guide. The scheduler:
a. Determines the total amount of resources in each cell

b. Selects the first N users from the users generated in the first step, where N is the Max Number of Users de-
fined in the cell properties.
c. Sorts the users in decreasing order by service priority
722 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

d. Allocates the resources required to satisfy the minimum throughput demands of the users starting from the
first user (with the highest priority service) to the last user.
e. If resources still remain in the resource pool after this allocation, divides the resources into as many portions
as the number of users that have a maximum throughput demand.
f. Allocates the same portion to all the users with maximum throughput demands.
g. If a users maximum throughput demand is satisfied with fewer resources than this portion, only allocates the
part of this portion required by the user and stores the rest of the resources in a remaining resource pool.
h. Repeats steps e. through g. until either all the resources have been allocated or all the users throughput de-
mands have been satisfied.
Note: The service priority is determined by the pair QoS Class-Priority. A UGS-Priority 1 service
will have higher service priority than a UGS-Priority 0 service. The QoS classes are UGS,
rtPS, ErtPS, nrtPS, and Best Effort, in order of decreasing priority.
Figure 9.43 shows the WiMAX simulation algorithm.
Figure 9.43: WiMAX simulation algorithm

In A9155, simulations enable you to study the capacity of your WiMAX network and model the different network regulation
mechanisms, such as power control, subchannelisation, and scheduling, in order to optimise network quality and maximise
capacity.
You can create one simulation or a group of simulations that will be performed in sequence. You must have at least one
traffic map or subscriber list in your document to be able to perform simulations.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 723

A9155 User Manual

2. Right-click the WiMAX Simulations folder. The context menu appears.
Note: Execute Later enables you to automatically calculate WiMAX coverage predictions after
simulations with no intermediary step by creating your simulations, creating your predictions
and then clicking the Calculate button ( ).

- Select Subscriber Lists to Be Used: Select the subscriber lists you want to use for the simulation.
Note: When you perform simulations for subscriber lists, A9155 does not base the calculations on
subscriber lists on the path loss matrices calculated for transmitters. This is because the
path loss matrices are calculated for a given receiver height (1.5 m by default), but each
subscriber in a subscriber list can have a different height. Therefore, A9155 recalculates
the path loss, received power, and other output, for each subscriber when you perform sim-
ulations on subscribers.

parameter changes.

gence.
- DL Traffic Load Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of downlink traffic load that
must be reached between two iterations.
- UL Traffic Load Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of uplink traffic load that
must be reached between two iterations.
- UL Noise Rise Convergence Threshold: Enter the relative difference in terms of uplink noise rise that must
be reached between two iterations.
eral tab.
now use the results from completed simulations for WiMAX coverage predictions.

parameters. You can, for example, display the traffic according to activity status, service, reference cell, or throughputs.
724 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Activity Status" on page 725.
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Throughput" on page 726.
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Uplink Transmission Power" on page 727.
"Displaying the Traffic Distribution by The Number of Uplink Subchannels" on page 727.
Tip: You can make the traffic distribution easier to see by hiding geographic data and coverage
predictions. For information, see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the
Explorer" on page 28.
9.2.5.3.1 Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Activity Status

In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the activity status.
To display the traffic distribution by the activity status:
3. Select Properties from the context menu. The WiMAX Simulations Properties dialogue appears.
4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Discrete values" as the Display Type and "Activity Status" as the Field.
5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by activity status (see Figure 9.44).
Figure 9.44: Displaying the traffic distribution by activity status

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 725

A9155 User Manual
9.2.5.3.3 Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Throughput

In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by throughput.
To display the traffic distribution by throughput:
4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and one of the following
throughput types as the Field:
- Peak RLC Channel Throughput (DL)
- Effective RLC Channel Throughput (DL)
- Application Channel Throughput (DL)
- Peak RLC User Throughput (DL)
- Effective RLC User Throughput (DL)
- Application User Throughput (DL)
- Peak RLC Channel Throughput (UL)
- Effective RLC Channel Throughput (UL)
- Application Channel Throughput (UL)
- Peak RLC User Throughput (UL)
- Effective RLC User Throughput (UL)
- Application User Throughput (UL)
5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by throughput (see Figure 9.46).
Figure 9.46: Displaying the traffic distribution by throughput
726 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

9.2.5.3.4 Displaying the Traffic Distribution by Uplink Transmission Power

In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the uplink transmission power of the mobiles. You can analyse the
effect of the uplink power control.
To display the traffic distribution by uplink transmission power:
4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and "Transmission Power (UL)
(dBm)" as the Field.
5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by uplink transmission power (see Figure 9.47).
Figure 9.47: Displaying the traffic distribution by uplink transmission power
9.2.5.3.5 Displaying the Traffic Distribution by The Number of Uplink Subchannels

In this example, the traffic distribution is displayed by the number of uplink subchannels. You can analyse the effect of the
uplink subchannelisation.
To display the traffic distribution by the number of uplink subchannels:
4. On the Display tab of the dialogue, select "Value intervals" as the Display Type and "Number of Used Subchan-
nels (UL)" as the Field.
5. Click OK. The traffic distribution is now displayed by the number of uplink subchannels (see Figure 9.48).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 727

A9155 User Manual
Figure 9.48: Displaying the traffic distribution by the number of uplink subchannels
9.2.5.3.6 Displaying Traffic Simulation Results Using Tooltips

You can display information by placing the pointer over a mobile generated during a simulation to read the information
displayed in the tooltips. The information displayed is defined by the settings you made on the Display tab. For information
on defining the tooltips, see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 35
To display simulation results in the form of tooltips:
In the map window, place the pointer over the user that you want more information on. After a brief pause, the
tooltip appears with the information defined in the Display tab of the WiMAX Simulations folder properties (see
Figure 9.49).
Figure 9.49: Displaying the traffic simulation results using tooltips

2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the WiMAX Simulations folder.
you want to access.
5. Select Properties from the context menu. The simulation properties dialogue appears. The tabs in the simulation
properties dialogue contain simulation results as identified by the tab title.
The Cells tab: The Cells tab contains the following information, per site and transmitter:
- DL Traffic Load (%): The traffic loads of the cells calculated on the downlink during the simulation.
- UL Traffic Load (%): The traffic loads of the cells calculated on the uplink during the simulation.
- UL Noise Rise (dB): The traffic loads of the cells calculated on the downlink during the simulation.
- Segmentation Usage (DL) (%): (WiMAX 802.16e) The percentage of the downlink traffic load that corre-
sponds to the first downlink PUSC zone if it is segmented.
- AAS Usage (DL) (%): The percentage of downlink traffic load that corresponds to the traffic carried by the
smart antennas.
728 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Peak RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of peak RLC user throughputs of all the users active in
the downlink.
- Effective RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of effective RLC user throughputs of all the users
active in the downlink.
- Application Level User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The sum of application level throughputs of all the users
active in the downlink.
- Peak RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of peak RLC user throughputs of all the users active in
the uplink.
- Effective RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of effective RLC user throughputs of all the users
active in the uplink.
- Application Level User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The sum of application level throughputs of all the users
active in the uplink.
- Height: The height of the user terminal (antenna).
- User Profile: The assigned user profile. A9155 uses the assigned service and activity status to determine the
terminal and the user profile.
- Activity Status: The assigned activity status. It can be DL, UL, or DL+UL.
- Clutter Class: The code of the clutter class where the user is located.
- Subscriber ID: The ID of the user if the user is generated from a subscriber list and not from a traffic map.
- Subscriber List: The subscriber list of the user if the user is generated from a subscriber list and not from a
traffic map
- Serving Base Station: The serving transmitter of the subscriber.
- Reference Cell: The reference cell of the serving transmitter of the subscriber.
- Total Path Loss (dB): The path loss calculated for the user.
- Received Power (DL) (dBm): The signal level received at the user location in the downlink.
- Azimuth: The orientation of the users terminal antenna in the horizontal plane. Azimuth is always considered
with respect to the North. A9155 points the user antenna towards its serving base station.
- Downtilt: The orientation of the users terminal antenna in the vertical plane. Mechanical downtilt is positive
when it is downwards and negative when upwards. A9155 points the user antenna towards its serving base
station.
- Interference + Noise (DL) (dBm): The interference + noise level experienced at the user location in the down-
link.
- C/(I+N) (DL) (dB): The C/(I+N) at the user location in the downlink.
- Bearer (DL): The highest WiMAX bearer available for the C/(I+N) level at the user location in the downlink.
- Permutation Zone ID (DL) (WiMAX 802.16e): The permutation zone number of the downlink permutation
zone allocated to the user.
- BLER (DL): The Block Error Rate read from the user terminals reception equipment for the C/(I+N) level at
the user location in the downlink.
- Peak RLC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The maximum RLC channel throughput attainable using the
highest bearer available at the user location in the downlink.
- Effective RLC Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The effective RLC channel throughput attainable using the
highest bearer available at the user location in the downlink. It is calculated from the peak RLC throughput and
the BLER.
- Application Level Channel Throughput (DL) (kbps): The application level throughput is the net throughput
without coding (redundancy, overhead, addressing, etc.). It is calculated from the effective RLC throughput,
the throughput scaling factor of the service and the throughput offset.
- Peak RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The maximum RLC user throughput attainable using the highest
bearer available at the user location in the downlink.
- Effective RLC User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The effective RLC user throughput attainable using the highest
bearer available at the user location in the downlink. It is calculated from the peak RLC throughput and the
BLER.
- Application Level User Throughput (DL) (kbps): The application level throughput is the net throughput
- Received Power (UL) (dBm): The signal level received at the serving transmitter from the user terminal in
the uplink.
- Interference + Noise (UL) (dBm): The interference + noise level experienced at the serving transmitter of the
user in the uplink.
- C/(I+N) (UL) (dB): The C/(I+N) at the serving transmitter of the user in the uplink.
- Bearer (UL): The highest WiMAX bearer available for the C/(I+N) level at the serving transmitter of the user
in the uplink.
- Permutation Zone ID (UL) (WiMAX 802.16e): The permutation zone number of the uplink permutation zone
allocated to the user.
- BLER (UL): The Block Error Rate read from the reference cells reception equipment for the C/(I+N) level at
the serving transmitter of the user in the uplink.
- Transmission Power (UL) (dBm): The transmission power of the user terminal after power control in the
uplink.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 729

A9155 User Manual
- Number of Used Subchannels (UL): The number of subchannels being used by the user in the uplink after
subchannelisation.
- Peak RLC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The maximum RLC channel throughput attainable using the
highest bearer available at the serving transmitter of the user in the uplink.
- Effective RLC Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The effective RLC channel throughput attainable using the
highest bearer available at the serving transmitter of the user in the uplink. It is calculated from the peak RLC
throughput and the BLER.
- Application Level Channel Throughput (UL) (kbps): The application level throughput is the net throughput
- Peak RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The maximum RLC user throughput attainable using the highest
bearer available at the serving transmitter of the user in the uplink.
- Effective RLC User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The effective RLC user throughput attainable using the highest
bearer available at the serving transmitter of the user in the uplink. It is calculated from the peak RLC
throughput and the BLER.
- Application Level User Throughput (UL) (kbps): The application level throughput is the net throughput
Note: In A9155, channel throughputs are peak RLC, effective RLC, or application level through-
puts achieved at a given location using the highest WiMAX bearer with the entire channel
resources.
9.2.5.5 Updating Cell Load Values With Simulation Results

can update cell load values for each cell with the results calculated during the simulation.
b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the WiMAX Simulations folder.
- DL Traffic Load
- UL Traffic Load
- UL Noise Rise
- Segmentation Usage (WiMAX 802.16e)
- AAS Simulation Results
- AAS Usage

When you create simulation or a group of simulations, you are basing it on a set of traffic conditions that represent the
performance of the network against an increase of traffic load without changing traffic parameters or maps by using the
global scaling factor. For example, setting the global scaling factor to 2 is the same as doubling the initial number of
subscribers (for environment and user profile traffic maps) or the rates/users (for live traffic maps per sector).
1. Create a simulation or group of simulations as described in "Creating Simulations" on page 723.
per sector).

The following sections describe different advanced parameters and options available in the WiMAX module that are used
in coverage predictions as well as Monte Carlo simulations.
"Defining Frequency Bands" on page 731.
"The Global Transmitter Parameters" on page 731.
"Defining Frame Configurations" on page 733.
730 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

"Defining WiMAX Radio Bearers" on page 734.

"Defining WiMAX Quality Indicators" on page 735.
"Defining WiMAX Reception Equipment" on page 735.
"Defining Smart Antenna Equipment" on page 737.
"Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems" on page 738.

3. Select Network Settings > Frequencies > Bands from the context menu.
- Name: Enter a name for the frequency band, for example, "3.3 GHz - 1.5 MHz." Each WiMAX frequency band
has a specific channel bandwidth. Mentioning the channel bandwidth in the frequency band name is a good
approach. This name will appear in other dialogues when you select a frequency band.
- Channel Width (MHz): Enter the channel bandwidth for each channel in the frequency band.
- First Channel: Enter the number of the first channel in this frequency band.
- Last Channel: Enter the number of the last channel in this frequency band. If this frequency band has only
one carrier, enter the same number as entered in the First Channel field.
Note: The relationship between the frequency band (spectrum), the channel width, and the chan-
nel numbers can be defined as:
Frequency Band Width = Channel Bandwidth x (Last Channel + 1 - First Channel)
So, if you have a frequency band of 15 MHz, and you are deploying your network with
1.5 MHz allocated to each cell, you can find the First and Last Channel numbers by:
Last Channel - First Channel = (Frequency Band Width / Channel Bandwidth) - 1
If you plan to keep the First Channel number = 0, for our example:
Last Channel = (15 MHz / 1.5 MHz) - 1 = 9
- Excluded Channels: Enter the channel numbers which do not constitute the frequency band.
- Start Frequencies (MHz): Enter the start frequency for TDD frequency bands, and the downlink and the
uplink start frequencies for FDD frequency bands.
- Adjacent Channel Suppression Factor (dB): Enter the adjacent channel interference suppression factor in
dB. Interference received from adjacent channels is reduced by this factor during the calculations.
- Sampling Factor: Enter the sampling factor for converting the channel bandwidth into the sampling fre-
quency.
- Duplexing Method: Select the duplexing method used in the frequency band from the list.
You can also access the properties dialogue of each individual frequency band by clicking the Properties button.

A9155 allows you to set network level parameters which are common to all the transmitters and cells in the network. These
parameters are used in coverage predictions as well as during Monte Carlo simulations by the radio resource management
and scheduling algorithms.
"The Options on the Global Parameters Tab" on page 731.

The global WiMAX parameters include:
Frame duration: The frame length in milliseconds. You can choose from a list of frame durations defined in the
IEEE 802.16 specifications.
Cyclic prefix ratio: The total symbol duration in WiMAX comprises the useful part of the symbol, carrying the data
bits, and a CRC part, which is a portion of the useful data part repeated at the beginning of each symbol. The cyclic
prefix is the method used by WiMAX to counter inter-symbol interference (ISI). The cyclic prefix and the orthogo-
nality of subcarriers ensure that there is negligible intra-cell interference in WiMAX.
Fixed and variable overheads: The fixed and variable overheads in the uplink and downlink subframes are used
to model the preamble and other time-domain overheads such as broadcast messages including DL-MAP, UL-
MAP, UCD, and DCD, and the FCH, in downlink, and Ranging and Bandwidth Request messages in the uplink.
The preamble is always one symbol duration long and can be modelled using the fixed overhead, while other mes-
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 731

A9155 User Manual
sages whose lengths vary according to either the frame duration or the channel bandwidth can be modelled using
the variable overheads. This is the reason why the fixed overheads are available in terms of symbol duration (SD)
and the variable overheads in terms of percentages of the uplink and downlink subframes. Variable overheads are
percentages of the downlink and the uplink subframe sizes, after the fixed overheads have been removed from
the subframe size.
DL subframe ratio (TDD only): It is the percentage of the entire frame duration which corresponds to the downlink
subframe. In FDD networks, the downlink and uplink frames cover entire frame duration in different frequency
bands.
Transmission and reception time guards (TDD only): Transmission and reception time guards are also time
domain overheads, i.e., these are portions of the frame which cannot be used for data transfer. You can enter TTG
and RTG times in milliseconds.
The following parameters are only available in WiMAX 802.16d documents (based on the WiMAX 802.16d project
template).
Number of subchannels per channel: A channel can be divided into a number of subchannels. You can set the
number of these subchannels at the network level in A9155.
Number of subcarriers per channel: The entire channel contains a number of subcarriers which compose the
upper and lower guard bands, the pilot subcarriers, and the data subcarriers. The guards, pilots, and the DC sub-
carrier can not be used for data transfer. The total thermal noise over the entire channel bandwidth is computed
according to the number of used subcarriers out of the total number of subcarriers. The used subcarriers are the
data and the pilot subcarriers. The data transfer capacity of a channel is calculated by considering the data sub-
carriers only.
Note: The term subcarrier is synonymous with tone.
Figure 9.50 depicts a WiMAX frame with the described parameters marked.
Figure 9.50: WiMAX Frame

To set the network level parameters:
4. Select the Global Parameters tab.
The Global Parameters tab has three sections.
- Frame Structure: In this section (see Figure 9.51), you can modify the following: the Frame Duration of
WiMAX frame, the Cyclic Prefix Ratio, the fixed and variable overheads for the uplink and the downlink sub-
732 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

frames, and, for TDD networks, the ratio of the downlink subframe (DL Ratio) with respect to the entire frame,
and the transmission and reception time guards (TTG and RTG).
- Power Control: In this section, you can enter the Uplink Power Control Margin.
The following section is only available in WiMAX 802.16d documents (based on the WiMAX 802.16d project
template).
- Channel Configuration: In this section, you can enter the following: the number of subchannels per
channel, the total number of subcarriers per channel, the number of used subcarriers per channel and
the number of data subcarriers per channel.
Available in WiMAX
802.16d documents only.
Figure 9.51: WiMAX Global Parameters
5. Click OK. The global parameters are used during coverage predictions and simulations for the entire network.
9.3.3 Defining Frame Configurations

Frame configurations and permutation zones are only available in WiMAX 802.16e documents (based on the WiMAX
802.16e project template). The SOFDMA frame configuration model uses different numbers of subcarriers for different
channel bandwidths. As well, there can be up to 8 different permutation zones in the downlink subframe and 3 in the uplink
subframe. Each permutation zone can use a different subchannel allocation mode, and may have different numbers of
used and data subcarriers. The Frame Configurations table in A9155 models the channel and frame configuration of a
cell.
To create a new frame configuration:
3. Select Network Settings > Frame Configurations from the context menu. The Frame Configurations table
appears.
4. In the Frame Configurations table, each row describes a frame configuration. For the new frame configuration,
enter:
- Name: The name of the frame configuration.
- Total Number of Subcarriers: The total number of subcarriers per channel.
- Segmentation: Select the Segmentation check box if the first PUSC permutation zone in the downlink is seg-
mented.
5. Double-click the frame configuration row in the table once the new frame configuration has been added to the
table. The frame configurations Properties dialogue opens (see Figure 9.52).
6. In the Permutation Zones tab, enter:
- Zone Number: The permutation zone number.
- Subchannel Allocation Mode: The subchannel allocation mode used by the permutation zone. You can
select from PUSC DL, PUSC, FUSC, OFUSC, AMC, TUSC1, and TUSC2 for the downlink subframe, and from
PUSC UL, OPUSC, and AMC for the uplink subframe.
- Number of Used Subcarriers: The number of subcarriers used for transmission. This number includes the
pilot and data subcarriers.
- Number of Data Subcarriers: The number of subcarriers used for data transfer.
- Number of Subchannels per Channel: The number of subchannels in the channel.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 733

A9155 User Manual
Note: There are four types of AMC subchannels. The four types of AMC subchannels have differ-
ent collections of bins in a band. In the first type (6 x 1; default type), a subchannel consists
of six consecutive bins in the same symbol. A subchannel is two bins by three symbols in
the second type (2 x 3), three bins by two symbols in the third type (3 x 2), and one bin by
six symbols in the fourth type (1 x 6). The default values of the numbers of subchannels per
channel represent the first (default) type of subchannels. The number of subchannels per
channel is calculated by dividing the total number of subcarriers by the number of subcarri-
ers in a subchannel. The number of subcarriers per subchannel is 54, 27, 18, and 9 in the
first (default), second, third, and fourth types, respectively. Therefore, for modelling a type
of subchannels other than the default (6 x 1), you will have to increase the number of
subchannels per channel accordingly, i.e., multiply the current value by 2, 3, and 6, for mod-
elling the second, third, and fourth types, respectively.
- Subframe: Select whether the permutation zone belongs to the downlink or the uplink subframe.
- Quality Threshold (dB): The minimum signal quality required for a user to be allocated a permutation zone.
- Max Speed (km/h): The maximum vehicular speed supported by the permutation zone.
- Max Distance: The maximum distance from the base station covered by the permutation zone.
- Priority: The priority of the permutation zone in terms of its allocation to a user.
- Antenna Diversity Support: Select the type of antenna diversity technique supported by the permutation
zone. You can select Standard, AAS, STTD, SM, AMS, Standard+AAS, Standard+STTD, Standard+SM,
or Standard+AMS. Terminals supporting corresponding antenna diversity techniques (AAS or MIMO) will be
allocated to the relevant permutation zones. A zone that supports only Standard does not have any antenna
diversity mechanism, and only the users with simple (neither AAS nor MIMO) terminals can connect to this
zone. A zone that supports Standard+an antenna diversity technique can carry traffic using terminals capable
of that diversity technique. For example, Standard+AAS can support ordinary as well as AAS-capable termi-
nals, and Standard+STTD/SM/AMS can support ordinary and MIMO-capable terminals. Ordinary terminals
cannot connect to a zone that does not support Standard.
- Secondary Groups Used: For segmented frame configurations using 1024 and 2048 total subcarriers, select
which of the secondary subchannel groups (1, 3, 5) are used by the PUSC DL permutation zones. The primary
subchannel groups (0, 2, 4) are determined directly from the preamble index and the segment number. For a
list of correspondence between preamble indexes and subchannel groups, and a list of correspondence
between subchannels and subchannel groups, see "Glossary of WiMAX Terms" on page 748.
Permutation zones are allocated to users based on the Quality Threshold (dB), Max Speed (km/h), Max Distance, and
Priority parameters. The quality threshold, max speed, and max distance are used to determine the possible permutation
zones for each user. Then, the highest priority permutation zone among the possible permutation zones is allocated to the
user.
To see examples of how to setup cells with and without segmentation, and how to setup cells with PUSC, FUSC, and
permutation zones of other subchannel allocation modes, see "Tips and Tricks" on page 741.
Figure 9.52: Permutation Zones
9.3.4 Defining WiMAX Radio Bearers

WiMAX radio bearers carry the data in the uplink as well as in the downlink.
Note: In the A9155 WiMAX module, a "bearer" refers to a combination of MCS, modulation, and
coding schemes.
The WiMAX Bearers table lists the radio bearers available in A9155 by default. You can add, remove and modify bearer
properties, if you wish.
734 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To define WiMAX bearers:

3. Select Network Settings > WiMAX Bearers from the context menu. The WiMAX Bearers table appears.
4. In the table, enter one bearer per row. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables"
on page 48. For each WiMAX bearer, enter:
- Radio Bearer Index: Enter a bearer index. This bearer index is used to identify the bearer in other tables,
such as the bearer selection thresholds and the quality graphs in WiMAX reception equipment.
- Name: Enter a name for the bearer, for example, "16QAM3/4." This name will appear in other dialogues and
results.
- Modulation: Select a modulation from the list of available modulation types. This column is for information
and display purposes only.
- Bearer Efficiency (bits/symbol): Enter the number of useful bits that the bearer can transfer in a symbol.
This information is used in throughput calculations.
For information on the relation between bearer efficiency and spectral efficiency, see "Relation Between Bear-
er Efficiency And Spectral Efficiency" on page 743.
9.3.5 Defining WiMAX Quality Indicators

Quality indicators depict the coverage quality at different locations. The Quality Indicators table lists the quality indicators
available in A9155 by default. You can add, remove and modify quality indicators, if you wish.
To define quality indicators:
3. Select Network Settings > Quality Indicators from the context menu. The Quality Indicators table appears.
4. In the table, enter one quality indicator per row. For information on working with data tables, see "Working with
Data Tables" on page 48. For each quality indicator, enter:
- Name: Enter a name for the quality indicator, for example, "BLER" for Block Error Rate. This name will appear
in other dialogues and results.
- Used for Packet Services: Select this check box to indicate that this quality indicator can be used for packet
services.
- Used for Circuit Services: Select this check box to indicate that this quality indicator can be used for circuit
services.
9.3.6 Defining WiMAX Reception Equipment

WiMAX reception equipment model the reception characteristics of cells and user terminals. Bearer selection thresholds
and channel quality indicator graphs are defined in reception equipment.
To create a new piece of WiMAX reception equipment:
3. Select Equipment > WiMAX Equipment from the context menu. The WiMAX Equipment table appears.
4. In the WiMAX Equipment table, each row describes a piece of equipment. For the new piece of WiMAX equip-
ment you are creating, enter its name.
5. Double-click the equipment entry in the WiMAX Equipment table once your new equipment has been added to
the table. The equipments Properties dialogue opens.
The Properties dialogue has the following tabs:
- Bearer Selection Thresholds: In this tab (see Figure 9.53), you can modify the following: the Bearer Selec-
tion Thresholds for different mobility types. A bearer is selected for data transfer at a given pixel if the
received carrier-to-interference-and-noise ratio is higher than its selection threshold. For more information on
bearers and mobility types, see "Defining WiMAX Radio Bearers" on page 734 and "Modelling Mobility Types"
on page 697, respectively.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 735

A9155 User Manual
Figure 9.53: WiMAX Reception Equipment - Bearer Selection Thresholds
a. Click the Best Bearer Thresholds button to open the bearer selection thresholds dialogue (see Figure 9.54).
b. Enter the graph values.
c. Click OK.
Figure 9.54: Bearer Reception Thresholds
For converting receiver equipment sensitivity values (dBm) into bearer selection thresholds, see "Calculating
Bearer Selection Thresholds From Receiver Sensitivity Values" on page 743.
- Quality Graphs: In this tab (see Figure 9.55), you can modify the following: the Quality Indicator Graphs for
different bearers for different mobility types. These graphs depict the behaviour of various quality indicators
under different radio conditions. For more information on bearers, quality indicators, and mobility types, see
"Defining WiMAX Radio Bearers" on page 734, "Defining WiMAX Quality Indicators" on page 735, and "Mod-
elling Mobility Types" on page 697, respectively.
736 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 9.55: WiMAX Reception Equipment - Quality Indicator Graphs
a. Click the Quality Graph button to open the bearer selection thresholds dialogue (see Figure 9.56).
b. Enter the graph values.
c. Click OK.
Figure 9.56: Quality Indicator Graph
6. Click OK. The Properties dialogue closes. The settings are stored.
7. Click the Close button ( ) to close the WiMAX Equipment table.
You can open the WiMAX reception equipment table to access a list of all the equipment.
To open the WiMAX reception equipment table:
3. Select Equipment > WiMAX Equipment from the context menu. The WiMAX Equipment table appears. For
information on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48.
9.3.7 Defining Smart Antenna Equipment

Smart antenna equipment model adaptive antenna systems with more than one antenna element. A9155 WiMAX BWA
module includes an MMSE-based (Minimum Mean Square Error) smart antenna model. For more information on the smart
antenna modelling in A9155, see the Technical Reference Guide. please refer to the Technical Reference Guide.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 737

A9155 User Manual
To create an smart antenna equipment:

3. Select Equipment > Smart Antenna Equipment from the context menu. The Smart Antenna Equipment table
appears.
4. In the Smart Antenna Equipment table, each row describes a piece of smart antenna equipment. For information
on working with data tables, see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48. For the new smart antenna equipment,
enter:
- Name: Enter a name for the smart antenna equipment.
- Model: Select the MMSE Smart Antenna Model from the list.
You can also modify the properties of the MMSE Smart Antenna Model. To modify the properties of the MMSE
Smart Antenna Model:
i. Click the Parameters button. The smart antenna model properties dialogue appears.
ii. Click the General tab.
On the General tab, you can change the default Name of the MMSE Smart Antenna Model.
iii. Click the Properties tab (see Figure 9.57). On the Condition tab, you can define:
- Number of Elements: The number of antenna elements in the smart antenna system.
- Single Element Pattern: The antenna patterns of each antenna element. You can select an antenna from
the list. The list contains the antennas available in the Antennas folder.
iv. Click OK to close the Properties dialogues.
5. When you have finished adding smart antenna equipment, click Close.
You can also access the properties dialogue of each individual smart antenna equipment by clicking the Properties button
on the Smart Antenna Equipment table.
Figure 9.57: MMSE Smart Antenna Model properties
9.3.8 Multiple Input Multiple Output Systems

Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) systems use different transmission and reception diversity techniques. MIMO diver-
sity systems can roughly be divided into the following types:
1. STTD (Space-Time Transmit Diversity), which uses more than one transmission antenna to send the same
signal on all antennas. The signals are constructively combined at the receiver to extract the useful signal. As the
receiver gets more than one copy of the useful signal, the signal level at the receiver after combination of all the
copies is much more resistant to interference than a single signal would be. Therefore, STTD improves the C/(I+N)
at the receiver. It is often used for the regions of a cell that have bad C/(I+N) conditions. STTD is also known as
STC (Space Time Coding) and STBC (Space-Time Block Codes).
2. SM (Spatial Multiplexing), which uses more than one transmission antenna to send different signals (data
streams) on each antenna. The receiver can also have more than one antenna for receiving different signals.
Using spatial multiplexing with M transmission and N reception antennas, the throughput over the transmitter-
receiver link can be theoretically increased M or N times, depending on which is smaller, M or N. SM improves the
throughput (channel capacity) for a given C/(I+N), and is used for the regions of a cell that have sufficient C/(I+N)
conditions. SM is often referred to as MIMO.
3. AMS (Adaptive MIMO Switch) is a technique for switching from spatial multiplexing to space-time transmit diver-
sity as the C/(I+N) conditions get worse than a given threshold. AMS can be used in cells to provide spatial multi-
plexing gains to users that have better C/(I+N) conditions than a given AMS threshold, and space-time transmit
diversity to users that have worse C/(I+N) conditions than the threshold. AMS provides the optimum solution using
both MIMO features to their best.
A9155 models all of the above three MIMO systems. The following sections describe how these three systems are
modelled and used in A9155.
Space-Time Transmit Diversity Modelling
During calculations, a user (pixel, mobile, or subscriber) using a MIMO-capable terminal, and connected to a cell (uplink
and downlink permutation zones in WiMAX 802.16e) that supports STTD, will benefit from the downlink and uplink STTD
C/(I+N) gains defined for the clutter class where it is located.
738 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

STTD gains on downlink and uplink can be defined per clutter class. For information on setting the STTD uplink and down-
link gains for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 105.
Spatial Multiplexing Modelling
and downlink permutation zones in WiMAX 802.16e) that supports SM, will benefit from the SM gain in its throughput
depending on its C/(I+N), number of transmission and reception antennas, mobility, and its clutter class.
As SM improves the channel capacity or throughputs, the C/(I+N) of a user is first determined without considering any
MIMO gain. Once the C/(I+N) is known, A9155 calculates the user throughput based on the bearer available at the user
location. The obtained user throughput is then increased according to the SM capacity gain, read from the MIMO gain
graphs for the users C/(I+N) level, mobility and numbers of transmission and reception antennas, and the SM Gain Factor
of the users clutter class.
The maximum theoretical capacity gains defined in Max MIMO Gain graphs (MIMO configurations) are the maximum
possible capacity gains using SM. SM requires rich multipath environment, without which the gain is reduced. In the worst
case, there is no gain. Therefore, it is possible to define an SM Gain Factor per clutter class whose value can vary from
0 to 1 (0 = no gain, 1 = 100% gain).
For information on setting the SM Gain Factor for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class
Properties" on page 105. For more information about MIMO gain graphs, see "Defining MIMO Configurations" on
page 739.
Adaptive MIMO Switch Modelling
and downlink permutation zones in WiMAX 802.16e) that supports AMS, will benefit from the gain to be applied, STTD or
SM, depending on the users C/(I+N) conditions and the AMS threshold defined in the cell properties. STTD gain is applied
if C/(I+N) is less than the AMS threshold, and SM is used if C/(I+N) is higher than the AMS threshold.
9.3.8.1 Defining MIMO Configurations

Spatial multiplexing gains are modelled in A9155 using MIMO configurations. A MIMO configuration contains MIMO
capacity gain vs. C/(I+N) graphs for different numbers of transmission and reception antennas. The MIMO capacity gain
is defined as the increase in channel capacity compared to a SISO system, which means the increase in throughput due
to MIMO.
To create a MIMO configuration:
3. Select Network Settings > MIMO Configurations from the context menu. The MIMO Configurations table
appears.
4. In the MIMO Configurations table, each row describes a different combination of number of transmission and
reception antennas, and the corresponding spatial multiplexing gain. For information on working with data tables,
see "Working with Data Tables" on page 48. For each MIMO configuration:
- Name: Enter a name for the MIMO configuration.
- Mobility: Select the mobility type corresponding to the MIMO configuration from the list.
- Number of Transmission Antennas: Enter the number of antennas used for transmission in case of MIMO.
- Number of Reception Antennas: Enter the number of antennas used for reception in case of MIMO.
- Max MIMO Gain: Enter the graph of the maximum MIMO gain vs. C/(I+N).
You can access the Max MIMO Gain Graph dialogue of each MIMO configuration by double-clicking the corre-
sponding record in the MIMO Configurations table.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 739

A9155 User Manual
Figure 9.58: Max MIMO Gain Graph dialogue
The MIMO capacity gain vs. C/(I+N) graphs available in A9155 by default have been generated based on the maximum
theoretical MIMO capacity gains obtained using the following equations:
CC MIMO
G MIMO = ----------------------
CC SISO
RX
TX RX N Ant
Where CC MIMO = Min ( N Ant, N Ant ) Log 2 1 + -----------
- C ( I + N ) is the channel capacity at a given C/(I+N) for a MIMO
N Ant
TX

TX RX
system using N Ant transmission and N Ant reception antennas. CC SISO = Log 2 ( 1 + C ( I + N ) ) is the channel capacity
for a single antenna system at a given C/(I+N). C/(I+N) is used as a ratio (not dB) in these formulas.
You can create and modify MIMO configurations using MIMO capacity gain graphs generated through MIMO simulators
or measurements from an existing network.
To create MIMO capacity gain graphs from measurement data:
TX
1. Note the number of transmission antennas N Ant .
RX
2. Note the number of reception antennas N Ant .
TX RX
3. Measure the SISO throughputs at different C/(I+N) levels, i.e., for N Ant = N Ant = 1 .
TX RX
4. Measure the MIMO throughputs at the same C/(I+N) levels, i.e., for the ennas N Ant and N Ant used.
5. Calculate the MIMO capacity gains for the C/(I+N) levels, at which you measured the throughputs, by taking the
ratio between the MIMO and the SISO throughputs.
6. Create a new MIMO configuration in A9155 for the number of transmission and reception antennas, and enter the
graph of MIMO capacity gain vs. C/(I+N).

In other words, in 50% of the measured cases, the result will be better and in 50% of the measured cases, the result will
be worse.
A9155 uses a model standard deviation for the clutter class with the defined cell edge coverage probability to model the
effect of shadowing and thereby create coverage predictions that are reliable more than fifty percent of the time. The addi-
tional losses or gains caused by shadowing are known as the shadowing margin. The shadowing margin is added to the
path losses calculated by the propagation model.
In WiMAX projects, the model standard deviation is used to calculate shadowing margins on signal levels. You can also
calculate shadowing margins on C/I values. For information on setting the model standard deviation and the C/I standard
deviations for each clutter class or for all clutter classes, see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 105.
740 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Shadowing can be taken into consideration when A9155 calculates the signal level and C/(I+N) for:
A point analysis (see "Making a Point Analysis" on page 677)
A9155 always takes shadowing into consideration when calculating a Monte Carlo-based WiMAX simulation. A9155 uses
the values defined for the Model Standard Deviations per clutter class when calculating the signal level coverage predic-
tions. A9155 uses the values defined for the C/I Standard Deviations per clutter class when calculating the WiMAX cover-
age predictions.
You can display the shadowing margins per clutter class. For information, see "Displaying the Shadowing Margins per
Clutter Class" on page 741.
9.3.9.1 Displaying the Shadowing Margins per Clutter Class

To display the shadowing margins per clutter class:
3. Select Shadowing Margins from the context menu. The Shadowing Margins dialogue appears (see
Figure 9.59).
- C/I: The C/I standard deviation. A9155 will display the C/I shadowing margin.
9.4 Tips and Tricks

The following tips and tricks are described below:
"Obtaining User Throughputs for All the Subscribers of a Subscriber List" on page 741.
"Working With User Densities Instead of User Profiles" on page 742.
"Restricting Coverage Predictions to LOS Areas Only" on page 742.
"Limiting the Coverage Range of Transmitters in Order to Avoid Uplink-to-Downlink Interference in TDD Networks"
on page 742.
"Calculating Bearer Selection Thresholds From Receiver Sensitivity Values" on page 743.
"Relation Between Bearer Efficiency And Spectral Efficiency" on page 743.
"Determining Approximate Required DL Ratio for a TDD Network" on page 744.
"Working With Frame Configurations, Permutation Zones, and Segmentation: Examples" on page 744.
Obtaining User Throughputs for All the Subscribers of a Subscriber List
Note that this procedure is only recommended if you have a correct and consistent list of subscribers and have full knowl-
edge of the services they use.
A9155 generates a realistic user distribution containing active users only during Monte Carlo simulations. The status of
these users is determined through the users service usage parameters defined in the user profile. In A9155, all the
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 741

A9155 User Manual
subscribers have a user profile assigned to them. During Monte Carlo simulations based on subscriber lists, A9155 deter-
mines active users from all the users in the subscriber list. If you perform calculations on subscriber lists, A9155 calculates
the channel throughput and not the user throughput as the services being used by the subscribers are not known. In the
simulations, however, a service is determined for each subscriber in order to perform the RRM and determine the user
throughputs.
It might be useful to determine user level throughputs for all the subscribers in a subscriber list. You can calculate user
throughput for all the subscribers by running a simulation on this subscriber list after modifying the user profiles assigned
to all subscribers so that all subscribers have a connection probability of 100%.
1. Create a subscriber list with subscribers having a connection probability of 100%:
a. Create as many user profiles as there are services used by the subscribers in the list.
b. Assign only one service to each user profile.
c. Assign the following service usage parameters to the user profiles that you create:
i. For Voice services, set:
- Calls/Hour = 1.
- Duration (sec.) = 3600.
ii. For Data services:
- Calls/Hour = 1.
- UL Volume (KBytes) = UL Average Throughput x 3600 / 8.
- DL Volume (KBytes) = DL Average Throughput x 3600 / 8.
Where the UL Average Throughput and the DL Average Throughput are the uplink and downlink average
requested throughputs, respectively, of the service mentioned in the user profile.
d. Assign these user profiles to subscribers in the subscriber list.

2. Create a simulation based on this subscriber list only.
The simulation results will contain all the subscribers in the subscriber list with their respective user throughputs
determined by A9155 after the scheduling process.
Working With User Densities Instead of User Profiles
If you do not currently have reliable WiMAX multi-service traffic, you can provide A9155 with user density information per
service, for example, traffic data from adapted GSM Erlang maps. In this case, you do not have to create user profiles. As
well, A9155 does not have to determine the user connection probabilities to create traffic scenarios during simulations.
The distribution of traffic during simulations will only depend on the user densities per service.
If you know the user densities for each service, you can set user connection probabilities to 100% in your WiMAX docu-
ment, as shown below:
1. For Voice services, set:
- Calls/Hour = 1.
- Duration (sec.) = 3600.
2. For Data services:
- Calls/Hour = 1.
- UL Volume (KBytes) = UL Average Throughput x 3600 / 8.
- DL Volume (KBytes) = DL Average Throughput x 3600 / 8.
Where, the UL Average Throughput and the DL Average Throughput are the uplink and downlink average re-
quested throughputs, respectively, of the service mentioned in the user profile.
The above settings will set the user connection probabilities to 100%. If you create a traffic map based on environment
classes, the user density values that you define in your environment classes will be the actual user densities. This means
that, for X users/km defined in the environment class for a given user profile, the Monte Carlo simulator will generate
exactly X users/km for each service of the user profile.
In this way, you can know the exact number of connected users and their services generated during the simulations before-
hand.
This procedure should only be used when appropriate traffic data is not available.
Restricting Coverage Predictions to LOS Areas Only
In WiMAX, and especially in IEEE 802.16d networks, it might be interesting to study the areas with LOS coverage only
and other areas separately. You can restrict the coverage to LOS areas only if you are using the Standard Propagation
Model. To restrict coverage to LOS areas, you have to enter a very high value for the parameter K4 in the properties of the
Standard Propagation Model.
Limiting the Coverage Range of Transmitters in Order to Avoid Uplink-to-Downlink Interference in

TDD Networks
You can define a maximum coverage range for all the transmitters in your network by entering a valid range as the Max
Range parameter.
742 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To define the Max Range parameter:

2. Select Properties from the context menu. The Predictions folders properties dialogue appears.
3. Select the System tab.
4. Select the Max Range check box. The Max Range field in enabled.
5. Enter the Max Range of the network.
6. Click OK.
In TDD networks, the TTG and RTG parameters, available in the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters folders prop-
erties dialogue, define the time delays required by the cell and mobile equipment to switch from transmission to reception
modes and vice versa. You can determine the maximum coverage range that the sectors of your WiMAX network should
have from the values of TTG and RTG and use this range as the Max Range parameter. You can calculate the maximum
system range from TTG and RTG values as follows:
Max Range (m) = Min(TTG, RTG) x 300000/2
Where TTG and RTG are values in milliseconds, Max Range is in meters, and the Min() function returns the lower of the
two values given to it in the parantheses. So, the maximum system range for TTG = 0.105 ms and RTG = 0.06 ms will be
9 km.
Calculating Bearer Selection Thresholds From Receiver Sensitivity Values
You can convert the receiver sensitivity values, that are listed in the specifications of your equipment, into bearer selection
thresholds using the following conversion method:
n BW N Used
CNR = RS + 114 NF 10 Log ------------------------------------------ + 10 Log ( R ) L Imp
N Total
Where RS is the receiver sensitivity in dBm, NF is the noise figure of the receiver in dB, n is the sampling factor, BW is the
channel bandwidth in MHz, N Used is the number of used subcarriers, N Total is the total number of subcarriers, R is the
number of retransmissions, and L Imp is the implementation loss in dB.
If you do not know the values for R and L Imp , you can ignore the corresponding terms and simplify the equation.
In the above explanation, the term receiver refers to the base station in uplink and to the mobile/user equipment in the
downlink.
Relation Between Bearer Efficiency And Spectral Efficiency
Spectral efficiency of a modulation and coding scheme is defined as the number of useful bits that can be transmitted each
second over a channel of 1 Hz bandwidth. Spectral efficiency is hence given in terms of bps/Hz.
In A9155, bearers (modulation and coding schemes) have bearer efficiencies defined in the Beares table. The bearer effi-
ciency is given in terms of bits/symbol. Remember that in A9155 a symdol refers to the data transmission unit which is
1 symbol duration long and 1 subcarrier width wide, as shown in Figure 9.60.
Figure 9.60: Symbol
The concept of bearer efficiency is similar to spectral efficiency. The only difference is in the units used to define the two
entities. Here is a simple example that compares spectral efficiency and bearer efficiency, and shows that the two are the
same.
Spectral efficiency is given by:
SE = ( 1 BLER ) r Log 2 ( M ) bps Hz
Where BLER is the Block Error Rate, r is the coding rate for the bearer, and M is the number of modulation states. For
simplification, we set BLER = 0, and use QPSK1/2, i.e., four modulation states and r = 0.5. With these values, we get a
spectral efficiency of 1 bps/Hz for QPSK1/2. In other words, a communication channel using QPSK1/2 modulation and
coding scheme can send 1 bps of useful data per unit bandwidth.
In order to compare the bearer efficiency and spectral efficiency of QPSK1/2, lets say that QPSK1/2 has a bearer effi-
ciency of 1 bits/symbol. Here as well, the number of bits refers to useful data bits. The width of a symbol in WiMAX 802.16e
1
is F = 10.94 kHz , from which we can calculate the useful symbol duration as well: T U = ------- = 91.4 sec . In one
F
second, there can be 1 sec 91.4 sec = 10940 symbol durations. If 10940 symbols are transmitted using QPSK1/2,
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 743

A9155 User Manual
this gives us a data rate of 10940 Symbols/sec 1 bits/Symbol = 10940 bps , which is the data rate achievable using
one subcarrier of 10.94 kHz. We can find the spectral efficiency by normalizing the data rate to unit bandwidth. This gives:
10940 bps/subcarrier 10.94 kHz/subcarrier = 1 bps/Hz
In order to compare equivalent quantities, we have ignored the system parameters such as the cyclic prefix, TTG, RTG,
and have considered that the entire frame is transmitted in one direction, uplink or downlink.
Determining Approximate Required DL Ratio for a TDD Network
In TDD networks, the durations of the downlink and uplink subframes have to be properly set in order to optimally satisfy
the traffic demands in both downlink and uplink. You can use the simulation results to calculate the approximate value of
the DL Ratio required for your network under the given traffic scenario of the simulation. The DL Ratio can be calculated
by taking the ratio of the sum of the downlink traffic loads of all the cells and the sums of all the downlink and uplink traffic
loads of all the cells. The downlink and uplink traffic loads of all the cells are listed in the Cells tab of the simulations results
dialogue.

DL
TL
All Cells
DL Ratio = ------------------------------------------------------------------
-

DL UL
TL + TL
All Cells All Cells
You can then set this value of DL Ratio in the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters folders properties dialogue, for
optimising your networks resource usage.
Working With Frame Configurations, Permutation Zones, and Segmentation: Examples
In the following examples, we assume that:

You are working on a document with existing base stations.
One 5 MHz channel, with channel number 0, defined in the frequency band, that can be allocated to sectors.
The frame configuration that can be used is FFT Size 512 with 512 total subcarriers.
There can be different scenarios for this implementation:
1. Without segmentation, i.e., a frequency reuse plan of N=1.
a. Set up the frame configuration:
i. Open the Frame Configurations table as explained in "Defining Frame Configurations" on page 733.
ii. Verify that the Segmentation check box is not selected for FFT Size 512.
iii. Double-click the frame configuration FFT Size 512. The Permutation Zones table appears.
iv. Delete all the zones except PUSC DL and PUSC UL.
v. Click OK.
vi. Close the Frame Configurations tables.
b. Set up the cells:
i. Right-click the Transmitters folder. The context menu appears.
ii. Select Cells > Open Table from the context menu. The Cells table appears.
iii. In the Cells table, enter:
- Channel Number: 0
- Frame Configuration: FFT Size 512
iv. Close the Cells table.
In this case, the same 5 MHz channel is allocated to the three sectors of each 3-sector site. The sectors receive
co-channel interference according to the downlink traffic loads of the interferers. The C/(I+N) and throughput
coverage predictions would be as shown in Figure 9.61 and Figure 9.62.
744 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 9.61: Downlink C/(I+N) Coverage Prediction - PUSC Without Segmentation
Figure 9.62: Downlink Channel Throughput Coverage Prediction - PUSC Without Segmentation
2. With a segmented PUSC permutation zone, i.e., a frequency reuse plan of N=3.
ii. Select the Segmentation check box for FFT Size 512.
iv. Delete all the zones except PUSC DL and PUSC UL.
v. Click OK.
- Channel Number: 0
- Preamble Index: 0 for the 1st sector, 32 for the 2nd sector, and 64 for the 3rd sector of each 3-sector site.
- Segmentation Usage (DL) (%): 100
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 745

A9155 User Manual

In this case, the 5 MHz channel is divided into 3 segments. Each segment is allocated to one of the three sectors
of each 3-sector site. There is no interference between segments because the Preamble Indexes give a different
segment and same Cell PermBase (IDCell in IEEE specifications). Each segment uses 1/3rd of the total number
of used subcarriers, i.e., 140. The C/(I+N) and throughput coverage predictions would be as shown in Figure 9.63
and Figure 9.64.
Figure 9.63: Downlink C/(I+N) Coverage Prediction - PUSC With Segmentation
Figure 9.64: Downlink Channel Throughput Coverage Prediction - PUSC With Segmentation
3. With a segmented PUSC permutation zone and one or more non-segmented zones, i.e., a frequency reuse plan
of pseudo-N=3.
ii. Select the Segmentation check box for FFT Size 512.
iv. Delete all the zones except PUSC DL, FUSC, and PUSC UL.
v. Click OK.
746 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Channel Number: 0
- Preamble Index: 0 for the 1st sector, 32 for the 2nd sector, and 64 for the 3rd sector of each 3-sector site.
- Segmentation Usage (DL) (%): 25
In this case, the 5 MHz channel is divided into 3 segments. Each segment is allocated to one of the three sectors
of each 3-sector site. There is no interference between segments because the Preamble Indexes give a different
segment and same Cell PermBase (IDCell in IEEE specifications). Each segment uses 1/3rd of the total number
of used subcarriers, i.e., 140. However, there is also a non-segmented FUSC permutation zone, which uses the
entire channel width of 5 MHz. The sectors receive co-channel interference during the FUSC part of the frame but
not during the segmented PUSC part of the frame. The C/(I+N) and throughput coverage predictions would be as
shown in Figure 9.65 and Figure 9.66.
Figure 9.65: Downlink C/(I+N) Coverage Prediction - Segmented PUSC + FUSC
Figure 9.66: Downlink Channel Throughput Coverage Prediction - Segmented PUSC + FUSC
If you compare the C/(I+N) and throughput coverage predictions in the above cases, you will observe that the C/(I+N)
improves with segmentation, but the throughput is reduced.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 747

A9155 User Manual
9.5 Glossary of WiMAX Terms

Understanding the following terms and there use in A9155 is very helpful in understanding the WiMAX module:
User: A general term that can also designate a subscriber, mobile, and receiver.
Subscriber: Users with fixed geographical coordinates.
Mobile: Users generated and distributed during simulations. These users have, among other parameters, defined
services, terminal types, and mobility types assigned for the duration of the simulations.
Receiver: A probe mobile, with the minimum required parameters needed for the calculation of path loss, used
for propagation loss and raster coverage predictions.
Bearer: A Modulation and Coding Scheme (MCS) used to carry data over the channel.
Peak RLC Throughput: The maximum RLC layer throughput (user or channel) that can be achieved at a given
location using the highest WiMAX bearer. This throughput is the raw data rate without considering the effects of
retransmission due to errors and higher layer coding and encryption.
Effective RLC Throughput: The net RLC layer throughput (user or channel) that can be achieved at a given loca-
tion using the highest WiMAX bearer computed taking into account the reduction of throughput due to retransmis-
sion due to errors.
Application Throughput: The application layer throughput (user or channel) that can be achieved at a given loca-
tion using the highest WiMAX bearer computed taking into account the reduction of throughput due to PDU/SDU
header information, padding, encryption, coding, and other types of overhead.
Channel Throughputs: Peak RLC, effective RLC or application level throughputs achieved at a given location
using the highest WiMAX bearer with the entire channel resources.
User Throughputs: Peak RLC, effective RLC or application level throughputs achieved at a given location using
the highest WiMAX bearer with the amount of resources allocated to a user by the scheduler.
Traffic Loads: The uplink and downlink traffic loads are the percentages of the uplink and the downlink subframes
in use (allocated) to the traffic (mobiles) in the uplink and in the downlink, respectively.
Uplink Noise Rise: Uplink noise rise is the measurement of uplink interference with respect to the uplink noise.
I UL + N UL
NR UL = -------------------------
N UL
Frame Configuration: A frame configuration is the description of a frame in the frequency as well as in the time
dimension. In the frequency domain, it defines how many subcarriers exist in the channel width used, and how
many of these subcarriers are used and for which purpose, i.e., pilot, data, DC, guard. In the time domain, it
defines how long the frame is, and its composition. The time-domain composition of the frame is simpler in WiMAX
802.16d than in 802.16e.
In WiMAX 802.16d networks, the frame configuration does not depend on the channel width and can be defined
in the Global Parameters tab of the Transmitters folders properties dialogue as explained in "The Options on the
Global Parameters Tab" on page 731.
In WiMAX 802.16e, the frame configuration depends on the channel width because the system uses Scalable
OFDMA. The IEEE specifications define different frame configurations for different channel widths. For example,
a cell using a 10 MHz channel width will have 1024 subcarriers, but one using a 5 MHz channel will have 512. As
well, in the time domain, the number of permutation zones in the frame and the subchannel allocation modes of
these zones depend on the operator and the equipment used. You can create or modify frame configurations and
their corresponding permutation zones in A9155 as explained in "Defining Frame Configurations" on page 733.
Permutation Zone: A permutation zone is a subdivision of a WiMAX frame in the time domain. According to the
IEEE specifications, there can be as many as 8 permutation zones in the downlink and 3 in the uplink. Each per-
mutation zone can use a different subchannel allocation mode (or a permutation scheme), and can have different
numbers of used, pilot, and data subcarriers. The different subchannel allocation modes are: PUSC, FUSC,
OFUSC, AMC, TUSC1, and TUSC2 in downlink, and PUSC, OPUSC, and AMC in uplink.
Segmentation: The PUSC subchannel allocation mode in downlink allows the allocation of groups of subchannels
to cells. According to the IEEE specifications, there are 6 subchannel groups in the downlink PUSC subchannel
allocation mode. You can, for example, use 2 subchannel groups at each sector of a 3-sector site, and completely
eliminate interference between these sectors by setting the preamble index parameter correctly. On one hand,
segmentation improves the CINR by allowing you to different segments of the same channel at different sectors.
But on the other hand, it reduces the available cell capacity (throughput) because the channel width used at each
sector is reduced. For examples on how to use segmentation in A9155, see "Tips and Tricks" on page 741.
Primary and Secondary Subchannel Groups: For frame configurations with 1024 and 2048 total subcarriers,
you can choose which secondary subchannel groups are used at cells along with the one primary subchannel
group, which is given by the Preamble Index of the cell. Frame configurations with 128 and 512 total subcarriers
only have primary subchannel groups and no secondary subchannel groups. Therefore, the knowledge of only the
Preamble Index is sufficient in these cases (each segment uses 1/3rd of the channel bandwidth.)
The Preamble Index set in the cell gives the segment number as well as the primary subchannel group number
in the case of segmentation:
748 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Primary
Preamble Index Segment Subchannel
Group
0-31, 96, 99, 102, 105, 108, 111 0 0
32-63, 97, 100, 103, 106, 109, 112 1 2
64-95, 98, 101, 104, 107, 110, 113 2 4
The secondary subchannel groups (1, 3, and 5) can be allocated to any cell as required.
Total Number Subchannel Subchannel Total Number Subchannel Subchannel

of Subcarriers Group Range of Subcarriers Group Range
0 0 0 0-5
1 N/A 1 6-9
2 1 2 10-15
128 1024
3 N/A 3 16-19
4 2 4 20-25
5 N/A 5 26-29
0 0-4 0 0-11
1 N/A 1 12-19
2 5-9 2 20-31
512 2048
3 N/A 3 32-39
4 10-14 4 40-51
5 N/A 5 52-59
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 749

A9155 User Manual
750 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

CHAPTER 10
CO-PLANNING FEATURES
Chapter 10: Co-planning Features
10 Co-planning Features
A9155 is a multi-technology radio network planning tool. You can work on several technologies at the same time, and
several network scenarios can be designed for any given area; a country, a region, a city, etc. For example, you can design
a GSM and a UMTS network for the same area in A9155, and then work with A9155s co-planning features to study the
mutual impacts of the two networks. A9155 allows you to co-plan any two technologies, be it GSM-UMTS, GSM-
CDMA2000, GSM-WiMAX, etc.
This chapter contains detailed procedures and instructions for the RF planner on co-planning using A9155. This chapter
takes the most common co-planning scenario as reference, i.e., GSM-UMTS co-planning. However, the procedures
described in this chapter are valid for any possible co-planning scenario.
Important: Before starting a co-planning project in A9155, the A9155 administrator must perform the
pre-requisite tasks that are relevant for your project as described in the Setting Up A9155
for Co-planning chapter in the Administrator Manual.
The sectors of both networks can share the same sites database. You can display base stations (sites and transmitters),
geographic data, and coverage predictions, etc., of one network in the other networks A9155 document. You can also
study inter-technology handovers by performing inter-technology neighbour allocations, manually or automatically. Inter-
technology neighbours are allocated on criteria such as the distance between sectors or coverage overlaps.
A9155 supports MS Access, MS SQL Server, Oracle, and Sybase databases. Therefore, you can work with A9155 docu-
ments connected to databases.
A9155s co-planning features include:
"Displaying Both Networks in the Same A9155 Document" on page 754.
"Creating a UMTS Sector From a GSM Sector" on page 754.
"Comparing GSM-UMTS Coverage Predictions" on page 756.
"Performing Inter-Technology Neighbour Allocation" on page 757.
10.1 Starting a Co-planning Project

Before starting a GSM-UMTS co-planning project, you must have a GSM and a UMTS network designed for a given area;
for example for a country, a region, or a city. One of the two A9155 documents will be referred to as the main document
and the other as the linked document. In our example, the UMTS document is considered as the main document, and the
GSM document as the linked document. There is no rule in A9155 for deciding which is the main document and which is
the linked.
Note: Before starting a co-planning project, make sure that your main and linked documents have
the same geographic coordinate systems.
To start a co-planning project:

1. Open the GSM and the UMTS documents in the same A9155 session.
a. Select File > Open or File > Open From a Database.
2. Link the required items or folders from the Explorer window of the linked document to the Explorer window of the
main document:
a. Right-click the folder or the item to link. The context menu appears.
b. Select Make Accessible in > [main document]. The item or folder is made accessible in the Explorer win-
dow of the main document.
As soon as a link is created between the two documents, A9155 switches to co-planning mode. This means that A9155s
co-planning features are now available.
10.2 GSM-UMTS Co-planning Process

Usually, in a number of countries, where GSM networks have been operating for years, UMTS sites are a subset of the
already deployed GSM sites when they are first deployed. Using existing base station sites is important in speeding up
UMTS deployment and in sharing sites and transmission costs with the existing GSM network. Section "Creating a UMTS
Sector From a GSM Sector" on page 754 shows how you can create UMTS sectors based on existing GSM site and sector
parameters.
The feasibility of sharing sites depends on the relative coverage of the existing network compared to UMTS. It is useful to
compare the coverage of existing GSM services with UMTS speech and data services. Section "Comparing GSM-UMTS
Coverage Predictions" on page 756 shows how to compare coverage predictions.
Any comparison of UMTS and GSM coverage depends on system parameters such as handover. Inter-technology hando-
vers and neighbours can also be determined using A9155. Section "Performing Inter-Technology Neighbour Allocation"
on page 757 explains how to work with inter-technology neighbours.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 753

A9155 User Manual
10.2.1 Displaying Both Networks in the Same A9155 Document

You can display GSM sites, transmitters, coverage predictions, and measurement paths in a UMTS document.
To display transmitters from the GSM document in the UMTS document:
1. Click the GSM documents Map window. The GSM documents Map window becomes active and the Explorer
window shows the contents of the GSM document.
4. Select Make accessible in > [main document] from the context menu, where [main document] is the name of
the UMTS document.
The Transmitters folder of the GSM document is now available in the UMTS document. The Explorer window of the
UMTS document now contains a folder named Transmitters in [linked document], where [linked document] is the
name of the GSM document. GSM and UMTS documents are now linked through the Transmitters folder of the GSM docu-
ment.
The above process can be used to link other folders such as Sites, Predictions, CW Measurements, Test Mobile Data,
Clutter classes, Traffic, and DTM, etc. from one document to another.
Once the folders are linked, you can access their properties and the properties of the items in the folders from either of the
two documents. Any changes made in the linked document will be taken into account in the linked and the main docu-
ments.
If you close the linked document, A9155 displays a warning icon ( ) in the main documents Explorer window, and the
linked folders and items are no longer accessible from the main document. You can load the linked document in A9155
again by right-clicking the linked folder or item in the Explorer window of the main document, and selecting Load Target.
The administrator can create and set a configuration file for the display parameters of GSM and UMTS transmitters in order
to allow you to distinguish them on the map and to be able to select them on the map using the mouse. If such a configu-
ration file has not been set up, you can choose different symbols, sizes and colours for the GSM and the UMTS transmit-
ters. For more information on folder configurations, see "Folder Configurations" on page 71. You can also set the contents
of the tool tips to easily interpret the objects and data displayed on the map. For more information on tool tips, see "Defining
the Object Type Tip Text" on page 35.
In order to easily view differences between networks, you can also change the order of the folders or items in the Explorer
window.
Figure 10.1 shows UMTS transmitters with labels and GSM transmitters data summed up in tool tips.
Figure 10.1: GSM and UMTS Transmitters displayed on the map
10.2.2 Creating a UMTS Sector From a GSM Sector

You can create a new UMTS sector from an existing GSM sector. The new UMTS sector which will be located at the same
site as the GSM sector. The new UMTS sector will have the same common physical parameters as the GSM sector it was
based on. The common physical parameters, also called mast parameters, include:
Site
Dx and Dy (the offset of the antenna from the site)
Antenna Height
754 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Azimuth
Mechanical Tilt
Note: This feature is useful for deploying UMTS on existing GSM sites, especially when the new
UMTS sector is supposed to share the main antenna with the GSM sector.
To create a UMTS sector from a GSM sector:

1. Click the main documents Map window.
3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the linked Transmitters folder.
4. Right-click the GSM transmitter where you want to create a UMTS transmitter. The context menu appears.
5. Select Copy in Network: UMTS from the context menu.
A9155 makes a UMTS transmitter by copying the GSM transmitter from the linked document to the main document and
initialising the new UMTS transmitter with the common physical parameters from the GSM transmitter and the radio param-
eters from the default UMTS station template.
You can also create a group of UMTS transmitters from a group of GSM transmitters by selecting the Copy in Network
command available in the context menu of the Transmitters folder, or a subfolder.
Before creating the new UMTS transmitter, A9155 verifies that the GSM transmitters site has the same geographical coor-
dinates (location) as the site in the UMTS document. This will always be true if the A9155 administrator has set up site
sharing in the database. If the sites database is not shared by the two documents, this step detects any possible incon-
sistency in the two sites databases.
The Copy in Network command is also available for a group of linked transmitters. To update the display settings of the
new UMTS transmitter:
2. Right-click the Transmitters folder of the main document. The context menu appears.
3. Select Apply Configuration from the context menu.
Figure 10.2: New UMTS Transmitter Before and After Applying the Configuration
Note: The azimuths and mechanical tilts of secondary antennas or remote antennas are not
included in the copy and have to be set up manually.
10.2.2.1 Synchronising Shared Common Physical Parameters

If a Propagate Changes macro icon is available in A9155, you can synchronise the common physical parameters shared
between transmitters of the two linked documents. You can run this macro by clicking the macro icon in either the main or
the linked document. The macro reads the common physical parameters from the active document, linked or main, and
updates them in the other document. A log of the modifications is available in the Event Viewer.
Important: Before running the macro, make sure that the main and the linked documents are both open
in A9155, and, that the user-defined field SharedMast has been added to the Transmitters table of both
the documents. Ask the A9155 administrator to add this field to the databases if you are working with
documents connected to databases. Verify as well that the SharedMast field in the main and the linked
documents contains the same information for the transmitters that share common physical parameters.
The field should be left blank for transmitters that do not share common physical parameters.
Note: If the Propagate Changes macro icon is not available in A9155, ask the A9155 administra-
tor to check whether this macro has been installed in silent mode or has not been installed.
If the macro has been installed in silent mode, the changes you make to the common
shared parameters are updated and saved when you save your A9155 documents.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 755

A9155 User Manual
Figure 10.3: Synchronisation Macro Icon
10.2.3 Comparing GSM-UMTS Coverage Predictions

A9155 provides you with co-planning features which enable you to not only analyse the impact of changing common phys-
ical antenna parameters in one technology network, but also to analyse the impact on the other network. If you have GSM
and UMTS transmitters that share some common physical parameters, you can visualise the effect of changing the shared
parameters in both documents.
If you modify any common physical parameter of a UMTS transmitter which shares these parameters with a GSM trans-
mitter, it is necessary to study the impact of this change on the GSM networks coverage. If you have modified any param-
eter of a UMTS transmitter sharing parameters with a GSM transmitter, you can study the impact of this change on the
GSM network by creating a Coverage Prediction by Transmitter (Best Server) and a Coverage Prediction by Signal
Level. If you have modified any parameter of a GSM transmitter sharing parameters with a UMTS transmitter, you can
study the impact of this change on the UMTS network by creating a Coverage Prediction by Pilot Best Server and a
Coverage Prediction by Ec/Io Level.
Note: The common physical parameters include Dx and Dy, antenna height, azimuth, and
mechanical tilt.
Following is the recommended process for comparing GSM and UMTS coverage predictions.
1. Create and calculate a coverage prediction by transmitter (Best Server) and a coverage prediction by signal level
in the GSM document.
2. Create and calculate a coverage by transmitter (Pilot Best server) and a coverage prediction by Ec/Io level in the
UMTS document.
3. Carefully choose display settings for the coverage predictions and tool tip contents in order to easily interpret the
predictions displayed in the Map window. This can be very helpful in quickly assessing information graphically and
using the mouse.
4. Make the two GSM coverage predictions accessible in the UMTS document.
Figure 10.4: UMTS Coverage Prediction (Pilot Best Server) Pink Contours With no Interior
756 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 10.5: GSM Coverage Prediction (Best Server) High Transparency With Full Interior Coloured According to
BCCH With BCCH/BSIC Information Available in Tooltips
5. Change parameters to optimise the UMTS network, if needed.

6. Run the UMTS coverage predictions again to compare the effects of the changes you made with the GSM cov-
erage predictions.
7. Run the synchronisation macro if you want to update the GSM document with the common physical parameters,
if any.
8. Run the GSM coverage predictions in the GSM document to visualise the effect on the GSM coverage predictions.
For more information on synchronising common physical parameters, see "Synchronising Shared Common Physical
Parameters" on page 755.
You can also use the Coverage Prediction Comparison feature available in A9155 to compare the GSM and the UMTS
coverage predictions. .
To compare a GSM coverage prediction with a UMTS coverage prediction:
3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the main documents Predictions folder.
4. Right-click the UMTS coverage prediction you want to compare. The context menu appears.
5. Select Compare With > [linked coverage prediction] from the context menu, where [linked coverage predic-
tion] is the GSM coverage prediction you want to compare with the UMTS coverage prediction. The Comparison
Properties dialogue opens.
6. Select the display parameters of the comparison and add a comment if you wish.
7. Click OK.
The two coverage predictions are compared and a comparison coverage prediction is added to the main documents
Predictions folder.
10.2.4 Performing Inter-Technology Neighbour Allocation

A deployed or new UMTS network is considered correctly deployed only if inter-system handover with the existing GSM
network works. Although the deployment of UMTS starts in areas with high traffic volume, but mobile customers expect
roaming-access everywhere - without losing their connection. Therefore, it is essential to verify the inter-system hando-
vers.
Roaming between a UMTS and a GSM network can be studied in A9155 by allocating neighbour GSM sectors to UMTS
cells. The following sections describe the features available in A9155 that help the RF planner to carry out inter-technology
neighbour planning.
"Setting Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs" on page 758.
"Displaying Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs on the Map" on page 758.
"Allocating Inter-Technology Neighbours Manually" on page 760.
"Allocating Inter-Technology Neighbours Automatically" on page 760.
"Displaying Inter-Technology Neighbours on the Map" on page 761.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 757

A9155 User Manual
In the sections listed above, it is assumed that A9155 is already in co-planning mode, and the UMTS and the GSM docu-
ments have already been linked. For more information on starting a co-planning project, see "Starting a Co-planning
Project" on page 753.
10.2.4.1 Setting Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs

You can set inter-technology neighbour constraints by defining exceptional pairs in A9155. These constraints can be taken
into account in the automatic allocation of inter-technology neighbours.
To define inter-technology exceptional pairs between GSM transmitters in the linked document and the UMTS cells in the
main document:
4. Select Cells > Neighbours > Inter-technology Exceptional Pairs from the context menu. The Exceptional
Pairs of Inter-technology Neighbours table appears.
5. Enter one exceptional pair per row of the table. Each cell can have more than one exceptional pairs.
6. For each exceptional pair, select:
a. Cell: The name of the cell in the UMTS document; first part of the exceptional pair. The names of all the cells
in the UMTS document are available in the list.
b. Neighbour: The name of the transmitter in the GSM document; second part of the exceptional pair. The
names of all the transmitters in the GSM document are available in the list.
c. Status: The status indicates whether the GSM transmitter should always (forced) or never (forbidden) be con-
sidered as a neighbour of the UMTS cell.
d. A9155 fills the Number and Distance (m) fields automatically.
You can also define exceptional pairs of UMTS cells for GSM transmitters. However, in GSM, neighbours and exceptional
pairs are allocated by transmitter (i.e., by sector) whereas in UMTS, neighbours and exceptional pairs are allocated by cell.
You can access the lists of inter-technology neighbours and exceptional pairs through a cells Properties dialogue. To
open a cells Properties dialogue:
5. Double-click the row corresponding to the cell whose properties you want to access. The cells Properties dia-
logue appears.
6. Click the Inter-Technology Neighbours tab.
In GSM, the inter-technology neighbours tab is available in each transmitters Properties dialogue.
Note: Exceptional pairs are not taken into account in manual neighbour allocation.
10.2.4.2 Displaying Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs on the Map

You can display inter-technology exceptional pairs on the map in order to study the forced and forbidden neighbour rela-
tions defined in the Inter-technology Exceptional Pairs table.
To display exceptional pairs of UMTS cells and GSM transmitters:
4. Select Cells > Neighbours > Display Options from the context menu. The Neighbour Display dialogue
appears.
5. Select Inter-technology in the Display Links list.
- Outwards Non-Symmetric: Shows an exceptional pair link for each UMTS cell that has an exceptional pair
with a GSM transmitter. These links are represented with straight dashed lines of the same colour as the
UMTS transmitters.
- Inwards Non-Symmetric: Shows an exceptional pair link for each GSM transmitter that has an exceptional
pair with a UMTS cell. These links are represented with straight dashed lines of the same colour as the GSM
tranmitters.
- Symmetric: Shows an exceptional pair link for each UMTS cell that has an exceptional pair with a GSM trans-
mitter only if the GSM transmitter also has this UMTS cell in its exceptional pair list. These links are repre-
sented with straight black lines.
- Carrier: A9155 displays the exceptional pair links for the carrier you select.
758 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

7. Click the context menu button ( ) of the Neighbour Display button ( ) in the Radio toolbar. The context
menu appears.
8. Select the neighbour links to display: Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
9. Click the Neighbour Display button ( ) in the Radio toolbar. The selected neighbours are displayed on the
map. Neighbour display remains activated until you click the Neighbour Display button ( ) again.
10. Click a transmitter on the map to show its exceptional pair links.
The exceptional pair links can be displayed even of you do not have neighbours allocated. If you select All in the Display
Links list, A9155 displays both inter-technology and intra-technology exceptional pairs on the map.
10.2.4.2.1 Adding and Removing Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs Using the Mouse
You can set inter-technology exceptional pairs using the mouse. A9155 adds or removes forced or forbidden exceptional
pairs depending on the display option set, i.e., Forced Neighbours or Forbidden Neighbours.
Before you can add or remove exceptional pairs using the mouse, you must activate the display of exceptional pairs on
the map as explained in "Displaying Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs on the Map" on page 758.
To add a symmetric forced or forbidden exceptional pair:
2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter with which you want to set an exceptional pair. A9155 adds both transmitters
to the inter-technology exceptional pairs list of the other transmitter.
To remove a symmetric forced or forbidden exceptional pair:
2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter that you want to remove from the list of exceptional pairs. A9155 removes
both transmitter from the inter-technology exceptional pairs list of the other transmitter.
To add an outwards forced or forbidden exceptional pair:
2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter with which you want to set an exceptional pair. A9155 adds the reference
transmitter to the inter-technology exceptional pairs list of the other transmitter.
To remove an outwards forced or forbidden exceptional pair:
2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter that you want to remove from the list of exceptional pairs. A9155 removes
the reference transmitter from the inter-technology exceptional pairs list of the other transmitter.
To add an inwards forced or forbidden exceptional pair:
2. There can be two cases:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 759

A9155 User Manual
- If the two transmitters already have a symmetric exceptional pair relation, press CTRL and click the other
transmitter. A9155 converts the symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric exceptional pair relation.
- If there is no existing exceptional pair relation between the two transmitters, first create a symmetric excep-
tional pair relation between the two transmitters, and then press CTRL and click the other transmitter. A9155
converts the symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric exceptional pair relation.
To remove an inwards forced or forbidden exceptional pair:
2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter that you want to remove from the list of exceptional pairs. A9155 removes
the transmitter from the inter-technology exceptional pairs list of the other transmitter.
10.2.4.3 Allocating Inter-Technology Neighbours Manually

You can allocate inter-technology neighbours in A9155 manually. Exceptional pair constraints are not taken into account
when you manually allocate neighbours.
To allocate inter-technology neighbours between GSM transmitters in the linked document and the UMTS cells in the main
document:
4. Select Cells > Neighbours > Inter-technology Neighbours from the context menu. The Exceptional Pairs of
Inter-technology Neighbours table appears.
5. Enter one exceptional pair per row of the table. Each cell can have more than one exceptional pairs.
6. For each exceptional pair, select:
a. Cell: The name of the cell in the UMTS document; i.e., the first part of the exceptional pair. The names of all
the cells in the UMTS document are available in the list.
b. Neighbour: The name of the transmitter in the GSM document; i.e, the second part of the exceptional pair.
The names of all the transmitters in the GSM document are available in the list.
c. Status: The status indicates whether the GSM transmitter should always (forced) or never (forbidden) be con-
sidered as a neighbour of the UMTS cell.
d. A9155 fills the Number and Distance (m) fields automatically. The Reason and Rank fields are reserved for
automatic neighbour allocation. A9155 also automatically sets the Type field to Manual for each new manual
neighbour you allocate.
You can access the lists of inter-technology neighbours and exceptional pairs through a cells Properties dialogue. To
open a cells Properties dialogue:
5. Double-click the row corresponding to the cell whose properties you want to access. The cells Properties dia-
logue appears.
6. Click the Inter-Technology Neighbours tab.
In GSM, the inter-technology neighbours tab is available in each transmitters Properties dialogue.
10.2.4.4 Allocating Inter-Technology Neighbours Automatically

A9155 can automatically determine handover relations between networks of different technologies, for example, GSM and
UMTS. A9155 can automatically determine neighbour GSM transmitters for UMTS cells and vice versa. Inter-technology
neighbours are stored in the database.
Inter-technology handovers occur when the UMTS coverage is not continuous. The networks overall coverage is
extended by a UMTS-to-GSM handover.
To automatically allocate neighbour GSM transmitters to UMTS cells:
5. Click the Inter-technology Neighbours tab. On the Inter-technology Neighbours tab:
760 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Max Number of Neighbours: Set the maximum number of inter-technology neighbours that can be allocated
to a cell. This value can be either set here for all the cells, or specified for each cell in the Cells table.
- Coverage Conditions: The coverage conditions must be respected by each possible neighbour. Click the
Define buttons to change the coverage conditions for the UMTS cells and the GSM transmitters.
In the UMTS Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters:
- Min. Pilot Signal Level: Enter the minimum pilot signal level which must be provided by the reference cell.
- Min. Ec/Io: Enter the minimum Ec/Io which must be provided by reference cell in the area of coverage
overlapping. The reference cell must also be the best server in terms of pilot quality. You can also define
a Max Ec/Io.
- Ec/Io Margin: Enter the Ec/Io margin to define the area of coverage overlapping between UMTS cells.
- Power Contributing to Io: You can let A9155 base the interference ratio on the Total Power Used (as
In the GSM Coverage Conditions dialogue, you can change the following parameters:
- Min. BCCH Signal Level: Enter the minimum BCCH signal level which must be provided by the GSM
transmitter.
- Margin: Enter the margin to define the area of coverage overlapping between GSM transmitters.
- % Min. Covered Area: Enter the minimum percentage of the cells coverage area that the GSM transmitters
coverage area should also cover to be considered as a neighbour.
- Calculation Options:
- Carriers: Select the carriers on which you want to run the allocation. You canchoose one or more carriers;
- Force co-site as neighbours: Selecting this check box will include the co-site GSM transmitters in the
neighbour list of the UMTS cell.
- Force exceptional pairs: Selecting this check box will apply the inter-technology exceptional pair criteria
on the neighbours list of the UMTS cell.
- Reset neighbours: Selecting this option will delete all the existing neighbours in the neighbours list and
perform a clean neighbour allocation. If the box is left unchecked, A9155 keeps the existing neighbours
in the list.
6. Click the Run button to start calculations
7. Once the calculations finish, A9155 displays the list of neighbours in the Results section. The results include the
names of the neighbours, the number of neighbours of each cell, and the reason they are included in the neigh-
bours list. The reasons include:
Reason Description When

Force exceptional pairs is
Exceptional Pair Neighbour relation is defined as an exceptional pair.
selected
Force co-site as
Co-site The neighbour is located at the UMTS cells site.
neighbours is selected
Use Coverage
The neighbour is within the maximum distance from the reference
Distance Overlapping is not
transmitter.
selected
% of covered area Use Coverage
Neighbour relation that fulfils coverage conditions.
and overlapping area Overlapping is selected
The neighbour relation existed before running the automatic
Existing Reset is not selected
allocation.
8. Select the check box in the Commit column of the Results section to choose the inter-technology neighbours you
want to assign to cells.
9. Click the Commit button. The allocated neighbours are saved in the Intra-technology Neighbours tab of each cell.
10. Click Close.
10.2.4.5 Displaying Inter-Technology Neighbours on the Map

You can display inter-technology neighbours on the map in order to study the inter-technology handover scenarios.
To display GSM neighbour transmitters of UMTS cells:
4. Select Cells > Neighbours > Display Options from the context menu. The Neighbour Display dialogue
appears.
5. Select Inter-technology in the Display Links list.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 761

A9155 User Manual
6. Select the neighbour links to display:

- Outwards Non-Symmetric: Shows a neighbour link for each UMTS cell that has a GSM neighbour trans-
mitter. These links are represented with straight dashed lines of the same colour as the UMTS transmitters.
- Inwards Non-Symmetric: Shows a neighbour link for each GSM transmitter that has a UMTS neighbour cell.
These links are represented with straight dashed lines of the same colour as the GSM transmitters.
- Symmetric: Shows a neighbour link for each UMTS cell that has a GSM neighbour transmitter only if the GSM
transmitter also has this UMTS cell as neighbour. These links are represented with straight black lines.
- Carrier: A9155 displays the exceptional pair links for the carrier you select.
7. Click the context menu button ( ) of the Neighbour Display button ( ) in the Radio toolbar. The context menu
appears.
8. Select Neighbours as the type of neighbour links to display.
9. Click the Neighbour Display button ( ) in the Radio toolbar. The neighbour display on the map is activated.
The Neighbour display remains active until you lick the Neighbour Display button ( ) again.
10. Click a transmitter on the map to show its neighbour links.
If you select All in the Display Links list, A9155 displays both inter-technology and intra-technology neighbours on the
map. The figure below shows the intra- and inter-technology neighbours of the transmitter Site22_2.
10.2.4.5.1 Allocating and Removing Inter-Technology Neighbours Using the Mouse

You can allocate inter-technology neighbours using the mouse. A9155 adds or removes neighbours to transmitters if the
display option is set to Neighbours.
Before you can add or remove exceptional pairs using the mouse, you must activate the display of exceptional pairs on
the map as explained in "Displaying Inter-Technology Exceptional Pairs on the Map" on page 758.
2. Press SHIFT and click the transmitter with which you want to set a neighbour relation. A9155 adds both transmitter
to the inter-technology neighbours list of the other transmitter.
mitter from the inter-technology neighbours list of the other transmitter.
To add an outwards neighbour relation:
transmitter to the inter-technology neighbour list of the other transmitter.
762 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To remove an outwards neighbour relation:

2. Press CTRL and click the transmitter you want to remove from the list of neighbours. A9155 removes the refer-
ence transmitter from the inter-technology neighbours list of the other transmitter.
To add an inwards neighbour relation:
2. There can be two cases:
mitter. A9155 converts the symmetric relation to an inwards non-symmetric inter-technology neighbour rela-
tion.
mitter from the inter-technology neighbours list of the other transmitter.
10.3 Tips and Tricks

10.3.1 Minimising Memory Consumption
Co-planning with A9155 requires that both technology documents be open in A9155 at the same time. Loading both GSM
and UMTS documents in memory can cause memory saturation, specially if the documents contain large, for example,
country-wide, networks. To decrease the amount of memory consumed by A9155 in such cases, you can:
Load vector layers in main document only. Loading vectors in the linked document is not necessary and only con-
sumes more memory.
Avoid loading neighbours and custom fields which are not required. This can be performed by creating views in
the database. For more information, see the Administrator Manual.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 763

A9155 User Manual
764 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

CHAPTER 11
IMPORTING AND EXPORTING ALCATEL-
SPECIFIC DATA
Chapter 11: Importing and Exporting ALCATEL-Specific Data
11 Importing and Exporting ALCATEL-Specific

Data
11.1 Importing and Exporting ALCATEL-Specific Data:
Overview
A9155 provides different interfaces in order to import or export specific Alcatel data. Three types of data can be managed:
measurement files, antennas, and CAE data.
Two types of measurement types can be imported into A9155. You can import sessions based on either analogue or digital
measurements.
In an existing project, you can import Alcatel antennas if your current project does not already contain the needed neces-
sary antennas to build your transmitters.
It is also possible to import and export data in GSM and UMTS projects in the form of CAE data.
See also 'A9155 PRC-Generator module: User Manual & Process Description', ref 3DF 01955 0080 PCZZA (Ed 03).
11.2 Measurement Files

11.2.1 Importing Analogue Measurement Files
Unlike in digital measurement files, analogue measurement data refer to measured signal levels along a measurement
path for a unique reference transmitter. A9155 provides different types of dialogs depending on the format (automatically
detected) of the measurement file being imported. For the Alcatel-specific format, a specific measurement import dialog
is available. Nevertheless, the procedure to import measured signal levels from a transmitter stays the same for all formats.
To import analogue measurement files:
2. Right-click the CW Measurements folder to open the context menu.
3. Select Import from the context menu. The Open dialog appears.
4. Browse to the location of the file to be imported and select it. If necessary, specify the format of the file to be
imported.
5. Click Open.
6. The analogue measurement import dialog opens.
7. Use the What's this help to get a description of the fields in the dialog.
8. Click Import to end the import procedure.
A new measurement object is created in the CW Measurement folder and can be managed in the same way as other
measurement items.
Note: The coordinate system must be defined before the import procedure is executed. Measure-
ment files can only be imported into an existing network.
11.2.2 Importing Digital Measurement Files

Unlike in analogue measurement files, digital measurement data refer to measured signal levels along a measurement
path for various transmitters which are identified by (BSIC, BCCH) couples. A9155 automatically identifies the type of
measurement file being imported (digital or analogue).
To import digital measurement files in Alcatel format:
2. Right-click on the CW Measurements folder to open the context menu.
3. Select Import from the context menu. The Open dialog appears.
imported.
5. Click Open.
6. Click Import to end the import procedure.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 767

A9155 User Manual
New measurement objects linked with each involved transmitter are created in the Measurement folder and can be
managed in the same way as other measurement items.
Notes:
The coordinate system must be defined before the import procedure is executed.
Measurement files can only be imported into an existing network.
BSIC and BCCH couples dealing with reference transmitters must be defined before importing
in order to be effectively taken into account.
In each measurement table, a new column named cell type is available. For any measurement
point, the associated value is:
- 0 when the considered transmitter is the reference transmitter for the current cell.
- Another number which is the neighbour number for the current cell.
11.3 Antenna Data

11.3.1 Importing New Alcatel Antennas into an Existing Network
To import a new antenna into an existing network with a Alcatel-specific format (with the extension ".ant"):
1. Select File > Import.
imported.
3. Click OK to import the file. The name, the gain, and horizontal and vertical patterns are imported. Other data are
imported into the comments field.
4. Use the What's this help to get descriptions of the fields available in the antenna dialogs.
Notes:
Drag and drop can be used between any Windows Explorer window and A9155.
A9155 detects already existing antennas and allows you to either keep the previous version or
to replace it with the new one.
11.4 CAE Data

In A9155, you can import or export CAE (Customer Application Engineering) data files in either GSM or UMTS projects.
In GSM/TDMA, supported BSS releases are B6.2, B7.2, B8 and B9.
The different data of interest in GSM projects are:
RNO data: all physical cell data for GSM cells.
Interference matrix in RNO format: This file can only be exported. In order to export this file, the user should
have previously generated interference matrix files in the A9155 format (.clc and .dct).
Experience matrix coming from RNO: This file can only be imported and is used to update the Exceptional pairs
table.
GSM cell design: all logical cell data for GSM cells.
GSM neighbourhoods: define the handover between GSM cells.
Frequency lists: the frequencies to assign globally to transmitters.
PDCH groups: describing the number of timeslots dedicated to packet services per TRX (only relevant in B6).
Frequency Hopping Sequences: sequence lists and HSNs associated with each transmitter.
HOP data: information about the association of data contained in the FHS file with transmitter TRXs of the current
network.
TRX-List file: gives the configuration of each timeslot of each TRX.
3G cells: a short description of the linked 3G cells.
UMTS neighbours: displays the related list.
In UMTS, supported releases are 3GR1, 3GR2 step 1 and 2, 3GR3 and 3GR4.
The different data of interest in UMTS HSDPA projects are:
UMTS cell design: all logical (powers, scrambling code, etc.) and physical (coordinates, antenna information) cell
data for UMTS cells.
UMTS-UMTS neighbourhoods: define the handover between the UMTS cells.
GSM cell design: Some GSM cells will be the target of neighbour cell relationships of UMTS cell. For these
external cells, some basic information has to be provided to the system to allow neighbourhoods to be established.
Cells that are not the target for outgoing handovers from UMTS cells are not considered.
UMTS-GSM neighbourhoods: outgoing handovers between UMTS cell and external GSM cells.
768 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Chapter 11: Importing and Exporting ALCATEL-Specific Data
Warning: Any modifications to CAE parameters during the life of a project are checked (range and type),
based on all releases possible values (union of ranges):
GSM/TDMA: Cell Identity and LAC
UMTS: LocalcellID
These values are checked to ensure that they are unique, but not to ensure that their value is not null;
this is only checked upon export.
11.4.1 Importing CAE Data in an Existing Project

You can import CAE (Customer Application Engineering) data either into GSM projects or into UMTS HSDPA projects.
CAE data files have the extension ".rnp".
A9155 allows the user to import into new or existing .atl projects:
from GSM projects: RNO data, experience matrix, cell data, GSM neighbourhoods, frequency lists, PDCH groups,
FHS (Frequency Hopping Sequences), HOP data, TRX-List, 3G cells and UMTS neighbours.
from UMTS projects: the UMTS cell design, UMTS-UMTS and UMTS-GSM neighbourhoods.
To import CAE data into an open .atl project:
1. Select Tools > CAE data Import.
2. Browse to the location of the CAE data files to be imported and select the item or items to be imported.
For GSM projects, select one or more of the following:
- the considered RNO data (prefix RNO_)

- Cell data (prefix CEL_)
- GSM neighbourhoods (prefix ADJ_)
- frequency list (prefix FRQ_)
- PDCH group (prefix PDC_)
- FHS data (prefix FHS_)
- HOP data (prefix HOP_)
- TRX list (prefix TRX_)
- 3G Cells (prefix C3G_)
- UMTS neighbours (prefix AUG_)
For UMTS HSDPA projects, select one or more of the following:
- the considered cell design (prefix U_cel)

- neighbourhood (prefix UU_Adj and UG_Adj)
3. Click Import. A dialog appears where you can choose which files to import.
4. Use the What's this help to get information about fields available in the dialog.
5. Click Import to finish the import procedure.
Notes:
Drag and drop can be used between any Windows Explorer window and A9155.
This import procedure can used to create new objects or update existing objects.
In GSM projects, RNO files have the extension ".rno". Other files have the extension ".cof" and
are located in the same directory.
In GSM projects *.fhs and *.hop files must be imported at the same time.
*After importing, in order to check the validity of the existing frequency plan with the Frequency
plan consistency checking.
11.4.2 Exporting CAE Data from the Current Project

A9155 allows the user to export the following data in CAE data format (with the extension ".rnp"):
from GSM projects: RNO data, interference matrix, cell data, GSM neighbourhoods, frequency lists, PDCH
groups, FHS and HOP data, TRX-List,
from UMTS projects: the UMTS cell design, GSM cell design (for handover purpose), UMTS-UMTS and UMTS-
GSM neighbourhoods,
To export CAE data from the current project:
1. Select Tools > CAE data Export. A dialog appears where you can choose which files to export.
2. Use the What's this help to get information about fields available in the dialog.
3. Click Export to finish the export procedure.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 769

A9155 User Manual
Notes:
Be sure to respect consistency of data on both pilot, SCH, other CCH powers, and associated
offsets in UMTS HSDPA projects.
Before exporting, in order to check the validity of the existing frequency plan with the Frequency
plan consistency checking.
770 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

CHAPTER 12
MICROWAVE LINK PROJECT MANAGEMENT
Chapter 12: Microwave Link Project Management
12 Microwave Link Project Management

12.1 Microwave Link Project Management: Overview
The Microwave Links module enables you to plan, design and analyse microwave links networks. Using A9155's Micro-
wave links module, microwave links networks can be designed and analysed in separate A9155 projects as well as within
2G (GMS/GPRS/EGPRS) and 3G (CDMA2000/UMTS/WCDMA) mobile network projects.
Using A9155's Microwave Links module, you can define and model frequency bands and sub-bands, antennas, radio
equipment, feeder equipment, passive repeaters, simple, multi-hop, and point-to-multipoint links. It is possible to define
and set target performance objectives in terms of link classes and performance objectives, describing the quality and avail-
ability targets. It is possible to determine link budgets over a single link, over multiple connected links (multi-hop links), or
over a hub with several links (point-to-multipoint links). You can also carry out end-to-end reliability analyses, interference
analyses and frequency planning. A9155 also enables users to design their microwave link networks taking into consid-
eration future growth and enhancements.
Comprehensive analysis features in A9155 microwave link module enable the study of simple, multi-hop, and point-to-
multipoint microwave links in any network. Any microwave link is considered operational when it globally satisfies the
required quality and availability criteria set by the operator. Any microwave link is assessed generally in terms of the link's
robustness, i.e., the data transmission should undergo the least possible errors, the link should suffer the least number of
failures (usually measured per year) and the duration of these failures should also be as short as possible. All these criteria
are described in detail in the ITU standards and recommendations. A9155 follows these standards and enables the user
to set in-depth quality and availability targets for the network being designed.
Furthermore, it is fundamental to the correct performance of a microwave radio link that line-of-sight is available, i.e., there
is a clear transmission path between the two nodes of the link. The electromagnetic signal disperses as it moves away
from source, and therefore the line-of-sight clearance must take account of this dispersion and attention should be paid to
objects near the direct signal path to ensure the required signal levels reach the receiving antenna. This is referred to as
"Fresnel Zone" clearance. A9155's profile analysis feature permits visualising line-of-sight, Fresnel zone clearance and
reflective surfaces along the link's profile.
Real-life microwave links do not operate in ideal environments. As it is not always possible to have a direct line-of-sight
connection between two extremities, repeaters are employed as a workaround in order to create a pseudo-direct link.
A9155 fully models the design and use of microwave repeaters, and allows two repeaters to be inserted within a micro-
wave link. Performance improvement techniques such as frequency and space diversity at reception are also modelled.
Geo data are easily manageable as in the other projects. You may either create or import any of these data. Sites, anten-
nas, links templates, links, and propagation models work in similar ways to sites, antennas, station templates, etc., in other
project types. As with many objects in A9155, these data are easy to manage as they also use generic dialogues. Rain
data in vector form can be can be managed through import, export and edit features.
Since several links can share their extremities (start or end), the description of a microwave links network in A9155 is
divided into two folders in the data tab of the Explorer window:
A Sites folder, which contains the set of points that can be used as extremities for links. This folder can also contain
sites for 2G and 3G mobile network projects in the case of incorporated mobile/microwave projects.
A Microwave Radio Links folder, which contains the descriptions of links, multi-hop links, point-to-multipoint links,
the quality targets and performance objectives, etc. A link always refers to two items in the Sites folder.
These folders work as any other object in the explorer window as far as data visibility, data priority and data display are
concerned.
For all the dialogues within microwave link projects, the What's this context tool helps you to understand the specific fields
and available features.
12.2 Microwave Links Projects Protocol

A normal microwave links project protocol using A9155 is described below:
Project initialisation
- Choice of a project template
- Definition of the projection and display coordinate systems
- Definition of length, reception and transmission units
Note: You must define the coordinate systems for the microwave project before starting the
design and analysis processes.
Definition of geographic data through the import or the creation of maps

- Clutter classes
- Clutter heights
- DTM
- Rain and climate data
- Vector data
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 773

A9155 User Manual
- Population data
- Generic data
- etc.
Radio data definition
- Frequency bands and sub-bands
- Antennas (operating frequency band, gain, diameter, horizontal and vertical diagrams, etc.)
- Equipment and trunk types (operating frequency band, power, losses, BER graphs, MTBF, etc.)
- Waveguides and cables (operating frequency, losses, type, etc.)
- IRFs
Definition of Performance Objectives for the network
- Link classes
- Quality Objectives (relevant performance parameter, link class, minimum and maximum data rates, etc.)
- Availability Objectives (relevant performance parameter, link class, minimum and maximum data rates, etc.)
Network design
- Creation of microwave links (with assigned antennas, equipment, link class, waveguides and cables, IRF, etc.)
- Creation of repeaters
- Creation of multi-hop microwave links (groups of microwave links considered as one in terms of engineering)
Analyses
- Probability of interruption
- Line-of-sight determination
- Link budgets
- Interference studies
- Profile analysis
- Study of reflections
- Performance objectives met (Quality and availability)
- Diversity
- Parities
The optimisation and analysis are iterative steps. In some cases the last four steps can be repetitive in order to achieve
an optimum solution for the network.
12.3 Global Microwave Link Parameters

In A9155 microwave module, global parameters can be defined for the entire network at the Microwave Radio Links folder
level. The following properties can be managed at this level in order for these to be available for all the microwave links of
the network:
Frequency bands
Frequency sub-bands with the definitions of upper and lower half-bands
Microwave links classes
Quality objectives
Availability objectives
As other objects in A9155, these parameters have been integrated to the tool with the goal to make their management and
their use easy. Through these, it is possible to define the frequency range of operation for the microwave links network,
respective frequency sub-bands and corresponding channels, link classes, quality and availability objectives for different
microwave links present in the network.
12.3.1 Managing Microwave Links Frequency Bands

Definition of frequency bands enables to determine the operational limits of a microwave link. Primitive analyses can be
performed on any microwave link using the central frequency even if channels have not yet been assigned. It is obligatory
to define at least one frequency band to assign to created microwave links. A9155 includes some pre-defined ITU compli-
ant frequency bands by default.
To create, define or modify a frequency band:
1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window,
2. Right-click on the Microwave Radio Links folder to open the context menu,
3. Select Frequency Bands command from the Frequencies menu to open the Frequency Bands table,
4. Enter or modify values in the table columns to create or modify frequency bands.
You can also open a properties dialogue for any defined frequency band by double-clicking its record in the Frequency
Bands table.
For each frequency band, you have to assign a name and define the lower and upper limiting frequencies.
774 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

12.3.2 Managing Microwave Links Frequency Sub-Bands

Frequency sub-bands are normalized, ITU-compliant, divisions of frequency bands into channels. Frequency bands can
be divided into a number of frequency sub-bands. ITU may have more than one division (frequency sub-bands) defined
for a single frequency band.
A frequency sub-band comprises two half-bands. A duplex link usually uses one of these half-bands in one direction and
the other half-band in the other direction. These half-bands are referred to as upper and lower half-bands.
A channelisation plan can be defined for the lower and upper half-band of each sub-band. A channelisation plan, or a chan-
nel-to-frequency map, is automatically generated by A9155 using the information entered for the frequency sub-bands.
To create, define or modify a frequency sub-band:
3. Select Frequency Sub-Bands command from the Frequencies menu to open the Frequency Sub-Bands table,
4. Enter (or change) values in the table columns to create (or modify) frequency sub-bands.
You can also open a properties dialogue for any defined frequency sub-band by double-clicking its record in the
Frequency Sub-Bands table.
For each frequency sub-band, you have to assign a frequency band, a reference frequency, lower and upper half-band
shifts, the inter-channel space, first and last channels, channels to be excluded from the channel-to-frequency map, and
the relevant ITU recommendations.
To view the channel-to-frequency mapping:
3. Select Frequency Sub-Bands command from the Frequencies menu to open the Frequency Sub-Bands table,
4. Double-click on the relevant record to open its properties dialogue,
5. Click the Channels/Frequencies Mapping button to display the channels-to-frequency map,
6. Click OK to close the window.
12.4 Microwave Links Classes and Performance

Objectives
12.4.1 Managing Microwave Links Classes
Microwave links classes are defined in order to distinguish between different microwave link types and relate different
performance objectives to them. Different microwave link classes can then be associated with different microwave links
declaring their general target parameters as well as usage limitations. Link classes can be defined and modified in a micro-
wave links project.
To create or modify a microwave links class:
3. Select Link Classes command from the context menu to open the Link Classes table,
4. Enter (or modify) values in the table columns to create (or modify) link classes.
You can define the type of link class (International or National), relevant link sub-class (Long Haul, Short Haul, Access,
Intermediate country etc.), and minimum and maximum length for links associated to the link class.
A9155 microwave module contains a few pre-defined microwave links classes compliant with the ITU G.821 and G.826
recommendations.
12.4.2 Microwave Links Performance Objectives

The ITU G.821 recommendation defines microwave performance parameters as functions of microwave performance
events. As according to the ITU recommendations, error events can occur in link paths or in connections, some of the error
performance events are applicable to both while others are specific to path or connection. Microwave error performance
parameters are fully modelled in A9155, these include:
ESR
SESR
BBER
The above-listed error performance parameters rely on measurements of microwave error performance events. Error
performance events and error performance parameters are briefly described in the following sections.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 775

A9155 User Manual
Microwave Error Performance Events
Microwave error performance parameters are derived from the following events:
Errored Block (EB): It is a block of data with one or more erroneous bits.
Errored Second (ES): It is a one-second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect.
Severely Errored Second (SES): It is a one-second period which contains 30% errored blocks or at least one
defect. SES is a subset of ES.
Note: Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds may result in periods of unavailability, especially
when there are no backup/standby procedures in use. Periods of consecutive Severely
Errored Seconds persisting for T seconds, where 2 = T < 10 (sometimes referred to as "fail-
ures"), can have a severe impact on service, leading to disconnection of switched services.
The frequency of these events can be limited through limiting the SESR.
Background Block Error (BBE): It is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES.
Microwave Error Performance Parameters
The total observation time (Stotal) is split into two parts, namely, time for which the connection is deemed to be available
(Savail) and that time when it is unavailable (Sunavail). Error performance should only be evaluated while the connection is
in the available state. Parameters are:
Errored Second Ratio (ESR): The ratio of ES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement
interval.
Severely Errored Second Ratio (SESR): The ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed meas-
urement interval.
Background Block Error Ratio (BBER): The ratio of Background Block Errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time
during a fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.
In A9155, it is possible to define microwave link classes and performance objectives based on these error performance
parameters. A9155 also includes default lists of microwave link classes and performance objectives derived from the ITU
G.821 and G.826 recommendations.
Functions of Microwave Error Performance Objectives
The performance objectives aim to serve two main functions:

To give the user of national and international digital networks an indication as to the expected error performance
under real operating conditions, thus facilitating service planning and terminal equipment design;
To form the basis upon which performance standards are derived for transmission equipment and systems in an
ISDN connection.
The performance objectives represent a compromise between meeting service requirements and designing a practically
feasible network considering the economic and technical constraints. The performance objectives, although expressed to
suit the needs of different services are intended to represent a single level of transmission quality.
12.4.2.1 Microwave Links Quality Objectives

Quality objectives can be defined in A9155 for different link classes depending on different parameters (BBER, ESR and
SESR). A number of quality objectives can be defined for each link class. Each quality objective is characterised by a
performance objective parameter equation that describes the limitation of the relevant quality objective parameter (BBER,
ESR, SESR). The parameter equations depict the behaviour of the quality parameter depending on the length (L) of the
microwave link. The length of a microwave link is in turn limited by the minimum and maximum lengths declared in the
microwave links class. Each quality objective is also characterised by its minimum and maximum bit rates.
A9155 microwave module includes the standard quality objectives compliant with the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recom-
mendations by default. Customised quality objectives can also be defined by the user.
To modify the pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objectives or to create new customised quality objectives:
3. Select Quality command from the Performance Targets menu to open the Quality Objectives dialogue,
Here you can either,
- Edit the default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objectives by modifying their respective properties in the
relevant tabs.
Or
- Create new customised quality objectives by defining the required parameters and the respective perform-
ance objective parameter equation in the Customised tab.
4. Use the Whats this help to get more information about the different fields in the window,
5. Click OK or Apply to validate.
776 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

12.4.2.2 Microwave Links Availability Objectives

Availability objectives can be defined in A9155 for different link classes depending on different parameters (BBER, ESR
and SESR). A number of availability objectives can be defined for each link class. Each availability objective is character-
ised by a performance objective parameter equation that describes the limitation of the relevant availability objective
parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The parameter equations depict the behaviour of the availability parameter depending
on the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is in turn limited by the minimum and maximum
lengths declared in the microwave links class. Each quality objective is also characterised by its minimum and maximum
bit rates.
A9155 microwave module includes the standard availability objectives compliant with the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826
recommendations by default. Customised availability objectives can also be defined by the user.
To modify the pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objectives or to create new customised availability
objectives:
3. Select Availability command from the Performance Targets menu to open the Availability Objectives dialogue,
Here you can either,
- Edit the default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objectives by modifying their respective properties in the
relevant tabs.
Or
- Create new customised availability objectives by defining the required parameters and the respective perform-
ance objective parameter equation in the Customised tab.
12.5 Managing Microwave Link Equipment

This section describes the management of equipment used for the microwave links network design. The following are
described:
"Microwave Manufacturers Table" on page 777
"Microwave Antennas" on page 777
"Microwave Equipment" on page 782
"Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility" on page 788
12.5.1 Microwave Manufacturers Table

A table containing all the manufacturers of microwave radio equipment and antennas is available in A9155. This table
contains the names of these manufacturers. The Manufacturer columns in equipment, link, antenna etc. properties and
tables point to this table and present its contents in the form of a choice list.
To access the manufacturers table:
2. Expand the Microwave Radio Links folder by clicking the button.
3. Right-click on the Links folder to open the context menu.
4. Choose Open table command from the Manufacturers menu to display the related table.
5. Fill out the appropriate fields either manually, or by importing existing values.
6. Close the table to validate.
You can also double-click on a record in the manufacturers table to open its corresponding properties dialogue.
12.5.2 Microwave Antennas

In A9155, microwave antennas are completely described by providing an antenna name, operating frequency band, manu-
facturer name, horizontal and vertical antenna patterns, gain and antenna diameter.
Operating frequency band and manufacturer related information are used as filtering criteria when defining compatible
antenna/equipment sets.
Four different antenna pattern diagrams are used in microwave antennas, i.e., horizontal and vertical plane diagrams for
horizontal and vertical polarization each. Each of these patterns can have co-polar and cross-polar patterns both defined.
As an antenna can be horizontally and vertically polarized, A9155 uses the relevant antenna pattern diagrams when deter-
mining propagation.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 777

A9155 User Manual
12.5.2.1 Creating Microwave Antennas

A microwave antenna is a device used for radiating or receiving electromagnetic energy in the form of microwaves. A9155
provides well-suited microwave antenna modelling and a list of default microwave antennas as well.
Furthermore, A9155 permits creating new antennas and set the parameters for the characteristics of each of them (Name,
manufacturer, gain, horizontal pattern, vertical pattern, and diameter).
Note: Creating and setting parameters for different antennas on the basis of manufacturers data
is a long and meticulous operation. To make it easier for you A9155 allows the use of copy
and paste functions as easily as in all office automation tools. You may thus create an
antenna from a blank sheet or from an existing one, A9155s display is compatible with
most spreadsheets and word processors.
To create an antenna:
2. Expand the Microwave Radio Links folder by clicking the button,
3. Right-click on the Links folder to open the context menu,
4. Choose Open table command from the Antennas menu to display the related table,
5. Fill out the appropriate fields either manually, or by importing existing values,
You can also double click on a record in the antennas table to open its corresponding properties dialogue. In this dialogue,
all the fields related to the antenna are available. In the General tab, you can define the antenna name, manufacturer (from
the manufacturers table), the operating frequency of the antenna, its diameter and gain.
A microwave antenna is described by 8 radiation patterns. The other four tabs of the antenna properties dialogue corre-
spond to the following antenna pattern diagrams respectively:
Horizontal polarisation - Horizontal plane:
- Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontal plane.
- Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontal plane.
Horizontal polarisation - Vertical plane:
- Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane.
- Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane.
Vertical polarisation - Horizontal plane:
- Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane.
- Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane.
Vertical polarisation - Vertical plane:
- Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane.
- Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane.
The copy/paste functions available in these tabs make it easy to import pattern diagram data from other tools. Therefore,
if you already have table formatted values for microwave antenna patterns in a file (spreadsheet or word processor), you
can copy and paste them in the related tabs (a spreadsheet in the following example).
To copy and paste values into a table:
1. Select from your spreadsheet the columns containing angles and values you want to import.
2. Copy the selection.
Figure 12.1: Horizontal pattern values copying
3. Switch to A9155,
4. Click the first top left cell of the corresponding pattern table.
778 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

5. Press Ctrl+V to paste the data. The data is added to the antenna table.
Notes:
If there are some missing values (blank rows) in your data sheet, A9155 is able to interpolate the
values in order to obtain a complete and realistic pattern all around the antenna. To do so, just
follow exactly the steps as above. When pasted, blank rows are compacted in the pattern table
when the apply button is pressed.
When performing a calculation along an angle on which no data is available, A9155 computes a
linear interpolation from existing pattern values.
12.5.2.2 Importing Microwave Antennas

A9155 permits importing antenna files with Planet microwave antenna format and standard NSMA (National Spectrum
Managers Association) formats defined by recommendations WG16.89.003 and WG16.99.050.
To import antenna files:
2. Click the button to open the Microwave Radio Links folder.
4. Choose Import Manufacturer Data command from the Antennas sub-menu,
5. In the open window, choose one of the following options:
- One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file.
- All the folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder.
6. Click the Browse button ( ) to open the Open dialogue and to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported.
7. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open.
8. Click Import. The file or folders are imported.
Notes
A9155 does not stop the import process when an error occurs. It continues until all the files are
imported and then displays in the Events viewer how many files have been successfully and
unsuccessfully imported.
For further information about the standard NSMA format (recommendation WG16.99.050),
please refer to the web address http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/software/nsma/nsma-intrp.html.
For further information on importing microwave antennas in Planet format, refer to the Adminis-
trator Manual.
12.5.2.3 Managing Microwave Antenna Properties

In A9155, you may edit and modify the current parameters of an antenna. You may do this action either individually for
each antenna, or globally.
Editing Single Radiation Pattern
You can edit horizontal or vertical patterns of each antenna by doing nearly the same as when creating microwave
antennas. To do so:
3. Right-click on the Microwave Radio Links folder to open the context menu.
4. Select Antennas > Open Table. The Antennas table appears.
5. Activate the antenna properties window by double clicking the corresponding record in the table,
6. Choose the pattern tab associated with the pattern you want to edit.
You may change the values by filling new ones directly in the tables. Patterns can also be copied to clipboard or printed.
Note: It is possible to display antenna patterns with either linear or logarithmic axes. To choose
your display system, Right-click the pattern window and choose the appropriate option from
the context menu. The new shape is automatically displayed in the pattern window.
Editing Multiple Radiation Patterns
A9155 allows you to manage antennas in table form. To activate the antenna table, do the same as described above. By
resizing cell heights and widths, you may obtain all the antenna patterns on a view in order to make a comparative choice.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 779

A9155 User Manual
Figure 12.2: Microwave Antenna Data Table
In addition, you may change data directly in the table (click on the cell you want to modify), or use copy and paste (Ctrl+C
and Ctrl+V). This last feature is very useful and allows you to assign patterns from one antenna to others.
Example: In the following table, a new antenna called Antenna1, from Manufacturer1, has been built, with a 40 dB Gain,
5 m diameter, and some patterns. The goal is to copy the patterns of a certain antenna to Antenna1.
To copy the patterns of a certain antenna to Antenna1:
1. Open the antenna table.
2. Select the pattern cell of the antenna whose pattern you want to export.
3. Press Ctrl+C to copy the cell.
Figure 12.3: Pattern Copying Microwave Antenna Data Table
4. Select the pattern cell of the antenna you want to copy this pattern to.
5. Press Ctrl+V to paste the antenna pattern.
780 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 12.4: Pattern Pasting - Microwave Antenna Data Table
A9155 replaces the old pattern with the new one both in the antenna table and properties window. You can check that
data have also been adapted in the patterns table of the modified antenna properties window.
Notes: The way patterns are displayed (linear or logarithmic) is reported in the antenna table as
chosen in any single antenna properties dialogue.
12.5.2.4 Copying Microwave Antenna Patterns to the Clipboard

To copy the horizontal/vertical pattern of an antenna to the clipboard:
2. Expand the Microwave Radio Links folder by clicking clicking the button,
6. Choose the pattern tab associated with the pattern you want to copy (horizontal/vertical),
7. Right-click on the pattern window in order to open the associated context menu,
8. Choose the Copy command from the open menu.
This is possible for both linear and logarithmic display types.
12.5.2.5 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns

To print the horizontal/vertical pattern of an microwave antenna:
6. Choose the pattern tab associated with the pattern you want to print (horizontal/vertical),
7. Right-click on the pattern window in order to open the associated context menu,
8. Choose the Print... command from the open menu.
This is possible for linear and logarithmic display types both.
12.5.2.6 Smoothing Microwave Antenna Vertical Patterns

Empirical propagation models require antenna pattern smoothing in the vertical plane to simulate the effects of reflections
and diffractions. Signal level prediction can be improved by smoothing the high-attenuation points of the vertical pattern.
To smooth the vertical pattern of an existing antenna, proceed as follows:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 781

A9155 User Manual
6. Choose the vertical pattern tab to access the pattern you want to smooth,
7. Right-click on the pattern tab to open the associated context menu,
8. Click Smooth... to open the Smoothing Parameters dialogue,
9. Enter the following smoothing parameters and click OK to smooth the vertical pattern:
- Max Angle: Smoothing will be applied to the section of the vertical pattern between 0 and this angle (clock-
wise).
- Peak-to-Peak Deviation: Criterion for determining the highest attenuation values to which the smoothing will
be applied. All attenuation values which are greater than or equal to the Peak-to-Peak Deviation will be
smoothed by the correction factor.
- Correction: The correction factor by which the attenuation values will be smoothed.
Note: It is advised to make a copy of the antenna before smoothing its vertical pattern.
12.5.3 Microwave Equipment

Microwave radio equipment are devices that manipulate the initial data signals to produce microwave frequency signals
that can be transmitted over a given microwave link and then carry it to the antenna for transmission. And, on the other
hand, these devices carry the received signal from the antenna to the receiver part that regenerates the initial data. Typi-
cally, microwave radio equipment can be the transmitter, the receiver, the waveguides and cables, etc.
Most of these components may be modelled in A9155:
Microwave transceiver equipment: converts data to transmittable RF signals and received RF signals back to data,
Waveguides and cables: carry the RF signals to and from antennas.
In any project, they are described in three respective tables at the Links folder level. In addition, some characteristics,
which may be different for links using the same equipment, are specified in each link properties.
12.5.3.1 Managing Microwave Transceiver Equipment

Microwave transceiver equipment in A9155 can be transmitter or receiver only, or both. A transceiver equipment in A9155
deals with the modulation/demodulation of data, and their conversion to/from RF signals that can be transmitted/are
received through antennas.
In transmission, data are first modulated using the defined modulation type by the microwave transceiver equipments
modulating part, then this baseband modulated signal is up-converted to the microwave carrier frequency, amplified and
transmitted through the microwave antenna over the link.
In the receive direction, the microwave carrier frequency signal is down-converted to baseband form by the microwave
transceiver equipment and is then demodulated to retrieve the actual received data.
Link planners must be aware of the characteristics of radio equipment in order to use the correct parameters. The most
important RF parameters are: operating frequency or frequency range, transmission power and power control, reception
error thresholds, C/I thresholds, etc.
A9155 models microwave transceiver equipment in detail in order to enable link planners to design their networks using
their specific equipment parameters. This enables the link planners to analyse their networks with their specific data being
considered in the calculations and analyses.
12.5.3.1.1 Creating Microwave Transceiver Equipment

A microwave transceiver equipment is used to manage output power, power control, modulation and demodulation of
signals to be transmitted and signals received at the antenna, to describe the system configuration in terms of channels
and to define supported bit rates using trunk types with defined digital hierarchy. A9155 provides well-suited microwave
transceiver equipment modelling and a few default microwave transceiver equipment as well.
Furthermore, A9155 permits creating new transceiver equipment and setting the parameters for the characteristics of each
of them (Name, manufacturer, modulation type, maximum transmission power, automatic transmission power control
parameter, noise figure, system configuration, connector losses, phase, non-phase signatures, etc.).
Note: Creating and setting parameters for different transceiver equipment on the basis of manu-
facturers data is a long and meticulous operation. To make it easier for you A9155 allows
the use of copy and paste functions as easily as in all office automation tools. You may thus
create equipment from a blank sheet or from an existing one, A9155s display is compatible
with most spreadsheets and word processors.
To create an microwave transceiver equipment:

2. Click the button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder to open the context menu.
782 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

4. Select Equipment -> Open table from the context menu to display the related table.
6. Close the table to save your changes.
You can also double-click on a record in the equipment table to open its corresponding properties dialogue.
12.5.3.1.2 Importing Microwave Equipment

A9155 permits importing microwave equipment files with Pathloss format (version 4.0). They are ASCII files with the exten-
sion RAF.
To import equipment files:
2. Click the button to open the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Right-click on the Links folder. The context menu appears.
4. Choose Equipment and Import Manufacturer Data... from the context menu.
5. In the open window, choose one of the following options:
- One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file.
- All the folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder.
6. Click the Browse button ( ) to open the Open dialogue and to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported.
7. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open.
8. Click Import. The file or folders are imported.
Notes
A9155 does not stop the import process when an error occurs. It continues until all the files are
imported and then displays in the Events viewer how many files have been successfully and
unsuccessfully imported.
For further information about the Pathloss file format, see the Technical Reference Guide.
12.5.3.1.3 Managing Microwave Transceiver Equipment Properties

You can manage and edit the properties of the microwave transceiver equipment through their respective properties
dialogues.
To access their properties dialogue:
2. Click the button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder to open the context menu.
4. Select Equipment > Open table from the context menu to display the related table.
5. Double-click one record in the Equipment table. The Property dialogue of the equipment appears.
6. Click the General tab and define the following parameters:
- Model: the equipment name.
- Frequency Band: the operating frequency of the equipment.
- Number of States and Modulation: the supported modulation type.
- Manufacturer: the name of the manufacturer.
- Max Power: the maximum supported power.
- Noise Figure: the noise figure.
- FKTB (17C): the receiver thermal noise calculated at 17C.
- Max ATPC: the maximum the power can be decreased when power control is on.
- XPIF: the cross-polar interference factor.
- System Configuration and Hot Standby Available option: the number of channels that can be used when
the equipment is installed on a link. It is defined in the form of "n + m" where n is the number of channels in
normal use and m is the number of channels available as standby channels. If you have selected Hot Standby
Available, you will have one additional channel available but dedicated as a hot standby channel. Therefore,
when a microwave link is assigned such a piece of equipment, it can use at most n+m+1 channels for the
equipment ports. Each port is assigned a channel in the microwave link properties dialogue.
- Signatures under different conditions.
7. Click the Hierarchy tab and define the following parameters:
- Trunk Type: the trunk type compatible with the equipment and the type of digital hierarchy.
- Capacity: the trunk capacity.
- Bandwidth: the channel width that the equipment can use. It depends on the modulation, the trunk type and
the capacity.
8. Click the Sensitivity tab and define the following parameters:
- Overflow Threshold: the equipment overflow threshold.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 783

A9155 User Manual
- (BER-Sensitivity) pairs: the equipment behaviour and sensitivity in terms of bit error ratios defined for dif-
ferent signal sensitivity conditions.
9. Click the Losses tab.
You can define filter losses on transmission and reception, and transmission and reception losses for each port of
the equipment.
10. Click the BER=f(C/I) tab and choose a BER graph from the list. You can access the properties dialogue of the
assigned BER graph by clicking the button beside the list. The assigned BER graph is used in the calculations
to determine the behaviour of the equipment under different C/I conditions.
Working with these graphs (creating, managing, etc.) is detailed in the following sections.
11. Click the Outages tab and define the mean time before failure (MTBF) and the hot standby commutation delay.
12. Click the Transmitter Mask tab and define the transmission spectrum graph of the equipment.
The graph describes the attenuation of the main transmitted signal (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing
(in MHz). It can be used with the receiver selectivity graph to determine IRF graph when no IRF is defined.
If not available, you can initialise the graph using theoritical graphs. Click the Initialise From Standard Graphs
button and choose a theoretical graph in the list. A9155 filters the theoretical graphs displayed in the list according
to the frequency band and can propose one theoretical graph when its modulation, bandwith and manufacturer
matches the equipment characteristics. For more information on defining theoretical graphs, see "Theoretical
Graphs" on page 784.
13. Click the Receiver Filter tab and define the receiver selectivity graph of the equipment.
The graph describes the attenuation of the main received signal (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in
MHz). It can be used with the transmission spectrum graph to determine IRF graph when no IRF is defined
14. Click the T/I Graphs tab and define the threshold to interference (T/I) graph.
The graph describes the variation of the T/I (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). It can be used
to determine IRF graph when no IRF is defined.
12.5.3.1.4 Theoretical Graphs

A9155 allows you to define theoretical graphs that you can use when the equipment description is not complete (missing
information about the transmission spectrum, the receiver selectivity, T/I graph). These theoretical graphs can describe
either transmission spectrum, or receiver selectivity graph, or T/I graph for a certain manufacturer, frequency band, band-
width, rate, and modulation. Then, they can be used to initialise equipment properties (transmission spectrum, receiver
selectivity, T/I graphs) and calculate IRF graphs when no IRF is defined in the IRF table. Default theoretical graphs are
available for different frequency bands and bandwidths; T/I graphs have been found at the web address http://
www.radio.gov.uk and transmission spectra and receiver selectivity graphs have been taken from the web address
http:\\www.ero.dk.
Creating Theoretical Graphs
A theoretical graph contains information on the behaviour of microwave transceiver equipment under different conditions
of C/I. It represents the changes in the Bit Error Rate with the change in the level of interference suffered.
To create a theoretical graph:
2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.
3. Right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select Equipment and Theoretical graphs from the context menu. The Theoretical graphs table appears.
5. Double-click the theoretical graph you want to modify. The theoretical graphs Properties dialogue appears.
Note: You can create a new theoretical graph by entering a name in the row marked with the New
Row icon ( ) and pressing ENTER.
6. Click the General tab and define the following parameters:
784 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Name: the name of the theoretical graph.

- Type of Graph: the type of theoretical graph you define. It can be either a transmission spectrum, or a receiver
selectivity, or a T/I graph.
- Manufacturer: the manufacturer for which the graph is valid.
- Frequency Band: the frequency band for which the graph is valid.
- Channel Width: the bandwidth for which the graph is valid.
- Rate: the rate for which the graph is valid.
- Modulation: the modulation for which the graph is valid.
7. Click the Values tab and define the corresponding graph.
- If the graph describes the transmission spectrum, define the attenuation of the main transmitted signal (in dB)
as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz).
- If the graph describes the receiver selectivity, define the attenuation of the main received signal (in dB) as a
function of the frequency spacing (in MHz).
- If the graph is a T/I graph, define the variation of the T/I (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz).
8. Click OK to validate.
12.5.3.1.5 Bit Error Rate Graph

Graphs for Bit Error Rate (BER) as a function of carrier-to-interference ratio (C/I) can be defined in A9155. These graphs
are used in the interference and performance analyses to determine whether a microwave link, using a certain transceiver
equipment, is able to function within BER thresholds set by the user for given C/I ratios.
A9155 enables you to model BER graphs for all possible modulation types through its easy to use interface. The supported
modulation types are FSK, PSK, MSK, QAM, MPSK, MQAM. All these modulation types can be modelled with any number
of states (2, 4, 8, 16, etc.).
A9155 interface provides easy manipulation of graph values and the possibility to import/export graphs from/to other office
automation tools using the universal copy (CTRL+C) and paste (CTRL+V) functions.
The following sections describe how to create, manage and assign BER graphs to transceiver equipment.
Creating Bit Error Rate Graphs
A BER graph contains information on the behaviour of microwave transceiver equipment under different conditions of C/
I. It represents the changes in the Bit Error Rate with the change in the level of interference suffered.
To create a BER graph:
4. Choose C/I Theoretical Graphs command from the Equipment menu to display the related table,
You can also import/export these graphs from/to other applications using the copy and paste functions.
Managing Bit Error Rate Graph Properties
You can manage and edit the properties of the graphs through their respective properties dialogues.
4. Choose C/I Theoretical Graphs command from the Equipment menu to display the related table,
5. Double click on the concerned record in the BER graphs table to open its properties dialogue,
7. Click OK to validate or Cancel.
You can display the BER graph by clicking button. A9155 displays the curve and the corresponding
table with the C/I and BER values. Graph is updated in real-time as the values are entered by the user in the table.
12.5.3.1.6 Managing Microwave Trunk Types

Microwave trunk types in A9155 define units of data transfer in terms of bit rates. Primitive examples of these are the E1,
E2, etc., standards defined by the ITU. A9155 models PDH as well as SDH trunk types.
A microwave link forms a trunk connection based on the defined trunk types. Any microwave link transfers data at bit rates
in multiples of the basic trunk type it is based on. This characteristic is modelled in A9155 through the definition of trunk
types, which provide the unit trunk with a defined supported bit rate, and assignment of these trunk types to microwave
links, through microwave equipment, along with a multiple. This multiple is the capacity defined in the microwave equip-
ment properties. This is in fact the number of unit trunks the equipment, and thus the microwave link also, can support.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 785

A9155 User Manual
A microwave link that has a capacity of 2, for example, assigned a trunk type of E1 will be capable of transferring data at
twice the E1 standard bit rate.
The following sections describe this modelling in detail.
Creating a Microwave Trunk Type
Microwave trunk types define the unit capacity of a microwave link. When a microwave link is set up using a certain
antenna and a certain equipment, its capacity, i.e., bit rate, is defined by the compatible trunk type of the equipment and
its capacity. If a microwave equipment is defined to be compatible with trunk type T and has a capacity of N, this implies
that the corresponding microwave link will support N times the bit rate of trunk type T.
A9155 permits creating new trunk types and setting the parameters for the characteristics of each of them (Name,
supported digital hierarchy, i.e., SDH or PDH, maximum and supported binary rates, number of bits per block and BER for
SES).
Note: Creating and setting parameters for different trunk types on the basis of manufacturers data
is a long and meticulous operation. To make it easier for you A9155 allows the use of copy
and paste functions as easily as in all office automation tools. You may thus create trunk
types from a blank sheet or from an existing one, A9155s display is compatible with most
spreadsheets and word processors.
To create a microwave trunk type:

4. Choose Trunk Types command from the Equipment menu to display the related table,
You can also double-click on a record in the trunk types table to open its corresponding properties dialogue.
Managing Microwave Trunk Type Properties
You can manage and edit the properties of different trunk types through their respective properties dialogues. To access
their properties dialogue:
4. Choose Trunk Types command from the Equipment menu to display the related table,
5. Double click on the concerned record in the Trunk Types table to open its properties dialogue,
7. Click OK or Apply to validate or Cancel.
In this dialogue, all the fields related to the trunk type are available.
You can define the trunk type name, compatible digital hierarchy, i.e., PDH (Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy) or SDH
(Synchronous Digital Hierarchy), the maximum and supported binary rates, bits per block transmitted, and the Bit Error
Rate during the severely errored second (BERSES).
You can assign any of the trunk types defined here to any equipment with the digital hierarchy being the compatibility crite-
ria. The capacity parameter in the equipment properties defines the number of these trunk types supported by a microwave
link.
12.5.3.2 Managing Microwave Waveguides and Cables

Waveguides and cables are both used to transfer the RF signal from the transmission module of the microwave equipment
to the microwave antenna.
Microwave energy can be guided in a metallic tube, called a waveguide, with very low attenuation. The electric and
magnetic fields are contained within the guide, and therefore there is no radiation loss. Furthermore, since the dielectric
is air, the dielectric losses are also negligibly small. A waveguide operates between two limiting frequencies, called the
cut-off frequency. Hence, the operating frequency is a very important characteristic for a waveguide. This frequency
depends on the geometry of the waveguide compared to the wavelength of the operation.
Cables, on the other hand, have a metallic inner core with a dielectric material separating the outer metallic conductor.
The cable is covered with a plastic jacket for protection. The dielectric material is usually air or foam in practice. These are
quite robust and therefore easy to install. Cable loss is a function of cross-sectional area; the thicker the cable, the lower
the loss. Cable loss is quoted in terms of decibels per 100m.
The following sections describe the modelling of waveguides and cables in A9155.
786 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

12.5.3.2.1 Creating Microwave Waveguides and Cables

In A9155, microwave waveguides and cables are characterised by the loss per length a signal of their corresponding oper-
ational frequency undergoes per 100m of their lengths. The defined waveguide or cable can be associated with each
microwave link in transmission and reception directions.
A9155 permits creating new waveguides and cables and setting the parameters for the characteristics of each of them
(Name, operating frequency band, manufacturer, loss per length and type).
Note: Creating and setting parameters for different waveguides and cables on the basis of manu-
facturers data is a long and meticulous operation. To make it easier for you A9155 allows
the use of copy and paste functions as easily as in all office automation tools. You may thus
create waveguides and cables from a blank sheet or from an existing one, A9155s display
is compatible with most spreadsheets and word processors.
To create a microwave waveguide and cable:

4. Choose Open table command from the Waveguides and cables menu to display the related table,
You can also double click on a record in the waveguides and cables table to open its corresponding properties dialogue.
12.5.3.2.2 Managing Microwave Waveguides and Cables Properties

You can manage and edit the properties of different microwave waveguides and cables through their respective properties
dialogues. To access their properties dialogue:
4. Choose Open table command from the Waveguides and cables menu to display the related table,
5. Double click on the concerned record in the Waveguides and cables table to open its properties dialogue,
You can define the waveguide or cable name, its operating frequency band, manufacturer name (from Manufacturers
table), loss per 100m length, and its type (cable, elliptic or other).
You can assign any of the microwave waveguides and cables defined here to any microwave link in transmission and
reception directions, defining also the respective lengths. A9155 computes the attenuation suffered by the signal trans-
ferred through these waveguides and cables through this information.
12.5.3.3 Assigning Radio Equipment to Microwave Links

Once defined, antennas, transceiver equipment, waveguides and cables can be assigned to microwave links comprising
the network in order to determine the propagation and losses over the links.
For each microwave link, it is possible to assign these radio equipment to both sites, i.e., in forward and in reverse direction
of the link (from Site A to Site B and from Site B to Site A).
To assign microwave antenna, transceiver equipment, waveguides and cables to a microwave link:
1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window,
3. Expand the Links subfolder by clicking the button,
Either,
a. Right-click on the microwave link to which you want to assign radio equipment to open the associated con-
text menu,
b. Choose the Properties command from the open menu,
Or
- Double click on the microwave link to which you want to assign radio equipment,
4. Click on the Radio tab in the open window to assign antennas and microwave transceiver equipment and Con-
nections tab to assign waveguides and cables,
5. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open window,
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 787

A9155 User Manual
The Radio tab has the following sections and allows you to set the parameters for the antennas on both ends of the link:
Antennas: Antenna models can be selected from the corresponding list with all the antennas compatible with the
frequency band defined for the link. You can define the antenna height with respect to the ground, azimuth and tilt
angles with respect to the direct ray joining the two extremities. You can also define the polarisation of the antenna
to be used. This parameter will help A9155 in deciding which antenna pattern diagrams to use for computations.
If a diversity antenna is used at any of the two sites to improve reception, it can also be defined here along with
the separation between the main and the diversity antennas.
Equipment: Equipment models for the link can be selected from the corresponding list presenting the choice list
of equipment compatible with the microwave links frequency band from the equipment table. Here you can fine-
tune the output power to be used for the link by defining additional tuning and ATPC (Automatic Transmission
Power Control) margins (dB) for the equipment.
Frequencies: The frequency sub-band and diversity separation can be selected in this section. Channels can be
selected by selecting the check boxes in the list, or they can be configured in detail by clicking the Ports Param-
eter Settings button. In the Ports Definition dialogue that appears, you can configure the channels, transmis-
sion and reception ports, transmission and reception losses and the polarisation. Once you have configured one
half-band, you can click the Initialise by Symmetry button to set symmetrical values for the other half-band.
Notes: The number of channels that can be selected is defined by the system configuration setting
in the General tab of the Properties dialogue for each piece of equipment. The system con-
figuration is defined in the form of "n + m" where n is the number of channels in normal use
and m is the number of channels available as standby channels. If you have selected Hot
Standby Available, you will have one additional channel available but dedicated as a hot
standby channel. The values n and m for each piece of equipment can also be modified in
the MW Equipment table.
The Connections tab enables you to define the waveguides and cables used for each site of the link in transmission and
reception directions both. By default the lists for each site list the waveguides and cables compatible with the frequency
band of the microwave link. Here you can also enter the length of each waveguide or cable in order for A9155 to compute
the corresponding losses.
By default, A9155 lists the compatible antennaequipment pairs in the respective lists as defined in the Antennas/Equip-
ment compatibility table. However, it is possible to remove (and re-apply) this compatibility filter directly from the Radio tab
by clicking the (and ) button available beside the antenna and equipment name fields.
Notes
You can access the properties of antennas, transceiver equipment and waveguides and cables
directly from the Radio and Connections tab by clicking the button opposite to the corre-
sponding item.
These parameters can be set for both sites of the microwave link (Site A and Site B).
12.5.4 Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility

12.5.4.1 Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibilities Table
The antenna/equipment compatibilities table enables you to list compatible microwave antennas and equipment. When
you define properties (antenna and piece of equipment) of a microwave link, these compatibility definitions may be used
in order to display only compatible antenna/equipment pairs in the choice lists.
To access the antenna/equipment compatibility table:
3. Right-click on the Microwave Radio Links folder to open the context menu.
4. Choose Open table command from the Antenna/Equipment Compatibilities menu to display the related table.
You can also use the available assistant (table view of antennas and pieces of equipment fabricated by certain manufac-
turer(s) and that operate in the same frequency band) in order to easily define these compatibilities.
Note: You can double-click on a record in the compatibilities table to open its corresponding prop-
erties dialogue.
12.5.4.2 Assistant for Compatibility Definition

In A9155, an assistant enables the user to easily define compatibilities between antennas and equipment. It gives you a
view of antennas and equipment fabricated by certain manufacturers and that operate in the same frequency band.
788 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To use the assistant to define compatibilities:

4. Select Antenna/Equipment Compatibilities and Per Frequency Band/Manufacturer from the context menu.
The Compatibility Definition dialogue appears.
5. Select the frequency band from the menu. Only antennas and equipment operating in the selected frequency
band are displayed in the grid.
6. Choose the antenna manufacturer from the menu. Only antennas fabricated by the selected manufacturer are
displayed in the grid.
7. Select the equipment manufacturer from the menu. Only equipment fabricated by the selected manufacturer is
displayed in the grid.
8. Make an antenna compatible with an equipment:
a. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The context menu appears.
b. Select Add record from the context menu.
9. Remove the compatibility defined between a pair:
b. Select Delete from the context menu.
10. Click OK.
These compatibility definitions are used in the microwave link properties dialogue in order to display only compatible
antenna / equipment pairs in the choice lists.
Figure 12.5: Compatibility definition per frequency band/manufacturer

You can use the Fill (Up, Down, Right, Left) and the copy and paste commands from the context menu available in the
dialogue to assign or remove compatibilities between antennas and equipment. These can also be used through their
proper keyboard shortcuts.
12.6 Managing Microwave Links

In this sectioin, the following are described:
"Microwave Links" on page 789
"Microwave Passive Repeaters" on page 798
"Multi-hop Links" on page 800
"Point-to-Multipoint Links" on page 803.
12.6.1 Microwave Links

A microwave radio link, in A9155, is a point-to-point fixed radio frequency link operating in either simplex or in duplex
mode. Duplex operation means that each radio frequency channel consists of a pair of frequencies, one for transmission
and one for reception. The baseband signal, containing the user data, occupies a limited bandwidth depending on the
modulation scheme used. This baseband signal is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier at the transmission end, and
is transmitted over the air as an electromagnetic wavefront. Microwave radio links are designed to operate between 300
MHz and 60 GHz.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 789

A9155 User Manual
A microwave link comprises two transmission/reception ends with antennas, transceiver equipment, etc., installed at both.
A9155 enables you to manage globally or individually the microwave link parameters and their individual activity/inactivity.
A site can support one or more microwave links and/or passive repeaters. With A9155, you may work on several types,
from simple to multi-hop to point-to-multipoint links, by creating new ones from nothing or templates.
Multi-hop microwave links, or multi-hops, are a set of two or more microwave links that are interconnected to get to a desti-
nation. A multi-hop link can be modelled in A9155 as described in "Multi-hop Links" on page 800. Point-to-multipoint links
are sets of microwave links connected to a hub. A point-to-multipoint link can be modelled in A9155 as described in "Point-
to-Multipoint Links" on page 803.
The items referenced in this part deal with management of simple microwave links, multi-hop links and microwave links
templates. In the following sections, steps describe the ways of analysing candidate microwave sites, the creation, dele-
tion, moving and setting of the global properties of the microwave links, multi-hop links, point-to-multipoint links, and micro-
wave links templates.
12.6.1.1 Analysing Microwave Sites

A9155 provides different tools in order to analyse candidate microwave sites. In this section, the following are explained.
"Studying LOS between Candidate Microwave Sites" on page 790
"Checking LOS Area around One Site Graphically" on page 790
"Checking Intersection of Line of Sight Areas" on page 791
"Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Microwave Sites" on page 791
"Performing a 360 View on Microwave Sites" on page 792
12.6.1.1.1 Studying LOS between Candidate Microwave Sites

A9155 incorporates a useful tool for determining line of sight (LOS) between several candidate microwave sites.
To perform the LOS study at any site:
1. Right-click the site either directly on the map, or from the Sites folder of the Explorer windows Data tab. The
2. Choose the Line of Sight Report command from the context menu. The Calculation Parameters dialogue
appears.
3. Define the the maximum distance around the selected site, the value of the k factor and the operating frequency
you want to simulate.
4. Under Transmitter Site Height, either select the Use the pylon height defined per site check box in order to take
into account the pylon height defined for the sites and define a default height that A9155 will use if no value is
defined for the site, or keep clear the Use the pylon height defined per site check box in order to force a global
value for all the sites.
5. Under Receiver Height, either select the Use the pylon height defined per site check box in order to take into
account the pylon height defined for the sites and define a default height that A9155 will use if no value is defined
for the site, or keep clear the Use the pylon height defined per site check box in order to force a global value for
all the sites.
6. Click OK.
A9155 displays results in the Line of Sight Report table.
The Line of Sight Report table contains the following information for each pair of sites Site1-Site2. Site1 is the studied
site and Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone (for infor-
mation on the focus zone, "Setting a Focus Zone" on page 818 and for information on the computation zone, see "Setting
a Computation Zone" on page 817).
- Distance: The distance between both sites.
- Line of Sight: The percentage of clearance/penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid. The value can vary between
-100 and 100%. From -100 to 0%, this is a percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid
and from 0 to 100%, it corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid.
- Site1 Height: The height of Site1.
- Site2 Height: The height of Site2.
In addition, A9155 displays on the map a terrain section between each pair of sites (See Displaying the Terrain Profile
Between Candidate Microwave Sites on page 791.) and the studied site is selected.
Note: This feature is also available from any group of sites or from the Sites folder.
12.6.1.1.2 Checking LOS Area around One Site Graphically

The LOS area analysis tool enables the user to view the visible area around a site.
To display the line of sight area around a site:
2. Select Line of Sight Area from the context menu. The Line of Sight Area dialogue appears.
3. Under Calculation Parameters, define the maximum distance around the selected site, the transmitter site
height, the receiver site height, the value of the k factor and choose to study either the line of sight clearance
790 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

between the transmitter and receiver sites, or a percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. In the last case,
define the operating frequency you want to simulate and the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the
Fresnel ellipsoid.
4. Under View, choose the line of sight area colour and the transparency.
5. Click on OK to validate.
To hide the line of sight area around a site:
2. Select Hide Line of Sight Area from the context menu.
12.6.1.1.3 Checking Intersection of Line of Sight Areas

The LOS area analysis can be performed for several sites. The tool enables the user to view the line of sight areas of sites
within the computation zone (for information on the computation zone, see "Setting a Computation Zone" on page 817)
and to study intersection between them.
To display the line of sight areas of several sites and intersection between them:
1. Right-click the Sites folder of the Explorer windows Data tab. The context menu appears.
2. Select Line of Sight Areas from the context menu. The Line of Sight Areas dialogue appears.
3. Click the Calculation Parameters tab and define the following parameters.
- Define the maximum distance around the selected sites and the value of the k factor.
- Under Penetration Condition, choose to study either the line of sight clearance between the transmitter and
receiver sites, or a percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. In the last case, define the operating fre-
quency you want to simulate and the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid.
- Under Transmitter Site Height, either select the Use the pylon height defined per site check box in order to
take into account the pylon height defined for the sites and define a default height that A9155 will use if no
value is defined for the site, or keep clear the Use the pylon height defined per site check box in order to force
a global value for all the sites.
- Under Receiver Height, either select the Use the pylon height defined per site check box in order to take into
account the pylon height defined for the sites and define a default height that A9155 will use if no value is
defined for the site, or keep clear the Use the pylon height defined per site check box in order to force a global
value for all the sites.
You can display on the map either all the calculated line of sight areas, or only the areas where there is intersection
of several line of sight areas.
- In order to display the line of sight area of each calculated site, choose One Area per Site. You can define
the line of sight area colour and the transparency.
- In order to display intersection areas between the line of sight areas, select Overlapping. You can display
with different colours and transparancy levels the areas covered by at least two sites, at least three sites and
all the sites.
5. Click on OK to validate.
To hide the line of sight areas:
1. Right-click the Sites folder of the Explorer windows Data tab. The context menu appears.
2. Select Hide Line of Sight Areas from the context menu.
12.6.1.1.4 Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Microwave Sites

You can use the Height Profile tool in order to study the terrain section between two candidate microwave sites. Before-
hand, you must have calculated a LOS report on a site or a group of sites (see "Studying LOS between Candidate Micro-
wave Sites" on page 790).
1. On the map, click the terrain section you want to analyse.
2. Click the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar.

3. A9155 opens the Terrain Section tab of the Profile analysis window. It displays the Fresnel ellipsoid between
both sites, height and clutter along the profile. In order to determine the Fresnel ellipsoid, A9155 uses the site
heights and the k factor value taken into account for the LOS report calculation.
Then, you can use any terrain section in order to rapidly create a microwave link.
1. On the map, right-click the terrain section you want to use for the microwave link design.
2. Choose the Create Link command in the context menu. A9155 adds the new microwave link in the Links folder;
its properties are based on the selected link template.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 791

A9155 User Manual
12.6.1.1.5 Performing a 360 View on Microwave Sites

A9155 incorporates a tool for determining line of sight from the location of any site. To perform a 360 view at any site:
Either,
a. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
b. Expand the Sites folder by clicking the button,
c. Right-click on the Site at which you want to view the 360 view to open the context menu,
Or,
- Right-click on the Site on the map at which you want to view the 360 view to open the context menu,
1. Choose the 360 view command from the context menu,
2. The Calculation Parameters dialogue appears,
3. In the Parameters tab, you can define the different parameters needed to determine the horizon profile from the
site location. You can define azimuth of the selected site, the aperture angle, the calculation step, maximum dis-
tance and the heights of the site and the receiver.
4. Click OK. The 360 View tab of the Microwave Link Analysis window opens.
A9155 calculates and displays the horizon profile for the selected site. Every x around the site (value user-defined
in the Calculation Parameters dialogue), it considers a fictitious link and determines the first diffraction obstacle
along this link. Note that the curvature of the Earth is considered in order to find the first diffracting obstacle and
its height. Each obstacle is marked by a point. If you click the point, you can view its position in the map window.
Finally, if you place the mouse cursor on the point, A9155 displays a popup with the following information: the
diffraction obstacle coordinates, its distance from the site, its angle with the site azimuth and its altitude.
Note: The curvature of the Earth for the 360 view is considered to be zero at the selected site
and maximum at the point of reception (i.e., the farther the first diffracting obstacle, the
more the curvature).
5. Click the 360 View tab. A9155 displays the analysis area of the selected site in the Map window.
Additional information can be displayed in the 360 View tab.
1. Right-click the 360 View tab,
2. Select Properties from the context menu,
3. The Calculation Parameters dialogue appears,
4. In the Display tab, you may choose what you wish to display.
Altitudes without Roundness: A9155 displays the horizon profile calculated without considering the curvature of
the Earth,
Selected Site: The height of the selected site is marked by a horizontal line (a blue dotted line by default),
Other Sites: The position of other sites within the view is marked by a red line (by default). If the site is located in
front of the first obstacle, the line is solid; otherwise this is a dotted line.
Analysis and display parameters defined for each site are saved during the A9155 session when clicking OK. You can
also save a set of parameters as default configuration when clicking the Save Configuration button. Therefore, if a site has
never been calculated, the 360 view calculation will be initialized with the default configuration settings. Finally, even if
you have modified some parameters, it is still possible to apply the default configuration again by clicking Load configura-
tion. Note that the default configuration is memorized for the current A9155 session only.
It is possible to directly modify on the map some analysis parameters such as the maximum distance, the aperture or the
site azimuth.
1. Right-click the 360 View tab,
2. Select Modify Sector from the context menu,
3. On the Map window, click one extremity of the analysis area and change the distance or the angle. You can read
the pending modifications (distance, aperture and new site azimuth) in left side of the Status bar.
4. Click the F5 key in order to refresh the displayed horizon profile.
12.6.1.2 Microwave Link Properties

12.6.1.2.1 Creating a Microwave Link
In A9155, a microwave link can be managed similar to sites, transmitters (GSM/GPRS/EGPRS, UMTS HSPA, cdmaOne/
CDMA2000 projects) and other items. There are two possible means to create a microwave link, either using the mouse
or through the links folder.
You can also create a microwave link through the microwave links table.
792 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To create a new microwave link directly on the map:
1. Click the button from the toolbar,
2. The pointer shape changes to ,

3. Click a first time on the map at the location of the site where you want the link to start,
4. Now the pointer shape changes to ,

5. Click a second time on the map at the location of the site where you want to define the other link extremity.
Note: Microwave links created in this manner will be based on the microwave links template
selected in the toolbar. Microwave links template management is described in later sec-
tions.
The sites that define the extremities of a microwave link can be already existing sites or A9155 will create new sites auto-
matically at the location clicked by the user. Each site in A9155 can support several microwave links, transmitters, and
passive repeaters.
1. To create a new microwave link through the Links folder:
2. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window,
4. Right-click on the Links folder,
5. Choose the New option from the context menu,
6. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open windows,
7. Fill out the appropriate fields in the several tab windows,
8. Click OK or Apply to validate the new microwave link.
A9155 opens the new microwave link properties window containing the main characteristics describing the microwave link
you are creating. This window contains seven tabs grouping together similar characteristics of the microwave link and
enabling you to edit them easily.
The standard tabs are General and Display, and deal with the basic definition of the microwave link, its location, operating
frequency band, assignment of repeaters, and display related parameters. Other tabs (Radio, Connections, Rainfall, Reli-
ability and Propagation) enable you to define relevant parameters in order to completely define the microwave link created.
The details of these parameters are available in the managing microwave links properties section.
By default, A9155 names the newly created microwave links in the following manner: SiteX SiteY, where SiteX is the
name of the start site (existing or newly created) and SiteY is the name of the end site (existing or newly created).
Note: An Other Properties tab window is available if a user-defined field has been added to the
microwave links table.
12.6.1.2.2 Managing Microwave Link Properties

Like for all objects organised in folders (e.g., Sites) within A9155, microwave links can be managed either individually or
globally. A global setting is applied to all the filtered microwave links.
Global Properties Management
In A9155, you may manage the properties associated with microwave links of your network globally.
To do so:
3. Right-click on the Links folder,
4. Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
5. Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialogue.
The 4 standard tab windows are: General, Table, Display and Extremities.
- The General tab deals with folder organisation and associate configurations.
- The Table tab helps you to manage contents in the Links table. Here you can manage user-defined fields to
the Links table.
- The Display tab allows you to manage the display of microwave links depending on their attributes, to manage
the legend, labels on the map, and the contents of help pop-ups using the tip tool .
- The Extremities tab allows you to manage the site and repeater symbols, and font style to display on map.
- The Links templates tab allows you to manage (creation, modification, deletion) models of stations.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 793

A9155 User Manual
Individual Properties Management
There are two ways to edit properties of each microwave link in the current network:
Either,
b. Expand the Microwave Radio Links folder by clicking the button,
c. Expand the Links folder by clicking the button,
d. Right-click on the microwave link you want to manage,
Or,
a. Select the microwave link you want to manage on the map by clicking on the corresponding line represent-
ing the link,
b. Right-click on it to open the context menu,
1. Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
2. Use the What's this help to get description about the open dialogue.
The displayed window contains seven tabs: General, Radio, Connections, Geoclimatic, Reliability, Propagation and
Display. An Other Properties tab is available if some user defined fields have been added to the Links table:
The General tab deals with the location of the two extremities of the microwave link (sites and positions relative
to these sites), its operating frequency band, length (calculated), the repeaters (if any) composing the link, and the
link activity.
The Radio tab is linked with the definition of all radio parameters of the microwave link. Here you can specify
antenna models and characteristics for the both the sites of the link, space diversity antennas (if any), transceiver
equipment and all related parameters, frequency sub-bands, channels and frequency diversity parameters etc. in
detail.
The Connection tab lets you specify all the parameters relevant to waveguides, cables, attenuators, connectors,
site shielding. Here, you can define for each site:
- The waveguides and cables installed, their length and if they are used for transmission or reception only or for
both.
- The transmission and reception losses generated by some components such as connectors, attenuators, etc.
- A shielding factor.
You can define whether the link uses XPIC (Cross Polarisation Interference Canceller) mechanism or not.
All the climate-related information concerning the microwave link can be defined in the Geoclimatic tab. You can
specify the type of environment zone, the climatic zone which a climatic factor is deduced from, the rain intensity,
vapour density, PL and temperature affecting the link.
Required reliability objectives for the current microwave link can be defined in the Reliability tab. Here you can
also define Bit Error Rate parameters, Vigants-Barnett and K.Q methods related information, the minimum time to
repair the fault, and whether a hot standby is available on the link or not.
The Propagation tab makes it possible to assign a propagation model to the current microwave link.
The Display tab allows you to manage the characteristics of the line representing the link on the map, the symbols
for extremities and repeaters (size, colour and type) and the display font on the map.
Notes
In the naming conventions adopted in A9155, A is the site of departure and B is the site of arrival.
Real values are used by A9155 if entered. Otherwise, the corresponding values are computed
by A9155 from other data sources (such as Geo data).
You can open the properties dialogues of the sites, frequency band, repeaters, antennas, equip-
ment, frequency sub-bands, waveguides and cables, and link class corresponding to the micro-
wave link by clicking the button on the right of the selection boxes in different tabs.
When the properties dialogue is open from the explorer or from the map window, it is possible to
scroll through the properties dialogues of different microwave links within the same subfolder
without closing. To do this, use the buttons.
- The buttons enable you to switch back to the first/previous microwave link proper-
ties dialogue within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the
properties of the first item of a subfolder.
- The buttons enable you to move forward to the next/last microwave link properties
dialogue within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the prop-
erties of the last item of a subfolder.
- Subfolders are organised following the grouping/sorting/filtering configuration.
794 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

12.6.1.2.3 Modifying Microwave Sites and Links Directly on the Map

In A9155, you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or link using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorer
window. However, in a complex radio-planning project, it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab, although it
might be visible in the map window. A9155 lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and links directly from the
map. If there is more than one link between the same sites, clicking the link in the map window opens a context menu
allowing you to select the link. You can also change the position of the site by dragging it, or by letting A9155 find a higher
location for it.
Modifying sites and links directly on the map is explained in detail in "Chapter 1: The Working Environment":
"Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 29
12.6.1.2.4 Setting a Microwave Link as Active

Once microwave links are set up within a network, you may decide whether to activate them or not. Quality, Availability
and interference analyses and associated reports/statistics take into account only active microwave links (and not filtered
microwave links). In the Explorer window, active microwave links are displayed in red ( symbol) in the Links folder,
unlike inactive ones which are displayed in grey ( symbol).
To set the activity of a microwave link,
Either,
- Select the General tab from the microwave link properties
Or,
- Activate the microwave links table window,
(Un)check the active box in order to make the microwave link (in)active in the network.
You may also manage the microwave link activity from the context menu associated with each microwave link individually
(Right-click on the microwave link in the Data tab of the Explorer window) or globally (Right-click on the Links folder in the
Data tab of the Explorer window)
12.6.1.2.5 Deleting a Microwave Link

To delete an existing microwave link:
Either,
c. Expand the Links folder by clicking the button,
d. Right-click on the microwave link you want to delete,
Or,
a. Select the microwave link you want to delete by clicking on the corresponding line representing the micro-
wave link,
b. Right-click on the microwave link,
Choose the Delete option from the context menu.
Another alternative is to delete the row associated with the microwave link you want to delete in the Links table.
Notes
Deleting a microwave link in this manner does not delete the corresponding sites even if there
are no other links or transmitters relating to that site.
When selecting a microwave link, be careful to select the line representing the link. Do not select
the site icon ( ). Since it is also possible to delete the sites on which microwave links are built,
be sure to select the line and not the site.
12.6.1.2.6 Defining Port Parameters

Ports enable you to describe the equipment connection on transmitting and receiving sites. Port parameters can be con-
figured for each microwave link or for all the microwave links.
12.6.1.2.6.1 For a single microwave link
2. In the Links folder, right-click the microwave link. The context menu appears.
3. Select Properties. The property dialogue opens.
4. Click the Radio tab.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 795

A9155 User Manual
5. Define the frequency sub-band used for the microwave link.

6. Click Apply to validate.
7. Click the Port Parameters Settings button and define the following parameters for each channel transmitted in
one direction:
- Channel: the channel number. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets.
- Tx port: the port number for the transmitting equipment.
- Rx port: the port number for the receiving equipment.
- Transmission losses: the transmission losses.
- Reception losses: the reception losses.
- Polarisation: the polarisation.
- Hot Standby: specify if the channel is a hot standby channel. This option only appears when hot standby is
available for the selected equipment.
The number of ports you can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment.
After defining the configuration for one direction, you can easily define the opposite direction one by clicking the
Initialise Symmetrically button.
8. Click OK to validate the port configuration.

12.6.1.2.6.2 For all the microwave links
3. Select Ports > Open table. The table opens.
Define the following parameters:
- Link: the name of the microwave link.

- Way: the link direction (AB or BA).
- Channel: the channel number. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets.
- Tx port: the port number for the transmitting equipment.
- Rx port: the port number for the receiving equipment.
- Transmission losses: the transmission losses.
- Reception losses: the reception losses.
- Polarisation: the polarisation.
- Hot Standby : specify if the channel is a hot standby channel.
12.6.1.3 Microwave Links Templates

12.6.1.3.1 Creating a Microwave Link Template
In A9155, you may create, modify or delete station templates and build your network from links templates instead of
manual creation of links.
To create a microwave links template:
Either
a. From the toolbar, click the template scrolling box

b. Select the Manage Templates... tool
Or
c. Right-click on the Links folder,
d. Choose the Properties option from the context menu,
e. Click the Links templates tab,
1. Click Add to create a new links template,
3. Enter the parameters of the links template being currently built,
The new links template will then be available in the template scrolling menu.
796 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

12.6.1.3.2 Defining Microwave Link Template Properties

With A9155, you may create, modify or delete station templates and build your network from links templates instead of
To manage a microwave links template:
Either

Or
1. Select the template you want to manage in the Available templates box,
2. Click the button to open the microwave links template properties dialogue,
4. Set the parameters of the current links template,
You can also add user-defined fields to links templates through the links templates management window. These additional
fields appear in a new tab in the links template properties window (Other properties) if there are corresponding user-
defined fields available in the sites table. This feature has been designed to allow users to introduce user-defined fields in
the sites table to the links templates. So that the links thus created with these templates contain these user-defined fields
by default.
To add, modify or delete a field in the links templates:
Either

Or
1. Click the button on the links template management window to open the links template fields
dialogue,
2. Click to add, to modify properties or to delete a user-defined field,

Notes
The properties you can adjust are similar to the microwave links properties.
The user-defined fields added in the links templates must be the same as the user-defined fields
in the sites table to be taken into account.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 797

A9155 User Manual
12.6.1.3.3 Deleting a Microwave Link Template

With A9155, you may create, modify or delete station templates and build your network from links templates instead of
To delete a links template:
Either

Or
1. Select the template you want to delete in the Available templates box,
2. Click the button,

3. Click either OK or Cancel to close the dialogue.
12.6.1.3.4 Creating a Microwave Link on Existing Sites

In A9155, the standard process of creating a microwave link using the mouse creates a couple of sites at the same time
as when creating the microwave link between these two sites. A9155 sets the properties by default of these created items.
Nevertheless, it is easily possible to create a microwave link linked to existing sites.
Once the reference sites are available, to create a microwave link between them from a template:
1. Select the template to use in the links template scrolling box (located in the toolbar),
2. Click on the New link button ( ), left of the scrolling box,

3. Move your pointer to the reference site on your map,
4. When the pointer sticks on it, click to assign the link to the site.
12.6.2 Microwave Passive Repeaters

Passive repeaters are normally used to redirect the microwave signal around an obstruction. Passive repeaters divide the
radio path into two branches, each traversing different type terrain, normally having different lengths and different inclina-
tions. This implies different propagation conditions for these two branches concerning fading, distortions and rain etc. Due
to this property of passive repeaters they are also referred to as "beam benders".
Passive repeaters have the following advantages over active sites:
No power required,
No regular road access required,
No equipment housing needed,
Environment friendly,
Little or no maintenance required.
All of the above advantages mean that these can be placed in relatively inaccessible areas.
There are two main types of passive repeaters. The first type is where two antennas are placed back to back connected
by a short feeder cable; these are called back-to-back antenna passive repeaters. The second type is a plane reflector
type passive repeater where a flat metal reflector is used to redirect the signal; these are often called passive reflectors
or plane reflectors.
A9155 is capable of modelling both types of passive repeaters and providing the user with access to all the relevant param-
eters for both. The following sections explain the A9155 modelling of passive repeaters.
In A9155 microwave module, the word repeater is used for passive repeaters.
12.6.2.1 Creating a Microwave Passive Repeater

A microwave passive repeater is used to redirect or bend a microwave signal around an obstruction while keeping the
signal undistorted. Urban radio links are usually hampered by line of sight restrictions due to high obstacles (buildings and
hills etc.). Passive repeaters, being more efficient at higher frequencies, are an ideal solution for this problem in microwave
links. Although, microwave passive repeaters are attractive solutions in terms of economy and environment, they imply
798 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

tougher frequency planning constraints as they act as transmission and reception sites both. They also limit frequency
reuse in some cases.
A9155 provides well-suited microwave passive repeater modelling. Furthermore, A9155 permits creating new passive
repeaters and setting the parameters for the characteristics of each of them (Name, site, operating frequency band, height,
type of passive repeater, azimuths, and specific properties for back-to-back antenna and reflector type repeaters).
Note: Creating and setting parameters for different passive repeaters on the basis of manufactur-
ers data is a long and meticulous operation. To make it easier for you A9155 allows the use
of copy and paste functions as easily as in all office automation tools. You may thus create
passive repeaters from a blank sheet or from an existing one, A9155s display is compatible
with most spreadsheets and word processors.
To create an microwave passive repeater:

4. Select Passive repeaters and Open table from the menu.
You can also double click on a record in the equipment table to open its corresponding properties dialogue.
12.6.2.2 Managing Microwave Passive Repeater Properties

You can manage and edit the properties of the microwave passive repeaters through their respective properties dialogues.
4. Select Passive repeaters and Open table from the menu.
5. Double click on the concerned record in the Passive repeaters table. The Property dialogue appears.
6. Select the General tab and define the passive repeater name, the site where the repeater is located (from the Sites
table), the operating frequency band of the passive repeater and its position relative to the site.
7. Open the Type tab and define whether the passive repeater is a reflector type or back-to-back antenna type
repeater.
a. For a reflector type repeater, assign a surface area for the repeater, and define its height and its azimuth an-
gle towards the site of transmission (and not towards the site of reception).
b. For a back-to-back antenna type repeater, you can choose the antennas used from the models available in
the Antennas table, define the antenna heights, assign the azimuth angles for these back-to-back antennas
in both the directions of the link from the repeater and specify whether the antennas have a crossed polarisa-
tion. Finally, you can select waveguides between both antennas from the models available in the Waveguides
table, and enter the length.
Notes
It is possible to access the properties of the relevant site and frequency band directly from the
General tab by clicking the button opposite to the corresponding item.
You can click the button to automatically calculate azimuth angles.
12.6.2.3 Inserting Microwave Passive Repeaters in Microwave Links

A9155 allows inserting a maximum of 2 passive repeaters along a single microwave link. The following terms are used in
A9155 for passive repeaters and related parameters:
Passive repeaters (maximum 2) along a microwave link are named repeater P and repeater Q respectively.
A part of the link is called a Section. A section can be:
- One of the directions of a bi-directional link.
- One of the trajectories towards a repeater (if any).
- Examples:
Unidirectional link without repeater: 1 section, Site A Site B
Bi-directional link without repeater: 2 sections, Site A Site B and Site B Site A
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 799

A9155 User Manual
Bi-directional link with 2 repeaters: 6 sections, Site A Site P, Site P Site Q, Site Q Site B, Site B Site Q, Site Q Site P, Site
P Site A.
To insert a repeater in a microwave link:
1. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map, or from the Links folder of the Explorer windows Data
2. Choose Insert a repeater from the context menu.
3. Click on the microwave link in the map where you want to insert the repeater.
The link is drawn on the map with a newly inserted site at the point indicated by the user using the mouse. Creating a
passive repeater through insertion of a point on a microwave link creates a new Repeater entry in the Passive repeaters
table and a new Site entry in the Sites table that will be assigned to the repeater created. The following default values are
applied to these created items:
The location of the repeater site is determined by the point of insertion.
The repeater is of reflector type by default with a default surface area assigned.
The operating frequency band of the repeater is the frequency band assigned to the corresponding microwave
link.
The azimuth for this repeater is computed according to the directions of the two sections of the corresponding
microwave link.
It is also possible to insert a repeater through the microwave link profile analysis window directly. To do this:
1. Choose Microwave Link Analysis from the View menu. The Microwave Link Analysis Window appears.
2. Select a microwave link by clicking on it either on the Map window or in the Links folder in the Explorer window.
3. Right-click the profile to open its context menu.
4. Select Insert Repeater from the context menu.
5. Click on the microwave link in the map where you want to insert the repeater.
The microwave profile analysis window then provides an interactive real-time display of the microwave link profile from site
A to site B.
When the point is inserted on the link, it is shown in the microwave link profile analysis window by a vertical line in the
profile. When the site of the passive repeater is moved on the map, the profile analysis window displays the entire link
profile (all sections) from site A to site B including the repeater site concatenating the 2 sections (Site A Site P Site B). This
is called a broken profile.
On the microwave link profile analysis window, a list proposes the six possible combinations of profile display:
Site A Site P
Site P Site B
Site B Site P
Site P Site A
Site A Site B (profile "broken" at Site P)
Site B Site A (profile "broken" at Site P)
A second repeater (Q) can be inserted in the same link in the same way. In this case, the profile display options proposed
by the list in the microwave link profile analysis window will include and consider Site Q as well.
Note: When the microwave link profile analysis window displays the broken profiles between Site
A and Site B including one or 2 inserted repeaters, it is not possible to modify antenna
heights and the relevant options are disabled.
12.6.3 Multi-hop Links

Multi-hop microwave links, or multi-hops, are a set of two or more microwave links that are interconnected to get to a desti-
nation. This method allows the link to extend distance as well as move the link path around buildings or mountains. A
microwave link can be common to more than one multi-hop as well.
In general practice, microwave multi-hop links are used for two purposes; to construct a microwave connection over areas
that do not provide line-of-sight and to transfer signals through microwave links over large distances.
Note: In A9155 it is not obligatory to have all the links composing a multi-hop link to be intercon-
nected. But this is the practical case in almost all microwave networks worldwide.
The following sections describe the creation and deletion of microwave multi-hop links and the setting of global properties.
12.6.3.1 Creating a Multi-hop Link

In A9155, a multi-hop link can be managed as a group of single-hop microwave links (which may contain repeaters). There
are three ways to create a multi-hop link: by using the mouse, by using the multi-hops folder, or by editing the multi-hop
links table.
800 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To create a new multi-hop link by using the mouse:
1. Click the multi-hop button ( ) on the toolbar. The pointer changes to .

2. Click on the map to create the first site of the multi-hop link.
3. Click on the map in each place you want to insert a new link.
4. Double-click at the location you want to define as the end of the multi-hop link.
The end site of the preceding link is considered to be the start site for the next link within a multi-hop link. The next micro-
wave link in the multi-hop links series is initialised based on the parameters of the preceding one (by inversing the site
parities).
The sites that define the extremities of a multi-hop link can be already existing sites or A9155 will create new sites auto-
passive repeaters.
To create a new multi-hop link using the Multi-hops folder:
2. Click the button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
3. Right-click on the Multi-hops folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select New from the context menu. The Multi-Hops New Element Properties dialogue appears.
5. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab:
- Name: The Name field is filled automatically by A9155, but can be modified.
- Multi-Hops Class: Select the multi-hops class from the list. A9155 uses this information with the multi-hop
length in order to calculate the performance objectives required for the multi-hop. Once you have selected a
multi-hops class, you can view and modify the class properties by clicking the browse button ( ).
- Comments: Enter any comments for this new multi-hop.
6. Click OK. A9155 creates an empty multi-hop link item in the Multi-hops folder.
By default, A9155 names the newly created multi-hop links in the following manner: Multi-hopsX, where X increments with
each instance of creation for multi-hop links.
To define microwave links as parts of this multi-hop link:
3. Click the button of the Multi-hops Links folder. The Multi-hops folder opens.
4. Right-click the new multi-hop link and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears.
5. Select the Links tab.
6. Assign links to the multi-hop:
a. Select a link from the Link column.
b. Enter a number in the Order column to set the position of this link in the multi-hop.
7. Click OK.
Note: An Other Properties tab window is also available if a user-defined field has been added to
the multi-hop links table.
12.6.3.2 Managing Multi-hop Link Properties

As for all objects organised in folders (e.g., Sites, Links) within A9155, multi-hop links can be managed either individually
or globally. A global setting is applied to all the filtered multi-hop links.
12.6.3.2.1 Modifying Global Properties

In A9155, you can globally manage the properties associated with multi-hop links of your network.
To manage the multi-hop link properties globally:
3. Right-click on the Multi-hops folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Multi-Hops Properties dialogue appears.
5. Use the What's this help to get a description of the fields in the dialogue. The three standard tabs are:
- General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. You can also organise
multi-hops by using A9155s group, sort, and filter tools.
- Table: The Table tab helps you to manage contents in the Multi-hops table. Here you can manage user-
defined fields to the Multi-hops table.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 801

A9155 User Manual
- Display: The Display tab allows you to manage the display of multi-hop links depending on their attributes, to
manage the legend, labels on the map, and the contents of tool tips using the tip tool .
12.6.3.2.2 Modifying Individual Properties

There are two ways to edit properties of each multi-hop link in the current network: by selecting the multi-hop in the Data
tab or by selecting it on the map.
To access individual multi-hop link properties in the data tab:
3. Click the button of the Multi-Hops folder. The Multi-Hops folder opens
4. Right-click on the multi-hops link whose properties you wish to edit. The context menu appears.
6. Use the What's this help to get a description of the fields in the dialogue.
To access individual multi-hop link properties on the map:
1. In the map, click the line of the multi-hop link whose properties you wish to edit.
2. Right-click on the multi-hops link whose properties you wish to edit. The context menu appears.
4. Use the What's this help to get a description of the fields in the dialogue.
The three standard tabs are:
The Properties dialogue has two tabs:
General: The General tab lets to manage the name and multi-hops objectives class assigned to the multi-hop link.
Links: The Links tab gives to access to the list of microwave links that are part of the multi-hop link. This list con-
tains the names of these microwave links and the order in which they join to form the multi-hop link.
An Other Properties tab is available if user-defined fields have been added to the Multi-hops table:
Notes
You can open the properties dialogues of the multi-hops class corresponding to the multi-hop
link by clicking the button on the right of the selection box in General tab.
scroll through the properties dialogues of different multi-hop links within the same subfolder
without closing. To do this, use the buttons.
- The buttons enable you to switch back to the first/previous multi-hop link proper-
ties dialogue within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the
properties of the first item of a subfolder.
- The buttons enable you to move forward to the next/last multi-hop link properties
dialogue within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing the prop-
erties of the last item of a subfolder.
12.6.3.3 Managing Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Mapping Globally

A9155 allows you to globally manage mapping microwave links to the multi-hop links.
To globally manage the mapping of links to multi-hop links:
3. Right-click the Multi-Hops folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select Mapping between Multi-hops and Links from the context menu. The Multi-Hops Links table appears,
containing all the multi-hops links and the corresponding microwave links. In this table, you can modify, delete,
add, and change the order of the links that make up a multi-hop link.
12.6.3.4 Graphically Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link

To graphically add a microwave link to a multi-hop link:
1. Open the context menu of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link:
Either

b. Click the button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.
802 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

c. Click the button of the Multi-hops folder. The Multi-hops folder opens.
d. Right-click on the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link. The context menu appears.
Or
a. In the map, click the line of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link.
b. Right-click on the multi-hop link. The context menu appears.
2. Select Add a Link from the context menu. The pointer shape changes to in the map window.
3. On the map, click the microwave link you want to add to the multi-hop link.
The microwave link is added to the list of links forming the multi-hop link and assigned an order automatically.
12.6.3.5 Deleting a Multi-hop Link

To delete an existing multi-hop link:
1. Open the context menu of the multi-hop link you want to delete:
Either

c. Click the button of the Multi-hops folder. The Multi-hops folder opens.
d. Right-click on the multi-hop link you want to delete. The context menu appears.
Or,
a. In the map, click the line of the multi-hop link you want to delete.
b. Right-click on the multi-hop link. The context menu appears.
2. Select Delete from the context menu. The multi-hop link is deleted.
Another alternative is to delete the row associated with the multi-hop link you want to delete in the Multi-hops table.
Notes
Deleting a multi-hop link in this manner does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are
no other links or transmitters relating to that site.
When selecting a multi-hop link, be careful to select the line representing the multi-hop link. Do
not select the site icon ( ). Since it is also possible to delete the sites on which multi-hop links
are built, be sure to select the line and not the site.
12.6.4 Point-to-Multipoint Links

A point-to-multipoint link is a set of microwave links connected to a hub. A point-to-multipoint link is used when microwave
links must be made between one site and a fixed number of other sites.
The following sections describe the creation and deletion of microwave point-to-multipoint links and the setting of global
properties.
12.6.4.1 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link

In A9155, a point-to-multipoint link can be managed as a group of single-hop microwave links (which may contain repeat-
ers) connected to a hub. There are several ways to create a point-to-multipoint link:
by using the mouse,
by using the point-to-multipoint link folder, or
by editing the point-to-multipoint links table.
The sites that define the hub or sites of a point-to-multipoint link can be already existing sites or new sites, created auto-
passive repeaters.
To create a new point-to-multipoint link by using the mouse:
1. Click the new PMP button ( ) on the toolbar. The pointer changes to .
2. Click on the map to create the hub of the point-to-multipoint link.
3. Click on the map in each place you want to insert a new link. If you do not click an existing site, A9155 creates a
new site where you click.
4. Double-click when adding the last link to complete the point-to-multipoint link.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 803

A9155 User Manual
To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint folder:

3. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select New from the context menu. The Point to Multipoint New Element Properties dialogue appears.
5. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab:
- Name: The Name field is filled automatically by A9155, but can be modified.
- Frequency Band: You must select a frequency band when you create a point-to-multipoint link. Once you
have selected a frequency band, you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( ).
- Hub Site: You must select the site that will be the hub of the point-to-multipoint link. Once you have selected
the hub site, you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( ).
- Type: Select the type: TDA or FDA.
- Antenna: Select the antenna and its parameters.
- Comments: Enter any comments for this new point-to-multipoint link.
6. Click OK. A9155 creates an empty point-to-multipoint link item in the Point-to-Multipoint folder.
7. To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link, see "Graphically Adding a Microwave Link to a
Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 806
To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint links table:
4. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Point to Multipoint table appears.
5. In the row marked with the new row icon ( ), enter the details of the new point-to-multipoint link. The following
fields must be filled: Name, Frequency Band, and Site.
6. To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link, see "Graphically Adding a Microwave Link to a
Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 806.
By default, A9155 names the newly point-to-multipoint link "PMP HubX", where "X" increments with the creation of each
new point-to-multipoint link.
12.6.4.2 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties

Point-to-multipoint links can be managed either individually or globally. A global setting is applied to all the filtered point-
to-multipoint links.
12.6.4.2.1 Modifying Global Properties

To manage the point-to-multipoint link properties globally:
4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue appears.
5. Enter or modify data in the fields of the Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue. The three standard tabs are:
point-to-multipoint links by using A9155s group, sort, and filter tools.
- Table: The Table tab helps you to manage contents, including user-defined fields, of the point-to-multipoint
table.
- Display: The Display tab allows you to manage the display of point-to-multipoint links depending on their
attributes, to manage the legend, labels on the map, and the contents of tool tips using the tip tool .
6. Click OK.
12.6.4.2.2 Modifying Individual Properties

To edit the properties of a point-to-multipoint link:
1. Open the context menu:
In the Data tab
c. Click the button of the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens.
d. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint link whose properties you want to edit. The context menu appears.
804 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

On the map
a. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub whose properties you wish to change. The point-to-
multipoint icon changes ( ).
Note: Be sure to select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub. Do not select the site icon ( ).
b. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint icon. The context menu appears.

3. Use the What's this help to get a description of the fields in the dialogue. The three standard tabs are:
multi-hops by using A9155s group, sort, and filter tools.
- Links: The Links tab lets you add, edit, and delete microwave links.
- Display: The Display tab lets you to select and customize the icon symbolising the point-to-multipoint link on
the map.
- An Other Properties tab is available if user-defined fields have been added to the Point-to-Multipoint table.
Notes
scroll through the properties dialogues of different point-to-multipoint links within the same sub-
folders without closing. To do this, use the buttons.
- The buttons enable you to switch back to the first or previous point-to-multipoint
link properties dialogue within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when
viewing the properties of the first item of a subfolder.
- The buttons enable you to move forward to the next or last point-to-multipoint link
properties dialogue within the relevant subfolder. These buttons are not active when viewing
the properties of the last item of a subfolder.
12.6.4.3 Mapping of Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally

To globally manage the mapping of microwave links to point-to-multipoint links:
3. Right-click the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select PMP/Link Mapping from the context menu. The PMP/Link Mapping table appears, containing all the point-
to-multipoint links and the corresponding microwave links.
5. In this table, you can modify, delete, and add the links that make up a point-to-multipoint link.
12.6.4.4 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link

Note: Before you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link, the microwave
link must first exist between the site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another
site. For information on creating links, see "Creating a Microwave Link" on page 792.
To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link:

3. Click the button of the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens.
4. Right-click the new Point-to-Multipoint link and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue
appears.
5. Select the Links tab.
6. In the row marked with the new row icon ( ), select a link.
7. Click OK. The microwave link is added to the point-to-multipoint link.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 805

A9155 User Manual
12.6.4.5 Graphically Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link

Note: Before you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link, the microwave
link must first exist between the site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another
site. For information on creating links, see "Creating a Microwave Link" on page 792.
To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link using the mouse:

3. Click the button of the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens.
4. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link to which you want to add a microwave link. The context menu appears.
5. Select Add a Link from the context menu. The pointer shape changes to in the map window.
6. On the map, click the microwave link you want to add to the point-to-multipoint link. The microwave link is added
to the list of links forming the point-to-multipoint link.
12.6.4.6 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link

To delete a microwave link from a point-to-multipoint link:
1. In the map, select the line of the microwave link you want to delete.
2. Right-click the microwave link you want to delete from the point-to-multipoint link. The context menu appears.
3. Select Delete from the context menu. The microwave link is deleted.
Note: Deleting a microwave link in this manner does not delete the corresponding sites even if
there are no other links or transmitters related to that site.
12.6.4.7 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link

To delete a point-to-multipoint link:
1. Open the context menu of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete:
Either
c. Click the button of the point-to-multipoint folder. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens.
d. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint link you want to delete. The context menu appears.
Or,
a. In the map, select the line of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete.
b. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint link. The context menu appears.
2. Select Delete from the context menu. The point-to-multipoint link is deleted.
Notes
You can also delete a point-to-multipoint link by deleting the row associated with it in the Point-
to-Multipoint table.
Deleting a point-to-multipoint link in this manner does not delete the corresponding sites even if
there are no other links or transmitters relating to that site.
When selecting a point-to-multipoint link, be careful to select the line representing the point-to-
multipoint link. Do not select the site icon ( ). Since it is also possible to delete the sites on
which point-to-multipoint links are built, be sure to select the line and not the site.
12.6.4.8 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub

When a microwave link consists of only two sites, the antenna on each site is aligned with the other antenna. In a point-
to-multipoint link, it is impossible for the antenna on the hub to be directly aligned with the antenna on each link. Conse-
quently, the height, azimuth, and tilt of the antenna are calculated as a average of that needed for all link antennas.
A9155 calculates these settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna when the point-to-multipoint link is created.
However, after the point-to-multipoint has been created, other factors such as the addition of new microwave links may
mean that the settings of the hub antenna need to be readjusted. A9155 can recalculate the settings for the point-to-
multipoint hub antenna.
806 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

To make A9155 recalculate the settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna:
3. Click the button of the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens.
4. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link of which you want to recalculate the hub antenna settings. The context menu
appears.
7. In the "Antenna" subsection, click the Calculate button ( ) to the right of the Tilt field. A dialogue appears with
the recalculated height, azimuth, and tilt values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna.
8. When the values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna are recalculated, the point-to-multipoint link antennas may
need to be adjusted accordingly. If you want A9155 calculate the effect of the recalculated values for the hub
antenna on the link antennas, select the Transfer the misalignments to links check box.
9. Click OK to update the values for the point-to-multipoint antennas.
12.6.4.9 Graphically Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub

To use the mouse to graphically adjust the azimuth of the point-to-multipoint hub antenna:
1. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint hub. The point-to-multipoint icon changes ( ) and you can
now rotate it manually.
2. Click the antenna icon (the point changes: ) and rotate it to its new azimuth.
12.7 Managing Microwave Links Specific Geo Data

12.7.1 Working with Rain Maps
Rain maps contain information on rain intensity or on the total amount of rain per defined period. Rain maps are used in
microwave link projects to calculate radio wave attenuation.
Understanding how rain attenuates the propagation of radio waves at microwave frequencies helps in the planning of a
reliable communication system. This is even more important in regions with heavy rainfall. Rainfall can severely degrade
the propagation of radio waves at frequencies above 10 GHz. It restricts the path length of microwave links as well as the
use of higher microwave frequencies for line-of-sight communication.
Rainfall has a greater effect on horizontal polarity than vertical polarity which means that each area of operation differs
because of variations in the amount and intensity of rainfall. Furthermore, rain tends to decrease the cross-polar discrim-
ination (XPD) for short periods, thus affecting the microwave propagation.
It is possible to work with rain intensity maps in A9155. You can import, edit, export and manage these maps under the
Geo tab Rain folder. These maps are used to compute the interruptions and outages of microwave links caused due to
rain. A9155 can deal with vector rain maps and enables you to easily manage this type of geo data through its user-friendly
interface.
12.7.2 Importing a Rain Map

It is possible to use rain maps, in terms of density or value information. Several forms of files can be mixed in order to
compose a resulting rain map. This type of map, like other geo data folders (clutter, DTM etc.) works on the principle of
"what is seen is what is used". Data retained in the folder will be used in clutter statistics and analyses reports.
Rain maps must be in vector format.
To import a rain map:
1. In the File menu, select the Import command
2. In the Vector Import dialogue, select the Rain item in the Import to scrolling list,
3. Select the appropriate coordinate system (if needed),
4. Under Fields to be Imported, select a numeric field or attribute of the vector file that will be used as rain intensity
value (see Figure 12.6).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 807

A9155 User Manual
Figure 12.6: Rain values (mm of rain per item polygon, road, etc.)
A9155 imports the files into the Rain folder of the Geo tab and adds the following tabs to the Rain Properties dialogue:
Data Mapping, Description, and Table tabs.
In addition, the Display tab is available and uses the generic A9155 display dialogue.
Notes
The drag and drop feature is available to import such types of maps.
.geo or .cfg (user configuration files) can be used (import-export) to share paths of the imported
rain file paths between users.
It is possible to create a rain vector map using the vector edition tool. To do this, Right-click on
the Rain folder and select the Add vector layer command.
Imported files can be embedded during the import or afterwards.
12.7.3 Managing Rain Map Properties

To access the properties of the resulting rain map:
1. In the Geo tab, Right-click the Rain folder,
2. Choose the Properties command in the context menu,
3. Depending on the imported file type, different tabs are available (see above):
- Table: this tab is dedicated to manage the contents of the class table.
- Data Mapping: an imported vector file is listed in each line. In the column Field, the vector field which has to
be chosen as rain data has to be selected, always with the density check box (when the relevant data is of
type density). The current selection is the one made during the import. The association can be modified after-
wards.
- Display: A9155 generic display dialogue with the possibility to tune the threshold shading. The displayed
information is the intensity of rain in mm/hr.
Notes
The resulting rain map is not the addition of all the maps, but the result of what is seen. Maps of
interest have to be put on the top layer.
The display by value is not permitted is the following cases:
vectors mixing lines and polygons
The display by density is not permitted on vectors made of points.
12.7.4 Displaying Rain Statistics

It is possible to display the relative and absolute distributions of rain depending on the thresholds defined in the Display
tab of the Rain folder property dialogue. To do this, select the Statistics command from the Rain folder context menu. Like
other statistics windows, what is used for the results is provided by what is seen.
Note: Statistics are provided on the focus zone if it exists. Otherwise, the computation zone is
considered. With neither of them, statistics are given for the total geographic zone.
808 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

12.7.5 ITU Maps

12.7.5.1 ITU Vapour Density on Earth
Figure 12.7: Annual vapour density on Earth (g/m3)
12.7.5.2 ITU Atmospheric Refraction: February
Figure 12.8: ITU Percentage of time during which the gradient <=-100 units N/km: February
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 809

A9155 User Manual
12.7.5.3 ITU Atmospheric Refraction: May
Figure 12.9: ITU Percentage of time during which the gradient <=-100 units N/km: May
12.7.5.4 ITU Atmospheric Refraction: August
Figure 12.10: ITU Percentage of time during which the gradient <=-100 units N/km: August
810 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

12.7.5.5 ITU Atmospheric Refraction: November
Figure 12.11: ITU Percentage of time during which the gradient <=-100 units N/km: November
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 811

A9155 User Manual
12.7.5.6 ITU Rain Zones: America
Figure 12.12: Rain Zones: America
812 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

12.7.5.7 ITU Rain Zones: Europe and Africa
Figure 12.13: Rain Zones: Europe and Africa
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 813

A9155 User Manual
12.7.5.8 ITU Rain Zones: Asia
Figure 12.14: Rain Zones: Asia
12.8 Microwave Link Analysis

12.8.1 Propagation Model and Global Calculation Parameters
12.8.1.1 Propagation Model
The propagation model used to calculate the fade margin and to determine the links profile, Microwave propagation
model, is accessible through the Modules tab of the Explorer window. The attenuation computed by this model takes into
account the free space path losses, atmospheric losses, attenuation due to diffraction and tropospheric losses. Some of
the coefficients of the model are modifiable through its properties dialogue. For a link to be analysed, a propagation model
must be assigned to it through its properties dialogue.
12.8.1.1.1 Defining the Parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model

You can define the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model using the Microwave Propagation Model Proper-
ties dialogue.
To define the calculation parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model Properties dialogue:
3. Right-click Microwave Propagation Model. The context menu appears.
814 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 12.15).
Figure 12.15: Microwave Propagation Model Properties - Parameters tab

Under Heights, you can set the following parameter:
- Consider Heights in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have A9155 take clutter height information into account
when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height into account, A9155
uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it uses average clutter
height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.
Under LOS Attenuation, you can set the following parameters:
- K1, K2, and K3: Enter the K1, K2, and K3 values that will be used to calculate free space losses.
Under Diffraction, you can set the following parameters:
- Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate diffraction.

- Deygout
- Epstein-Peterson
- Deygout with correction
- Millington
- ITU 452-11
- Full Deygout
- K4: Enter the K4 value that will be used to calculate diffraction.
Under Tropospheric Scatter, you can set the following parameters:
- Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate tropospheric scattering:
- No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated.
- ITU-R P617-1: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P617-1 recommendations for 50%,
90%, or 99.99% of the time.
- ITU-R P452: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P452 recommendations.
- Simplified Method: Attenuation will be estimated using an A9155-specific equation.
- N0: Enter the value for N0, which is the surface refractivity of the centre of the path.
- Ktropo: Enter the value for the weight factor. A9155 multiplies the loss given by the selected method to cal-
culate the tropospheric scatter loss.
Under Other Parameters, you can find the Kclutter parameter. It is not used in calculations.
6. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 12.16).
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 815

A9155 User Manual
Figure 12.16: Propagation Model Properties - Clutter tab
Under Clutter Consideration, you can set the Clutter Categories.
Select a clutter category for each clutter class. Clutter categories are considered to study reflections and must be
defined in order to analyse reflections along the profile. Clutter categories are ITU-standardised clutter classes.
The following are the available clutter categories.
- Rural open
- Pastures, grassland
- Low crop fields
- High crop fields
- Park land
- Tree covered
- Irregularly spaced sparse trees
- Orchards
- Deciduous trees (irregularly spaced)
- Deciduous trees (regularly spaced)
- Coniferous trees (irregularly spaced)
- Coniferous trees (regularly spaced)
- Mixed tree forest
- Tropical rain forest
7. Click OK.
For further information on the propagation model parameters, see the Technical Reference Guide.
12.8.1.2 Global Calculation Parameters

The global properties of the microwave links project can be managed at the Microwave Radio Links folder level. These
properties comprise the global analysis parameters for the microwave links.
To manage the global properties and parameters for microwave links in an A9155 Microwave Links project:
2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder to open the context menu.
3. Select Properties from the context menu to open the properties dialogue.
4. Use the What's this help to get description of the fields available in the properties dialogue.
5. Click the General tab and define:
- The refractivity factor k to be considered in the link analyses.
- If power control on the transmitted signal is on.
- The link direction to be analysed.
- The transmission ports to be considered in the link analyses.
- A9155 performs the engineering study and details the results for each channel (All option).
- Engineering for Worst Channel: A9155 performs the engineering study for each channel and displays
the results for the worst channel in term of margin (channel with the lowest margin).
- Engineering for TX Port: A9155 performs the engineering study and displays the result for a given chan-
nel that you can specify in this dialogue.
- The way link analysis will be run i.e. either for one BER value, the one defined in the link property dialogue, or
for two different BER values that you can globally specify in this dialogue (in this case, A9155 will consider
these values for all the links).
6. Click the Interference tab and define interference analysis related parameters:
- The maximum distance around the studied site to find potential interfering sites.
816 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- The minimum threshold degradation.

- Whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered always on, always off or is to be computed
according to geometric correlation.
- The surface in km2 of this correlation area.
- The interfered useful bandwidth (%): The parameter enables A9155 to filter the interferers; this is the per-
centage of the bandwidth to be considered when searching for interferers. In order to take into account all the
potential interferers, set the parameter to 3000%.
7. Click the Models tab and define:
- The quality and availability analyses method to be adopted by the network. Five quality analyses methods
(Vigants-Barnett, K.Q factor and those based on different implemented ITU recommendations, 530-5, 530-8
and 530-10) and four availability analyses methods (Crane and those based on different implemented ITU rec-
ommendations, 530-5, 530-8 and 530-10) are available.
In case you select the 530-10 ITU recommendation as quality calculation method, you may use either a sim-
plified method or a method taking into account roughness to calculate the geoclimatic factor (K).
- If you prefer not to take into account fadings due to cross polarisation reduction and fadings due to enhance-
ments in the link analysis.
Cross polarisation reduction is considered in calculations of the unavailability due to multi-path and the una-
vailability due to rain whereas enhancements have an impact on the unavailability due to multi-path only.
- Global parameters used in implemented ITU recommendations such as the network level consideration values
for the Residual Bit Error Rate (RBER), the reference delay values for the secondary signal t (tau) for minimum
and non minimum phase conditions, number of errors per burst for Bit Error Rate between 10-3 and BERSES
and for Bit Error Rate between BERSES and RBER.
- Global parameters used in K.Q method such as exponents of frequency and distance parameters.
- The way interferer-victim propagation is calculated, i.e., either based on the useful signal or based on the ITU-
R 452-11 recommendations.
8. Click the Objectives tab and define:
- The priority of different ways to select quality and availability objectives, i.e., according to the rate, according
to ITU-T G.821 or ITU-T G.826 recommendations, or customised.
- Weight of different components considered in the availability objective formula.
9. Click OK or Cancel.
12.8.2 Restricting the Number of Sites and Microwave Links Studied

sible. For example, a complex microwave link planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. You,
however, might be responsible for the planning for only one city. In such a situation, doing engineering and interference
studies that calculate the entire network would not only take a lot of time, it is not necessary. Consequently, you can restrict
engineering and interference studies to the sites and microwave links that you are interested in and generate only the
results you need.
In A9155, there are two ways of restricting the number of sites and microwave links studied, each with its own advantages:
Filtering the desired sites and microwave links
You can simplify the selection of sites and microwave links to be studied by using a filter. You can filter sites and
microwave links according to one or more fields, or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria
in several fields. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector
polygon. For information on graphic filters, see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 74. This enables
you to keep only the sites and microwave links with the characteristics you want to study.

Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites and microwave links to be studied, limits the number of sites
and microwave links to be calculated, which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations.
You can combine a computation zone and a filter, in order to create a very precise selection of the sites and microwave
links to be studied.
In addition, it is possible to set a focus zone in order to filter the results displayed in reports (link budgets, interference).
12.8.2.1 Setting a Computation Zone

When you make a link budget or you study interference, A9155 calculates all the microwave links that are active, filtered
(i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and intersects the computation zone.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 817

A9155 User Manual


Note: You can save the computation zone in the user configuration. For information on the user
configuration, follow the instructions in "Exporting a Geo Data Set" on page 116.
12.8.2.2 Setting a Focus Zone

The focus zone defines an area on which reports are made. It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the
focus zone. The computation zone defines the sites and microwave links computed in link budget, interference studies,
etc. and the potential interferers while the focus zone filters the displayed results.
To define a focus zone:
3. Right-click the Focus Zone folder. The context menu appears.
5. Draw the focus zone:
A focus zone is delimited by a green line.
You can also create a focus zone as follows:

trative area, you can import it and use it as a focus zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone folder
on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu.
Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window
Note: You can save the focus zone in the user configuration. For information on the user configu-
ration, follow the instructions in "Exporting a Geo Data Set" on page 116.
12.8.3 Microwave Link Profile Analysis

Microwave links can be analysed in terms of the terrain and clutter profile between the two extremities in A9155. Profile
analysis is available in the Profile tab of the Microwave link analysis window, and can be accessed as described in the
next section.
It is possible to visualise the profile of the microwave link according to the direction of the selected link (Site A Site B or
Site B Site A). Moreover, for a link comprising one or two passive repeaters, it is also possible to visualise either the global
profile of the link (a "broken" profile), or the profile of each section (AP, AQ, PQ, PB and QB).
A9155 considers the central frequency of the frequency band used by the microwave link for this analysis. You can modify
antenna heights, the factor k, display options, and display a second ellipsoid for a second value of the k factor.
It is also possible to modify the geographic profile of the microwave link being analysed through the values tab of the micro-
wave link analysis window. Parameters, such as altitude, clutter class, clutter height, clutter category can be modified for
each point in the profile. The modifications are automatically applied on the Profile tab and saved.
A feature enables you to compute the "optimum" antenna heights according to the value of the factor k entered. The new
heights computed can be automatically saved in the properties of the link. You also have the option to study the effects of
space and frequency diversities on any microwave link.
818 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

A study of reflections is also available. A9155 displays the points of reflection and the zones of reflection along the micro-
wave link profile. It is also possible to obtain a detailed analysis of the zones of reflection.
12.8.3.1 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile

Microwave link profile analysis is available in the Profile tab of the Microwave link analysis window. This window can be
accessed through the microwave module toolbar or through the context menus related to the concerned microwave link
on the map or in the Explorer window.
To open the microwave link Profile analysis window:
2. Select Engineering > Profile Analysis from the context menu.
You can also access the Profile analysis window through button in the toolbar.
1. Click the button in the toolbar to activate the Microwave link analysis window Profile tab.
2. Select the microwave link to analyse either on the map, or in the Links folder in the Explorer window or from
the list available in the Profile tab.
You can right-click the Link button in the profile analysis window and choose from the context menu:
Properties to open the microwave link property dialogue.
Apart from this, you can right-click on the profile as well and select from the context menu:
Zoom In to zoom in on the microwave link profile.
Actual Size to reset the zoom level and restore the initial profile display.
Copy to copy the profile in the clipboard.
Print to print the microwave link profile.
Display Options to define display parameters
Display Information on the Current Point to display information on any point along the profile.
Display Fresnel Ellipsoids to view Fresnel zones.
Display Reflections to view zones and points of reflection along the profile.
Insert Repeater to add a new repeater on the selected link.
A list in the Profile tab lists all possible combination of hops that can be visualised in the window, i.e., Site A Site B or vice
versa and including any passive repeaters composing in the link.
The propagation model used to compute the propagation in microwave link profile analysis is the one assigned to the link
under study.
Note
The microwave link to be analysed must be configured beforehand (antenna, equipment, fre-
quency band and propagation model defined) in order to be able to visualise its profile.
12.8.3.2 Studying Microwave Link Clearance

The microwave link profile analysis window allows you to display the clearance along the entire link profile. In order to
display or hide the Fresnel zones between the two extremities of the microwave link:
1. Open the microwave link profile analysis window,
2. Right-click on the the profile to open its context menu,
3. Select the microwave link to analyse
4. Choose Display Fresnel ellipsoids command from the context menu,
It is possible to visualise the microwave link profile with two different values of the k factor. These values can be set through
the advanced options available by pressing the button opposite the microwave links list. A9155 displays the clear-
ance (%) and the penetration of the Fresnel zone for each value of k. In addition, it indicates for both antennas, the tilts/
direct ray, the azimuths and the angles of incidence.
The first Fresnel ellipsoid corresponding to the first k value is shown in blue, while the second related to the second k value
is shown in red. It is also possible to display another Fresnel ellipsoid when a secondary antenna is installed at the receiver.
If there are obstructions in the path of the microwave link that introduce losses, a green coloured line is drawn from the
transmitter to the first obstacles highest point. A perpendicular from the horizontal axis is also drawn to mark the obstacle
that introduces the highest loss in the link, and the loss from this obstacle is displayed on the top of this perpendicular.
A common mode of operation would be to display the first Fresnel zone at 100% and the second at 60% so as to depict
the minimum clearance requirement directly on the profile. To manage the display of Fresnel ellipsoids, both first and
second, you have to access the Display options dialogue for the profile and modify these parameters.
Here, it is also possible to modify the antenna heights at both extremities manually and automatically, this feature is
described in detail in the Optimising microwave link antenna heights section.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 819

A9155 User Manual
12.8.3.3 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options

The microwave link profile analysis tab provides the user with the possibility to manage parameters that affect the display
of the profile. To access the microwave link profile display options window:
3. Right-click on the profile to open its context menu,
4. Choose the Display options command,
6. Set the parameters of the current display,
Here you can manage the horizontal and vertical axes graduations, percentages of the first and second Fresnel ellipsoids
to be shown, the manner in which the curvature of the Earth is displayed, whether the reflections should be displayed or
not, and reflection paths you want to display, either the unobstructed reflection paths only or both obstructed and unob-
structed ones.
12.8.3.4 Zooming In on the Profile

A9155 provides the user with the possibility to zoom in on the profile.
To zoom in on the Profile:
1. Open the microwave link Profile Analysis Window.
3. Right-click on the profile to open its context menu.
4. Select Zoom In from the context menu.
5. Click the Zoom Area icon ( ) on the Zoom toolbar (or press CTRL+W).
6. Click in the profile on one of the four corners of the area you want to select.
To restore the initial profile:
1. Open the microwave link Profile Analysis Window.
3. Right-click the window to open its context menu.
4. Select Actual Size (1:1) from the context menu.
12.8.3.5 Printing a Microwave Link Profile

A9155 provides the user with the facility of printing a microwave link profile. To print the contents of a microwave link profile
analysis window:
3. Right-click on the profile to open its context menu,
4. Choose Print command,
12.8.3.6 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile

12.8.3.6.1 In the Profile Tab
A9155 is able to provide details on each point along the microwave link profile in a dialogue.
To open it:
1. Open the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis window,
3. Right-click on the window where the profile is displayed to open its context menu,
4. Select Display the current point information from the context menu.
5. Move the pointer along the profile.
The dialogue contains the following information at each point along the profile:
- Distance: Distance from the transmitting site,

- Total Height: Altitude of the ground level more the clutter height,
820 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Clearance: the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. This value is relative to the optical
line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the optical line of sight and the current point,
- Fresnel Ellipsoid Radius: Radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value,
- Pointer Altitude (z): Altitude of the pointer
Figure 12.17: Microwave analysis window Profile tab
As the mouse pointer is clicked-dragged along the profile of the microwave link in the microwave analysis window, a
special pointer pinpoints the location of the current point along the profile on the map window.
12.8.3.6.2 In the Values Tab

Microwave link analysis window has a tab called "Values" that provides the user with access to all the data values
concerned with the microwave link profile analysis extracted at different points along the profile.
To display the profile values through the Values tab:
3. Click the Values tab,
A9155 displays the following values for each point along the profile:
- Distance (m): the distance from the transmitting site,

- Height (m): the altitude of the ground level (from DTM files),
- Clutter: the clutter class,
- Clutter height (m): the clutter height from clutter height files if available or from clutter class file,
- Category: the clutter category assigned to each clutter class when configuring the propagation model,
- Radius (m): the radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value
- Clearance (m): the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. This value is relative to the
optical line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the optical line of sight and the current
point,
- Ellipsoid Penetration (%): the penetration of the current point in the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (per-
centage of the ellipsoid radius penetrated by the current point). This value is relative to the bottom of the
Fresnel ellipsoid and is given for the first k factor value.
Figure 12.18: Penetration and clearance values in the Values tab
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 821

A9155 User Manual
12.8.3.7 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values

You can modify in the Values tab some data values at any point along the profile under study and check the Profile tab to
visualise the impact of your modifications instantaneously.
To edit the profile values through the Values tab:
3. Select the Values tab,
4. Edit or modify the following values:
- Height
- Clutter
- Clutter Height
- Category
5. Click on the Actions button to open its context menu.
You can select:
- Copy to copy values of the entire table in the clipboard.

- Paste to paste values in the entire table.
- Import... to import values in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the table of values. Only
editable values can be imported.
- Export... to export the entire table, or selected columns in ASCII text files (TXT and CSV formats).
- Print to print the entire table.
- Commit Values to Link to store the modified values in the microwave link properties.
- Refresh Geo Data to regenerate the original microwave link profile values from the geo data files and replace
the user-modified values with these.
In addition, you can copy and paste data in the editable fields of the table using the shortcuts (CTRL+C) and (CTRL+V).
You can also copy the same data into several cells (Fill Down or Fill Up) using the shortcuts (CTRL+D, CTRL+U).
12.8.3.8 Optimising Microwave Link Antenna Heights

Microwave links antennas should be placed at such heights so as to avoid any obstruction of the line-of-sight signal. The
line-of-sight signal is considerably degraded if less than 60% of the first Fresnel ellipsoid is clear. Any penetration of an
obstacle inside the 60% area of the first Fresnel zone of any microwave link should thus be avoided.
A9155 provides with two possible means of modifying or optimising microwave links antenna heights through user-friendly
interfaces. The user can modify antenna heights manually using a mouse or by entering new values and directly visualising
the clearance and penetration parameters being affected in real-time.
Finally, a specific function is available in A9155 microwave module that lets you compute and adjust the microwave links
antenna heights at the two extremities to their optimum values. Two optimisation methods are available; both of them take
into account the values of the factor k, defining the curvature of the Earth, the geographic data defining any possible terrain
or clutter penetration in the microwave line-of-sight, the initial antenna heights and antenna tilt angles.
The following sections describe these functionalities in A9155.
12.8.3.8.1 Manually Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights

It is possible to modify antenna heights at both extremities of a microwave link through the profile tab of the microwave
link analysis window. To do this:
1. Open the microwave link analysis window,
2. Select the Profile tab,
Either,
a. Move the mouse pointer to the antenna height icon ( ) on the profile tab,
b. Click the antenna height icon (which now looks like this: ) with the mouse and drag it up or down to modify
the antenna height,
c. Right-click on the pointer to open its context menu,
d. Choose Save H? command to save the current antenna height in the microwave link,
Or,
a. Click the button opposite the microwave links list,

b. Modify the antenna height parameters of the current link,
c. Click the button for the site whose antenna height you want to optimise to open its context menu,
d. Choose Save H? command to save the current antenna height in the microwave link,
822 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Notes
H? can be Ha or Hb depending on the site of the microwave link under consideration.

It is possible to specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be
exceeded. This parameter can be defined in each site properties dialogue (Other Properties tab).
If defined, these height limits are represented in the Profile tab.
12.8.3.8.2 Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights

A9155 enables the user to calculate antenna heights automatically so as to optimise the microwave link.
To perform an automatic optimisation for an antenna:
1. Open the Microwave Link Analysis window,
2. Select the Profile tab,
3. Click the button opposite the microwave links list,
4. Click on the button for the site whose antenna height you want to optimise.The context menu appears.
5. Select Optimisation Method... from the context menu. The Height Optimisation dialogue opens.
6. Choose one optimisation method.
Two optimisation methods are available and can be selected:
- One is based on the clearance of the Fresnel ellipse: You may enter one or two values of the k factor and
define for each of them a target clearance. A9155 will determine antenna heights so as to fulfil the highest
constraint.
- The other one is based on diffraction losses: A9155 determines antenna heights so as to minimise diffraction
losses due to the main obstacle (i.e. it will find the antenna heights so as to get a clearance of 60% of the first
Fresnel zone).
7. Click OK or Cancel.
8. Click on the button for the site whose antenna height you want to optimise.The context menu appears.
9. Choose Optimise to compute the optimum antenna heights for both extremities according to the k factor defined.
It is also possible through the same context menu to freeze the antenna height at a certain value. In this way, you can
disallow any modification in this height during the optimisation process. Only the other antenna height will be computed
so as to optimise the link. Furthermore, you can always restore the last antenna height value through the Restore
command in the same menu.
Note: This context menu can also be accessed through right-clicking the pointer depicting the
antenna height at the extremities.
Once the optimum antenna heights have been computed by A9155, you can now save one or both the antenna heights
in the microwave link. This can be done through the same context menu as well.
This feature is only available for unbroken microwave link profiles, i.e., it is not accessible for microwave link profiles involv-
ing one or more repeaters. It enables you to compute optimum antenna heights for two-site microwave link profiles (e.g.,
Site Site B or Repeater P Site B).
Notes
It is possible to consider in the calculation a maximum pylon height for the receiving and trans-
mitting sites not to be exceeded. This parameter can be defined in each site properties dialogue
(Other Properties tab). If defined, these height limits are represented in the Profile tab.
Reflections are not taken into account in this calculation.
12.8.3.9 Studying Reflections Along Microwave Link Profile

Study of reflection is essential while designing any microwave links network. Multipath fading is caused mainly by ground
reflections interfering with an attenuated main signal. Deep fading may occur over short intervals due to instable reflection
conditions. Ground reflections become more serious if the whole wavefront is reflected in phase; called specular reflec-
tions. For this the reflection plane should have a sufficiently large area. For the wavefront to be reflected in phase, the
ground has to be smooth compared with the wavelength of the signal.
The divergence of the beam due to the Earths curvature must also be considered. Ground is considered to be smooth if
the variations are less than one-fourth of the wavelength.
In A9155, you can study reflective areas along any microwave link profile as well as the actual reflections of the signal
along the profile. Clutter categories are taken into account in the reflection study and must be assigned to clutter classes
in the microwave propagation model properties before analysing reflections along the profile.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 823

A9155 User Manual
To perform a reflection analysis in A9155:

1. Open the microwave link analysis window.
2. Select the Profile tab.
3. Right-click on the profile to display its context menu.
4. Choose Display reflections command from the context menu.
A9155 now displays all the possible reflection zones along the profile in the microwave link profile analysis
window, they are distinguished by a hashed pattern. By default, only unobstructed reflection paths formed
between the transmitter and the receiver sites are displayed. In order to view both unobstructed and obstructed
reflection paths, open the Display options dialogue and select the Displayed obstructed reflections options
(obstructed reflection path will be represented by a dotted line). The goal of the network planer is to optimise
antenna heights at the extremities so as to avoid any coincidences between the reflection paths and reflective
surfaces. Reflections will introduce losses to the link if they actually occur at the reflective surfaces. In this case,
A9155 is capable of determining these losses and generating detailed report on the characteristics of the reflection
paths and the reflective surfaces.
Notes
Reflection paths and reflective surfaces can only be visualised and analysed over unbroken
microwave link profiles, i.e., the profile should not include repeaters.
A reflection zone may be composed of several clutter classes.
It should be kept in mind that reflection point is a function of the k factor. It is possible by carefully positioning the antenna
heights to minimize the effects of reflection.
It is also possible to obtain detailed analyses of reflective surfaces and their impacts on the microwave links. You can get
detailed reflection losses analysis over any reflection zone along the path and you can also obtain a graph of differences
between reflection paths depicting the (tau) factor as a function of k factor. is the delay of the secondary signal
received through reflection.
To obtain the reflection losses analysis or graph of differences between reflection paths:
1. Display the reflection zones along the profile as explained above.
2. Right-click on a reflection zone or reflection path to study in the profile to display its context menu.
3. Select one of the following from the context menu:
- Display the Reflection Study Dialogue: To display the reflection losses related to the selected reflection
zone or reflection path.
- Graph of differences between reflected paths: To display the graph of (tau) with respect to the k factor
related to the selected reflection zone or reflection path.
A9155 lists roughness, ground type, humidity type, permittivity, conductivity, surface reflection coefficient, divergence
factor, specular reflection factor and effective reflection coefficient as ground characteristics, and attenuations due to
antenna tilts, reflected waves and maximum possible fade depth, for any reflection zone through the Reflection losses
command.
Note: The calculation of the reflection point follows the recommendations 530.10 of the ITU-R.
12.8.3.10 Studying Space Diversity Effects on Microwave Links

In A9155, it is possible to introduce space and frequency diversities at the microwave link level. You can define second
antennas and their distance with respect to the main antenna in each microwave link properties in order to introduce space
diversity to the link. Through the same properties dialogue, you can also define the microwave link extremities to operate
with a certain frequency diversity by defining a frequency diversity separation in terms of MHz.
Diversity techniques are used to improve the received signal strength (or to improve the reception threshold) by introducing
the ability to combine more than one signals at the receiver to obtain a stronger useful signal.
Space diversity is very spectrum efficient and provides excellent performance against multipath fading. Frequency diver-
sity is a very efficient method from the propagation point of view but it is not very spectrum efficient as it requires that two
frequency bands be available.
To study the effects of space diversity method used for each microwave link:
1. Open the microwave link Profile Analysis window,
1. Select the Profile tab.
2. Display the reflection zones along the profile as explained above.
3. Right-click on a reflection zone.
4. Click the Diversity tab.
You may display:
- Either the variations of attenuation as a function of the refractivity factor (k), for three different receiver antenna
heights,
824 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Or the variations of attenuation as a function of the receiver antenna height, for three different refractivity fac-
tors (k).
The scales and other parameters corresponding to this calculation and display can be managed in the related display
options dialogue.
Figure 12.19: Microwave link analysis window Diversity tab
You can define display options by clicking the Actions button and choosing Display options in the menu. Here you can
manage the scales of the vertical and the horizontal axes depicting the variations in attenuation level and the varying
values of the k factor/receiver antenna height respectively. The effects of introducing diversity antennas can be directly
visualised on this graph by modifying the parameters available. The height H2 corresponds to the actual antenna height
at the receiver (Site B or Site A depending on the profile selected). The other heights (H1 and H3) correspond to imaginary
diversity antenna heights placed at a distance of Suggested Antenna Separation below and above the main antenna.
The Suggested Antenna Separation value is automatically determined by A9155 and represents the least separation
distance that provides that the attenuations and gains of the three antennas never coincide at any value of refractive index
within provided range.
12.8.4 Microwave Link Reliability Analysis

Reliability is the general term used to refer to the quality and availability of a microwave link obtained through assessing
its performance according to the criteria defined in the relevant performance objectives. Ideally, a microwave link should
be completely reliable 100% of the time. Although in practice, this performance level is never achieved over any microwave
link due the forever present and continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems in the equipment.
The objective of carrying out reliability analyses is to estimate the non-availability or outage of a microwave link on annual
basis and to determine the quality of connection over worst case or average monthly scenarios. Reliability analysis takes
into consideration the parameters of fade margin, diffraction loss, average annual temperature, terrain roughness calcu-
lations, radio parameters, antenna parameters, transmission and reception parameters and other miscellaneous losses.
Microwave link reliability analysis determines whether any designed system will operate successfully. In A9155, the overall
process of analysing a microwave link is divided in the form of microwave link budget analysis, and microwave link
performance objectives analysis. These are described individually in the following sections.
12.8.4.1 Analysing Microwave Link Performance Objectives

It is possible to assign a link class to each microwave link or each group of microwave links. This link class refers to the
definitions of performance objectives as described in the microwave links classes and performance objective section. The
quality and availability objectives tables include the standard classes defined by the ITU in the G-821 and G-826 recom-
mendations by default.
Once a microwave link has been designed and its link class defined, the user can launch a calculation to determine the
margins required by the microwave link to meet the performance objectives defined in the link class. The next section
describes how to perform an analysis or the required margins for achieving the defined performance objectives.
12.8.4.1.1 Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins

The microwave link required margins are listed in the EPO tab of the microwave link analysis window.
To calculate the microwave link required margins:
2. Choose Engineering > Required Margin from the context menu.
This will open the microwave link analysis window with the EPO tab displayed by default. This tab contains the report
generated after the calculation of required margins. This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described
in the Configuring the performance objectives report display section.
Microwave link required margin results in the EPO tab include the following information:
Link Specifications: Including the information about the sites at the two extremities of the link (name, location
and altitude), the equipment installed at each site (name, compatible digital hierarchy, modulation used, capacity,
rate and bandwidth), the operating frequency band of the microwave link and its length.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 825

A9155 User Manual
Performance Objectives taken into account: The performance objectives considered in the margin calcula-
tions, i.e., quality objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER) and availability objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER).
Rx Level: The reception level information at the receiver including the Bit Error Rate and the receiver sensitivity.
Quality (Clear-Air): The data related to the margin calculations and results (acquired margin against dispersive
fading, the error performance parameters, their relevant required error performance objective probabilities, flat
margins and composite margins) and the total required margin.
Availability (Rain): The data related to the margin calculations and results (the error performance parameters,
their relevant required error performance objective probabilities and required margins) and the total required
margin.
Note: The required performance objectives are also listed in the report on the Report tab of the
Microwave Link Analysis window.
12.8.4.1.2 Configuring the Performance Objectives Report

You can configure the display parameters of the report generated under the EPO tab to display some or all of the param-
eters used in the calculations and results of the calculations with different styles.
To configure the performance objectives report display:
2. Click on the EPO tab,
Either,
- Right-click on the window to open its context menu,
Or,
- Click the Actions button on the window to open its context menu,
3. Select Configure report command to open the configuration dialogue
4. Use the Whats this help to get description of the fields available in the dialogue,
This configuration dialogue lets you manage the display of the report through the options available in two tabs. The Report
content tab lets you select the level of information and detail you want to include in your report. You can check the infor-
mation you want to display and clear the rest. You can manage the font and paragraph characteristics of the displayed
report through the Style tab.
12.8.4.1.3 Performing a Microwave Link Budget Analysis

A link budget commonly refers to the complete gain and loss equation from the transmitter, through the ambient medium
(air, cable, waveguide, fibre, etc.) and through to the receiver. In the case of microwave links, the medium of propagation
for RF energy is of course the CAI (common air interface). Link budget calculation results are also excellent means to
understand the various factors which must be traded off to realise a certain level of reliability for any microwave link within
a given cost. It can be rightly considered the first step to be taken by any engineer in order to determine the feasibility of
a given system or network design.
A comprehensive link budget tool is available in A9155 that generates detailed microwave link budget reports including
many initial parameters as well as exhaustive results. As both the initial conditions and the outputs are listed in a clear
report and summarized as well, the user has the possibility to compare with ease the different factors compromising the
overall microwave link reliability. Thus, A9155 facilitates decision making by the user in terms of factors to be tuned or
traded off in order to realise the project.
Link budget computations in A9155 can be performed on single microwave links as well as on a group of microwave links
simultaneously. The following sections present both of the link budget calculation methods.
Computing Single Microwave Link Budget
A9155 provides the user with detailed microwave link budget tool. This tool generates a comprehensive report for each
studied microwave link as detailed below.
Moreover, the results provided in this report are computed in real-time. Therefore, it is possible to modify the properties of
the microwave link, or the calculation parameters, and immediately visualise the impacts of the modifications in the micro-
wave link analysis window (both Profile and Report tabs). Furthermore, any modifications made by the user in the profile
of the microwave link through the Profile tab of the microwave link analysis window or any modifications in the geography
of the microwave link profile made through the Values tab are also taken into account in the link budget in the Report tab
in real-time.
To generate a microwave link budget for a single microwave link:
2. Choose Engineering and Report from the context menu.
You can also access the Report tab by opening the Microwave Link Analysis window and clicking the Report tab.
826 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

The Report tab of the microwave link analysis window contains the link budget for the link being studied. Microwave link
budget results in the Report tab include the following information:
Microwave Link Profile: A snapshot from the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis window in order to facil-
itate direct visualisation and printing of the link profile with the link budget report.
Summary: A summary of the link being studied; its operating frequency band, length, and nominal received power
level, fade margin, worst month quality, average annual availability and whether quality and availability objectives
are reached for both directions of the link and the specified BER values. Finally, a global link estimation taking into
account both link quality and availability is provided over an average year.
Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design; site names, locations, and altitudes for
both extremities, repeaters (if any), antennas used at both sites with their respective models, heights, azimuths,
tilts, gains, diameters and near fields, microwave transceiver equipment installed at both sites with details such as
the models, digital hierarchy employed, modulation used, data rates, bandwidths and capacities.
Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave link including
the EIRP, ATPC effects, transmitter powers, passive repeater gains (if any), total losses comprising of equipment
losses, connection losses, attenuator losses and waveguides and cable losses, polarisation at both sites, and the
channel for which the computations have been performed (maybe the central frequency of the microwave links
operating frequency band).
Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including the bit error
ratios and sensitivities at the receivers, and total losses at reception comprising of equipment losses, connection
losses, attenuator losses and waveguides and cable losses.
Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which the link is
operating, climatic factor, rain intensity (exceeding 0.01% of time), PL percentage, temperature, water vapour den-
sity, refraction index, geoclimatic factor K.
Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have been performed
such as the calculation methods used (propagation model, quality model, availability model, space diversity, fre-
quency diversity), quality objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER), and availability objectives (SESR, ESR, BBER).
Propagation: Propagation results for both directions of the microwave link including total attenuation, free space
loss, dry air, due to water vapour, vegetation attenuation, diffraction, antenna losses and antenna discrimination.
Unavailability due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in both directions
and for the specified BER values, such as total outage ratio, monthly outage period, annual outage period, per-
formance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required), ESR (required), BBER (required)), details for the worst
month (dispersive fading, selective fading, discrimination reduction, enhancement forecast).
Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in both directions
and for the specified BER values. These results include total outage (annual average), monthly outage period,
annual outage period, performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required), ESR (required), BBER
(required)), details for the mean year (rain fading, discrimination reduction).
Unavailability due to faults: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain. These results
include availability of hot standby, outage due to faults (per year) and annual outage period.
This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described in the Configuring the link budget report display
section.
Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters
It is possible to study the influence of some parameters on the microwave link engineering by setting some calculation
options.
To modify calculation options for analysis:
1. Open the Microwave Link Analysis window.
2. Click the Report tab.
3. Click the Actions button. The context menu appears.
4. Select from the context menu:
- Analysis Parameters for the Hop: to take into account space and antenna diversities on the microwave link
engineering without modifying the microwave link properties.
- Calculation Parameters: to define the studied port, BER values, etc., or change calculation models. For fur-
ther information, see "Global Calculation Parameters" on page 816
Configuring the Link Budget Report Display
You can configure the display parameters of the report generated under the Report tab to display some or all of the param-
eters used in the computations and results of the computations with different styles.
To configure the link budget report display:
2. Click on the Report tab,
Either,
- Right-click on the window to open its context menu,
Or,
- Click the Actions button on the window to open its context menu,
3. Select Configure report command to open the configuration dialogue
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 827

A9155 User Manual
4. Use the Whats this help to get description of the fields available in the dialogue,
This configuration dialogue lets you manage the display of the report through the options available in two tabs. The Report
content tab lets you select the level of information and detail you want to include in your report. You can check the infor-
mation you want to display and clear the rest. The Report content tab enables You to switch the display of the microwave
link profile snapshot in the report tab on or off as well. You can manage the font and paragraph characteristics of the
displayed report through the Style tab.
Computing Multiple Microwave Link Budgets
A9155 provides the user with the feature enabling to compute multiple microwave link budgets for a group of microwave
links simultaneously. Microwave links in A9155 can be grouped in subfolders according to different property parameters
(e.g. frequency band). The user has the possibility of launching simultaneous link budget calculations for the microwave
links grouped in a subfolder. A9155 will calculate all the microwave links in the subfolder that are active, filtered (i.e., that
are selected by the current filter parameters), and intersects the computation zone.
For information on the computation zone, see "Setting a Computation Zone" on page 817.
To perform link budget computations on a group of microwave links:
Either,
- Right-click on the Links folder to open its context menu,
Or,
a. Expand the Links folder by clicking the button,
b. Right-click on the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to compute link budgets to open its
context menu,
3. Choose the Calculate command from the Link Budgets menu.
the toolbar.
This will open a table listing all the link budgets computed for the microwave links included in the subfolder for
which computations had been launched. This table contains the link budgets for both directions of each microwave
link.
4. To view each single microwave link budget, click on the table row corresponding to the microwave link being
studied,
5. Click on the Report tab.
A9155 indicates the characteristics of the link (sites, antennas and equipment installed), the signal level received, the fade
margin, and its quality and availability in the Report tab. It displays the transmission parameters (EIRP, various losses,
etc.), reception parameters (sensitivity, various losses, etc.), calculation options, and geo-climatic parameters. It also
details the propagation calculation (total attenuation) and the calculations related to link engineering (quality (Clear-Air),
unavailability due to rain, unavailability due to faults). All the results are provided in both the directions of the microwave
link being studied.
12.8.4.2 End-to-End Reliability Level

A9155 provides the user with the option of performing end-to-end reliability analyses over multi-hop links. This calculation
is based on the ITU-R 530-5/8/10 recommendations.
To perform an end-to-end reliability analysis over a multi-hop link:
Either,
c. Expand the Multi-hops folder by clicking the button,
Or, on the map,
- Right-click on the multi-hop link to be analysed,
Choose the Analyse option from the context menu.
This will display the end-to-end multi-hop microwave links analysis results window containing the following information:
Multi-hop link characteristics: microwave links forming the multi-hop link, total length of the multi-hop link,
Transmission site characteristics: the frequency band, sub-band, channels, and polarisation of each transmitting
site,
Reception characteristics: reception thresholds, margins, quality (percentage over a month), availability (per-
centage over average year) and failures (percentage over year),
828 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Multi-hop link budget (both directions): Clear-air quality and unavailability due to rain including total outage ratio,
monthly and annual outage periods, quality indicators (probabilities of SESR, ESR, BBER) compared to the
required performance objectives and unavailability due to faults comprising annual outages due to faults and
annual outage period.
Links within a network that are part of multi-hop links but are based on other technologies, such as optic fibre links, are
also supported in the calculation.
12.8.5 Interference Analysis and Frequency Planning

Interference is any unwanted signal that would present itself at the receiver end of a microwave link for demodulation.
There can be many causes of interference. This unwanted signal can be a delayed version of the links own signal, an
adjacent channels signal travelling over the same link, or a signal from another microwave link or RF source.
In analog systems the interference increases the idle and baseband noise, which has a direct impact on quality. It also
leads to increment in the intermodulation products, which reduces the quality further. In digital microwave systems, the
main interference problem occurs in a faded condition where the signal levels approach the receiver threshold values. The
interference effect is not in terms of its absolute signal amplitude but in terms of the C/I ratio.
Frequency planning is the process of planning the usage of any allocated frequency spectrum so as to utilise it in the most
efficient manner. Good frequency planning leads to less interference and high spectral efficiency of the system. Any
network planner working on the design of a system requires tools that facilitate analyses of interference and frequency
plans. A9155 microwave module incorporates comprehensive interference analysis and frequency planning tools
described in the following sections.
12.8.5.1 Interference Analysis

A9155 microwave module includes comprehensive interference analysis features based on the ITU 452-11 recommenda-
tions. Interference calculation between links and over the network can be performed for a single link as well as for any
user-defined group of links. In this case, A9155 will calculate all the microwave links in the group that are active, filtered
(i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and intersects the computation zone.
For information on the computation zone, see "Setting a Computation Zone" on page 817.
The user can set a number of interference calculation parameters including the calculation radius, received interferer
signal threshold and geoclimatic correlation factor between links.
By default, the interferences in A9155 are computed according to the ITU-R 452-11 recommendations. However, it is
possible to the user to change the interference computation method and base it on any of the propagation models available
in the Module tab. This can be done through the network properties dialogue available through the Microwave Radio Links
folder of the Explorer window.
When calculating interference levels received for any microwave link, A9155 searches for potential interferers in the
network operating in the same frequency band. Potential interferers, among all the microwave links in the network, are the
active and filtered microwave links whose transmitter receiver trajectory intersects or passes through the computation
zone and whose interfering transmitter interfered receiver distance is less than a given value. A9155 also considers the
adjacency of frequency bands, i.e., microwave links with equipment operating frequency bands that overlap the operating
frequency band of the microwave link being studied.
Following parameters are taken into account when calculating interferences:
Interferer ATPC: Can be user-defined as always on, always off or based on a calculated geometric correlation.
IRFs defined in the IRF table if available
"T/I, transmission spectrum, receiver selectivity" graphs defined at the equipment level or theoretical graphs.
Polarisation and equipment signatures.
Co-channel and adjacent channel interference.
A9155 can perform quick interference analyses for single microwave links as well as for groups of microwave links. It can
generate qualitative analysis reports and detailed results in both and can display all the interference relations between
studied microwave links graphically on the map. The following sections describe how to carry out microwave link interfer-
ence analyses in A9155.
12.8.5.1.1 Microwave IRF Definition

Microwave IRF or Interference Reduction Factor is a receiver filtering protection that is a function of the difference that
exists between the central frequencies of the disturbed signal and of the disturbing signal. These are user-definable protec-
tion levels for each victim interferer microwave transceiver equipment pair. For each pair, you can enter the protection
levels (in dB) for different deltaF (MHz).
The following sections describe the modelling of IRF in A9155.
Microwave IRF Table
The IRF table enables you to define IRF (i.e. protection levels) between victim and interferer microwave equipment. These
IRFs are used during the calculation of interferences.
To access the IRF table:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 829

A9155 User Manual
3. Right-click on the Links folder to open the context menu.

4. Choose Open table command from the IRF menu to display the related table.
You can also use the available assistant (table view of pieces of victim and interferer equipment fabricated by certain
manufacturer(s) and that operate in the same frequency band) in order to easily define IRFs.
Note: You can double-click on a record in the IRF table to open its corresponding properties dia-
log.
Assistant for the IRF Definition
In A9155, an assistant enables the user to easily define IRFs between transmission and reception transceiver equipment
fabricated by certain manufacturers and that operate in the same frequency band.
To use the assistant to define IRFs:
4. Select IRF and Per Frequency Band/Manufacturer from the context menu. The IRF Setting dialogue appears.
5. Select the Frequency Band from the menu. Only equipment operating in the selected frequency band is displayed
in the grid.
6. Choose the TX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Only equipment fabricated by the selected manufac-
turer are displayed in the grid.
7. Select the RX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Only equipment fabricated by the selected manufacturer
is displayed in the grid.
8. Define an IRF graph between transmission and reception equipment:
b. Select Add record from the context menu.
c. Enter a protection level for different frequency spacings.
d. Click OK to validate or Cancel.
9. Remove an IRF graph between transmission and reception equipment:
b. Select Delete from the context menu.
10. Create an IRF graph between transmission and reception equipment from equipment graphs or theoretical graphs.
b. Select Calculate from Masks... from the context menu. The IRF Calculation dialogues appears.
c. Under Transmitter Spectrum Mask, select either "As Equipment" in order to use the transmission spectrum
graph defined for the equipment, or a theoretical "transmission spectrum" graph compatible with the operating
frequency band of the transmission equipment.
d. Under Receiver Filtering Mask, select either "As Equipment" in order to use the receiver selectivity graph
defined for the equipment, or a theoretical "receiver selectivity" graph compatible with the operating frequency
band of the reception equipment.
e. Define the calculation step stated in frequency spacing (MHz).
f. Click Run to determine the IRF graph.
g. Click OK to validate the result or Cancel.
11. Click OK to validate the new IRFs in the IRF table or Cancel.
These IRF graphs are used during the calculation of interferences.
830 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 12.20: IRF Definition per frequency band/manufacturer
You can use the Fill (Up, Down, Right, Left) and copy/paste functions from the context menu available in the dialogue to
assign or duplicate IRF protection level values among equipment pairs. These can also be used through their proper
keyboard shortcuts.
12.8.5.1.2 Usage of IRF in Interference Calculations

As explained in the previous paragraph, the IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the interference calcula-
tion. When studying interference between a transmission equipment and a reception equipment, A9155 first checks if an
IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment - reception equipment pair in the IRF table. If defined, it uses it. Else,
it determines the IRF graph during the interference calculation. It proceeds as follows:
1. It checks that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer, capacity and
modulation. In this case, A9155 uses T/I graphs in order to determine the IRF graph. It uses either the graphs
defined for equipment if available, or the theoretical "T/I" graphs if not.
2. If the equipment manufacturer, capacity or modulation are not the same, A9155 merges the transmission spec-
trum and the receiver selectivity graphs of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph. It uses either the graphs
defined for equipment if available, or the theoretical graphs if not.
12.8.5.1.3 Performing Interference Analysis on a Microwave Link

A9155 provides comprehensive yet easy to use features enabling the user to carry out interference studies on any micro-
wave link of the network. You can easily define the parameters for studying each microwave link, visualise the results in
the form of reports and tables, and view the interference connections between the microwave link extremities being studied
and their interferers and victims respectively.
To perform an interference analysis on a microwave link:
2. Choose Planning and Interference Details from the context menu.
Results are displayed in the form of a detailed interference results window with the following five tabs:
Qualitative summary: This tab contains a qualitative report generated after the study of interferences over any
given microwave link. The report lists:
- Microwave link characteristics: Parameters for the sites corresponding to the microwave link extremities
(longitude, latitude, altitude) and some microwave link properties (frequency band, length).
- Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the interference study has been carried out (prop-
agation model, interference calculation model) and the parameters defined by the user when launching the
computations (power control, minimum threshold degradation, maximum distance, correlation area).
- Interferences: Results of interference computations over the microwave link (nominal received carrier power
level, fade margin, effective margin, C/I, threshold degradation, total interference in clear-air, threshold deg-
radation for rain and total interference in rain).
- Engineering: This part of the report lists the outputs relative to the quality of the link in clear-air (worst month
quality, monthly outage period, annual outage period and detailed results for the worst month), link availability
in rain (total outage average per year, monthly outage period, annual outage period and detailed for the
average year) and performance objective probabilities in both cases (required SESR, ESR and BBER).
Victim tabs: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave link being studied along
with relevant details of the interference study.
Interferer tabs: List the microwave links that are interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link being
studied along with relevant details of the interference study.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 831

A9155 User Manual
12.8.5.1.4 Calculating Interference for Multiple Microwave Links

It is possible in A9155 to compute interference levels for a group of microwave links. You can also perform interference
analysis over the entire network of microwave links.
To compute interference over a group of microwave links:
Either,
c. Right-click on the Links folder to open its context menu,
Or,
a. Expand the Links folder by clicking the button,
b. Right-click on the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to compute interferences to open its
context menu,
1. Choose the Calculate command from the Interferences menu. The Microwave Radio Links Properties
dialogue appears.
2. Define calculation parameters. For further information, See Global Calculation Parameters on page 816.
3. Click OK to launch calculations.
The results of the interference calculation over multiple microwave links are displayed in the form of a table. This table lists
the results for all the microwave link studied in the directions (site A site B/site B site A) selected by the user.
To view details of each single microwave link, double-click on the record related to it in the table. This will open a detailed
interference results window including five tabs as described in "Performing Interference Analysis on a Microwave Link" on
page 831.
Notes
You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the
toolbar.
You can access each microwave links properties by double clicking the corresponding record in
the Victim/Interferer tabs.
These calculations, performed over a group of microwave links, are saved in memory as long as
the .atl document is open (not saved in the document). So, once calculations have been per-
formed for all the links, you can quickly perform interference studies for a particular link or a
group of links.
The validity of results is automatically managed by A9155. It is however possible to force recal-
culation of all results. To do this, it is necessary to delete the existing calculations and then recal-
culate.
12.8.5.1.5 Displaying Interference on the Map

After calculating interference on a microwave link, the user can display the result on the map.
To display interference connections on the map
1. Click the microwave link on the map.
2. Click in the Toolbar.

The interferer and victim connections between the studied microwave link and its interferers and victims are displayed on
the map.A9155 displays these interferers and victims for both extremities of the studied microwave link by inwards and
outwards pointing arrows respectively. This feature helps you in easily locating the microwave transmitters that are neither
interfering with the link nor being interfered by it. You can hide them by clicking again.
When the interference connections are displayed on the map, you can use the tool tip to show further information about
each interference connection by placing the cursor on it.
You can define the ways in which interferer and interfered link extremities will be displayed on the map.
1. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window.
3. Right-click on the Links folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select Interference and Display Options from the context menu. The Interference dialogue opens.
You can choose different types of lines and colours to depict the interference connections on the map and select
if you want to make them visible.
832 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

12.8.5.2 Frequency Planning

Planning microwave link networks involves a number of areas of analysis. For each new link created in any environment,
there is a list of interference conflicts created due to this newly introduced link. It is common experience that such modifi-
cations in existing network designs introduce a number of interference problems that could have been avoided during the
initial design of the same network. Thus, frequency planning in microwave networks is of extreme importance not only for
interference reduction at the initial stage of the network but also to envisage for future modifications in the network.
The process of frequency selection in microwave systems is accomplished with interference minimisation being the most
important objective. There are various ways to accomplish this particular objective. A logical approach is to define a
number of specific frequency plans, each containing a fixed number of specific frequencies, then divide each plan into a
high segment and a low segment.
The idea is to basically allow frequency assignments to be made in pairs, with each pair having minimum separations.
When an assignment is made, the transmitter and receiver get assignments in opposite segments. If the transmitter
frequency is in the high block, the receiver frequency will be in the low block and vice versa.
A9155 includes a number of features that assist the microwave link network planner in the frequency planning process.
These features include:
Spectral analyser
Semi-automatic channel search tool
Site parity checking tool
The following sections describe the functioning of these tools.
12.8.5.2.1 Working with the Microwave Link Spectrum Analyser

A9155 microwave link module can display a channel usage histogram within any microwave links operating frequency
band enabling the user to allocate unused or less used channels where required. This tool computes and draws a graph
representing the channels used along with the interference levels received on each channel of a half band. Through this
graph, you can find the channels with least interference levels in order to allocate them to microwave links.
To access the spectrum analyser:
2. Choose Planning and Frequency Spectrum from the context menu.
This opens the microwave link analysis window and directly displays the I levels on the band tab. A list in the tab
lists all possible combination of hops that can be studied, i.e., Site A Site B or vice versa.
A9155 computes the interference levels on each channel of the frequency half-band (lower or upper) of the micro-
wave link and represents them as vertical lines on the graph. The red line shows the total noise level received on
the interfered channel and each blue line represents the signal level transmitted on each interfering channel.
You can easily locate the channels on which there is least or no level of interference and can allocate these "free"
channels where required.
Note: Each vertical line representing the interference level received at any channel depicts the
peak signal value. If there are more than one interfering signals, only the peak value is dis-
played on the graph.
12.8.5.2.2 Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search

The semi-automatic channel search tool in A9155 ranks channels according to a user-definable cost function enabling the
user to find the best channel or channels to allocate to a microwave link. This channel search is performed according to
the interference received / transmitted per channel.
To perform a semi-automatic channel search for a microwave link:
2. Choose Planning and Semi-automatic Search from the context menu.
3. This will open the semi-automatic channel search tool window.
4. Use the Whats this help to get description of the fields available in the dialogue.
5. Click Calculate to launch the computations.
In the semi-automatic channel search tool window, you have to define the following computation criteria and parameters:
The directions of the link to be computed (Site A Site B, Site B Site A or both)
The frequency sub-band to consider (can be selected from a list of available frequency sub-bands relative to the
frequency band of the microwave link being studied)
The frequency half-band to compute (lower or upper) for the transmission site (the opposite half-band is assigned
to the reception site)
Channel weightings for the interferer and victim channels
The results window displays a list of channels sorted in increasing order with respect to their corresponding costs. This
implies that the best available channels, in terms of the related costs, are the ones listed on top of the list. It is then possible
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 833

A9155 User Manual
through this results window to allocate the best channels to the link by checking the channels to assign and clicking the
Commit button.
12.8.5.2.3 Checking Microwave Link Site Parities

The parity of sites can be verified either graphically on the map or in a report. A9155 considers the sites of microwave links
which are active, filtered (i.e., that are selected by the current filter parameters), and intersects the computation zone.
"Checking Site Parities on the Map" on page 834
"Creating a Report on Site Parities" on page 834.
Checking Site Parities on the Map
The site parity checking tool enables the user to view the site parities on the map and hence detect any possible parity
conflicts.
To perform a site parity check and display:
3. Right-click the Link folder. The context menu appears.
4. Select Interferences, Channels Distribution per Site and Display on the Map from the context menu. The
Channel Distribution dialogue appears.
5. Select the operating frequency band for which you want to check the parities of microwave link extremities.
6. Choose an icon for the different cases.
- Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band.
- Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band.
- Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands.
- Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site.
7. Enter the position of icons relative to the site (dpi).
8. Select the Add to Legend check box in order to add the displayed icons to a legend.
9. Click OK to start the computations.
You can also access the same channel distribution configuration dialogue through the toolbar by clicking the button.
Once the site parities are displayed on the map, you can hide them by clicking the button again. You can also hide
the site parities through the context menu as follows:
4. Select Interferences and Hide Channel Distribution from the context menu.
Creating a Report on Site Parities
A9155 enables the user to check site parities and to display the results in a report.
To display the result of the site parity checking in a report:
4. Select Interferences, Channels Distribution per Site and Generate Report from the context menu. The
Channel Distribution dialogue appears.
5. Select the operating frequency bands for which you want to check the parities of the microwave link extremities.
6. Click OK to start the calculations.
A9155 checks the site parities of all the microwave links working at the selected frequency bands. Once A9155
has finished checking site parities, results are displayed in the Channel Distribution table.
The Channel Distribution table contains the following information.
- Frequency Band: The operating frequency band.

- Site: The name of the site.
- Parity: The parity of the site.
- Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band.
- Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band.
- Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands.
- Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site.
834 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

- Cause: Information provided for multiple parity only. A9155 gives the name of microwave links whose the site
has a multiple parity.
- Longitude: The longitude of the site.
- Latitude: The latitude of the site.
You can sort and filter data in the Channel Distribution table. For more information, see "Sorting Data in Tables" on
page 65 and "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 66.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 835

A9155 User Manual
836 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

CHAPTER 13
MULTI-USER FEATURES
Chapter 13: Multi-user Features
13 Multi-user Features
13.1 Multi-user Projects: Overview
A9155 is able to store and to exchange (load or refresh) project data in a standard database.
Working with a database allows several users to share the same data without risking hidden data consistency loss. Data-
base do not integrate all radio and geo parameters of a network. Nevertheless, it is also possible to create user configu-
ration files (containing geo file paths and description (including vector or raster traffic data), computation zone definition,
prediction definitions, folder configurations, macro file paths, AFP configuration - GSM documents only -, Automatic Neigh-
bour Allocation Parameters, Automatic Scrambling Code Allocation - UMTS documents only -, Automatic PN Offset Allo-
cation - cdmaOne/CDMA2000 documents only) that can be exchanged between users working on the same project. Once
the database is created, it is easily possible for each user to make modifications and either reload modified data from the
database or refresh database with pending changes. Moreover, potential data conflicts (e.g., on modified or deleted
records), due to other users actions are detected and the user is assisted in resolving them.
An A9155 document, once connected to a database, keeps memory of the connection and allows the user to manage data
consistency in deferred processing.
Furthermore, to open an A9155 session, connected or not to a project in a database, the tool can be started from a
command line, including several management options.
Since neither databases nor user configurations store calculation results, A9155 features the possibility to share external-
ised path loss matrices between users. So, you can work using a central losses folder containing matrices related to a
database project shared by several users.
13.2 Creating/Starting Database Projects

13.2.1 Operating Principles
At the beginning of a session, you can connect (either creating a new database or a new atl document from a database)
to an existing database and load its data in your own A9155 file. At any time during the session, you are able to archive
your work into the connected database, or refresh your document with radio data coming from the database.
You can perform the following operations:
Connection between an existing database and an A9155 new document:
Export a current A9155 document data to a database
Archive in the database:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 839

A9155 User Manual
Refresh from the database:
13.2.2 Creating a New Database from a Document

This procedure permits the user to create the reference database that can either be used by several users or handled
easily.
To create a new database from the currently open .atl A9155 document:
1. From the menu bar, select the Database command in the File menu,
2. Then click on the Export option from the open menu,
3. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open export window,
4. Click on the button after giving the appropriate name and format (MS Access, SQL Server, Oracle,
Sybase) to the exported file.
The data which are stored in database deal with radio data (sites, transmitters, antennas, station templates, microwave
links, etc.), radio parameters (such as propagation models, frequency bands, etc.), UMTS or cdmaOne/CDMA2000
parameters, Neighbours (internal and external), custom fields, units, coordinate systems.
The data which are not saved in database are Geo data files (or paths) related parameters, folder configurations, study
definitions, computation and focus zones, traffic maps, measurements, path loss results (matrices) and coverage areas.
The user configuration feature allows the user to save Geo data paths and related parameters, folder configurations, study
definitions, the computation zone, AFP configuration (GSM documents only), Automatic Neighbour Allocation Parameters,
Automatic Scrambling Code Allocation (UMTS documents only), Automatic PN Offset Allocation (cdmaOne/CDMA2000
documents only). Traffic maps, measurements and coverage areas can be easily exported. Path loss results can be
shared between users using a central matrix private folder. Matrices can be also exported in external files to be used in
other applications.
13.2.3 Creating a New Document from a Database

This connection must be established when creating a new document. Once connected, A9155 loads the entire base in
your new document. Then connection is interrupted. A new connection with reference database will be activated only when
necessary in order to enable other users access.
To create a new A9155 document based on data from an existing database:
1. From the menu bar, Right-click on the File menu, then
Either
- Choose the open from a database... option from the current menu (if no project is already open)
Or
- Select the Database option, then Choose the open from a database... option (if a project is already open),
2. Select the database file format (including databases via a Microsoft Data link file (.UDL)) and name (Use the
What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialogue),
3. Click on the button to open the selected database. Connection procedure is specific to each data-
base type.
840 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Notes:
You will have to check the accuracy of the geo data paths (clutter, traffic, etc.) that may not be
valid on your computer.
A9155 automatically performs a primary consistency check to avoid incompatibility between
redundant fields in GSM GPRS EGPRS documents. When opening a document from a database
or refreshing a document from a database, A9155 updates the values of the fields "Number of
TRXs" and "Channels" of the Transmitters table, with the values from the TRGs and the TRXs
tables respectively.
13.2.4 Starting A9155 from the Command Line

It is possible to start A9155 from the command line and open a project stored in an Access or Oracle database by entering
the database connection parameters (user/password/server).
In the command dialogue, type the following instruction:
In case of Oracle database:
"C:\Program Files\Tools\A9155\Atoll.exe" -Provider <Provider name> -
Password <User password > -UserId <User account > -DataSource <server> -
Project <Project account>
In case of Access database:
"C:\Program Files\Tools\A9155\Atoll.exe" -Provider <Provider name> -
DataSource "C:\...\database.mdb"
Note: To identify the provider name, check the Connection properties command from the Data-
base menu in A9155 when the associated database is currently open (the Access and Ora-
cle provider names are respectively Microsoft.Jet.OLEDB.4.0 and MSDAORA.1).
Caution: Note that Provider, Password, UserId, DataSource and Project parameters are case sensi-
tive in the instructions above.
In addition to this syntax, some other options are also available:

User Configuration
You can load a user configuration by entering the full path of the configuration file. Therefore, you can open a project from
database and load the configuration file by entering the following syntax:
"C:\Program Files\Tools\A9155\Atoll.exe" -Provider <provider_name> -UserId
<login_account> -Password <password> -DataSource <server> -Project
<project_account> -Cfg "C:\....\configuration.cfg"
Since A9155 works from a command line with options, you can use this feature to start A9155 entering the following
syntax:
"C:\Program Files\Tools\A9155\Atoll.exe" -Cfg "C:\....\configuration.cfg"
In this case, A9155 is automatically started and the configuration file is loaded when creating a new project.
Log Information
Messages listed in the Events tab can be saved in a .log file, typing the following syntax in the command line:
"C:\Program Files\Tools\A9155\Atoll.exe" -log "C:\....\events.log"
A9155 Configuration File
It is possible to specify in the command line the path for the Atoll.ini file. You can use this feature to start A9155 entering
the following syntax:
"C:\Program Files\Tools\A9155\Atoll.exe" -log "C:\....\Atoll.ini"
Note: These options can be configured in the A9155 desktop shortcut.
13.2.5 Exporting User Configuration to an External File

In A9155, user configurations can be saved and shared between users. Hence, you can define some settings in an .atl
project and store them in an external file. This file has an XML (eXtensible Markup Language) international format and
.cfg or .geo extension.
A user configuration file may contain the following information:
Geographic data set: Paths of imported geographic maps, map display settings (visibility scale, transparency, tips
text, etc.), clutter description (code, name, height, standard deviations, indoor loss, orthogonality factor, % Pilot
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 841

A9155 User Manual
Finger of each clutter class, default standard deviations and indoor loss) and raster or user profile traffic map
description
Computation/Focus Zones,
Folder configurations: Sort/group/filter configurations (the ones saved by the user and the current one even if not
saved), filtering zone and display settings of radio data folders (including measurement display),
Definition of prediction studies: general information (name, comments, group, sort and filters), study conditions
and display settings,
AFP Configuration (this option is available in GSM documents only): Calculation options selected when starting
an AFP session as well as calculation parameters used for interference histograms,
Automatic Neighbour Allocation Parameters (any technology): Input parameters of the automatic neighbour allo-
cation,
Automatic Scrambling Code Allocation Parameters (this option is available in UMTS documents only): parameters
of the automatic Scrambling Code allocation,
Automatic PN Offset Allocation Parameters (this option is available in cdmaOne/CDMA2000 documents only):
parameters of the automatic PN Offset allocation,
The paths of macros.
All these parameters are not stored in a relational database. Therefore, the only way to share these settings is to create a
user configuration file. Then, by importing it, users are able to work on the same geographic data, have the same data
organisation and representation and work out the same prediction studies on a common computation zone. Moreover, they
are able to carry out any modification in their .atl documents without changing reference for the others.
To export a user configuration in an external file:
1. In the Tools menu, select the [User configuration:Export...] command,
2. In the User configuration window, select the options you want to export in the file and then,
3. Click OK,
4. In the Export dialogue, browse to find the directory where you want to save the file and specify its name,
5. Press OK to validate.
Notes
A9155 can store path of any imported geographic data with any of the supported formats. Be
careful, vectors must be in the same coordinate system as the raster maps.
Projection and display coordinate systems are not stored (they are stored in the database)
The different settings (geographic data set, computation zone, folder configurations and predic-
tion study definition) can be stored independently. The default extension of user configuration file
is .geo when saving either geographic data set, or computation zone, or both of them.
Since a macro is linked to an A9155 session (and not to an .atl project), the export in user con-
figurations can be made when an .atl project is open or not.
User configuration files have an international format; they can be used on workstations with dif-
ferent regional parameters.
A9155 does not store any simulation settings such as parameters entered when creating simu-
lation or simulation display properties.
Since user configuration files are in standard XML format, they can be open by XML viewers (and
modified and/or improved).
It is also possible to save the display configuration of a single CW measurement path or a single
test mobile data path in a .cfg file in order to apply it again to another path. This can be made
directly from the path property dialogue itself.
User configuration files can be created by A9155, imported into an existing .atl document (into an A9155 session for
macros) and easily exchanged between users.
13.2.6 Importing a User Configuration from an External File

User configuration files are one of the tools in A9155 to share data between users.
To import a user configuration from an external file:
1. In the Tools menu, select the [User configuration:Import...] command,
2. In the Open window, click on the Files of type scrolling menu and select Configuration files (*.cfg),
3. Specify the directory where the file to be imported is located and its name,
4. Press OK to validate,
5. In the User configuration window, check the items you want to import in your .atl document,
6. Click OK to validate the import procedure
When importing a user configuration file including a geographic data set or a study list, A9155 checks if geographic maps
or prediction studies are available in the .atl document. If it finds a map or a study in the .atl document, it offers new options
in the import dialogue, "Reset existing geo data" and "Reset existing studies". Select these options in order to remove
existing geographic maps or studies from the .atl document before loading the geographic data set or study list described
in the user configuration file.
842 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

When importing a user configuration file including a folder configuration, A9155 checks if folder configurations exist in the
.atl document. In this case, it adds in respective folders, the configurations described in the user configuration file. More-
over, it applies to folders the current configurations defined in the user configuration file.
If you choose to import a user configuration file, the syntax of the A9155 desktop shortcut must not contain -Cfg
<configuration_file>. If a configuration file called Atoll.cfg is located in the A9155 installation directory, this configuration
file is automatically loaded when creating a new project (from template or database).
Notes
Since a macro is linked to an A9155 session (and not to an .atl project), the macros contained
in the files referenced by user configurations can be imported only when no .atl project is open
If the user tries to import a user configuration containing a macro in an open .atl project, only the
other items will be imported (geo data set, study list, computation zone, folder configurations,
AFP configuration in GSM documents, Automatic Neighbour Allocation Parameters, Automatic
Scrambling Code Allocation Parameters in UMTS, Automatic PN Offset Allocation Parameters
in cdmaOne/CDMA2000 documents.
If the user tries to import a user configuration containing only macro information in an open .atl
project, configuration data will not be taken into account.
13.3 Supported Databases

Four standard databases are presently supported: MS SQL Server, MS Access, Oracle via the OLE-DB interface and
Sybase using the ODBC interface.
Note: In addition to the above databases, all the databases that accept .udl files and support
ODBC interface can be accessed (see below).
When possible, A9155 allows you to interactively create your database. Some databases, MS SQL Server for example,
cannot be created by application and need administrator intervention. It is why A9155 suggests to create a new MS Access
database. Each database carries its own connection dialogue.
13.3.1 Exporting a Project in a MS Access Database

To export a currently open A9155 project in a MS Access database:
1. Choose the Database command from the File menu,
2. Click Export from the open menu,
3. An export dialogue is open,
4. Choose name and path associated with the database to export,
5. Select the database format:
Figure 13.21: Exporting to an Access database
6. Click Save to validate your choice.
Note: Opening a project from a database follows the same procedure.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 843

A9155 User Manual
13.3.2 Exporting a Project in a MS SQL Server Database

To export a currently open A9155 project in a MS SQL server database:
2. Click Export... from the open menu,
3. The Export in a database dialogue opens,
4. Select the SQL Server Database file format.
Figure 13.22: Exporting to an MS SQL database

5. In the SQL Server Login dialogue, enter information necessary to connect to the database, such as system
account, server, user name, password.
Figure 13.23: SQL Server Login dialogue
6. Click OK to complete the export procedure.
13.3.3 Exporting a Project in an Oracle Database

To export a currently open A9155 project in an Oracle database:
4. Select the Oracle Database file format in the appropriate scrolling box,
844 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 13.24: Exporting to an Oracle database

5. In the open dialogue, enter the name, password and server name (as defined in the tnsnames.ora file) of the
system account,
Figure 13.25: Connecting to an Oracle database

13.3.4 Exporting a Project in a Sybase Database

To export a currently open A9155 project in a Sybase database:
4. Select the ODBC data source type in the appropriate scrolling box,
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 845

A9155 User Manual
Figure 13.26: Exporting to a Sybase database

5. In the open dialogue, enter the database information needed to connect as a system account,
Figure 13.27: Select Data Source dialogue
Note:
By selecting the previous format, all the databases that support ODBC interface can be
accessed.
Opening a project from a database follows the same procedure.
Important: Use the following workaround in order to be able to archive to a Sybase 12.5 database:
1. Open the Windows registry using regedit.exe.
2. Add a string called WorkArounds2 under HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\ODBC\
ODBC.INI\Sybase. Where, Sybase represents the logical name used for the ODBC connection.
3. Assign the value 24 to WorkArounds2: WorkArounds2 = 24.
846 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

13.4 Data Exchange

13.4.1 Checking Database Connection Properties
To check the connection between the currently open project and the reference database:
1. Click on the File tool from the toolbar,
2. Choose the Database command,
3. Click Connection properties... from the open menu,
4. A dialogue informing you about the current connection is then open.
A specific message box warns you if you are not currently connected to a database.
Note: You can use this feature to switch from a user/project account to another. When this made,
do not forget to use the refresh command to update your project regarding to privileges and
rules related to the current connection.
13.4.2 Loading Data from a Database

When a database connection is already established, A9155 offers you the possibility to refresh the linked project according
to the database modifications in several ways.
To refresh data:
3. Click the Refresh option from the open menu,
4. In the open dialogue, you may
Either:
a. Modify A9155 pending changes in your linked database (i.e., Archiving)
b. Refresh only data/records you did not modify,
or
- Cancel your changes and reload database as it is.
Notes:
After having refreshed the atl project, it may be useful to run a database audit to ensure its con-
sistency (from an atl project point of view).
A9155 automatically performs a primary consistency check to avoid incompatibility between
redundant fields in GSM GPRS EGPRS documents. When opening a document from a database
or refreshing a document from a database, A9155 updates the values of the fields "Number of
TRXs" and "Channels" of the Transmitters table, with the values from the TRGs and the TRXs
tables respectively.
13.4.3 Archiving Data in a Database

When a database connection is already established, A9155 offers you to check precisely the data you want to transfer into
the database.
To open the Archive dialogue:
3. Click the Archive... option from the open menu,
4. Use the What's this help to get description about the fields available in the open dialogue.
A9155 lists all the modified tables and displays for each of them, the number of changes in brackets. There are three types
of changes: a field may be "updated"; finally, a record may be either "deleted" or "inserted". For each table, A9155 groups
changes by type and displays for each group, the number of changes in brackets. Furthermore, for the type "updated",
A9155 details all the modified fields.
Changes performed in a table may be displayed by selecting the table; A9155 lists records you have either modified, or
created, or deleted. It is the same for each group of changes; you may display modified records if you select one type of
changes. Finally, you may check each modified field by clicking on the field in the group "updated".
You can request a global archive of pending changes to the database using Run all or prefer to run through differences
between previous and current data values.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 847

A9155 User Manual
To detail differences, just select the modified record or the updated field you want to check and ask A9155 to show differ-
ences. A9155 lists all the fields describing the record; the modified fields are greyed. For each of them, A9155 provides
current and initial values. The initial value is the value of field in the .atl document at the time of the last exchange with the
linked database (this is either the last value you have archived in the database, or the value after the last refresh from the
database).
If you prefer to archive step by step, you can select the desired record and archive it with the Run command. A9155 also
allows you to cancel any of the changes that have been made to your document by using the Undo command. Therefore,
using these features, it is possible not to archive all the updated fields of a record in database. For example, if you have
modified two fields of a transmitter, you may archive in database one change only and not the other one. To do this, you
must undo the modified field you do not want to archive and then, select the record and click on Run.
When your changes have been archived, you get either a dialogue indicating that all modifications have been successfully
archived, or a warning dialogue about data conflict. A9155 helps you to manage it (either when modifying or deleting
records).
Notes
The Archive dialogue is available only when some record or value changes have been made and
not already archived,
The Archive command is applied on all the pending changes, including on the items out of the
current filter. So, under some cases, an object which is not visible may have its modifications
archived in the database. Nevertheless, it is possible to archive only a set or a subset of sites
and its dependencies (transmitters, cells, etc.) by Right-clicking on the Sites folder (or on one of
its subfolders) and select the Archive command. Only the pending changes of the records of the
folder will be considered.
In case of databases requiring a password (e.g., Oracle, Sybase, SQL Server), A9155 requests
this password the first time the user archives his changes in the database.
When adding a new field from the A9155 side, this one is automatically added to the linked data-
base (without needing archiving). Nevertheless, this action is not recommended from the project
side since not supported with databases such as Oracle. We recommend the addition of the new
field in the database then the update of the linked projects using the Refresh command.
13.5 Database Conflicts and Consistency

13.5.1 Solving a Conflict on a Modified Record
The record field you modified and you try to archive has already been modified in the linked database by another user.
For example, you are connected to a MS Access database whose transmitters table has been modified since your initial
load; the altitude of transmitter Tx34 has been increased from 30 to 35 metres (See Figure 13.28).
Figure 13.28: MS Access database modified by another user
In your current project, you have also increased this altitude, but only from 30 to 33 metres (See Figure 13.29).
848 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Figure 13.29: Transmitters table you modified in A9155
Ignoring that someone already modified this value, you try to archive. Trying to archive, A9155 detects the conflict and
warns you about it with the following window:
Figure 13.30: Conflict warning
In the open Archive dialogue, if you select the conflicting data, A9155 offers you to see differences between current and
initial values in the document. The initial values correspond to values of fields in the .atl document at the time of the last
exchange with the linked database (this is either the last values you have archived in the database, or the values after the
last refresh from the database) (Show Differences command):
Figure 13.31: Differences dialogue
In the Archive dialogue, select the conflicting data and click on the Resolve command:
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 849

A9155 User Manual
Figure 13.32: Resolving differences
A dialogue summarizing the associated conflict opens. Line(s) in grey represent(s) the conflict location(s). By check-
ing the box on the left, database will be updated with current A9155 data. If you let the box unchecked, A9155 data are
loaded from the linked database.
Figure 13.33: Conflict in changes
You can then check the database. You can see that the altitude of Tx34 is 33 metres, as in the current A9155 project.
Figure 13.34: Updated MS Access database after resolving the conflict
Note: Only differences between database and current project on the same field of the same
record can cause a conflict.
13.5.2 Solving a Conflict on a Deleted Record

The record you modified and you try to archive has been deleted from the linked database by another user.
Somebody deleted the transmitter Tx34 on Site 29. You have modified its altitude on the current A9155 project and you
try to archive.
850 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

When trying to archive, A9155 detects the conflict and warns you about. When using the Resolve command, A9155 will
display the following message:
Figure 13.35: Warning that the record has been deleted

If you choose Yes, you recreate the deleted record in the database. Choosing No, you delete the record in your docu-
ment as well as in the linked database.
13.5.3 Running an Audit on a Database

In A9155, a tool allows users to check consistency between the different A9155 tables (Sites, Transmitters, etc.). This tool
is useful if you work either in .atl documents linked to a central database, or in .atl documents created from a central data-
base that have been disconnected. In these cases, the .atl documents may contain some inconsistencies coming from the
central database (e.g., some transmitters located on a site that does not exist in the Sites table).
To run this audit, in the Tools menu, select Database Audit and choose:
Integrity Checking to find all the objects with problems.
All the objects with foreign keys may have a problem; integrity problem actually occurs for records that have non existing
references (e.g., transmitters located on a non existing site, transmitters with an antenna that does not exist in the Anten-
nas table, etc.). If integrity problems are found, A9155 displays a warning message and proposes you to delete them.
Integrity problems are solved in the .atl document but not in the database. To solve problems in the central database, you
must archive (select Database and Archive in the File menu).
Undefined Record Checking to find sites without transmitters, transmitters without subcells, TRXs and neigh-
bours in GSM/TDMA documents, and sites without transmitters, transmitters without cells and cells without neigh-
bours in UMTS, IS95-CDMA, CDMA2000 documents.
A9155 gives a list in the Event viewer.
Duplicate Record Checking to find objects that have the same identifier (e.g., sites with the same name, trans-
mitters with the same name). A9155 lists all the duplicated records in the Event viewer.
13.6 Managing Shared Path Loss Matrices

13.6.1 Sharing Path Loss Matrices Between Users
In A9155, some path loss results can be shared by several users. This feature enables the users both to optimise calcu-
lation times and to minimize disk occupation on their computer by limiting the .atl environment and the externalised calcu-
lation matrix sizes.
To use shared calculation matrices:
1. In the File menu, select the Database: Refresh command to update your .atl environment or the Database: Open
from a database command to create your .atl environment.
2. Save your environment.
Either
a. Right-click on the Predictions folder to open the associated context menu,
b. Choose the Properties option from the scrolling menu,
Or
- Double click on the Predictions folder,
4. In order to specify the shared directory to be used, you may either directly edit the path to access the shared
directory, or click on the button and choose in the Save as dialogue the file Pathloss.dbf included in the
shared directory to be used,
Note: It is not mandatory to store private path loss matrices in an external folder in order to access
public path loss matrices. Therefore, you may specify a shared directory to be used even if
private path loss matrices are embedded in your .atl document.
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 851

A9155 User Manual
The feature use requires a specific work configuration. Indeed, all the users must be connected with a central database
and the project must be managed by a calculation administrator (somebody centralizing the calculation result database)
also connected with the database which will provide the calculation matrices by externalising its results. The private exter-
nal path loss matrix folder of the calculation administrator will be the shared folder which will be used by the other users.
A9155 performs prediction studies using the shared path loss matrices only when it does not find the matrices in the user
private external folder (or embedded in the atl project). Therefore, to base the prediction studies exclusively on the shared
matrices, you need to delete the matrices stored in the private external folder (or embedded in the .atl document) using
the Delete command in the Results window.
A9155 accesses the shared path loss matrices using a "read only" mode. it directly reads matrices it needs in the shared
directory (these matrices cannot be locked due to consistency with read only mode). If a user modifies in its environment
some parameters, A9155 detects which matrices are invalid and recalculates them. Then, after saving and closing the .atl
environment, A9155 keeps only the recalculated matrices either embedded or in the user private external folder. There-
fore, if you change the height of a transmitter and if you carry out predictions, A9155 will recalculate only the path loss
matrix related to this transmitter and will save it in the private external folder associated with the .atl environment. The
prediction studies will be based on the recalculated matrix and on the other matrices coming from shared directory.
This feature is very useful when several users working on a same project want to perform predictions on different areas.
They can plan the network on their area and store in their private folder the associated path loss matrices.
Note: Only the calculation administrator is able to update the shared matrices by refreshing its .atl
environment and then, restarting calculations. The calculation administrator must feed the
calculation matrices only when they are no longer used by the users.
13.6.2 Computing Path Loss Matrices Only

Path loss matrices can be calculated independently of prediction studies. It is mandatory to have defined a study to obtain
path loss matrices calculation.
From any group of transmitters in the Transmitters folder, you may select "Calculations" and then "Calculate path loss
matrices" in the context menu.
It allows you to work out path loss matrices calculation of all the active transmitters in the group; only invalid matrices or
nonexistent matrices are computed. The computation zone does not influence the calculated transmitters and path loss
matrices size; computation is performed on the whole transmitter calculation radius. It is possible to recalculate all the
matrices of the group by choosing the option "Force path loss matrix calculation".
This feature can be used by a calculation administrator in order to fill the directory containing the shared path loss matrices.
These features are also available in context menus of a transmitter and the Transmitters folder.
852 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Index
INDEX
SYMBOLS heights, optimising (microwave) 822

+MRC in Softer/Soft (CDMA) 531 microwave 777
+MRC in Softer/Soft (UMTS) 417 microwave antenna properties 779
microwave, creating 778
point-to-multipoint link, adjusting 806
NUMERICS point-to-multipoint link, adjusting with the mouse 807
2G network traffic, converting (CDMA) 505 single antenna patterns, editing (microwave) 779
2G network traffic, converting (GSM) 226 smart, creating (WiMAX) 737
2G network traffic, converting (TD-SCDMA) 627 antenna patterns
2G network traffic, converting (UMTS) 388 printing 61
2G network traffic, converting (WiMAX) 717 archiving
360 view (microwave) 792 all modifications to the database 90
3rd party smart antenna modelling (TD-SCDMA) 654 only site data to the database 90
Archiving data in a database 847
atmospheric refraction maps 809
A
audit of frequency allocation (TD-SCDMA) 600
A9155 application 841
audit of neighbour allocation plan 218, 373, 608
active set
audit of neighbour allocation plan (CDMA) 491
conditions for entering (CDMA) 534
audit of PN offset plan (CDMA) 495
conditions for entering (UMTS) 422
audit of scrambling code plan (TD-SCDMA) 613
defining size in terminals (CDMA) 472
audit of scrambling code plan (UMTS) 378
defining size in terminals (UMTS) 353
Automatic Server Allocation (WiMAX) 721
displaying per simulation user (CDMA) 512
Autosave 92
displaying per simulation user (TD-SCDMA) 633
configuring 92
displaying per simulation user (UMTS) 396
recovering a backup 93
size, used in predictions (CDMA) 471
availability objectives
size, used in predictions (UMTS) 353
microwave links 777
threshold, defining in cells (UMTS) 314
azimuth
active set analysis (CDMA) 480
antenna, changing on the map 32
active set analysis (UMTS) 360
activity status
displaying traffic distribution by (WiMAX) 725 B
adaptive beam smart antenna modelling (TD-SCDMA) 654 backup 92
adaptive modulation and coding, see "fast link adaptation" configuring 92
Administration files 841, 842 recovering a backup 93
Studies.xml 841, 842 base station
User configurations 841, 842 assigning equipment (CDMA) 430
Administration files,.cfg 841, 842 assigning equipment (GSM) 168
Administration files,.geo 841, 842 assigning equipment (TD-SCDMA) 541
antenna assigning equipment (UMTS) 313
antenna patterns, copying (microwave) 780 copying into document (CDMA) 439
antenna patterns, printing (microwave) 781 copying into document (GSM) 180
antenna patterns, smoothing (microwave) 781 copying into document (TD-SCDMA) 550
antennas, importing (microwave) 779 copying into document (UMTS) 322
changing azimuth on the map 32 copying into document (WiMAX) 673
changing relative position on the map 32 creating (WiMAX) 664
changing relative position on the map (UMTS) 323 creating with template (CDMA) 434
compatibility with equipment (microwave) 788 creating with template (GSM) 176
compatibility with equipment, assistant (microwave) 788 creating with template (TD-SCDMA) 546
heights, adjusting (microwave) 822 creating with template (UMTS) 317
heights, adjusting automatically (microwave) 823 creating with template (WiMAX) 669
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 853

A9155 User Manual
definition (CDMA) 427, 428 C

definition (GSM) 166, 167 C/(I+N) level coverage prediction (WiMAX) 698
definition (TD-SCDMA) 539 C/I levels coverage prediction (GSM) 253
definition (UMTS) 310, 311 cables
definition (WiMAX) 664 creating (microwave) 787
displaying information (CDMA) 440 microwave 786
displaying information (GSM) 180 cables, microwave
displaying information (TD-SCDMA) 551 properties of 787
displaying information (UMTS) 323 calculation process, explanation (CDMA) 454
displaying information (WiMAX) 674 calculation process, explanation (GSM) 194
equipment, assigning (WiMAX) 665 calculation process, explanation (TD-SCDMA) 564
importing (CDMA) 439 calculation process, explanation (UMTS) 337
importing (GSM) 180 calculation process, explanation (WiMAX) 682
importing (TD-SCDMA) 550 calculations 131
importing (UMTS) 322 subscriber list (WiMAX) 721
importing (WiMAX) 673 carrier types (TD-SCDMA)
base station ID, see "BSID" allocating per cell 600
baton handover coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 593 audit of allocation 600
BCCH displaying coverage 599
displaying on transmitter (GSM) 273 displaying master carrier on the map 599
BCMS (CDMA) 432 master carrier 598
BCMS rate (CDMA) 432 slave carrier 598
bearer selection, HSDPA, explanation 391 standalone carrier 598
bearer, 1xEV-DO, see "1xEV-DO Rev. A radio bearer" CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO
bearer, downgrading (UMTS) 392 template 82
bearer, R99, see "R99 radio bearer" cdmaOne
BER coverage prediction (CDMA) 477 template 82
BER coverage prediction (UMTS) 357 cell
BER graphs creating (TD-SCDMA) 546
creating (microwave) 784, 785 creating (UMTS) 317
microwave 785 creating (WiMAX) 669
properties of (microwave) 785 creating 1xEV-DO (CDMA) 434
best bearer coverage prediction (WiMAX) 700 creating 1xRTT (CDMA) 434
bit error rate graphs, see "BER graphs" definition (WiMAX) 666
BLER coverage prediction (GSM) 264 EV-DO parameters (CDMA) 431
BLER coverage prediction (UMTS) 357 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 546
BLER_DCH coverage prediction (CDMA) 477 modifying (UMTS) 317
Broadcast/Multicast Services, see "BCMS" modifying (WiMAX) 669
BSIC modifying 1xEV-DO (CDMA) 434
displaying on transmitter (GSM) 273 modifying 1xRTT (CDMA) 434
domains, defining (GSM) 288 parameters (TD-SCDMA) 543
format, defining (GSM) 287 parameters (UMTS) 314
groups, defining (GSM) 288 RTT parameters (CDMA) 431
BSID (WiMAX) 667 setting as active (CDMA) 455
BTS equipment setting as active (TD-SCDMA) 565
assigning (CDMA) 430 setting as active (UMTS) 337
assigning (GSM) 168 updating load values with simulation (WiMAX) 730
assigning (TD-SCDMA) 541 updating values with simulation (CDMA) 518
assigning (UMTS) 313 updating values with simulation (TD-SCDMA) 637
BTS noise figure (TD-SCDMA) 542 updating values with simulation (UMTS) 403
BTS noise figure (UMTS) 313 cell to cell interference coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 592
BTS, assigning (WiMAX) 665 cell type
budget applying new (GSM) 175
configuring report (microwave) 827 cell types
microwave link 826 creating (GSM) 290
multiple microwave links, calculating for 828 examples (GSM) 291
single microwave link, calculating for 826 cell types (GSM) 290
BWA, definition (WiMAX) 663
854 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Index
channel element Fit to Map Window (GSM) 195

calculation of consumption (UMTS) 390 Fit to Map Window (TD-SCDMA) 564
consumption, calculating (CDMA) 506 Fit to Map Window (UMTS) 337
defining consumption per site equipment-R99 radio bearer Fit to Map Window (WiMAX) 682
(UMTS) 420 importing 41, 42
defining consumption per site equipment-terminal (CDMA) importing (CDMA) 454
534
importing (GSM) 195
defining on downlink (UMTS) 312 importing (TD-SCDMA) 564
defining on forward link (CDMA) 429 importing (UMTS) 337
defining on reverse link (CDMA) 429 importing (WiMAX) 682
defining on uplink (UMTS) 312 polygon, creating from 41
simulations (CDMA) 509 polygon, creating from (CDMA) 454
simulations (UMTS) 393 polygon, creating from (GSM) 195
uplink and downlink consumption (CDMA) 533 polygon, creating from (TD-SCDMA) 564
uplink and downlink consumption (UMTS) 420 polygon, creating from (UMTS) 337
channel search, semi-automatic (microwave) 833 polygon, creating from (WiMAX) 682
channel throughput coverage prediction (WiMAX) 702 Computing path loss matrices only 852
channels Configuration files 841, 842
Search Tool, using with (GSM) 272 Connection Properties 88
Checking database connection properties 847 connection status
clearance, displaying for microwave links 819 displaying traffic distribution by (CDMA) 511
codec equipment displaying traffic distribution by (TD-SCDMA) 632
codec mode adaptation thresholds, setting (GSM) 294 displaying traffic distribution by (UMTS) 395
codec mode quality thresholds, setting (GSM) 295 context menu 29
creating (GSM) 294 renaming objects 29
modifying (GSM) 294 Coordinate system 840
terminals, assigning to (GSM) 295 coordinate system 84
transmitters, assigning to (GSM) 295 setting 84
codec equipment (GSM) 293 Coordinate system,Internal system 840
coding scheme throughput graphs coordinates, searching by 75
displaying (GSM) 297 Cost-Hata propagation model 138
column headers creating environment formula 139
formatting 52 defining default environment formula 138
columns modifying environment formula 139
changing width 52 taking diffraction into account 138
displaying 53 coverage by C/I based on test mobile data path (GSM) 282
freezing 53 coverage by signal level based on test mobile data path (GSM)
hiding 53 282
moving 53 coverage export zone
unfreezing 53 creating 45
Common prediction studies 157 creating (CDMA) 483
Common prediction studies,Coverage studies 157 creating (GSM) 209
compressed mode (UMTS) 353, 397, 417 creating (TD-SCDMA) 597
computation zone creating (UMTS) 364
creating (microwave) 817 creating (WiMAX) 705
drawing 41 coverage of master carriers, displaying (TD-SCDMA) 599
drawing (CDMA) 454 coverage of neighbours, displaying (CDMA) 489
drawing (GSM) 194 coverage of neighbours, displaying (GSM) 214
drawing (TD-SCDMA) 564 coverage of neighbours, displaying (TD-SCDMA) 605
drawing (UMTS) 337 coverage of neighbours, displaying (UMTS) 371
drawing (WiMAX) 682 coverage of neighbours, displaying (WiMAX) 709
explanation (CDMA) 449 coverage prediction
explanation (GSM) 189 adding values to legend (CDMA) 459
explanation (TD-SCDMA) 560 adding values to legend (GSM) 201
explanation (UMTS) 332 adding values to legend (TD-SCDMA) 572
explanation (WiMAX) 678 adding values to legend (UMTS) 342
Fit to Map Window 41, 42 analysing results (CDMA) 459
Fit to Map Window (CDMA) 454 analysing results (TD-SCDMA) 572
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 855

A9155 User Manual
analysing results (UMTS) 342 forcing calculation 159

analysing results (WiMAX) 688 forward link EV-DO throughput (CDMA) 474
assigning a default propagation model 151, 454 GPRS/EGPRS coding schemes (GSM) 260
based on test mobile data path (CDMA) 527 handoff status (CDMA) 479
based on test mobile data path (TD-SCDMA) 646 handover status (UMTS) 359
based on test mobile data path (UMTS) 412 histogram, viewing (CDMA) 462
baton handover (TD-SCDMA) 593 histogram, viewing (GSM) 204
best bearer (WiMAX) 700 histogram, viewing (TD-SCDMA) 575
BLER (GSM) 264 histogram, viewing (UMTS) 344
by packet throughput per timeslot (GSM) 262 histogram, viewing (WiMAX) 691
by transmitter (CDMA) 457 HSDPA 361, 595
by transmitter (GSM) 197, 198, 199 HSUPA 363
by transmitter (TD-SCDMA) 567 legend, adding values to (WiMAX) 688
by transmitter (UMTS) 340 locking coverage predictions 160
by transmitter (WiMAX) 685 network capacity (TD-SCDMA) 617, 619
C/(I+N) level (WiMAX) 698 network load (TD-SCDMA) 620
C/I levels (GSM) 253 new 157
calculating 158, 159 on interfered zones (GSM) 256
calculating several 159 on overlapping zones (CDMA) 458
cell to cell interference (TD-SCDMA) 592 on overlapping zones (GSM) 200
channel throughput (WiMAX) 702 on overlapping zones (TD-SCDMA) 568
cloning 158 on overlapping zones (UMTS) 341
comparing (CDMA) 463 on overlapping zones (WiMAX) 686
comparing (GSM) 205 P-CCPCH (Eb/Nt) reception analysis based on test mobile
comparing (TD-SCDMA) 576 data path (TD-SCDMA) 646
comparing (UMTS) 345 pilot pollution (CDMA) 479
comparing (WiMAX) 691 pilot pollution (UMTS) 359
coverage by C/I based on test mobile data path (GSM) 282 pilot reception analysis (Ec/I0) based on test mobile data
coverage by signal level based on test mobile data path path (CDMA) 527
(GSM) 282 pilot reception analysis (Ec/I0) based on test mobile data
coverage export zone, defining 45 path (UMTS) 413
coverage export zone, defining (CDMA) 483 pilot signal quality (CDMA) 472
coverage export zone, defining (GSM) 209 pilot signal quality (TD-SCDMA) 583
coverage export zone, defining (TD-SCDMA) 597 pilot signal quality (UMTS) 354
coverage export zone, defining (UMTS) 364 PN offset interference zone (CDMA) 497
coverage export zone, defining (WiMAX) 705 printing results (CDMA) 482
creating 157 printing results (GSM) 209
creating from existing 158 printing results (TD-SCDMA) 597
default propagation model, assigning (GSM) 194 printing results (UMTS) 364
displaying results with tooltips (CDMA) 460 printing results (WiMAX) 704
displaying results with tooltips (TD-SCDMA) 572 quality indicator (CDMA) 477
displaying results with tooltips (UMTS) 342 quality indicator (UMTS) 357
displaying results with tooltips (WiMAX) 688 report, displaying (CDMA) 461
downlink and uplink traffic channel (TD-SCDMA) 589 report, displaying (GSM) 203
downlink total noise (CDMA) 478 report, displaying (TD-SCDMA) 574
downlink total noise (TD-SCDMA) 591 report, displaying (UMTS) 343
downlink total noise (UMTS) 358 report, displaying (WiMAX) 690
duplicating 158 report, displaying using focus zone 42
DwPTS signal quality (TD-SCDMA) 585 report, displaying using focus zone (CDMA) 460
effective service area (CDMA) 476 report, displaying using focus zone (GSM) 202
effective service area (TD-SCDMA) 588 report, displaying using focus zone (TD-SCDMA) 573
effective service area (UMTS) 356 report, displaying using focus zone (UMTS) 343
exporting in user configuration 161 report, displaying using focus zone (WiMAX) 689
exporting results 46 report, displaying using hot spot zone 42
exporting results (CDMA) 483 report, displaying using hot spot zone (CDMA) 460
exporting results (TD-SCDMA) 597 report, displaying using hot spot zone (GSM) 202
exporting results (UMTS) 365 report, displaying using hot spot zone (TD-SCDMA) 573
exporting results (WiMAX) 705 report, displaying using hot spot zone (UMTS) 343
856 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Index
report, displaying using hot spot zone (WiMAX) 689 using simulation results (TD-SCDMA) 640
restricting base stations studied by computation zone (CD- using simulation results (UMTS) 406
MA) 445 coverage predictions 157
restricting base stations studied by computation zone restricting sites studied (microwave) 817
(GSM) 186 Coverage studies Overview 157
restricting base stations studied by computation zone (TD- Creating a new database from a document 840
SCDMA) 557
Creating a new document from a database 840
restricting base stations studied by computation zone
cursors 47
(UMTS) 328
CW Measurement Analysis Tool
restricting base stations studied by computation zone
(WiMAX) 674 printing data 60
restricting base stations studied by filter (CDMA) 445 cyclic prefix ratio (WiMAX) 731
restricting base stations studied by filter (GSM) 185
restricting base stations studied by filter (TD-SCDMA) 557
D
restricting base stations studied by filter (UMTS) 328
Data Rate Control, see "DRC"
restricting base stations studied by filter (WiMAX) 674
Data tab 27
restricting base stations studied by filtering (TD-SCDMA)
data tables
557
adding a field 50
results, analysing (GSM) 201
changing column width 52
results, displaying with tooltips (GSM) 201
changing row height 52
results, exporting (GSM) 209
copying data 54
scrambling code interference zone (TD-SCDMA) 615
deleting a field 50
scrambling code interference zone (UMTS) 380
displaying columns 53
service area (C/I) (TD-SCDMA) 586
editing 50
service area (Eb/Nt) (TD-SCDMA) 586
exporting data 55
service area (Eb/Nt) downlink based on test mobile data
path (CDMA) 527 filtering 64
service area (Eb/Nt) downlink based on test mobile data filtering by selection 66
path (TD-SCDMA) 646 filtering by several criteria 67
service area (Eb/Nt) downlink based on test mobile data filtering, examples 68
path (UMTS) 413 formatting column headers 52
service area (Eb/Nt) downlink or uplink (CDMA) 474 formatting table columns 52
service area (Eb/Nt) downlink or uplink (UMTS) 355 freezing columns 53
service area (Eb/Nt) reverse link for EV-DO (CDMA) 475 hiding columns 53
service area (Eb/Nt) uplink based on test mobile data path importing data 56
(CDMA) 527 moving columns 53
service area (Eb/Nt) uplink based on test mobile data path opening 49
(TD-SCDMA) 646
opening record properties from table 51
service area (Eb/Nt) uplink based on test mobile data path
pasting data 54
(UMTS) 413
printing 58
signal level - single station (CDMA) 447
restoring after filtering 68
signal level - single station (GSM) 187
sorting 64
signal level - single station (TD-SCDMA) 561
sorting by one column 65
signal level - single station (UMTS) 330
sorting by several columns 65
signal level - single station (WiMAX) 679
unfreezing columns 53
signal level (CDMA) 455
viewing properties 49
signal level (GSM) 196
database
signal level (TD-SCDMA) 566, 569, 571
archiving all modifications 90
signal level (UMTS) 338
archiving only site data 90
signal level (WiMAX) 683
connecting to MS Access 87
simulation results, using (CDMA) 521
connecting to Oracle 87
statistics, viewing (CDMA) 462
Connection Properties 88
statistics, viewing (GSM) 204
creating a document from 87
statistics, viewing (TD-SCDMA) 575
refreshing document 89
statistics, viewing (UMTS) 344
resolving data conflicts 91
statistics, viewing (WiMAX) 691
working with 85
stopping calculation 159
defining 156, 161
template, saving as 160
degree display format, setting 85
test mobile data path, based on (GSM) 281
display
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 857

A9155 User Manual
changing properties 33 creating (CDMA) 503

defining display type 34 creating (GSM) 225
display type, automatic 34 creating (TD-SCDMA) 626
display type, discrete values 34 creating (UMTS) 387
display type, unique 34 creating (WiMAX) 715
display type, value intervals 34 importing (CDMA) 503
display coordinate system 84 importing (GSM) 224
display resolution (CDMA) 448 importing (TD-SCDMA) 625
display resolution (GSM) 188 importing (UMTS) 386
display resolution (TD-SCDMA) 561 importing (WiMAX) 715
display resolution (UMTS) 331 statistics on (WiMAX) 716
Distance Measurement tool 39 environment-based traffic map
diversity statistics on (CDMA) 503
reception (UMTS) 319, 418 statistics on (GSM) 225
transmission (UMTS) 319, 418 statistics on (TD-SCDMA) 626
document statistics on (UMTS) 387
creating from database 81, 87 equipment
creating from template 81, 82 compatibility with antennas (microwave) 788
geographic data 81 compatibility with antennas, assistant (microwave) 788
information needed to create 81 importing (microwave) 783
radio data 81 microwave 782
radio equipment 81 microwave transceiver 782
refreshing from the database 89 microwave transceiver, creating 782
setting basic parameters 83 radio equipment, assigning (microwave) 787
document templates, see "templates" transceiver, properties of (microwave) 783
domains, creating PN offsets (CDMA) 492 Equipment Specifications dialogue (CDMA) 430
domains, creating scrambling code (TD-SCDMA) 610 Equipment Specifications dialogue (GSM) 168
domains, creating scrambling code (UMTS) 375 Equipment Specifications dialogue (TD-SCDMA) 541
downgrading bearer (UMTS) 392 Equipment Specifications dialogue (UMTS) 313
downlink total noise coverage prediction (CDMA) 478 Equipment Specifications dialogue (WiMAX) 665
downlink total noise coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 591 equipment, repeater, see "repeater equipment"
downlink total noise coverage prediction (UMTS) 358 Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) propagation model 141
downlink total power, setting (UMTS) 350 assigning environment formulas 141
downlink traffic channel coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 589 creating environment formula 141
downlink traffic power, setting (TD-SCDMA) 579 defining default environment formula 141
DRC error rate (CDMA) 432 modifying environment formula 141
dual-band network, creating (TD-SCDMA) 552 taking diffraction into account 141
dual-band network, creating (UMTS) 324 EV-DO
DwPTS signal quality coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 585 active set size on reverse link on terminal (CDMA) 472
application throughput, defining for EV-DO Rev. 0 (CDMA)
469
E application throughput, defining for EV-DO Rev. A (CDMA)
Ec/I0 threshold (UMTS) 352 469
effective service area coverage prediction (CDMA) 476 body loss, defining for EV-DO Rev. 0 (CDMA) 469
effective service area coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 588 body loss, defining for EV-DO Rev. A (CDMA) 470
effective service area coverage prediction (UMTS) 356 carrier type, defining globally (CDMA) 531
environment carrier type, defining in cell (CDMA) 431
creating (CDMA) 501 carriers, options for (CDMA) 432
creating (GSM) 222 data rates, available (CDMA) 532
creating (TD-SCDMA) 623 FCH active set size on terminal (CDMA) 472
creating (UMTS) 384 forward link throughput, studying (CDMA) 474
creating (WiMAX) 713 handoff status coverage prediction (CDMA) 479
modifying (CDMA) 501 max channel elements per carrier, equipment (CDMA) 429
modifying (GSM) 222 max rate = f/C/1), defining for mobility (CDMA) 471
modifying (TD-SCDMA) 623 maximum number of users per cell, defining (CDMA) 433
modifying (UMTS) 384 maximum power transmitted, defining (CDMA) 432
modifying (WiMAX) 713 pilot pollution, calculating (CDMA) 479
environment class-based traffic map power control simulation algorithm (CDMA) 507
858 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Index
preferred carrier, defining for EV-DO Rev. 0 (CDMA) 469 assigning (UMTS) 313
preferred carrier, defining for EV-DO Rev. A (CDMA) 469 defining length (CDMA) 430
priority, defining for EV-DO Rev. 0 (CDMA) 469 defining length (TD-SCDMA) 541
priority, defining for EV-DO Rev. A (CDMA) 469 defining length (UMTS) 313
rate control, using to study capacity (CDMA) 498 length, defining (GSM) 168
rate probabilities UL, defining for EV-DO Rev. 0 (CDMA) length, defining (WiMAX) 665
469 feeder, assigning (WiMAX) 665
rate probabilities UL, defining for EV-DO Rev. A (CDMA) FER coverage prediction (CDMA) 477
469
FER coverage prediction (UMTS) 357
service area (Eb/Nt) reverse link, studying (CDMA) 475 field
service parameters, EV-DO Rev. 0-specific (CDMA) 469 adding to a table 50
service parameters, EV-DO Rev. A-specific (CDMA) 469 deleting from a table 50
service parameters, EV-DO-specific (CDMA) 468 filtering
simulation results, cells (CDMA) 514 data tables by selection 66
simulation results, maximum number of channel elements data tables by several criteria 67
per carrier (CDMA) 512
examples 68
simulation results, mobiles (CDMA) 515
restoring after filtering 68
simulation results, number of channel elements due to
using a polygon 41, 74
SHO overhead (CDMA) 513
with subfolders 73
terminal options, EV-DO Rev. 0-specific (CDMA) 472
filtering zone
terminal options, EV-DO Rev. A-specific (CDMA) 472
deleting 44
terminal parameters, EV-DO Rev. 0-specific (CDMA) 471
drawing 41
terminal parameters, EV-DO Rev. A-specific (CDMA) 471
Find toolbar 74
timeslots dedicated to BCMS (CDMA) 432
focus zone
timeslots dedicated to control channels (CDMA) 432
creating 42
UL throughput due to TCP acknowledgement, defining for
EV-DO Rev. 0 (CDMA) 469 creating (CDMA) 461
EV-DO Rev. A radio bearer creating (GSM) 202
defining (CDMA) 533 creating (microwave) 818
exceptional pairs creating (TD-SCDMA) 573
neighbour, defining (CDMA) 484 creating (UMTS) 343
PN offsets, defining (CDMA) 493 creating (WiMAX) 689
exceptional pairs, defining neighbour (GSM) 211 explanation 42
exceptional pairs, defining neighbour (TD-SCDMA) 601 explanation (CDMA) 460
exceptional pairs, defining neighbour (UMTS) 366 explanation (GSM) 202
exceptional pairs, defining scrambling code (TD-SCDMA) 610 explanation (TD-SCDMA) 573
exceptional pairs, defining scrambling code (UMTS) 375 explanation (UMTS) 343
experience matrix, see "separation rules" Fit to Map Window 42
Explorer window 27 Fit to Map Window (CDMA) 461
Data tab 27 Fit to Map Window (GSM) 202
Geo tab 27 Fit to Map Window (TD-SCDMA) 574
layers 28 Fit to Map Window (UMTS) 343
Modules tab 27 Fit to Map Window (WiMAX) 690
using tabs 27 importing 42
Exporting a project in a MS Access database 843 importing (CDMA) 461
Exporting a project in a MS SQL server database 844 importing (GSM) 202
Exporting a project in a Sybase database 845 importing (TD-SCDMA) 574
Exporting a project in an Oracle database 844 importing (UMTS) 343
Exporting user configuration to an external file 841 importing (WiMAX) 690
extended cell polygon, creating from 42
defining (GSM) 299 polygon, creating from (CDMA) 461
polygon, creating from (GSM) 202
polygon, creating from (TD-SCDMA) 574
F polygon, creating from (UMTS) 343
fast link adaptation (UMTS) 390 polygon, creating from (WiMAX) 690
feeder population statistics (CDMA) 462
assigning (CDMA) 430 population statistics (GSM) 203
assigning (GSM) 168 population statistics (TD-SCDMA) 574
assigning (TD-SCDMA) 541 population statistics (UMTS) 344
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 859

A9155 User Manual
population statistics (WiMAX) 690 GPRS/EGPRS coding schemes coverage prediction (GSM) 260
using to display coverage prediction report 42 GPRS/EGPRS equipment
using to display coverage prediction report (CDMA) 460 coding scheme thresholds, adapting (GSM) 297
using to display coverage prediction report (GSM) 202 coding scheme throughput graphs, displaying (GSM) 297
using to display coverage prediction report (TD-SCDMA) terminals, assigning to (GSM) 297
573 transmitters, assigning to (GSM) 297
using to display coverage prediction report (UMTS) 343 grid of beams (GOB) smart antenna model (TD-SCDMA) 652
folder configuration 71 grid of beams (GOB), creating (TD-SCDMA) 652
applying a saved configuration 72 grid of beams (GOB), import format (TD-SCDMA) 653
creating 72 grid of beams (GOB), importing (TD-SCDMA) 653
deleting 73 grouping 61
exporting 72 by a property 62
importing 73 by several properties 63
reapplying current configuration 72 examples 63
forward link total power, setting (CDMA) 467 with subfolders 73
frame configuration groups, creating PN offsets (CDMA) 492
creating (WiMAX) 733 groups, creating scrambling code (TD-SCDMA) 610
frame configuration (WiMAX) 667, 733 groups, creating scrambling code (UMTS) 375
frame duration (WiMAX) 731 GSM/GPRS/EGPRS template 81
frequencies
grouping transmitters by (GSM) 274
frequencies (TD-SCDMA) H
allocating automatically 599 handoff status
displaying on the map 599 coverage prediction (CDMA) 479
frequency allocation displaying traffic distribution by (CDMA) 510
displaying on transmitter (GSM) 273 handover status
frequency bands displaying traffic distribution by (TD-SCDMA) 632
defining (GSM) 286 displaying traffic distribution by (UMTS) 394
defining (TD-SCDMA) 540, 650 handover status coverage prediction (UMTS) 359
defining (UMTS) 312, 416 happy bit (UMTS) 391
defining (WiMAX) 731 HCS layers
microwave 774 defining (GSM) 289
frequency domains selecting (GSM) 168
defining (GSM) 286 Hexagonal Design
frequency groups hiding (CDMA) 435
defining (GSM) 286 hexagonal design
frequency planning (microwave) 829, 833 definition (CDMA) 434
frequency sub-bands definition (GSM) 176
microwave 775 definition (TD-SCDMA) 547
frequency, planning (TD-SCDMA) 598 definition (UMTS) 318
definition (WiMAX) 669
histogram
G PN offsets (CDMA) 496
Geo tab 27 viewing coverage prediction (CDMA) 462
global scaling factor (CDMA) 520 histogram, scrambling code 380, 615
global scaling factor (GSM) 229 histogram, viewing coverage prediction (GSM) 204
global scaling factor (TD-SCDMA) 640 histogram, viewing coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 575
global scaling factor (UMTS) 405 histogram, viewing coverage prediction (UMTS) 344
global scaling factor (WiMAX) 730 histogram, viewing coverage prediction (WiMAX) 691
global transmitter parameters hot spot zone
modifying (CDMA) 532 creating 42
modifying (TD-SCDMA) 651 creating (CDMA) 461
modifying (UMTS) 417 creating (GSM) 202
modifying (WiMAX) 732 creating (TD-SCDMA) 573
global transmitter parameters (CDMA) 531 creating (UMTS) 343
global transmitter parameters (TD-SCDMA) 650 creating (WiMAX) 689
global transmitter parameters (UMTS) 417 explanation 42
global transmitter parameters (WiMAX) 731 explanation (CDMA) 460
860 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Index
explanation (GSM) 202 activating in AS analysis (CDMA) 480

explanation (TD-SCDMA) 573 activating in AS analysis (UMTS) 360, 381, 498
explanation (UMTS) 343 activating in coverage prediction (CDMA) 448
Fit to Map Window 42 activating in coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 562, 566, 567,
Fit to Map Window (CDMA) 461 568, 570, 571, 615, 646
Fit to Map Window (GSM) 202 activating in coverage prediction (UMTS) 331
Fit to Map Window (TD-SCDMA) 574 activating in point analysis (CDMA) 447, 460
Fit to Map Window (UMTS) 343 activating in point analysis (TD-SCDMA) 559, 573
Fit to Map Window (WiMAX) 690 activating in point analysis (UMTS) 330, 343
importing 42 activating in simulation (CDMA) 476, 477
importing (CDMA) 461 activating in simulation (UMTS) 356, 358
importing (GSM) 202 calculating 156, 161
importing (TD-SCDMA) 574 coverage prediction, activating in (GSM) 188
importing (UMTS) 343 coverage prediction, activating in (WiMAX) 680
importing (WiMAX) 690 defining when modelling environment (CDMA) 501
population statistics (CDMA) 462 defining when modelling environment (TD-SCDMA) 624
population statistics (GSM) 203 defining when modelling environment (UMTS) 385
population statistics (TD-SCDMA) 574 defining when modelling environment (WiMAX) 713
population statistics (UMTS) 344 defining when modelling user profile based traffic map
population statistics (WiMAX) 690 (CDMA) 503
using to display coverage prediction report 42 defining when modelling user profile based traffic map
(TD-SCDMA) 625
using to display coverage prediction report (CDMA) 460
defining when modelling user profile based traffic map
using to display coverage prediction report (GSM) 202
(UMTS) 386
using to display coverage prediction report (TD-SCDMA)
defining when modelling user profile based traffic map
573
(WiMAX) 715
using to display coverage prediction report (UMTS) 343
in traffic map (CDMA) 500
HSDPA
in traffic map (TD-SCDMA) 622
activating 315, 544
in traffic map (UMTS) 383
bearer selection, explanation 391
point analysis, activating in (GSM) 187, 202, 258
configuring 315, 544
simulation results (CDMA) 515, 516
coverage prediction 361, 595
simulation results (TD-SCDMA) 635
editing user equipment category 422, 657
simulation results (UMTS) 399
scheduler algorithm 315
indoor losses 156, 161
service, enabling 351, 580
inter-carrier interference
template 82
defining (CDMA) 530
terminal, enabling 353, 582
inter-carrier interference, defining (TD-SCDMA) 649
user equipment category 353, 354, 583
inter-carrier interference, defining (UMTS) 416
HSDPA radio bearer
interfered zones coverage prediction (GSM) 256
defining (TD-SCDMA) 656
interference
defining (UMTS) 419
inter-carrier, defining (CDMA) 530
HSN
inter-carrier, defining (TD-SCDMA) 649
domains, defining (GSM) 288
inter-carrier, defining (UMTS) 416
groups, defining (GSM) 288
Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool, using with (GSM) 268
HSUPA
interference analysis
activating 316
several links (microwave) 832
configuring 316
single link (microwave) 831
coverage prediction 363
interference analysis (microwave) 829
editing user equipment category 422
interference reduction factor
service, enabling 351, 580
table (microwave) 829
template 82
using assistant (microwave) 830
terminal, enabling 353, 582
interference reduction factor (microwave) 829
HSUPA radio bearer
interference zone coverage prediction, PN offset (CDMA) 497
defining (UMTS) 419
interference zone coverage prediction, scrambling code (TD-
SCDMA) 615
interference zone coverage prediction, scrambling code
I
(UMTS) 380
Importing user configuration from an external file 842
interferer reception threshold
indoor coverage
defining (GSM) 304
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 861

A9155 User Manual
IRF, see "interference reduction factor" exporting 47

ITU 370-7 propagation model (Vienna 93) 139, 140 exporting as image 47
ITU 526-5 propagation model 142 measuring distances 39
ITU 529-3 propagation model moving 39
assigning environment formulas 139 printing 58
creating environment formula 140 refreshing display 74
defining default environment formula 139 Map toolbar 77
modifying environment formula 140 master carrier (TD-SCDMA) 598
taking diffraction into account 139 matrix, see "path loss matrix"
ITU maps measurement units, setting 85
atmospheric refraction 809 measuring distances on the map 39
rain zones 812 microwave error performance events 776
vapour density 809 microwave error performance objectives 776
microwave error performance parameters 776
Microwave Link Analysis
J printing 60
JD, see "joint detection" Microwave Link toolbar 77
joint detection factor microwave links 773
defining in site equipment (TD-SCDMA) 656 antenna heights, adjusting 822
antenna heights, adjusting automatically 823
K antenna heights, optimising 822
antenna patterns, copying 780
keyboard shortcuts 78
antenna patterns, printing 781
antenna patterns, smoothing 781
L antenna properties 779
label 35 antenna/equipment compatibility 788
Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 84 antenna/equipment compatibility assistant 788
layers 28 antennas 777
legend antennas, creating 778
adding object type 36 antennas, importing 779
displaying 36 availability objectives 777
displaying Legend window 40 budget 826
printing Legend window 60 budget, calculating for multiple links 828
legend, displaying (CDMA) 459 budget, calculating for single link 826
legend, displaying (GSM) 201 budget, configuring report 827
legend, displaying (TD-SCDMA) 572 cables 786
legend, displaying (UMTS) 342 cables, creating 787
legend, displaying (WiMAX) 688 cables, properties of 787
line of sight area calculation parameters, modifying 827
intersection of areas (microwave) 791 classes, creating 775
studying (microwave) 790 classes, modifying 775
line of sight area (microwave) 790 clearance, displaying 819
link, point-to-multipoint, see point-to-multipoint links equipment 777, 782
Loading data from a database 847 equipment, importing 783
Location Finder error performance events 776
searching by coordinates 75 error performance objectives 776
searching by text property 75 error performance parameters 776
Longley-Rice propagation model 143 existing sites, creating on 798
frequency bands 774
frequency planning 829, 833
M frequency sub-bands 775
macro-diversity gain global parameters 774
clutter class, displaying per (CDMA) 535 global properties 816
clutter class, displaying per (UMTS) 423 global properties of simple links 793
manufacturers table interference analysis 829
microwave links 777 interference on a single link, analysing 831
map interference on several links, analysing 832
centring on a selected object 39 interference reduction factor 829
862 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Index
LOS between sites, intersection 791 spatial multiplexing (WiMAX) 738

LOS between sites, studying 790 spatial multiplexing gains (WiMAX) 739
manufacturers table 777 Min Ec/Nt (UL) (CDMA) 470
multi-hop links, mapping simple links to 802 mobility type
multi-hop, creating 800 creating (CDMA) 470
passive repeater 798 creating (GSM) 303
passive repeater, creating (microwave) 798 creating (TD-SCDMA) 582
passive repeater, inserting (microwave) 799 creating (UMTS) 352
passive repeater, properties (microwave) 799 creating (WiMAX) 697
performance objectives 775, 825 definition (CDMA) 498
point-to-multipoint link 803 definition (GSM) 220
point-to-multipoint links, mapping links to 805 definition (TD-SCDMA) 621
profile analysis 818 definition (UMTS) 382
propagation model 814 definition (WiMAX) 710
quality objectives 776 modelling (GSM) 302
radio equipment, assigning 787 modifying (CDMA) 470
rain maps 807 modifying (GSM) 303
reliability analysis 825 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 582
required margins, calculating 825 modifying (UMTS) 352
restricting sites studied 817 modifying (WiMAX) 697
semi-automatic channel search 833 parameters used in predictions (CDMA) 470
simple link, creating 792 parameters used in predictions (TD-SCDMA) 581
simple link, deleting 795 parameters used in predictions (UMTS) 352
simple link, setting as active 795 mobility types table
simple links 789 displaying (GSM) 303
single antenna patterns, editing 779 Modules tab 27
site parity 834 Monte-Carlo-based user distribution (CDMA) 505
site parity, creating a report on 834 Monte-Carlo-based user distribution (TD-SCDMA) 628
site parity, displaying on the map 834 Monte-Carlo-based user distribution (UMTS) 389
spectrum analyser 833 MS Access, connecting to 87
studying LOS between sites 790 MUD, see "multi-user detection"
template field, adding 797 multi-band network, creating (WiMAX) 674
template field, deleting 797 multi-band transmitters
template field, modifying 797 modelling (GSM) 299
template properties 797 multi-carrier network (CDMA) 431
template, creating 796 multi-carrier network (TD-SCDMA) 543
template, deleting 798 multi-carrier network (UMTS) 314
terrain profile between sites, intersection 791 multi-hop links 800
transceiver equipment 782 adding links to 802
transceiver equipment, creating 782 creating 800
transceiver equipment, properties of 783 deleting link 803
trunk types 785 global properties 801
trunk types, creating 786 links, mapping to 802
trunk types, properties of 786 properties 801, 802
waveguides 786 reliability analysis 828
waveguides, creating 787 multipoint link, see point-to-multipoint link
waveguides, properties of 787 multi-service traffic data (GSM) 301
workflow 773 multi-user detection factor
Microwave Propagation Model defining in site equipment (CDMA) 533
clutter categories 816 defining in site equipment (UMTS) 420
defining parameters 814 defining in terminals (TD-SCDMA) 583
microwave radio links defining in terminals (UMTS) 353
template 82 Multi-user projects Overview 839
MIMO mult-user environment 85
adaptive MIMO switch (WiMAX) 738
defining configurations (WiMAX) 739
number of antennas, defining (WiMAX) 666 N
space-time transmit diversity (WiMAX) 738 neighbours
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 863

A9155 User Manual
allocating automatically (CDMA) 485 deleting using Neighbours table (WiMAX) 707
allocating automatically (GSM) 211 displaying (CDMA) 488
allocating automatically (TD-SCDMA) 601 displaying (GSM) 214
allocating automatically (UMTS) 367 displaying (TD-SCDMA) 605
allocating on the map (CDMA) 490 displaying (UMTS) 370
allocating on the map (GSM) 216 displaying (WiMAX) 708
allocating on the map (TD-SCDMA) 607 displaying coverage (CDMA) 489
allocating on the map (UMTS) 372 displaying coverage (TD-SCDMA) 605
allocating on the map (WiMAX) 707 displaying coverage (UMTS) 371
allocating per cell (CDMA) 489 displaying coverage (WiMAX) 709
allocating per cell (TD-SCDMA) 606 displaying coverage of (GSM) 214
allocating per cell (UMTS) 371 exceptional pairs of, defining (CDMA) 484
allocating per cell (WiMAX) 706 exceptional pairs of, defining (GSM) 211
allocating per transmitter (GSM) 215 exporting (CDMA) 492
allocating using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (CD- exporting (GSM) 219
MA) 489 exporting (TD-SCDMA) 609
allocating using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (TD- exporting (UMTS) 374
SCDMA) 606 exporting (WiMAX) 709
allocating using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties importing (CDMA) 484
(UMTS) 371
importing (GSM) 211
allocating using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties
importing (TD-SCDMA) 606
(WiMAX) 706
importing (UMTS) 366
allocating using Intra-Technology Neighbours tab of Trans-
mitter Properties (GSM) 215 importing (WiMAX) 708
allocating using Neighbours table (CDMA) 490 possible (CDMA) 484
allocating using Neighbours table (GSM) 216 possible (GSM) 210
allocating using Neighbours table (TD-SCDMA) 607 possible (TD-SCDMA) 600
allocating using Neighbours table (UMTS) 372 possible (UMTS) 366
allocating using Neighbours table (WiMAX) 707 possible (WiMAX) 706
audit of allocation (CDMA) 491 network capacity
audit of allocation (GSM) 218 calculating (TD-SCDMA) 617
audit of allocation (TD-SCDMA) 608 dimensioning (TD-SCDMA) 618
audit of allocation (UMTS) 373 displaying network load on the map (TD-SCDMA) 620
defining exceptional pairs of (TD-SCDMA) 601 displaying on the map (TD-SCDMA) 617, 619
defining exceptional pairs of (UMTS) 366 network, creating dual-band (TD-SCDMA) 552
deleting on the map (CDMA) 490 network, creating dual-band (UMTS) 324
deleting on the map (GSM) 216 network, creating multi-band (WiMAX) 674
deleting on the map (TD-SCDMA) 607 N-frequency mode (TD-SCDMA)
deleting on the map (UMTS) 372 carrier types 598
deleting on the map (WiMAX) 707 definition 598
deleting per cell (CDMA) 489 setting up 599
deleting per cell (TD-SCDMA) 606 non-symmetric neighbours, displaying (CDMA) 488
deleting per cell (UMTS) 371 non-symmetric neighbours, displaying (GSM) 214
deleting per cell (WiMAX) 706 non-symmetric neighbours, displaying (TD-SCDMA) 605
deleting per transmitter (GSM) 215 non-symmetric neighbours, displaying (UMTS) 370
deleting using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (CDMA) non-symmetric neighbours, displaying (WiMAX) 708
489
deleting using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (TD-
SCDMA) 606 O
deleting using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (UMTS) objects
371 changing transparency 35
deleting using Cells tab of Transmitter Properties (WiMAX) deleting 29
706 displaying 28
deleting using Intra-Technology Neighbours tab of Trans- displaying properties 29
mitter Properties (GSM) 215 grouping 61
deleting using Neighbours table (CDMA) 490 grouping by a property 62
deleting using Neighbours table (GSM) 216 grouping by several properties 63
deleting using Neighbours table (TD-SCDMA) 607 grouping, examples 63
deleting using Neighbours table (UMTS) 372 hiding 28
864 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Index
label 35 storing (TD-SCDMA) 563

tip text 35 storing (UMTS) 333
visibility scale 35 storing (WiMAX) 681
OFDM, definition (WiMAX) 663 path lost matrix
Okumura-Hata model 137, 138 calculation process (TD-SCDMA) 564
Okumura-Hata propagation model 137, 138 calculation process (UMTS) 337
assigning environment formulas 137 performance objectives report
creating environment formula 138 display (microwave) 826
defining default environment formula 137 permutation zone
modifying environment formula 138 creating (WiMAX) 733
taking diffraction into account 137 permutation zone (WiMAX) 733
Operating principles 839 pilot
Oracle database 840, 844 minimum RSCP threshold, defining (CDMA) 472
Oracle, connecting to 87 minimum RSCP threshold, defining (TD-SCDMA) 583
overlapping zones coverage prediction (CDMA) 458 minimum RSCP threshold, defining (UMTS) 354
overlapping zones coverage prediction (GSM) 200 pilot pollution coverage prediction (CDMA) 479
overlapping zones coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 568 pilot pollution coverage prediction (UMTS) 359
overlapping zones coverage prediction (UMTS) 341 pilot reception analysis (Ec/I0) based on test mobile data path
overlapping zones coverage prediction (WiMAX) 686 (CDMA) 527
OVSF codes pilot reception analysis (Ec/I0) based on test mobile data path
calculation of consumption (TD-SCDMA) 629 (UMTS) 413
calculation of consumption (UMTS) 390 pilot signal quality coverage prediction (CDMA) 472
default orthogonality factor (UMTS) 417 pilot signal quality coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 583
maximum number of codes available for HS-PDSCH (TD- pilot signal quality coverage prediction (UMTS) 354
SCDMA) 544 PN offsets
maximum number of codes available for HS-PDSCH audit of plan (CDMA) 495
(UMTS) 315 automatically allocating (CDMA) 493
minimum number of codes available for HS-PDSCH creating domains and groups (CDMA) 492
(UMTS) 315 defining available (CDMA) 492
simulations (UMTS) 393 defining per cell (CDMA) 432, 433
displaying allocation (CDMA) 495
displaying on transmitter (CDMA) 496
P
domain, defining per cell (CDMA) 432, 433
packet throughput per timeslot coverage prediction (GSM) 262
exceptional pairs, defining (CDMA) 493
Page Setup, see "printing"
grouping transmitters by (CDMA) 496
Panoramic window 26, 39
histogram (CDMA) 496
Path loss calculation 135, 136
interference zone coverage prediction (CDMA) 497
Radial 135, 136
manually allocating (CDMA) 494
Systematic 135, 136
reuse distance, defining per cell (CDMA) 432, 433
path loss matrix
using Search Tool with (CDMA) 495
calculation process (CDMA) 454
PN offsets (CDMA) 492
calculation process (GSM) 194
point analysis
calculation process (WiMAX) 682
opening Point Analysis Tool window 155
checking validity 153
shadowing, calculating 156
checking validity (CDMA) 451
starting 155
checking validity (GSM) 191
Point Analysis window
checking validity (TD-SCDMA) 563
active set analysis of simulation (CDMA) 520
checking validity (UMTS) 334
active set analysis of simulation (UMTS) 406
checking validity (WiMAX) 681
AS Analysis tab (CDMA) 480
exporting 154
AS Analysis tab (UMTS) 360
resolution (CDMA) 436
Interference tab (GSM) 257
resolution (GSM) 178, 301
printing 60
resolution (TD-SCDMA) 548
Profile tab (CDMA) 446
resolution (UMTS) 319
Profile tab (GSM) 186
resolution (WiMAX) 671
Profile tab (TD-SCDMA) 559
storing 152
Profile tab (UMTS) 329
storing (CDMA) 450
Profile tab (WiMAX) 677
storing (GSM) 190
Reception tab (CDMA) 460
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 865

A9155 User Manual
Reception tab (GSM) 201 MA) 432

Reception tab (TD-SCDMA) 573 paging power in cells, defining (CDMA) 431
Reception tab (UMTS) 342 pilot power in cells, defining (CDMA) 431
Reception tab (WiMAX) 689 synchro power in cells, defining (CDMA) 431
point-to-multipoint link power control simulation algorithm (CDMA) 505
adding a link 805, 806 power control simulation algorithm (TD-SCDMA) 628
creating 803 power control simulation algorithm (UMTS) 389
mapping links 805 power, defining
properties 804 defining DwPTS power in cells (TD-SCDMA) 543
point-to-multipoint links 803 defining maximum power in cells (TD-SCDMA) 543
adding links 805 defining maximum power in cells (UMTS) 314
antenna, adjusting 806 defining other CCH power in cells (TD-SCDMA) 543
antenna, adjusting with the mouse 807 defining other CCH power in cells (UMTS) 314
creating 803 defining P-CCPCH power in cells (TD-SCDMA) 543
deleting 806 defining pilot power in cells (UMTS) 314
deleting a link from 806 defining SCH power in cells (UMTS) 314
global properties 804 defining UpPTS power (TD-SCDMA) 583
links, adding on the map 806 preamble index (WiMAX) 667
links, mapping to 805 Predictions 157
properties 804 Overview 157
polygon printing
computation zone, using as (GSM) 195 antenna patterns 61
deleting polygon filter 44 antenna patterns (microwave) 781
drawing a polygon filter 41 coverage prediction results (CDMA) 482
focus zone, using as 42 coverage prediction results (GSM) 209
focus zone, using as (CDMA) 461 coverage prediction results (TD-SCDMA) 597
focus zone, using as (GSM) 202 coverage prediction results (UMTS) 364
focus zone, using as (TD-SCDMA) 574 coverage prediction results (WiMAX) 704
focus zone, using as (UMTS) 343 CW Measurement Analysis Tool 60
focus zone, using as (WiMAX) 690 data tables and reports 58
using as computation zone 41 defining print layout 59
using as computation zone (CDMA) 454 docking windows 60
using as computation zone (TD-SCDMA) 564 Legend window 60
using as computation zone (UMTS) 337 map 58
using as computation zone (WiMAX) 682 Microwave Link Analysis 60
using as filter 41, 74 Point Analysis window 60
population statistics print preview 60
including in report (CDMA) 462 profile analysis (microwave) 820
including in report (TD-SCDMA) 574 recommendations 58
including in report (UMTS) 344 Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool 60
integrable data (CDMA) 462 printing zone
integrable data (GSM) 203 drawing 45, 59, 482
integrable data (TD-SCDMA) 574 Profile 135, 136
integrable data (UMTS) 344 Radial extraction 135, 136
report, including in (GSM) 203 Systematic extraction 135, 136
population-based traffic maps (CDMA) 504 profile analysis
population-based traffic maps (GSM) 226 microwave 818
population-based traffic maps (TD-SCDMA) 627 options (microwave) 820
population-based traffic maps (UMTS) 388 printing (microwave) 820
population-based traffic maps (WiMAX) 716 reflections, studying (microwave) 823
possible neighbours, definition (CDMA) 484 space diversity, studying (microwave) 824
possible neighbours, definition (GSM) 210 Values tab (microwave) 821
possible neighbours, definition (TD-SCDMA) 600 viewing (microwave) 819
possible neighbours, definition (UMTS) 366 zooming in (microwave) 820
possible neighbours, definition (WiMAX) 706 projection coordinate system 84
power Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 84
maximum power in cells, defining (CDMA) 431 Universal Transverse Mercator projection 84
maximum power transmitted by EV-DO cells, defining (CD- propagation model
866 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Index
all transmitters, assigning to (GSM) 192 definition (UMTS) 382

all transmitters, assigning to (WiMAX) 675 Radial 135, 136
assigning a default model for predictions 151, 454 radio configuration
assigning to a transmitter 453 definition (CDMA) 498
assigning to a transmitter (TD-SCDMA) 558 radio equipment
assigning to a transmitter (UMTS) 336 assigning (microwave) 787
assigning to all transmitters 151, 452 radio resource management
assigning to all transmitters (TD-SCDMA) 557 calculation of channel element consumption (UMTS) 390
assigning to all transmitters (UMTS) 335 calculation of OVSF code consumption (TD-SCDMA) 629
assigning to group of transmitters 150, 453 calculation of OVSF code consumption (UMTS) 390
assigning to group of transmitters (TD-SCDMA) 558 calculation of resource unit consumption (TD-SCDMA) 629
assigning to group of transmitters (UMTS) 336 channel element consumption per site equipment-termi-
Cost-Hata 138 nal, defining (CDMA) 534
Cost-Hata, diffraction 138 channel element consumption, calculating (CDMA) 506
default model for predictions, assigning (GSM) 194 channel elements on forward link, defining (CDMA) 429
Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) 141 channel elements on reverse link, defining (CDMA) 429
Erceg-Greenstein (SUI), diffraction 141 channel elements, simulations (CDMA) 509
group of transmitters, assigning to (GSM) 193 channel elements, simulations (UMTS) 393
group of transmitters, assigning to (WiMAX) 676 default orthogonality factor (UMTS) 417
ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93) 139, 140 defining channel element consumption per site equipment-
ITU 526-5 142 R99 radio bearer (UMTS) 420
ITU 529-3, diffraction 139 defining channel elements on downlink (UMTS) 312
Longley-Rice 143 defining channel elements on uplink (UMTS) 312
microwave 814 maximum number of OVSF codes available for HS-PD-
SCH (TD-SCDMA) 544
Microwave Propagation Model, clutter categories 816
maximum number of OVSF codes available for HS-PD-
Microwave Propagation Model, defining parameters 814
SCH (UMTS) 315
Okumura-Hata 137, 138
minimum number of OVSF codes available for HS-PDSCH
Okumura-Hata, diffraction 137 (UMTS) 315
signature 149 orthogonality factor, default (CDMA) 531
Standard Propagation Model 131 OVSF codes, simulations (UMTS) 393
Standard Propagation Model, correction factor for hilly re- uplink and downlink channel element consumption (CD-
gions 136 MA) 533
Standard Propagation Model, defining parameters 134 uplink and downlink channel element consumption
Standard Propagation Model, diffraction 133 (UMTS) 420
transmitter, assigning to (GSM) 193 Walsh code consumption, calculating (CDMA) 506
transmitter, assigning to (WiMAX) 676 Walsh codes, simulations (CDMA) 509
WLL 142 radio reverse indicator channel gain (CDMA) 472
propagation model, Standard Propagation Model, recommen- Radio toolbar 76
dations 132 rain maps 807
properties importing 807
changing display 33 properties 808
grouping objects by 62 statistics 808
switching between property dialogues 29 rain zones 812
pseudo noise offset, see "PN offset" 432, 433 receiver
defining height 421, 656
defining height (CDMA) 534
Q
receiver antenna diversity gain, defining (CDMA) 430
QoS Class, defining (WiMAX) 697
receiver antenna diversity gain, defining (TD-SCDMA) 541
quality indicator coverage prediction (CDMA) 477
receiver antenna diversity gain, defining (UMTS) 313
quality indicator coverage prediction (UMTS) 357
receiver antenna diversity gain, defining (WiMAX) 666
quality indicators
reception equipment
defining (WiMAX) 735
creating (TD-SCDMA) 657
quality objectives
creating (UMTS) 421
microwave links 776
creating (WiMAX) 735
modifying (TD-SCDMA) 657
R modifying (UMTS) 421
R99 radio bearer modifying (WiMAX) 735
defining (UMTS) 418 redo 74
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 867

A9155 User Manual
reflections passive repeater (microwave) 798

studying (microwave) 823 passive repeater, creating (microwave) 798
refresh 74 passive repeater, inserting (microwave) 799
from the database 89 passive repeater, properties of (microwave) 799
Refresh Geo Data (GSM) 281 report, displaying a coverage prediction (CDMA) 461
Refresh Geo Data (TD-SCDMA) 645 report, displaying a coverage prediction (GSM) 203
Refresh Geo Data (UMTS) 412 report, displaying a coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 574
reliability analysis (microwave) 825 report, displaying a coverage prediction (UMTS) 343
remote antenna report, displaying a coverage prediction (WiMAX) 690
copying into document (CDMA) 444 reports
copying into document (GSM) 184 printing 58
copying into document (TD-SCDMA) 555 required margins, calculating (microwave) 825
copying into document (UMTS) 327 resolution
defining properties (CDMA) 444 display (CDMA) 448
defining properties (TD-SCDMA) 555 display (GSM) 188
defining properties (UMTS) 327 display (TD-SCDMA) 561
importing (CDMA) 444 display (UMTS) 331
importing (GSM) 184 path loss matrix (CDMA) 436
importing (TD-SCDMA) 555 path loss matrix (GSM) 178, 301
importing (UMTS) 327 path loss matrix (TD-SCDMA) 548
placing on the map (CDMA) 444 path loss matrix (UMTS) 319
placing on the map (GSM) 184 path loss matrix (WiMAX) 671
placing on the map (TD-SCDMA) 555 resource unit
placing on the map (UMTS) 327 calculation of consumption (TD-SCDMA) 629
properties, defining (GSM) 184 reverse link load factor, setting (CDMA) 467
renaming 29 row height
default object names 29 changing 52
repeater RRI, see "radio reverse indicator channel gain"
copying into document (CDMA) 442 RSCP threshold (CDMA) 472
copying into document (GSM) 182 RSCP threshold (TD-SCDMA) 583
copying into document (TD-SCDMA) 553 RSCP threshold (UMTS) 354
copying into document (UMTS) 325 RTT
defining properties (CDMA) 442 carrier type, defining globally (CDMA) 531
defining properties (TD-SCDMA) 553 data rates, available (CDMA) 532
defining properties (UMTS) 325 handoff status coverage prediction (CDMA) 479
definition (CDMA) 440 power control based on, defining globally (CDMA) 531
definition (GSM) 181 power control simulation algorithm (CDMA) 506
definition (TD-SCDMA) 552 service parameters, RTT-specific (CDMA) 468, 469
definition (UMTS) 324 simulation results, cells (CDMA) 513
importing (CDMA) 442 simulation results, mobiles (CDMA) 514
importing (GSM) 182 rulers
importing (TD-SCDMA) 553 displaying 40
importing (UMTS) 325 Running an audit on a database 851
placing on the map (CDMA) 441
placing on the map (GSM) 182
placing on the map (TD-SCDMA) 552 S
placing on the map (UMTS) 324 scale level, choosing 38
properties, defining (GSM) 182 scheduler
repeater equipment choosing the HSDPA scheduler algorithm 315
creating (CDMA) 441 explanation of scheduling technique (UMTS) 391
creating (GSM) 181 scrambling codes
creating (TD-SCDMA) 552 audit of plan (TD-SCDMA) 613
creating (UMTS) 324 audit of plan (UMTS) 378
modifying (CDMA) 441 automatically allocating (TD-SCDMA) 611
modifying (GSM) 181 automatically allocating (UMTS) 376
modifying (TD-SCDMA) 552 creating domains and groups (TD-SCDMA) 610
modifying (UMTS) 324 creating domains and groups (UMTS) 375
repeaters defining available (TD-SCDMA) 610
868 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Index
defining available (UMTS) 375 parameters used in predictions (UMTS) 351

defining exceptional pairs (TD-SCDMA) 610 parameters used in predictions (WiMAX) 696
defining exceptional pairs (UMTS) 375 setting priority (TD-SCDMA) 580
defining format (TD-SCDMA) 609 setting priority (UMTS) 352
defining format (UMTS) 374 service area (C/I) coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 586
displaying allocation (TD-SCDMA) 613 service area (Eb/Nt) coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 586
displaying allocation (UMTS) 378 service area (Eb/Nt) downlink based on test mobile data path
displaying on transmitter (TD-SCDMA) 614 (CDMA) 527
displaying on transmitter (UMTS) 379 service area (Eb/Nt) downlink based on test mobile data path
grouping transmitters by (TD-SCDMA) 614 (UMTS) 413
grouping transmitters by (UMTS) 379 service area (Eb/Nt) downlink or uplink coverage prediction
(CDMA) 474
histogram (TD-SCDMA) 615
service area (Eb/Nt) downlink or uplink coverage prediction
histogram (UMTS) 380
(UMTS) 355
interference zone coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 615
service area (Eb/Nt) uplink based on test mobile data path (CD-
interference zone coverage prediction (UMTS) 380 MA) 527
manually allocating (TD-SCDMA) 612 service area (Eb/Nt) uplink based on test mobile data path
manually allocating (UMTS) 377 (UMTS) 413
using Search Tool with (TD-SCDMA) 613 services
using Search Tool with (UMTS) 378 creating (GSM) 302
scrambling codes (TD-SCDMA) 609 definition (GSM) 220
scrambling codes (UMTS) 374 modelling (GSM) 302
Search Tool modifying (GSM) 302
using to display channel reuse (GSM) 272 services table
using to display PN offsets (CDMA) 495 displaying (GSM) 302
using to display scrambling codes (TD-SCDMA) 613 shadowing 156, 161
using to display scrambling codes (UMTS) 378 point analysis, calculating in 156
Search toolbar 77 shadowing (CDMA) 531, 534
searching for map objects 74, 75 shadowing (GSM) 304
secondary antenna, assigning (CDMA) 431 shadowing (TD-SCDMA) 658
secondary antenna, assigning (GSM) 169 shadowing (UMTS) 417, 423
secondary antenna, assigning (TD-SCDMA) 543 shadowing (WiMAX) 740
secondary antenna, assigning (UMTS) 313 shadowing margin
secondary antenna, assigning (WiMAX) 666 clutter class, displaying per (CDMA) 535
Sector-to-Sector Interference Tool clutter class, displaying per (GSM) 305
using to study interference (GSM) 268 clutter class, displaying per (TD-SCDMA) 658
separation matrix, see "separation rules" clutter class, displaying per (UMTS) 423
service clutter class, displaying per (WiMAX) 741
activating soft handover (UMTS) 352 Sharing path loss matrices between users 851
creating (CDMA) 468 signal level coverage
creating (TD-SCDMA) 580 single station (CDMA) 447
creating (UMTS) 351 single station (GSM) 187
creating (WiMAX) 697 single station (TD-SCDMA) 561
definition (CDMA) 498 single station (UMTS) 330
definition (TD-SCDMA) 621 signal level coverage prediction
definition (UMTS) 382 single station (WiMAX) 679
definition (WiMAX) 710 signal level coverage prediction (CDMA) 455
displaying traffic distribution by (CDMA) 511 signal level coverage prediction (GSM) 196
displaying traffic distribution by (TD-SCDMA) 632 signal level coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 566, 569, 571
displaying traffic distribution by (UMTS) 395 signal level coverage prediction (UMTS) 338
displaying traffic distribution by (WiMAX) 725 signal level coverage prediction (WiMAX) 683
HSDPA, enabling 351, 580 simulation
HSUPA, enabling 351, 580 active set per user, displaying (CDMA) 512
modifying (CDMA) 468 adding to a group (CDMA) 518, 519
modifying (TD-SCDMA) 580 adding to a group (TD-SCDMA) 638
modifying (UMTS) 351 adding to a group (UMTS) 404
modifying (WiMAX) 697 average results of group (CDMA) 516
parameters used in predictions (CDMA) 468 average results of group (TD-SCDMA) 636
parameters used in predictions (TD-SCDMA) 580 average results of group (UMTS) 401
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 869

A9155 User Manual
cell load values, updating (WiMAX) 730 definition (TD-SCDMA) 539

coverage predictions, using results for (CDMA) 521 definition (UMTS) 310
creating (CDMA) 508 definition (WiMAX) 663
creating (TD-SCDMA) 630 modifying (CDMA) 433
creating (UMTS) 392 modifying (GSM) 174
creating (WiMAX) 723 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 545
displaying active set per user (TD-SCDMA) 633 modifying (UMTS) 316
displaying active set per user (UMTS) 396 modifying (WiMAX) 668
displaying results with tooltips (WiMAX) 728 moving on the map 31
duplicating (CDMA) 519, 520 moving to a higher location 31
duplicating (TD-SCDMA) 638, 640 parameters (CDMA) 428
duplicating (UMTS) 404, 405 parameters (GSM) 167
estimating a traffic increase (TD-SCDMA) 640 parameters (TD-SCDMA) 540
estimating a traffic increase (UMTS) 405 parameters (UMTS) 311
estimating a traffic increase (WiMAX) 730 parameters (WiMAX) 664
generator initialisation number (CDMA) 518, 519 properties, accessing from the Explorer window 29
generator initialisation number (TD-SCDMA) 638, 639 properties, accessing from the map 29
generator initialisation number (UMTS) 404, 405 site equipment
global scaling factor (CDMA) 520 creating (CDMA) 533
global scaling factor (TD-SCDMA) 640 creating (TD-SCDMA) 656
global scaling factor (UMTS) 405 creating (UMTS) 420
global scaling factor (WiMAX) 730 defining channel element consumption per R99 radio bear-
maximum number of EV-DO channel elements per carrier er(UMTS) 420
(CDMA) 512 defining channel element consumption per terminal (CD-
number of EV-DO channel elements due to SHO overhead MA) 534
(CDMA) 513 max EV-DO channel elements per carrier (CDMA) 429
power control algorithm (CDMA) 505 site parity, microwave link 834
power control algorithm (TD-SCDMA) 628 creating a report 834
power control algorithm (UMTS) 389 displaying on the map 834
replaying (CDMA) 518, 519 sites
replaying (TD-SCDMA) 638 microwave link, creating on 798
replaying (UMTS) 404 slave carrier (TD-SCDMA) 598
results of single (CDMA) 512 slow fading, see "shadowing"
results of single (TD-SCDMA) 633 smart antenna
results of single (UMTS) 396 assigning (WiMAX) 666
results of single (WiMAX) 728 creating (WiMAX) 737
traffic increase, estimating (CDMA) 520 smart antennas
traffic simulation algorithm (WiMAX) 722 3rd party modelling (TD-SCDMA) 654
updating cell values with results (CDMA) 518 adaptive beam modelling (TD-SCDMA) 654
updating cell values with results (TD-SCDMA) 637 creating grid of beams (GOB) (TD-SCDMA) 652
updating cell values with results (UMTS) 403 equipment (TD-SCDMA) 654
using results for coverage predictions (TD-SCDMA) 640 grid of beams (GOB) import format (TD-SCDMA) 653
using results for coverage predictions (UMTS) 406 grid of beams (GOB) modelling (TD-SCDMA) 652
simulation results importing grid of beams (GOB) (TD-SCDMA) 653
EV-DO cells (CDMA) 514 modelling (TD-SCDMA) 652
EV-DO mobiles (CDMA) 515 statistical modelling (TD-SCDMA) 654
EV-DO, average and standard deviation cells (CDMA) 517 snapshot, definition (CDMA) 498
RTT cells (CDMA) 513 snapshot, definition (TD-SCDMA) 616
RTT mobiles (CDMA) 514 snapshot, definition (UMTS) 381
RTT, average and standard deviation cells (CDMA) 517 snapshot, definition (WiMAX) 710
site SOFDMA, definition (WiMAX) 663
creating (CDMA) 433 soft handoff
creating (GSM) 174 modelling on the uplink (CDMA) 531
creating (TD-SCDMA) 545 soft handover
creating (UMTS) 316 activating per service (UMTS) 352
creating (WiMAX) 668 modelling on the downlink (UMTS) 401
definition (CDMA) 427 modelling on the uplink (UMTS) 352, 401, 417
definition (GSM) 166 Solving a conflict on a deleted record 850
870 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Index
Solving a conflict on a modified record 848 parameters (GSM) 170

sorting subfolders
sorting tables by one column 65 creating 73
sorting tables by several columns 65 subscriber database (WiMAX) 718
with subfolders 73 subscriber list
space diversity adding subscribers with the mouse (WiMAX) 720
studying (microwave) 824 calculations (WiMAX) 721
spectrum analyser (microwave) 833 creating (WiMAX) 718
SPM Parameters tab window 135, 136 importing (WiMAX) 720
standalone carrier (TD-SCDMA) 598 Supported databases Overview 843
Standard Propagation Model 131, 135, 136 symmetric neighbours, displaying (CDMA) 488
calculating diffraction 133 symmetric neighbours, displaying (GSM) 214
correction factor for hilly regions 136 symmetric neighbours, displaying (TD-SCDMA) 605
defining parameters 134 symmetric neighbours, displaying (UMTS) 370
recommendations 132 symmetric neighbours, displaying (WiMAX) 708
sample values for constants 133
typical values for losses per clutter class 134
Standard toolbar 76 T
Starting A9155 from the command line 841 table columns
station template formatting 52
creating (CDMA) 435 tables, see "data tables"
creating (GSM) 177 TD-SCDMA
creating (TD-SCDMA) 547 template 82
creating (UMTS) 318 template
creating (WiMAX) 670 coverage prediction, using as 160
creating base station (CDMA) 434 templates 81
creating base station (TD-SCDMA) 546 CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO 82
creating base station (UMTS) 317 creating (microwave) 796
creating base station (WiMAX) 669 deleting (microwave) 798
creating base station from (GSM) 176 field, adding (microwave) 797
deleting (CDMA) 439 field, deleting (microwave) 797
deleting (GSM) 179 field, modifying (microwave) 797
deleting (TD-SCDMA) 550 GSM/GPRS/EGPRS 81
deleting (UMTS) 322 IS-95 cdmaOne 82
deleting (WiMAX) 673 microwave radio links 82
modifying (CDMA) 435 properties (microwave) 797
modifying (GSM) 177 TD-SCDMA 82
modifying (TD-SCDMA) 547 UMTS HSDPA HSUPA 82
modifying (UMTS) 318 WiMAX 82
modifying (WiMAX) 670 terminal
modifying a field (CDMA) 439 creating (CDMA) 471
modifying a field (GSM) 179 creating (GSM) 303
modifying a field (TD-SCDMA) 550 creating (TD-SCDMA) 582
modifying a field (UMTS) 321 creating (UMTS) 353
modifying a field (WiMAX) 672 creating (WiMAX) 698
multi-band, creating (GSM) 300 defining EV-DO Rev. 0-specific options (CDMA) 472
statistical smart antenna model (TD-SCDMA) 654 defining EV-DO Rev. A-specific options (CDMA) 472
statistics, viewing coverage prediction (CDMA) 462 definition (CDMA) 498
statistics, viewing coverage prediction (GSM) 204 definition (GSM) 220
statistics, viewing coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 575 definition (TD-SCDMA) 621
statistics, viewing coverage prediction (UMTS) 344 definition (UMTS) 382
statistics, viewing coverage prediction (WiMAX) 691 definition (WiMAX) 710
status bar HSDPA, enabling 353, 582
information displayed 76 HSUPA, terminal 353, 582
study, see "coverage prediction" modelling (GSM) 303
subcell modifying (CDMA) 471
definition (GSM) 170 modifying (GSM) 303
modifying (GSM) 175 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 582
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 871

A9155 User Manual
modifying (UMTS) 353 timeslot configurations

modifying (WiMAX) 698 creating (GSM) 298
parameters used in predictions (CDMA) 471 modifying (GSM) 298
parameters used in predictions (TD-SCDMA) 582 tip text 35
parameters used in predictions (UMTS) 353 TMA, assigning (TD-SCDMA) 541
parameters used in predictions (WiMAX) 697 TMS, assigning (CDMA) 430
terminals table TMS, assigning (GSM) 168
displaying (GSM) 304 TMS, assigning (UMTS) 313
terrain profile (microwave) 791 TMS, assigning (WiMAX) 665
Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool tool tips, see "tip text"
printing 60 toolbar
test mobile data path icons 76
analysing variations 414, 647 Map 77
analysing variations (CDMA) 528 Microwave Link 77
analysing variations (GSM) 283 Radio 76
coverage by C/I, using for (GSM) 282 Search 77
coverage by signal level, using for (GSM) 282 Standard 76
coverage prediction, using in (GSM) 281 Vector Edition 77
extracting a field for a transmitter (CDMA) 528 tooltips
extracting a field for a transmitter (GSM) 283 coverage prediction results, displaying (GSM) 201
extracting a field for a transmitter (TD-SCDMA) 647 displaying coverage prediction results (CDMA) 460
extracting a field for a transmitter (UMTS) 413 displaying coverage prediction results (TD-SCDMA) 572
filtering out points (CDMA) 525 displaying coverage prediction results (UMTS) 342
filtering out points (GSM) 280 displaying coverage prediction results (WiMAX) 688
filtering out points (TD-SCDMA) 644 displaying simulation results with (WiMAX) 728
filtering out points (UMTS) 411 total noise on downlink, see "downlink total noise"
importing (CDMA) 522 traffic capture
importing (GSM) 277 global scaling factor (GSM) 229
importing (TD-SCDMA) 641 traffic increase, estimating a (GSM) 229
importing (UMTS) 407 traffic channel coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 589
Refresh Geo Data (GSM) 281 traffic distribution
Refresh Geo Data (TD-SCDMA) 645 creating, see "simulation"
Refresh Geo Data (UMTS) 412 displaying by activity status (WiMAX) 725
using for P-CCPCH (Eb/Nt) reception analysis (TD-SCD- displaying by connection status (CDMA) 511
MA) 646 displaying by connection status (TD-SCDMA) 632
using for pilot reception analysis (Ec/I0) (CDMA) 527 displaying by connection status (UMTS) 395
using for pilot reception analysis (Ec/I0) (UMTS) 413 displaying by handoff status (CDMA) 510
using for service area (Eb/Nt) downlink (CDMA) 527 displaying by handover status (TD-SCDMA) 632
using for service area (Eb/Nt) downlink (TD-SCDMA) 646 displaying by handover status (UMTS) 394
using for service area (Eb/Nt) downlink (UMTS) 413 displaying by number of used subchannels in uplink
using for service area (Eb/Nt) uplink (CDMA) 527 (WiMAX) 727
using for service area (Eb/Nt) uplink (TD-SCDMA) 646 displaying by service (CDMA) 511
using for service area (Eb/Nt) uplink (UMTS) 413 displaying by service (TD-SCDMA) 632
using in coverage prediction (CDMA) 527 displaying by service (UMTS) 395
using in coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 646 displaying by service (WiMAX) 725
using in coverage prediction (UMTS) 412 displaying by throughput (WiMAX) 726
Test Mobile Data window displaying by uplink transmission power (WiMAX) 727
exporting (CDMA) 530 traffic increase, estimating (CDMA) 520
exporting (GSM) 285 traffic increase, estimating (GSM) 229
exporting (TD-SCDMA) 649 traffic increase, estimating (TD-SCDMA) 640
exporting (UMTS) 415 traffic increase, estimating (UMTS) 405
printing (CDMA) 530 traffic increase, estimating (WiMAX) 730
printing (GSM) 285 traffic load, setting (WiMAX) 696
printing (TD-SCDMA) 649 traffic map
printing (UMTS) 415 cumulated traffic, exporting (CDMA) 505
throughput cumulated traffic, exporting (GSM) 226
displaying traffic distribution by (WiMAX) 726 cumulated traffic, exporting (WiMAX) 717
for all subscribers of a list (WiMAX) 741 data sources (CDMA) 498
872 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

Index
data sources (GSM) 220 transmitter

data sources (TD-SCDMA) 621 calculating network capacity (TD-SCDMA) 617
data sources (UMTS) 382 coverage prediction by transmitter (CDMA) 457
data sources (WiMAX) 710 coverage prediction by transmitter (GSM) 197, 198, 199
environment class-based, creating (CDMA) 503 coverage prediction by transmitter (TD-SCDMA) 567
environment class-based, creating (GSM) 225 coverage prediction by transmitter (UMTS) 340
environment class-based, creating (TD-SCDMA) 626 coverage prediction by transmitter (WiMAX) 685
environment class-based, creating (UMTS) 387 creating (CDMA) 433
environment class-based, creating (WiMAX) 715 creating (GSM) 174
environment class-based, importing (CDMA) 503 creating (TD-SCDMA) 545
environment class-based, importing (GSM) 224 creating (UMTS) 316
environment class-based, importing (TD-SCDMA) 625 creating (WiMAX) 668
environment class-based, importing (UMTS) 386 definition (CDMA) 427, 429
environment class-based, importing (WiMAX) 715 definition (GSM) 166, 167
exporting cumulated traffic (TD-SCDMA) 628 definition (TD-SCDMA) 539, 540
exporting cumulated traffic (UMTS) 389 definition (UMTS) 310, 312
importing traffic density map (TD-SCDMA) 627 definition (WiMAX) 663
importing traffic density map (UMTS) 388 displaying scrambling codes (TD-SCDMA) 614
importing user profile based map (TD-SCDMA) 624 displaying scrambling codes (UMTS) 379
importing user profile based map (UMTS) 385 extracting a field from a test mobile data path (CDMA) 528
live data, creating from (CDMA) 499 extracting a field from a test mobile data path (GSM) 283
live data, creating from (GSM) 221 extracting a field from a test mobile data path (TD-SCDMA)
live data, creating from (TD-SCDMA) 622 647
live data, creating from (UMTS) 382 extracting a field from a test mobile data path (UMTS) 413
live data, creating from (WiMAX) 711 frequency allocation, displaying (GSM) 273
marketing-based (CDMA) 500 global parameters (CDMA) 531
marketing-based (GSM) 221 global parameters (TD-SCDMA) 650
marketing-based (TD-SCDMA) 623 global parameters (UMTS) 417
marketing-based (UMTS) 383 global parameters (WiMAX) 731
marketing-based (WiMAX) 712 global properties, modifying (CDMA) 532
statistics on environment-based (CDMA) 503 grouping by frequencies (GSM) 274
statistics on environment-based (GSM) 225 grouping by scrambling codes (TD-SCDMA) 614
statistics on environment-based (TD-SCDMA) 626 grouping by scrambling codes (UMTS) 379
statistics on environment-based (UMTS) 387 modifying (CDMA) 433
statistics on environment-based (WiMAX) 716 modifying (GSM) 174
traffic density map, importing (CDMA) 504 modifying (TD-SCDMA) 545
traffic density map, importing (GSM) 226 modifying (UMTS) 316
traffic density map, importing (WiMAX) 716 modifying global parameters (TD-SCDMA) 651
user profile based map, importing (CDMA) 501 modifying global properties (UMTS) 417
user profile based map, importing (GSM) 223 modifying global properties (WiMAX) 732
user profile based map, importing (WiMAX) 713 network capacity dimensioning (TD-SCDMA) 618
traffic maps PN offsets, displaying (CDMA) 496
converting 2G (CDMA) 505 PN offsets, grouping by (CDMA) 496
converting 2G (GSM) 226 setting as active (CDMA) 455
converting 2G (TD-SCDMA) 627 setting as active (GSM) 195
converting 2G (UMTS) 388 setting as active (TD-SCDMA) 565
converting 2G (WiMAX) 717 setting as active (UMTS) 337
population-based (CDMA) 504 setting as active (WiMAX) 683
population-based (GSM) 226 transmitters
population-based (TD-SCDMA) 627 automatic display type 34
population-based (UMTS) 388 transparency, changing 35
population-based (WiMAX) 716 trunk types, microwave 785
traffic quality studies, see "quality studies" creating 786
traffic simulation algorithm (WiMAX) 722 properties of 786
transceiver equipment TRX
microwave 782 creating (GSM) 175
microwave, creating 782 modifying (GSM) 175
properties of (microwave) 783 TRX equipment
3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 873

A9155 User Manual
creating (GSM) 293 modifying (WiMAX) 712

importing (GSM) 293 traffic map based on, importing (WiMAX) 713
TRX equipment (GSM) 293 user profiles
TRX types (GSM) 290 user densities, replacing with (WiMAX) 742
U V
UMTS HSDPA HSUPA vapour density maps 809
template 82 Vector Edition toolbar 77
undo 74 Vienna 93 model 139, 140
Universal Transverse Mercator projection 84 visibility scale 35
uplink load factor, setting (TD-SCDMA) 579
uplink load factor, setting (UMTS) 350
uplink noise rise, setting (WiMAX) 696 W
uplink power control Walsh codes
displaying traffic distribution by (WiMAX) 727 consumption, calculating (CDMA) 506
uplink subchannelisation orthogonality factor, default (CDMA) 531
displaying traffic distribution by (WiMAX) 727 simulations (CDMA) 509
uplink traffic channel coverage prediction (TD-SCDMA) 589 waveguides
user configuration 70 creating (microwave) 787
coverage prediction, exporting 161 waveguides and cables, microwave
creating 71 creating 787
exporting 71 waveguides, microwave 786
importing 71 properties of 787
User configuration file 841, 842 WiMAX 663
user densities cyclic prefix ratio 731
using instead of user profiles (WiMAX) 742 frame duration 731
user distribution (CDMA) 505 glossary 748
user distribution (TD-SCDMA) 628 template 82
user distribution (UMTS) 389 WiMAX radio bearer
user equipment category, HSDPA 353, 354, 583 defining 735
user equipment category, HSDPA, editing 422, 657 definition 710
user equipment category, HSUPA, editing 422 WiMAX, definition 663
user profile windows
creating (CDMA) 500 cascading 26
creating (GSM) 222 docking 26
creating (TD-SCDMA) 623 floating 26
creating (UMTS) 384 wireless local loop propagation model 142
creating (WiMAX) 712 WLL (Wireless Local Loop) propagation model 142
importing traffic map based on (CDMA) 501
importing traffic map based on (GSM) 223 Z
importing traffic map based on (TD-SCDMA) 624
zooming
importing traffic map based on (UMTS) 385
choosing a scale 38
modifying (CDMA) 500
in and out on the map 38
modifying (GSM) 222
in on a specific area 38
modifying (TD-SCDMA) 623
previous zoom levels 38
modifying (UMTS) 384
profile analysis (microwave) 820
874 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

User Manual
Release V6.6
Alcatel-Lucent Romania 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA
Gh. LAZAR, no. 9 October 2007
300081 Timisoara, Romania
A9155 User Support:
We are always interested in meeting our customers needs, in continuously improving our software and giving
you the support you need in order to successfully master your network planning.
If you encounter any problems with the A9155-software, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent hotline support (available dur-
ing Romanian working days from 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. CET):
Tel: +40 256 303 135

Fax: +40 256 303413
e-mail: radiotools.support@alcatel-lucent.ro
Please help us in helping you by being as precise as possible in describing your specific problems. Thank you.

A9155 - V6.6 - User Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

A9155 - V6.6 - User Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

User Manual

Copyright 2007 by Alcatel-Lucent Romania.

Alcatel-Lucent Romania acknowledges all trademarks mentioned in this document.

Restrictions to the License

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 3

4 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

6 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

1 The Working Environment .................................................................................................... 25

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 7

1.6 Printing in A9155 ...........................................................................................................................57

2 Starting an A9155 Project ......................................................................................................81

8 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

3 Managing Geographic Data ................................................................................................ 97

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 9

3.16.2 Updating the Source File.................................................................................................................126

4 Managing Calculations in A9155 ...................................................................................131

10 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

4.4.1.3 Moving the Receiver on the Map .............................................................................................. 156

5 GSM/GPRS/EDGE Networks .......................................................................................... 165

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 11

5.3.3.4 Estimating a Traffic Increase .....................................................................................................229

12 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

5.7.6.4 Displaying Coding Scheme Throughput Graphs ...................................................................... 297

6 UMTS HSPA Networks ......................................................................................................... 309

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 13

6.2.12.5 Checking the Consistency of the Scrambling Code Plan ..........................................................378

7 cdmaOne/CDMA2000 Networks ....................................................................................427

14 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

7.1.5.1 Creating and Modifying Repeater Equipment........................................................................... 441

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 15

8 TD-SCDMA Networks .............................................................................................................539

16 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

8.1.12.6 Checking the Consistency of the Neighbour Allocation Plan.................................................... 608

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 17

9 WiMAX BWA Networks..........................................................................................................663

18 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

10 Co-planning Features ............................................................................................................. 753

11 Importing and Exporting ALCATEL-Specific Data .......................................... 767

12 Microwave Link Project Management ....................................................................... 773

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 19

12.6.3 Multi-hop Links ................................................................................................................................800

13 Multi-user Features ...................................................................................................................839

20 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

13.3.2 Exporting a Project in a MS SQL Server Database........................................................................ 844

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 21

22 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

1 The Working Environment

1.1 The A9155 Work Area

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 25

Document window (map)

Point Analysis window

Figure 1.1: A9155 user interface

1.1.1 Working with Document Windows

1.1.2 Docking or Floating an A9155 Window

26 3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA

1.2 The Explorer Window

1.2.1 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs

3DF 01955 6680 PCZZA 27

- The AFP models available in your A9155 installation.

1.2.2 Navigating in the Explorer Window

1.2.3 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer

To hide an object on the map:

1.2.4 Working with Layers Using the Explorer